System Administrator's Guide Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Administrators En US
Red_Hat_Enterprise_Linux-7-System_Administrators_Guide-en-US
Red_Hat_Enterprise_Linux-7-System_Administrators_Guide-en-US
User Manual: Pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 601
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7
System Administrator's Guide
Deployment, Configuration, and Administration of Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7
Last Updated: 2017-09-25
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 System Administrator's Guide
Deployment, Configuration, and Administration of Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7
Marie Doleželová
Red Hat Customer Content Services
mdolezel@redhat.com
Maxim Svistunov
Red Hat Customer Content Services
Stephen Wadeley
Red Hat Customer Content Services
Tomáš Čapek
Red Hat Customer Content Services
Jaromír Hradílek
Red Hat Customer Content Services
Douglas Silas
Red Hat Customer Content Services
Jana Heves
Red Hat Customer Content Services
Petr Kovář
Red Hat Customer Content Services
Peter Ondrejka
Red Hat Customer Content Services
Petr Bokoč
Red Hat Customer Content Services
Martin Prpič
Red Hat Product Security
Eliška Slobodová
Red Hat Customer Content Services
Eva Kopalová
Red Hat Customer Content Services
Miroslav Svoboda
Red Hat Customer Content Services
David O'Brien
Red HatNotice
Customer Content Services
Legal
Michael Hideo
Copyright
© 2017 Red Hat, Inc.
Red Hat Customer Content Services
This document is licensed by Red Hat under the Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0
Don Domingo
Unported
License. If you distribute this document, or a modified version of it, you must provide
Red Hat Customer
Content
Services
attribution
to Red Hat,
Inc. and
provide a link to the original. If the document is modified, all Red
Hat trademarks must be removed.
John Ha
Hat Customer
Content
Services
Red Hat,
as the licensor
of this
document, waives the right to enforce, and agrees not to assert,
Section 4d of CC-BY-SA to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law.
Red Hat, Red Hat Enterprise Linux, the Shadowman logo, JBoss, OpenShift, Fedora, the Infinity
logo, and RHCE are trademarks of Red Hat, Inc., registered in the United States and other
countries.
Linux ® is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States and other countries.
Java ® is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
XFS ® is a trademark of Silicon Graphics International Corp. or its subsidiaries in the United
States and/or other countries.
MySQL ® is a registered trademark of MySQL AB in the United States, the European Union and
other countries.
Node.js ® is an official trademark of Joyent. Red Hat Software Collections is not formally related
to or endorsed by the official Joyent Node.js open source or commercial project.
The OpenStack ® Word Mark and OpenStack logo are either registered trademarks/service marks
or trademarks/service marks of the OpenStack Foundation, in the United States and other
countries and are used with the OpenStack Foundation's permission. We are not affiliated with,
endorsed or sponsored by the OpenStack Foundation, or the OpenStack community.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Abstract
The System Administrator's Guide documents relevant information regarding the deployment,
configuration, and administration of Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7. It is oriented towards system
administrators with a basic understanding of the system. To expand your expertise, you might
also be interested in the Red Hat System Administration I (RH124) , Red Hat System
Administration II (RH134), Red Hat System Administration III (RH254), or RHCSA Rapid Track
(RH199) training courses. If you want to use Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 with the Linux Containers
functionality, see Product Documentation for Red Hat Enterprise Linux Atomic Host . For an
overview of general Linux Containers concept and their current capabilities implemented in Red
Hat Enterprise Linux 7, see Overview of Containers in Red Hat Systems. The topics related to
containers management and administration are described in the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Atomic
Host 7 Managing Containers guide.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
. . . . . . .I.. .BASIC
PART
. . . . . . .SYSTEM
. . . . . . . . .CONFIGURATION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8. . . . . . . . . . . .
.CHAPTER
. . . . . . . . . . 1.
. .SYSTEM
. . . . . . . . . LOCALE
. . . . . . . . . AND
. . . . . KEYBOARD
. . . . . . . . . . . . .CONFIGURATION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9. . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1. SETTING THE SYSTEM LOCALE
9
1.2. CHANGING THE KEYBOARD LAYOUT
12
1.3. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
13
.CHAPTER
. . . . . . . . . . 2.
. . CONFIGURING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .THE
. . . . .DATE
. . . . . .AND
. . . . .TIME
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
.............
2.1. USING THE TIMEDATECTL COMMAND
15
2.2. USING THE DATE COMMAND
18
2.3. USING THE HWCLOCK COMMAND
20
2.4. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
22
.CHAPTER
. . . . . . . . . . 3.
. . MANAGING
. . . . . . . . . . . . .USERS
. . . . . . . AND
. . . . . GROUPS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
..............
3.1. INTRODUCTION TO USERS AND GROUPS
24
3.2. MANAGING USERS IN A GRAPHICAL ENVIRONMENT
3.3. USING COMMAND-LINE TOOLS
3.4. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
25
27
36
. . . . . . . . . . . 4.
CHAPTER
. . .ACCESS
. . . . . . . . .CONTROL
. . . . . . . . . . LISTS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
..............
4.1. MOUNTING FILE SYSTEMS
4.2. SETTING ACCESS ACLS
38
38
4.3. SETTING DEFAULT ACLS
4.4. RETRIEVING ACLS
40
40
4.5. ARCHIVING FILE SYSTEMS WITH ACLS
4.6. COMPATIBILITY WITH OLDER SYSTEMS
4.7. ACL REFERENCES
41
42
42
.CHAPTER
. . . . . . . . . . 5.
. . GAINING
. . . . . . . . . .PRIVILEGES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
..............
5.1. THE SU COMMAND
43
5.2. THE SUDO COMMAND
44
5.3. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
45
. . . . . . .II.
PART
. . SUBSCRIPTION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AND
. . . . .SUPPORT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
..............
. . . . . . . . . . . 6.
CHAPTER
. . REGISTERING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . THE
. . . . . SYSTEM
. . . . . . . . . AND
. . . . . MANAGING
. . . . . . . . . . . . .SUBSCRIPTIONS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
..............
6.1. REGISTERING THE SYSTEM AND ATTACHING SUBSCRIPTIONS
6.2. MANAGING SOFTWARE REPOSITORIES
6.3. REMOVING SUBSCRIPTIONS
6.4. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
48
49
49
50
. . . . . . . . . . . 7.
CHAPTER
. . ACCESSING
. . . . . . . . . . . . .SUPPORT
. . . . . . . . . . .USING
. . . . . . .THE
. . . . .RED
. . . . HAT
. . . . . SUPPORT
. . . . . . . . . . . TOOL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
.............
7.1. INSTALLING THE RED HAT SUPPORT TOOL
7.2. REGISTERING THE RED HAT SUPPORT TOOL USING THE COMMAND LINE
7.3. USING THE RED HAT SUPPORT TOOL IN INTERACTIVE SHELL MODE
7.4. CONFIGURING THE RED HAT SUPPORT TOOL
51
51
51
51
7.5. OPENING AND UPDATING SUPPORT CASES USING INTERACTIVE MODE
7.6. VIEWING SUPPORT CASES ON THE COMMAND LINE
7.7. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
53
55
55
. . . . . . .III.
PART
. . .INSTALLING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . AND
. . . . . MANAGING
. . . . . . . . . . . . SOFTWARE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
..............
.CHAPTER
. . . . . . . . . . 8.
. . .YUM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
..............
8.1. CHECKING FOR AND UPDATING PACKAGES
57
1
System Administrator's Guide
8.2. WORKING WITH PACKAGES
8.3. WORKING WITH PACKAGE GROUPS
8.4. WORKING WITH TRANSACTION HISTORY
63
72
75
8.5. CONFIGURING YUM AND YUM REPOSITORIES
8.6. YUM PLUG-INS
8.7. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
82
94
97
. . . . . . .IV.
PART
. . .INFRASTRUCTURE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SERVICES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
..............
.CHAPTER
. . . . . . . . . . 9.
. . MANAGING
. . . . . . . . . . . . .SERVICES
. . . . . . . . . . .WITH
. . . . . .SYSTEMD
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
..............
9.1. INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEMD
99
9.2. MANAGING SYSTEM SERVICES
9.3. WORKING WITH SYSTEMD TARGETS
9.4. SHUTTING DOWN, SUSPENDING, AND HIBERNATING THE SYSTEM
9.5. CONTROLLING SYSTEMD ON A REMOTE MACHINE
102
110
115
117
9.6. CREATING AND MODIFYING SYSTEMD UNIT FILES
9.7. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
118
135
.CHAPTER
. . . . . . . . . . 10.
. . . CONFIGURING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A. .SYSTEM
. . . . . . . . .FOR
. . . . .ACCESSIBILITY
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
..............
10.1. CONFIGURING THE BRLTTY SERVICE
137
10.2. SWITCH ON ALWAYS SHOW UNIVERSAL ACCESS MENU
10.3. ENABLING THE FESTIVAL SPEECH SYNTHESIS SYSTEM
141
142
. . . . . . . . . . . 11.
CHAPTER
. . .OPENSSH
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
...............
11.1. THE SSH PROTOCOL
144
11.2. CONFIGURING OPENSSH
11.3. OPENSSH CLIENTS
147
155
11.4. MORE THAN A SECURE SHELL
11.5. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
159
160
. . . . . . . . . . . 12.
CHAPTER
. . . TIGERVNC
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
...............
12.1. VNC SERVER
162
12.2. SHARING AN EXISTING DESKTOP
12.3. VNC VIEWER
166
166
12.4. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
169
. . . . . . .V.
PART
. . SERVERS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
..............
.CHAPTER
. . . . . . . . . . 13.
. . . WEB
. . . . . .SERVERS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
..............
13.1. THE APACHE HTTP SERVER
172
. . . . . . . . . . . 14.
CHAPTER
. . . MAIL
. . . . . . SERVERS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
..............
14.1. EMAIL PROTOCOLS
197
14.2. EMAIL PROGRAM CLASSIFICATIONS
14.3. MAIL TRANSPORT AGENTS
200
201
14.4. MAIL DELIVERY AGENTS
213
14.5. MAIL USER AGENTS
14.6. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
220
222
. . . . . . . . . . . 15.
CHAPTER
. . . FILE
. . . . . AND
. . . . . .PRINT
. . . . . . .SERVERS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
...............
15.1. SAMBA
15.2. FTP
224
237
15.3. PRINT SETTINGS
244
. . . . . . . . . . . 16.
CHAPTER
. . . CONFIGURING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .NTP
. . . . USING
. . . . . . . .THE
. . . . CHRONY
. . . . . . . . . .SUITE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
...............
16.1. INTRODUCTION TO THE CHRONY SUITE
2
263
Table of Contents
16.2. UNDERSTANDING CHRONY AND ITS CONFIGURATION
16.3. USING CHRONY
265
271
16.4. SETTING UP CHRONY FOR DIFFERENT ENVIRONMENTS
16.5. USING CHRONYC
276
277
16.6. CHRONY WITH HW TIMESTAMPING
277
16.7. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
281
.CHAPTER
. . . . . . . . . . 17.
. . . CONFIGURING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .NTP
. . . . USING
. . . . . . . NTPD
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
...............
17.1. INTRODUCTION TO NTP
282
17.2. NTP STRATA
282
17.3. UNDERSTANDING NTP
17.4. UNDERSTANDING THE DRIFT FILE
283
284
17.5. UTC, TIMEZONES, AND DST
17.6. AUTHENTICATION OPTIONS FOR NTP
284
285
17.7. MANAGING THE TIME ON VIRTUAL MACHINES
285
17.8. UNDERSTANDING LEAP SECONDS
17.9. UNDERSTANDING THE NTPD CONFIGURATION FILE
285
286
17.10. UNDERSTANDING THE NTPD SYSCONFIG FILE
17.11. DISABLING CHRONY
287
287
17.12. CHECKING IF THE NTP DAEMON IS INSTALLED
288
17.13. INSTALLING THE NTP DAEMON (NTPD)
17.14. CHECKING THE STATUS OF NTP
288
288
17.15. CONFIGURE THE FIREWALL TO ALLOW INCOMING NTP PACKETS
289
17.16. CONFIGURE NTPDATE SERVERS
17.17. CONFIGURE NTP
289
290
17.18. CONFIGURING THE HARDWARE CLOCK UPDATE
17.19. CONFIGURING CLOCK SOURCES
295
298
17.20. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
298
. . . . . . . . . . . 18.
CHAPTER
. . . CONFIGURING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PTP
. . . . USING
. . . . . . . PTP4L
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
...............
18.1. INTRODUCTION TO PTP
18.2. USING PTP
300
302
18.3. USING PTP WITH MULTIPLE INTERFACES
18.4. SPECIFYING A CONFIGURATION FILE
304
305
18.5. USING THE PTP MANAGEMENT CLIENT
305
18.6. SYNCHRONIZING THE CLOCKS
18.7. VERIFYING TIME SYNCHRONIZATION
18.8. SERVING PTP TIME WITH NTP
306
307
310
18.9. SERVING NTP TIME WITH PTP
310
18.10. SYNCHRONIZE TO PTP OR NTP TIME USING TIMEMASTER
311
18.11. IMPROVING ACCURACY
314
18.12. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
315
. . . . . . .VI.
PART
. . .MONITORING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . AND
. . . . . AUTOMATION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
..............
.CHAPTER
. . . . . . . . . . 19.
. . . SYSTEM
. . . . . . . . . .MONITORING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .TOOLS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
..............
19.1. VIEWING SYSTEM PROCESSES
317
19.2. VIEWING MEMORY USAGE
320
19.3. VIEWING CPU USAGE
322
19.4. VIEWING BLOCK DEVICES AND FILE SYSTEMS
322
19.5. VIEWING HARDWARE INFORMATION
328
19.6. CHECKING FOR HARDWARE ERRORS
19.7. MONITORING PERFORMANCE WITH NET-SNMP
330
331
19.8. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
345
3
System Administrator's Guide
.CHAPTER
. . . . . . . . . . 20.
. . . .OPENLMI
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
...............
20.1. ABOUT OPENLMI
347
20.2. INSTALLING OPENLMI
348
20.3. CONFIGURING SSL CERTIFICATES FOR OPENPEGASUS
350
20.4. USING LMISHELL
354
20.5. USING OPENLMI SCRIPTS
20.6. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
391
392
. . . . . . . . . . . 21.
CHAPTER
. . . VIEWING
. . . . . . . . . .AND
. . . . . MANAGING
. . . . . . . . . . . . LOG
. . . . . FILES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
...............
21.1. LOCATING LOG FILES
393
21.2. BASIC CONFIGURATION OF RSYSLOG
393
21.3. USING THE NEW CONFIGURATION FORMAT
409
21.4. WORKING WITH QUEUES IN RSYSLOG
21.5. CONFIGURING RSYSLOG ON A LOGGING SERVER
411
420
21.6. USING RSYSLOG MODULES
423
21.7. INTERACTION OF RSYSLOG AND JOURNAL
429
21.8. STRUCTURED LOGGING WITH RSYSLOG
430
21.9. DEBUGGING RSYSLOG
433
21.10. USING THE JOURNAL
21.11. MANAGING LOG FILES IN A GRAPHICAL ENVIRONMENT
433
439
21.12. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
444
. . . . . . . . . . . 22.
CHAPTER
. . . .AUTOMATING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SYSTEM
. . . . . . . . .TASKS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
...............
22.1. SCHEDULING A RECURRING JOB USING CRON
446
22.2. SCHEDULING A RECURRING ASYNCHRONOUS JOB USING ANACRON
449
22.3. SCHEDULING A JOB TO RUN AT A SPECIFIC TIME USING AT
22.4. SCHEDULING A JOB TO RUN ON SYSTEM LOAD DROP USING BATCH
450
453
22.5. SCHEDULING A JOB TO RUN ON NEXT BOOT USING A SYSTEMD UNIT FILE
454
22.6. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
456
. . . . . . . . . . . 23.
CHAPTER
. . . .AUTOMATIC
. . . . . . . . . . . . . BUG
. . . . . REPORTING
. . . . . . . . . . . . .TOOL
. . . . . . (ABRT)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
...............
23.1. INTRODUCTION TO ABRT
457
23.2. INSTALLING ABRT AND STARTING ITS SERVICES
23.3. CONFIGURING ABRT
457
459
23.4. DETECTING SOFTWARE PROBLEMS
466
23.5. HANDLING DETECTED PROBLEMS
468
23.6. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
470
. . . . . . . . . . . 24.
CHAPTER
. . . .OPROFILE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
...............
24.1. OVERVIEW OF TOOLS
24.2. USING OPERF
472
474
24.3. CONFIGURING OPROFILE USING LEGACY MODE
476
24.4. STARTING AND STOPPING OPROFILE USING LEGACY MODE
483
24.5. SAVING DATA IN LEGACY MODE
483
24.6. ANALYZING THE DATA
24.7. UNDERSTANDING THE /DEV/OPROFILE/ DIRECTORY
484
489
24.8. EXAMPLE USAGE
489
24.9. OPROFILE SUPPORT FOR JAVA
490
24.10. GRAPHICAL INTERFACE
490
24.11. OPROFILE AND SYSTEMTAP
493
24.12. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
493
. . . . . . .VII.
PART
. . . .KERNEL,
. . . . . . . . . MODULE
. . . . . . . . . .AND
. . . . .DRIVER
. . . . . . . . .CONFIGURATION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
...............
. . . . . . . . . . . 25.
CHAPTER
. . . .WORKING
. . . . . . . . . . .WITH
. . . . . GRUB
. . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
...............
4
Table of Contents
25.1. INTRODUCTION TO GRUB 2
495
25.2. CONFIGURING GRUB 2
496
25.3. MAKING TEMPORARY CHANGES TO A GRUB 2 MENU
496
25.4. MAKING PERSISTENT CHANGES TO A GRUB 2 MENU USING THE GRUBBY TOOL
497
25.5. CUSTOMIZING THE GRUB 2 CONFIGURATION FILE
25.6. PROTECTING GRUB 2 WITH A PASSWORD
499
504
25.7. REINSTALLING GRUB 2
505
25.8. UPGRADING FROM GRUB LEGACY TO GRUB2
506
25.9. GRUB 2 OVER A SERIAL CONSOLE
511
25.10. TERMINAL MENU EDITING DURING BOOT
25.11. UNIFIED EXTENSIBLE FIRMWARE INTERFACE (UEFI) SECURE BOOT
512
518
25.12. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
519
. . . . . . . . . . . 26.
CHAPTER
. . . .MANUALLY
. . . . . . . . . . . . UPGRADING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .THE
. . . . KERNEL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
...............
26.1. OVERVIEW OF KERNEL PACKAGES
520
26.2. PREPARING TO UPGRADE
521
26.3. DOWNLOADING THE UPGRADED KERNEL
522
26.4. PERFORMING THE UPGRADE
26.5. VERIFYING THE INITIAL RAM DISK IMAGE
523
523
26.6. VERIFYING THE BOOT LOADER
527
. . . . . . . . . . . 27.
CHAPTER
. . . .WORKING
. . . . . . . . . . WITH
. . . . . . KERNEL
. . . . . . . . . MODULES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
...............
27.1. LISTING CURRENTLY-LOADED MODULES
528
27.2. DISPLAYING INFORMATION ABOUT A MODULE
529
27.3. LOADING A MODULE
27.4. UNLOADING A MODULE
532
532
27.5. SETTING MODULE PARAMETERS
533
27.6. PERSISTENT MODULE LOADING
535
27.7. INSTALLING MODULES FROM A DRIVER UPDATE DISK
535
27.8. SIGNING KERNEL MODULES FOR SECURE BOOT
27.9. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
537
545
. . . . . . .VIII.
PART
. . . . SYSTEM
. . . . . . . . . .BACKUP
. . . . . . . . . AND
. . . . . RECOVERY
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
...............
. . . . . . . . . . . 28.
CHAPTER
. . . .RELAX-AND-RECOVER
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (REAR)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
...............
28.1. BASIC REAR USAGE
547
28.2. INTEGRATING REAR WITH BACKUP SOFTWARE
553
. . . . . . . . . . . . A.
APPENDIX
. . .RPM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
...............
A.1. RPM DESIGN GOALS
558
A.2. USING RPM
A.3. FINDING AND VERIFYING RPM PACKAGES
559
565
A.4. COMMON EXAMPLES OF RPM USAGE
567
A.5. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
567
. . . . . . . . . . . . B.
APPENDIX
. . .CHOOSING
. . . . . . . . . . . SUITABLE
. . . . . . . . . . . RED
. . . . . HAT
. . . . . PRODUCT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
...............
. . . . . . . . . . . . C.
APPENDIX
. . .RED
. . . . HAT
. . . . . CUSTOMER
. . . . . . . . . . . . .PORTAL
. . . . . . . . .LABS
. . . . . .RELEVANT
. . . . . . . . . . . .TO
. . . SYSTEM
. . . . . . . . . .ADMINISTRATION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
...............
ISCSI HELPER
570
NTP CONFIGURATION
570
SAMBA CONFIGURATION HELPER
VNC CONFIGURATOR
570
570
BRIDGE CONFIGURATION
570
NETWORK BONDING HELPER
570
LVM RAID CALCULATOR
570
5
System Administrator's Guide
NFS HELPER
571
LOAD BALANCER CONFIGURATION TOOL
571
YUM REPOSITORY CONFIGURATION HELPER
571
FILE SYSTEM LAYOUT CALCULATOR
RHEL BACKUP AND RESTORE ASSISTANT
571
571
DNS HELPER
572
AD INTEGRATION HELPER (SAMBA FS - WINBIND)
572
RED HAT ENTERPRISE LINUX UPGRADE HELPER
572
REGISTRATION ASSISTANT
RESCUE MODE ASSISTANT
572
572
KERNEL OOPS ANALYZER
572
KDUMP HELPER
572
SCSI DECODER
572
RED HAT MEMORY ANALYZER
573
MULTIPATH HELPER
MULTIPATH CONFIGURATION VISUALIZER
573
573
RED HAT I/O USAGE VISUALIZER
573
STORAGE / LVM CONFIGURATION VIEWER
573
. . . . . . . . . . . . D.
APPENDIX
. . .REVISION
. . . . . . . . . . HISTORY
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
...............
D.1. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
574
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
INDEX
...............
6
Table of Contents
7
System Administrator's Guide
PART I. BASIC SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
This part covers basic system administration tasks such as keyboard configuration, date and time
configuration, managing users and groups, and gaining privileges.
8
CHAPTER 1. SYSTEM LOCALE AND KEYBOARD CONFIGURATION
CHAPTER 1. SYSTEM LOCALE AND KEYBOARD
CONFIGURATION
The system locale specifies the language settings of system services and user interfaces. The keyboard
layout settings control the layout used on the text console and graphical user interfaces.
These settings can be made by modifying the /etc/locale.conf configuration file or by using the
localectl utility. Also, you can use the graphical user interface to perform the task; for a description of
this method, see Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Installation Guide .
1.1. SETTING THE SYSTEM LOCALE
System-wide locale settings are stored in the /etc/locale.conf file, which is read at early boot by
the systemd daemon. The locale settings configured in /etc/locale.conf are inherited by every
service or user, unless individual programs or individual users override them.
The basic file format of /etc/locale.conf is a newline-separated list of variable assignments. For
example, German locale with English messages in /etc/locale.conf looks as follows:
LANG=de_DE.UTF-8
LC_MESSAGES=C
Here, the LC_MESSAGES option determines the locale used for diagnostic messages written to the
standard error output. To further specify locale settings in /etc/locale.conf, you can use several
other options, the most relevant are summarized in Table 1.1, “Options configurable in
/etc/locale.conf”. See the locale(7) manual page for detailed information on these options. Note
that the LC_ALL option, which represents all possible options, should not be configured in
/etc/locale.conf.
Table 1.1. Options configurable in /etc/locale.conf
Option
Description
LANG
Provides a default value for the system locale.
LC_COLLATE
Changes the behavior of functions which compare
strings in the local alphabet.
LC_CTYPE
Changes the behavior of the character handling and
classification functions and the multibyte character
functions.
LC_NUMERIC
Describes the way numbers are usually printed, with
details such as decimal point versus decimal
comma.
LC_TIME
Changes the display of the current time, 24-hour
versus 12-hour clock.
LC_MESSAGES
Determines the locale used for diagnostic messages
written to the standard error output.
9
System Administrator's Guide
1.1.1. Displaying the Current Status
The localectl command can be used to query and change the system locale and keyboard layout
settings. To show the current settings, use the status option:
localectl status
Example 1.1. Displaying the Current Status
The output of the previous command lists the currently set locale, keyboard layout configured for
the console and for the X11 window system.
~]$ localectl status
System Locale: LANG=en_US.UTF-8
VC Keymap: us
X11 Layout: n/a
1.1.2. Listing Available Locales
To list all locales available for your system, type:
localectl list-locales
Example 1.2. Listing Locales
Imagine you want to select a specific English locale, but you are not sure if it is available on the
system. You can check that by listing all English locales with the following command:
~]$ localectl list-locales | grep en_
en_AG
en_AG.utf8
en_AU
en_AU.iso88591
en_AU.utf8
en_BW
en_BW.iso88591
en_BW.utf8
output truncated
1.1.3. Setting the Locale
To set the default system locale, use the following command as root:
localectl set-locale LANG=locale
Replace locale with the locale name, found with the localectl list-locales command. The above
syntax can also be used to configure parameters from Table 1.1, “Options configurable in
/etc/locale.conf”.
10
CHAPTER 1. SYSTEM LOCALE AND KEYBOARD CONFIGURATION
Example 1.3. Changing the Default Locale
For example, if you want to set British English as your default locale, first find the name of this
locale by using list-locales. Then, as root, type the command in the following form:
~]# localectl set-locale LANG=en_GB.utf8
1.1.4. Making System Locale Settings Permanent when Installing with Kickstart
When Red Hat Enterprise Linux is installed with the Red Hat Kickstart installation method, setting of
the system locales might not be persistent after an upgrade of the operating system.
When the %packages section of the Kickstart file includes the --instLang option, the
_install_langs RPM macro is set to the particular value for this installation, and the set of installed
locales is adjusted accordingly. However, this adjustment affects only this installation, not subsequent
upgrades. If an upgrade reinstalls the glibc package, the entire set of locales is upgraded instead of
only the locales you requested during the installation.
To avoid this, make the choice of locales permanent. You have these options:
If you have not started the Kickstart installation, modify the Kickstart file to include
instructions for setting RPM macros globally by applying this procedure: Procedure 1.1,
“Setting RPM macros during the Kickstart installation”
If you have already installed the system, set RPM macros globally on the system by applying
this procedure: Procedure 1.2, “Setting RPM macros globally”
Procedure 1.1. Setting RPM macros during the Kickstart installation
Modify the %post section of the Kickstart file:
LANG=en_US
echo "%_install_langs $LANG" > /etc/rpm/macros.language-conf
awk '(NF==0amp amp!done){print
"override_install_langs='$LANG'";done=1}{print}' \
< /etc/yum.conf > /etc/yum.conf.new
mv /ec/yum.conf.new /etc/yum.conf
Procedure 1.2. Setting RPM macros globally
1. Create the RPM configuration file at /etc/rpm/macros.language-conf with the following
contents:
%_install_langs LANG
LANG is the value of the instLang option.
2. Update the /etc/yum.conf file with:
override_install_langs=LANG
11
System Administrator's Guide
1.2. CHANGING THE KEYBOARD LAYOUT
The keyboard layout settings enable the user to control the layout used on the text console and
graphical user interfaces.
1.2.1. Displaying the Current Settings
As mentioned before, you can check your current keyboard layout configuration with the following
command:
localectl status
Example 1.4. Displaying the Keyboard Settings
In the following output, you can see the keyboard layout configured for the virtual console and for
the X11 window system.
~]$ localectl status
System Locale: LANG=en_US.utf8
VC Keymap: us
X11 Layout: us
1.2.2. Listing Available Keymaps
To list all available keyboard layouts that can be configured on your system, type:
localectl list-keymaps
Example 1.5. Searching for a Particular Keymap
You can use grep to search the output of the previous command for a specific keymap name. There
are often multiple keymaps compatible with your currently set locale. For example, to find available
Czech keyboard layouts, type:
~]$ localectl list-keymaps | grep cz
cz
cz-cp1250
cz-lat2
cz-lat2-prog
cz-qwerty
cz-us-qwertz
sunt5-cz-us
sunt5-us-cz
1.2.3. Setting the Keymap
To set the default keyboard layout for your system, use the following command as root:
localectl set-keymap map
12
CHAPTER 1. SYSTEM LOCALE AND KEYBOARD CONFIGURATION
Replace map with the name of the keymap taken from the output of the localectl list-keymaps
command. Unless the --no-convert option is passed, the selected setting is also applied to the
default keyboard mapping of the X11 window system, after converting it to the closest matching X11
keyboard mapping. This also applies in reverse, you can specify both keymaps with the following
command as root:
localectl set-x11-keymap map
If you want your X11 layout to differ from the console layout, use the --no-convert option.
localectl --no-convert set-x11-keymap map
With this option, the X11 keymap is specified without changing the previous console layout setting.
Example 1.6. Setting the X11 Keymap Separately
Imagine you want to use German keyboard layout in the graphical interface, but for console
operations you want to retain the US keymap. To do so, type as root:
~]# localectl --no-convert set-x11-keymap de
Then you can verify if your setting was successful by checking the current status:
~]$ localectl status
System Locale: LANG=de_DE.UTF-8
VC Keymap: us
X11 Layout: de
Apart from keyboard layout (map), three other options can be specified:
localectl set-x11-keymap map model variant options
Replace model with the keyboard model name, variant and options with keyboard variant and option
components, which can be used to enhance the keyboard behavior. These options are not set by
default. For more information on X11 Model, X11 Variant, and X11 Options see the kbd(4) man page.
1.3. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
For more information on how to configure the keyboard layout on Red Hat Enterprise Linux, see the
resources listed below:
Installed Documentation
localectl(1) — The manual page for the localectl command line utility documents how to
use this tool to configure the system locale and keyboard layout.
loadkeys(1) — The manual page for the loadkeys command provides more information on
how to use this tool to change the keyboard layout in a virtual console.
See Also
13
System Administrator's Guide
Chapter 5, Gaining Privileges documents how to gain administrative privileges by using the su
and sudo commands.
Chapter 9, Managing Services with systemd provides more information on systemd and
documents how to use the systemctl command to manage system services.
14
CHAPTER 2. CONFIGURING THE DATE AND TIME
CHAPTER 2. CONFIGURING THE DATE AND TIME
Modern operating systems distinguish between the following two types of clocks:
A real-time clock (RTC), commonly referred to as a hardware clock, (typically an integrated
circuit on the system board) that is completely independent of the current state of the
operating system and runs even when the computer is shut down.
A system clock, also known as a software clock, that is maintained by the kernel and its initial
value is based on the real-time clock. Once the system is booted and the system clock is
initialized, the system clock is completely independent of the real-time clock.
The system time is always kept in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) and converted in applications to
local time as needed. Local time is the actual time in your current time zone, taking into account
daylight saving time (DST). The real-time clock can use either UTC or local time. UTC is recommended.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 offers three command line tools that can be used to configure and display
information about the system date and time: the timedatectl utility, which is new in Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 7 and is part of systemd; the traditional date command; and the hwclock utility for
accessing the hardware clock.
2.1. USING THE TIMEDATECTL COMMAND
The timedatectl utility is distributed as part of the systemd system and service manager and allows
you to review and change the configuration of the system clock. You can use this tool to change the
current date and time, set the time zone, or enable automatic synchronization of the system clock with
a remote server.
For information on how to display the current date and time in a custom format, see also Section 2.2,
“Using the date Command”.
2.1.1. Displaying the Current Date and Time
To display the current date and time along with detailed information about the configuration of the
system and hardware clock, run the timedatectl command with no additional command line options:
timedatectl
This displays the local and universal time, the currently used time zone, the status of the Network Time
Protocol (NTP) configuration, and additional information related to DST.
Example 2.1. Displaying the Current Date and Time
The following is an example output of the timedatectl command on a system that does not use
NTP to synchronize the system clock with a remote server:
~]$ timedatectl
Local time:
Universal time:
Timezone:
NTP enabled:
NTP synchronized:
RTC in local TZ:
DST active:
Mon 2016-09-16 19:30:24 CEST
Mon 2016-09-16 17:30:24 UTC
Europe/Prague (CEST, +0200)
no
no
no
yes
15
System Administrator's Guide
Last DST change: DST
Sun
Sun
Next DST change: DST
Sun
Sun
began at
2016-03-31 01:59:59 CET
2016-03-31 03:00:00 CEST
ends (the clock jumps one hour backwards) at
2016-10-27 02:59:59 CEST
2016-10-27 02:00:00 CET
IMPORTANT
Changes to the status of chrony or ntpd will not be immediately noticed by
timedatectl. If changes to the configuration or status of these tools is made, enter the
following command:
~]# systemctl restart systemd-timedated.service
2.1.2. Changing the Current Time
To change the current time, type the following at a shell prompt as root:
timedatectl set-time HH:MM:SS
Replace HH with an hour, MM with a minute, and SS with a second, all typed in two-digit form.
This command updates both the system time and the hardware clock. The result it is similar to using
both the date --set and hwclock --systohc commands.
The command will fail if an NTP service is enabled. See Section 2.1.5, “Synchronizing the System Clock
with a Remote Server” to temporally disable the service.
Example 2.2. Changing the Current Time
To change the current time to 11:26 p.m., run the following command as root:
~]# timedatectl set-time 23:26:00
By default, the system is configured to use UTC. To configure your system to maintain the clock in the
local time, run the timedatectl command with the set-local-rtc option as root:
timedatectl set-local-rtc boolean
To configure your system to maintain the clock in the local time, replace boolean with yes (or,
alternatively, y, true, t, or 1). To configure the system to use UTC, replace boolean with no (or,
alternatively, n, false, f, or 0). The default option is no.
2.1.3. Changing the Current Date
To change the current date, type the following at a shell prompt as root:
timedatectl set-time YYYY-MM-DD
16
CHAPTER 2. CONFIGURING THE DATE AND TIME
Replace YYYY with a four-digit year, MM with a two-digit month, and DD with a two-digit day of the
month.
Note that changing the date without specifying the current time results in setting the time to
00:00:00.
Example 2.3. Changing the Current Date
To change the current date to 2 June 2017 and keep the current time (11:26 p.m.), run the following
command as root:
~]# timedatectl set-time 2017-06-02 23:26:00
2.1.4. Changing the Time Zone
To list all available time zones, type the following at a shell prompt:
timedatectl list-timezones
To change the currently used time zone, type as root:
timedatectl set-timezone time_zone
Replace time_zone with any of the values listed by the timedatectl list-timezones command.
Example 2.4. Changing the Time Zone
To identify which time zone is closest to your present location, use the timedatectl command
with the list-timezones command line option. For example, to list all available time zones in
Europe, type:
~]# timedatectl list-timezones | grep Europe
Europe/Amsterdam
Europe/Andorra
Europe/Athens
Europe/Belgrade
Europe/Berlin
Europe/Bratislava
…
To change the time zone to Europe/Prague, type as root:
~]# timedatectl set-timezone Europe/Prague
2.1.5. Synchronizing the System Clock with a Remote Server
As opposed to the manual adjustments described in the previous sections, the timedatectl
command also allows you to enable automatic synchronization of your system clock with a group of
remote servers using the NTP protocol. Enabling NTP enables the chronyd or ntpd service, depending
on which of them is installed.
17
System Administrator's Guide
The NTP service can be enabled and disabled using a command as follows:
timedatectl set-ntp boolean
To enable your system to synchronize the system clock with a remote NTP server, replace boolean with
yes (the default option). To disable this feature, replace boolean with no.
Example 2.5. Synchronizing the System Clock with a Remote Server
To enable automatic synchronization of the system clock with a remote server, type:
~]# timedatectl set-ntp yes
The command will fail if an NTP service is not installed. See Section 16.3.1, “Installing chrony” for
more information.
2.2. USING THE DATE COMMAND
The date utility is available on all Linux systems and allows you to display and configure the current
date and time. It is frequently used in scripts to display detailed information about the system clock in
a custom format.
For information on how to change the time zone or enable automatic synchronization of the system
clock with a remote server, see Section 2.1, “Using the timedatectl Command”.
2.2.1. Displaying the Current Date and Time
To display the current date and time, run the date command with no additional command line options:
date
This displays the day of the week followed by the current date, local time, abbreviated time zone, and
year.
By default, the date command displays the local time. To display the time in UTC, run the command
with the --utc or -u command line option:
date --utc
You can also customize the format of the displayed information by providing the +"format" option on
the command line:
date +"format"
Replace format with one or more supported control sequences as illustrated in Example 2.6,
“Displaying the Current Date and Time”. See Table 2.1, “Commonly Used Control Sequences” for a list
of the most frequently used formatting options, or the date(1) manual page for a complete list of these
options.
Table 2.1. Commonly Used Control Sequences
18
CHAPTER 2. CONFIGURING THE DATE AND TIME
Control Sequence
Description
%H
The hour in the HH format (for example, 17).
%M
The minute in the MM format (for example, 30).
%S
The second in the SS format (for example, 24).
%d
The day of the month in the DD format (for example, 16).
%m
The month in the MM format (for example, 09).
%Y
The year in the YYYY format (for example, 2016).
%Z
The time zone abbreviation (for example, CEST).
%F
The full date in the YYYY-MM-DD format (for example, 2016-09-16). This
option is equal to %Y-%m-%d.
%T
The full time in the HH:MM:SS format (for example, 17:30:24). This option is equal
to %H:%M:%S
Example 2.6. Displaying the Current Date and Time
To display the current date and local time, type the following at a shell prompt:
~]$ date
Mon Sep 16 17:30:24 CEST 2016
To display the current date and time in UTC, type the following at a shell prompt:
~]$ date --utc
Mon Sep 16 15:30:34 UTC 2016
To customize the output of the date command, type:
~]$ date +"%Y-%m-%d %H:%M"
2016-09-16 17:30
2.2.2. Changing the Current Time
To change the current time, run the date command with the --set or -s option as root:
date --set HH:MM:SS
Replace HH with an hour, MM with a minute, and SS with a second, all typed in two-digit form.
By default, the date command sets the system clock to the local time. To set the system clock in UTC,
19
System Administrator's Guide
run the command with the --utc or -u command line option:
date --set HH:MM:SS --utc
Example 2.7. Changing the Current Time
To change the current time to 11:26 p.m., run the following command as root:
~]# date --set 23:26:00
2.2.3. Changing the Current Date
To change the current date, run the date command with the --set or -s option as root:
date --set YYYY-MM-DD
Replace YYYY with a four-digit year, MM with a two-digit month, and DD with a two-digit day of the
month.
Note that changing the date without specifying the current time results in setting the time to
00:00:00.
Example 2.8. Changing the Current Date
To change the current date to 2 June 2017 and keep the current time (11:26 p.m.), run the following
command as root:
~]# date --set "2017-06-02 23:26:00"
2.3. USING THE HWCLOCK COMMAND
hwclock is a utility for accessing the hardware clock, also referred to as the Real Time Clock (RTC).
The hardware clock is independent of the operating system you use and works even when the machine
is shut down. This utility is used for displaying the time from the hardware clock. hwclock also
contains facilities for compensating for systematic drift in the hardware clock.
The hardware clock stores the values of: year, month, day, hour, minute, and second. It is not able to
store the time standard, local time or Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), nor set the Daylight Saving
Time (DST).
The hwclock utility saves its settings in the /etc/adjtime file, which is created with the first change
you make, for example, when you set the time manually or synchronize the hardware clock with the
system time.
20
CHAPTER 2. CONFIGURING THE DATE AND TIME
NOTE
In Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6, the hwclock command was run automatically on every
system shutdown or reboot, but it is not in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7. When the system
clock is synchronized by the Network Time Protocol (NTP) or Precision Time Protocol
(PTP), the kernel automatically synchronizes the hardware clock to the system clock
every 11 minutes.
For details about NTP, see Chapter 16, Configuring NTP Using the chrony Suiteand Chapter 17,
Configuring NTP Using ntpd. For information about PTP, see Chapter 18, Configuring PTP Using ptp4l. For
information about setting the hardware clock after executing ntpdate, see Section 17.18, “Configuring
the Hardware Clock Update”.
2.3.1. Displaying the Current Date and Time
Running hwclock with no command line options as the root user returns the date and time in local
time to standard output.
hwclock
Note that using the --utc or --localtime options with the hwclock command does not mean you
are displaying the hardware clock time in UTC or local time. These options are used for setting the
hardware clock to keep time in either of them. The time is always displayed in local time. Additionally,
using the hwclock --utc or hwclock --local commands does not change the record in the
/etc/adjtime file. This command can be useful when you know that the setting saved in
/etc/adjtime is incorrect but you do not want to change the setting. On the other hand, you may
receive misleading information if you use the command an incorrect way. See the hwclock(8) manual
page for more details.
Example 2.9. Displaying the Current Date and Time
To display the current date and the current local time from the hardware clock, run as root:
~]# hwclock
Tue 15 Apr 2017 04:23:46 PM CEST
-0.329272 seconds
CEST is a time zone abbreviation and stands for Central European Summer Time.
For information on how to change the time zone, see Section 2.1.4, “Changing the Time Zone” .
2.3.2. Setting the Date and Time
Besides displaying the date and time, you can manually set the hardware clock to a specific time.
When you need to change the hardware clock date and time, you can do so by appending the --set
and --date options along with your specification:
hwclock --set --date "dd mmm yyyy HH:MM"
Replace dd with a day (a two-digit number), mmm with a month (a three-letter abbreviation), yyyy with
a year (a four-digit number), HH with an hour (a two-digit number), MM with a minute (a two-digit
number).
21
System Administrator's Guide
At the same time, you can also set the hardware clock to keep the time in either UTC or local time by
adding the --utc or --localtime options, respectively. In this case, UTC or LOCAL is recorded in the
/etc/adjtime file.
Example 2.10. Setting the Hardware Clock to a Specific Date and Time
If you want to set the date and time to a specific value, for example, to "21:17, October 21, 2016",
and keep the hardware clock in UTC, run the command as root in the following format:
~]# hwclock --set --date "21 Oct 2016 21:17" --utc
2.3.3. Synchronizing the Date and Time
You can synchronize the hardware clock and the current system time in both directions.
Either you can set the hardware clock to the current system time by using this command:
hwclock --systohc
Note that if you use NTP, the hardware clock is automatically synchronized to the system clock
every 11 minutes, and this command is useful only at boot time to get a reasonable initial
system time.
Or, you can set the system time from the hardware clock by using the following command:
hwclock --hctosys
When you synchronize the hardware clock and the system time, you can also specify whether you want
to keep the hardware clock in local time or UTC by adding the --utc or --localtime option.
Similarly to using --set, UTC or LOCAL is recorded in the /etc/adjtime file.
The hwclock --systohc --utc command is functionally similar to timedatectl set-localrtc false and the hwclock --systohc --local command is an alternative to timedatectl
set-local-rtc true.
Example 2.11. Synchronizing the Hardware Clock with System Time
To set the hardware clock to the current system time and keep the hardware clock in local time, run
the following command as root:
~]# hwclock --systohc --localtime
To avoid problems with time zone and DST switching, it is recommended to keep the hardware
clock in UTC. The shown Example 2.11, “Synchronizing the Hardware Clock with System Time” is
useful, for example, in case of a multi boot with a Windows system, which assumes the hardware
clock runs in local time by default, and all other systems need to accommodate to it by using local
time as well. It may also be needed with a virtual machine; if the virtual hardware clock provided by
the host is running in local time, the guest system needs to be configured to use local time, too.
2.4. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
22
CHAPTER 2. CONFIGURING THE DATE AND TIME
For more information on how to configure the date and time in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7, see the
resources listed below.
Installed Documentation
timedatectl(1) — The manual page for the timedatectl command line utility documents
how to use this tool to query and change the system clock and its settings.
date(1) — The manual page for the date command provides a complete list of supported
command line options.
hwclock(8) — The manual page for the hwclock command provides a complete list of
supported command line options.
See Also
Chapter 1, System Locale and Keyboard Configurationdocuments how to configure the keyboard
layout.
Chapter 5, Gaining Privileges documents how to gain administrative privileges by using the su
and sudo commands.
Chapter 9, Managing Services with systemd provides more information on systemd and
documents how to use the systemctl command to manage system services.
23
System Administrator's Guide
CHAPTER 3. MANAGING USERS AND GROUPS
The control of users and groups is a core element of Red Hat Enterprise Linux system administration.
This chapter explains how to add, manage, and delete users and groups in the graphical user interface
and on the command line, and covers advanced topics, such as creating group directories.
3.1. INTRODUCTION TO USERS AND GROUPS
While users can be either people (meaning accounts tied to physical users) or accounts that exist for
specific applications to use, groups are logical expressions of organization, tying users together for a
common purpose. Users within a group share the same permissions to read, write, or execute files
owned by that group.
Each user is associated with a unique numerical identification number called a user ID (UID). Likewise,
each group is associated with a group ID (GID). A user who creates a file is also the owner and group
owner of that file. The file is assigned separate read, write, and execute permissions for the owner, the
group, and everyone else. The file owner can be changed only by root, and access permissions can be
changed by both the root user and file owner.
Additionally, Red Hat Enterprise Linux supports access control lists (ACLs) for files and directories
which allow permissions for specific users outside of the owner to be set. For more information about
this feature, see Chapter 4, Access Control Lists.
Reserved User and Group IDs
Red Hat Enterprise Linux reserves user and group IDs below 1000 for system users and groups. By
default, the User Manager does not display the system users. Reserved user and group IDs are
documented in the setup package. To view the documentation, use this command:
cat /usr/share/doc/setup*/uidgid
The recommended practice is to assign IDs starting at 5,000 that were not already reserved, as the
reserved range can increase in the future. To make the IDs assigned to new users by default start at
5,000, change the UID_MIN and GID_MIN directives in the /etc/login.defs file:
[file contents truncated]
UID_MIN
5000
[file contents truncated]
GID_MIN
5000
[file contents truncated]
NOTE
For users created before you changed UID_MIN and GID_MIN directives, UIDs will still
start at the default 1000.
Even with new user and group IDs beginning with 5,000, it is recommended not to raise IDs reserved
by the system above 1000 to avoid conflict with systems that retain the 1000 limit.
3.1.1. User Private Groups
Red Hat Enterprise Linux uses a user private group (UPG) scheme, which makes UNIX groups easier to
manage. A user private group is created whenever a new user is added to the system. It has the same
name as the user for which it was created and that user is the only member of the user private group.
24
CHAPTER 3. MANAGING USERS AND GROUPS
User private groups make it safe to set default permissions for a newly created file or directory,
allowing both the user and the group of that userto make modifications to the file or directory.
The setting which determines what permissions are applied to a newly created file or directory is called
a umask and is configured in the /etc/bashrc file. Traditionally on UNIX-based systems, the umask is
set to 022, which allows only the user who created the file or directory to make modifications. Under
this scheme, all other users, including members of the creator's group, are not allowed to make any
modifications. However, under the UPG scheme, this “group protection” is not necessary since every
user has their own private group. See Section 3.3.5, “Setting Default Permissions for New Files Using
umask” for more information.
A list of all groups is stored in the /etc/group configuration file.
3.1.2. Shadow Passwords
In environments with multiple users, it is very important to use shadow passwords provided by the
shadow-utils package to enhance the security of system authentication files. For this reason, the
installation program enables shadow passwords by default.
The following is a list of the advantages shadow passwords have over the traditional way of storing
passwords on UNIX-based systems:
Shadow passwords improve system security by moving encrypted password hashes from the
world-readable /etc/passwd file to /etc/shadow, which is readable only by the root user.
Shadow passwords store information about password aging.
Shadow passwords allow to enforce some of the security policies set in the
/etc/login.defs file.
Most utilities provided by the shadow-utils package work properly whether or not shadow passwords
are enabled. However, since password aging information is stored exclusively in the /etc/shadow file,
some utilities and commands do not work without first enabling shadow passwords:
The chage utility for setting password aging parameters. For details, see the Password
Security section in the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Security Guide.
The gpasswd utility for administrating the /etc/group file.
The usermod command with the -e, --expiredate or -f, --inactive option.
The useradd command with the -e, --expiredate or -f, --inactive option.
3.2. MANAGING USERS IN A GRAPHICAL ENVIRONMENT
The Users utility allows you to view, modify, add, and delete local users in the graphical user interface.
3.2.1. Using the Users Settings Tool
Press the Super key to enter the Activities Overview, type Users and then press Enter. The Users
settings tool appears. The Super key appears in a variety of guises, depending on the keyboard and
other hardware, but often as either the Windows or Command key, and typically to the left of the Space
bar. Alternatively, you can open the Users utility from the Settings menu after clicking your user name
in the top right corner of the screen.
25
System Administrator's Guide
To make changes to the user accounts, first select the Unlock button and authenticate yourself as
indicated by the dialog box that appears. Note that unless you have superuser privileges, the
application will prompt you to authenticate as root. To add and remove users, select the + and button respectively. To add a user to the administrative group wheel, change the Account Type from
Standard to Administrator. To edit a user's language setting, select the language and a drop-down
menu appears.
Figure 3.1. The Users Settings Tool
When a new user is created, the account is disabled until a password is set. The Password drop-down
menu, shown in Figure 3.2, “The Password Menu” , contains the options to set a password by the
administrator immediately, choose a password by the user at the first login, or create a guest account
with no password required to log in. You can also disable or enable an account from this menu.
26
CHAPTER 3. MANAGING USERS AND GROUPS
Figure 3.2. The Password Menu
3.3. USING COMMAND-LINE TOOLS
Apart from the Users settings tool described in Section 3.2, “Managing Users in a Graphical
Environment”, which is designed for basic managing of users, you can use command line tools for
managing users and groups that are listed in Table 3.1, “Command line utilities for managing users and
groups”.
Table 3.1. Command line utilities for managing users and groups
Utilities
Description
id
Displays user and group IDs.
useradd, usermod, userdel
Standard utilities for adding, modifying, and deleting user accounts.
groupadd, groupmod,
groupdel
Standard utilities for adding, modifying, and deleting groups.
gpasswd
Utility primarily used for modification of group password in the
/etc/gshadow file which is used by thenewgrp command.
pwck, grpck
Utilities that can be used for verification of the password, group, and
associated shadow files.
27
System Administrator's Guide
Utilities
Description
pwconv , pwunconv
Utilities that can be used for the conversion of passwords to shadow
passwords, or back from shadow passwords to standard passwords.
grpconv, grpunconv
Similar to the previous, these utilities can be used for conversion of
shadowed information for group accounts.
3.3.1. Adding a New User
To add a new user to the system, type the following at a shell prompt as root:
useradd [options] username
…where options are command-line options as described in Table 3.2, “Common useradd command-line
options”.
By default, the useradd command creates a locked user account. To unlock the account, run the
following command as root to assign a password:
passwd username
Optionally, you can set a password aging policy. See the Password Security section in the Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 7 Security Guide.
Table 3.2. Common useradd command-line options
Option
28
-c 'comment'
comment can be replaced with any string. This option is generally used to
specify the full name of a user.
-d home_directory
Home directory to be used instead of default /home/username/ .
-e date
Date for the account to be disabled in the format YYYY-MM-DD.
-f days
Number of days after the password expires until the account is disabled. If
0 is specified, the account is disabled immediately after the password
expires. If -1 is specified, the account is not disabled after the password
expires.
-g group_name
Group name or group number for the user's default (primary) group. The
group must exist prior to being specified here.
-G group_list
List of additional (supplementary, other than default) group names or
group numbers, separated by commas, of which the user is a member. The
groups must exist prior to being specified here.
-m
Create the home directory if it does not exist.
CHAPTER 3. MANAGING USERS AND GROUPS
Option
-M
Do not create the home directory.
-N
Do not create a user private group for the user.
-p password
The password encrypted with crypt.
-r
Create a system account with a UID less than 1000 and without a home
directory.
-s
User's login shell, which defaults to /bin/bash.
-u uid
User ID for the user, which must be unique and greater than 999.
IMPORTANT
The default range of IDs for system and normal users has been changed in Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 7 from earlier releases. Previously, UID 1-499 was used for system
users and values above for normal users. The default range for system users is now 1999. This change might cause problems when migrating to Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7
with existing users having UIDs and GIDs between 500 and 999. The default ranges of
UID and GID can be changed in the /etc/login.defs file.
Explaining the Process
The following steps illustrate what happens if the command useradd juan is issued on a system that
has shadow passwords enabled:
1. A new line for juan is created in /etc/passwd:
juan:x:1001:1001::/home/juan:/bin/bash
The line has the following characteristics:
It begins with the user name juan.
There is an x for the password field indicating that the system is using shadow passwords.
A UID greater than 999 is created. Under Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7, UIDs below 1000 are
reserved for system use and should not be assigned to users.
A GID greater than 999 is created. Under Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7, GIDs below 1000 are
reserved for system use and should not be assigned to users.
The optional GECOS information is left blank. The GECOS field can be used to provide
additional information about the user, such as their full name or phone number.
The home directory for juan is set to /home/juan/.
The default shell is set to /bin/bash.
29
System Administrator's Guide
2. A new line for juan is created in /etc/shadow:
juan:!!:14798:0:99999:7:::
The line has the following characteristics:
It begins with the user name juan.
Two exclamation marks (!!) appear in the password field of the /etc/shadow file, which
locks the account.
NOTE
If an encrypted password is passed using the -p flag, it is placed in the
/etc/shadow file on the new line for the user.
The password is set to never expire.
3. A new line for a group named juan is created in /etc/group:
juan:x:1001:
A group with the same name as a user is called a user private group. For more information on
user private groups, see Section 3.1.1, “User Private Groups” .
The line created in /etc/group has the following characteristics:
It begins with the group name juan.
An x appears in the password field indicating that the system is using shadow group
passwords.
The GID matches the one listed for juan's primary group in /etc/passwd.
4. A new line for a group named juan is created in /etc/gshadow:
juan:!::
The line has the following characteristics:
It begins with the group name juan.
An exclamation mark (!) appears in the password field of the /etc/gshadow file, which
locks the group.
All other fields are blank.
5. A directory for user juan is created in the /home directory:
~]# ls -ld /home/juan
drwx------. 4 juan juan 4096 Mar
30
3 18:23 /home/juan
CHAPTER 3. MANAGING USERS AND GROUPS
This directory is owned by user juan and group juan. It has read, write, and execute privileges
only for the user juan. All other permissions are denied.
6. The files within the /etc/skel/ directory (which contain default user settings) are copied
into the new /home/juan/ directory:
~]# ls -la /home/juan
total 28
drwx------. 4 juan juan 4096 Mar 3 18:23
drwxr-xr-x. 5 root root 4096 Mar 3 18:23
-rw-r--r--. 1 juan juan
18 Jun 22 2010
-rw-r--r--. 1 juan juan 176 Jun 22 2010
-rw-r--r--. 1 juan juan 124 Jun 22 2010
drwxr-xr-x. 4 juan juan 4096 Nov 23 15:09
.
..
.bash_logout
.bash_profile
.bashrc
.mozilla
At this point, a locked account called juan exists on the system. To activate it, the administrator must
next assign a password to the account using the passwd command and, optionally, set password aging
guidelines (see the Password Security section in the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Security Guide for
details).
3.3.2. Adding a New Group
To add a new group to the system, type the following at a shell prompt as root:
groupadd [options] group_name
…where options are command-line options as described in Table 3.3, “Common groupadd commandline options”.
Table 3.3. Common groupadd command-line options
Option
Description
-f, --force
When used with -g gid and gid already exists, groupadd will choose
another unique gid for the group.
-g gid
Group ID for the group, which must be unique and greater than 999.
-K, --key key=value
Override /etc/login.defs defaults.
-o, --non-unique
Allows creating groups with duplicate GID.
-p, --password password
Use this encrypted password for the new group.
-r
Create a system group with a GID less than 1000.
3.3.3. Adding an Existing User to an Existing Group
Use the usermod utility to add an already existing user to an already existing group.
31
System Administrator's Guide
Various options of usermod have different impact on user's primary group and on his or her
supplementary groups.
To override user's primary group, run the following command as root:
~]# usermod -g group_name user_name
To override user's supplementary groups, run the following command as root:
~]# usermod -G group_name1,group_name2,... user_name
Note that in this case all previous supplementary groups of the user are replaced by the new group or
several new groups.
To add one or more groups to user's supplementary groups, run one of the following commands as
root:
~]# usermod -aG group_name1,group_name2,... user_name
~]# usermod --append -G group_name1,group_name2,... user_name
Note that in this case the new group is added to user's current supplementary groups.
3.3.4. Creating Group Directories
System administrators usually like to create a group for each major project and assign people to the
group when they need to access that project's files. With this traditional scheme, file management is
difficult; when someone creates a file, it is associated with the primary group to which they belong.
When a single person works on multiple projects, it becomes difficult to associate the right files with
the right group. However, with the UPG scheme, groups are automatically assigned to files created
within a directory with the setgid bit set. The setgid bit makes managing group projects that share a
common directory very simple because any files a user creates within the directory are owned by the
group that owns the directory.
For example, a group of people need to work on files in the /opt/myproject/ directory. Some people
are trusted to modify the contents of this directory, but not everyone.
1. As root, create the /opt/myproject/ directory by typing the following at a shell prompt:
mkdir /opt/myproject
2. Add the myproject group to the system:
groupadd myproject
3. Associate the contents of the /opt/myproject/ directory with the myproject group:
chown root:myproject /opt/myproject
4. Allow users in the group to create files within the directory and set the setgid bit:
chmod 2775 /opt/myproject
32
CHAPTER 3. MANAGING USERS AND GROUPS
At this point, all members of the myproject group can create and edit files in the
/opt/myproject/ directory without the administrator having to change file permissions
every time users write new files. To verify that the permissions have been set correctly, run the
following command:
~]# ls -ld /opt/myproject
drwxrwsr-x. 3 root myproject 4096 Mar
3 18:31 /opt/myproject
5. Add users to the myproject group:
usermod -aG myproject username
3.3.5. Setting Default Permissions for New Files Using umask
When a process creates a file, the file has certain default permissions, for example, -rw-rw-r--.
These initial permissions are partially defined by the file mode creation mask, also called file permission
mask or umask. Every process has its own umask, for example, bash has umask 0022 by default.
Process umask can be changed.
What umask consists of
A umask consists of bits corresponding to standard file permissions. For example, for umask 0137, the
digits mean that:
0 = no meaning, it is always 0 (umask does not affect special bits)
1 = for owner permissions, the execute bit is set
3 = for group permissions, the execute and write bits are set
7 = for others permissions, the execute, write, and read bits are set
Umasks can be represented in binary, octal, or symbolic notation. For example, the octal representation
0137 equals symbolic representation u=rw-,g=r--,o=---. Symbolic notation specification is the
reverse of the octal notation specification: it shows the allowed permissions, not the prohibited
permissions.
How umask works
Umask prohibits permissions from being set for a file:
When a bit is set in umask, it is unset in the file.
When a bit is not set in umask, it can be set in the file, depending on other factors.
The following figure shows how umask 0137 affects creating a new file.
33
System Administrator's Guide
Figure 3.3. Applying umask when creating a file
IMPORTANT
For security reasons, a regular file cannot have execute permissions by default.
Therefore, even if umask is 0000, which does not prohibit any permissions, a new regular
file still does not have execute permissions. However, directories can be created with
execute permissions:
[john@server tmp]$
[john@server tmp]$
[john@server tmp]$
[john@server tmp]$
total 0
drwxrwxrwx. 2 john
-rw-rw-rw-. 1 john
umask 0000
touch file
mkdir directory
ls -lh .
john 40 Nov
john 0 Nov
2 13:17 directory
2 13:17 file
3.3.5.1. Managing umask in Shells
For popular shells, such as bash, ksh, zsh and tcsh, umask is managed using the umask shell
builtin. Processes started from shell inherit its umask.
Displaying the current mask
To show the current umask in octal notation:
~]$ umask
0022
To show the current umask in symbolic notation:
~]$ umask -S
u=rwx,g=rx,o=rx
34
CHAPTER 3. MANAGING USERS AND GROUPS
Setting mask in shell using umask
To set umask for the current shell session using octal notation run:
~]$ umask octal_mask
Substitute octal_mask with four or less digits from 0 to 7. When three or less digits are provided,
permissions are set as if the command contained leading zeros. For example, umask 7 translates to
0007.
Example 3.1. Setting umask Using Octal Notation
To prohibit new files from having write and execute permissions for owner and group, and from
having any permissions for others:
~]$ umask 0337
Or simply:
~]$ umask 337
To set umask for the current shell session using symbolic notation:
~]$ umask -S symbolic_mask
Example 3.2. Setting umask Using Symbolic Notation
To set umask 0337 using symbolic notation:
~]$ umask -S u=r,g=r,o=
Working with the default shell umask
Shells usually have a configuration file where their default umask is set. For bash, it is /etc/bashrc.
To show the default bash umask:
~]$ grep -i -B 1 umask /etc/bashrc
The output shows if umask is set, either using the umask command or the UMASK variable. In the
following example, umask is set to 022 using the umask command:
~]$ grep -i -B 1 umask /etc/bashrc
# By default, we want umask to get set. This sets it for non-login
shell.
-if [ $UID -gt 199 ] && [ "`id -gn`" = "`id -un`" ]; then
umask 002
else
umask 022
35
System Administrator's Guide
To change the default umask for bash, change the umask command call or the UMASK variable
assignment in /etc/bashrc. This example changes the default umask to 0227:
if [ $UID -gt 199 ] && [ "`id -gn`" = "`id -un`" ]; then
umask 002
else
umask 227
Working with the default shell umask of a specific user
By default, bash umask of a new user defaults to the one defined in /etc/bashrc.
To change bash umaskfor a particular user, add a call to the umask command in $HOME/.bashrc file
of that user. For example, to change bash umask of user john to 0227:
john@server ~]$ echo 'umask 227' >> /home/john/.bashrc
Setting default permissions for newly created home directories
To change permissions with which user home directories are created, change the UMASK variable in the
/etc/login.defs file:
# The permission mask is initialized to this value. If not specified,
# the permission mask will be initialized to 022.
UMASK 077
3.4. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
For more information on how to manage users and groups on Red Hat Enterprise Linux, see the
resources listed below.
Installed Documentation
For information about various utilities for managing users and groups, see the following manual pages:
useradd(8) — The manual page for the useradd command documents how to use it to create
new users.
userdel(8) — The manual page for the userdel command documents how to use it to delete
users.
usermod(8) — The manual page for the usermod command documents how to use it to modify
users.
groupadd(8) — The manual page for the groupadd command documents how to use it to
create new groups.
groupdel(8) — The manual page for the groupdel command documents how to use it to
delete groups.
groupmod(8) — The manual page for the groupmod command documents how to use it to
modify group membership.
gpasswd(1) — The manual page for the gpasswd command documents how to manage the
/etc/group file.
grpck(8) — The manual page for the grpck command documents how to use it to verify the
36
CHAPTER 3. MANAGING USERS AND GROUPS
integrity of the /etc/group file.
pwck(8) — The manual page for the pwck command documents how to use it to verify the
integrity of the /etc/passwd and /etc/shadow files.
pwconv(8) — The manual page for the pwconv, pwunconv, grpconv, and grpunconv
commands documents how to convert shadowed information for passwords and groups.
id(1) — The manual page for the id command documents how to display user and group IDs.
umask(2) — The manual page for the umask command documents how to work with the file
mode creation mask.
For information about related configuration files, see:
group(5) — The manual page for the /etc/group file documents how to use this file to define
system groups.
passwd(5) — The manual page for the /etc/passwd file documents how to use this file to
define user information.
shadow(5) — The manual page for the /etc/shadow file documents how to use this file to set
passwords and account expiration information for the system.
Online Documentation
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Security Guide — The Security Guide for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7
provides additional information how to ensure password security and secure the workstation
by enabling password aging and user account locking.
See Also
Chapter 5, Gaining Privileges documents how to gain administrative privileges by using the su
and sudo commands.
37
System Administrator's Guide
CHAPTER 4. ACCESS CONTROL LISTS
Files and directories have permission sets for the owner of the file, the group associated with the file,
and all other users for the system. However, these permission sets have limitations. For example,
different permissions cannot be configured for different users. Thus, Access Control Lists (ACLs) were
implemented.
The Red Hat Enterprise Linux kernel provides ACL support for the ext3 file system and NFS-exported
file systems. ACLs are also recognized on ext3 file systems accessed via Samba.
Along with support in the kernel, the acl package is required to implement ACLs. It contains the
utilities used to add, modify, remove, and retrieve ACL information.
The cp and mv commands copy or move any ACLs associated with files and directories.
4.1. MOUNTING FILE SYSTEMS
Before using ACLs for a file or directory, the partition for the file or directory must be mounted with
ACL support. If it is a local ext3 file system, it can mounted with the following command:
mount -t ext3 -o acl device-name partition
For example:
mount -t ext3 -o acl /dev/VolGroup00/LogVol02 /work
Alternatively, if the partition is listed in the /etc/fstab file, the entry for the partition can include the
acl option:
LABEL=/work
/work
ext3
acl
1 2
If an ext3 file system is accessed via Samba and ACLs have been enabled for it, the ACLs are
recognized because Samba has been compiled with the --with-acl-support option. No special
flags are required when accessing or mounting a Samba share.
4.1.1. NFS
By default, if the file system being exported by an NFS server supports ACLs and the NFS client can
read ACLs, ACLs are utilized by the client system.
To disable ACLs on NFS shares when configuring the server, include the no_acl option in the
/etc/exports file. To disable ACLs on an NFS share when mounting it on a client, mount it with the
no_acl option via the command line or the /etc/fstab file.
4.2. SETTING ACCESS ACLS
There are two types of ACLs: access ACLs and default ACLs. An access ACL is the access control list for
a specific file or directory. A default ACL can only be associated with a directory; if a file within the
directory does not have an access ACL, it uses the rules of the default ACL for the directory. Default
ACLs are optional.
ACLs can be configured:
1. Per user
38
CHAPTER 4. ACCESS CONTROL LISTS
2. Per group
3. Via the effective rights mask
4. For users not in the user group for the file
The setfacl utility sets ACLs for files and directories. Use the -m option to add or modify the ACL of a
file or directory:
# setfacl -m rules files
Rules (rules) must be specified in the following formats. Multiple rules can be specified in the same
command if they are separated by commas.
u:uid:perms
Sets the access ACL for a user. The user name or UID may be specified. The user may be any valid
user on the system.
g:gid:perms
Sets the access ACL for a group. The group name or GID may be specified. The group may be any
valid group on the system.
m:perms
Sets the effective rights mask. The mask is the union of all permissions of the owning group and all
of the user and group entries.
o:perms
Sets the access ACL for users other than the ones in the group for the file.
Permissions (perms) must be a combination of the characters r, w, and x for read, write, and execute.
If a file or directory already has an ACL, and the setfacl command is used, the additional rules are
added to the existing ACL or the existing rule is modified.
Example 4.1. Give read and write permissions
For example, to give read and write permissions to user andrius:
# setfacl -m u:andrius:rw /project/somefile
To remove all the permissions for a user, group, or others, use the -x option and do not specify any
permissions:
# setfacl -x rules files
Example 4.2. Remove all permissions
For example, to remove all permissions from the user with UID 500:
# setfacl -x u:500 /project/somefile
39
System Administrator's Guide
4.3. SETTING DEFAULT ACLS
To set a default ACL, add d: before the rule and specify a directory instead of a file name.
Example 4.3. Setting default ACLs
For example, to set the default ACL for the /share/ directory to read and execute for users not in
the user group (an access ACL for an individual file can override it):
# setfacl -m d:o:rx /share
4.4. RETRIEVING ACLS
To determine the existing ACLs for a file or directory, use the getfacl command. In the example
below, the getfacl is used to determine the existing ACLs for a file.
Example 4.4. Retrieving ACLs
# getfacl home/john/picture.png
The above command returns the following output:
# file: home/john/picture.png
# owner: john
# group: john
user::rwgroup::r-other::r-If a directory with a default ACL is specified, the default ACL is also displayed as illustrated below.
For example, getfacl home/sales/ will display similar output:
# file: home/sales/
# owner: john
# group: john
user::rwuser:barryg:r-group::r-mask::r-other::r-default:user::rwx
default:user:john:rwx
default:group::r-x
default:mask::rwx
default:other::r-x
40
CHAPTER 4. ACCESS CONTROL LISTS
4.5. ARCHIVING FILE SYSTEMS WITH ACLS
By default, the dump command now preserves ACLs during a backup operation. When archiving a file or
file system with tar, use the --acls option to preserve ACLs. Similarly, when using cp to copy files
with ACLs, include the --preserve=mode option to ensure that ACLs are copied across too. In
addition, the -a option (equivalent to -dR --preserve=all) of cp also preserves ACLs during a
backup along with other information such as timestamps, SELinux contexts, and the like. For more
information about dump, tar, or cp, refer to their respective man pages.
The star utility is similar to the tar utility in that it can be used to generate archives of files; however,
some of its options are different. Refer to Table 4.1, “Command Line Options for star” for a listing of
more commonly used options. For all available options, refer to man star. The star package is
required to use this utility.
Table 4.1. Command Line Options for star
Option
Description
-c
Creates an archive file.
-n
Do not extract the files; use in conjunction with -x to show
what extracting the files does.
-r
Replaces files in the archive. The files are written to the end of
the archive file, replacing any files with the same path and file
name.
-t
Displays the contents of the archive file.
-u
Updates the archive file. The files are written to the end of the
archive if they do not exist in the archive, or if the files are
newer than the files of the same name in the archive. This option
only works if the archive is a file or an unblocked tape that may
backspace.
-x
Extracts the files from the archive. If used with -U and a file in
the archive is older than the corresponding file on the file
system, the file is not extracted.
-help
Displays the most important options.
-xhelp
Displays the least important options.
-/
Do not strip leading slashes from file names when extracting
the files from an archive. By default, they are stripped when
files are extracted.
-acl
When creating or extracting, archives or restores any ACLs
associated with the files and directories.
41
System Administrator's Guide
4.6. COMPATIBILITY WITH OLDER SYSTEMS
If an ACL has been set on any file on a given file system, that file system has the ext_attr attribute.
This attribute can be seen using the following command:
# tune2fs -l filesystem-device
A file system that has acquired the ext_attr attribute can be mounted with older kernels, but those
kernels do not enforce any ACLs which have been set.
Versions of the e2fsck utility included in version 1.22 and higher of the e2fsprogs package
(including the versions in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 2.1 and 4) can check a file system with the
ext_attr attribute. Older versions refuse to check it.
4.7. ACL REFERENCES
Refer to the following man pages for more information.
man acl — Description of ACLs
man getfacl — Discusses how to get file access control lists
man setfacl — Explains how to set file access control lists
man star — Explains more about the star utility and its many options
42
CHAPTER 5. GAINING PRIVILEGES
CHAPTER 5. GAINING PRIVILEGES
System administrators, and in some cases users, need to perform certain tasks with administrative
access. Accessing the system as the root user is potentially dangerous and can lead to widespread
damage to the system and data. This chapter covers ways to gain administrative privileges using the
setuid programs such as su and sudo. These programs allow specific users to perform tasks which
would normally be available only to the root user while maintaining a higher level of control and
system security.
See the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Security Guide for more information on administrative controls,
potential dangers and ways to prevent data loss resulting from improper use of privileged access.
5.1. THE SU COMMAND
When a user executes the su command, they are prompted for the root password and, after
authentication, are given a root shell prompt.
Once logged in using the su command, the user is the root user and has absolute administrative
access to the system. Note that this access is still subject to the restrictions imposed by SELinux, if it
is enabled. In addition, once a user has become root, it is possible for them to use the su command to
change to any other user on the system without being prompted for a password.
Because this program is so powerful, administrators within an organization may want to limit who has
access to the command.
One of the simplest ways to do this is to add users to the special administrative group called wheel. To
do this, type the following command as root:
~]# usermod -a -G wheel username
In the previous command, replace username with the user name you want to add to the wheel group.
You can also use the Users settings tool to modify group memberships, as follows. Note that you need
administrator privileges to perform this procedure.
1. Press the Super key to enter the Activities Overview, type Users and then press Enter. The
Users settings tool appears. The Super key appears in a variety of guises, depending on the
keyboard and other hardware, but often as either the Windows or Command key, and typically
to the left of the Spacebar.
2. To enable making changes, click the Unlock button, and enter a valid administrator password.
3. Click a user icon in the left column to display the user's properties in the right pane.
4. Change the Account Type from Standard to Administrator. This will add the user to the
wheel group.
See Section 3.2, “Managing Users in a Graphical Environment” for more information about the Users
tool.
After you add the desired users to the wheel group, it is advisable to only allow these specific users to
use the su command. To do this, edit the Pluggable Authentication Module (PAM) configuration file for
su, /etc/pam.d/su. Open this file in a text editor and uncomment the following line by removing the
# character:
43
System Administrator's Guide
#auth
required
pam_wheel.so use_uid
This change means that only members of the administrative group wheel can switch to another user
using the su command.
NOTE
The root user is part of the wheel group by default.
5.2. THE SUDO COMMAND
The sudo command offers another approach to giving users administrative access. When trusted users
precede an administrative command with sudo, they are prompted for their own password. Then, when
they have been authenticated and assuming that the command is permitted, the administrative
command is executed as if they were the root user.
The basic format of the sudo command is as follows:
sudo command
In the above example, command would be replaced by a command normally reserved for the root user,
such as mount.
The sudo command allows for a high degree of flexibility. For instance, only users listed in the
/etc/sudoers configuration file are allowed to use the sudo command and the command is executed
in the user's shell, not a root shell. This means the root shell can be completely disabled as shown in
the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Security Guide.
Each successful authentication using the sudo command is logged to the file /var/log/messages
and the command issued along with the issuer's user name is logged to the file /var/log/secure. If
additional logging is required, use the pam_tty_audit module to enable TTY auditing for specified
users by adding the following line to your /etc/pam.d/system-auth file:
session required pam_tty_audit.so disable=pattern enable=pattern
where pattern represents a comma-separated listing of users with an optional use of globs. For
example, the following configuration will enable TTY auditing for the root user and disable it for all
other users:
session required pam_tty_audit.so disable=* enable=root
IMPORTANT
Configuring the pam_tty_audit PAM module for TTY auditing records only TTY input.
This means that, when the audited user logs in, pam_tty_audit records the exact
keystrokes the user makes into the /var/log/audit/audit.log file. For more
information, see the pam_tty_audit(8) manual page.
Another advantage of the sudo command is that an administrator can allow different users access to
specific commands based on their needs.
44
CHAPTER 5. GAINING PRIVILEGES
Administrators wanting to edit the sudo configuration file, /etc/sudoers, should use the visudo
command.
To give someone full administrative privileges, type visudo and add a line similar to the following in
the user privilege specification section:
juan ALL=(ALL) ALL
This example states that the user, juan, can use sudo from any host and execute any command.
The example below illustrates the granularity possible when configuring sudo:
%users localhost=/usr/sbin/shutdown -h now
This example states that any member of the users system group can issue the command
/sbin/shutdown -h now as long as it is issued from the console.
The man page for sudoers has a detailed listing of options for this file.
IMPORTANT
There are several potential risks to keep in mind when using the sudo command. You
can avoid them by editing the /etc/sudoers configuration file using visudo as
described above. Leaving the /etc/sudoers file in its default state gives every user in
the wheel group unlimited root access.
By default, sudo stores the password for a five minute timeout period. Any
subsequent uses of the command during this period will not prompt the user for
a password. This could be exploited by an attacker if the user leaves his
workstation unattended and unlocked while still being logged in. This behavior
can be changed by adding the following line to the /etc/sudoers file:
Defaults
timestamp_timeout=value
where value is the desired timeout length in minutes. Setting the value to 0
causes sudo to require a password every time.
If an account is compromised, an attacker can use sudo to open a new shell
with administrative privileges:
sudo /bin/bash
Opening a new shell as root in this or similar fashion gives the attacker
administrative access for a theoretically unlimited amount of time, bypassing
the timeout period specified in the /etc/sudoers file and never requiring the
attacker to input a password for sudo again until the newly opened session is
closed.
5.3. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
45
System Administrator's Guide
While programs allowing users to gain administrative privileges are a potential security risk, security
itself is beyond the scope of this particular book. You should therefore refer to the resources listed
below for more information regarding security and privileged access.
Installed Documentation
su(1) — The manual page for su provides information regarding the options available with this
command.
sudo(8) — The manual page for sudo includes a detailed description of this command and lists
options available for customizing its behavior.
pam(8) — The manual page describing the use of Pluggable Authentication Modules (PAM) for
Linux.
Online Documentation
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Security Guide — The Security Guide for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7
provides a more detailed look at potential security issues pertaining to the setuid programs
as well as techniques used to alleviate these risks.
See Also
Chapter 3, Managing Users and Groups documents how to manage system users and groups in
the graphical user interface and on the command line.
46
PART II. SUBSCRIPTION AND SUPPORT
PART II. SUBSCRIPTION AND SUPPORT
To receive updates to the software on a Red Hat Enterprise Linux system it must be subscribed to the
Red Hat Content Delivery Network (CDN) and the appropriate repositories enabled. This part describes
how to subscribe a system to the Red Hat Content Delivery Network.
Red Hat provides support via the Customer Portal , and you can access this support directly from the
command line using the Red Hat Support Tool . This part describes the use of this command-line tool.
47
System Administrator's Guide
CHAPTER 6. REGISTERING THE SYSTEM AND MANAGING
SUBSCRIPTIONS
The subscription service provides a mechanism to handle Red Hat software inventory and allows you to
install additional software or update already installed programs to newer versions using the yum
package manager. In Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 the recommended way to register your system and
attach subscriptions is to use Red Hat Subscription Management.
NOTE
It is also possible to register the system and attach subscriptions after installation
during the initial setup process. For detailed information about the initial setup see the
Initial Setup chapter in the Installation Guide for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7. Note that
the Initial Setup application is only available on systems installed with the X Window
System at the time of installation.
6.1. REGISTERING THE SYSTEM AND ATTACHING SUBSCRIPTIONS
Complete the following steps to register your system and attach one or more subscriptions using
Red Hat Subscription Management. Note that all subscription-manager commands are supposed
to be run as root.
1. Run the following command to register your system. You will be prompted to enter your user
name and password. Note that the user name and password are the same as your login
credentials for Red Hat Customer Portal.
subscription-manager register
2. Determine the pool ID of a subscription that you require. To do so, type the following at a shell
prompt to display a list of all subscriptions that are available for your system:
subscription-manager list --available
For each available subscription, this command displays its name, unique identifier, expiration
date, and other details related to your subscription. To list subscriptions for all architectures,
add the --all option. The pool ID is listed on a line beginning with Pool ID.
3. Attach the appropriate subscription to your system by entering a command as follows:
subscription-manager attach --pool=pool_id
Replace pool_id with the pool ID you determined in the previous step.
To verify the list of subscriptions your system has currently attached, at any time, run:
subscription-manager list --consumed
For more details on how to register your system using Red Hat Subscription Management and
associate it with subscriptions, see the designated solution article. For comprehensive information
about subscriptions, see the Red Hat Subscription Management collection of guides.
48
CHAPTER 6. REGISTERING THE SYSTEM AND MANAGING SUBSCRIPTIONS
6.2. MANAGING SOFTWARE REPOSITORIES
When a system is subscribed to the Red Hat Content Delivery Network, a repository file is created in
the /etc/yum.repos.d/ directory. To verify that, use yum to list all enabled repositories:
yum repolist
Red Hat Subscription Management also allows you to manually enable or disable software repositories
provided by Red Hat. To list all available repositories, use the following command:
subscription-manager repos --list
The repository names depend on the specific version of Red Hat Enterprise Linux you are using and are
in the following format:
rhel-variant-rhscl-version-rpms
rhel-variant-rhscl-version-debug-rpms
rhel-variant-rhscl-version-source-rpms
Where variant is the Red Hat Enterprise Linux system variant ( server or workstation), and version
is the Red Hat Enterprise Linux system version (6 or 7), for example:
rhel-server-rhscl-7-eus-rpms
rhel-server-rhscl-7-eus-source-rpms
rhel-server-rhscl-7-eus-debug-rpms
To enable a repository, enter a command as follows:
subscription-manager repos --enable repository
Replace repository with a name of the repository to enable.
Similarly, to disable a repository, use the following command:
subscription-manager repos --disable repository
Section 8.5, “Configuring Yum and Yum Repositories” provides detailed information about managing
software repositories using yum.
6.3. REMOVING SUBSCRIPTIONS
To remove a particular subscription, complete the following steps.
1. Determine the serial number of the subscription you want to remove by listing information
about already attached subscriptions:
subscription-manager list --consumed
The serial number is the number listed as serial. For instance, 744993814251016831 in the
example below:
SKU:
ES0113909
49
System Administrator's Guide
Contract:
Account:
Serial:
Pool ID:
Active:
Quantity Used:
Service Level:
Service Type:
Status Details:
Subscription Type:
Starts:
Ends:
System Type:
01234567
1234567
744993814251016831
8a85f9894bba16dc014bccdd905a5e23
False
1
SELF-SUPPORT
L1-L3
Standard
02/27/2015
02/27/2016
Virtual
2. Enter a command as follows to remove the selected subscription:
subscription-manager remove --serial=serial_number
Replace serial_number with the serial number you determined in the previous step.
To remove all subscriptions attached to the system, run the following command:
subscription-manager remove --all
6.4. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
For more information on how to register your system using Red Hat Subscription Management and
associate it with subscriptions, see the resources listed below.
Installed Documentation
subscription-manager(8) — the manual page for Red Hat Subscription Management
provides a complete list of supported options and commands.
Related Books
Red Hat Subscription Management collection of guides — These guides contain detailed
information how to use Red Hat Subscription Management.
Installation Guide — see the Initial Setup chapter for detailed information on how to register
during the initial setup process.
See Also
Chapter 5, Gaining Privileges documents how to gain administrative privileges by using the su
and sudo commands.
Chapter 8, Yum provides information about using the yum packages manager to install and
update software.
50
CHAPTER 7. ACCESSING SUPPORT USING THE RED HAT SUPPORT TOOL
CHAPTER 7. ACCESSING SUPPORT USING THE RED HAT
SUPPORT TOOL
The Red Hat Support Tool , in the redhat-support-tool package, can function as both an interactive
shell and as a single-execution program. It can be run over SSH or from any terminal. It enables, for
example, searching the Red Hat Knowledgebase from the command line, copying solutions directly on
the command line, opening and updating support cases, and sending files to Red Hat for analysis.
7.1. INSTALLING THE RED HAT SUPPORT TOOL
The Red Hat Support Tool is installed by default on Red Hat Enterprise Linux. If required, to ensure
that it is, enter the following command as root:
~]# yum install redhat-support-tool
7.2. REGISTERING THE RED HAT SUPPORT TOOL USING THE
COMMAND LINE
To register the Red Hat Support Tool to the customer portal using the command line, proceed as
follows:
1.
~]# redhat-support-tool config user username
Where username is the user name of the Red Hat Customer Portal account.
2.
~]# redhat-support-tool config password
Please enter the password for username:
7.3. USING THE RED HAT SUPPORT TOOL IN INTERACTIVE SHELL
MODE
To start the tool in interactive mode, enter the following command:
~]$ redhat-support-tool
Welcome to the Red Hat Support Tool.
Command (? for help):
The tool can be run as an unprivileged user, with a consequently reduced set of commands, or as root.
The commands can be listed by entering the ? character. The program or menu selection can be exited
by entering the q or e character. You will be prompted for your Red Hat Customer Portal user name
and password when you first search the Knowledgebase or support cases. Alternately, set the user
name and password for your Red Hat Customer Portal account using interactive mode, and optionally
save it to the configuration file.
7.4. CONFIGURING THE RED HAT SUPPORT TOOL
When in interactive mode, the configuration options can be listed by entering the command config -help:
51
System Administrator's Guide
~]# redhat-support-tool
Welcome to the Red Hat Support Tool.
Command (? for help): config --help
Usage: config [options] config.option
Use the 'config' command to set or get configuration file values.
Options:
-h, --help
show this help message and exit
-g, --global Save configuration option in /etc/redhat-supporttool.conf.
-u, --unset
Unset configuration option.
The configuration file options which can be set are:
user
: The Red Hat Customer Portal user.
password : The Red Hat Customer Portal password.
debug
: CRITICAL, ERROR, WARNING, INFO, or DEBUG
url
: The support services URL.
Default=https://api.access.redhat.com
proxy_url : A proxy server URL.
proxy_user: A proxy server user.
proxy_password: A password for the proxy server user.
ssl_ca
: Path to certificate authorities to trust during
communication.
kern_debug_dir: Path to the directory where kernel debug symbols should
be downloaded and cached. Default=/var/lib/redhat-supporttool/debugkernels
Examples:
- config user
- config user my-rhn-username
- config --unset user
Procedure 7.1. Registering the Red Hat Support Tool Using Interactive Mode
To register the Red Hat Support Tool to the customer portal using interactive mode, proceed as
follows:
1. Start the tool by entering the following command:
~]# redhat-support-tool
2. Enter your Red Hat Customer Portal user name:
Command (? for help): config user username
To save your user name to the global configuration file, add the -g option.
3. Enter your Red Hat Customer Portal password:
Command (? for help): config password
Please enter the password for username:
7.4.1. Saving Settings to the Configuration Files
52
CHAPTER 7. ACCESSING SUPPORT USING THE RED HAT SUPPORT TOOL
The Red Hat Support Tool , unless otherwise directed, stores values and options locally in the home
directory of the current user, using the ~/.redhat-support-tool/redhat-support-tool.conf
configuration file. If required, it is recommended to save passwords to this file because it is only
readable by that particular user. When the tool starts, it will read values from the global configuration
file /etc/redhat-support-tool.conf and from the local configuration file. Locally stored values
and options take precedence over globally stored settings.
WARNING
It is recommended not to save passwords in the global /etc/redhat-supporttool.conf configuration file because the password is just base64 encoded and
can easily be decoded. In addition, the file is world readable.
To save a value or option to the global configuration file, add the -g, --global option as follows:
Command (? for help): config setting -g value
NOTE
In order to be able to save settings globally, using the -g, --global option, the Red
Hat Support Tool must be run as root because normal users do not have the
permissions required to write to /etc/redhat-support-tool.conf.
To remove a value or option from the local configuration file, add the -u, --unset option as follows:
Command (? for help): config setting -u value
This will clear, unset, the parameter from the tool and fall back to the equivalent setting in the global
configuration file, if available.
NOTE
When running as an unprivileged user, values stored in the global configuration file
cannot be removed using the -u, --unset option, but they can be cleared, unset, from
the current running instance of the tool by using the -g, --global option
simultaneously with the -u, --unset option. If running as root, values and options
can be removed from the global configuration file using -g, --global simultaneously
with the -u, --unset option.
7.5. OPENING AND UPDATING SUPPORT CASES USING INTERACTIVE
MODE
Procedure 7.2. Opening a New Support Case Using Interactive Mode
To open a new support case using interactive mode, proceed as follows:
53
System Administrator's Guide
1. Start the tool by entering the following command:
~]# redhat-support-tool
2. Enter the opencase command:
Command (? for help): opencase
3. Follow the on screen prompts to select a product and then a version.
4. Enter a summary of the case.
5. Enter a description of the case and press Ctrl+D on an empty line when complete.
6. Select a severity of the case.
7. Optionally chose to see if there is a solution to this problem before opening a support case.
8. Confirm you would still like to open the support case.
Support case 0123456789 has successfully been opened
9. Optionally chose to attach an SOS report.
10. Optionally chose to attach a file.
Procedure 7.3. Viewing and Updating an Existing Support Case Using Interactive Mode
To view and update an existing support case using interactive mode, proceed as follows:
1. Start the tool by entering the following command:
~]# redhat-support-tool
2. Enter the getcase command:
Command (? for help): getcase case-number
Where case-number is the number of the case you want to view and update.
3. Follow the on screen prompts to view the case, modify or add comments, and get or add
attachments.
Procedure 7.4. Modifying an Existing Support Case Using Interactive Mode
To modify the attributes of an existing support case using interactive mode, proceed as follows:
1. Start the tool by entering the following command:
~]# redhat-support-tool
2. Enter the modifycase command:
Command (? for help): modifycase case-number
54
CHAPTER 7. ACCESSING SUPPORT USING THE RED HAT SUPPORT TOOL
Where case-number is the number of the case you want to view and update.
3. The modify selection list appears:
Type the number of the attribute to modify or 'e' to return to the
previous menu.
1 Modify Type
2 Modify Severity
3 Modify Status
4 Modify Alternative-ID
5 Modify Product
6 Modify Version
End of options.
Follow the on screen prompts to modify one or more of the options.
4. For example, to modify the status, enter 3:
Selection: 3
1
Waiting on Customer
2
Waiting on Red Hat
3
Closed
Please select a status (or 'q' to exit):
7.6. VIEWING SUPPORT CASES ON THE COMMAND LINE
Viewing the contents of a case on the command line provides a quick and easy way to apply solutions
from the command line.
To view an existing support case on the command line, enter a command as follows:
~]# redhat-support-tool getcase case-number
Where case-number is the number of the case you want to download.
7.7. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
The Red Hat Knowledgebase article Red Hat Support Tool has additional information, examples, and
video tutorials.
55
System Administrator's Guide
PART III. INSTALLING AND MANAGING SOFTWARE
All software on a Red Hat Enterprise Linux system is divided into RPM packages, which can be installed,
upgraded, or removed. This part describes how to manage packages on Red Hat Enterprise Linux using
Yum.
56
CHAPTER 8. YUM
CHAPTER 8. YUM
Yum is the Red Hat package manager that is able to query for information about available packages,
fetch packages from repositories, install and uninstall them, and update an entire system to the latest
available version. Yum performs automatic dependency resolution when updating, installing, or
removing packages, and thus is able to automatically determine, fetch, and install all available
dependent packages.
Yum can be configured with new, additional repositories, or package sources, and also provides many
plug-ins which enhance and extend its capabilities. Yum is able to perform many of the same tasks that
RPM can; additionally, many of the command-line options are similar. Yum enables easy and simple
package management on a single machine or on groups of them.
The following sections assume your system was registered with Red Hat Subscription Management
during installation as described in the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Installation Guide. If your system is
not subscribed, see Chapter 6, Registering the System and Managing Subscriptions.
IMPORTANT
Yum provides secure package management by enabling GPG (Gnu Privacy Guard; also
known as GnuPG) signature verification on GPG-signed packages to be turned on for all
package repositories (package sources), or for individual repositories. When signature
verification is enabled, yum will refuse to install any packages not GPG-signed with the
correct key for that repository. This means that you can trust that the RPM packages
you download and install on your system are from a trusted source, such as Red Hat, and
were not modified during transfer. See Section 8.5, “Configuring Yum and Yum
Repositories” for details on enabling signature-checking with yum, or Section A.3.2,
“Checking Package Signatures” for information on working with and verifying GPGsigned RPM packages in general.
Yum also enables you to easily set up your own repositories of RPM packages for download and
installation on other machines. When possible, yum uses parallel download of multiple packages and
metadata to speed up downloading.
Learning yum is a worthwhile investment because it is often the fastest way to perform system
administration tasks, and it provides capabilities beyond those provided by the PackageKit graphical
package management tools.
NOTE
You must have superuser privileges in order to use yum to install, update or remove
packages on your system. All examples in this chapter assume that you have already
obtained superuser privileges by using either the su or sudo command.
8.1. CHECKING FOR AND UPDATING PACKAGES
Yum enables you to check if your system has any updates waiting to be applied. You can list packages
that need to be updated and update them as a whole, or you can update a selected individual package.
8.1.1. Checking For Updates
To see which installed packages on your system have updates available, use the following command:
57
System Administrator's Guide
yum check-update
Example 8.1. Example output of the yum check-update command
The output of yum check-update can look as follows:
~]# yum check-update
Loaded plugins: product-id, search-disabled-repos, subscription-manager
dracut.x86_64
033-360.el7_2
rhel-7server-rpms
dracut-config-rescue.x86_64
033-360.el7_2
rhel-7-serverrpms
kernel.x86_64
3.10.0-327.el7
rhel-7server-rpms
rpm.x86_64
4.11.3-17.el7
rhel-7server-rpms
rpm-libs.x86_64
4.11.3-17.el7
rhel-7server-rpms
rpm-python.x86_64
4.11.3-17.el7
rhel-7server-rpms
yum.noarch
3.4.3-132.el7
rhel-7server-rpms
The packages in the above output are listed as having updates available. The first package in the
list is dracut. Each line in the example output consists of several rows, in case of dracut:
dracut — the name of the package,
x86_64 — the CPU architecture the package was built for,
033 — the version of the updated package to be installed,
360.el7 — the release of the updated package,
_2 — a build version, added as part of a z-stream update,
rhel-7-server-rpms — the repository in which the updated package is located.
The output also shows that we can update the kernel (the kernel package), yum and RPM
themselves (the yum and rpm packages), as well as their dependencies (such as the rpm-libs, and
rpm-python packages), all using the yum command.
8.1.2. Updating Packages
You can choose to update a single package, multiple packages, or all packages at once. If any
dependencies of the package or packages you update have updates available themselves, then they
are updated too.
Updating a Single Package
To update a single package, run the following command as root:
yum update package_name
58
CHAPTER 8. YUM
Example 8.2. Updating the rpm package
To update the rpm package, type:
~]# yum update rpm
Loaded plugins: langpacks, product-id, subscription-manager
Updating Red Hat repositories.
INFO:rhsm-app.repolib:repos updated: 0
Setting up Update Process
Resolving Dependencies
--> Running transaction check
---> Package rpm.x86_64 0:4.11.1-3.el7 will be updated
--> Processing Dependency: rpm = 4.11.1-3.el7 for package: rpm-libs4.11.1-3.el7.x86_64
--> Processing Dependency: rpm = 4.11.1-3.el7 for package: rpm-python4.11.1-3.el7.x86_64
--> Processing Dependency: rpm = 4.11.1-3.el7 for package: rpm-build4.11.1-3.el7.x86_64
---> Package rpm.x86_64 0:4.11.2-2.el7 will be an update
--> Running transaction check
...
--> Finished Dependency Resolution
Dependencies Resolved
========================================================================
=====
Package
Arch
Version
Repository
Size
========================================================================
=====
Updating:
rpm
x86_64
4.11.2-2.el7
rhel
1.1 M
Updating for dependencies:
rpm-build
x86_64
4.11.2-2.el7
rhel
139 k
rpm-build-libs
x86_64
4.11.2-2.el7
rhel
98 k
rpm-libs
x86_64
4.11.2-2.el7
rhel
261 k
rpm-python
x86_64
4.11.2-2.el7
rhel
74 k
Transaction Summary
========================================================================
=====
Upgrade 1 Package (+4 Dependent packages)
Total size: 1.7 M
Is this ok [y/d/N]:
This output contains several items of interest:
1. Loaded plugins: langpacks, product-id, subscription-manager — Yum
always informs you which yum plug-ins are installed and enabled. See Section 8.6, “Yum
Plug-ins” for general information on yum plug-ins, or Section 8.6.3, “Working with Yum
59
System Administrator's Guide
Plug-ins” for descriptions of specific plug-ins.
2. rpm.x86_64 — you can download and install a new rpm package as well as its
dependencies. Transaction check is performed for each of these packages.
3. Yum presents the update information and then prompts you for confirmation of the update;
yum runs interactively by default. If you already know which transactions the yum
command plans to perform, you can use the -y option to automatically answer yes to any
questions that yum asks (in which case it runs non-interactively). However, you should
always examine which changes yum plans to make to the system so that you can easily
troubleshoot any problems that might arise. You can also choose to download the package
without installing it. To do so, select the d option at the download prompt. This launches a
background download of the selected package.
If a transaction fails, you can view yum transaction history by using the yum history
command as described in Section 8.4, “Working with Transaction History”.
IMPORTANT
Yum always installs a new kernel regardless of whether you are using the yum update
or yum install command.
When using RPM, on the other hand, it is important to use the rpm -i kernel
command which installs a new kernel instead of rpm -u kernel which replaces the
current kernel. See Section A.2.1, “Installing and Upgrading Packages” for more
information on installing and upgrading kernels with RPM.
Similarly, it is possible to update a package group. Type as root:
yum group update group_name
Here, replace group_name with a name of the package group you want to update. For more information
on package groups, see Section 8.3, “Working with Package Groups” .
Yum also offers the upgrade command that is equal to update with enabled obsoletes
configuration option (see Section 8.5.1, “Setting [main] Options”). By default, obsoletes is turned on
in /etc/yum.conf, which makes these two commands equivalent.
Updating All Packages and Their Dependencies
To update all packages and their dependencies, use the yum update command without any
arguments:
yum update
Updating Security-Related Packages
If packages have security updates available, you can update only these packages to their latest
versions. Type as root:
yum update --security
You can also update packages only to versions containing the latest security updates. Type as root:
60
CHAPTER 8. YUM
yum update-minimal --security
For example, assume that:
the kernel-3.10.0-1 package is installed on your system;
the kernel-3.10.0-2 package was released as a security update;
the kernel-3.10.0-3 package was released as a bug fix update.
Then yum update-minimal --security updates the package to kernel-3.10.0-2, and yum
update --security updates the package to kernel-3.10.0-3.
8.1.3. Preserving Configuration File Changes
You will inevitably make changes to the configuration files installed by packages as you use your
Red Hat Enterprise Linux system. RPM, which yum uses to perform changes to the system, provides a
mechanism for ensuring their integrity. See Section A.2.1, “Installing and Upgrading Packages” for
details on how to manage changes to configuration files across package upgrades.
8.1.4. Upgrading the System Off-line with ISO and Yum
For systems that are disconnected from the Internet or Red Hat Network, using the yum update
command with the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation ISO image is an easy and quick way to
upgrade systems to the latest minor version. The following steps illustrate the upgrading process:
1. Create a target directory to mount your ISO image. This directory is not automatically created
when mounting, so create it before proceeding to the next step. As root, type:
mkdir mount_dir
Replace mount_dir with a path to the mount directory. Typically, users create it as a
subdirectory in the /media directory.
2. Mount the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 installation ISO image to the previously created target
directory. As root, type:
mount -o loop iso_name mount_dir
Replace iso_name with a path to your ISO image and mount_dir with a path to the target
directory. Here, the -o loop option is required to mount the file as a block device.
3. Copy the media.repo file from the mount directory to the /etc/yum.repos.d/ directory.
Note that configuration files in this directory must have the .repo extension to function
properly.
cp mount_dir/media.repo /etc/yum.repos.d/new.repo
This creates a configuration file for the yum repository. Replace new.repo with the filename,
for example rhel7.repo.
4. Edit the new configuration file so that it points to the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation ISO.
Add the following line into the /etc/yum.repos.d/new.repo file:
61
System Administrator's Guide
baseurl=file:///mount_dir
Replace mount_dir with a path to the mount point.
5. Update all yum repositories including /etc/yum.repos.d/new.repo created in previous
steps. As root, type:
yum update
This upgrades your system to the version provided by the mounted ISO image.
6. After successful upgrade, you can unmount the ISO image. As root, type:
umount mount_dir
where mount_dir is a path to your mount directory. Also, you can remove the mount directory
created in the first step. As root, type:
rmdir mount_dir
7. If you will not use the previously created configuration file for another installation or update,
you can remove it. As root, type:
rm /etc/yum.repos.d/new.repo
Example 8.3. Upgrading from Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7.0 to 7.1
If required to upgrade a system without access to the Internet using an ISO image with the newer
version of the system, called for example rhel-server-7.1-x86_64-dvd.iso, create a target
directory for mounting, such as /media/rhel7/. As root, change into the directory with your ISO
image and type:
~]# mount -o loop rhel-server-7.1-x86_64-dvd.iso /media/rhel7/
Then set up a yum repository for your image by copying the media.repo file from the mount
directory:
~]# cp /media/rhel7/media.repo /etc/yum.repos.d/rhel7.repo
To make yum recognize the mount point as a repository, add the following line into the
/etc/yum.repos.d/rhel7.repo copied in the previous step:
baseurl=file:///media/rhel7/
Now, updating the yum repository will upgrade your system to a version provided by rhelserver-7.1-x86_64-dvd.iso. As root, execute:
~]# yum update
When your system is successfully upgraded, you can unmount the image, remove the target
directory and the configuration file:
62
CHAPTER 8. YUM
~]# umount /media/rhel7/
~]# rmdir /media/rhel7/
~]# rm /etc/yum.repos.d/rhel7.repo
8.2. WORKING WITH PACKAGES
Yum enables you to perform a complete set of operations with software packages, including searching
for packages, viewing information about them, installing and removing.
8.2.1. Searching Packages
You can search all RPM package names, descriptions and summaries by using the following command:
yum search term…
Replace term with a package name you want to search.
Example 8.4. Searching for packages matching a specific string
To list all packages that match “vim”, “gvim”, or “emacs”, type:
~]$ yum search vim gvim emacs
Loaded plugins: langpacks, product-id, search-disabled-repos,
subscription-manager
============================= N/S matched: vim
==============================
vim-X11.x86_64 : The VIM version of the vi editor for the X Window
System
vim-common.x86_64 : The common files needed by any version of the VIM
editor
[output truncated]
============================ N/S matched: emacs
=============================
emacs.x86_64 : GNU Emacs text editor
emacs-auctex.noarch : Enhanced TeX modes for Emacs
[output truncated]
Name and summary matches mostly, use "search all" for everything.
Warning: No matches found for: gvim
The yum search command is useful for searching for packages you do not know the name of, but for
which you know a related term. Note that by default, yum search returns matches in package name
and summary, which makes the search faster. Use the yum search all command for a more
exhaustive but slower search.
Filtering the Results
All of yum's list commands allow you to filter the results by appending one or more glob expressions as
63
System Administrator's Guide
arguments. Glob expressions are normal strings of characters which contain one or more of the
wildcard characters * (which expands to match any character subset) and ? (which expands to match
any single character).
Be careful to escape the glob expressions when passing them as arguments to a yum command,
otherwise the Bash shell will interpret these expressions as pathname expansions, and potentially pass
all files in the current directory that match the global expressions to yum. To make sure the glob
expressions are passed to yum as intended, use one of the following methods:
escape the wildcard characters by preceding them with a backslash character
double-quote or single-quote the entire glob expression.
Examples in the following section demonstrate usage of both these methods.
8.2.2. Listing Packages
To list information on all installed and available packages type the following at a shell prompt:
yum list all
To list installed and available packages that match inserted glob expressions use the following
command:
yum list glob_expression…
Example 8.5. Listing ABRT-related packages
Packages with various ABRT add-ons and plug-ins either begin with “abrt-addon-”, or “abrtplugin-”. To list these packages, type the following command at a shell prompt. Note how the
wildcard characters are escaped with a backslash character:
~]$ yum list abrt-addon\* abrt-plugin\*
Loaded plugins: langpacks, product-id, search-disabled-repos,
subscription-manager
Installed Packages
abrt-addon-ccpp.x86_64
2.1.11-35.el7
@rhel-7-server-rpms
abrt-addon-kerneloops.x86_64
2.1.11-35.el7
@rhel-7-server-rpms
abrt-addon-pstoreoops.x86_64
2.1.11-35.el7
@rhel-7-server-rpms
abrt-addon-python.x86_64
2.1.11-35.el7
@rhel-7-server-rpms
abrt-addon-vmcore.x86_64
2.1.11-35.el7
@rhel-7-server-rpms
abrt-addon-xorg.x86_64
2.1.11-35.el7
@rhel-7-server-rpms
To list all packages installed on your system use the installed keyword. The rightmost column in the
output lists the repository from which the package was retrieved.
yum list installed glob_expression…
64
CHAPTER 8. YUM
Example 8.6. Listing all installed versions of the krb package
The following example shows how to list all installed packages that begin with “krb” followed by
exactly one character and a hyphen. This is useful when you want to list all versions of certain
component as these are distinguished by numbers. The entire glob expression is quoted to ensure
proper processing.
~]$ yum list installed "krb?-*"
Loaded plugins: langpacks, product-id, search-disabled-repos,
subscription-manager
Installed Packages
krb5-libs.x86_64
1.13.2-10.el7
@rhel-7-server-rpms
To list all packages in all enabled repositories that are available to install, use the command in the
following form:
yum list available glob_expression…
Example 8.7. Listing available gstreamer plug-ins
For instance, to list all available packages with names that contain “gstreamer” and then “plugin”,
run the following command:
~]$ yum list available gstreamer\*plugin\*
Loaded plugins: langpacks, product-id, search-disabled-repos,
subscription-manager
Available Packages
gstreamer-plugins-bad-free.i686
0.10.23-20.el7
rhel-7-server-rpms
gstreamer-plugins-base.i686
0.10.36-10.el7
rhel-7-server-rpms
gstreamer-plugins-good.i686
0.10.31-11.el7
rhel-7-server-rpms
gstreamer1-plugins-bad-free.i686
1.4.5-3.el7
rhel-7-server-rpms
gstreamer1-plugins-base.i686
1.4.5-2.el7
rhel-7-server-rpms
gstreamer1-plugins-base-devel.i686
1.4.5-2.el7
rhel-7-server-rpms
gstreamer1-plugins-base-devel.x86_64
1.4.5-2.el7
rhel-7-server-rpms
gstreamer1-plugins-good.i686
1.4.5-2.el7
rhel-7-server-rpms
Listing Repositories
To list the repository ID, name, and number of packages for each enabled repository on your system,
use the following command:
yum repolist
65
System Administrator's Guide
To list more information about these repositories, add the -v option. With this option enabled,
information including the file name, overall size, date of the last update, and base URL are displayed
for each listed repository. As an alternative, you can use the repoinfo command that produces the
same output.
yum repolist -v
yum repoinfo
To list both enabled and disabled repositories use the following command. A status column is added to
the output list to show which of the repositories are enabled.
yum repolist all
By passing disabled as a first argument, you can reduce the command output to disabled
repositories. For further specification you can pass the ID or name of repositories or related
glob_expressions as arguments. Note that if there is an exact match between the repository ID or
name and the inserted argument, this repository is listed even if it does not pass the enabled or disabled
filter.
8.2.3. Displaying Package Information
To display information about one or more packages, use the following command (glob expressions are
valid here as well):
yum info package_name…
Replace package_name with the name of the package.
Example 8.8. Displaying information on the abrt package
To display information about the abrt package, type:
~]$ yum info abrt
Loaded plugins: langpacks, product-id, search-disabled-repos,
subscription-manager
Installed Packages
Name
: abrt
Arch
: x86_64
Version
: 2.1.11
Release
: 35.el7
Size
: 2.3 M
Repo
: installed
From repo
: rhel-7-server-rpms
Summary
: Automatic bug detection and reporting tool
URL
: https://fedorahosted.org/abrt/
License
: GPLv2+
Description : abrt is a tool to help users to detect defects in
applications and
: to create a bug report with all information needed by
maintainer to fix
: it. It uses plugin system to extend its functionality.
66
CHAPTER 8. YUM
The yum info package_name command is similar to the rpm -q --info package_name
command, but provides as additional information the name of the yum repository the RPM package
was installed from (look for the From repo: line in the output).
Using yumdb
You can also query the yum database for alternative and useful information about a package by using
the following command:
yumdb info package_name
This command provides additional information about a package, including the check sum of the
package (and the algorithm used to produce it, such as SHA-256), the command given on the
command line that was invoked to install the package (if any), and the reason why the package is
installed on the system (where user indicates it was installed by the user, and dep means it was
brought in as a dependency).
Example 8.9. Querying yumdb for information on the yum package
To display additional information about the yum package, type:
~]$ yumdb info yum
Loaded plugins: langpacks, product-id
yum-3.4.3-132.el7.noarch
changed_by = 1000
checksum_data =
a9d0510e2ff0d04d04476c693c0313a11379053928efd29561f9a837b3d9eb02
checksum_type = sha256
command_line = upgrade
from_repo = rhel-7-server-rpms
from_repo_revision = 1449144806
from_repo_timestamp = 1449144805
installed_by = 4294967295
origin_url =
https://cdn.redhat.com/content/dist/rhel/server/7/7Server/x86_64/os/Pack
ages/yum-3.4.3-132.el7.noarch.rpm
reason = user
releasever = 7Server
var_uuid = 147a7d49-b60a-429f-8d8f-3edb6ce6f4a1
For more information on the yumdb command, see the yumdb(8) manual page.
8.2.4. Installing Packages
To install a single package and all of its non-installed dependencies, enter a command in the following
form as root:
yum install package_name
You can also install multiple packages simultaneously by appending their names as arguments. To do
so, type as root:
yum install package_name package_name…
67
System Administrator's Guide
If you are installing packages on a multilib system, such as an AMD64 or Intel 64 machine, you can
specify the architecture of the package (as long as it is available in an enabled repository) by
appending .arch to the package name:
yum install package_name.arch
Example 8.10. Installing packages on multilib system
To install the sqlite package for the i686 architecture, type:
~]# yum install sqlite.i686
You can use glob expressions to quickly install multiple similarly named packages. Execute as root:
yum install glob_expression…
Example 8.11. Installing all audacious plugins
Global expressions are useful when you want to install several packages with similar names. To
install all audacious plug-ins, use the command in the following form:
~]# yum install audacious-plugins-\*
In addition to package names and glob expressions, you can also provide file names to yum install.
If you know the name of the binary you want to install, but not its package name, you can give yum
install the path name. As root, type:
yum install /usr/sbin/named
Yum then searches through its package lists, finds the package which provides /usr/sbin/named, if
any, and prompts you as to whether you want to install it.
As you can see in the above examples, the yum install command does not require strictly defined
arguments. It can process various formats of package names and glob expressions, which makes
installation easier for users. On the other hand, it takes some time until yum parses the input correctly,
especially if you specify a large number of packages. To optimize the package search, you can use the
following commands to explicitly define how to parse the arguments:
yum install-n name
yum install-na name.architecture
yum install-nevra name-epoch:version-release.architecture
With install-n, yum interprets name as the exact name of the package. The install-na command
tells yum that the subsequent argument contains the package name and architecture divided by the
dot character. With install-nevra, yum will expect an argument in the form name-epoch:versionrelease.architecture. Similarly, you can use yum remove-n, yum remove-na, and yum removenevra when searching for packages to be removed.
68
CHAPTER 8. YUM
NOTE
If you know you want to install the package that contains the named binary, but you do
not know in which bin/ or sbin/ directory the file is installed, use the yum provides
command with a glob expression:
~]# yum provides "*bin/named"
Loaded plugins: langpacks, product-id, search-disabled-repos,
subscription: manager
32:bind-9.9.4-14.el7.x86_64 : The Berkeley Internet Name Domain
(BIND) DNS
: (Domain Name System) server
Repo
: rhel-7-server-rpms
Matched from:
Filename
: /usr/sbin/named
yum provides "*/file_name" is a useful way to find the packages that contain
file_name.
Example 8.12. Installation Process
The following example provides an overview of installation with use of yum. To download and install
the latest version of the httpd package, execute as root:
~]# yum install httpd
Loaded plugins: langpacks, product-id, subscription-manager
Resolving Dependencies
--> Running transaction check
---> Package httpd.x86_64 0:2.4.6-12.el7 will be updated
---> Package httpd.x86_64 0:2.4.6-13.el7 will be an update
--> Processing Dependency: 2.4.6-13.el7 for package: httpd-2.4.613.el7.x86_64
--> Running transaction check
---> Package httpd-tools.x86_64 0:2.4.6-12.el7 will be updated
---> Package httpd-tools.x86_64 0:2.4.6-13.el7 will be an update
--> Finished Dependency Resolution
Dependencies Resolved
After executing the above command, yum loads the necessary plug-ins and runs the transaction
check. In this case, httpd is already installed. Since the installed package is older than the latest
currently available version, it will be updated. The same applies to the httpd-tools package that
httpd depends on. Then, a transaction summary is displayed:
========================================================================
========
Package
Arch
Version
Repository
Size
========================================================================
========
Updating:
httpd
x86_64
2.4.6-13.el7
rhel-x86_64-server-7
69
System Administrator's Guide
1.2 M
Updating for dependencies:
httpd-tools
x86_64
2.4.6-13.el7
77 k
rhel-x86_64-server-7
Transaction Summary
========================================================================
========
Upgrade 1 Package (+1 Dependent package)
Total size: 1.2 M
Is this ok [y/d/N]:
In this step yum prompts you to confirm the installation. Apart from y (yes) and N (no) options, you
can choose d (download only) to download the packages but not to install them directly. If you
choose y, the installation proceeds with the following messages until it is finished successfully.
Downloading packages:
Running transaction check
Running transaction test
Transaction test succeeded
Running transaction
Updating
: httpd-tools-2.4.6-13.el7.x86_64
1/4
Updating
: httpd-2.4.6-13.el7.x86_64
2/4
Cleanup
: httpd-2.4.6-12.el7.x86_64
3/4
Cleanup
: httpd-tools-2.4.6-12.el7.x86_64
4/4
Verifying : httpd-2.4.6-13.el7.x86_64
1/4
Verifying : httpd-tools-2.4.6-13.el7.x86_64
2/4
Verifying : httpd-tools-2.4.6-12.el7.x86_64
3/4
Verifying : httpd-2.4.6-12.el7.x86_64
4/4
Updated:
httpd.x86_64 0:2.4.6-13.el7
Dependency Updated:
httpd-tools.x86_64 0:2.4.6-13.el7
Complete!
To install a previously downloaded package from the local directory on your system, use the following
command:
yum localinstall path
Replace path with the path to the package you want to install.
70
CHAPTER 8. YUM
8.2.5. Downloading Packages
As shown in Example 8.12, “Installation Process” , at a certain point of installation process you are
prompted to confirm the installation with the following message:
...
Total size: 1.2 M
Is this ok [y/d/N]:
...
With the d option, yum downloads the packages without installing them immediately. You can install
these packages later offline with the yum localinstall command or you can share them with a
different device. Downloaded packages are saved in one of the subdirectories of the cache directory,
by default /var/cache/yum/$basearch/$releasever/packages/. The downloading proceeds in
background mode so that you can use yum for other operations in parallel.
8.2.6. Removing Packages
Similarly to package installation, yum enables you to uninstall them. To uninstall a particular package,
as well as any packages that depend on it, run the following command as root:
yum remove package_name…
As when you install multiple packages, you can remove several at once by adding more package
names to the command.
Example 8.13. Removing several packages
To remove totem, type the following at a shell prompt:
~]# yum remove totem
Similar to install, remove can take these arguments:
package names
glob expressions
file lists
package provides
71
System Administrator's Guide
WARNING
Yum is not able to remove a package without also removing packages which
depend on it. This type of operation, which can only be performed by RPM, is not
advised, and can potentially leave your system in a non-functioning state or cause
applications to not work correctly or crash. For further information, see
Section A.2.2, “Uninstalling Packages” in the RPM chapter.
8.3. WORKING WITH PACKAGE GROUPS
A package group is a collection of packages that serve a common purpose, for instance System Tools or
Sound and Video. Installing a package group pulls a set of dependent packages, saving time
considerably. The yum groups command is a top-level command that covers all the operations that
act on package groups in yum.
8.3.1. Listing Package Groups
The summary option is used to view the number of installed groups, available groups, available
environment groups, and both installed and available language groups:
yum groups summary
Example 8.14. Example output of yum groups summary
~]$ yum groups summary
Loaded plugins: langpacks, product-id, subscription-manager
Available Environment Groups: 12
Installed Groups: 10
Available Groups: 12
To list all package groups from yum repositories add the list option. You can filter the command
output by group names.
yum group list glob_expression…
Several optional arguments can be passed to this command, including hidden to list also groups not
marked as user visible, and ids to list group IDs. You can add language, environment, installed,
or available options to reduce the command output to a specific group type.
To list mandatory and optional packages contained in a particular group, use the following command:
yum group info glob_expression…
Example 8.15. Viewing information on the LibreOffice package group
~]$ yum group info LibreOffice
72
CHAPTER 8. YUM
Loaded plugins: langpacks, product-id, subscription-manager
Group: LibreOffice
Group-Id: libreoffice
Description: LibreOffice Productivity Suite
Mandatory Packages:
=libreoffice-calc
libreoffice-draw
-libreoffice-emailmerge
libreoffice-graphicfilter
=libreoffice-impress
=libreoffice-math
=libreoffice-writer
+libreoffice-xsltfilter
Optional Packages:
libreoffice-base
libreoffice-pyuno
As you can see in the above example, the packages included in the package group can have different
states that are marked with the following symbols:
" - " — Package is not installed and it will not be installed as a part of the package group.
" + " — Package is not installed but it will be installed on the next yum upgrade or yum group
upgrade.
" = " — Package is installed and it was installed as a part of the package group.
no symbol — Package is installed but it was installed outside of the package group. This means
that the yum group remove will not remove these packages.
These distinctions take place only when the group_command configuration parameter is set to
objects, which is the default setting. Set this parameter to a different value if you do not want yum to
track if a package was installed as a part of the group or separately, which will make "no symbol"
packages equivalent to "=" packages.
You can alter the above package states using the yum group mark command. For example, yum
group mark packages marks any given installed packages as members of a specified group. To
avoid installation of new packages on group update, use yum group mark blacklist. See the
yum(8) man page for more information on capabilities of yum group mark.
NOTE
You can identify an environmental group with use of the @^ prefix and a package group
can be marked with @. When using yum group list, info, install, or remove, pass
@group_name to specify a package group, @^group_name to specify an environmental
group, or group_name to include both.
8.3.2. Installing a Package Group
Each package group has a name and a group ID (groupid). To list the names of all package groups, and
their group IDs, which are displayed in parentheses, type:
73
System Administrator's Guide
yum group list ids
Example 8.16. Finding name and groupid of a package group
To find the name or ID of a package group, for example a group related to the KDE desktop
environment, type:
~]$ yum group list ids kde\*
Available environment groups:
KDE Plasma Workspaces (kde-desktop-environment)
Done
Some groups are hidden by settings in the configured repositories. For example, on a server, make
use of the hidden command option to list hidden groups too:
~]$ yum group list hidden ids kde\*
Loaded plugins: product-id, subscription-manager
Available Groups:
KDE (kde-desktop)
Done
You can install a package group by passing its full group name, without the groupid part, to the group
install command. As root, type:
yum group install "group name"
You can also install by groupid. As root, execute the following command:
yum group install groupid
You can pass the groupid or quoted group name to the install command if you prepend it with an @
symbol, which tells yum that you want to perform group install. As root, type:
yum install @group
Replace group with the groupid or quoted group name. The same logic applies to environmental groups:
yum install @^group
Example 8.17. Four equivalent ways of installing the KDE Desktop group
As mentioned before, you can use four alternative, but equivalent ways to install a package group.
For KDE Desktop, the commands look as follows:
~]#
~]#
~]#
~]#
74
yum
yum
yum
yum
group install "KDE Desktop"
group install kde-desktop
install @"KDE Desktop"
install @kde-desktop
CHAPTER 8. YUM
8.3.3. Removing a Package Group
You can remove a package group using syntax similar to the install syntax, with use of either name
of the package group or its id. As root, type:
yum group remove group_name
yum group remove groupid
Also, you can pass the groupid or quoted name to the remove command if you prepend it with an @symbol, which tells yum that you want to perform group remove. As root, type:
yum remove @group
Replace group with the groupid or quoted group name. Similarly, you can replace an environmental
group:
yum remove @^group
Example 8.18. Four equivalent ways of removing the KDE Desktop group
Similarly to install, you can use four alternative, but equivalent ways to remove a package group.
For KDE Desktop, the commands look as follows:
~]#
~]#
~]#
~]#
yum
yum
yum
yum
group remove "KDE Desktop"
group remove kde-desktop
remove @"KDE Desktop"
remove @kde-desktop
8.4. WORKING WITH TRANSACTION HISTORY
The yum history command enables users to review information about a timeline of yum
transactions, the dates and times they occurred, the number of packages affected, whether these
transactions succeeded or were aborted, and if the RPM database was changed between transactions.
Additionally, this command can be used to undo or redo certain transactions. All history data is stored
in the history DB in the /var/lib/yum/history/ directory.
8.4.1. Listing Transactions
To display a list of the twenty most recent transactions, as root, either run yum history with no
additional arguments, or type the following at a shell prompt:
yum history list
To display all transactions, add the all keyword:
yum history list all
To display only transactions in a given range, use the command in the following form:
75
System Administrator's Guide
yum history list start_id..end_id
You can also list only transactions regarding a particular package or packages. To do so, use the
command with a package name or a glob expression:
yum history list glob_expression…
Example 8.19. Listing the five oldest transactions
In the output of yum history list, the most recent transaction is displayed at the top of the list.
To display information about the five oldest transactions stored in the history data base, type:
~]# yum history list 1..5
Loaded plugins: langpacks, product-id, subscription-manager
ID
| Login user
| Date and time
| Action(s)
| Altered
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------5 | User
| 2013-07-29 15:33 | Install
|
1
4 | User
| 2013-07-21 15:10 | Install
|
1
3 | User
| 2013-07-16 15:27 | I, U
|
73
2 | System
| 2013-07-16 15:19 | Update
1
1 | System
| 2013-07-16 14:38 | Install
1106
history list
|
|
All forms of the yum history list command produce tabular output with each row consisting of the
following columns:
ID — an integer value that identifies a particular transaction.
Login user — the name of the user whose login session was used to initiate a transaction.
This information is typically presented in the Full Name form. For transactions
that were not issued by a user (such as an automatic system update), System is
used instead.
Date and time — the date and time when a transaction was issued.
Action(s) — a list of actions that were performed during a transaction as described in
Table 8.1, “Possible values of the Action(s) field” .
Altered — the number of packages that were affected by a transaction, possibly followed by
additional information as described in Table 8.2, “Possible values of the Altered field” .
Table 8.1. Possible values of the Action(s) field
76
CHAPTER 8. YUM
Action
Abbreviatio
n
Description
Downgrade
D
At least one package has been downgraded to an older version.
Erase
E
At least one package has been removed.
Install
I
At least one new package has been installed.
Obsoleting
O
At least one package has been marked as obsolete.
Reinstall
R
At least one package has been reinstalled.
Update
U
At least one package has been updated to a newer version.
Table 8.2. Possible values of the Altered field
Symbol
Description
<
Before the transaction finished, the rpmdb database was changed outside yum.
>
After the transaction finished, the rpmdb database was changed outside yum.
*
The transaction failed to finish.
#
The transaction finished successfully, but yum returned a non-zero exit code.
E
The transaction finished successfully, but an error or a warning was displayed.
P
The transaction finished successfully, but problems already existed in the rpmdb
database.
s
The transaction finished successfully, but the --skip-broken command-line
option was used and certain packages were skipped.
To synchronize the rpmdb or yumdb database contents for any installed package with the currently
used rpmdb or yumdb database, type the following:
yum history sync
To display some overall statistics about the currently used history database use the following
command:
yum history stats
Example 8.20. Example output of yum history stats
77
System Administrator's Guide
~]# yum history stats
Loaded plugins: langpacks, product-id, subscription-manager
File
: //var/lib/yum/history/history-2012-08-15.sqlite
Size
: 2,766,848
Transactions: 41
Begin time : Wed Aug 15 16:18:25 2012
End time
: Wed Feb 27 14:52:30 2013
Counts
:
NEVRAC : 2,204
NEVRA : 2,204
NA
: 1,759
NEVR
: 2,204
rpm DB : 2,204
yum DB : 2,204
history stats
Yum also enables you to display a summary of all past transactions. To do so, run the command in the
following form as root:
yum history summary
To display only transactions in a given range, type:
yum history summary start_id..end_id
Similarly to the yum history list command, you can also display a summary of transactions
regarding a certain package or packages by supplying a package name or a glob expression:
yum history summary glob_expression…
Example 8.21. Summary of the five latest transactions
~]# yum history summary 1..5
Loaded plugins: langpacks, product-id, subscription-manager
Login user
| Time
| Action(s)
|
Altered
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Jaromir ...
| Last day
| Install
|
1
Jaromir ...
| Last week
| Install
|
1
Jaromir ...
| Last 2 weeks
| I, U
|
73
System
| Last 2 weeks
| I, U
|
1107
history summary
All forms of the yum history summary command produce simplified tabular output similar to the
output of yum history list.
78
CHAPTER 8. YUM
As shown above, both yum history list and yum history summary are oriented towards
transactions, and although they allow you to display only transactions related to a given package or
packages, they lack important details, such as package versions. To list transactions from the
perspective of a package, run the following command as root:
yum history package-list glob_expression…
Example 8.22. Tracing the history of a package
For example, to trace the history of subscription-manager and related packages, type the following
at a shell prompt:
~]# yum history package-list subscription-manager\*
Loaded plugins: langpacks, product-id, search-disabled-repos,
subscription-manager
ID
| Action(s)
| Package
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2 | Updated
| subscription-manager-1.13.22-1.el7.x86_64
EE
2 | Update
|
1.15.9-15.el7.x86_64
EE
2 | Obsoleted
| subscription-manager-firstboot-1.13.221.el7.x86_64 EE
2 | Updated
| subscription-manager-gui-1.13.22-1.el7.x86_64
EE
2 | Update
|
1.15.915.el7.x86_64
EE
2 | Obsoleting
| subscription-manager-initial-setup-addon1.15.9-15.el7.x86_64 EE
1 | Install
| subscription-manager-1.13.22-1.el7.x86_64
1 | Install
| subscription-manager-firstboot-1.13.221.el7.x86_64
1 | Install
| subscription-manager-gui-1.13.22-1.el7.x86_64
history package-list
In this example, three packages were installed during the initial system installation: subscriptionmanager, subscription-manager-firstboot, and subscription-manager-gui. In the third transaction,
all these packages were updated from version 1.10.11 to version 1.10.17.
8.4.2. Examining Transactions
To display the summary of a single transaction, as root, use the yum history summary command in
the following form:
yum history summary id
Here, id stands for the ID of the transaction.
To examine a particular transaction or transactions in more detail, run the following command as
root:
yum history info id…
79
System Administrator's Guide
The id argument is optional and when you omit it, yum automatically uses the last transaction. Note
that when specifying more than one transaction, you can also use a range:
yum history info start_id..end_id
Example 8.23. Example output of yum history info
The following is sample output for two transactions, each installing one new package:
~]# yum history info 4..5
Loaded plugins: langpacks, product-id, search-disabled-repos,
subscription-manager
Transaction ID : 4..5
Begin time
: Mon Dec 7 16:51:07 2015
Begin rpmdb
: 1252:d2b62b7b5768e855723954852fd7e55f641fbad9
End time
:
17:18:49 2015 (27 minutes)
End rpmdb
: 1253:cf8449dc4c53fc0cbc0a4c48e496a6c50f3d43c5
User
: Maxim Svistunov
Return-Code
: Success
Command Line
: install tigervnc-server.x86_64
Command Line
: reinstall tigervnc-server
Transaction performed with:
Installed
rpm-4.11.3-17.el7.x86_64
@rhel-7server-rpms
Installed
subscription-manager-1.15.9-15.el7.x86_64 @rhel-7server-rpms
Installed
yum-3.4.3-132.el7.noarch
@rhel-7server-rpms
Packages Altered:
Reinstall tigervnc-server-1.3.1-3.el7.x86_64 @rhel-7-server-rpms
history info
You can also view additional information, such as what configuration options were used at the time of
the transaction, or from what repository and why were certain packages installed. To determine what
additional information is available for a certain transaction, type the following at a shell prompt as
root:
yum history addon-info id
Similarly to yum history info, when no id is provided, yum automatically uses the latest
transaction. Another way to refer to the latest transaction is to use the last keyword:
yum history addon-info last
Example 8.24. Example output of yum history addon-info
For the fourth transaction in the history, the yum history addon-info command provides the
following output:
~]# yum history addon-info 4
Loaded plugins: langpacks, product-id, subscription-manager
80
CHAPTER 8. YUM
Transaction ID: 4
Available additional history information:
config-main
config-repos
saved_tx
history addon-info
In the output of the yum history addon-info command, three types of information are available:
config-main — global yum options that were in use during the transaction. See Section 8.5.1,
“Setting [main] Options” for information on how to change global options.
config-repos — options for individual yum repositories. See Section 8.5.2, “Setting
[repository] Options” for information on how to change options for individual repositories.
saved_tx — the data that can be used by the yum load-transaction command in order to
repeat the transaction on another machine (see below).
To display a selected type of additional information, run the following command as root:
yum history addon-info id information
8.4.3. Reverting and Repeating Transactions
Apart from reviewing the transaction history, the yum history command provides means to revert or
repeat a selected transaction. To revert a transaction, type the following at a shell prompt as root:
yum history undo id
To repeat a particular transaction, as root, run the following command:
yum history redo id
Both commands also accept the last keyword to undo or repeat the latest transaction.
Note that both yum history undo and yum history redo commands only revert or repeat the
steps that were performed during a transaction. If the transaction installed a new package, the yum
history undo command will uninstall it, and if the transaction uninstalled a package the command
will again install it. This command also attempts to downgrade all updated packages to their previous
version, if these older packages are still available.
When managing several identical systems, yum also enables you to perform a transaction on one of
them, store the transaction details in a file, and after a period of testing, repeat the same transaction
on the remaining systems as well. To store the transaction details to a file, type the following at a shell
prompt as root:
yum -q history addon-info id saved_tx > file_name
Once you copy this file to the target system, you can repeat the transaction by using the following
command as root:
81
System Administrator's Guide
yum load-transaction file_name
You can configure load-transaction to ignore missing packages or rpmdb version. For more
information on these configuration options see the yum.conf(5) man page.
8.4.4. Starting New Transaction History
Yum stores the transaction history in a single SQLite database file. To start new transaction history,
run the following command as root:
yum history new
This will create a new, empty database file in the /var/lib/yum/history/ directory. The old
transaction history will be kept, but will not be accessible as long as a newer database file is present in
the directory.
8.5. CONFIGURING YUM AND YUM REPOSITORIES
NOTE
To expand your expertise, you might also be interested in the Red Hat System
Administration III (RH254) and RHCSA Rapid Track (RH199) training courses.
The configuration information for yum and related utilities is located at /etc/yum.conf. This file
contains one mandatory [main] section, which enables you to set yum options that have global effect,
and can also contain one or more [repository] sections, which allow you to set repository-specific
options. However, it is recommended to define individual repositories in new or existing .repo files in
the /etc/yum.repos.d/ directory. The values you define in individual [repository] sections of
the /etc/yum.conf file override values set in the [main] section.
This section shows you how to:
set global yum options by editing the [main] section of the /etc/yum.conf configuration
file;
set options for individual repositories by editing the [repository] sections in
/etc/yum.conf and .repo files in the /etc/yum.repos.d/ directory;
use yum variables in /etc/yum.conf and files in the /etc/yum.repos.d/ directory so that
dynamic version and architecture values are handled correctly;
add, enable, and disable yum repositories on the command line; and
set up your own custom yum repository.
8.5.1. Setting [main] Options
The /etc/yum.conf configuration file contains exactly one [main] section, and while some of the
key-value pairs in this section affect how yum operates, others affect how yum treats repositories. You
can add many additional options under the [main] section heading in /etc/yum.conf.
A sample /etc/yum.conf configuration file can look like this:
82
CHAPTER 8. YUM
[main]
cachedir=/var/cache/yum/$basearch/$releasever
keepcache=0
debuglevel=2
logfile=/var/log/yum.log
exactarch=1
obsoletes=1
gpgcheck=1
plugins=1
installonly_limit=3
[comments abridged]
# PUT YOUR REPOS HERE OR IN separate files named file.repo
# in /etc/yum.repos.d
The following are the most commonly used options in the [main] section:
assumeyes=value
The assumeyes option determines whether or not yum prompts for confirmation of critical actions.
Replace value with one of:
0 (default) — yum prompts for confirmation of critical actions it performs.
1 — Do not prompt for confirmation of critical yum actions. If assumeyes=1 is set, yum behaves in
the same way as the command-line options -y and --assumeyes.
cachedir=directory
Use this option to set the directory where yum stores its cache and database files. Replace
directory with an absolute path to the directory. By default, yum's cache directory is
/var/cache/yum/$basearch/$releasever/.
See Section 8.5.3, “Using Yum Variables” for descriptions of the $basearch and $releasever
yum variables.
debuglevel=value
This option specifies the detail of debugging output produced by yum. Here, value is an integer
between 1 and 10. Setting a higher debuglevel value causes yum to display more detailed
debugging output. debuglevel=2 is the default, while debuglevel=0 disables debugging output.
exactarch=value
With this option, you can set yum to consider the exact architecture when updating already
installed packages. Replace value with:
0 — Do not take into account the exact architecture when updating packages.
1 (default) — Consider the exact architecture when updating packages. With this setting, yum does
not install a package for 32-bit architecture to update a package already installed on the system
with 64-bit architecture.
exclude=package_name [more_package_names]
83
System Administrator's Guide
The exclude option enables you to exclude packages by keyword during installation or system
update. Listing multiple packages for exclusion can be accomplished by quoting a space-delimited
list of packages. Shell glob expressions using wildcards (for example, * and ?) are allowed.
gpgcheck=value
Use the gpgcheck option to specify if yum should perform a GPG signature check on packages.
Replace value with:
0 — Disable GPG signature-checking on packages in all repositories, including local package
installation.
1 (default) — Enable checking of GPG signature on all packages in all repositories, including local
package installation. With gpgcheck enabled, all packages' signatures are checked.
If this option is set in the [main] section of the /etc/yum.conf file, it sets the GPG-checking rule
for all repositories. However, you can also set gpgcheck=value for individual repositories instead;
that is, you can enable GPG-checking on one repository while disabling it on another. Setting
gpgcheck=value for an individual repository in its corresponding .repo file overrides the default
if it is present in /etc/yum.conf.
For more information on GPG signature-checking, see Section A.3.2, “Checking Package
Signatures”.
group_command=value
Use the group_command option to specify how the yum group install, yum group upgrade,
and yum group remove commands handle a package group. Replace value with on of:
simple — Install all members of a package group. Upgrade only previously installed packages, but
do not install packages that have been added to the group in the meantime.
compat — Similar to simple but yum upgrade also installs packages that were added to the
group since the previous upgrade.
objects — (default.) With this option, yum keeps track of the previously installed groups and
distinguishes between packages installed as a part of the group and packages installed separately.
See Example 8.15, “Viewing information on the LibreOffice package group”
group_package_types=package_type [more_package_types]
Here you can specify which type of packages (optional, default or mandatory) is installed when the
yum group install command is called. The default and mandatory package types are chosen by
default.
history_record=value
With this option, you can set yum to record transaction history. Replace value with one of:
0 — yum should not record history entries for transactions.
1 (default) — yum should record history entries for transactions. This operation takes certain
amount of disk space, and some extra time in the transactions, but it provides a lot of information
about past operations, which can be displayed with the yum history command.
history_record=1 is the default.
84
CHAPTER 8. YUM
For more information on the yum history command, see Section 8.4, “Working with Transaction
History”.
NOTE
Yum uses history records to detect modifications to the rpmdb data base that have
been done outside of yum. In such case, yum displays a warning and automatically
searches for possible problems caused by altering rpmdb. With history_record
turned off, yum is not able to detect these changes and no automatic checks are
performed.
installonlypkgs=space separated list of packages
Here you can provide a space-separated list of packages which yum can install, but will never
update. See the yum.conf(5) manual page for the list of packages which are install-only by default.
If you add the installonlypkgs directive to /etc/yum.conf, you should ensure that you list all
of the packages that should be install-only, including any of those listed under the
installonlypkgs section of yum.conf(5). In particular, kernel packages should always be listed
in installonlypkgs (as they are by default), and installonly_limit should always be set to a
value greater than 2 so that a backup kernel is always available in case the default one fails to boot.
installonly_limit=value
This option sets how many packages listed in the installonlypkgs directive can be installed at
the same time. Replace value with an integer representing the maximum number of versions that
can be installed simultaneously for any single package listed in installonlypkgs.
The defaults for the installonlypkgs directive include several different kernel packages, so be
aware that changing the value of installonly_limit also affects the maximum number of
installed versions of any single kernel package. The default value listed in /etc/yum.conf is
installonly_limit=3, and it is not recommended to decrease this value, particularly below 2.
keepcache=value
The keepcache option determines whether yum keeps the cache of headers and packages after
successful installation. Here, value is one of:
0 (default) — Do not retain the cache of headers and packages after a successful installation.
1 — Retain the cache after a successful installation.
logfile=file_name
To specify the location for logging output, replace file_name with an absolute path to the file in
which yum should write its logging output. By default, yum logs to /var/log/yum.log.
max_connenctions=number
Here value stands for the maximum number of simultaneous connections, default is 5.
multilib_policy=value
The multilib_policy option sets the installation behavior if several architecture versions are
available for package install. Here, value stands for:
85
System Administrator's Guide
best — install the best-choice architecture for this system. For example, setting
multilib_policy=best on an AMD64 system causes yum to install the 64-bit versions of all
packages.
all — always install every possible architecture for every package. For example, with
multilib_policy set to all on an AMD64 system, yum would install both the i686 and AMD64
versions of a package, if both were available.
obsoletes=value
The obsoletes option enables the obsoletes process logic during updates.When one package
declares in its spec file that it obsoletes another package, the latter package is replaced by the
former package when the former package is installed. Obsoletes are declared, for example, when a
package is renamed. Replace value with one of:
0 — Disable yum's obsoletes processing logic when performing updates.
1 (default) — Enable yum's obsoletes processing logic when performing updates.
plugins=value
This is a global switch to enable or disable yum plug-ins, value is one of:
0 — Disable all yum plug-ins globally.
IMPORTANT
Disabling all plug-ins is not advised because certain plug-ins provide important yum
services. In particular, product-id and subscription-manager plug-ins provide
support for the certificate-based Content Delivery Network (CDN). Disabling
plug-ins globally is provided as a convenience option, and is generally only
recommended when diagnosing a potential problem with yum.
1 (default) — Enable all yum plug-ins globally. With plugins=1, you can still disable a specific yum
plug-in by setting enabled=0 in that plug-in's configuration file.
For more information about various yum plug-ins, see Section 8.6, “Yum Plug-ins” . For further
information on controlling plug-ins, see Section 8.6.1, “Enabling, Configuring, and Disabling Yum
Plug-ins”.
reposdir=directory
Here, directory is an absolute path to the directory where .repo files are located. All .repo files
contain repository information (similar to the [repository] sections of /etc/yum.conf). Yum
collects all repository information from .repo files and the [repository] section of the
/etc/yum.conf file to create a master list of repositories to use for transactions. If reposdir is
not set, yum uses the default directory /etc/yum.repos.d/.
retries=value
This option sets the number of times yum should attempt to retrieve a file before returning an error.
value is an integer 0 or greater. Setting value to 0 makes yum retry forever. The default value is 10.
For a complete list of available [main] options, see the [main] OPTIONS section of the yum.conf(5)
manual page.
86
CHAPTER 8. YUM
8.5.2. Setting [repository] Options
The [repository] sections, where repository is a unique repository ID such as my_personal_repo
(spaces are not permitted), allow you to define individual yum repositories. To avoid conflicts, custom
repositories should not use names used by Red Hat repositories.
The following is a bare minimum example of the form a [repository] section takes:
[repository]
name=repository_name
baseurl=repository_url
Every [repository] section must contain the following directives:
name=repository_name
Here, repository_name is a human-readable string describing the repository.
baseurl=repository_url
Replace repository_url with a URL to the directory where the repodata directory of a repository is
located:
If the repository is available over HTTP, use: http://path/to/repo
If the repository is available over FTP, use: ftp://path/to/repo
If the repository is local to the machine, use: file:///path/to/local/repo
If a specific online repository requires basic HTTP authentication, you can specify your user
name and password by prepending it to the URL as username:password@link. For
example, if a repository on http://www.example.com/repo/ requires a user name of “user”
and a password of “password”, then the baseurl link could be specified as
http://user:password@www.example.com/repo/.
Usually this URL is an HTTP link, such as:
baseurl=http://path/to/repo/releases/$releasever/server/$basearch/os/
Note that yum always expands the $releasever, $arch, and $basearch variables in URLs. For
more information about yum variables, see Section 8.5.3, “Using Yum Variables” .
Other useful [repository] directive are:
enabled=value
This is a simple way to tell yum to use or ignore a particular repository, value is one of:
0 — Do not include this repository as a package source when performing updates and installs. This is
an easy way of quickly turning repositories on and off, which is useful when you desire a single
package from a repository that you do not want to enable for updates or installs.
1 — Include this repository as a package source.
87
System Administrator's Guide
Turning repositories on and off can also be performed by passing either the -enablerepo=repo_name or --disablerepo=repo_name option to yum, or through the
Add/Remove Software window of the PackageKit utility.
async=value
Controls parallel downloading of repository packages. Here, value is one of:
auto (default) — parallel downloading is used if possible, which means that yum automatically
disables it for repositories created by plug-ins to avoid failures.
on — parallel downloading is enabled for the repository.
off — parallel downloading is disabled for the repository.
Many more [repository] options exist, part of them have the same form and function as certain
[main] options. For a complete list, see the [repository] OPTIONS section of the yum.conf(5)
manual page.
Example 8.25. A sample /etc/yum.repos.d/redhat.repo file
The following is a sample /etc/yum.repos.d/redhat.repo file:
#
# Red Hat Repositories
# Managed by (rhsm) subscription-manager
#
[red-hat-enterprise-linux-scalable-file-system-for-rhel-6-entitlementrpms]
name = Red Hat Enterprise Linux Scalable File System (for RHEL 6
Entitlement) (RPMs)
baseurl = https://cdn.redhat.com/content/dist/rhel/entitlement6/releases/$releasever/$basearch/scalablefilesystem/os
enabled = 1
gpgcheck = 1
gpgkey = file:///etc/pki/rpm-gpg/RPM-GPG-KEY-redhat-release
sslverify = 1
sslcacert = /etc/rhsm/ca/redhat-uep.pem
sslclientkey = /etc/pki/entitlement/key.pem
sslclientcert = /etc/pki/entitlement/11300387955690106.pem
[red-hat-enterprise-linux-scalable-file-system-for-rhel-6-entitlementsource-rpms]
name = Red Hat Enterprise Linux Scalable File System (for RHEL 6
Entitlement) (Source RPMs)
baseurl = https://cdn.redhat.com/content/dist/rhel/entitlement6/releases/$releasever/$basearch/scalablefilesystem/source/SRPMS
enabled = 0
gpgcheck = 1
gpgkey = file:///etc/pki/rpm-gpg/RPM-GPG-KEY-redhat-release
sslverify = 1
sslcacert = /etc/rhsm/ca/redhat-uep.pem
sslclientkey = /etc/pki/entitlement/key.pem
sslclientcert = /etc/pki/entitlement/11300387955690106.pem
88
CHAPTER 8. YUM
[red-hat-enterprise-linux-scalable-file-system-for-rhel-6-entitlementdebug-rpms]
name = Red Hat Enterprise Linux Scalable File System (for RHEL 6
Entitlement) (Debug RPMs)
baseurl = https://cdn.redhat.com/content/dist/rhel/entitlement6/releases/$releasever/$basearch/scalablefilesystem/debug
enabled = 0
gpgcheck = 1
gpgkey = file:///etc/pki/rpm-gpg/RPM-GPG-KEY-redhat-release
sslverify = 1
sslcacert = /etc/rhsm/ca/redhat-uep.pem
sslclientkey = /etc/pki/entitlement/key.pem
sslclientcert = /etc/pki/entitlement/11300387955690106.pem
8.5.3. Using Yum Variables
You can use and reference the following built-in variables in yum commands and in all yum
configuration files (that is, /etc/yum.conf and all .repo files in the /etc/yum.repos.d/
directory):
$releasever
You can use this variable to reference the release version of Red Hat Enterprise Linux. Yum obtains
the value of $releasever from the distroverpkg=value line in the /etc/yum.conf
configuration file. If there is no such line in /etc/yum.conf, then yum infers the correct value by
deriving the version number from the redhat-releaseproduct package that provides the
redhat-release file.
$arch
You can use this variable to refer to the system's CPU architecture as returned when calling
Python's os.uname() function. Valid values for $arch include: i586, i686 and x86_64.
$basearch
You can use $basearch to reference the base architecture of the system. For example, i686 and
i586 machines both have a base architecture of i386, and AMD64 and Intel 64 machines have a
base architecture of x86_64.
$YUM0-9
These ten variables are each replaced with the value of any shell environment variables with the
same name. If one of these variables is referenced (in /etc/yum.conf for example) and a shell
environment variable with the same name does not exist, then the configuration file variable is not
replaced.
To define a custom variable or to override the value of an existing one, create a file with the same name
as the variable (without the “$” sign) in the /etc/yum/vars/ directory, and add the desired value on
its first line.
For example, repository descriptions often include the operating system name. To define a new
variable called $osname, create a new file with “Red Hat Enterprise Linux” on the first line and save it
as /etc/yum/vars/osname:
89
System Administrator's Guide
~]# echo "Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7" > /etc/yum/vars/osname
Instead of “Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7”, you can now use the following in the .repo files:
name=$osname $releasever
8.5.4. Viewing the Current Configuration
To display the current values of global yum options (that is, the options specified in the [main]
section of the /etc/yum.conf file), execute the yum-config-manager command with no commandline options:
yum-config-manager
To list the content of a different configuration section or sections, use the command in the following
form:
yum-config-manager section…
You can also use a glob expression to display the configuration of all matching sections:
yum-config-manager glob_expression…
Example 8.26. Viewing configuration of the main section
To list all configuration options and their corresponding values for the main section, type the
following at a shell prompt:
~]$ yum-config-manager main \*
Loaded plugins: langpacks, product-id, subscription-manager
================================== main
===================================
[main]
alwaysprompt = True
assumeyes = False
bandwith = 0
bugtracker_url = https://bugzilla.redhat.com/enter_bug.cgi?
product=Red%20Hat%20Enterprise%20Linux%206&component=yum
cache = 0
[output truncated]
8.5.5. Adding, Enabling, and Disabling a Yum Repository
NOTE
To expand your expertise, you might also be interested in the Red Hat System
Administration III (RH254) training course.
Section 8.5.2, “Setting [repository] Options” describes various options you can use to define a yum
repository. This section explains how to add, enable, and disable a repository by using the yum-
90
CHAPTER 8. YUM
config-manager command.
IMPORTANT
When the system is registered with Red Hat Subscription Management to the
certificate-based Content Delivery Network (CDN), the Red Hat Subscription
Manager tools are used to manage repositories in the
/etc/yum.repos.d/redhat.repo file.
Adding a Yum Repository
To define a new repository, you can either add a [repository] section to the /etc/yum.conf file,
or to a .repo file in the /etc/yum.repos.d/ directory. All files with the .repo file extension in this
directory are read by yum, and it is recommended to define your repositories here instead of in
/etc/yum.conf.
WARNING
Obtaining and installing software packages from unverified or untrusted software
sources other than Red Hat's certificate-based Content Delivery Network
(CDN) constitutes a potential security risk, and could lead to security, stability,
compatibility, and maintainability issues.
Yum repositories commonly provide their own .repo file. To add such a repository to your system and
enable it, run the following command as root:
yum-config-manager --add-repo repository_url
…where repository_url is a link to the .repo file.
Example 8.27. Adding example.repo
To add a repository located at http://www.example.com/example.repo, type the following at a shell
prompt:
~]# yum-config-manager --add-repo http://www.example.com/example.repo
Loaded plugins: langpacks, product-id, subscription-manager
adding repo from: http://www.example.com/example.repo
grabbing file http://www.example.com/example.repo to
/etc/yum.repos.d/example.repo
example.repo
| 413 B
00:00
repo saved to /etc/yum.repos.d/example.repo
Enabling a Yum Repository
To enable a particular repository or repositories, type the following at a shell prompt as root:
91
System Administrator's Guide
yum-config-manager --enable repository…
…where repository is the unique repository ID (use yum repolist all to list available repository
IDs). Alternatively, you can use a glob expression to enable all matching repositories:
yum-config-manager --enable glob_expression…
Example 8.28. Enabling repositories defined in custom sections of /etc/yum.conf.
To enable repositories defined in the [example], [example-debuginfo], and [examplesource]sections, type:
~]# yum-config-manager --enable example\*
Loaded plugins: langpacks, product-id, subscription-manager
============================== repo: example
==============================
[example]
bandwidth = 0
base_persistdir = /var/lib/yum/repos/x86_64/7Server
baseurl = http://www.example.com/repo/7Server/x86_64/
cache = 0
cachedir = /var/cache/yum/x86_64/7Server/example
[output truncated]
Example 8.29. Enabling all repositories
To enable all repositories defined both in the /etc/yum.conf file and in the
/etc/yum.repos.d/ directory, type:
~]# yum-config-manager --enable \*
Loaded plugins: langpacks, product-id, subscription-manager
============================== repo: example
==============================
[example]
bandwidth = 0
base_persistdir = /var/lib/yum/repos/x86_64/7Server
baseurl = http://www.example.com/repo/7Server/x86_64/
cache = 0
cachedir = /var/cache/yum/x86_64/7Server/example
[output truncated]
When successful, the yum-config-manager --enable command displays the current repository
configuration.
Disabling a Yum Repository
To disable a yum repository, run the following command as root:
yum-config-manager --disable repository…
92
CHAPTER 8. YUM
…where repository is the unique repository ID (use yum repolist all to list available repository
IDs). Similarly to yum-config-manager --enable, you can use a glob expression to disable all
matching repositories at the same time:
yum-config-manager --disable glob_expression…
Example 8.30. Disabling all repositories
To disable all repositories defined both in the /etc/yum.conf file and in the
/etc/yum.repos.d/ directory, type:
~]# yum-config-manager --disable \*
Loaded plugins: langpacks, product-id, subscription-manager
============================== repo: example
==============================
[example]
bandwidth = 0
base_persistdir = /var/lib/yum/repos/x86_64/7Server
baseurl = http://www.example.com/repo/7Server/x86_64/
cache = 0
cachedir = /var/cache/yum/x86_64/7Server/example
[output truncated]
When successful, the yum-config-manager --disable command displays the current
configuration.
8.5.6. Creating a Yum Repository
To set up a yum repository, follow these steps:
1. Install the createrepo package. To do so, type the following at a shell prompt as root:
yum install createrepo
2. Copy all packages that you want to have in your repository into one directory, such as
/mnt/local_repo/.
3. Change to this directory and run the following command:
createrepo --database /mnt/local_repo
This creates the necessary metadata for your yum repository, as well as the sqlite database
for speeding up yum operations.
8.5.7. Adding the Optional and Supplementary Repositories
The Optional and Supplementary subscription channels provide additional software packages for
Red Hat Enterprise Linux that cover open source licensed software (in the Optional channel) and
proprietary licensed software (in the Supplementary channel).
Before subscribing to the Optional and Supplementary channels see the Scope of Coverage Details . If
you decide to install packages from these channels, follow the steps documented in the article called
93
System Administrator's Guide
How to access Optional and Supplementary channels, and -devel packages using Red Hat Subscription
Manager (RHSM)? on the Red Hat Customer Portal.
8.6. YUM PLUG-INS
Yum provides plug-ins that extend and enhance its operations. Certain plug-ins are installed by default.
Yum always informs you which plug-ins, if any, are loaded and active whenever you call any yum
command. For example:
~]# yum info yum
Loaded plugins: langpacks, product-id, subscription-manager
[output truncated]
Note that the plug-in names which follow Loaded plugins are the names you can provide to the -disableplugin=plugin_name option.
8.6.1. Enabling, Configuring, and Disabling Yum Plug-ins
To enable yum plug-ins, ensure that a line beginning with plugins= is present in the [main] section
of /etc/yum.conf, and that its value is 1:
plugins=1
You can disable all plug-ins by changing this line to plugins=0.
IMPORTANT
Disabling all plug-ins is not advised because certain plug-ins provide important yum
services. In particular, the product-id and subscription-manager plug-ins provide
support for the certificate-based Content Delivery Network (CDN). Disabling plugins globally is provided as a convenience option, and is generally only recommended
when diagnosing a potential problem with yum.
Every installed plug-in has its own configuration file in the /etc/yum/pluginconf.d/ directory. You
can set plug-in specific options in these files. For example, here is the aliases plug-in's aliases.conf
configuration file:
[main]
enabled=1
Similar to the /etc/yum.conf file, the plug-in configuration files always contain a [main] section
where the enabled= option controls whether the plug-in is enabled when you run yum commands. If
this option is missing, you can add it manually to the file.
If you disable all plug-ins by setting enabled=0 in /etc/yum.conf, then all plug-ins are disabled
regardless of whether they are enabled in their individual configuration files.
If you merely want to disable all yum plug-ins for a single yum command, use the --noplugins option.
If you want to disable one or more yum plug-ins for a single yum command, add the -disableplugin=plugin_name option to the command. For example, to disable the aliases plug-in
while updating a system, type:
94
CHAPTER 8. YUM
~]# yum update --disableplugin=aliases
The plug-in names you provide to the --disableplugin= option are the same names listed after the
Loaded plugins line in the output of any yum command. You can disable multiple plug-ins by
separating their names with commas. In addition, you can match multiple plug-in names or shorten
long ones by using glob expressions:
~]# yum update --disableplugin=aliases,lang*
8.6.2. Installing Additional Yum Plug-ins
Yum plug-ins usually adhere to the yum-plugin-plugin_name package-naming convention, but not
always: the package which provides the kabi plug-in is named kabi-yum-plugins, for example. You
can install a yum plug-in in the same way you install other packages. For instance, to install the yumaliases plug-in, type the following at a shell prompt:
~]# yum install yum-plugin-aliases
8.6.3. Working with Yum Plug-ins
The following list provides descriptions and usage instructions for several useful yum plug-ins. Plugins are listed by names, brackets contain the name of the package.
search-disabled-repos (subscription-manager)
The search-disabled-repos plug-in allows you to temporarily or permanently enable disabled
repositories to help resolve dependencies. With this plug-in enabled, when Yum fails to install a
package due to failed dependency resolution, it offers to temporarily enable disabled repositories
and try again. If the installation succeeds, Yum also offers to enable the used repositories
permanently. Note that the plug-in works only with the repositories that are managed by
subscription-manager and not with custom repositories.
IMPORTANT
If yum is executed with the --assumeyes or -y option, or if the assumeyes
directive is enabled in /etc/yum.conf, the plug-in enables disabled repositories,
both temporarily and permanently, without prompting for confirmation. This may
lead to problems, for example, enabling repositories that you do not want enabled.
To configure the search-disabled-repos plug-in, edit the configuration file located in
/etc/yum/pluginconf.d/search-disabled-repos.conf. For the list of directives you can
use in the [main] section, see the table below.
Table 8.3. Supported search-disabled-repos.conf directives
Directive
Description
enabled=value
Allows you to enable or disable the plug-in. The value must be either 1
(enabled), or 0 (disabled). The plug-in is enabled by default.
95
System Administrator's Guide
Directive
Description
notify_only =value
Allows you to restrict the behavior of the plug-in to notifications only.
The value must be either 1 (notify only without modifying the behavior of
Yum), or 0 (modify the behavior of Yum). By default the plug-in only
notifies the user.
ignored_repos =repositor
Allows you to specify the repositories that will not be enabled by the
plug-in.
ies
kabi (kabi-yum-plugins)
The kabi plug-in checks whether a driver update package conforms with the official Red Hat kernel
Application Binary Interface (kABI). With this plug-in enabled, when a user attempts to install a
package that uses kernel symbols which are not on a whitelist, a warning message is written to the
system log. Additionally, configuring the plug-in to run in enforcing mode prevents such packages
from being installed at all.
To configure the kabi plug-in, edit the configuration file located in
/etc/yum/pluginconf.d/kabi.conf. A list of directives that can be used in the [main]
section is shown in the table below.
Table 8.4. Supported kabi.conf directives
Directive
Description
enabled=value
Allows you to enable or disable the plug-in. The value must be either 1
(enabled), or 0 (disabled). When installed, the plug-in is enabled by
default.
whitelists=directory
Allows you to specify the directory in which the files with supported
kernel symbols are located. By default, the kabi plug-in uses files
provided by the kernel-abi-whitelists package (that is, the
/usr/lib/modules/kabi-rhel70/ directory).
enforce=value
Allows you to enable or disable enforcing mode. The value must be either
1 (enabled), or 0 (disabled). By default, this option is commented out and
the kabi plug-in only displays a warning message.
product-id (subscription-manager)
The product-id plug-in manages product identity certificates for products installed from the
Content Delivery Network. The product-id plug-in is installed by default.
langpacks (yum-langpacks)
The langpacks plug-in is used to search for locale packages of a selected language for every
package that is installed. The langpacks plug-in is installed by default.
aliases (yum-plugin-aliases)
The aliases plug-in adds the alias command-line option which enables configuring and using
aliases for yum commands.
96
CHAPTER 8. YUM
yum-changelog (yum-plugin-changelog)
The yum-changelog plug-in adds the --changelog command-line option that enables viewing
package change logs before and after updating.
yum-tmprepo (yum-plugin-tmprepo)
The yum-tmprepo plug-in adds the --tmprepo command-line option that takes the URL of a
repository file, downloads and enables it for only one transaction. This plug-in tries to ensure the
safe temporary usage of repositories. By default, it does not allow to disable the gpg check.
yum-verify (yum-plugin-verify)
The yum-verify plug-in adds the verify, verify-rpm, and verify-all command-line options
for viewing verification data on the system.
yum-versionlock (yum-plugin-versionlock)
The yum-versionlock plug-in excludes other versions of selected packages, which enables
protecting packages from being updated by newer versions. With the versionlock command-line
option, you can view and edit the list of locked packages.
8.7. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
For more information on how to manage software packages on Red Hat Enterprise Linux, see the
resources listed below.
Installed Documentation
yum(8) — The manual page for the yum command-line utility provides a complete list of
supported options and commands.
yumdb(8) — The manual page for the yumdb command-line utility documents how to use this
tool to query and, if necessary, alter the yum database.
yum.conf(5) — The manual page named yum.conf documents available yum configuration
options.
yum-utils(1) — The manual page named yum-utils lists and briefly describes additional
utilities for managing yum configuration, manipulating repositories, and working with yum
database.
Online Resources
Yum Guides — The Yum Guides page on the project home page provides links to further
documentation.
Red Hat Customer Portal Labs — The Red Hat Customer Portal Labs includes a “Yum
Repository Configuration Helper”.
See Also
Chapter 5, Gaining Privileges documents how to gain administrative privileges by using the su
and sudo commands.
Appendix A, RPM describes the RPM Package Manager (RPM), the packaging system used by
Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
97
System Administrator's Guide
PART IV. INFRASTRUCTURE SERVICES
This part provides information on how to configure services and daemons and enable remote access to
a Red Hat Enterprise Linux machine.
98
CHAPTER 9. MANAGING SERVICES WITH SYSTEMD
CHAPTER 9. MANAGING SERVICES WITH SYSTEMD
9.1. INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEMD
Systemd is a system and service manager for Linux operating systems. It is designed to be backwards
compatible with SysV init scripts, and provides a number of features such as parallel startup of system
services at boot time, on-demand activation of daemons, support for system state snapshots, or
dependency-based service control logic. In Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7, systemd replaces Upstart as
the default init system.
Systemd introduces the concept of systemd units. These units are represented by unit configuration
files located in one of the directories listed in Table 9.2, “Systemd Unit Files Locations” , and
encapsulate information about system services, listening sockets, saved system state snapshots, and
other objects that are relevant to the init system. For a complete list of available systemd unit types,
see Table 9.1, “Available systemd Unit Types” .
Table 9.1. Available systemd Unit Types
Unit Type
File Extension
Description
Service unit
.service
A system service.
Target unit
.target
A group of systemd units.
Automount unit
.automount
A file system automount point.
Device unit
.device
A device file recognized by the kernel.
Mount unit
.mount
A file system mount point.
Path unit
.path
A file or directory in a file system.
Scope unit
.scope
An externally created process.
Slice unit
.slice
A group of hierarchically organized units that
manage system processes.
Snapshot unit
.snapshot
A saved state of the systemd manager.
Socket unit
.socket
An inter-process communication socket.
Swap unit
.swap
A swap device or a swap file.
Timer unit
.timer
A systemd timer.
Table 9.2. Systemd Unit Files Locations
99
System Administrator's Guide
Directory
Description
/usr/lib/systemd/system/
Systemd unit files distributed with installed RPM packages.
/run/systemd/system/
Systemd unit files created at run time. This directory takes
precedence over the directory with installed service unit files.
/etc/systemd/system/
Systemd unit files created by systemctl enable as well as
unit files added for extending a service. This directory takes
precedence over the directory with runtime unit files.
Overriding the Default systemd Configuration Using system.conf
The default configuration of systemd is defined during the compilation and it can be found in systemd
configuration file at /etc/systemd/system.conf. Use this file if you want to deviate from those
defaults and override selected default values for systemd units globally.
For example, to override the default value of the timeout limit, which is set to 90 seconds, use the
DefaultTimeoutStartSec parameter to input the required value in seconds.
DefaultTimeoutStartSec=required value
See also Example 9.21, “Changing the timeout limit” .
9.1.1. Main Features
In Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7, the systemd system and service manager provides the following main
features:
Socket-based activation — At boot time, systemd creates listening sockets for all system
services that support this type of activation, and passes the sockets to these services as soon
as they are started. This not only allows systemd to start services in parallel, but also makes it
possible to restart a service without losing any message sent to it while it is unavailable: the
corresponding socket remains accessible and all messages are queued.
Systemd uses socket units for socket-based activation.
Bus-based activation — System services that use D-Bus for inter-process communication can be
started on-demand the first time a client application attempts to communicate with them.
Systemd uses D-Bus service files for bus-based activation.
Device-based activation — System services that support device-based activation can be started
on-demand when a particular type of hardware is plugged in or becomes available. Systemd
uses device units for device-based activation.
Path-based activation — System services that support path-based activation can be started ondemand when a particular file or directory changes its state. Systemd uses path units for pathbased activation.
System state snapshots — Systemd can temporarily save the current state of all units or restore
a previous state of the system from a dynamically created snapshot. To store the current state
of the system, systemd uses dynamically created snapshot units.
100
CHAPTER 9. MANAGING SERVICES WITH SYSTEMD
Mount and automount point management — Systemd monitors and manages mount and
automount points. Systemd uses mount units for mount points and automount units for
automount points.
Aggressive parallelization — Because of the use of socket-based activation, systemd can start
system services in parallel as soon as all listening sockets are in place. In combination with
system services that support on-demand activation, parallel activation significantly reduces
the time required to boot the system.
Transactional unit activation logic — Before activating or deactivating a unit, systemd calculates
its dependencies, creates a temporary transaction, and verifies that this transaction is
consistent. If a transaction is inconsistent, systemd automatically attempts to correct it and
remove non-essential jobs from it before reporting an error.
Backwards compatibility with SysV init — Systemd supports SysV init scripts as described in the
Linux Standard Base Core Specification, which eases the upgrade path to systemd service units.
9.1.2. Compatibility Changes
The systemd system and service manager is designed to be mostly compatible with SysV init and
Upstart. The following are the most notable compatibility changes with regards to the previous major
release of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux system:
Systemd has only limited support for runlevels. It provides a number of target units that can be
directly mapped to these runlevels and for compatibility reasons, it is also distributed with the
earlier runlevel command. Not all systemd targets can be directly mapped to runlevels,
however, and as a consequence, this command might return N to indicate an unknown runlevel.
It is recommended that you avoid using the runlevel command if possible.
For more information about systemd targets and their comparison with runlevels, see
Section 9.3, “Working with systemd Targets”.
The systemctl utility does not support custom commands. In addition to standard commands
such as start, stop, and status, authors of SysV init scripts could implement support for
any number of arbitrary commands in order to provide additional functionality. For example,
the init script for iptables in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 could be executed with the panic
command, which immediately enabled panic mode and reconfigured the system to start
dropping all incoming and outgoing packets. This is not supported in systemd and the
systemctl only accepts documented commands.
For more information about the systemctl utility and its comparison with the earlier
service utility, see Section 9.2, “Managing System Services” .
The systemctl utility does not communicate with services that have not been started by
systemd. When systemd starts a system service, it stores the ID of its main process in order to
keep track of it. The systemctl utility then uses this PID to query and manage the service.
Consequently, if a user starts a particular daemon directly on the command line, systemctl is
unable to determine its current status or stop it.
Systemd stops only running services. Previously, when the shutdown sequence was initiated,
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 and earlier releases of the system used symbolic links located in
the /etc/rc0.d/ directory to stop all available system services regardless of their status.
With systemd, only running services are stopped on shutdown.
System services are unable to read from the standard input stream. When systemd starts a
service, it connects its standard input to /dev/null to prevent any interaction with the user.
101
System Administrator's Guide
System services do not inherit any context (such as the HOME and PATH environment
variables) from the invoking user and their session. Each service runs in a clean execution
context.
When loading a SysV init script, systemd reads dependency information encoded in the Linux
Standard Base (LSB) header and interprets it at run time.
All operations on service units are subject to a default timeout of 5 minutes to prevent a
malfunctioning service from freezing the system. This value is hardcoded for services that are
generated from initscripts and cannot be changed. However, individual configuration files can
be used to specify a longer timeout value per service, see Example 9.21, “Changing the timeout
limit”
For a detailed list of compatibility changes introduced with systemd, see the Migration Planning Guide
for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7.
9.2. MANAGING SYSTEM SERVICES
NOTE
To expand your expertise, you might also be interested in the Red Hat System
Administration II (RH134) training course.
Previous versions of Red Hat Enterprise Linux, which were distributed with SysV init or Upstart, used
init scripts located in the /etc/rc.d/init.d/ directory. These init scripts were typically written in
Bash, and allowed the system administrator to control the state of services and daemons in their
system. In Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7, these init scripts have been replaced with service units.
Service units end with the .service file extension and serve a similar purpose as init scripts. To view,
start, stop, restart, enable, or disable system services, use the systemctl command as described in
Table 9.3, “Comparison of the service Utility with systemctl ” , Table 9.4, “Comparison of the chkconfig
Utility with systemctl”, and further in this section. The service and chkconfig commands are still
available in the system and work as expected, but are only included for compatibility reasons and
should be avoided.
Table 9.3. Comparison of the service Utility with systemctl
service
systemctl
Description
service name start
systemctl start name.service
Starts a service.
service name stop
systemctl stop name.service
Stops a service.
service name restart
systemctl restart name.service
Restarts a service.
service name
condrestart
systemctl try-restart
name.service
Restarts a service only
if it is running.
service name reload
systemctl reload name.service
Reloads configuration.
102
CHAPTER 9. MANAGING SERVICES WITH SYSTEMD
service
systemctl
Description
service name status
systemctl status name.service
Checks if a service is
running.
systemctl is-active name.service
service --status-all
systemctl list-units --type
service --all
Displays the status of all
services.
Table 9.4. Comparison of the chkconfig Utility with systemctl
chkconfig
systemctl
Description
chkconfig name on
systemctl enable name.service
Enables a service.
chkconfig name off
systemctl disable name.service
Disables a service.
chkconfig --list
name
systemctl status name.service
Checks if a service is
enabled.
chkconfig --list
systemctl list-unit-files --type
service
Lists all services and
checks if they are
enabled.
chkconfig --list
systemctl list-dependencies -after
Lists services that are
ordered to start before
the specified unit.
chkconfig --list
systemctl list-dependencies -before
Lists services that are
ordered to start after
the specified unit.
systemctl is-enabled
name.service
Specifying Service Units
For clarity, all command examples in the rest of this section use full unit names with the .service file
extension, for example:
~]# systemctl stop nfs-server.service
However, the file extension can be omitted, in which case the systemctl utility assumes the
argument is a service unit. The following command is equivalent to the one above:
~]# systemctl stop nfs-server
Additionally, some units have alias names. Those names can have shorter names than units, which can
be used instead of the actual unit names. To find all aliases that can be used for a particular unit, use:
~]# systemctl show nfs-server.service -p Names
103
System Administrator's Guide
Behavior of systemctl in a chroot Environment
If you change the root directory using the chroot command, most systemctl commands refuse to
perform any action. The reason for this is that the systemd process and the user that used the
chroot command do not have the same view of the filesystem. This happens, for example, when
systemctl is invoked from a kickstart file.
The exception to this are unit file commands such as the systemctl enable and systemctl
disable commands. These commands do not need a running system and do not affect running
processes, but they do affect unit files. Therefore, you can run these commands even in chroot
environment. For example, to enable the httpd service on a system under the /srv/website1/
directory:
~]# chroot /srv/website1
~]# systemctl enable httpd.service
Created symlink /etc/systemd/system/multi-user.target.wants/httpd.service,
pointing to /usr/lib/systemd/system/httpd.service.
9.2.1. Listing Services
To list all currently loaded service units, type the following at a shell prompt:
systemctl list-units --type service
For each service unit file, this command displays its full name (UNIT) followed by a note whether the
unit file has been loaded (LOAD), its high-level ( ACTIVE) and low-level ( SUB) unit file activation state,
and a short description (DESCRIPTION).
By default, the systemctl list-units command displays only active units. If you want to list all
loaded units regardless of their state, run this command with the --all or -a command line option:
systemctl list-units --type service --all
You can also list all available service units to see if they are enabled. To do so, type:
systemctl list-unit-files --type service
For each service unit, this command displays its full name (UNIT FILE) followed by information
whether the service unit is enabled or not (STATE). For information on how to determine the status of
individual service units, see Section 9.2.2, “Displaying Service Status”.
Example 9.1. Listing Services
To list all currently loaded service units, run the following command:
~]$ systemctl list-units --type service
UNIT
LOAD
ACTIVE
abrt-ccpp.service
loaded active
coredump hook
abrt-oops.service
loaded active
watcher
abrt-vmcore.service
loaded active
for ABRT
abrt-xorg.service
loaded active
104
SUB
exited
DESCRIPTION
Install ABRT
running ABRT kernel log
exited
Harvest vmcores
running ABRT Xorg log
CHAPTER 9. MANAGING SERVICES WITH SYSTEMD
watcher
abrtd.service
loaded active running ABRT Automated Bug
Reporting Tool
...
systemd-vconsole-setup.service loaded active exited Setup Virtual
Console
tog-pegasus.service
loaded active running OpenPegasus CIM
Server
LOAD
= Reflects whether the unit definition was properly loaded.
ACTIVE = The high-level unit activation state, i.e. generalization of
SUB.
SUB
= The low-level unit activation state, values depend on unit
type.
46 loaded units listed. Pass --all to see loaded but inactive units,
too.
To show all installed unit files use 'systemctl list-unit-files'
To list all installed service unit files to determine if they are enabled, type:
~]$ systemctl list-unit-files --type service
UNIT FILE
STATE
abrt-ccpp.service
enabled
abrt-oops.service
enabled
abrt-vmcore.service
enabled
abrt-xorg.service
enabled
abrtd.service
enabled
...
wpa_supplicant.service
disabled
ypbind.service
disabled
208 unit files listed.
9.2.2. Displaying Service Status
To display detailed information about a service unit that corresponds to a system service, type the
following at a shell prompt:
systemctl status name.service
Replace name with the name of the service unit you want to inspect (for example, gdm). This command
displays the name of the selected service unit followed by its short description, one or more fields
described in Table 9.5, “Available Service Unit Information” , and if it is executed by the root user, also
the most recent log entries.
Table 9.5. Available Service Unit Information
Field
Description
Loaded
Information whether the service unit has been loaded, the absolute path to
the unit file, and a note whether the unit is enabled.
105
System Administrator's Guide
Field
Description
Active
Information whether the service unit is running followed by a time stamp.
Main PID
The PID of the corresponding system service followed by its name.
Status
Additional information about the corresponding system service.
Process
Additional information about related processes.
CGroup
Additional information about related Control Groups (cgroups).
To only verify that a particular service unit is running, run the following command:
systemctl is-active name.service
Similarly, to determine whether a particular service unit is enabled, type:
systemctl is-enabled name.service
Note that both systemctl is-active and systemctl is-enabled return an exit status of 0 if the
specified service unit is running or enabled. For information on how to list all currently loaded service
units, see Section 9.2.1, “Listing Services”.
Example 9.2. Displaying Service Status
The service unit for the GNOME Display Manager is named gdm.service. To determine the
current status of this service unit, type the following at a shell prompt:
~]# systemctl status gdm.service
gdm.service - GNOME Display Manager
Loaded: loaded (/usr/lib/systemd/system/gdm.service; enabled)
Active: active (running) since Thu 2013-10-17 17:31:23 CEST; 5min ago
Main PID: 1029 (gdm)
CGroup: /system.slice/gdm.service
├─1029 /usr/sbin/gdm
├─1037 /usr/libexec/gdm-simple-slave --display-id
/org/gno...
└─1047 /usr/bin/Xorg :0 -background none -verbose -auth
/r...
Oct 17 17:31:23 localhost systemd[1]: Started GNOME Display Manager.
Example 9.3. Displaying Services Ordered to Start Before a Service
To determine what services are ordered to start before the specified service, type the following at a
shell prompt:
~]# systemctl list-dependencies --after gdm.service
gdm.service
106
CHAPTER 9. MANAGING SERVICES WITH SYSTEMD
├─dbus.socket
├─getty@tty1.service
├─livesys.service
├─plymouth-quit.service
├─system.slice
├─systemd-journald.socket
├─systemd-user-sessions.service
└─basic.target
[output truncated]
Example 9.4. Displaying Services Ordered to Start After a Service
To determine what services are ordered to start after the specified service, type the following at a
shell prompt:
~]# systemctl list-dependencies --before gdm.service
gdm.service
├─dracut-shutdown.service
├─graphical.target
│ ├─systemd-readahead-done.service
│ ├─systemd-readahead-done.timer
│ └─systemd-update-utmp-runlevel.service
└─shutdown.target
├─systemd-reboot.service
└─final.target
└─systemd-reboot.service
9.2.3. Starting a Service
To start a service unit that corresponds to a system service, type the following at a shell prompt as
root:
systemctl start name.service
Replace name with the name of the service unit you want to start (for example, gdm). This command
starts the selected service unit in the current session. For information on how to enable a service unit
to be started at boot time, see Section 9.2.6, “Enabling a Service” . For information on how to determine
the status of a certain service unit, see Section 9.2.2, “Displaying Service Status”.
Example 9.5. Starting a Service
The service unit for the Apache HTTP Server is named httpd.service. To activate this service
unit and start the httpd daemon in the current session, run the following command as root:
~]# systemctl start httpd.service
9.2.4. Stopping a Service
107
System Administrator's Guide
To stop a service unit that corresponds to a system service, type the following at a shell prompt as
root:
systemctl stop name.service
Replace name with the name of the service unit you want to stop (for example, bluetooth). This
command stops the selected service unit in the current session. For information on how to disable a
service unit and prevent it from being started at boot time, see Section 9.2.7, “Disabling a Service” . For
information on how to determine the status of a certain service unit, see Section 9.2.2, “Displaying
Service Status”.
Example 9.6. Stopping a Service
The service unit for the bluetoothd daemon is named bluetooth.service. To deactivate this
service unit and stop the bluetoothd daemon in the current session, run the following command
as root:
~]# systemctl stop bluetooth.service
9.2.5. Restarting a Service
To restart a service unit that corresponds to a system service, type the following at a shell prompt as
root:
systemctl restart name.service
Replace name with the name of the service unit you want to restart (for example, httpd). This
command stops the selected service unit in the current session and immediately starts it again.
Importantly, if the selected service unit is not running, this command starts it too. To tell systemd to
restart a service unit only if the corresponding service is already running, run the following command
as root:
systemctl try-restart name.service
Certain system services also allow you to reload their configuration without interrupting their
execution. To do so, type as root:
systemctl reload name.service
Note that system services that do not support this feature ignore this command altogether. For
convenience, the systemctl command also supports the reload-or-restart and reload-ortry-restart commands that restart such services instead. For information on how to determine the
status of a certain service unit, see Section 9.2.2, “Displaying Service Status”.
Example 9.7. Restarting a Service
In order to prevent users from encountering unnecessary error messages or partially rendered web
pages, the Apache HTTP Server allows you to edit and reload its configuration without the need to
restart it and interrupt actively processed requests. To do so, type the following at a shell prompt as
root:
108
CHAPTER 9. MANAGING SERVICES WITH SYSTEMD
~]# systemctl reload httpd.service
9.2.6. Enabling a Service
To configure a service unit that corresponds to a system service to be automatically started at boot
time, type the following at a shell prompt as root:
systemctl enable name.service
Replace name with the name of the service unit you want to enable (for example, httpd). This
command reads the [Install] section of the selected service unit and creates appropriate symbolic
links to the /usr/lib/systemd/system/name.service file in the /etc/systemd/system/
directory and its subdirectories. This command does not, however, rewrite links that already exist. If
you want to ensure that the symbolic links are re-created, use the following command as root:
systemctl reenable name.service
This command disables the selected service unit and immediately enables it again. For information on
how to determine whether a certain service unit is enabled to start at boot time, see Section 9.2.2,
“Displaying Service Status”. For information on how to start a service in the current session, see
Section 9.2.3, “Starting a Service” .
Example 9.8. Enabling a Service
To configure the Apache HTTP Server to start automatically at boot time, run the following
command as root:
~]# systemctl enable httpd.service
Created symlink from /etc/systemd/system/multiuser.target.wants/httpd.service to
/usr/lib/systemd/system/httpd.service.
9.2.7. Disabling a Service
To prevent a service unit that corresponds to a system service from being automatically started at
boot time, type the following at a shell prompt as root:
systemctl disable name.service
Replace name with the name of the service unit you want to disable (for example, bluetooth). This
command reads the [Install] section of the selected service unit and removes appropriate symbolic
links to the /usr/lib/systemd/system/name.service file from the /etc/systemd/system/
directory and its subdirectories. In addition, you can mask any service unit to prevent it from being
started manually or by another service. To do so, run the following command as root:
systemctl mask name.service
109
System Administrator's Guide
This command replaces the /etc/systemd/system/name.service file with a symbolic link to
/dev/null, rendering the actual unit file inaccessible to systemd. To revert this action and unmask a
service unit, type as root:
systemctl unmask name.service
For information on how to determine whether a certain service unit is enabled to start at boot time, see
Section 9.2.2, “Displaying Service Status”. For information on how to stop a service in the current
session, see Section 9.2.4, “Stopping a Service”.
Example 9.9. Disabling a Service
Example 9.6, “Stopping a Service” illustrates how to stop the bluetooth.service unit in the
current session. To prevent this service unit from starting at boot time, type the following at a shell
prompt as root:
~]# systemctl disable bluetooth.service
Removed symlink
/etc/systemd/system/bluetooth.target.wants/bluetooth.service.
Removed symlink /etc/systemd/system/dbus-org.bluez.service.
9.2.8. Starting a Conflicting Service
In systemd, positive and negative dependencies between services exist. Starting particular service
may require starting one or more other services (positive dependency) or stopping one or more
services (negative dependency).
When you attempt to start a new service, systemd resolves all dependencies automatically. Note that
this is done without explicit notification to the user. If you are already running a service, and you
attempt to start another service with a negative dependency, the first service is automatically stopped.
For example, if you are running the postfix service, and you try to start the sendmail service,
systemd first automatically stops postfix, because these two services are conflicting and cannot run
on the same port.
9.3. WORKING WITH SYSTEMD TARGETS
Previous versions of Red Hat Enterprise Linux, which were distributed with SysV init or Upstart,
implemented a predefined set of runlevels that represented specific modes of operation. These
runlevels were numbered from 0 to 6 and were defined by a selection of system services to be run
when a particular runlevel was enabled by the system administrator. In Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7, the
concept of runlevels has been replaced with systemd targets.
Systemd targets are represented by target units. Target units end with the .target file extension and
their only purpose is to group together other systemd units through a chain of dependencies. For
example, the graphical.target unit, which is used to start a graphical session, starts system
services such as the GNOME Display Manager (gdm.service) or Accounts Service ( accountsdaemon.service) and also activates the multi-user.target unit. Similarly, the multiuser.target unit starts other essential system services such as NetworkManager
(NetworkManager.service) or D-Bus ( dbus.service) and activates another target unit named
basic.target.
110
CHAPTER 9. MANAGING SERVICES WITH SYSTEMD
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 is distributed with a number of predefined targets that are more or less
similar to the standard set of runlevels from the previous releases of this system. For compatibility
reasons, it also provides aliases for these targets that directly map them to SysV runlevels. Table 9.6,
“Comparison of SysV Runlevels with systemd Targets” provides a complete list of SysV runlevels and
their corresponding systemd targets.
Table 9.6. Comparison of SysV Runlevels with systemd Targets
Runlevel
Target Units
Description
0
runlevel0.target ,
poweroff.target
Shut down and power off the system.
1
runlevel1.target ,
rescue.target
Set up a rescue shell.
2
runlevel2.target , multiuser.target
Set up a non-graphical multi-user system.
3
runlevel3.target , multiuser.target
Set up a non-graphical multi-user system.
4
runlevel4.target , multiuser.target
Set up a non-graphical multi-user system.
5
runlevel5.target ,
graphical.target
Set up a graphical multi-user system.
6
runlevel6.target ,
reboot.target
Shut down and reboot the system.
To view, change, or configure systemd targets, use the systemctl utility as described in Table 9.7,
“Comparison of SysV init Commands with systemctl” and in the sections below. The runlevel and
telinit commands are still available in the system and work as expected, but are only included for
compatibility reasons and should be avoided.
Table 9.7. Comparison of SysV init Commands with systemctl
Old Command
New Command
Description
runlevel
systemctl list-units --type
target
Lists currently loaded target
units.
telinit
runlevel
systemctl isolate name.target
Changes the current target.
9.3.1. Viewing the Default Target
To determine which target unit is used by default, run the following command:
111
System Administrator's Guide
systemctl get-default
This command resolves the symbolic link located at /etc/systemd/system/default.target and
displays the result. For information on how to change the default target, see Section 9.3.3, “Changing
the Default Target”. For information on how to list all currently loaded target units, see Section 9.3.2,
“Viewing the Current Target”.
Example 9.10. Viewing the Default Target
To display the default target unit, type:
~]$ systemctl get-default
graphical.target
9.3.2. Viewing the Current Target
To list all currently loaded target units, type the following command at a shell prompt:
systemctl list-units --type target
For each target unit, this commands displays its full name (UNIT) followed by a note whether the unit
has been loaded (LOAD), its high-level ( ACTIVE) and low-level ( SUB) unit activation state, and a short
description (DESCRIPTION).
By default, the systemctl list-units command displays only active units. If you want to list all
loaded units regardless of their state, run this command with the --all or -a command line option:
systemctl list-units --type target --all
See Section 9.3.1, “Viewing the Default Target” for information on how to display the default target.
For information on how to change the current target, see Section 9.3.4, “Changing the Current
Target”.
Example 9.11. Viewing the Current Target
To list all currently loaded target units, run the following command:
~]$ systemctl list-units --type target
UNIT
LOAD
ACTIVE SUB
basic.target
loaded active active
cryptsetup.target
loaded active active
getty.target
loaded active active
graphical.target
loaded active active
local-fs-pre.target
loaded active active
local-fs.target
loaded active active
multi-user.target
loaded active active
network.target
loaded active active
paths.target
loaded active active
remote-fs.target
loaded active active
sockets.target
loaded active active
sound.target
loaded active active
spice-vdagentd.target loaded active active
112
DESCRIPTION
Basic System
Encrypted Volumes
Login Prompts
Graphical Interface
Local File Systems (Pre)
Local File Systems
Multi-User System
Network
Paths
Remote File Systems
Sockets
Sound Card
Agent daemon for Spice guests
CHAPTER 9. MANAGING SERVICES WITH SYSTEMD
swap.target
sysinit.target
time-sync.target
timers.target
loaded
loaded
loaded
loaded
active
active
active
active
active
active
active
active
Swap
System Initialization
System Time Synchronized
Timers
LOAD
= Reflects whether the unit definition was properly loaded.
ACTIVE = The high-level unit activation state, i.e. generalization of
SUB.
SUB
= The low-level unit activation state, values depend on unit
type.
17 loaded units listed. Pass --all to see loaded but inactive units,
too.
To show all installed unit files use 'systemctl list-unit-files'.
9.3.3. Changing the Default Target
To configure the system to use a different target unit by default, type the following at a shell prompt as
root:
systemctl set-default name.target
Replace name with the name of the target unit you want to use by default (for example, multi-user).
This command replaces the /etc/systemd/system/default.target file with a symbolic link to
/usr/lib/systemd/system/name.target, where name is the name of the target unit you want to
use. For information on how to change the current target, see Section 9.3.4, “Changing the Current
Target”. For information on how to list all currently loaded target units, see Section 9.3.2, “Viewing the
Current Target”.
Example 9.12. Changing the Default Target
To configure the system to use the multi-user.target unit by default, run the following
command as root:
~]# systemctl set-default multi-user.target
rm '/etc/systemd/system/default.target'
ln -s '/usr/lib/systemd/system/multi-user.target'
'/etc/systemd/system/default.target'
9.3.4. Changing the Current Target
To change to a different target unit in the current session, type the following at a shell prompt as
root:
systemctl isolate name.target
Replace name with the name of the target unit you want to use (for example, multi-user). This
command starts the target unit named name and all dependent units, and immediately stops all others.
For information on how to change the default target, see Section 9.3.3, “Changing the Default Target” .
For information on how to list all currently loaded target units, see Section 9.3.2, “Viewing the Current
Target”.
113
System Administrator's Guide
Example 9.13. Changing the Current Target
To turn off the graphical user interface and change to the multi-user.target unit in the current
session, run the following command as root:
~]# systemctl isolate multi-user.target
9.3.5. Changing to Rescue Mode
Rescue mode provides a convenient single-user environment and allows you to repair your system in
situations when it is unable to complete a regular booting process. In rescue mode, the system
attempts to mount all local file systems and start some important system services, but it does not
activate network interfaces or allow more users to be logged into the system at the same time. In
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7, rescue mode is equivalent to single user mode and requires the root
password.
To change the current target and enter rescue mode in the current session, type the following at a
shell prompt as root:
systemctl rescue
This command is similar to systemctl isolate rescue.target, but it also sends an informative
message to all users that are currently logged into the system. To prevent systemd from sending this
message, run this command with the --no-wall command line option:
systemctl --no-wall rescue
For information on how to enter emergency mode, see Section 9.3.6, “Changing to Emergency Mode”.
Example 9.14. Changing to Rescue Mode
To enter rescue mode in the current session, run the following command as root:
~]# systemctl rescue
Broadcast message from root@localhost on pts/0 (Fri 2013-10-25 18:23:15
CEST):
The system is going down to rescue mode NOW!
9.3.6. Changing to Emergency Mode
Emergency mode provides the most minimal environment possible and allows you to repair your system
even in situations when the system is unable to enter rescue mode. In emergency mode, the system
mounts the root file system only for reading, does not attempt to mount any other local file systems,
does not activate network interfaces, and only starts a few essential services. In Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 7, emergency mode requires the root password.
To change the current target and enter emergency mode, type the following at a shell prompt as root:
114
CHAPTER 9. MANAGING SERVICES WITH SYSTEMD
systemctl emergency
This command is similar to systemctl isolate emergency.target, but it also sends an
informative message to all users that are currently logged into the system. To prevent systemd from
sending this message, run this command with the --no-wall command line option:
systemctl --no-wall emergency
For information on how to enter rescue mode, see Section 9.3.5, “Changing to Rescue Mode” .
Example 9.15. Changing to Emergency Mode
To enter emergency mode without sending a message to all users that are currently logged into the
system, run the following command as root:
~]# systemctl --no-wall emergency
9.4. SHUTTING DOWN, SUSPENDING, AND HIBERNATING THE SYSTEM
In Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7, the systemctl utility replaces a number of power management
commands used in previous versions of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux system. The commands listed in
Table 9.8, “Comparison of Power Management Commands with systemctl” are still available in the
system for compatibility reasons, but it is advised that you use systemctl when possible.
Table 9.8. Comparison of Power Management Commands with systemctl
Old Command
New Command
Description
halt
systemctl halt
Halts the system.
poweroff
systemctl poweroff
Powers off the system.
reboot
systemctl reboot
Restarts the system.
pm-suspend
systemctl suspend
Suspends the system.
pm-hibernate
systemctl hibernate
Hibernates the system.
pm-suspend-hybrid
systemctl hybridsleep
Hibernates and suspends the system.
9.4.1. Shutting Down the System
The systemctl utility provides commands for shutting down the system, however the traditional
shutdown command is also supported. Although the shutdown command will call the systemctl
utility to perform the shutdown, it has an advantage in that it also supports a time argument. This is
particularly useful for scheduled maintenance and to allow more time for users to react to the warning
that a system shutdown has been scheduled. The option to cancel the shutdown can also be an
advantage.
115
System Administrator's Guide
Using systemctl Commands
To shut down the system and power off the machine, type the following at a shell prompt as root:
systemctl poweroff
To shut down and halt the system without powering off the machine, run the following command as
root:
systemctl halt
By default, running either of these commands causes systemd to send an informative message to all
users that are currently logged into the system. To prevent systemd from sending this message, run
the selected command with the --no-wall command line option, for example:
systemctl --no-wall poweroff
Using the shutdown Command
To shut down the system and power off the machine at a certain time, use a command in the following
format as root:
shutdown --poweroff hh:mm
Where hh:mm is the time in 24 hour clock format. The /run/nologin file is created 5 minutes before
system shutdown to prevent new logins. When a time argument is used, an optional message, the wall
message, can be appended to the command.
To shut down and halt the system after a delay, without powering off the machine, use a command in
the following format as root:
shutdown --halt +m
Where +m is the delay time in minutes. The now keyword is an alias for +0.
A pending shutdown can be canceled by the root user as follows:
shutdown -c
See the shutdown(8) manual page for further command options.
9.4.2. Restarting the System
To restart the system, run the following command as root:
systemctl reboot
By default, this command causes systemd to send an informative message to all users that are
currently logged into the system. To prevent systemd from sending this message, run this command
with the --no-wall command line option:
systemctl --no-wall reboot
116
CHAPTER 9. MANAGING SERVICES WITH SYSTEMD
9.4.3. Suspending the System
To suspend the system, type the following at a shell prompt as root:
systemctl suspend
This command saves the system state in RAM and with the exception of the RAM module, powers off
most of the devices in the machine. When you turn the machine back on, the system then restores its
state from RAM without having to boot again. Because the system state is saved in RAM and not on the
hard disk, restoring the system from suspend mode is significantly faster than restoring it from
hibernation, but as a consequence, a suspended system state is also vulnerable to power outages.
For information on how to hibernate the system, see Section 9.4.4, “Hibernating the System”.
9.4.4. Hibernating the System
To hibernate the system, type the following at a shell prompt as root:
systemctl hibernate
This command saves the system state on the hard disk drive and powers off the machine. When you
turn the machine back on, the system then restores its state from the saved data without having to
boot again. Because the system state is saved on the hard disk and not in RAM, the machine does not
have to maintain electrical power to the RAM module, but as a consequence, restoring the system from
hibernation is significantly slower than restoring it from suspend mode.
To hibernate and suspend the system, run the following command as root:
systemctl hybrid-sleep
For information on how to suspend the system, see Section 9.4.3, “Suspending the System” .
9.5. CONTROLLING SYSTEMD ON A REMOTE MACHINE
In addition to controlling the systemd system and service manager locally, the systemctl utility also
allows you to interact with systemd running on a remote machine over the SSH protocol. Provided that
the sshd service on the remote machine is running, you can connect to this machine by running the
systemctl command with the --host or -H command line option:
systemctl --host user_name@host_name command
Replace user_name with the name of the remote user, host_name with the machine's host name, and
command with any of the systemctl commands described above. Note that the remote machine must
be configured to allow the selected user remote access over the SSH protocol. For more information
on how to configure an SSH server, see Chapter 11, OpenSSH.
Example 9.16. Remote Management
To log in to a remote machine named server-01.example.com as the root user and determine
the current status of the httpd.service unit, type the following at a shell prompt:
~]$ systemctl -H root@server-01.example.com status httpd.service
>>>>>>> systemd unit files -- update
117
System Administrator's Guide
root@server-01.example.com's password:
httpd.service - The Apache HTTP Server
Loaded: loaded (/usr/lib/systemd/system/httpd.service; enabled)
Active: active (running) since Fri 2013-11-01 13:58:56 CET; 2h 48min
ago
Main PID: 649
Status: "Total requests: 0; Current requests/sec: 0; Current traffic:
0 B/sec"
CGroup: /system.slice/httpd.service
9.6. CREATING AND MODIFYING SYSTEMD UNIT FILES
A unit file contains configuration directives that describe the unit and define its behavior. Several
systemctl commands work with unit files in the background. To make finer adjustments, system
administrator must edit or create unit files manually. Table 9.2, “Systemd Unit Files Locations” lists
three main directories where unit files are stored on the system, the /etc/systemd/system/
directory is reserved for unit files created or customized by the system administrator.
Unit file names take the following form:
unit_name.type_extension
Here, unit_name stands for the name of the unit and type_extension identifies the unit type, see
Table 9.1, “Available systemd Unit Types” for a complete list of unit types. For example, there usually is
sshd.service as well as sshd.socket unit present on your system.
Unit files can be supplemented with a directory for additional configuration files. For example, to add
custom configuration options to sshd.service, create the sshd.service.d/custom.conf file
and insert additional directives there. For more information on configuration directories, see
Section 9.6.4, “Modifying Existing Unit Files” .
Also, the sshd.service.wants/ and sshd.service.requires/ directories can be created. These
directories contain symbolic links to unit files that are dependencies of the sshd service. The symbolic
links are automatically created either during installation according to [Install] unit file options (see
Table 9.11, “Important [Install] Section Options” ) or at runtime based on [Unit] options (see Table 9.9,
“Important [Unit] Section Options”). It is also possible to create these directories and symbolic links
manually.
Many unit file options can be set using the so called unit specifiers – wildcard strings that are
dynamically replaced with unit parameters when the unit file is loaded. This enables creation of generic
unit files that serve as templates for generating instantiated units. See Section 9.6.5, “Working with
Instantiated Units” for details.
9.6.1. Understanding the Unit File Structure
Unit files typically consist of three sections:
[Unit] — contains generic options that are not dependent on the type of the unit. These options
provide unit description, specify the unit's behavior, and set dependencies to other units. For a
list of most frequently used [Unit] options, see Table 9.9, “Important [Unit] Section Options” .
118
CHAPTER 9. MANAGING SERVICES WITH SYSTEMD
[unit type] — if a unit has type-specific directives, these are grouped under a section named
after the unit type. For example, service unit files contain the [Service] section, see Table 9.10,
“Important [Service] Section Options” for most frequently used [Service] options.
[Install] — contains information about unit installation used by systemctl enable and
disable commands, see Table 9.11, “Important [Install] Section Options” for a list of [Install]
options.
Table 9.9. Important [Unit] Section Options
Option [a]
Description
Description
A meaningful description of the unit. This text is displayed for example in the
output of the systemctl status command.
Documentation
Provides a list of URIs referencing documentation for the unit.
After[b]
Defines the order in which units are started. The unit starts only after the
units specified in After are active. Unlike Requires, After does not
explicitly activate the specified units. The Before option has the opposite
functionality to After.
Requires
Configures dependencies on other units. The units listed inRequires are
activated together with the unit. If any of the required units fail to start, the
unit is not activated.
Wants
Configures weaker dependencies thanRequires. If any of the listed units
does not start successfully, it has no impact on the unit activation. This is the
recommended way to establish custom unit dependencies.
Conflicts
Configures negative dependencies, an opposite to Requires.
[a] For a complete list of options configurable in the [Unit] section, see the systemd.unit(5) manual page.
[b] In most cases, it is sufficient to set only the ordering dependencies with After and Before unit file options. If you
also set a requirement dependency with Wants (recommended) or Requires , the ordering dependency still needs to
be specified. That is because ordering and requirement dependencies work independently from each other.
Table 9.10. Important [Service] Section Options
Option [a]
Description
119
System Administrator's Guide
Option [a]
Description
Type
Configures the unit process startup type that affects the functionality of
ExecStart and related options. One of:
simple – The default value. The process started withExecStart is the
main process of the service.
forking – The process started withExecStart spawns a child process
that becomes the main process of the service. The parent process exits
when the startup is complete.
oneshot – This type is similar tosimple , but the process exits before
starting consequent units.
dbus – This type is similar tosimple , but consequent units are started
only after the main process gains a D-Bus name.
notify – This type is similar tosimple , but consequent units are started
only after a notification message is sent via the sd_notify() function.
idle – similar to simple , the actual execution of the service binary is
delayed until all jobs are finished, which avoids mixing the status output
with shell output of services.
ExecStart
Specifies commands or scripts to be executed when the unit is started.
ExecStartPre and ExecStartPost specify custom commands to be executed
before and after ExecStart. Type=oneshot enables specifying multiple custom
commands that are then executed sequentially.
ExecStop
Specifies commands or scripts to be executed when the unit is stopped.
ExecReload
Specifies commands or scripts to be executed when the unit is reloaded.
Restart
With this option enabled, the service is restarted after its process exits, with the
exception of a clean stop by the systemctl command.
RemainAfterExi
t
If set to True, the service is considered active even when all its processes exited.
Default value is False. This option is especially useful if Type=oneshot is
configured.
[a] For a complete list of options configurable in the [Service] section, see the systemd.service(5) manual page.
Table 9.11. Important [Install] Section Options
Option [a]
Description
Alias
Provides a space-separated list of additional names for the unit. Mostsystemctl
commands, excluding systemctl enable , can use aliases instead of the actual
unit name.
120
CHAPTER 9. MANAGING SERVICES WITH SYSTEMD
Option [a]
Description
RequiredBy
A list of units that depend on the unit. When this unit is enabled, the units listed in
RequiredBy gain a Require dependency on the unit.
WantedBy
A list of units that weakly depend on the unit. When this unit is enabled, the units
listed in WantedBy gain a Want dependency on the unit.
Also
Specifies a list of units to be installed or uninstalled along with the unit.
DefaultInstanc
e
Limited to instantiated units, this option specifies the default instance for which the
unit is enabled. See Section 9.6.5, “Working with Instantiated Units”
[a] For a complete list of options configurable in the [Install] section, see the systemd.unit(5) manual page.
A whole range of options that can be used to fine tune the unit configuration, Example 9.17,
“postfix.service Unit File” shows an example of a service unit installed on the system. Moreover, unit
file options can be defined in a way that enables dynamic creation of units as described in
Section 9.6.5, “Working with Instantiated Units” .
Example 9.17. postfix.service Unit File
What follows is the content of the /usr/lib/systemd/system/postifix.service unit file as
currently provided by the postfix package:
[Unit]
Description=Postfix Mail Transport Agent
After=syslog.target network.target
Conflicts=sendmail.service exim.service
[Service]
Type=forking
PIDFile=/var/spool/postfix/pid/master.pid
EnvironmentFile=-/etc/sysconfig/network
ExecStartPre=-/usr/libexec/postfix/aliasesdb
ExecStartPre=-/usr/libexec/postfix/chroot-update
ExecStart=/usr/sbin/postfix start
ExecReload=/usr/sbin/postfix reload
ExecStop=/usr/sbin/postfix stop
[Install]
WantedBy=multi-user.target
The [Unit] section describes the service, specifies the ordering dependencies, as well as conflicting
units. In [Service], a sequence of custom scripts is specified to be executed during unit activation,
on stop, and on reload. EnvironmentFile points to the location where environment variables for
the service are defined, PIDFile specifies a stable PID for the main process of the service. Finally,
the [Install] section lists units that depend on the service.
121
System Administrator's Guide
9.6.2. Creating Custom Unit Files
There are several use cases for creating unit files from scratch: you could run a custom daemon, create
a second instance of some existing service (as in Example 9.19, “Creating a second instance of the sshd
service”), or import a SysV init script (more in Section 9.6.3, “Converting SysV Init Scripts to Unit
Files”). On the other hand, if you intend just to modify or extend the behavior of an existing unit, use
the instructions from Section 9.6.4, “Modifying Existing Unit Files” . The following procedure describes
the general process of creating a custom service:
1. Prepare the executable file with the custom service. This can be a custom-created script, or an
executable delivered by a software provider. If required, prepare a PID file to hold a constant
PID for the main process of the custom service. It is also possible to include environment files
to store shell variables for the service. Make sure the source script is executable (by executing
the chmod a+x) and is not interactive.
2. Create a unit file in the /etc/systemd/system/ directory and make sure it has correct file
permissions. Execute as root:
touch /etc/systemd/system/name.service
chmod 664 /etc/systemd/system/name.service
Replace name with a name of the service to be created. Note that file does not need to be
executable.
3. Open the name.service file created in the previous step, and add the service configuration
options. There is a variety of options that can be used depending on the type of service you
wish to create, see Section 9.6.1, “Understanding the Unit File Structure” . The following is an
example unit configuration for a network-related service:
[Unit]
Description=service_description
After=network.target
[Service]
ExecStart=path_to_executable
Type=forking
PIDFile=path_to_pidfile
[Install]
WantedBy=default.target
Where:
service_description is an informative description that is displayed in journal log files and in
the output of the systemctl status command.
the After setting ensures that the service is started only after the network is running.
Add a space-separated list of other relevant services or targets.
path_to_executable stands for the path to the actual service executable.
Type=forking is used for daemons that make the fork system call. The main process of
the service is created with the PID specified in path_to_pidfile. Find other startup types in
Table 9.10, “Important [Service] Section Options” .
WantedBy states the target or targets that the service should be started under. Think of
122
CHAPTER 9. MANAGING SERVICES WITH SYSTEMD
these targets as of a replacement of the older concept of runlevels, see Section 9.3,
“Working with systemd Targets” for details.
4. Notify systemd that a new name.service file exists by executing the following command as
root:
systemctl daemon-reload
systemctl start name.service
WARNING
Always run the systemctl daemon-reload command after creating
new unit files or modifying existing unit files. Otherwise, the systemctl
start or systemctl enable commands could fail due to a mismatch
between states of systemd and actual service unit files on disk.
The name.service unit can now be managed as any other system service with commands
described in Section 9.2, “Managing System Services” .
Example 9.18. Creating the emacs.service File
When using the Emacs text editor, it is often faster and more convenient to have it running in the
background instead of starting a new instance of the program whenever editing a file. The following
steps show how to create a unit file for Emacs, so that it can be handled like a service.
1. Create a unit file in the /etc/systemd/system/ directory and make sure it has the
correct file permissions. Execute as root:
~]# touch /etc/systemd/system/emacs.service
~]# chmod 664 /etc/systemd/system/emacs.service
2. Add the following content to the file:
[Unit]
Description=Emacs: the extensible, self-documenting text editor
[Service]
Type=forking
ExecStart=/usr/bin/emacs --daemon
ExecStop=/usr/bin/emacsclient --eval "(kill-emacs)"
Environment=SSH_AUTH_SOCK=%t/keyring/ssh
Restart=always
[Install]
WantedBy=default.target
With the above configuration, the /usr/bin/emacs executable is started in daemon mode
on service start. The SSH_AUTH_SOCK environment variable is set using the "%t" unit
specifier that stands for the runtime directory. The service also restarts the emacs process
123
System Administrator's Guide
if it exits unexpectedly.
3. Execute the following commands to reload the configuration and start the custom service:
~]# systemctl daemon-reload
~]# systemctl start emacs.service
As the editor is now registered as a systemd service, you can use all standard systemctl
commands. For example, run systemctl status emacs to display the editor's status or
systemctl enable emacs to make the editor start automatically on system boot.
Example 9.19. Creating a second instance of the sshd service
System Administrators often need to configure and run multiple instances of a service. This is done
by creating copies of the original service configuration files and modifying certain parameters to
avoid conflicts with the primary instance of the service. The following procedure shows how to
create a second instance of the sshd service:
1. Create a copy of the sshd_config file that will be used by the second daemon:
~]# cp /etc/ssh/sshd{,-second}_config
2. Edit the sshd-second_config file created in the previous step to assign a different port
number and PID file to the second daemon:
Port 22220
PidFile /var/run/sshd-second.pid
See the sshd_config(5) manual page for more information on Port and PidFile
options. Make sure the port you choose is not in use by any other service. The PID file does
not have to exist before running the service, it is generated automatically on service start.
3. Create a copy of the systemd unit file for the sshd service:
~]# cp /usr/lib/systemd/system/sshd.service
/etc/systemd/system/sshd-second.service
4. Alter the sshd-second.service created in the previous step as follows:
a. Modify the Description option:
Description=OpenSSH server second instance daemon
b. Add sshd.service to services specified in the After option, so that the second instance
starts only after the first one has already started:
After=syslog.target network.target auditd.service sshd.service
c. The first instance of sshd includes key generation, therefore remove the
ExecStartPre=/usr/sbin/sshd-keygen line.
124
CHAPTER 9. MANAGING SERVICES WITH SYSTEMD
d. Add the -f /etc/ssh/sshd-second_config parameter to the sshd command, so
that the alternative configuration file is used:
ExecStart=/usr/sbin/sshd -D -f /etc/ssh/sshd-second_config
$OPTIONS
e. After the above modifications, the sshd-second.service should look as follows:
[Unit]
Description=OpenSSH server second instance daemon
After=syslog.target network.target auditd.service sshd.service
[Service]
EnvironmentFile=/etc/sysconfig/sshd
ExecStart=/usr/sbin/sshd -D -f /etc/ssh/sshd-second_config
$OPTIONS
ExecReload=/bin/kill -HUP $MAINPID
KillMode=process
Restart=on-failure
RestartSec=42s
[Install]
WantedBy=multi-user.target
5. If using SELinux, add the port for the second instance of sshd to SSH ports, otherwise the
second instance of sshd will be rejected to bind to the port:
~]# semanage port -a -t ssh_port_t -p tcp 22220
6. Enable sshd-second.service, so that it starts automatically upon boot:
~]# systemctl enable sshd-second.service
Verify if the sshd-second.service is running by using the systemctl status command.
Also, verify if the port is enabled correctly by connecting to the service:
~]$ ssh -p 22220 user@server
If the firewall is in use, please make sure that it is configured appropriately in order to allow
connections to the second instance of sshd.
To learn how to properly choose a target for ordering and dependencies of your custom unit files, see
the following articles::
How to write a service unit file which enforces that particular services have to be started
How to decide what dependencies a systemd service unit definition should have
Additional information with some real-world examples of cases triggered by the ordering and
dependencies in a unit file is available in the following article: Is there any useful information about
writing unit files?
If you want to set limits for services started by systemd, see the Red Hat Knowledgebase article How
125
System Administrator's Guide
to set limits for services in RHEL 7 and systemd. These limits need to be set in the service's unit file.
Note that systemd ignores limits set in the /etc/security/limits.conf and
/etc/security/limits.d/*.conf configuration files. The limits defined in these files are set by
PAM when starting a login session, but daemons started by systemd do not use PAM login sessions.
9.6.3. Converting SysV Init Scripts to Unit Files
Before taking time to convert a SysV init script to a unit file, make sure that the conversion was not
already done elsewhere. All core services installed on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 come with default
unit files, and the same applies for many third-party software packages.
Converting an init script to a unit file requires analyzing the script and extracting the necessary
information from it. Based on this data you can create a unit file as described in Section 9.6.2,
“Creating Custom Unit Files”. As init scripts can vary greatly depending on the type of the service, you
might need to employ more configuration options for translation than outlined in this chapter. Note
that some levels of customization that were available with init scripts are no longer supported by
systemd units, see Section 9.1.2, “Compatibility Changes”.
The majority of information needed for conversion is provided in the script's header. The following
example shows the opening section of the init script used to start the postfix service on Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 6:
#!/bin/bash
#
# postfix
Postfix Mail Transfer Agent
#
# chkconfig: 2345 80 30
# description: Postfix is a Mail Transport Agent, which is the program \
#
that moves mail from one machine to another.
# processname: master
# pidfile: /var/spool/postfix/pid/master.pid
# config: /etc/postfix/main.cf
# config: /etc/postfix/master.cf
### BEGIN INIT INFO
# Provides: postfix MTA
# Required-Start: $local_fs $network $remote_fs
# Required-Stop: $local_fs $network $remote_fs
# Default-Start: 2 3 4 5
# Default-Stop: 0 1 6
# Short-Description: start and stop postfix
# Description: Postfix is a Mail Transport Agent, which is the program
that
#
moves mail from one machine to another.
### END INIT INFO
In the above example, only lines starting with # chkconfig and # description are mandatory, so you
might not find the rest in different init files. The text enclosed between the ### BEGIN INIT INFO and
### END INIT INFO lines is called Linux Standard Base (LSB) header. If specified, LSB headers contain
directives defining the service description, dependencies, and default runlevels. What follows is an
overview of analytic tasks aiming to collect the data needed for a new unit file. The postfix init script is
used as an example, see the resulting postfix unit file in Example 9.17, “postfix.service Unit File” .
Finding the Service Description
126
CHAPTER 9. MANAGING SERVICES WITH SYSTEMD
Find descriptive information about the script on the line starting with #description. Use this description
together with the service name in the Description option in the [Unit] section of the unit file. The
LSB header might contain similar data on the #Short-Description and #Description lines.
Finding Service Dependencies
The LSB header might contain several directives that form dependencies between services. Most of
them are translatable to systemd unit options, see Table 9.12, “Dependency Options from the LSB
Header”
Table 9.12. Dependency Options from the LSB Header
LSB Option
Description
Unit File Equivalent
Provides
Specifies the boot facility name of the service, that can be
referenced in other init scripts (with the "$" prefix). This is
no longer needed as unit files refer to other units by their
file names.
–
Required-Start
Contains boot facility names of required services. This is
translated as an ordering dependency, boot facility names
are replaced with unit file names of corresponding services
or targets they belong to. For example, in case of
postfix, the Required-Start dependency on $network
was translated to the After dependency on network.target.
After, Before
Should-Start
Constitutes weaker dependencies than Required-Start.
Failed Should-Start dependencies do not affect the service
startup.
After, Before
Required-Stop ,
Should-Stop
Constitute negative dependencies.
Conflicts
Finding Default Targets of the Service
The line starting with #chkconfig contains three numerical values. The most important is the first
number that represents the default runlevels in which the service is started. Use Table 9.6,
“Comparison of SysV Runlevels with systemd Targets” to map these runlevels to equivalent systemd
targets. Then list these targets in the WantedBy option in the [Install] section of the unit file. For
example, postfix was previously started in runlevels 2, 3, 4, and 5, which translates to multiuser.target and graphical.target on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7. Note that the graphical.target depends
on multiuser.target, therefore it is not necessary to specify both, as in Example 9.17, “postfix.service
Unit File”. You might find information on default and forbidden runlevels also at #Default-Start and
#Default-Stop lines in the LSB header.
The other two values specified on the #chkconfig line represent startup and shutdown priorities of the
init script. These values are interpreted by systemd if it loads the init script, but there is no unit file
equivalent.
Finding Files Used by the Service
Init scripts require loading a function library from a dedicated directory and allow importing
configuration, environment, and PID files. Environment variables are specified on the line starting with
#config in the init script header, which translates to the EnvironmentFile unit file option. The PID
file specified on the #pidfile init script line is imported to the unit file with the PIDFile option.
127
System Administrator's Guide
The key information that is not included in the init script header is the path to the service executable,
and potentially some other files required by the service. In previous versions of Red Hat
Enterprise Linux, init scripts used a Bash case statement to define the behavior of the service on
default actions, such as start, stop, or restart, as well as custom-defined actions. The following excerpt
from the postfix init script shows the block of code to be executed at service start.
conf_check() {
[ -x /usr/sbin/postfix ] || exit 5
[ -d /etc/postfix ] || exit 6
[ -d /var/spool/postfix ] || exit 5
}
make_aliasesdb() {
if [ "$(/usr/sbin/postconf -h alias_database)" == "hash:/etc/aliases" ]
then
# /etc/aliases.db might be used by other MTA, make sure nothing
# has touched it since our last newaliases call
[ /etc/aliases -nt /etc/aliases.db ] ||
[ "$ALIASESDB_STAMP" -nt /etc/aliases.db ] ||
[ "$ALIASESDB_STAMP" -ot /etc/aliases.db ] || return
/usr/bin/newaliases
touch -r /etc/aliases.db "$ALIASESDB_STAMP"
else
/usr/bin/newaliases
fi
}
start() {
[ "$EUID" != "0" ] && exit 4
# Check that networking is up.
[ ${NETWORKING} = "no" ] && exit 1
conf_check
# Start daemons.
echo -n $"Starting postfix: "
make_aliasesdb >/dev/null 2>&1
[ -x $CHROOT_UPDATE ] && $CHROOT_UPDATE
/usr/sbin/postfix start 2>/dev/null 1>&2 && success || failure $"$prog
start"
RETVAL=$?
[ $RETVAL -eq 0 ] && touch $lockfile
echo
return $RETVAL
}
The extensibility of the init script allowed specifying two custom functions, conf_check() and
make_aliasesdb(), that are called from the start() function block. On closer look, several
external files and directories are mentioned in the above code: the main service executable
/usr/sbin/postfix, the /etc/postfix/ and /var/spool/postfix/ configuration directories,
as well as the /usr/sbin/postconf/ directory.
Systemd supports only the predefined actions, but enables executing custom executables with
ExecStart, ExecStartPre, ExecStartPost, ExecStop, and ExecReload options. In case of
postfix on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7, the /usr/sbin/postfix together with supporting scripts
are executed on service start. Consult the postfix unit file at Example 9.17, “postfix.service Unit File” .
128
CHAPTER 9. MANAGING SERVICES WITH SYSTEMD
Converting complex init scripts requires understanding the purpose of every statement in the script.
Some of the statements are specific to the operating system version, therefore you do not need to
translate them. On the other hand, some adjustments might be needed in the new environment, both in
unit file as well as in the service executable and supporting files.
9.6.4. Modifying Existing Unit Files
Services installed on the system come with default unit files that are stored in the
/usr/lib/systemd/system/ directory. System Administrators should not modify these files
directly, therefore any customization must be confined to configuration files in the
/etc/systemd/system/ directory. Depending on the extent of the required changes, pick one of the
following approaches:
Create a directory for supplementary configuration files at
/etc/systemd/system/unit.d/. This method is recommended for most use cases. It
enables extending the default configuration with additional functionality, while still referring to
the original unit file. Changes to the default unit introduced with a package upgrade are
therefore applied automatically. See the section called “Extending the Default Unit
Configuration” for more information.
Create a copy of the original unit file /usr/lib/systemd/system/ in
/etc/systemd/system/ and make changes there. The copy overrides the original file,
therefore changes introduced with the package update are not applied. This method is useful
for making significant unit changes that should persist regardless of package updates. See the
section called “Overriding the Default Unit Configuration” for details.
In order to return to the default configuration of the unit, just delete custom-created configuration files
in /etc/systemd/system/. To apply changes to unit files without rebooting the system, execute:
systemctl daemon-reload
The daemon-reload option reloads all unit files and recreates the entire dependency tree, which is
needed to immediately apply any change to a unit file. As an alternative, you can achieve the same
result with the following command:
init q
Also, if the modified unit file belongs to a running service, this service must be restarted to accept new
settings:
systemctl restart name.service
129
System Administrator's Guide
IMPORTANT
To modify properties, such as dependencies or timeouts, of a service that is handled by a
SysV initscript, do not modify the initscript itself. Instead, create a systemd drop-in
configuration file for the service as described in the section called “Extending the
Default Unit Configuration” and the section called “Overriding the Default Unit
Configuration”. Then manage this service in the same way as a normal systemd service.
For example, to extend the configuration of the network service, do not modify the
/etc/rc.d/init.d/network initscript file. Instead, create new directory
/etc/systemd/system/network.service.d/ and a systemd drop-in file
/etc/systemd/system/network.service.d/my_config.conf. Then, put the
modified values into the drop-in file. Note: systemd knows the network service as
network.service, which is why the created directory must be called
network.service.d
Extending the Default Unit Configuration
To extend the default unit file with additional configuration options, first create a configuration
directory in /etc/systemd/system/. If extending a service unit, execute the following command as
root:
mkdir /etc/systemd/system/name.service.d/
Replace name with the name of the service you want to extend. The above syntax applies to all unit
types.
Create a configuration file in the directory made in the previous step. Note that the file name must end
with the .conf suffix. Type:
touch /etc/systemd/system/name.service.d/config_name.conf
Replace config_name with the name of the configuration file. This file adheres to the normal unit file
structure, therefore all directives must be specified under appropriate sections, see Section 9.6.1,
“Understanding the Unit File Structure”.
For example, to add a custom dependency, create a configuration file with the following content:
[Unit]
Requires=new_dependency
After=new_dependency
Where new_dependency stands for the unit to be marked as a dependency. Another example is a
configuration file that restarts the service after its main process exited, with a delay of 30 seconds:
[Service]
Restart=always
RestartSec=30
It is recommended to create small configuration files focused only on one task. Such files can be easily
moved or linked to configuration directories of other services.
To apply changes made to the unit, execute as root:
130
CHAPTER 9. MANAGING SERVICES WITH SYSTEMD
systemctl daemon-reload
systemctl restart name.service
Example 9.20. Extending the httpd.service Configuration
To modify the httpd.service unit so that a custom shell script is automatically executed when
starting the Apache service, perform the following steps. First, create a directory and a custom
configuration file:
~]# mkdir /etc/systemd/system/httpd.service.d/
~]# touch /etc/systemd/system/httpd.service.d/custom_script.conf
Provided that the script you want to start automatically with Apache is located at
/usr/local/bin/custom.sh, insert the following text to the custom_script.conf file:
[Service]
ExecStartPost=/usr/local/bin/custom.sh
To apply the unit changes, execute:
~]# systemctl daemon-reload
~]# systemctl restart httpd.service
NOTE
The configuration files from configuration directories in /etc/systemd/system/ take
precedence over unit files in /usr/lib/systemd/system/. Therefore, if the
configuration files contain an option that can be specified only once, such as
Description or ExecStart, the default value of this option is overridden. Note that in
the output of the systemd-delta command, described in the section called
“Monitoring Overriden Units”, such units are always marked as [EXTENDED], even
though in sum, certain options are actually overridden.
Overriding the Default Unit Configuration
To make changes that will persist after updating the package that provides the unit file, first copy the
file to the /etc/systemd/system/ directory. To do so, execute the following command as root:
cp /usr/lib/systemd/system/name.service /etc/systemd/system/name.service
Where name stands for the name of the service unit you wish to modify. The above syntax applies to all
unit types.
Open the copied file with a text editor, and make the desired changes. To apply the unit changes,
execute as root:
systemctl daemon-reload
systemctl restart name.service
Example 9.21. Changing the timeout limit
131
System Administrator's Guide
You can specify a timeout value per service to prevent a malfunctioning service from freezing the
system. Otherwise, timeout is set by default to 90 seconds for normal services and to 300 seconds
for SysV-compatible services.
For example, to extend timeout limit for the httpd service:
1. Copy the httpd unit file to the /etc/systemd/system/ directory:
cp /usr/lib/systemd/system/httpd.service
/etc/systemd/system/httpd.service
2. Open file /etc/systemd/system/httpd.service and specify the TimeoutStartUSec
value in the [Service] section:
...
[Service]
...
PrivateTmp=true
TimeoutStartSec=10
[Install]
WantedBy=multi-user.target
...
3. Reload the systemd daemon:
systemctl daemon-reload
4. Optional. Verify the new timeout value:
systemctl show httpd -p TimeoutStartUSec
NOTE
To change the timeout limit globally, input the DefaultTimeoutStartSec in the
/etc/systemd/system.conf file. See Section 9.1, “Introduction to systemd” .
Monitoring Overriden Units
To display an overview of overridden or modified unit files, use the following command:
systemd-delta
For example, the output of the above command can look as follows:
[EQUIVALENT] /etc/systemd/system/default.target →
/usr/lib/systemd/system/default.target
[OVERRIDDEN] /etc/systemd/system/autofs.service →
/usr/lib/systemd/system/autofs.service
--- /usr/lib/systemd/system/autofs.service
21:30:39.000000000 -0400
132
2014-10-16
CHAPTER 9. MANAGING SERVICES WITH SYSTEMD
+++ /etc/systemd/system/autofs.service 2014-11-21 10:00:58.513568275 0500
@@ -8,7 +8,8 @@
EnvironmentFile=-/etc/sysconfig/autofs
ExecStart=/usr/sbin/automount $OPTIONS --pid-file /run/autofs.pid
ExecReload=/usr/bin/kill -HUP $MAINPID
-TimeoutSec=180
+TimeoutSec=240
+Restart=Always
[Install]
WantedBy=multi-user.target
[MASKED]
/etc/systemd/system/cups.service →
/usr/lib/systemd/system/cups.service
[EXTENDED]
/usr/lib/systemd/system/sssd.service →
/etc/systemd/system/sssd.service.d/journal.conf
4 overridden configuration files found.
Table 9.13, “systemd-delta Difference Types” lists override types that can appear in the output of
systemd-delta. Note that if a file is overridden, systemd-delta by default displays a summary of
changes similar to the output of the diff command.
Table 9.13. systemd-delta Difference Types
Type
Description
[MASKED]
Masked unit files, see Section 9.2.7, “Disabling a Service” for description of unit
masking.
[EQUIVALENT]
Unmodified copies that override the original files but do not differ in content,
typically symbolic links.
[REDIRECTED]
Files that are redirected to another file.
[OVERRIDEN]
Overridden and changed files.
[EXTENDED]
Files that are extended with .conf files in the /etc/systemd/system/unit.d/
directory.
[UNCHANGED]
Unmodified files are displayed only when the --type=unchanged option is used.
It is good practice to run systemd-delta after system update to check if there are any updates to the
default units that are currently overridden by custom configuration. It is also possible to limit the
output only to a certain difference type. For example, to view just the overridden units, execute:
systemd-delta --type=overridden
9.6.5. Working with Instantiated Units
It is possible to instantiate multiple units from a single template configuration file at runtime. The "@"
character is used to mark the template and to associate units with it. Instantiated units can be started
133
System Administrator's Guide
from another unit file (using Requires or Wants options), or with the systemctl start command.
Instantiated service units are named the following way:
template_name@instance_name.service
Where template_name stands for the name of the template configuration file. Replace instance_name
with the name for the unit instance. Several instances can point to the same template file with
configuration options common for all instances of the unit. Template unit name has the form of:
unit_name@.service
For example, the following Wants setting in a unit file:
Wants=getty@ttyA.service,getty@ttyB.service
first makes systemd search for given service units. If no such units are found, the part between "@" and
the type suffix is ignored and systemd searches for the getty@.service file, reads the configuration
from it, and starts the services.
Wildcard characters, called unit specifiers, can be used in any unit configuration file. Unit specifiers
substitute certain unit parameters and are interpreted at runtime. Table 9.14, “Important Unit
Specifiers” lists unit specifiers that are particularly useful for template units.
Table 9.14. Important Unit Specifiers
Unit Specifier
Meaning
Description
%n
Full unit name
Stands for the full unit name including the type suffix.%N has the
same meaning but also replaces the forbidden characters with ASCII
codes.
%p
Prefix name
Stands for a unit name with type suffix removed. For instantiated
units %p stands for the part of the unit name before the "@"
character.
%i
Instance name
Is the part of the instantiated unit name between the "@" character
and the type suffix. %I has the same meaning but also replaces the
forbidden characters for ASCII codes.
%H
Host name
Stands for the hostname of the running system at the point in time
the unit configuration is loaded.
%t
Runtime
directory
Represents the runtime directory, which is either /run for the root
user, or the value of the XDG_RUNTIME_DIR variable for
unprivileged users.
For a complete list of unit specifiers, see the systemd.unit(5) manual page.
For example, the getty@.service template contains the following directives:
[Unit]
Description=Getty on %I
134
CHAPTER 9. MANAGING SERVICES WITH SYSTEMD
...
[Service]
ExecStart=-/sbin/agetty --noclear %I $TERM
...
When the getty@ttyA.service and getty@ttyB.service are instantiated form the above template,
Description= is resolved as Getty on ttyA and Getty on ttyB.
9.7. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
For more information on systemd and its usage on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7, see the resources listed
below.
Installed Documentation
systemctl(1) — The manual page for the systemctl command line utility provides a complete
list of supported options and commands.
systemd(1) — The manual page for the systemd system and service manager provides more
information about its concepts and documents available command line options and
environment variables, supported configuration files and directories, recognized signals, and
available kernel options.
systemd-delta(1) — The manual page for the systemd-delta utility that allows to find
extended and overridden configuration files.
systemd.unit(5) — The manual page named systemd.unit provides detailed information
about systemd unit files and documents all available configuration options.
systemd.service(5) — The manual page named systemd.service documents the format
of service unit files.
systemd.target(5) — The manual page named systemd.target documents the format of
target unit files.
systemd.kill(5) — The manual page named systemd.kill documents the configuration of
the process killing procedure.
Online Documentation
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Networking Guide — The Networking Guide for Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 7 documents relevant information regarding the configuration and
administration of network interfaces, networks, and network services in this system. It
provides an introduction to the hostnamectl utility, explains how to use it to view and set
host names on the command line, both locally and remotely, and provides important
information about the selection of host names and domain names.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Desktop Migration and Administration Guide — The Desktop
Migration and Administration Guide for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 documents the migration
planning, deployment, configuration, and administration of the GNOME 3 desktop on this
system. It introduces the logind service, enumerates its most significant features, and
explains how to use the loginctl utility to list active sessions and enable multi-seat support.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 SELinux User's and Administrator's Guide — The SELinux User's and
Administrator's Guide for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 describes the basic principles of SELinux
and documents in detail how to configure and use SELinux with various services such as the
135
System Administrator's Guide
Apache HTTP Server, Postfix, PostgreSQL, or OpenShift. It explains how to configure SELinux
access permissions for system services managed by systemd.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Installation Guide — The Installation Guide for Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 7 documents how to install the system on AMD64 and Intel 64 systems, 64bit IBM Power Systems servers, and IBM System z. It also covers advanced installation
methods such as Kickstart installations, PXE installations, and installations over the VNC
protocol. In addition, it describes common post-installation tasks and explains how to
troubleshoot installation problems, including detailed instructions on how to boot into rescue
mode or recover the root password.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Security Guide — The Security Guide for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7
assists users and administrators in learning the processes and practices of securing their
workstations and servers against local and remote intrusion, exploitation, and malicious
activity. It also explains how to secure critical system services.
systemd Home Page — The project home page provides more information about systemd.
See Also
Chapter 1, System Locale and Keyboard Configurationdocuments how to manage the system
locale and keyboard layouts. It explains how to use the localectl utility to view the current
locale, list available locales, and set the system locale on the command line, as well as to view
the current keyboard layout, list available keymaps, and enable a particular keyboard layout
on the command line.
Chapter 2, Configuring the Date and Timedocuments how to manage the system date and time.
It explains the difference between a real-time clock and system clock and describes how to use
the timedatectl utility to display the current settings of the system clock, configure the
date and time, change the time zone, and synchronize the system clock with a remote server.
Chapter 5, Gaining Privileges documents how to gain administrative privileges by using the su
and sudo commands.
Chapter 11, OpenSSH describes how to configure an SSH server and how to use the ssh, scp,
and sftp client utilities to access it.
Chapter 21, Viewing and Managing Log Files provides an introduction to journald. It describes
the journal, introduces the journald service, and documents how to use the journalctl
utility to view log entries, enter live view mode, and filter log entries. In addition, this chapter
describes how to give non-root users access to system logs and enable persistent storage for
log files.
136
CHAPTER 10. CONFIGURING A SYSTEM FOR ACCESSIBILITY
CHAPTER 10. CONFIGURING A SYSTEM FOR ACCESSIBILITY
Accessibility in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 is ensured by the Orca screen reader, which is included in
the default installation of the operating system. This chapter explains how a system administrator can
configure a system to support users with a visual impairment.
Orca reads information from the screen and communicates it to the user using:
a speech synthesizer, which provides a speech output
a braille display, which provides a tactile output
For more information on Orca settings, see its help page.
In order that Orca's communication outputs function properly, the system administrator needs to:
configure the brltty service, as described in Section 10.1, “Configuring the brltty Service”
switch on the Always Show Universal Access Menu, as described in Section 10.2,
“Switch On Always Show Universal Access Menu”
enable the Festival speech synthesizer, as described in Section 10.3, “Enabling the Festival
Speech Synthesis System”
10.1. CONFIGURING THE BRLTTY SERVICE
The Braille display uses the brltty service to provide tactile output for visually impaired users.
Enable the brltty Service
The braille display cannot work unless brltty is running. By default, brltty is disabled. Enable
brltty to be started on boot:
~]# systemctl enable brltty.service
Authorize Users to Use the Braille Display
To set the users who are authorized to use the braille display, choose one of the following procedures,
which have an equal effect. The procedure using the /etc/brltty.conf file is suitable even for the
file systems where users or groups cannot be assigned to a file. The procedure using the
/etc/brlapi.key file is suitable only for the file systems where users or groups can be assigned to a
file.
Procedure 10.1. Setting Access to Braille Display by Using /etc/brltty.conf
1. Open the /etc/brltty.conf file, and find the section called Application Programming
Interface Parameters.
2. Specify the users.
a. To specify one or more individual users, list the users on the following line:
api-parameters Auth=user:user_1, user_2, ...
user
# Allow some local
b. To specify a user group, enter its name on the following line:
137
System Administrator's Guide
api-parameters Auth=group:group
# Allow some local group
Procedure 10.2. Setting Access to Braille Display by Using /etc/brlapi.key
1. Create the /etc/brlapi.key file.
~]# mcookie > /etc/brlapi.key
2. Change ownership of the /etc/brlapi.key to particular user or group.
a. To specify an individual user:
~]# chown user_1 /etc/brlapi.key
b. To specify a group:
~]# chown group_1 /etc/brlapi.key
3. Adjust the content of /etc/brltty.conf to include this:
api-parameters Auth=keyfile:/etc/brlapi.key
Set the Braille Driver
The braille-driver directive in /etc/brltty.conf specifies a two-letter driver identification
code of the driver for the braille display.
Procedure 10.3. Setting the Braille Driver
Decide whether you want to use the autodetection for finding the appropriate braille driver.
a. If you want to use autodetection, leave braille driver specified to auto, which is the
default option.
braille-driver auto
# autodetect
WARNING
Autodetection tries all drivers. Therefore, it might take a long time or
even fail. For this reason, setting up a particular braille driver is
recommended.
b. If you do not want to use the autodetection, specify the identification code of the required
braille driver in the braille-driver directive.
Choose the identification code of required braille driver from the list provided in
/etc/brltty.conf, for example:
138
CHAPTER 10. CONFIGURING A SYSTEM FOR ACCESSIBILITY
braille-driver xw
# XWindow
You can also set multiple drivers, separated by commas, and autodetection is then
performed among them.
Set the Braille Device
The braille-device directive in /etc/brltty.conf specifies the device to which the braille
display is connected. The following device types are supported (see Table 10.1, “Braille Device Types
and the Corresponding Syntax”):
Table 10.1. Braille Device Types and the Corresponding Syntax
Braille Device Type
Syntax of the Type
serial device
serial:path [a]
USB device
[serial-number] [b]
Bluetooth device
bluetooth:address
[a] Relative paths are at /dev.
[b] The brackets ([]) here indicate optionality.
Examples of settings for particular devices:
braille-device
braille-device
braille driver
braille-device
number
braille-device
address
serial:ttyS0
usb:
usb:nnnnn
# First serial device
# First USB device matching
# Specific USB device by serial
bluetooth:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx # Specific Bluetooth device by
You can also set multiple devices, separated by commas, and each of them will be probed in turn.
139
System Administrator's Guide
WARNING
If the device is connected by a serial-to-USB adapter, setting braille-device
to usb: does not work. In this case, identify the virtual serial device that the kernel
has created for the adapter. The virtual serial device can look like this:
serial:ttyUSB0
You can find the actual device name in the kernel messages on the device plug
with the following command:
~]# dmesg | fgrep ttyUSB0
Set Specific Parameters for Particular Braille Displays
If you need to set specific parameters for particular braille displays, use the braille-parameters
directive in /etc/brltty.conf. The braille-parameters directive passes non-generic
parameters through to the braille driver. Choose the required parameters from the list in
/etc/brltty.conf.
Set the Text Table
The text-table directive in /etc/brltty.conf specifies which text table is used to encode the
symbols. Relative paths to text tables are in the /etc/brltty/Text/ directory.
Procedure 10.4. Setting the Text Table
1. Decide whether you want to use the autoselection for finding the appropriate text table.
2.
a. If you want to use the autoselection, leave text-table specified to auto, which is the
default option.
text-table auto
# locale-based autoselection
This ensures that local-based autoselection with fallback to en-nabcc is performed.
b. If you do not want to use the autoselection, choose the required text-table from the list
in /etc/brltty.conf.
For example, to use the text table for American English:
text-table en_US
# English (United States)
Set the Contraction Table
The contraction-table directive in /etc/brltty.conf specifies which table is used to encode
the abbreviations. Relative paths to particular contraction tables are in the
/etc/brltty/Contraction/ directory.
Choose the required contraction-table from the list in /etc/brltty.conf.
140
CHAPTER 10. CONFIGURING A SYSTEM FOR ACCESSIBILITY
For example, to use the contraction table for American English, grade 2:
contraction-table en-us-g2
# English (US, grade 2)
WARNING
If not specified, no contraction table is used.
10.2. SWITCH ON ALWAYS
SHOW UNIVERSAL ACCESS MENU
To switch on the Orca screen reader, press the Super+Alt+S key combination. As a result, the
Universal Access Menu icon is displayed on the top bar.
WARNING
The icon disappears in case that the user switches off all of the provided options
from the Universal Access Menu. Missing icon can cause difficulties to users with
a visual impairment. System administrators can prevent the inaccessibility of the
icon by switching on the Always Show Universal Access Menu. When the
Always Show Universal Access Menu is switched on, the icon is displayed
on the top bar even in the situation when all options from this menu are switched
off.
Procedure 10.5. Switching On Always Show Universal Access Menu
1. Open the Gnome settings menu, and click Universal Access.
2. Switch on Always Show Universal Access Menu.
141
System Administrator's Guide
3. Optional: Verify that the Universal Access Menu icon is displayed on the top bar even if all
options from this menu are switched off.
10.3. ENABLING THE FESTIVAL SPEECH SYNTHESIS SYSTEM
By default, Orca uses the eSpeak speech synthesizer, but it also supports the Festival Speech
Synthesis System. Both eSpeak and Festival Speech Synthesis System (Festival) synthesize voice
differently. Some users might prefer Festival to the default eSpeak synthesizer. To enable Festival,
follow these steps:
Procedure 10.6. Installing Festival and Making it Running on Boot
1. Install Festival:
~]# yum install festival festival-freebsoft-utils
2. Make Festival running on boot:
a. Create a new systemd unit file:
Create a file in the /etc/systemd/system/ directory and make it executable.
~]# touch /etc/systemd/system/festival.service
~]# chmod 664 /etc/systemd/system/festival.service
b. Ensure that the script in the /usr/bin/festival_server file is used to run Festival.
Add the following content to the /etc/systemd/system/festival.service file:
142
CHAPTER 10. CONFIGURING A SYSTEM FOR ACCESSIBILITY
[Unit]
Description=Festival speech synthesis server
[Service]
ExecStart=/usr/bin/festival_server
Type=simple
c. Notify systemd that a new festival.service file exists:
~]# systemctl daemon-reload
~]# systemctl start festival.service
d. Enable festival.service:
~]# systemctl enable festival.service
Choose a Voice for Festival
Festival provides multiples voices.
To make a voice available, install the relevant package from the following list:
festvox-awb-arctic-hts
festvox-bdl-arctic-hts
festvox-clb-arctic-hts
festvox-kal-diphone
festvox-ked-diphone
festvox-rms-arctic-hts
festvox-slt-arctic-hts
hispavoces-pal-diphone
hispavoces-sfl-diphone
To see detailed information about a particular voice:
~]# yum info package_name
To make the required voice available, install the package with this voice and then reboot:
~]# yum install package_name
~]# reboot
143
System Administrator's Guide
CHAPTER 11. OPENSSH
SSH (Secure Shell) is a protocol which facilitates secure communications between two systems using a
client-server architecture and allows users to log in to server host systems remotely. Unlike other
remote communication protocols, such as FTP or Telnet, SSH encrypts the login session, rendering
the connection difficult for intruders to collect unencrypted passwords.
The ssh program is designed to replace older, less secure terminal applications used to log in to
remote hosts, such as telnet or rsh. A related program called scp replaces older programs designed
to copy files between hosts, such as rcp. Because these older applications do not encrypt passwords
transmitted between the client and the server, avoid them whenever possible. Using secure methods
to log in to remote systems decreases the risks for both the client system and the remote host.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux includes the general OpenSSH package, openssh, as well as the OpenSSH
server, openssh-server, and client, openssh-clients, packages. Note, the OpenSSH packages require
the OpenSSL package openssl-libs, which installs several important cryptographic libraries, enabling
OpenSSH to provide encrypted communications.
11.1. THE SSH PROTOCOL
11.1.1. Why Use SSH?
Potential intruders have a variety of tools at their disposal enabling them to disrupt, intercept, and reroute network traffic in an effort to gain access to a system. In general terms, these threats can be
categorized as follows:
Interception of communication between two systems
The attacker can be somewhere on the network between the communicating parties, copying any
information passed between them. He may intercept and keep the information, or alter the
information and send it on to the intended recipient.
This attack is usually performed using a packet sniffer, a rather common network utility that
captures each packet flowing through the network, and analyzes its content.
Impersonation of a particular host
Attacker's system is configured to pose as the intended recipient of a transmission. If this strategy
works, the user's system remains unaware that it is communicating with the wrong host.
This attack can be performed using a technique known as DNS poisoning, or via so-called IP spoofing.
In the first case, the intruder uses a cracked DNS server to point client systems to a maliciously
duplicated host. In the second case, the intruder sends falsified network packets that appear to be
from a trusted host.
Both techniques intercept potentially sensitive information and, if the interception is made for hostile
reasons, the results can be disastrous. If SSH is used for remote shell login and file copying, these
security threats can be greatly diminished. This is because the SSH client and server use digital
signatures to verify their identity. Additionally, all communication between the client and server
systems is encrypted. Attempts to spoof the identity of either side of a communication does not work,
since each packet is encrypted using a key known only by the local and remote systems.
11.1.2. Main Features
The SSH protocol provides the following safeguards:
144
CHAPTER 11. OPENSSH
No one can pose as the intended server
After an initial connection, the client can verify that it is connecting to the same server it had
connected to previously.
No one can capture the authentication information
The client transmits its authentication information to the server using strong, 128-bit encryption.
No one can intercept the communication
All data sent and received during a session is transferred using 128-bit encryption, making
intercepted transmissions extremely difficult to decrypt and read.
Additionally, it also offers the following options:
It provides secure means to use graphical applications over a network
Using a technique called X11 forwarding, the client can forward X11 (X Window System) applications
from the server.
It provides a way to secure otherwise insecure protocols
The SSH protocol encrypts everything it sends and receives. Using a technique called port
forwarding, an SSH server can become a conduit to securing otherwise insecure protocols, like POP,
and increasing overall system and data security.
It can be used to create a secure channel
The OpenSSH server and client can be configured to create a tunnel similar to a virtual private
network for traffic between server and client machines.
It supports the Kerberos authentication
OpenSSH servers and clients can be configured to authenticate using the GSSAPI (Generic
Security Services Application Program Interface) implementation of the Kerberos network
authentication protocol.
11.1.3. Protocol Versions
Two varieties of SSH currently exist: version 1, and newer version 2. The OpenSSH suite under Red Hat
Enterprise Linux uses SSH version 2, which has an enhanced key exchange algorithm not vulnerable to
the known exploit in version 1. However, for compatibility reasons, the OpenSSH suite does support
version 1 connections as well.
IMPORTANT
To ensure maximum security for your connection, it is recommended that only SSH
version 2-compatible servers and clients are used whenever possible.
11.1.4. Event Sequence of an SSH Connection
The following series of events help protect the integrity of SSH communication between two hosts.
1. A cryptographic handshake is made so that the client can verify that it is communicating with
the correct server.
145
System Administrator's Guide
2. The transport layer of the connection between the client and remote host is encrypted using a
symmetric cipher.
3. The client authenticates itself to the server.
4. The client interacts with the remote host over the encrypted connection.
11.1.4.1. Transport Layer
The primary role of the transport layer is to facilitate safe and secure communication between the two
hosts at the time of authentication and during subsequent communication. The transport layer
accomplishes this by handling the encryption and decryption of data, and by providing integrity
protection of data packets as they are sent and received. The transport layer also provides
compression, speeding the transfer of information.
Once an SSH client contacts a server, key information is exchanged so that the two systems can
correctly construct the transport layer. The following steps occur during this exchange:
Keys are exchanged
The public key encryption algorithm is determined
The symmetric encryption algorithm is determined
The message authentication algorithm is determined
The hash algorithm is determined
During the key exchange, the server identifies itself to the client with a unique host key. If the client has
never communicated with this particular server before, the server's host key is unknown to the client
and it does not connect. OpenSSH gets around this problem by accepting the server's host key. This is
done after the user is notified and has both accepted and verified the new host key. In subsequent
connections, the server's host key is checked against the saved version on the client, providing
confidence that the client is indeed communicating with the intended server. If, in the future, the host
key no longer matches, the user must remove the client's saved version before a connection can occur.
WARNING
It is possible for an attacker to masquerade as an SSH server during the initial
contact since the local system does not know the difference between the intended
server and a false one set up by an attacker. To help prevent this, verify the
integrity of a new SSH server by contacting the server administrator before
connecting for the first time or in the event of a host key mismatch.
SSH is designed to work with almost any kind of public key algorithm or encoding format. After an
initial key exchange creates a hash value used for exchanges and a shared secret value, the two
systems immediately begin calculating new keys and algorithms to protect authentication and future
data sent over the connection.
After a certain amount of data has been transmitted using a given key and algorithm (the exact amount
depends on the SSH implementation), another key exchange occurs, generating another set of hash
146
CHAPTER 11. OPENSSH
values and a new shared secret value. Even if an attacker is able to determine the hash and shared
secret value, this information is only useful for a limited period of time.
11.1.4.2. Authentication
Once the transport layer has constructed a secure tunnel to pass information between the two
systems, the server tells the client the different authentication methods supported, such as using a
private key-encoded signature or typing a password. The client then tries to authenticate itself to the
server using one of these supported methods.
SSH servers and clients can be configured to allow different types of authentication, which gives each
side the optimal amount of control. The server can decide which encryption methods it supports based
on its security model, and the client can choose the order of authentication methods to attempt from
the available options.
11.1.4.3. Channels
After a successful authentication over the SSH transport layer, multiple channels are opened via a
technique called multiplexing[1]. Each of these channels handles communication for different terminal
sessions and for forwarded X11 sessions.
Both clients and servers can create a new channel. Each channel is then assigned a different number
on each end of the connection. When the client attempts to open a new channel, the clients sends the
channel number along with the request. This information is stored by the server and is used to direct
communication to that channel. This is done so that different types of sessions do not affect one
another and so that when a given session ends, its channel can be closed without disrupting the
primary SSH connection.
Channels also support flow-control, which allows them to send and receive data in an orderly fashion. In
this way, data is not sent over the channel until the client receives a message that the channel is open.
The client and server negotiate the characteristics of each channel automatically, depending on the
type of service the client requests and the way the user is connected to the network. This allows great
flexibility in handling different types of remote connections without having to change the basic
infrastructure of the protocol.
11.2. CONFIGURING OPENSSH
11.2.1. Configuration Files
There are two different sets of configuration files: those for client programs (that is, ssh, scp, and
sftp), and those for the server (the sshd daemon).
System-wide SSH configuration information is stored in the /etc/ssh/ directory as described in
Table 11.1, “System-wide configuration files” . User-specific SSH configuration information is stored in
~/.ssh/ within the user's home directory as described in Table 11.2, “User-specific configuration
files”.
Table 11.1. System-wide configuration files
File
Description
147
System Administrator's Guide
File
Description
/etc/ssh/moduli
Contains Diffie-Hellman groups used for the Diffie-Hellman key
exchange which is critical for constructing a secure transport
layer. When keys are exchanged at the beginning of an SSH
session, a shared, secret value is created which cannot be
determined by either party alone. This value is then used to
provide host authentication.
/etc/ssh/ssh_config
The default SSH client configuration file. Note that it is overridden
by ~/.ssh/config if it exists.
/etc/ssh/sshd_config
The configuration file for the sshd daemon.
/etc/ssh/ssh_host_ecdsa_ke
y
The ECDSA private key used by the sshd daemon.
/etc/ssh/ssh_host_ecdsa_ke
y.pub
The ECDSA public key used by the sshd daemon.
/etc/ssh/ssh_host_key
The RSA private key used by the sshd daemon for version 1 of the
SSH protocol.
/etc/ssh/ssh_host_key.pub
The RSA public key used by the sshd daemon for version 1 of the
SSH protocol.
/etc/ssh/ssh_host_rsa_key
The RSA private key used by the sshd daemon for version 2 of the
SSH protocol.
/etc/ssh/ssh_host_rsa_key.
pub
The RSA public key used by the sshd daemon for version 2 of the
SSH protocol.
/etc/pam.d/sshd
The PAM configuration file for the sshd daemon.
/etc/sysconfig/sshd
Configuration file for the sshd service.
Table 11.2. User-specific configuration files
File
Description
~/.ssh/authorized_keys
Holds a list of authorized public keys for servers. When the client
connects to a server, the server authenticates the client by
checking its signed public key stored within this file.
~/.ssh/id_ecdsa
Contains the ECDSA private key of the user.
~/.ssh/id_ecdsa.pub
The ECDSA public key of the user.
148
CHAPTER 11. OPENSSH
File
Description
~/.ssh/id_rsa
The RSA private key used by ssh for version 2 of the SSH
protocol.
~/.ssh/id_rsa.pub
The RSA public key used by ssh for version 2 of the SSH protocol.
~/.ssh/identity
The RSA private key used by ssh for version 1 of the SSH
protocol.
~/.ssh/identity.pub
The RSA public key used by ssh for version 1 of the SSH protocol.
~/.ssh/known_hosts
Contains host keys of SSH servers accessed by the user. This file is
very important for ensuring that the SSH client is connecting to
the correct SSH server.
For information concerning various directives that can be used in the SSH configuration files, see the
ssh_config(5) and sshd_config(5) manual pages.
11.2.2. Starting an OpenSSH Server
In order to run an OpenSSH server, you must have the openssh-server package installed. For more
information on how to install new packages, see Section 8.2.4, “Installing Packages” .
To start the sshd daemon in the current session, type the following at a shell prompt as root:
~]# systemctl start sshd.service
To stop the running sshd daemon in the current session, use the following command as root:
~]# systemctl stop sshd.service
If you want the daemon to start automatically at boot time, type as root:
~]# systemctl enable sshd.service
Created symlink from /etc/systemd/system/multiuser.target.wants/sshd.service to /usr/lib/systemd/system/sshd.service.
The sshd daemon depends on the network.target target unit, which is sufficient for static
configured network interfaces and for default ListenAddress 0.0.0.0 options. To specify different
addresses in the ListenAddress directive and to use a slower dynamic network configuration, add
dependency on the network-online.target target unit to the sshd.service unit file. To achieve
this, create the /etc/systemd/system/sshd.service.d/local.conf file with the following
options:
[Unit]
Wants=network-online.target
After=network-online.target
After this, reload the systemd manager configuration using the following command:
149
System Administrator's Guide
~]# systemctl daemon-reload
For more information on how to manage system services in Red Hat Enterprise Linux, see Chapter 9,
Managing Services with systemd.
Note that if you reinstall the system, a new set of identification keys will be created. As a result, clients
who had connected to the system with any of the OpenSSH tools before the reinstall will see the
following message:
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
@
WARNING: REMOTE HOST IDENTIFICATION HAS CHANGED!
@
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
IT IS POSSIBLE THAT SOMEONE IS DOING SOMETHING NASTY!
Someone could be eavesdropping on you right now (man-in-the-middle
attack)!
It is also possible that the RSA host key has just been changed.
To prevent this, you can backup the relevant files from the /etc/ssh/ directory. See Table 11.1,
“System-wide configuration files” for a complete list, and restore the files whenever you reinstall the
system.
11.2.3. Requiring SSH for Remote Connections
For SSH to be truly effective, using insecure connection protocols should be prohibited. Otherwise, a
user's password may be protected using SSH for one session, only to be captured later while logging in
using Telnet. Some services to disable include telnet, rsh, rlogin, and vsftpd.
For information on how to configure the vsftpd service, see Section 15.2, “FTP”. To learn how to
manage system services in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7, read Chapter 9, Managing Services with systemd.
11.2.4. Using Key-based Authentication
To improve the system security even further, generate SSH key pairs and then enforce key-based
authentication by disabling password authentication. To do so, open the /etc/ssh/sshd_config
configuration file in a text editor such as vi or nano, and change the PasswordAuthentication
option as follows:
PasswordAuthentication no
If you are working on a system other than a new default installation, check that
PubkeyAuthentication no has not been set. If connected remotely, not using console or out-ofband access, testing the key-based log in process before disabling password authentication is advised.
To be able to use ssh, scp, or sftp to connect to the server from a client machine, generate an
authorization key pair by following the steps below. Note that keys must be generated for each user
separately.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 uses SSH Protocol 2 and RSA keys by default (see Section 11.1.3, “Protocol
Versions” for more information).
IMPORTANT
If you complete the steps as root, only root will be able to use the keys.
150
CHAPTER 11. OPENSSH
NOTE
If you reinstall your system and want to keep previously generated key pairs, backup the
~/.ssh/ directory. After reinstalling, copy it back to your home directory. This process
can be done for all users on your system, including root.
11.2.4.1. Generating Key Pairs
To generate an RSA key pair for version 2 of the SSH protocol, follow these steps:
1. Generate an RSA key pair by typing the following at a shell prompt:
~]$ ssh-keygen -t rsa
Generating public/private rsa key pair.
Enter file in which to save the key (/home/USER/.ssh/id_rsa):
2. Press Enter to confirm the default location, ~/.ssh/id_rsa, for the newly created key.
3. Enter a passphrase, and confirm it by entering it again when prompted to do so. For security
reasons, avoid using the same password as you use to log in to your account.
After this, you will be presented with a message similar to this:
Your identification has been saved in /home/USER/.ssh/id_rsa.
Your public key has been saved in /home/USER/.ssh/id_rsa.pub.
The key fingerprint is:
e7:97:c7:e2:0e:f9:0e:fc:c4:d7:cb:e5:31:11:92:14
USER@penguin.example.com
The key's randomart image is:
+--[ RSA 2048]----+
|
E. |
|
. . |
|
o . |
|
. .|
|
S .
. |
|
+ o o ..|
|
* * +oo|
|
O +..=|
|
o* o.|
+-----------------+
4. By default, the permissions of the ~/.ssh/ directory are set to rwx------ or 700 expressed
in octal notation. This is to ensure that only the USER can view the contents. If required, this
can be confirmed with the following command:
~]$ ls -ld ~/.ssh
drwx------. 2 USER USER 54 Nov 25 16:56 /home/USER/.ssh/
5. To copy the public key to a remote machine, issue a command in the following format:
ssh-copy-id user@hostname
This will copy the most recently modified ~/.ssh/id*.pub public key if it is not yet installed.
Alternatively, specify the public key's file name as follows:
151
System Administrator's Guide
ssh-copy-id -i ~/.ssh/id_rsa.pub user@hostname
This will copy the content of ~/.ssh/id_rsa.pub into the ~/.ssh/authorized_keys file
on the machine to which you want to connect. If the file already exists, the keys are appended
to its end.
To generate an ECDSA key pair for version 2 of the SSH protocol, follow these steps:
1. Generate an ECDSA key pair by typing the following at a shell prompt:
~]$ ssh-keygen -t ecdsa
Generating public/private ecdsa key pair.
Enter file in which to save the key (/home/USER/.ssh/id_ecdsa):
2. Press Enter to confirm the default location, ~/.ssh/id_ecdsa, for the newly created key.
3. Enter a passphrase, and confirm it by entering it again when prompted to do so. For security
reasons, avoid using the same password as you use to log in to your account.
After this, you will be presented with a message similar to this:
Your identification has been saved in /home/USER/.ssh/id_ecdsa.
Your public key has been saved in /home/USER/.ssh/id_ecdsa.pub.
The key fingerprint is:
fd:1d:ca:10:52:96:21:43:7e:bd:4c:fc:5b:35:6b:63
USER@penguin.example.com
The key's randomart image is:
+--[ECDSA 256]---+
|
.+ +o
|
|
. =.o
|
|
o o + ..|
|
+ + o +|
|
S o o oE.|
|
+ oo+.|
|
+ o |
|
|
|
|
+-----------------+
4. By default, the permissions of the ~/.ssh/ directory are set to rwx------ or 700 expressed
in octal notation. This is to ensure that only the USER can view the contents. If required, this
can be confirmed with the following command:
~]$ ls -ld ~/.ssh
~]$ ls -ld ~/.ssh/
drwx------. 2 USER USER 54 Nov 25 16:56 /home/USER/.ssh/
5. To copy the public key to a remote machine, issue a command in the following format:
ssh-copy-id USER@hostname
This will copy the most recently modified ~/.ssh/id*.pub public key if it is not yet installed.
Alternatively, specify the public key's file name as follows:
152
CHAPTER 11. OPENSSH
ssh-copy-id -i ~/.ssh/id_ecdsa.pub USER@hostname
This will copy the content of ~/.ssh/id_ecdsa.pub into the ~/.ssh/authorized_keys
on the machine to which you want to connect. If the file already exists, the keys are appended
to its end.
See Section 11.2.4.2, “Configuring ssh-agent” for information on how to set up your system to
remember the passphrase.
IMPORTANT
The private key is for your personal use only, and it is important that you never give it to
anyone.
11.2.4.2. Configuring ssh-agent
To store your passphrase so that you do not have to enter it each time you initiate a connection with a
remote machine, you can use the ssh-agent authentication agent. If you are running GNOME, you can
configure it to prompt you for your passphrase whenever you log in and remember it during the whole
session. Otherwise you can store the passphrase for a certain shell prompt.
To save your passphrase during your GNOME session, follow these steps:
1. Make sure you have the openssh-askpass package installed. If not, see Section 8.2.4,
“Installing Packages” for more information on how to install new packages in Red Hat
Enterprise Linux.
2. Press the Super key to enter the Activities Overview, type Startup Applications and
then press Enter. The Startup Applications Preferences tool appears. The tab containing a
list of available startup programs will be shown by default. The Super key appears in a variety
of guises, depending on the keyboard and other hardware, but often as either the Windows or
Command key, and typically to the left of the Space bar.
153
System Administrator's Guide
Figure 11.1. Startup Applications Preferences
3. Click the Add button on the right, and enter /usr/bin/ssh-add in the Command field.
Figure 11.2. Adding new application
4. Click Add and make sure the checkbox next to the newly added item is selected.
154
CHAPTER 11. OPENSSH
Figure 11.3. Enabling the application
5. Log out and then log back in. A dialog box will appear prompting you for your passphrase. From
this point on, you should not be prompted for a password by ssh, scp, or sftp.
Figure 11.4. Entering a passphrase
To save your passphrase for a certain shell prompt, use the following command:
~]$ ssh-add
Enter passphrase for /home/USER/.ssh/id_rsa:
Note that when you log out, your passphrase will be forgotten. You must execute the command each
time you log in to a virtual console or a terminal window.
11.3. OPENSSH CLIENTS
155
System Administrator's Guide
To connect to an OpenSSH server from a client machine, you must have the openssh-clients package
installed (see Section 8.2.4, “Installing Packages” for more information on how to install new packages
in Red Hat Enterprise Linux).
11.3.1. Using the ssh Utility
The ssh utility allows you to log in to a remote machine and execute commands there. It is a secure
replacement for the rlogin, rsh, and telnet programs.
Similarly to the telnet command, log in to a remote machine by using the following command:
ssh hostname
For example, to log in to a remote machine named penguin.example.com, type the following at a
shell prompt:
~]$ ssh penguin.example.com
This will log you in with the same user name you are using on the local machine. If you want to specify a
different user name, use a command in the following form:
ssh username@hostname
For example, to log in to penguin.example.com as USER, type:
~]$ ssh USER@penguin.example.com
The first time you initiate a connection, you will be presented with a message similar to this:
The authenticity of host 'penguin.example.com' can't be established.
ECDSA key fingerprint is 256
da:24:43:0b:2e:c1:3f:a1:84:13:92:01:52:b4:84:ff.
Are you sure you want to continue connecting (yes/no)?
Users should always check if the fingerprint is correct before answering the question in this dialog. The
user can ask the administrator of the server to confirm the key is correct. This should be done in a
secure and previously agreed way. If the user has access to the server's host keys, the fingerprint can
be checked by using the ssh-keygen command as follows:
~]# ssh-keygen -l -f /etc/ssh/ssh_host_ecdsa_key.pub
256 da:24:43:0b:2e:c1:3f:a1:84:13:92:01:52:b4:84:ff
(ECDSA)
Type yes to accept the key and confirm the connection. You will see a notice that the server has been
added to the list of known hosts, and a prompt asking for your password:
Warning: Permanently added 'penguin.example.com' (ECDSA) to the list of
known hosts.
USER@penguin.example.com's password:
156
CHAPTER 11. OPENSSH
IMPORTANT
If the SSH server's host key changes, the client notifies the user that the connection
cannot proceed until the server's host key is deleted from the ~/.ssh/known_hosts
file. Before doing this, however, contact the system administrator of the SSH server to
verify the server is not compromised.
To remove a key from the ~/.ssh/known_hosts file, issue a command as follows:
~]# ssh-keygen -R penguin.example.com
# Host penguin.example.com found: line 15 type ECDSA
/home/USER/.ssh/known_hosts updated.
Original contents retained as /home/USER/.ssh/known_hosts.old
After entering the password, you will be provided with a shell prompt for the remote machine.
Alternatively, the ssh program can be used to execute a command on the remote machine without
logging in to a shell prompt:
ssh [username@]hostname command
For example, the /etc/redhat-release file provides information about the Red Hat
Enterprise Linux version. To view the contents of this file on penguin.example.com, type:
~]$ ssh USER@penguin.example.com cat /etc/redhat-release
USER@penguin.example.com's password:
Red Hat Enterprise Linux Server release 7.0 (Maipo)
After you enter the correct password, the user name will be displayed, and you will return to your local
shell prompt.
11.3.2. Using the scp Utility
scp can be used to transfer files between machines over a secure, encrypted connection. In its design,
it is very similar to rcp.
To transfer a local file to a remote system, use a command in the following form:
scp localfile username@hostname:remotefile
For example, if you want to transfer taglist.vim to a remote machine named
penguin.example.com, type the following at a shell prompt:
~]$ scp taglist.vim USER@penguin.example.com:.vim/plugin/taglist.vim
USER@penguin.example.com's password:
taglist.vim
100% 144KB 144.5KB/s
00:00
Multiple files can be specified at once. To transfer the contents of .vim/plugin/ to the same
directory on the remote machine penguin.example.com, type the following command:
~]$ scp .vim/plugin/* USER@penguin.example.com:.vim/plugin/
157
System Administrator's Guide
USER@penguin.example.com's password:
closetag.vim
00:00
snippetsEmu.vim
00:00
taglist.vim
00:00
100%
13KB
12.6KB/s
100%
33KB
33.1KB/s
100%
144KB 144.5KB/s
To transfer a remote file to the local system, use the following syntax:
scp username@hostname:remotefile localfile
For instance, to download the .vimrc configuration file from the remote machine, type:
~]$ scp USER@penguin.example.com:.vimrc .vimrc
USER@penguin.example.com's password:
.vimrc
100% 2233
00:00
2.2KB/s
11.3.3. Using the sftp Utility
The sftp utility can be used to open a secure, interactive FTP session. In its design, it is similar to
except that it uses a secure, encrypted connection.
ftp
To connect to a remote system, use a command in the following form:
sftp username@hostname
For example, to log in to a remote machine named penguin.example.com with USER as a user name,
type:
~]$ sftp USER@penguin.example.com
USER@penguin.example.com's password:
Connected to penguin.example.com.
sftp>
After you enter the correct password, you will be presented with a prompt. The sftp utility accepts a
set of commands similar to those used by ftp (see Table 11.3, “A selection of available sftp
commands”).
Table 11.3. A selection of available sftp commands
Command
Description
ls [directory]
List the content of a remote directory. If none is supplied, a current
working directory is used by default.
cd directory
Change the remote working directory to directory.
mkdir directory
Create a remote directory.
158
CHAPTER 11. OPENSSH
Command
Description
rmdir path
Remove a remote directory.
put localfile [remotefile]
Transfer localfile to a remote machine.
get remotefile [localfile]
Transfer remotefile from a remote machine.
For a complete list of available commands, see the sftp(1) manual page.
11.4. MORE THAN A SECURE SHELL
A secure command-line interface is just the beginning of the many ways SSH can be used. Given the
proper amount of bandwidth, X11 sessions can be directed over an SSH channel. Or, by using TCP/IP
forwarding, previously insecure port connections between systems can be mapped to specific SSH
channels.
11.4.1. X11 Forwarding
To open an X11 session over an SSH connection, use a command in the following form:
ssh -Y username@hostname
For example, to log in to a remote machine named penguin.example.com with USER as a user name,
type:
~]$ ssh -Y USER@penguin.example.com
USER@penguin.example.com's password:
When an X program is run from the secure shell prompt, the SSH client and server create a new secure
channel, and the X program data is sent over that channel to the client machine transparently.
Note that the X Window system must be installed on the remote system before X11 forwarding can take
place. Enter the following command as root to install the X11 package group:
~]# yum group install "X Window System"
For more information on package groups, see Section 8.3, “Working with Package Groups” .
X11 forwarding can be very useful. For example, X11 forwarding can be used to create a secure,
interactive session of the Print Settings utility. To do this, connect to the server using ssh and type:
~]$ system-config-printer &
The Print Settings tool will appear, allowing the remote user to safely configure printing on the remote
system.
11.4.2. Port Forwarding
SSH can secure otherwise insecure TCP/IP protocols via port forwarding. When using this technique,
the SSH server becomes an encrypted conduit to the SSH client.
159
System Administrator's Guide
Port forwarding works by mapping a local port on the client to a remote port on the server. SSH can
map any port from the server to any port on the client. Port numbers do not need to match for this
technique to work.
NOTE
Setting up port forwarding to listen on ports below 1024 requires root level access.
To create a TCP/IP port forwarding channel which listens for connections on the localhost, use a
command in the following form:
ssh -L local-port:remote-hostname:remote-port username@hostname
For example, to check email on a server called mail.example.com using POP3 through an encrypted
connection, use the following command:
~]$ ssh -L 1100:mail.example.com:110 mail.example.com
Once the port forwarding channel is in place between the client machine and the mail server, direct a
POP3 mail client to use port 1100 on the localhost to check for new email. Any requests sent to
port 1100 on the client system will be directed securely to the mail.example.com server.
If mail.example.com is not running an SSH server, but another machine on the same network is,
SSH can still be used to secure part of the connection. However, a slightly different command is
necessary:
~]$ ssh -L 1100:mail.example.com:110 other.example.com
In this example, POP3 requests from port 1100 on the client machine are forwarded through the SSH
connection on port 22 to the SSH server, other.example.com. Then, other.example.com
connects to port 110 on mail.example.com to check for new email. Note that when using this
technique, only the connection between the client system and other.example.com SSH server is
secure.
Port forwarding can also be used to get information securely through network firewalls. If the firewall
is configured to allow SSH traffic via its standard port (that is, port 22) but blocks access to other
ports, a connection between two hosts using the blocked ports is still possible by redirecting their
communication over an established SSH connection.
IMPORTANT
Using port forwarding to forward connections in this manner allows any user on the
client system to connect to that service. If the client system becomes compromised, the
attacker also has access to forwarded services.
System administrators concerned about port forwarding can disable this functionality on
the server by specifying a No parameter for the AllowTcpForwarding line in
/etc/ssh/sshd_config and restarting the sshd service.
11.5. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
160
CHAPTER 11. OPENSSH
For more information on how to configure or connect to an OpenSSH server on Red Hat Enterprise
Linux, see the resources listed below.
Installed Documentation
sshd(8) — The manual page for the sshd daemon documents available command line options
and provides a complete list of supported configuration files and directories.
ssh(1) — The manual page for the ssh client application provides a complete list of available
command line options and supported configuration files and directories.
scp(1) — The manual page for the scp utility provides a more detailed description of this utility
and its usage.
sftp(1) — The manual page for the sftp utility.
ssh-keygen(1) — The manual page for the ssh-keygen utility documents in detail how to use
it to generate, manage, and convert authentication keys used by ssh.
ssh_config(5) — The manual page named ssh_config documents available SSH client
configuration options.
sshd_config(5) — The manual page named sshd_config provides a full description of
available SSH daemon configuration options.
Online Documentation
OpenSSH Home Page — The OpenSSH home page containing further documentation,
frequently asked questions, links to the mailing lists, bug reports, and other useful resources.
OpenSSL Home Page — The OpenSSL home page containing further documentation, frequently
asked questions, links to the mailing lists, and other useful resources.
See Also
Chapter 5, Gaining Privileges documents how to gain administrative privileges by using the su
and sudo commands.
Chapter 9, Managing Services with systemd provides more information on systemd and
documents how to use the systemctl command to manage system services.
[1] A multiplexed connection consists of several signals being sent over a shared, common medium. With SSH,
different channels are sent over a common secure connection.
161
System Administrator's Guide
CHAPTER 12. TIGERVNC
TigerVNC (Tiger Virtual Network Computing) is a system for graphical desktop sharing which allows
you to remotely control other computers.
TigerVNC works on the client-server principle: a server shares its output ( vncserver) and a client
(vncviewer) connects to the server.
NOTE
Unlike in previous Red Hat Enterprise Linux distributions, TigerVNC in Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 7 uses the systemd system management daemon for its configuration.
The /etc/sysconfig/vncserver configuration file has been replaced by
/etc/systemd/system/vncserver@.service.
12.1. VNC SERVER
vncserver is a utility which starts a VNC (Virtual Network Computing) desktop. It runs Xvnc with
appropriate options and starts a window manager on the VNC desktop. vncserver allows users to run
separate sessions in parallel on a machine which can then be accessed by any number of clients from
anywhere.
12.1.1. Installing VNC Server
To install the TigerVNC server, issue the following command as root:
~]# yum install tigervnc-server
12.1.2. Configuring VNC Server
The VNC server can be configured to start a display for one or more users, provided that accounts for
the users exist on the system, with optional parameters such as for display settings, network address
and port, and security settings.
Procedure 12.1. Configuring a VNC Display for a Single User
1. A configuration file named /etc/systemd/system/vncserver@.service is required. To
create this file, copy the /usr/lib/systemd/system/vncserver@.service file as root:
~]# cp /usr/lib/systemd/system/vncserver@.service
/etc/systemd/system/vncserver@.service
There is no need to include the display number in the file name because systemd
automatically creates the appropriately named instance in memory on demand, replacing
'%i' in the service file by the display number. For a single user it is not necessary to rename
the file. For multiple users, a uniquely named service file for each user is required, for example,
by adding the user name to the file name in some way. See Section 12.1.2.1, “Configuring VNC
Server for Two Users” for details.
2. Edit /etc/systemd/system/vncserver@.service, replacing USER with the actual user
name. Leave the remaining lines of the file unmodified. The -geometry argument specifies
the size of the VNC desktop to be created; by default, it is set to 1024x768.
162
CHAPTER 12. TIGERVNC
ExecStart=/usr/sbin/runuser -l USER -c "/usr/bin/vncserver %i geometry 1280x1024"
PIDFile=/home/USER/.vnc/%H%i.pid
3. Save the changes.
4. To make the changes take effect immediately, issue the following command:
~]# systemctl daemon-reload
5. Set the password for the user or users defined in the configuration file. Note that you need to
switch from root to USER first.
~]# su - USER
~]$ vncpasswd
Password:
Verify:
IMPORTANT
The stored password is not encrypted; anyone who has access to the password
file can find the plain-text password.
Proceed to Section 12.1.3, “Starting VNC Server”.
12.1.2.1. Configuring VNC Server for Two Users
If you want to configure more than one user on the same machine, create different template-type
service files, one for each user.
1. Create two service files, for example vncserver-USER_1@.service and
vncserver-USER_2@.service. In both these files substitute USER with the correct user
name.
2. Set passwords for both users:
~]$ su - USER_1
~]$ vncpasswd
Password:
Verify:
~]$ su - USER_2
~]$ vncpasswd
Password:
Verify:
12.1.3. Starting VNC Server
To start or enable the service, specify the display number directly in the command. The file configured
above in Procedure 12.1, “Configuring a VNC Display for a Single User” works as a template, in which %i
is substituted with the display number by systemd. With a valid display number, execute the following
command:
163
System Administrator's Guide
~]# systemctl start vncserver@:display_number.service
You can also enable the service to start automatically at system start. Then, when you log in,
vncserver is automatically started. As root, issue a command as follows:
~]# systemctl enable vncserver@:display_number.service
At this point, other users are able to use a VNC viewer program to connect to the VNC server using the
display number and password defined. Provided a graphical desktop is installed, an instance of that
desktop will be displayed. It will not be the same instance as that currently displayed on the target
machine.
12.1.3.1. Configuring VNC Server for Two Users and Two Different Displays
For the two configured VNC servers, vncserver-USER_1@.service and vncserver-USER_2@.service,
you can enable different display numbers. For example, the following commands will cause a VNC
server for USER_1 to start on display 3, and a VNC server for USER_2 to start on display 5:
~]# systemctl start vncserver-USER_1@:3.service
~]# systemctl start vncserver-USER_2@:5.service
12.1.4. VNC setup based on xinetd with XDMCP for GDM
VNC setup based on xinetd with X Display Manager Control Protocol (XDMCP) for GDM is a useful
setup for client systems that consist mainly of thin clients. After the setup, clients are able to access
the GDM login window and log in to any system account. The prerequisite for the setup is that the gdm,
vnc, vnc-server & and xinetd packages are installed.
~]# yum install gdm tigervnc tigervnc-server xinetd
Service xinetd must be enabled.
~]# systemctl enable xinetd.service
System default target unit should be graphical.target. To get the currently set default target unit,
use:
~]# systemctl get-default
The default target unit can be changed by using:
~]# systemctl set-default target_name
Procedure 12.2. Accessing the GDM login window and logging in
1. Set up GDM to enable XDMCP by editing the /etc/gdm/custom.conf configuration file:
[xdmcp]
Enable=true
2. Create a file called /etc/xinetd.d/xvncserver with the following content:
164
CHAPTER 12. TIGERVNC
service service_name
{
disable = no
protocol = tcp
socket_type = stream
wait = no
user = nobody
server = /usr/bin/Xvnc
server_args = -inetd -query localhost -once -geometry
selected_geometry -depth selected_depth securitytypes=none
}
In the server_args section, the -query localhost option will make each Xvnc instance
query localhost for an xdmcp session. The -depth option specifies the pixel depth (in bits) of
the VNC desktop to be created. Acceptable values are 8, 15, 16 and 24 - any other values are
likely to cause unpredictable behavior of applications.
3. Edit file /etc/services to have the service defined. To do this, append the following snippet
to the /etc/services file:
# VNC xinetd GDM base
service_name 5950/tcp
4. To ensure that the configuration changes take effect, reboot the machine.
Alternatively, you can run the following. Change init levels to 3 and back to 5 to force gdm to
reload.
# init 3
# init 5
Verify that gdm is listening on UDP port 177.
# netstat -anu|grep 177
udp
0
0 0.0.0.0:177
0.0.0.0:*
Restart the xinetd service.
~]# systemctl restart xinetd.service
Verify that the xinetd service has loaded the new services.
# netstat -anpt|grep 595
tcp
0
0 :::5950
LISTEN
3119/xinetd
:::*
5. Test the setup using a vncviewer command:
# vncviewer localhost:5950
The command will launch a VNC session to the localhost where no password is asked. You will
see a GDM login screen, and you will be able to log in to any user account on the system with a
valid user name and password. Then you can run the same test on remote connections.
165
System Administrator's Guide
Configure firewall for the setup. Run the firewall configuration tool and add TCP port 5950 to allow
incoming connections to the system.
~]# firewall-cmd --permanent --zone=public --add-port=5950/tcp
~]# firewall-cmd --reload
12.1.5. Terminating a VNC Session
Similarly to enabling the vncserver service, you can disable the automatic start of the service at
system start:
~]# systemctl disable vncserver@:display_number.service
Or, when your system is running, you can stop the service by issuing the following command as root:
~]# systemctl stop vncserver@:display_number.service
12.2. SHARING AN EXISTING DESKTOP
By default a logged in user has a desktop provided by X Server on display 0. A user can share their
desktop using the TigerVNC server x0vncserver.
Procedure 12.3. Sharing an X Desktop
To share the desktop of a logged in user, using the x0vncserver, proceed as follows:
1. Enter the following command as root
~]# yum install tigervnc-server
2. Set the VNC password for the user:
~]$ vncpasswd
Password:
Verify:
3. Enter the following command as that user:
~]$ x0vncserver -PasswordFile=.vnc/passwd -AlwaysShared=1
Provided the firewall is configured to allow connections to port 5900, the remote viewer can now
connect to display 0, and view the logged in users desktop. See Section 12.3.2.1, “Configuring the
Firewall for VNC” for information on how to configure the firewall.
12.3. VNC VIEWER
vncviewer is a program which shows the graphical user interfaces and controls the vncserver
remotely.
For operating the vncviewer, there is a pop-up menu containing entries which perform various
actions such as switching in and out of full-screen mode or quitting the viewer. Alternatively, you can
166
CHAPTER 12. TIGERVNC
operate vncviewer through the terminal. Enter vncviewer -h on the command line to list
vncviewer's parameters.
12.3.1. Installing VNC Viewer
To install the TigerVNC client, vncviewer, issue the following command as root:
~]# yum install tigervnc
12.3.2. Connecting to VNC Server
Once the VNC server is configured, you can connect to it from any VNC viewer.
Procedure 12.4. Connecting to a VNC Server Using a GUI
1. Enter the vncviewer command with no arguments, the VNC Viewer: Connection
Details utility appears. It prompts for a VNC server to connect to.
2. If required, to prevent disconnecting any existing VNC connections to the same display, select
the option to allow sharing of the desktop as follows:
a. Select the Options button.
b. Select the Misc. tab.
c. Select the Shared button.
d. Press OK to return to the main menu.
3. Enter an address and display number to connect to:
address:display_number
4. Press Connect to connect to the VNC server display.
5. You will be prompted to enter the VNC password. This will be the VNC password for the user
corresponding to the display number unless a global default VNC password was set.
A window appears showing the VNC server desktop. Note that this is not the desktop the
normal user sees, it is an Xvnc desktop.
Procedure 12.5. Connecting to a VNC Server Using the CLI
1. Enter the viewer command with the address and display number as arguments:
vncviewer address:display_number
Where address is an IP address or host name.
2. Authenticate yourself by entering the VNC password. This will be the VNC password for the
user corresponding to the display number unless a global default VNC password was set.
3. A window appears showing the VNC server desktop. Note that this is not the desktop the
normal user sees, it is the Xvnc desktop.
167
System Administrator's Guide
12.3.2.1. Configuring the Firewall for VNC
When using a non-encrypted connection, firewalld might block the connection. To allow firewalld
to pass the VNC packets, you can open specific ports to TCP traffic. When using the -via option,
traffic is redirected over SSH which is enabled by default in firewalld.
NOTE
The default port of VNC server is 5900. To reach the port through which a remote
desktop will be accessible, sum the default port and the user's assigned display number.
For example, for the second display: 2 + 5900 = 5902.
For displays 0 to 3, make use of firewalld's support for the VNC service by means of the service
option as described below. Note that for display numbers greater than 3, the corresponding ports will
have to be opened specifically as explained in Procedure 12.7, “Opening Ports in firewalld” .
Procedure 12.6. Enabling VNC Service in firewalld
1. Run the following command to see the information concerning firewalld settings:
~]$ firewall-cmd --list-all
2. To allow all VNC connections from a specific address, use a command as follows:
~]# firewall-cmd --add-rich-rule='rule family="ipv4" source
address="192.168.122.116" service name=vnc-server accept'
success
Note that these changes will not persist after the next system start. To make permanent
changes to the firewall, repeat the commands adding the --permanent option. See the
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Security Guide for more information on the use of firewall rich
language commands.
3. To verify the above settings, use a command as follows:
~]# firewall-cmd --list-all
public (default, active)
interfaces: bond0 bond0.192
sources:
services: dhcpv6-client ssh
ports:
masquerade: no
forward-ports:
icmp-blocks:
rich rules:
rule family="ipv4" source address="192.168.122.116" service
name="vnc-server" accept
To open a specific port or range of ports make use of the --add-port option to the firewall-cmd
command Line tool. For example, VNC display 4 requires port 5904 to be opened for TCP traffic.
Procedure 12.7. Opening Ports in firewalld
168
CHAPTER 12. TIGERVNC
1. To open a port for TCP traffic in the public zone, issue a command as root as follows:
~]# firewall-cmd --zone=public --add-port=5904/tcp
success
2. To view the ports that are currently open for the public zone, issue a command as follows:
~]# firewall-cmd --zone=public --list-ports
5904/tcp
A port can be removed using the firewall-cmd --zone=zone --removeport=number/protocol command.
Note that these changes will not persist after the next system start. To make permanent changes to
the firewall, repeat the commands adding the --permanent option. For more information on opening
and closing ports in firewalld, see the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Security Guide .
12.3.3. Connecting to VNC Server Using SSH
VNC is a clear text network protocol with no security against possible attacks on the communication.
To make the communication secure, you can encrypt your server-client connection by using the -via
option. This will create an SSH tunnel between the VNC server and the client.
The format of the command to encrypt a VNC server-client connection is as follows:
vncviewer -via user@host:display_number
Example 12.1. Using the -via Option
1. To connect to a VNC server using SSH, enter a command as follows:
~]$ vncviewer -via USER_2@192.168.2.101:3
2. When you are prompted to, type the password, and confirm by pressing Enter.
3. A window with a remote desktop appears on your screen.
Restricting VNC Access
If you prefer only encrypted connections, you can prevent unencrypted connections altogether by
using the -localhost option in the systemd.service file, the ExecStart line:
ExecStart=/usr/sbin/runuser -l user -c "/usr/bin/vncserver -localhost %i"
This will stop vncserver from accepting connections from anything but the local host and portforwarded connections sent using SSH as a result of the -via option.
For more information on using SSH, see Chapter 11, OpenSSH.
12.4. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
For more information about TigerVNC, see the resources listed below.
169
System Administrator's Guide
Installed Documentation
vncserver(1) — The manual page for the VNC server utility.
vncviewer(1) — The manual page for the VNC viewer.
vncpasswd(1) — The manual page for the VNC password command.
Xvnc(1) — The manual page for the Xvnc server configuration options.
x0vncserver(1) — The manual page for the TigerVNC server for sharing existing X servers.
170
PART V. SERVERS
PART V. SERVERS
This part discusses various topics related to servers such as how to set up a web server or share files
and directories over a network.
171
System Administrator's Guide
CHAPTER 13. WEB SERVERS
A web server is a network service that serves content to a client over the web. This typically means web
pages, but any other documents can be served as well. Web servers are also known as HTTP servers,
as they use the hypertext transport protocol (HTTP).
13.1. THE APACHE HTTP SERVER
The web server available in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 is version 2.4 of the Apache HTTP Server,
httpd, an open source web server developed by the Apache Software Foundation .
If you are upgrading from a previous release of Red Hat Enterprise Linux, you will need to update the
httpd service configuration accordingly. This section reviews some of the newly added features,
outlines important changes between Apache HTTP Server 2.4 and version 2.2, and guides you through
the update of older configuration files.
13.1.1. Notable Changes
The Apache HTTP Server in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 has the following changes compared to
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6:
httpd Service Control
With the migration away from SysV init scripts, server administrators should switch to using the
apachectl and systemctl commands to control the service, in place of the service command.
The following examples are specific to the httpd service.
The command:
service httpd graceful
is replaced by
apachectl graceful
The systemd unit file for httpd has different behavior from the init script as follows:
A graceful restart is used by default when the service is reloaded.
A graceful stop is used by default when the service is stopped.
The command:
service httpd configtest
is replaced by
apachectl configtest
Private /tmp
To enhance system security, the systemd unit file runs the httpd daemon using a private /tmp
directory, separate to the system /tmp directory.
172
CHAPTER 13. WEB SERVERS
Configuration Layout
Configuration files which load modules are now placed in the /etc/httpd/conf.modules.d/
directory. Packages that provide additional loadable modules for httpd, such as php, will place a
file in this directory. An Include directive before the main section of the
/etc/httpd/conf/httpd.conf file is used to include files within the
/etc/httpd/conf.modules.d/ directory. This means any configuration files within
conf.modules.d/ are processed before the main body of httpd.conf. An IncludeOptional
directive for files within the /etc/httpd/conf.d/ directory is placed at the end of the
httpd.conf file. This means the files within /etc/httpd/conf.d/ are now processed after the
main body of httpd.conf.
Some additional configuration files are provided by the httpd package itself:
/etc/httpd/conf.d/autoindex.conf — This configures mod_autoindex directory
indexing.
/etc/httpd/conf.d/userdir.conf — This configures access to user directories, for
example, http://example.com/~username/; such access is disabled by default for
security reasons.
/etc/httpd/conf.d/welcome.conf — As in previous releases, this configures the
welcome page displayed for http://localhost/ when no content is present.
Default Configuration
A minimal httpd.conf file is now provided by default. Many common configuration settings, such
as Timeout or KeepAlive are no longer explicitly configured in the default configuration; hardcoded settings will be used instead, by default. The hard-coded default settings for all configuration
directives are specified in the manual. See the section called “Installable Documentation” for more
information.
Incompatible Syntax Changes
If migrating an existing configuration from httpd 2.2 to httpd 2.4, a number of backwardsincompatible changes to the httpd configuration syntax were made which will require changes.
See the following Apache document for more information on upgrading
http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.4/upgrading.html
Processing Model
In previous releases of Red Hat Enterprise Linux, different multi-processing models (MPM) were
made available as different httpd binaries: the forked model, “prefork”, as /usr/sbin/httpd,
and the thread-based model “worker” as /usr/sbin/httpd.worker.
In Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7, only a single httpd binary is used, and three MPMs are available as
loadable modules: worker, prefork (default), and event. Edit the configuration file
/etc/httpd/conf.modules.d/00-mpm.conf as required, by adding and removing the
comment character # so that only one of the three MPM modules is loaded.
Packaging Changes
The LDAP authentication and authorization modules are now provided in a separate sub-package,
mod_ldap. The new module mod_session and associated helper modules are provided in a new subpackage, mod_session. The new modules mod_proxy_html and mod_xml2enc are provided in a
new sub-package, mod_proxy_html. These packages are all in the Optional channel.
173
System Administrator's Guide
NOTE
Before subscribing to the Optional and Supplementary channels see the Scope of
Coverage Details. If you decide to install packages from these channels, follow the
steps documented in the article called How to access Optional and Supplementary
channels, and -devel packages using Red Hat Subscription Manager (RHSM)? on the
Red Hat Customer Portal.
Packaging Filesystem Layout
The /var/cache/mod_proxy/ directory is no longer provided; instead, the /var/cache/httpd/
directory is packaged with a proxy and ssl subdirectory.
Packaged content provided with httpd has been moved from /var/www/ to
/usr/share/httpd/:
/usr/share/httpd/icons/ — The directory containing a set of icons used with directory
indices, previously contained in /var/www/icons/, has moved to
/usr/share/httpd/icons/. Available at http://localhost/icons/ in the default
configuration; the location and the availability of the icons is configurable in the
/etc/httpd/conf.d/autoindex.conf file.
/usr/share/httpd/manual/ — The /var/www/manual/ has moved to
/usr/share/httpd/manual/. This directory, contained in the httpd-manual package,
contains the HTML version of the manual for httpd. Available at
http://localhost/manual/ if the package is installed, the location and the availability
of the manual is configurable in the /etc/httpd/conf.d/manual.conf file.
/usr/share/httpd/error/ — The /var/www/error/ has moved to
/usr/share/httpd/error/. Custom multi-language HTTP error pages. Not configured
by default, the example configuration file is provided at
/usr/share/doc/httpd-VERSION/httpd-multilang-errordoc.conf.
Authentication, Authorization and Access Control
The configuration directives used to control authentication, authorization and access control have
changed significantly. Existing configuration files using the Order, Deny and Allow directives
should be adapted to use the new Require syntax. See the following Apache document for more
information http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.4/howto/auth.html
suexec
To improve system security, the suexec binary is no longer installed as if by the root user; instead,
it has file system capability bits set which allow a more restrictive set of permissions. In conjunction
with this change, the suexec binary no longer uses the /var/log/httpd/suexec.log logfile.
Instead, log messages are sent to syslog; by default these will appear in the /var/log/secure log
file.
Module Interface
Third-party binary modules built against httpd 2.2 are not compatible with httpd 2.4 due to
changes to the httpd module interface. Such modules will need to be adjusted as necessary for the
httpd 2.4 module interface, and then rebuilt. A detailed list of the API changes in version 2.4 is
available here: http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.4/developer/new_api_2_4.html.
174
CHAPTER 13. WEB SERVERS
The apxs binary used to build modules from source has moved from /usr/sbin/apxs to
/usr/bin/apxs.
Removed modules
List of httpd modules removed in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7:
mod_auth_mysql, mod_auth_pgsql
httpd 2.4 provides SQL database authentication support internally in the mod_authn_dbd
module.
mod_perl
mod_perl is not officially supported with httpd 2.4 by upstream.
mod_authz_ldap
httpd 2.4 provides LDAP support in sub-package mod_ldap using mod_authnz_ldap.
13.1.2. Updating the Configuration
To update the configuration files from the Apache HTTP Server version 2.2, take the following steps:
1. Make sure all module names are correct, since they may have changed. Adjust the
LoadModule directive for each module that has been renamed.
2. Recompile all third party modules before attempting to load them. This typically means
authentication and authorization modules.
3. If you use the mod_userdir module, make sure the UserDir directive indicating a directory
name (typically public_html) is provided.
4. If you use the Apache HTTP Secure Server, see Section 13.1.8, “Enabling the mod_ssl Module”
for important information on enabling the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol.
Note that you can check the configuration for possible errors by using the following command:
~]# apachectl configtest
Syntax OK
For more information on upgrading the Apache HTTP Server configuration from version 2.2 to 2.4, see
http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.4/upgrading.html.
13.1.3. Running the httpd Service
This section describes how to start, stop, restart, and check the current status of the Apache HTTP
Server. To be able to use the httpd service, make sure you have the httpd installed. You can do so by
using the following command:
~]# yum install httpd
For more information on the concept of targets and how to manage system services in Red Hat
Enterprise Linux in general, see Chapter 9, Managing Services with systemd.
175
System Administrator's Guide
13.1.3.1. Starting the Service
To run the httpd service, type the following at a shell prompt as root:
~]# systemctl start httpd.service
If you want the service to start automatically at boot time, use the following command:
~]# systemctl enable httpd.service
Created symlink from /etc/systemd/system/multiuser.target.wants/httpd.service to /usr/lib/systemd/system/httpd.service.
NOTE
If running the Apache HTTP Server as a secure server, a password may be required after
the machine boots if using an encrypted private SSL key.
13.1.3.2. Stopping the Service
To stop the running httpd service, type the following at a shell prompt as root:
~]# systemctl stop httpd.service
To prevent the service from starting automatically at boot time, type:
~]# systemctl disable httpd.service
Removed symlink /etc/systemd/system/multi-user.target.wants/httpd.service.
13.1.3.3. Restarting the Service
There are three different ways to restart a running httpd service:
1. To restart the service completely, enter the following command as root:
~]# systemctl restart httpd.service
This stops the running httpd service and immediately starts it again. Use this command after
installing or removing a dynamically loaded module such as PHP.
2. To only reload the configuration, as root, type:
~]# systemctl reload httpd.service
This causes the running httpd service to reload its configuration file. Any requests currently
being processed will be interrupted, which may cause a client browser to display an error
message or render a partial page.
3. To reload the configuration without affecting active requests, enter the following command as
root:
~]# apachectl graceful
176
CHAPTER 13. WEB SERVERS
This causes the running httpd service to reload its configuration file. Any requests currently
being processed will continue to use the old configuration.
For more information on how to manage system services in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7, see Chapter 9,
Managing Services with systemd.
13.1.3.4. Verifying the Service Status
To verify that the httpd service is running, type the following at a shell prompt:
~]# systemctl is-active httpd.service
active
13.1.4. Editing the Configuration Files
When the httpd service is started, by default, it reads the configuration from locations that are listed
in Table 13.1, “The httpd service configuration files” .
Table 13.1. The httpd service configuration files
Path
Description
/etc/httpd/conf/httpd.
conf
The main configuration file.
/etc/httpd/conf.d/
An auxiliary directory for configuration files that are included in the
main configuration file.
Although the default configuration should be suitable for most situations, it is a good idea to become at
least familiar with some of the more important configuration options. Note that for any changes to take
effect, the web server has to be restarted first. See Section 13.1.3.3, “Restarting the Service” for more
information on how to restart the httpd service.
To check the configuration for possible errors, type the following at a shell prompt:
~]# apachectl configtest
Syntax OK
To make the recovery from mistakes easier, it is recommended that you make a copy of the original file
before editing it.
13.1.5. Working with Modules
Being a modular application, the httpd service is distributed along with a number of Dynamic Shared
Objects (DSOs), which can be dynamically loaded or unloaded at runtime as necessary. On Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 7, these modules are located in /usr/lib64/httpd/modules/.
13.1.5.1. Loading a Module
To load a particular DSO module, use the LoadModule directive. Note that modules provided by a
separate package often have their own configuration file in the /etc/httpd/conf.d/ directory.
177
System Administrator's Guide
Example 13.1. Loading the mod_ssl DSO
LoadModule ssl_module modules/mod_ssl.so
Once you are finished, restart the web server to reload the configuration. See Section 13.1.3.3,
“Restarting the Service” for more information on how to restart the httpd service.
13.1.5.2. Writing a Module
If you intend to create a new DSO module, make sure you have the httpd-devel package installed. To
do so, enter the following command as root:
~]# yum install httpd-devel
This package contains the include files, the header files, and the APache eXtenSion (apxs) utility
required to compile a module.
Once written, you can build the module with the following command:
~]# apxs -i -a -c module_name.c
If the build was successful, you should be able to load the module the same way as any other module
that is distributed with the Apache HTTP Server.
13.1.6. Setting Up Virtual Hosts
The Apache HTTP Server's built in virtual hosting allows the server to provide different information
based on which IP address, host name, or port is being requested.
To create a name-based virtual host, copy the example configuration file
/usr/share/doc/httpd-VERSION/httpd-vhosts.conf into the /etc/httpd/conf.d/
directory, and replace the @@Port@@ and @@ServerRoot@@ placeholder values. Customize the
options according to your requirements as shown in Example 13.2, “Example virtual host
configuration”.
Example 13.2. Example virtual host configuration
ServerAdmin webmaster@penguin.example.com
DocumentRoot "/www/docs/penguin.example.com"
ServerName penguin.example.com
ServerAlias www.penguin.example.com
ErrorLog "/var/log/httpd/dummy-host.example.com-error_log"
CustomLog "/var/log/httpd/dummy-host.example.com-access_log" common
Note that ServerName must be a valid DNS name assigned to the machine. The
container is highly customizable, and accepts most of the directives available within the main server
configuration. Directives that are not supported within this container include User and Group, which
were replaced by SuexecUserGroup.
178
CHAPTER 13. WEB SERVERS
NOTE
If you configure a virtual host to listen on a non-default port, make sure you update the
Listen directive in the global settings section of the /etc/httpd/conf/httpd.conf
file accordingly.
To activate a newly created virtual host, the web server has to be restarted first. See Section 13.1.3.3,
“Restarting the Service” for more information on how to restart the httpd service.
13.1.7. Setting Up an SSL Server
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a cryptographic protocol that allows a server and a client to
communicate securely. Along with its extended and improved version called Transport Layer Security
(TLS), it ensures both privacy and data integrity. The Apache HTTP Server in combination with
mod_ssl, a module that uses the OpenSSL toolkit to provide the SSL/TLS support, is commonly
referred to as the SSL server. Red Hat Enterprise Linux also supports the use of Mozilla NSS as the TLS
implementation. Support for Mozilla NSS is provided by the mod_nss module.
Unlike an HTTP connection that can be read and possibly modified by anybody who is able to intercept
it, the use of SSL/TLS over HTTP, referred to as HTTPS, prevents any inspection or modification of the
transmitted content. This section provides basic information on how to enable this module in the
Apache HTTP Server configuration, and guides you through the process of generating private keys
and self-signed certificates.
13.1.7.1. An Overview of Certificates and Security
Secure communication is based on the use of keys. In conventional or symmetric cryptography, both
ends of the transaction have the same key they can use to decode each other's transmissions. On the
other hand, in public or asymmetric cryptography, two keys co-exist: a private key that is kept a secret,
and a public key that is usually shared with the public. While the data encoded with the public key can
only be decoded with the private key, data encoded with the private key can in turn only be decoded
with the public key.
To provide secure communications using SSL, an SSL server must use a digital certificate signed by a
Certificate Authority (CA). The certificate lists various attributes of the server (that is, the server host
name, the name of the company, its location, etc.), and the signature produced using the CA's private
key. This signature ensures that a particular certificate authority has signed the certificate, and that
the certificate has not been modified in any way.
When a web browser establishes a new SSL connection, it checks the certificate provided by the web
server. If the certificate does not have a signature from a trusted CA, or if the host name listed in the
certificate does not match the host name used to establish the connection, it refuses to communicate
with the server and usually presents a user with an appropriate error message.
By default, most web browsers are configured to trust a set of widely used certificate authorities.
Because of this, an appropriate CA should be chosen when setting up a secure server, so that target
users can trust the connection, otherwise they will be presented with an error message, and will have
to accept the certificate manually. Since encouraging users to override certificate errors can allow an
attacker to intercept the connection, you should use a trusted CA whenever possible. For more
information on this, see Table 13.2, “Information about CA lists used by common web browsers” .
Table 13.2. Information about CA lists used by common web browsers
179
System Administrator's Guide
Web Browser
Link
Mozilla Firefox
Mozilla root CA list.
Opera
Information on root certificates used by Opera.
Internet Explorer
Information on root certificates used by Microsoft Windows.
Chromium
Information on root certificates used by the Chromium project.
When setting up an SSL server, you need to generate a certificate request and a private key, and then
send the certificate request, proof of the company's identity, and payment to a certificate authority.
Once the CA verifies the certificate request and your identity, it will send you a signed certificate you
can use with your server. Alternatively, you can create a self-signed certificate that does not contain a
CA signature, and thus should be used for testing purposes only.
13.1.8. Enabling the mod_ssl Module
If you intend to set up an SSL or HTTPS server using mod_ssl, you cannot have the another
application or module, such as mod_nss configured to use the same port. Port 443 is the default port
for HTTPS.
To set up an SSL server using the mod_ssl module and the OpenSSL toolkit, install the mod_ssl and
openssl packages. Enter the following command as root:
~]# yum install mod_ssl openssl
This will create the mod_ssl configuration file at /etc/httpd/conf.d/ssl.conf, which is included
in the main Apache HTTP Server configuration file by default. For the module to be loaded, restart the
httpd service as described in Section 13.1.3.3, “Restarting the Service”.
IMPORTANT
Due to the vulnerability described in POODLE: SSLv3 vulnerability (CVE-2014-3566),
Red Hat recommends disabling SSL and using only TLSv1.1 or TLSv1.2. Backwards
compatibility can be achieved using TLSv1.0. Many products Red Hat supports have the
ability to use SSLv2 or SSLv3 protocols, or enable them by default. However, the use of
SSLv2 or SSLv3 is now strongly recommended against.
13.1.8.1. Enabling and Disabling SSL and TLS in mod_ssl
To disable and enable specific versions of the SSL and TLS protocol, either do it globally by adding the
SSLProtocol directive in the “## SSL Global Context ” section of the configuration file and removing
it everywhere else, or edit the default entry under “# SSL Protocol support ” in all “VirtualHost”
sections. If you do not specify it in the per-domain VirtualHost section then it will inherit the settings
from the global section. To make sure that a protocol version is being disabled the administrator
should either only specify SSLProtocol in the “SSL Global Context ” section, or specify it in all perdomain VirtualHost sections.
Procedure 13.1. Disable SSLv2 and SSLv3
180
CHAPTER 13. WEB SERVERS
To disable SSL version 2 and SSL version 3, which implies enabling everything except SSL version 2
and SSL version 3, in all VirtualHost sections, proceed as follows:
1. As root, open the /etc/httpd/conf.d/ssl.conf file and search for all instances of the
SSLProtocol directive. By default, the configuration file contains one section that looks as
follows:
~]# vi /etc/httpd/conf.d/ssl.conf
#
SSL Protocol support:
# List the enable protocol levels with which clients will be able to
# connect. Disable SSLv2 access by default:
SSLProtocol all -SSLv2
This section is within the VirtualHost section.
2. Edit the SSLProtocol line as follows:
#
SSL Protocol support:
# List the enable protocol levels with which clients will be able to
# connect. Disable SSLv2 access by default:
SSLProtocol all -SSLv2 -SSLv3
Repeat this action for all VirtualHost sections. Save and close the file.
3. Verify that all occurrences of the SSLProtocol directive have been changed as follows:
~]# grep SSLProtocol /etc/httpd/conf.d/ssl.conf
SSLProtocol all -SSLv2 -SSLv3
This step is particularly important if you have more than the one default VirtualHost section.
4. Restart the Apache daemon as follows:
~]# systemctl restart httpd
Note that any sessions will be interrupted.
Procedure 13.2. Disable All SSL and TLS Protocols Except TLS 1 and Up
To disable all SSL and TLS protocol versions except TLS version 1 and higher, proceed as follows:
1. As root, open the /etc/httpd/conf.d/ssl.conf file and search for all instances of
SSLProtocol directive. By default the file contains one section that looks as follows:
~]# vi /etc/httpd/conf.d/ssl.conf
#
SSL Protocol support:
# List the enable protocol levels with which clients will be able to
# connect. Disable SSLv2 access by default:
SSLProtocol all -SSLv2
2. Edit the SSLProtocol line as follows:
#
SSL Protocol support:
# List the enable protocol levels with which clients will be able to
181
System Administrator's Guide
# connect. Disable SSLv2 access by default:
SSLProtocol -all +TLSv1 +TLSv1.1 +TLSv1.2
Save and close the file.
3. Verify the change as follows:
~]# grep SSLProtocol /etc/httpd/conf.d/ssl.conf
SSLProtocol -all +TLSv1 +TLSv1.1 +TLSv1.2
4. Restart the Apache daemon as follows:
~]# systemctl restart httpd
Note that any sessions will be interrupted.
Procedure 13.3. Testing the Status of SSL and TLS Protocols
To check which versions of SSL and TLS are enabled or disabled, make use of the openssl s_client
-connect command. The command has the following form:
openssl s_client -connect hostname:port -protocol
Where port is the port to test and protocol is the protocol version to test for. To test the SSL server
running locally, use localhost as the host name. For example, to test the default port for secure
HTTPS connections, port 443 to see if SSLv3 is enabled, issue a command as follows:
1.
~]# openssl s_client -connect localhost:443 -ssl3
CONNECTED(00000003)
139809943877536:error:14094410:SSL routines:SSL3_READ_BYTES:sslv3
alert handshake failure:s3_pkt.c:1257:SSL alert number 40
139809943877536:error:1409E0E5:SSL routines:SSL3_WRITE_BYTES:ssl
handshake failure:s3_pkt.c:596:
output omitted
New, (NONE), Cipher is (NONE)
Secure Renegotiation IS NOT supported
Compression: NONE
Expansion: NONE
SSL-Session:
Protocol : SSLv3
output truncated
The above output indicates that the handshake failed and therefore no cipher was negotiated.
2.
182
~]$ openssl s_client -connect localhost:443 -tls1_2
CONNECTED(00000003)
depth=0 C = --, ST = SomeState, L = SomeCity, O = SomeOrganization,
OU = SomeOrganizationalUnit, CN = localhost.localdomain,
emailAddress = root@localhost.localdomain
output omitted
New, TLSv1/SSLv3, Cipher is ECDHE-RSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384
Server public key is 2048 bit
Secure Renegotiation IS supported
Compression: NONE
CHAPTER 13. WEB SERVERS
Expansion: NONE
SSL-Session:
Protocol : TLSv1.2
output truncated
The above output indicates that no failure of the handshake occurred and a set of ciphers was
negotiated.
The openssl s_client command options are documented in the s_client(1) manual page.
For more information on the SSLv3 vulnerability and how to test for it, see the Red Hat
Knowledgebase article POODLE: SSLv3 vulnerability (CVE-2014-3566).
13.1.9. Enabling the mod_nss Module
If you intend to set up an HTTPS server using mod_nss, you cannot have the mod_ssl package
installed with its default settings as mod_ssl will use port 443 by default, however this is the default
HTTPS port. If at all possible, remove the package.
To remove mod_ssl, enter the following command as root:
~]# yum remove mod_ssl
NOTE
If mod_ssl is required for other purposes, modify the
/etc/httpd/conf.d/ssl.conf file to use a port other than 443 to prevent mod_ssl
conflicting with mod_nss when its port to listen on is changed to 443.
Only one module can own a port, therefore mod_nss and mod_ssl can only co-exist at
the same time if they use unique ports. For this reason mod_nss by default uses 8443,
but the default port for HTTPS is port 443. The port is specified by the Listen directive
as well as in the VirtualHost name or address.
Everything in NSS is associated with a “token”. The software token exists in the NSS database but you
can also have a physical token containing certificates. With OpenSSL, discrete certificates and private
keys are held in PEM files. With NSS, these are stored in a database. Each certificate and key is
associated with a token and each token can have a password protecting it. This password is optional,
but if a password is used then the Apache HTTP server needs a copy of it in order to open the database
without user intervention at system start.
Procedure 13.4. Configuring mod_nss
1. Install mod_nss as root:
~]# yum install mod_nss
This will create the mod_nss configuration file at /etc/httpd/conf.d/nss.conf. The
/etc/httpd/conf.d/ directory is included in the main Apache HTTP Server configuration
file by default. For the module to be loaded, restart the httpd service as described in
Section 13.1.3.3, “Restarting the Service”.
183
System Administrator's Guide
2. As root, open the /etc/httpd/conf.d/nss.conf file and search for all instances of the
Listen directive.
Edit the Listen 8443 line as follows:
Listen 443
Port 443 is the default port for HTTPS.
3. Edit the default VirtualHost _default_:8443 line as follows:
VirtualHost _default_:443
Edit any other non-default virtual host sections if they exist. Save and close the file.
4. Mozilla NSS stores certificates in a server certificate database indicated by the
NSSCertificateDatabase directive in the /etc/httpd/conf.d/nss.conf file. By default
the path is set to /etc/httpd/alias, the NSS database created during installation.
To view the default NSS database, issue a command as follows:
~]# certutil -L -d /etc/httpd/alias
Certificate Nickname
Attributes
Trust
SSL,S/MIME,JAR/XPI
cacert
CTu,Cu,Cu
Server-Cert
u,u,u
alpha
u,pu,u
In the above command output, Server-Cert is the default NSSNickname. The -L option lists
all the certificates, or displays information about a named certificate, in a certificate database.
The -d option specifies the database directory containing the certificate and key database
files. See the certutil(1) man page for more command line options.
5. To configure mod_nss to use another database, edit the NSSCertificateDatabase line in
the /etc/httpd/conf.d/nss.conf file. The default file has the following lines within the
VirtualHost section.
#
Server Certificate Database:
#
The NSS security database directory that holds the certificates
and
#
keys. The database consists of 3 files: cert8.db, key3.db and
secmod.db.
#
Provide the directory that these files exist.
NSSCertificateDatabase /etc/httpd/alias
In the above command output, alias is the default NSS database directory,
/etc/httpd/alias/.
184
CHAPTER 13. WEB SERVERS
6. To apply a password to the default NSS certificate database, use the following command as
root:
~]# certutil -W -d /etc/httpd/alias
Enter Password or Pin for "NSS Certificate DB":
Enter a password which will be used to encrypt your keys.
The password should be at least 8 characters long,
and should contain at least one non-alphabetic character.
Enter new password:
Re-enter password:
Password changed successfully.
7. Before deploying the HTTPS server, create a new certificate database using a certificate
signed by a certificate authority (CA).
Example 13.3. Adding a Certificate to the Mozilla NSS database
The certutil command is used to add a CA certificate to the NSS database files:
certutil -d /etc/httpd/nss-db-directory/ -A -n "CA_certificate" t CT,, -a -i certificate.pem
The above command adds a CA certificate stored in a PEM-formatted file named
certificate.pem. The -d option specifies the NSS database directory containing the
certificate and key database files, the -n option sets a name for the certificate, -t CT,,
means that the certificate is trusted to be used in TLS clients and servers. The -A option
adds an existing certificate to a certificate database. If the database does not exist it will be
created. The -a option allows the use of ASCII format for input or output, and the -i option
passes the certificate.pem input file to the command.
See the certutil(1) man page for more command line options.
8. The NSS database should be password protected to safeguard the private key.
Example 13.4. Setting a Password for a Mozilla NSS database
The certutil tool can be used set a password for an NSS database as follows:
certutil -W -d /etc/httpd/nss-db-directory/
For example, for the default database, issue a command as root as follows:
~]# certutil -W -d /etc/httpd/alias
Enter Password or Pin for "NSS Certificate DB":
Enter a password which will be used to encrypt your keys.
The password should be at least 8 characters long,
and should contain at least one non-alphabetic character.
Enter new password:
Re-enter password:
Password changed successfully.
185
System Administrator's Guide
9. Configure mod_nss to use the NSS internal software token by changing the line with the
NSSPassPhraseDialog directive as follows:
~]# vi /etc/httpd/conf.d/nss.conf
NSSPassPhraseDialog file:/etc/httpd/password.conf
This is to avoid manual password entry on system start. The software token exists in the NSS
database but you can also have a physical token containing your certificates.
10. If the SSL Server Certificate contained in the NSS database is an RSA certificate, make certain
that the NSSNickname parameter is uncommented and matches the nickname displayed in
step 4 above:
~]# vi /etc/httpd/conf.d/nss.conf
NSSNickname Server-Cert
If the SSL Server Certificate contained in the NSS database is an ECC certificate, make certain
that the NSSECCNickname parameter is uncommented and matches the nickname displayed
in step 4 above:
~]# vi /etc/httpd/conf.d/nss.conf
NSSECCNickname Server-Cert
Make certain that the NSSCertificateDatabase parameter is uncommented and points to
the NSS database directory displayed in step 4 or configured in step 5 above:
~]# vi /etc/httpd/conf.d/nss.conf
NSSCertificateDatabase /etc/httpd/alias
Replace /etc/httpd/alias with the path to the certificate database to be used.
11. Create the /etc/httpd/password.conf file as root:
~]# vi /etc/httpd/password.conf
Add a line with the following form:
internal:password
Replacing password with the password that was applied to the NSS security databases in step
6 above.
12. Apply the appropriate ownership and permissions to the /etc/httpd/password.conf file:
~]# chgrp apache /etc/httpd/password.conf
~]# chmod 640 /etc/httpd/password.conf
~]# ls -l /etc/httpd/password.conf
-rw-r-----. 1 root apache 10 Dec 4 17:13 /etc/httpd/password.conf
13. To configure mod_nss to use the NSS the software token in /etc/httpd/password.conf,
edit /etc/httpd/conf.d/nss.conf as follows:
186
CHAPTER 13. WEB SERVERS
~]# vi /etc/httpd/conf.d/nss.conf
14. Restart the Apache server for the changes to take effect as described in Section 13.1.3.3,
“Restarting the Service”
IMPORTANT
Due to the vulnerability described in POODLE: SSLv3 vulnerability (CVE-2014-3566),
Red Hat recommends disabling SSL and using only TLSv1.1 or TLSv1.2. Backwards
compatibility can be achieved using TLSv1.0. Many products Red Hat supports have the
ability to use SSLv2 or SSLv3 protocols, or enable them by default. However, the use of
SSLv2 or SSLv3 is now strongly recommended against.
13.1.9.1. Enabling and Disabling SSL and TLS in mod_nss
To disable and enable specific versions of the SSL and TLS protocol, either do it globally by adding the
NSSProtocol directive in the “## SSL Global Context ” section of the configuration file and removing
it everywhere else, or edit the default entry under “# SSL Protocol” in all “VirtualHost” sections. If you
do not specify it in the per-domain VirtualHost section then it will inherit the settings from the global
section. To make sure that a protocol version is being disabled the administrator should either only
specify NSSProtocol in the “SSL Global Context ” section, or specify it in all per-domain VirtualHost
sections.
Procedure 13.5. Disable All SSL and TLS Protocols Except TLS 1 and Up in mod_nss
To disable all SSL and TLS protocol versions except TLS version 1 and higher, proceed as follows:
1. As root, open the /etc/httpd/conf.d/nss.conf file and search for all instances of the
NSSProtocol directive. By default, the configuration file contains one section that looks as
follows:
~]# vi /etc/httpd/conf.d/nss.conf
#
SSL Protocol:
output omitted
#
Since all protocol ranges are completely inclusive, and no
protocol in the
#
middle of a range may be excluded, the entry "NSSProtocol
SSLv3,TLSv1.1"
#
is identical to the entry "NSSProtocol SSLv3,TLSv1.0,TLSv1.1".
NSSProtocol SSLv3,TLSv1.0,TLSv1.1
This section is within the VirtualHost section.
2. Edit the NSSProtocol line as follows:
#
SSL Protocol:
NSSProtocol TLSv1.0,TLSv1.1
Repeat this action for all VirtualHost sections.
3. Edit the Listen 8443 line as follows:
Listen 443
187
System Administrator's Guide
4. Edit the default VirtualHost _default_:8443 line as follows:
VirtualHost _default_:443
Edit any other non-default virtual host sections if they exist. Save and close the file.
5. Verify that all occurrences of the NSSProtocol directive have been changed as follows:
~]# grep NSSProtocol /etc/httpd/conf.d/nss.conf
#
middle of a range may be excluded, the entry "NSSProtocol
SSLv3,TLSv1.1"
#
is identical to the entry "NSSProtocol SSLv3,TLSv1.0,TLSv1.1".
NSSProtocol TLSv1.0,TLSv1.1
This step is particularly important if you have more than one VirtualHost section.
6. Restart the Apache daemon as follows:
~]# service httpd restart
Note that any sessions will be interrupted.
Procedure 13.6. Testing the Status of SSL and TLS Protocols in mod_nss
To check which versions of SSL and TLS are enabled or disabled in mod_nss, make use of the openssl
s_client -connect command. Install the openssl package as root:
~]# yum install openssl
The openssl s_client -connect command has the following form:
openssl s_client -connect hostname:port -protocol
Where port is the port to test and protocol is the protocol version to test for. To test the SSL server
running locally, use localhost as the host name. For example, to test the default port for secure
HTTPS connections, port 443 to see if SSLv3 is enabled, issue a command as follows:
1.
~]# openssl s_client -connect localhost:443 -ssl3
CONNECTED(00000003)
3077773036:error:1408F10B:SSL routines:SSL3_GET_RECORD:wrong version
number:s3_pkt.c:337:
output omitted
New, (NONE), Cipher is (NONE)
Secure Renegotiation IS NOT supported
Compression: NONE
Expansion: NONE
SSL-Session:
Protocol : SSLv3
output truncated
The above output indicates that the handshake failed and therefore no cipher was negotiated.
2.
188
~]$ openssl s_client -connect localhost:443 -tls1
CHAPTER 13. WEB SERVERS
CONNECTED(00000003)
depth=1 C = US, O = example.com, CN = Certificate Shack
output omitted
New, TLSv1/SSLv3, Cipher is AES128-SHA
Server public key is 1024 bit
Secure Renegotiation IS supported
Compression: NONE
Expansion: NONE
SSL-Session:
Protocol : TLSv1
output truncated
The above output indicates that no failure of the handshake occurred and a set of ciphers was
negotiated.
The openssl s_client command options are documented in the s_client(1) manual page.
For more information on the SSLv3 vulnerability and how to test for it, see the Red Hat
Knowledgebase article POODLE: SSLv3 vulnerability (CVE-2014-3566).
13.1.10. Using an Existing Key and Certificate
If you have a previously created key and certificate, you can configure the SSL server to use these files
instead of generating new ones. There are only two situations where this is not possible:
1. You are changing the IP address or domain name.
Certificates are issued for a particular IP address and domain name pair. If one of these values
changes, the certificate becomes invalid.
2. You have a certificate from VeriSign, and you are changing the server software.
VeriSign, a widely used certificate authority, issues certificates for a particular software
product, IP address, and domain name. Changing the software product renders the certificate
invalid.
In either of the above cases, you will need to obtain a new certificate. For more information on this
topic, see Section 13.1.11, “Generating a New Key and Certificate” .
If you want to use an existing key and certificate, move the relevant files to the
/etc/pki/tls/private/ and /etc/pki/tls/certs/ directories respectively. You can do so by
issuing the following commands as root:
~]# mv key_file.key /etc/pki/tls/private/hostname.key
~]# mv certificate.crt /etc/pki/tls/certs/hostname.crt
Then add the following lines to the /etc/httpd/conf.d/ssl.conf configuration file:
SSLCertificateFile /etc/pki/tls/certs/hostname.crt
SSLCertificateKeyFile /etc/pki/tls/private/hostname.key
To load the updated configuration, restart the httpd service as described in Section 13.1.3.3,
“Restarting the Service”.
Example 13.5. Using a key and certificate from the Red Hat Secure Web Server
189
System Administrator's Guide
~]# mv /etc/httpd/conf/httpsd.key
/etc/pki/tls/private/penguin.example.com.key
~]# mv /etc/httpd/conf/httpsd.crt
/etc/pki/tls/certs/penguin.example.com.crt
13.1.11. Generating a New Key and Certificate
In order to generate a new key and certificate pair, the crypto-utils package must be installed on the
system. To install it, enter the following command as root:
~]# yum install crypto-utils
This package provides a set of tools to generate and manage SSL certificates and private keys, and
includes genkey, the Red Hat Keypair Generation utility that will guide you through the key generation
process.
IMPORTANT
If the server already has a valid certificate and you are replacing it with a new one,
specify a different serial number. This ensures that client browsers are notified of this
change, update to this new certificate as expected, and do not fail to access the page. To
create a new certificate with a custom serial number, as root, use the following
command instead of genkey:
~]# openssl req -x509 -new -set_serial number -key hostname.key
-out hostname.crt
NOTE
If there already is a key file for a particular host name in your system, genkey will refuse
to start. In this case, remove the existing file using the following command as root:
~]# rm /etc/pki/tls/private/hostname.key
To run the utility enter the genkey command as root, followed by the appropriate host name (for
example, penguin.example.com):
~]# genkey hostname
To complete the key and certificate creation, take the following steps:
1. Review the target locations in which the key and certificate will be stored.
190
CHAPTER 13. WEB SERVERS
Figure 13.1. Running the genkey utility
Use the Tab key to select the Next button, and press Enter to proceed to the next screen.
2. Using the up and down arrow keys, select a suitable key size. Note that while a larger key
increases the security, it also increases the response time of your server. The NIST
recommends using 2048 bits. See NIST Special Publication 800-131A.
Figure 13.2. Selecting the key size
Once finished, use the Tab key to select the Next button, and press Enter to initiate the
random bits generation process. Depending on the selected key size, this may take some time.
3. Decide whether you want to send a certificate request to a certificate authority.
191
System Administrator's Guide
Figure 13.3. Generating a certificate request
Use the Tab key to select Yes to compose a certificate request, or No to generate a selfsigned certificate. Then press Enter to confirm your choice.
4. Using the Spacebar key, enable ( [*]) or disable ( [ ]) the encryption of the private key.
Figure 13.4. Encrypting the private key
Use the Tab key to select the Next button, and press Enter to proceed to the next screen.
5. If you have enabled the private key encryption, enter an adequate passphrase. Note that for
security reasons, it is not displayed as you type, and it must be at least five characters long.
192
CHAPTER 13. WEB SERVERS
Figure 13.5. Entering a passphrase
Use the Tab key to select the Next button, and press Enter to proceed to the next screen.
IMPORTANT
Entering the correct passphrase is required in order for the server to start. If
you lose it, you will need to generate a new key and certificate.
6. Customize the certificate details.
Figure 13.6. Specifying certificate information
193
System Administrator's Guide
Use the Tab key to select the Next button, and press Enter to finish the key generation.
7. If you have previously enabled the certificate request generation, you will be prompted to send
it to a certificate authority.
Figure 13.7. Instructions on how to send a certificate request
Press Enter to return to a shell prompt.
Once generated, add the key and certificate locations to the /etc/httpd/conf.d/ssl.conf
configuration file:
SSLCertificateFile /etc/pki/tls/certs/hostname.crt
SSLCertificateKeyFile /etc/pki/tls/private/hostname.key
Finally, restart the httpd service as described in Section 13.1.3.3, “Restarting the Service”, so that the
updated configuration is loaded.
13.1.12. Configure the Firewall for HTTP and HTTPS Using the Command Line
Red Hat Enterprise Linux does not allow HTTP and HTTPS traffic by default. To enable the system to
act as a web server, make use of firewalld's supported services to enable HTTP and HTTPS traffic to
pass through the firewall as required.
To enable HTTP using the command line, issue the following command as root:
~]# firewall-cmd --add-service http
success
To enable HTTPS using the command line, issue the following command as root:
~]# firewall-cmd --add-service https
success
194
CHAPTER 13. WEB SERVERS
Note that these changes will not persist after the next system start. To make permanent changes to
the firewall, repeat the commands adding the --permanent option.
13.1.12.1. Checking Network Access for Incoming HTTPS and HTTPS Using the Command
Line
To check what services the firewall is configured to allow, using the command line, issue the following
command as root:
~]# firewall-cmd --list-all
public (default, active)
interfaces: em1
sources:
services: dhcpv6-client ssh
output truncated
In this example taken from a default installation, the firewall is enabled but HTTP and HTTPS have not
been allowed to pass through.
Once the HTTP and HTTP firewall services are enabled, the services line will appear similar to the
following:
services: dhcpv6-client http https ssh
For more information on enabling firewall services, or opening and closing ports with firewalld, see
the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Security Guide .
13.1.13. Additional Resources
To learn more about the Apache HTTP Server, see the following resources.
Installed Documentation
httpd(8) — The manual page for the httpd service containing the complete list of its
command-line options.
genkey(1) — The manual page for genkey utility, provided by the crypto-utils package.
apachectl(8) — The manual page for the Apache HTTP Server Control Interface.
Installable Documentation
http://localhost/manual/ — The official documentation for the Apache HTTP Server with the
full description of its directives and available modules. Note that in order to access this
documentation, you must have the httpd-manual package installed, and the web server must
be running.
Before accessing the documentation, issue the following commands as root:
~]# yum install httpd-manual
~]# apachectl graceful
Online Documentation
http://httpd.apache.org/ — The official website for the Apache HTTP Server with
195
System Administrator's Guide
http://httpd.apache.org/ — The official website for the Apache HTTP Server with
documentation on all the directives and default modules.
http://www.openssl.org/ — The OpenSSL home page containing further documentation,
frequently asked questions, links to the mailing lists, and other useful resources.
196
CHAPTER 14. MAIL SERVERS
CHAPTER 14. MAIL SERVERS
Red Hat Enterprise Linux offers many advanced applications to serve and access email. This chapter
describes modern email protocols in use today, and some of the programs designed to send and
receive email.
14.1. EMAIL PROTOCOLS
Today, email is delivered using a client/server architecture. An email message is created using a mail
client program. This program then sends the message to a server. The server then forwards the
message to the recipient's email server, where the message is then supplied to the recipient's email
client.
To enable this process, a variety of standard network protocols allow different machines, often running
different operating systems and using different email programs, to send and receive email.
The following protocols discussed are the most commonly used in the transfer of email.
14.1.1. Mail Transport Protocols
Mail delivery from a client application to the server, and from an originating server to the destination
server, is handled by the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP).
14.1.1.1. SMTP
The primary purpose of SMTP is to transfer email between mail servers. However, it is critical for email
clients as well. To send email, the client sends the message to an outgoing mail server, which in turn
contacts the destination mail server for delivery. For this reason, it is necessary to specify an SMTP
server when configuring an email client.
Under Red Hat Enterprise Linux, a user can configure an SMTP server on the local machine to handle
mail delivery. However, it is also possible to configure remote SMTP servers for outgoing mail.
One important point to make about the SMTP protocol is that it does not require authentication. This
allows anyone on the Internet to send email to anyone else or even to large groups of people. It is this
characteristic of SMTP that makes junk email or spam possible. Imposing relay restrictions limits
random users on the Internet from sending email through your SMTP server, to other servers on the
internet. Servers that do not impose such restrictions are called open relay servers.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 provides the Postfix and Sendmail SMTP programs.
14.1.2. Mail Access Protocols
There are two primary protocols used by email client applications to retrieve email from mail servers:
the Post Office Protocol (POP) and the Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP).
14.1.2.1. POP
The default POP server under Red Hat Enterprise Linux is Dovecot and is provided by the dovecot
package.
197
System Administrator's Guide
NOTE
In order to use Dovecot, first ensure the dovecot package is installed on your system by
running, as root:
~]# yum install dovecot
For more information on installing packages with Yum, see Section 8.2.4, “Installing
Packages”.
When using a POP server, email messages are downloaded by email client applications. By default, most
POP email clients are automatically configured to delete the message on the email server after it has
been successfully transferred, however this setting usually can be changed.
POP is fully compatible with important Internet messaging standards, such as Multipurpose Internet Mail
Extensions (MIME), which allow for email attachments.
POP works best for users who have one system on which to read email. It also works well for users who
do not have a persistent connection to the Internet or the network containing the mail server.
Unfortunately for those with slow network connections, POP requires client programs upon
authentication to download the entire content of each message. This can take a long time if any
messages have large attachments.
The most current version of the standard POP protocol is POP3.
There are, however, a variety of lesser-used POP protocol variants:
APOP — POP3 with MD5 authentication. An encoded hash of the user's password is sent from
the email client to the server rather than sending an unencrypted password.
KPOP — POP3 with Kerberos authentication.
RPOP — POP3 with RPOP authentication. This uses a per-user ID, similar to a password, to
authenticate POP requests. However, this ID is not encrypted, so RPOP is no more secure than
standard POP.
For added security, it is possible to use Secure Socket Layer (SSL) encryption for client authentication
and data transfer sessions. This can be enabled by using the pop3s service, or by using the stunnel
application. For more information on securing email communication, see Section 14.5.1, “Securing
Communication”.
14.1.2.2. IMAP
The default IMAP server under Red Hat Enterprise Linux is Dovecot and is provided by the dovecot
package. See Section 14.1.2.1, “POP” for information on how to install Dovecot.
When using an IMAP mail server, email messages remain on the server where users can read or delete
them. IMAP also allows client applications to create, rename, or delete mail directories on the server to
organize and store email.
IMAP is particularly useful for users who access their email using multiple machines. The protocol is
also convenient for users connecting to the mail server via a slow connection, because only the email
header information is downloaded for messages until opened, saving bandwidth. The user also has the
ability to delete messages without viewing or downloading them.
198
CHAPTER 14. MAIL SERVERS
For convenience, IMAP client applications are capable of caching copies of messages locally, so the
user can browse previously read messages when not directly connected to the IMAP server.
IMAP, like POP, is fully compatible with important Internet messaging standards, such as MIME, which
allow for email attachments.
For added security, it is possible to use SSL encryption for client authentication and data transfer
sessions. This can be enabled by using the imaps service, or by using the stunnel program. For more
information on securing email communication, see Section 14.5.1, “Securing Communication”.
Other free, as well as commercial, IMAP clients and servers are available, many of which extend the
IMAP protocol and provide additional functionality.
14.1.2.3. Dovecot
The imap-login and pop3-login processes which implement the IMAP and POP3 protocols are
spawned by the master dovecot daemon included in the dovecot package. The use of IMAP and POP
is configured through the /etc/dovecot/dovecot.conf configuration file; by default dovecot runs
IMAP and POP3 together with their secure versions using SSL. To configure dovecot to use POP,
complete the following steps:
1. Edit the /etc/dovecot/dovecot.conf configuration file to make sure the protocols
variable is uncommented (remove the hash sign (#) at the beginning of the line) and contains
the pop3 argument. For example:
protocols = imap pop3 lmtp
When the protocols variable is left commented out, dovecot will use the default values as
described above.
2. Make the change operational for the current session by running the following command as
root:
~]# systemctl restart dovecot
3. Make the change operational after the next reboot by running the command:
~]# systemctl enable dovecot
Created symlink from /etc/systemd/system/multiuser.target.wants/dovecot.service to
/usr/lib/systemd/system/dovecot.service.
NOTE
Please note that dovecot only reports that it started the IMAP server, but also
starts the POP3 server.
Unlike SMTP, both IMAP and POP3 require connecting clients to authenticate using a user name and
password. By default, passwords for both protocols are passed over the network unencrypted.
To configure SSL on dovecot:
Edit the /etc/dovecot/conf.d/10-ssl.conf configuration to make sure the
199
System Administrator's Guide
ssl_protocols variable is uncommented and contains the !SSLv2 !SSLv3 arguments:
ssl_protocols = !SSLv2 !SSLv3
These values ensure that dovecot avoids SSL versions 2 and also 3, which are both known to
be insecure. This is due to the vulnerability described in POODLE: SSLv3 vulnerability (CVE2014-3566). See Resolution for POODLE SSL 3.0 vulnerability (CVE-2014-3566) in Postfix and
Dovecot for details.
Edit the /etc/pki/dovecot/dovecot-openssl.cnf configuration file as you prefer.
However, in a typical installation, this file does not require modification.
Rename, move or delete the files /etc/pki/dovecot/certs/dovecot.pem and
/etc/pki/dovecot/private/dovecot.pem.
Execute the /usr/libexec/dovecot/mkcert.sh script which creates the dovecot self
signed certificates. These certificates are copied in the /etc/pki/dovecot/certs and
/etc/pki/dovecot/private directories. To implement the changes, restart dovecot by
issuing the following command as root:
~]# systemctl restart dovecot
More details on dovecot can be found online at http://www.dovecot.org.
14.2. EMAIL PROGRAM CLASSIFICATIONS
In general, all email applications fall into at least one of three classifications. Each classification plays a
specific role in the process of moving and managing email messages. While most users are only aware
of the specific email program they use to receive and send messages, each one is important for
ensuring that email arrives at the correct destination.
14.2.1. Mail Transport Agent
A Mail Transport Agent (MTA) transports email messages between hosts using SMTP. A message may
involve several MTAs as it moves to its intended destination.
While the delivery of messages between machines may seem rather straightforward, the entire
process of deciding if a particular MTA can or should accept a message for delivery is quite
complicated. In addition, due to problems from spam, use of a particular MTA is usually restricted by
the MTA's configuration or the access configuration for the network on which the MTA resides.
Many modern email client programs can act as an MTA when sending email. However, this action should
not be confused with the role of a true MTA. The sole reason email client programs are capable of
sending email like an MTA is because the host running the application does not have its own MTA. This
is particularly true for email client programs on non-UNIX-based operating systems. However, these
client programs only send outbound messages to an MTA they are authorized to use and do not
directly deliver the message to the intended recipient's email server.
Since Red Hat Enterprise Linux offers two MTAs, Postfix and Sendmail, email client programs are often
not required to act as an MTA. Red Hat Enterprise Linux also includes a special purpose MTA called
Fetchmail.
For more information on Postfix, Sendmail, and Fetchmail, see Section 14.3, “Mail Transport Agents”.
200
CHAPTER 14. MAIL SERVERS
14.2.2. Mail Delivery Agent
A Mail Delivery Agent (MDA) is invoked by the MTA to file incoming email in the proper user's mailbox.
In many cases, the MDA is actually a Local Delivery Agent (LDA), such as mail or Procmail.
Any program that actually handles a message for delivery to the point where it can be read by an email
client application can be considered an MDA. For this reason, some MTAs (such as Sendmail and
Postfix) can fill the role of an MDA when they append new email messages to a local user's mail spool
file. In general, MDAs do not transport messages between systems nor do they provide a user
interface; MDAs distribute and sort messages on the local machine for an email client application to
access.
14.2.3. Mail User Agent
A Mail User Agent (MUA) is synonymous with an email client application. An MUA is a program that, at a
minimum, allows a user to read and compose email messages. Many MUAs are capable of retrieving
messages via the POP or IMAP protocols, setting up mailboxes to store messages, and sending
outbound messages to an MTA.
MUAs may be graphical, such as Evolution, or have simple text-based interfaces, such as Mutt.
14.3. MAIL TRANSPORT AGENTS
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 offers two primary MTAs: Postfix and Sendmail. Postfix is configured as the
default MTA and Sendmail is considered deprecated. If required to switch the default MTA to Sendmail,
you can either uninstall Postfix or use the following command as root to switch to Sendmail:
~]# alternatives --config mta
You can also use the following command to enable the desired service:
~]# systemctl enable service
Similarly, to disable the service, type the following at a shell prompt:
~]# systemctl disable service
For more information on how to manage system services in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7, see Chapter 9,
Managing Services with systemd.
14.3.1. Postfix
Originally developed at IBM by security expert and programmer Wietse Venema, Postfix is a Sendmailcompatible MTA that is designed to be secure, fast, and easy to configure.
To improve security, Postfix uses a modular design, where small processes with limited privileges are
launched by a master daemon. The smaller, less privileged processes perform very specific tasks
related to the various stages of mail delivery and run in a changed root environment to limit the effects
of attacks.
Configuring Postfix to accept network connections from hosts other than the local computer takes
only a few minor changes in its configuration file. Yet for those with more complex needs, Postfix
provides a variety of configuration options, as well as third party add-ons that make it a very versatile
and full-featured MTA.
201
System Administrator's Guide
The configuration files for Postfix are human readable and support upward of 250 directives. Unlike
Sendmail, no macro processing is required for changes to take effect and the majority of the most
commonly used options are described in the heavily commented files.
14.3.1.1. The Default Postfix Installation
The Postfix executable is postfix. This daemon launches all related processes needed to handle mail
delivery.
Postfix stores its configuration files in the /etc/postfix/ directory. The following is a list of the
more commonly used files:
access — Used for access control, this file specifies which hosts are allowed to connect to
Postfix.
main.cf — The global Postfix configuration file. The majority of configuration options are
specified in this file.
master.cf — Specifies how Postfix interacts with various processes to accomplish mail
delivery.
transport — Maps email addresses to relay hosts.
The aliases file can be found in the /etc directory. This file is shared between Postfix and Sendmail.
It is a configurable list required by the mail protocol that describes user ID aliases.
IMPORTANT
The default /etc/postfix/main.cf file does not allow Postfix to accept network
connections from a host other than the local computer. For instructions on configuring
Postfix as a server for other clients, see Section 14.3.1.3, “Basic Postfix Configuration” .
Restart the postfix service after changing any options in the configuration files under the
/etc/postfix/ directory in order for those changes to take effect. To do so, run the following
command as root:
~]# systemctl restart postfix
14.3.1.2. Upgrading From a Previous Release
The following settings in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 are different to previous releases:
disable_vrfy_command = no — This is disabled by default, which is different to the default
for Sendmail. If changed to yes it can prevent certain email address harvesting methods.
allow_percent_hack = yes — This is enabled by default. It allows removing % characters in
email addresses. The percent hack is an old workaround that allowed sender-controlled
routing of email messages. DNS and mail routing are now much more reliable, but Postfix
continues to support the hack. To turn off percent rewriting, set allow_percent_hack to no.
smtpd_helo_required = no — This is disabled by default, as it is in Sendmail, because it
can prevent some applications from sending mail. It can be changed to yes to require clients
to send the HELO or EHLO commands before attempting to send the MAIL, FROM, or ETRN
commands.
202
CHAPTER 14. MAIL SERVERS
14.3.1.3. Basic Postfix Configuration
By default, Postfix does not accept network connections from any host other than the local host.
Perform the following steps as root to enable mail delivery for other hosts on the network:
Edit the /etc/postfix/main.cf file with a text editor, such as vi.
Uncomment the mydomain line by removing the hash sign ( #), and replace domain.tld with the
domain the mail server is servicing, such as example.com.
Uncomment the myorigin = $mydomain line.
Uncomment the myhostname line, and replace host.domain.tld with the host name for the
machine.
Uncomment the mydestination = $myhostname, localhost.$mydomain line.
Uncomment the mynetworks line, and replace 168.100.189.0/28 with a valid network setting
for hosts that can connect to the server.
Uncomment the inet_interfaces = all line.
Comment the inet_interfaces = localhost line.
Restart the postfix service.
Once these steps are complete, the host accepts outside emails for delivery.
Postfix has a large assortment of configuration options. One of the best ways to learn how to configure
Postfix is to read the comments within the /etc/postfix/main.cf configuration file. Additional
resources including information about Postfix configuration, SpamAssassin integration, or detailed
descriptions of the /etc/postfix/main.cf parameters are available online at
http://www.postfix.org/.
IMPORTANT
Due to the vulnerability described in POODLE: SSLv3 vulnerability (CVE-2014-3566),
Red Hat recommends disabling SSL and using only TLSv1.1 or TLSv1.2. See
Resolution for POODLE SSL 3.0 vulnerability (CVE-2014-3566) in Postfix and Dovecotfor
details.
14.3.1.4. Using Postfix with LDAP
Postfix can use an LDAP directory as a source for various lookup tables (e.g.: aliases, virtual,
canonical, etc.). This allows LDAP to store hierarchical user information and Postfix to only be given
the result of LDAP queries when needed. By not storing this information locally, administrators can
easily maintain it.
14.3.1.4.1. The /etc/aliases lookup example
The following is a basic example for using LDAP to look up the /etc/aliases file. Make sure your
/etc/postfix/main.cf file contains the following:
alias_maps = hash:/etc/aliases, ldap:/etc/postfix/ldap-aliases.cf
203
System Administrator's Guide
Create a /etc/postfix/ldap-aliases.cf file if you do not have one already and make sure it
contains the following:
server_host = ldap.example.com
search_base = dc=example, dc=com
where ldap.example.com, example, and com are parameters that need to be replaced with
specification of an existing available LDAP server.
NOTE
The /etc/postfix/ldap-aliases.cf file can specify various parameters, including
parameters that enable LDAP SSL and STARTTLS. For more information, see the
ldap_table(5) man page.
For more information on LDAP, see OpenLDAP in the System-Level Authentication Guide.
14.3.2. Sendmail
Sendmail's core purpose, like other MTAs, is to safely transfer email among hosts, usually using the
SMTP protocol. Note that Sendmail is considered deprecated and users are encouraged to use Postfix
when possible. See Section 14.3.1, “Postfix” for more information.
14.3.2.1. Purpose and Limitations
It is important to be aware of what Sendmail is and what it can do, as opposed to what it is not. In these
days of monolithic applications that fulfill multiple roles, Sendmail may seem like the only application
needed to run an email server within an organization. Technically, this is true, as Sendmail can spool
mail to each users' directory and deliver outbound mail for users. However, most users actually require
much more than simple email delivery. Users usually want to interact with their email using an MUA,
that uses POP or IMAP, to download their messages to their local machine. Or, they may prefer a Web
interface to gain access to their mailbox. These other applications can work in conjunction with
Sendmail, but they actually exist for different reasons and can operate separately from one another.
It is beyond the scope of this section to go into all that Sendmail should or could be configured to do.
With literally hundreds of different options and rule sets, entire volumes have been dedicated to
helping explain everything that can be done and how to fix things that go wrong. See the Section 14.6,
“Additional Resources” for a list of Sendmail resources.
This section reviews the files installed with Sendmail by default and reviews basic configuration
changes, including how to stop unwanted email (spam) and how to extend Sendmail with the
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP).
14.3.2.2. The Default Sendmail Installation
In order to use Sendmail, first ensure the sendmail package is installed on your system by running, as
root:
~]# yum install sendmail
In order to configure Sendmail, ensure the sendmail-cf package is installed on your system by running,
as root:
204
CHAPTER 14. MAIL SERVERS
~]# yum install sendmail-cf
For more information on installing packages with Yum, see Section 8.2.4, “Installing Packages” .
Before using Sendmail, the default MTA has to be switched from Postfix. For more information how to
switch the default MTA refer to Section 14.3, “Mail Transport Agents”.
The Sendmail executable is sendmail.
Sendmail's lengthy and detailed configuration file is /etc/mail/sendmail.cf. Avoid editing the
sendmail.cf file directly. To make configuration changes to Sendmail, edit the
/etc/mail/sendmail.mc file, back up the original /etc/mail/sendmail.cf file, and use the
following alternatives to generate a new configuration file:
Use the included makefile in /etc/mail/ to create a new /etc/mail/sendmail.cf
configuration file:
~]# make all -C /etc/mail/
All other generated files in /etc/mail (db files) will be regenerated if needed. The old
makemap commands are still usable. The make command is automatically used whenever you
start or restart the sendmail service.
More information on configuring Sendmail can be found in Section 14.3.2.3, “Common Sendmail
Configuration Changes”.
Various Sendmail configuration files are installed in the /etc/mail/ directory including:
access — Specifies which systems can use Sendmail for outbound email.
domaintable — Specifies domain name mapping.
local-host-names — Specifies aliases for the host.
mailertable — Specifies instructions that override routing for particular domains.
virtusertable — Specifies a domain-specific form of aliasing, allowing multiple virtual
domains to be hosted on one machine.
Several of the configuration files in the /etc/mail/ directory, such as access, domaintable,
mailertable and virtusertable, must actually store their information in database files before
Sendmail can use any configuration changes. To include any changes made to these configurations in
their database files, run the following commands, as root:
~]# cd /etc/mail/
~]# make all
This will update virtusertable.db, access.db, domaintable.db, mailertable.db,
sendmail.cf, and submit.cf.
To update all the database files listed above and to update a custom database file, use a command in
the following format:
make name.db all
205
System Administrator's Guide
where name represents the name of the custom database file to be updated.
To update a single database, use a command in the following format:
make name.db
where name.db represents the name of the database file to be updated.
You may also restart the sendmail service for the changes to take effect by running:
~]# systemctl restart sendmail
For example, to have all emails addressed to the example.com domain delivered to bob@otherexample.com, add the following line to the virtusertable file:
@example.com bob@other-example.com
To finalize the change, the virtusertable.db file must be updated:
~]# make virtusertable.db all
Using the all option will result in the virtusertable.db and access.db being updated at the
same time.
14.3.2.3. Common Sendmail Configuration Changes
When altering the Sendmail configuration file, it is best not to edit an existing file, but to generate an
entirely new /etc/mail/sendmail.cf file.
WARNING
Before replacing or making any changes to the sendmail.cf file, create a backup
copy.
To add the desired functionality to Sendmail, edit the /etc/mail/sendmail.mc file as root. Once
you are finished, restart the sendmail service and, if the m4 package is installed, the m4 macro
processor will automatically generate a new sendmail.cf configuration file:
~]# systemctl restart sendmail
206
CHAPTER 14. MAIL SERVERS
IMPORTANT
The default sendmail.cf file does not allow Sendmail to accept network connections
from any host other than the local computer. To configure Sendmail as a server for other
clients, edit the /etc/mail/sendmail.mc file, and either change the address specified
in the Addr= option of the DAEMON_OPTIONS directive from 127.0.0.1 to the IP
address of an active network device or comment out the DAEMON_OPTIONS directive all
together by placing dnl at the beginning of the line. When finished, regenerate
/etc/mail/sendmail.cf by restarting the service:
~]# systemctl restart sendmail
The default configuration in Red Hat Enterprise Linux works for most SMTP-only sites. However, it does
not work for UUCP (UNIX-to-UNIX Copy Protocol) sites. If using UUCP mail transfers, the
/etc/mail/sendmail.mc file must be reconfigured and a new /etc/mail/sendmail.cf file must
be generated.
Consult the /usr/share/sendmail-cf/README file before editing any files in the directories under
the /usr/share/sendmail-cf/ directory, as they can affect the future configuration of the
/etc/mail/sendmail.cf file.
14.3.2.4. Masquerading
One common Sendmail configuration is to have a single machine act as a mail gateway for all machines
on the network. For example, a company may want to have a machine called mail.example.com that
handles all of their email and assigns a consistent return address to all outgoing mail.
In this situation, the Sendmail server must masquerade the machine names on the company network
so that their return address is user@example.com instead of user@host.example.com.
To do this, add the following lines to /etc/mail/sendmail.mc:
FEATURE(always_add_domain)dnl
FEATURE(`masquerade_entire_domain')dnl
FEATURE(`masquerade_envelope')dnl
FEATURE(`allmasquerade')dnl
MASQUERADE_AS(`example.com.')dnl
MASQUERADE_DOMAIN(`example.com.')dnl
MASQUERADE_AS(example.com)dnl
After generating a new sendmail.cf file using the m4 macro processor, this configuration makes all
mail from inside the network appear as if it were sent from example.com.
Note that administrators of mail servers, DNS and DHCP servers, as well as any provisioning
applications, should agree on the host name format used in an organization. See the Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 7 Networking Guide for more information on recommended naming practices.
14.3.2.5. Stopping Spam
Email spam can be defined as unnecessary and unwanted email received by a user who never
requested the communication. It is a disruptive, costly, and widespread abuse of Internet
communication standards.
207
System Administrator's Guide
Sendmail makes it relatively easy to block new spamming techniques being employed to send junk
email. It even blocks many of the more usual spamming methods by default. Main anti-spam features
available in sendmail are header checks, relaying denial (default from version 8.9), access database and
sender information checks.
For example, forwarding of SMTP messages, also called relaying, has been disabled by default since
Sendmail version 8.9. Before this change occurred, Sendmail directed the mail host (x.edu) to accept
messages from one party (y.com) and sent them to a different party ( z.net). Now, however, Sendmail
must be configured to permit any domain to relay mail through the server. To configure relay domains,
edit the /etc/mail/relay-domains file and restart Sendmail
~]# systemctl restart sendmail
However users can also be sent spam from from servers on the Internet. In these instances, Sendmail's
access control features available through the /etc/mail/access file can be used to prevent
connections from unwanted hosts. The following example illustrates how this file can be used to both
block and specifically allow access to the Sendmail server:
badspammer.com ERROR:550 "Go away and do not spam us anymore"
tux.badspammer.com OK 10.0 RELAY
This example shows that any email sent from badspammer.com is blocked with a 550 RFC-821
compliant error code, with a message sent back. Email sent from the tux.badspammer.com subdomain, is accepted. The last line shows that any email sent from the 10.0.*.* network can be relayed
through the mail server.
Because the /etc/mail/access.db file is a database, use the makemap command to update any
changes. Do this using the following command as root:
~]# makemap hash /etc/mail/access < /etc/mail/access
Message header analysis allows you to reject mail based on header contents. SMTP servers store
information about an email's journey in the message header. As the message travels from one MTA to
another, each puts in a Received header above all the other Received headers. It is important to
note that this information may be altered by spammers.
The above examples only represent a small part of what Sendmail can do in terms of allowing or
blocking access. See the /usr/share/sendmail-cf/README file for more information and
examples.
Since Sendmail calls the Procmail MDA when delivering mail, it is also possible to use a spam filtering
program, such as SpamAssassin, to identify and file spam for users. See Section 14.4.2.6, “Spam
Filters” for more information about using SpamAssassin.
14.3.2.6. Using Sendmail with LDAP
Using LDAP is a very quick and powerful way to find specific information about a particular user from a
much larger group. For example, an LDAP server can be used to look up a particular email address from
a common corporate directory by the user's last name. In this kind of implementation, LDAP is largely
separate from Sendmail, with LDAP storing the hierarchical user information and Sendmail only being
given the result of LDAP queries in pre-addressed email messages.
However, Sendmail supports a much greater integration with LDAP, where it uses LDAP to replace
separately maintained files, such as /etc/aliases and /etc/mail/virtusertables, on different
208
CHAPTER 14. MAIL SERVERS
mail servers that work together to support a medium- to enterprise-level organization. In short, LDAP
abstracts the mail routing level from Sendmail and its separate configuration files to a powerful LDAP
cluster that can be leveraged by many different applications.
The current version of Sendmail contains support for LDAP. To extend the Sendmail server using LDAP,
first get an LDAP server, such as OpenLDAP, running and properly configured. Then edit the
/etc/mail/sendmail.mc to include the following:
LDAPROUTE_DOMAIN('yourdomain.com')dnl
FEATURE('ldap_routing')dnl
NOTE
This is only for a very basic configuration of Sendmail with LDAP. The configuration can
differ greatly from this depending on the implementation of LDAP, especially when
configuring several Sendmail machines to use a common LDAP server.
Consult /usr/share/sendmail-cf/README for detailed LDAP routing configuration
instructions and examples.
Next, recreate the /etc/mail/sendmail.cf file by running the m4 macro processor and again
restarting Sendmail. See Section 14.3.2.3, “Common Sendmail Configuration Changes” for instructions.
For more information on LDAP, see OpenLDAP in the System-Level Authentication Guide.
14.3.3. Fetchmail
Fetchmail is an MTA which retrieves email from remote servers and delivers it to the local MTA. Many
users appreciate the ability to separate the process of downloading their messages located on a
remote server from the process of reading and organizing their email in an MUA. Designed with the
needs of dial-up users in mind, Fetchmail connects and quickly downloads all of the email messages to
the mail spool file using any number of protocols, including POP3 and IMAP. It can even forward email
messages to an SMTP server, if necessary.
NOTE
In order to use Fetchmail, first ensure the fetchmail package is installed on your system
by running, as root:
~]# yum install fetchmail
For more information on installing packages with Yum, see Section 8.2.4, “Installing
Packages”.
Fetchmail is configured for each user through the use of a .fetchmailrc file in the user's home
directory. If it does not already exist, create the .fetchmailrc file in your home directory
Using preferences in the .fetchmailrc file, Fetchmail checks for email on a remote server and
downloads it. It then delivers it to port 25 on the local machine, using the local MTA to place the email
in the correct user's spool file. If Procmail is available, it is launched to filter the email and place it in a
mailbox so that it can be read by an MUA.
209
System Administrator's Guide
14.3.3.1. Fetchmail Configuration Options
Although it is possible to pass all necessary options on the command line to check for email on a
remote server when executing Fetchmail, using a .fetchmailrc file is much easier. Place any desired
configuration options in the .fetchmailrc file for those options to be used each time the
fetchmail command is issued. It is possible to override these at the time Fetchmail is run by
specifying that option on the command line.
A user's .fetchmailrc file contains three classes of configuration options:
global options — Gives Fetchmail instructions that control the operation of the program or
provide settings for every connection that checks for email.
server options — Specifies necessary information about the server being polled, such as the host
name, as well as preferences for specific email servers, such as the port to check or number of
seconds to wait before timing out. These options affect every user using that server.
user options — Contains information, such as user name and password, necessary to
authenticate and check for email using a specified email server.
Global options appear at the top of the .fetchmailrc file, followed by one or more server options,
each of which designate a different email server that Fetchmail should check. User options follow
server options for each user account checking that email server. Like server options, multiple user
options may be specified for use with a particular server as well as to check multiple email accounts on
the same server.
Server options are called into service in the .fetchmailrc file by the use of a special option verb,
poll or skip, that precedes any of the server information. The poll action tells Fetchmail to use this
server option when it is run, which checks for email using the specified user options. Any server options
after a skip action, however, are not checked unless this server's host name is specified when
Fetchmail is invoked. The skip option is useful when testing configurations in the .fetchmailrc file
because it only checks skipped servers when specifically invoked, and does not affect any currently
working configurations.
The following is an example of a .fetchmailrc file:
set postmaster "user1"
set bouncemail
poll pop.domain.com proto pop3
user 'user1' there with password 'secret' is user1 here
poll mail.domain2.com
user 'user5' there with password 'secret2' is user1 here
user 'user7' there with password 'secret3' is user1 here
In this example, the global options specify that the user is sent email as a last resort (postmaster
option) and all email errors are sent to the postmaster instead of the sender (bouncemail option). The
set action tells Fetchmail that this line contains a global option. Then, two email servers are specified,
one set to check using POP3, the other for trying various protocols to find one that works. Two users
are checked using the second server option, but all email found for any user is sent to user1's mail
spool. This allows multiple mailboxes to be checked on multiple servers, while appearing in a single
MUA inbox. Each user's specific information begins with the user action.
210
CHAPTER 14. MAIL SERVERS
NOTE
Users are not required to place their password in the .fetchmailrc file. Omitting the
with password 'password' section causes Fetchmail to ask for a password when it
is launched.
Fetchmail has numerous global, server, and local options. Many of these options are rarely used or only
apply to very specific situations. The fetchmail man page explains each option in detail, but the most
common ones are listed in the following three sections.
14.3.3.2. Global Options
Each global option should be placed on a single line after a set action.
daemon seconds — Specifies daemon-mode, where Fetchmail stays in the background.
Replace seconds with the number of seconds Fetchmail is to wait before polling the server.
postmaster — Specifies a local user to send mail to in case of delivery problems.
syslog — Specifies the log file for errors and status messages. By default, this is
/var/log/maillog.
14.3.3.3. Server Options
Server options must be placed on their own line in .fetchmailrc after a poll or skip action.
auth auth-type — Replace auth-type with the type of authentication to be used. By default,
password authentication is used, but some protocols support other types of authentication,
including kerberos_v5, kerberos_v4, and ssh. If the any authentication type is used,
Fetchmail first tries methods that do not require a password, then methods that mask the
password, and finally attempts to send the password unencrypted to authenticate to the
server.
interval number — Polls the specified server every number of times that it checks for
email on all configured servers. This option is generally used for email servers where the user
rarely receives messages.
port port-number — Replace port-number with the port number. This value overrides the
default port number for the specified protocol.
proto protocol — Replace protocol with the protocol, such as pop3 or imap, to use when
checking for messages on the server.
timeout seconds — Replace seconds with the number of seconds of server inactivity after
which Fetchmail gives up on a connection attempt. If this value is not set, a default of 300
seconds is used.
14.3.3.4. User Options
User options may be placed on their own lines beneath a server option or on the same line as the server
option. In either case, the defined options must follow the user option (defined below).
fetchall — Orders Fetchmail to download all messages in the queue, including messages
that have already been viewed. By default, Fetchmail only pulls down new messages.
211
System Administrator's Guide
fetchlimit number — Replace number with the number of messages to be retrieved
before stopping.
flush — Deletes all previously viewed messages in the queue before retrieving new messages.
limit max-number-bytes — Replace max-number-bytes with the maximum size in bytes
that messages are allowed to be when retrieved by Fetchmail. This option is useful with slow
network links, when a large message takes too long to download.
password 'password' — Replace password with the user's password.
preconnect "command" — Replace command with a command to be executed before
retrieving messages for the user.
postconnect "command" — Replace command with a command to be executed after
retrieving messages for the user.
ssl — Activates SSL encryption. At the time of writing, the default action is to use the best
available from SSL2, SSL3, SSL23, TLS1, TLS1.1 and TLS1.2. Note that SSL2 is considered
obsolete and due to the POODLE: SSLv3 vulnerability (CVE-2014-3566), SSLv3 should not be
used. However there is no way to force the use of TLS1 or newer, therefore ensure the mail
server being connected to is configured not to use SSLv2 and SSLv3. Use stunnel where the
server cannot be configured not to use SSLv2 and SSLv3.
sslproto — Defines allowed SSL or TLS protocols. Possible values are SSL2, SSL3, SSL23,
and TLS1. The default value, if sslproto is omitted, unset, or set to an invalid value, is SSL23.
The default action is to use the best from SSLv2, SSLv3, TLSv1, TLS1.1 and TLS1.2. Note
that setting any other value for SSL or TLS will disable all the other protocols. Due to the
POODLE: SSLv3 vulnerability (CVE-2014-3566), it is recommend to omit this option, or set it
to SSLv23, and configure the corresponding mail server not to use SSLv2 and SSLv3. Use
stunnel where the server cannot be configured not to use SSLv2 and SSLv3.
user "username" — Replace username with the user name used by Fetchmail to retrieve
messages. This option must precede all other user options.
14.3.3.5. Fetchmail Command Options
Most Fetchmail options used on the command line when executing the fetchmail command mirror
the .fetchmailrc configuration options. In this way, Fetchmail may be used with or without a
configuration file. These options are not used on the command line by most users because it is easier
to leave them in the .fetchmailrc file.
There may be times when it is desirable to run the fetchmail command with other options for a
particular purpose. It is possible to issue command options to temporarily override a .fetchmailrc
setting that is causing an error, as any options specified at the command line override configuration
file options.
14.3.3.6. Informational or Debugging Options
Certain options used after the fetchmail command can supply important information.
--configdump — Displays every possible option based on information from .fetchmailrc
and Fetchmail defaults. No email is retrieved for any users when using this option.
212
CHAPTER 14. MAIL SERVERS
-s — Executes Fetchmail in silent mode, preventing any messages, other than errors, from
appearing after the fetchmail command.
-v — Executes Fetchmail in verbose mode, displaying every communication between
Fetchmail and remote email servers.
-V — Displays detailed version information, lists its global options, and shows settings to be
used with each user, including the email protocol and authentication method. No email is
retrieved for any users when using this option.
14.3.3.7. Special Options
These options are occasionally useful for overriding defaults often found in the .fetchmailrc file.
-a — Fetchmail downloads all messages from the remote email server, whether new or
previously viewed. By default, Fetchmail only downloads new messages.
-k — Fetchmail leaves the messages on the remote email server after downloading them. This
option overrides the default behavior of deleting messages after downloading them.
-l max-number-bytes — Fetchmail does not download any messages over a particular size
and leaves them on the remote email server.
--quit — Quits the Fetchmail daemon process.
More commands and .fetchmailrc options can be found in the fetchmail man page.
14.3.4. Mail Transport Agent (MTA) Configuration
A Mail Transport Agent (MTA) is essential for sending email. A Mail User Agent (MUA) such as Evolution
or Mutt, is used to read and compose email. When a user sends an email from an MUA, the message is
handed off to the MTA, which sends the message through a series of MTAs until it reaches its
destination.
Even if a user does not plan to send email from the system, some automated tasks or system programs
might use the mail command to send email containing log messages to the root user of the local
system.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 provides two MTAs: Postfix and Sendmail. If both are installed, Postfix is the
default MTA. Note that Sendmail is considered deprecated in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7.
14.4. MAIL DELIVERY AGENTS
Red Hat Enterprise Linux includes two primary MDAs, Procmail and mail. Both of the applications are
considered LDAs and both move email from the MTA's spool file into the user's mailbox. However,
Procmail provides a robust filtering system.
This section details only Procmail. For information on the mail command, consult its man page ( man
mail).
Procmail delivers and filters email as it is placed in the mail spool file of the localhost. It is powerful,
gentle on system resources, and widely used. Procmail can play a critical role in delivering email to be
read by email client applications.
Procmail can be invoked in several different ways. Whenever an MTA places an email into the mail
213
System Administrator's Guide
spool file, Procmail is launched. Procmail then filters and files the email for the MUA and quits.
Alternatively, the MUA can be configured to execute Procmail any time a message is received so that
messages are moved into their correct mailboxes. By default, the presence of /etc/procmailrc or of
a ~/.procmailrc file (also called an rc file) in the user's home directory invokes Procmail whenever
an MTA receives a new message.
By default, no system-wide rc files exist in the /etc directory and no .procmailrc files exist in any
user's home directory. Therefore, to use Procmail, each user must construct a .procmailrc file with
specific environment variables and rules.
Whether Procmail acts upon an email message depends upon whether the message matches a specified
set of conditions or recipes in the rc file. If a message matches a recipe, then the email is placed in a
specified file, is deleted, or is otherwise processed.
When Procmail starts, it reads the email message and separates the body from the header information.
Next, Procmail looks for a /etc/procmailrc file and rc files in the /etc/procmailrcs/ directory
for default, system-wide, Procmail environmental variables and recipes. Procmail then searches for a
.procmailrc file in the user's home directory. Many users also create additional rc files for Procmail
that are referred to within the .procmailrc file in their home directory.
14.4.1. Procmail Configuration
The Procmail configuration file contains important environmental variables. These variables specify
things such as which messages to sort and what to do with the messages that do not match any
recipes.
These environmental variables usually appear at the beginning of the ~/.procmailrc file in the
following format:
env-variable="value"
In this example, env-variable is the name of the variable and value defines the variable.
There are many environment variables not used by most Procmail users and many of the more
important environment variables are already defined by a default value. Most of the time, the following
variables are used:
DEFAULT — Sets the default mailbox where messages that do not match any recipes are
placed.
The default DEFAULT value is the same as $ORGMAIL.
INCLUDERC — Specifies additional rc files containing more recipes for messages to be
checked against. This breaks up the Procmail recipe lists into individual files that fulfill
different roles, such as blocking spam and managing email lists, that can then be turned off or
on by using comment characters in the user's ~/.procmailrc file.
For example, lines in a user's ~/.procmailrc file may look like this:
MAILDIR=$HOME/Msgs
INCLUDERC=$MAILDIR/lists.rc
INCLUDERC=$MAILDIR/spam.rc
To turn off Procmail filtering of email lists but leaving spam control in place, comment out the
first INCLUDERC line with a hash sign ( #). Note that it uses paths relative to the current
214
CHAPTER 14. MAIL SERVERS
directory.
LOCKSLEEP — Sets the amount of time, in seconds, between attempts by Procmail to use a
particular lockfile. The default is 8 seconds.
LOCKTIMEOUT — Sets the amount of time, in seconds, that must pass after a lockfile was last
modified before Procmail assumes that the lockfile is old and can be deleted. The default is
1024 seconds.
LOGFILE — The file to which any Procmail information or error messages are written.
MAILDIR — Sets the current working directory for Procmail. If set, all other Procmail paths are
relative to this directory.
ORGMAIL — Specifies the original mailbox, or another place to put the messages if they cannot
be placed in the default or recipe-required location.
By default, a value of /var/spool/mail/$LOGNAME is used.
SUSPEND — Sets the amount of time, in seconds, that Procmail pauses if a necessary resource,
such as swap space, is not available.
SWITCHRC — Allows a user to specify an external file containing additional Procmail recipes,
much like the INCLUDERC option, except that recipe checking is actually stopped on the
referring configuration file and only the recipes on the SWITCHRC-specified file are used.
VERBOSE — Causes Procmail to log more information. This option is useful for debugging.
Other important environmental variables are pulled from the shell, such as LOGNAME, the login name;
HOME, the location of the home directory; and SHELL, the default shell.
A comprehensive explanation of all environments variables, and their default values, is available in the
procmailrc man page.
14.4.2. Procmail Recipes
New users often find the construction of recipes the most difficult part of learning to use Procmail. This
difficulty is often attributed to recipes matching messages by using regular expressions which are used
to specify qualifications for string matching. However, regular expressions are not very difficult to
construct and even less difficult to understand when read. Additionally, the consistency of the way
Procmail recipes are written, regardless of regular expressions, makes it easy to learn by example. To
see example Procmail recipes, see Section 14.4.2.5, “Recipe Examples”.
Procmail recipes take the following form:
:0 [flags] [: lockfile-name ]
* [ condition_1_special-condition-character condition_1_regular_expression
]
* [ condition_2_special-condition-character condition-2_regular_expression
]
* [ condition_N_special-condition-character condition-N_regular_expression
]
special-action-character
action-to-perform
215
System Administrator's Guide
The first two characters in a Procmail recipe are a colon and a zero. Various flags can be placed after
the zero to control how Procmail processes the recipe. A colon after the flags section specifies that a
lockfile is created for this message. If a lockfile is created, the name can be specified by replacing
lockfile-name.
A recipe can contain several conditions to match against the message. If it has no conditions, every
message matches the recipe. Regular expressions are placed in some conditions to facilitate message
matching. If multiple conditions are used, they must all match for the action to be performed.
Conditions are checked based on the flags set in the recipe's first line. Optional special characters
placed after the asterisk character (*) can further control the condition.
The action-to-perform argument specifies the action taken when the message matches one of the
conditions. There can only be one action per recipe. In many cases, the name of a mailbox is used here
to direct matching messages into that file, effectively sorting the email. Special action characters may
also be used before the action is specified. See Section 14.4.2.4, “Special Conditions and Actions” for
more information.
14.4.2.1. Delivering vs. Non-Delivering Recipes
The action used if the recipe matches a particular message determines whether it is considered a
delivering or non-delivering recipe. A delivering recipe contains an action that writes the message to a
file, sends the message to another program, or forwards the message to another email address. A nondelivering recipe covers any other actions, such as a nesting block. A nesting block is a set of actions,
contained in braces { }, that are performed on messages which match the recipe's conditions. Nesting
blocks can be nested inside one another, providing greater control for identifying and performing
actions on messages.
When messages match a delivering recipe, Procmail performs the specified action and stops
comparing the message against any other recipes. Messages that match non-delivering recipes
continue to be compared against other recipes.
14.4.2.2. Flags
Flags are essential to determine how or if a recipe's conditions are compared to a message. The egrep
utility is used internally for matching of the conditions. The following flags are commonly used:
A — Specifies that this recipe is only used if the previous recipe without an A or a flag also
matched this message.
a — Specifies that this recipe is only used if the previous recipe with an A or a flag also
matched this message and was successfully completed.
B — Parses the body of the message and looks for matching conditions.
b — Uses the body in any resulting action, such as writing the message to a file or forwarding it.
This is the default behavior.
c — Generates a carbon copy of the email. This is useful with delivering recipes, since the
required action can be performed on the message and a copy of the message can continue
being processed in the rc files.
D — Makes the egrep comparison case-sensitive. By default, the comparison process is not
case-sensitive.
216
CHAPTER 14. MAIL SERVERS
E — While similar to the A flag, the conditions in the recipe are only compared to the message if
the immediately preceding recipe without an E flag did not match. This is comparable to an
else action.
e — The recipe is compared to the message only if the action specified in the immediately
preceding recipe fails.
f — Uses the pipe as a filter.
H — Parses the header of the message and looks for matching conditions. This is the default
behavior.
h — Uses the header in a resulting action. This is the default behavior.
w — Tells Procmail to wait for the specified filter or program to finish, and reports whether or
not it was successful before considering the message filtered.
W — Is identical to w except that "Program failure" messages are suppressed.
For a detailed list of additional flags, see the procmailrc man page.
14.4.2.3. Specifying a Local Lockfile
Lockfiles are very useful with Procmail to ensure that more than one process does not try to alter a
message simultaneously. Specify a local lockfile by placing a colon (:) after any flags on a recipe's first
line. This creates a local lockfile based on the destination file name plus whatever has been set in the
LOCKEXT global environment variable.
Alternatively, specify the name of the local lockfile to be used with this recipe after the colon.
14.4.2.4. Special Conditions and Actions
Special characters used before Procmail recipe conditions and actions change the way they are
interpreted.
The following characters may be used after the asterisk character (*) at the beginning of a recipe's
condition line:
! — In the condition line, this character inverts the condition, causing a match to occur only if
the condition does not match the message.
< — Checks if the message is under a specified number of bytes.
> — Checks if the message is over a specified number of bytes.
The following characters are used to perform special actions:
! — In the action line, this character tells Procmail to forward the message to the specified
email addresses.
$ — Refers to a variable set earlier in the rc file. This is often used to set a common mailbox
that is referred to by various recipes.
| — Starts a specified program to process the message.
{ and } — Constructs a nesting block, used to contain additional recipes to apply to matching
217
System Administrator's Guide
messages.
If no special character is used at the beginning of the action line, Procmail assumes that the action line
is specifying the mailbox in which to write the message.
14.4.2.5. Recipe Examples
Procmail is an extremely flexible program, but as a result of this flexibility, composing Procmail recipes
from scratch can be difficult for new users.
The best way to develop the skills to build Procmail recipe conditions stems from a strong
understanding of regular expressions combined with looking at many examples built by others. A
thorough explanation of regular expressions is beyond the scope of this section. The structure of
Procmail recipes and useful sample Procmail recipes can be found at various places on the Internet.
The proper use and adaptation of regular expressions can be derived by viewing these recipe
examples. In addition, introductory information about basic regular expression rules can be found in
the grep(1) man page.
The following simple examples demonstrate the basic structure of Procmail recipes and can provide
the foundation for more intricate constructions.
A basic recipe may not even contain conditions, as is illustrated in the following example:
:0:
new-mail.spool
The first line specifies that a local lockfile is to be created but does not specify a name, so Procmail
uses the destination file name and appends the value specified in the LOCKEXT environment variable.
No condition is specified, so every message matches this recipe and is placed in the single spool file
called new-mail.spool, located within the directory specified by the MAILDIR environment variable.
An MUA can then view messages in this file.
A basic recipe, such as this, can be placed at the end of all rc files to direct messages to a default
location.
The following example matched messages from a specific email address and throws them away.
:0
* ^From: spammer@domain.com
/dev/null
With this example, any messages sent by spammer@domain.com are sent to the /dev/null device,
deleting them.
218
CHAPTER 14. MAIL SERVERS
WARNING
Be certain that rules are working as intended before sending messages to
/dev/null for permanent deletion. If a recipe inadvertently catches unintended
messages, and those messages disappear, it becomes difficult to troubleshoot the
rule.
A better solution is to point the recipe's action to a special mailbox, which can be
checked from time to time to look for false positives. Once satisfied that no
messages are accidentally being matched, delete the mailbox and direct the action
to send the messages to /dev/null.
The following recipe grabs email sent from a particular mailing list and places it in a specified folder.
:0:
* ^(From|Cc|To).*tux-lug
tuxlug
Any messages sent from the tux-lug@domain.com mailing list are placed in the tuxlug mailbox
automatically for the MUA. Note that the condition in this example matches the message if it has the
mailing list's email address on the From, Cc, or To lines.
Consult the many Procmail online resources available in Section 14.6, “Additional Resources” for more
detailed and powerful recipes.
14.4.2.6. Spam Filters
Because it is called by Sendmail, Postfix, and Fetchmail upon receiving new emails, Procmail can be
used as a powerful tool for combating spam.
This is particularly true when Procmail is used in conjunction with SpamAssassin. When used together,
these two applications can quickly identify spam emails, and sort or destroy them.
SpamAssassin uses header analysis, text analysis, blacklists, a spam-tracking database, and selflearning Bayesian spam analysis to quickly and accurately identify and tag spam.
NOTE
In order to use SpamAssassin, first ensure the spamassassin package is installed on
your system by running, as root:
~]# yum install spamassassin
For more information on installing packages with Yum, see Section 8.2.4, “Installing
Packages”.
The easiest way for a local user to use SpamAssassin is to place the following line near the top of the
~/.procmailrc file:
219
System Administrator's Guide
INCLUDERC=/etc/mail/spamassassin/spamassassin-default.rc
The /etc/mail/spamassassin/spamassassin-default.rc contains a simple Procmail rule that
activates SpamAssassin for all incoming email. If an email is determined to be spam, it is tagged in the
header as such and the title is prepended with the following pattern:
*****SPAM*****
The message body of the email is also prepended with a running tally of what elements caused it to be
diagnosed as spam.
To file email tagged as spam, a rule similar to the following can be used:
:0 Hw * ^X-Spam-Status: Yes spam
This rule files all email tagged in the header as spam into a mailbox called spam.
Since SpamAssassin is a Perl script, it may be necessary on busy servers to use the binary
SpamAssassin daemon (spamd) and the client application ( spamc). Configuring SpamAssassin this
way, however, requires root access to the host.
To start the spamd daemon, type the following command:
~]# systemctl start spamassassin
To start the SpamAssassin daemon when the system is booted, run:
systemctl enable spamassassin.service
See Chapter 9, Managing Services with systemd for more information about starting and stopping
services.
To configure Procmail to use the SpamAssassin client application instead of the Perl script, place the
following line near the top of the ~/.procmailrc file. For a system-wide configuration, place it in
/etc/procmailrc:
INCLUDERC=/etc/mail/spamassassin/spamassassin-spamc.rc
14.5. MAIL USER AGENTS
Red Hat Enterprise Linux offers a variety of email programs, both, graphical email client programs,
such as Evolution, and text-based email programs such as mutt.
The remainder of this section focuses on securing communication between a client and a server.
14.5.1. Securing Communication
Popular MUAs included with Red Hat Enterprise Linux, such as Evolution and Mutt offer SSLencrypted email sessions.
Like any other service that flows over a network unencrypted, important email information, such as
user names, passwords, and entire messages, may be intercepted and viewed by users on the network.
Additionally, since the standard POP and IMAP protocols pass authentication information unencrypted,
220
CHAPTER 14. MAIL SERVERS
it is possible for an attacker to gain access to user accounts by collecting user names and passwords
as they are passed over the network.
14.5.1.1. Secure Email Clients
Most Linux MUAs designed to check email on remote servers support SSL encryption. To use SSL when
retrieving email, it must be enabled on both the email client and the server.
SSL is easy to enable on the client-side, often done with the click of a button in the MUA's
configuration window or via an option in the MUA's configuration file. Secure IMAP and POP have
known port numbers (993 and 995, respectively) that the MUA uses to authenticate and download
messages.
14.5.1.2. Securing Email Client Communications
Offering SSL encryption to IMAP and POP users on the email server is a simple matter.
First, create an SSL certificate. This can be done in two ways: by applying to a Certificate Authority (CA)
for an SSL certificate or by creating a self-signed certificate.
WARNING
Self-signed certificates should be used for testing purposes only. Any server used
in a production environment should use an SSL certificate signed by a CA.
To create a self-signed SSL certificate for IMAP or POP, change to the /etc/pki/dovecot/
directory, edit the certificate parameters in the /etc/pki/dovecot/dovecot-openssl.cnf
configuration file as you prefer, and type the following commands, as root:
dovecot]# rm -f certs/dovecot.pem private/dovecot.pem
dovecot]# /usr/libexec/dovecot/mkcert.sh
Once finished, make sure you have the following configurations in your /etc/dovecot/conf.d/10ssl.conf file:
ssl_cert = help
For example, to change into the Example directory, enter:
smb:\> cd Example
3. To disconnect, enter:
smb:\> exit
15.1.4. Mounting the Share
Sometimes it is useful to mount a Samba share to a directory so that the files in the directory can be
treated as if they are part of the local file system.
To mount a Samba share to a directory, create a directory to mount it to (if it does not already exist),
and execute the following command as root:
mount -t cifs //servername/sharename /mnt/point/ -o
username=username,password=password
This command mounts sharename from servername in the local directory /mnt/point/.
For more information about mounting a samba share, see the mount.cifs(8) manual page.
NOTE
The mount.cifs utility is a separate RPM (independent from Samba). In order to use
mount.cifs, first ensure the cifs-utils package is installed on your system by running, as
root:
~]# yum install cifs-utils
For more information on installing packages with Yum, see Section 8.2.4, “Installing
Packages”.
Note that the cifs-utils package also contains the cifs.upcall binary called by the kernel
in order to perform kerberized CIFS mounts. For more information on cifs.upcall, see
the cifs.upcall(8) manual page.
227
System Administrator's Guide
WARNING
Some CIFS servers require plain text passwords for authentication. Support for
plain text password authentication can be enabled using the following command as
root:
~]# echo 0x37 > /proc/fs/cifs/SecurityFlags
WARNING: This operation can expose passwords by removing password
encryption.
15.1.5. Configuring a Samba Server
The default configuration file (/etc/samba/smb.conf) allows users to view their home directories as
a Samba share. It also shares all printers configured for the system as Samba shared printers. You can
attach a printer to the system and print to it from the Windows machines on your network.
15.1.5.1. Graphical Configuration
To configure Samba using a graphical interface, use one of the available Samba graphical user
interfaces. A list of available GUIs can be found at http://www.samba.org/samba/GUI/.
15.1.5.2. Command-Line Configuration
Samba uses /etc/samba/smb.conf as its configuration file. If you change this configuration file, the
changes do not take effect until you restart the Samba daemon with the following command, as root:
~]# systemctl restart smb.service
To specify the Windows workgroup and a brief description of the Samba server, edit the following lines
in your /etc/samba/smb.conf file:
workgroup = WORKGROUPNAME
server string = BRIEF COMMENT ABOUT SERVER
Replace WORKGROUPNAME with the name of the Windows workgroup to which this machine should
belong. The BRIEF COMMENT ABOUT SERVER is optional and is used as the Windows comment about
the Samba system.
To create a Samba share directory on your Linux system, add the following section to your
/etc/samba/smb.conf file (after modifying it to reflect your needs and your system):
Example 15.1. An Example Configuration of a Samba Server
[sharename]
comment = Insert a comment here
path = /home/share/
228
CHAPTER 15. FILE AND PRINT SERVERS
valid users = tfox carole
writable = yes
create mask = 0765
The above example allows the users tfox and carole to read and write to the directory
/home/share/, on the Samba server, from a Samba client.
15.1.5.3. Encrypted Passwords
Encrypted passwords are enabled by default because it is more secure to use them. To create a user
with an encrypted password, use the smbpasswd utility:
smbpasswd -a username
15.1.6. Starting and Stopping Samba
To start a Samba server, type the following command in a shell prompt, as root:
~]# systemctl start smb.service
IMPORTANT
To set up a domain member server, you must first join the domain or Active Directory
using the net join command before starting the smb service. Also, it is recommended
to run winbind before smbd.
To stop the server, type the following command in a shell prompt, as root:
~]# systemctl stop smb.service
The restart option is a quick way of stopping and then starting Samba. This is the most reliable way
to make configuration changes take effect after editing the configuration file for Samba. Note that the
restart option starts the daemon even if it was not running originally.
To restart the server, type the following command in a shell prompt, as root:
~]# systemctl restart smb.service
The condrestart (conditional restart) option only starts smb on the condition that it is currently
running. This option is useful for scripts, because it does not start the daemon if it is not running.
NOTE
When the /etc/samba/smb.conf file is changed, Samba automatically reloads it after
a few minutes. Issuing a manual restart or reload is just as effective.
To conditionally restart the server, type the following command, as root:
~]# systemctl try-restart smb.service
229
System Administrator's Guide
A manual reload of the /etc/samba/smb.conf file can be useful in case of a failed automatic reload
by the smb service. To ensure that the Samba server configuration file is reloaded without restarting
the service, type the following command, as root:
~]# systemctl reload smb.service
By default, the smb service does not start automatically at boot time. To configure Samba to start at
boot time, type the following at a shell prompt as root:
~]# systemctl enable smb.service
See Chapter 9, Managing Services with systemd for more information regarding this tool.
15.1.7. Samba Security Modes
There are only two types of security modes for Samba, share-level and user-level, which are collectively
known as security levels. Share-level security is deprecated and has been removed from Samba.
Configurations containing this mode need to be migrated to use user-level security. User-level security
can be implemented in one of three different ways. The different ways of implementing a security level
are called security modes.
15.1.7.1. User-Level Security
User-level security is the default and recommended setting for Samba. Even if the security = user
directive is not listed in the /etc/samba/smb.conf file, it is used by Samba. If the server accepts the
client's user name and password, the client can then mount multiple shares without specifying a
password for each instance. Samba can also accept session-based user name and password requests.
The client maintains multiple authentication contexts by using a unique UID for each logon.
In the /etc/samba/smb.conf file, the security = user directive that sets user-level security is:
[GLOBAL]
...
security = user
...
Samba Guest Shares
As mentioned above, share-level security mode is deprecated. To configure a Samba guest share
without using the security = share parameter, follow the procedure below:
Procedure 15.1. Configuring Samba Guest Shares
1. Create a username map file, in this example /etc/samba/smbusers, and add the following
line to it:
nobody = guest
2. Add the following directives to the main section in the /etc/samba/smb.conf file. Also, do
not use the valid users directive:
[GLOBAL]
...
230
CHAPTER 15. FILE AND PRINT SERVERS
security = user
map to guest = Bad User
username map = /etc/samba/smbusers
...
The username map directive provides a path to the username map file specified in the
previous step.
3. Add the following directive to the share section in the /ect/samba/smb.conf file. Do not use
the valid users directive.
[SHARE]
...
guest ok = yes
...
The following sections describe other implementations of user-level security.
Domain Security Mode (User-Level Security)
In domain security mode, the Samba server has a machine account (domain security trust account) and
causes all authentication requests to be passed through to the domain controllers. The Samba server is
made into a domain member server by using the following directives in the /etc/samba/smb.conf
file:
[GLOBAL]
...
security = domain
workgroup = MARKETING
...
Active Directory Security Mode (User-Level Security)
If you have an Active Directory environment, it is possible to join the domain as a native Active
Directory member. Even if a security policy restricts the use of NT-compatible authentication
protocols, the Samba server can join an ADS using Kerberos. Samba in Active Directory member mode
can accept Kerberos tickets.
In the /etc/samba/smb.conf file, the following directives make Samba an Active Directory member
server:
[GLOBAL]
...
security = ADS
realm = EXAMPLE.COM
password server = kerberos.example.com
...
15.1.7.2. Share-Level Security
With share-level security, the server accepts only a password without an explicit user name from the
client. The server expects a password for each share, independent of the user name. There have been
recent reports that Microsoft Windows clients have compatibility issues with share-level security
servers. This mode is deprecated and has been removed from Samba. Configurations containing
security = share should be updated to use user-level security. Follow the steps in Procedure 15.1,
“Configuring Samba Guest Shares” to avoid using the security = share directive.
231
System Administrator's Guide
15.1.8. Samba Network Browsing
Network browsing enables Windows and Samba servers to appear in the Windows Network
Neighborhood. Inside the Network Neighborhood, icons are represented as servers and if opened,
the server's shares and printers that are available are displayed.
Network browsing capabilities require NetBIOS over TCP/IP. NetBIOS-based networking uses
broadcast (UDP) messaging to accomplish browse list management. Without NetBIOS and WINS as the
primary method for TCP/IP host name resolution, other methods such as static files ( /etc/hosts) or
DNS, must be used.
A domain master browser collates the browse lists from local master browsers on all subnets so that
browsing can occur between workgroups and subnets. Also, the domain master browser should
preferably be the local master browser for its own subnet.
15.1.8.1. Domain Browsing
By default, a Windows server PDC for a domain is also the domain master browser for that domain. A
Samba server must not be set up as a domain master server in this type of situation.
For subnets that do not include the Windows server PDC, a Samba server can be implemented as a
local master browser. Configuring the /etc/samba/smb.conf file for a local master browser (or no
browsing at all) in a domain controller environment is the same as workgroup configuration (see
Section 15.1.5, “Configuring a Samba Server” ).
15.1.8.2. WINS (Windows Internet Name Server)
Either a Samba server or a Windows NT server can function as a WINS server. When a WINS server is
used with NetBIOS enabled, UDP unicasts can be routed which allows name resolution across
networks. Without a WINS server, the UDP broadcast is limited to the local subnet and therefore
cannot be routed to other subnets, workgroups, or domains. If WINS replication is necessary, do not
use Samba as your primary WINS server, as Samba does not currently support WINS replication.
In a mixed NT/2000/2003/2008 server and Samba environment, it is recommended that you use the
Microsoft WINS capabilities. In a Samba-only environment, it is recommended that you use only one
Samba server for WINS.
The following is an example of the /etc/samba/smb.conf file in which the Samba server is serving
as a WINS server:
Example 15.2. An Example Configuration of WINS Server
[global]
wins support = yes
NOTE
All servers (including Samba) should connect to a WINS server to resolve NetBIOS
names. Without WINS, browsing only occurs on the local subnet. Furthermore, even if a
domain-wide list is somehow obtained, hosts cannot be resolved for the client without
WINS.
232
CHAPTER 15. FILE AND PRINT SERVERS
15.1.9. Samba Distribution Programs
net
net
The net utility is similar to the net utility used for Windows and MS-DOS. The first argument is used to
specify the protocol to use when executing a command. The protocol option can be ads, rap, or rpc
for specifying the type of server connection. Active Directory uses ads, Win9x/NT3 uses rap, and
Windows NT4/2000/2003/2008 uses rpc. If the protocol is omitted, net automatically tries to
determine it.
The following example displays a list of the available shares for a host named wakko:
~]$ net -l share -S wakko
Password:
Enumerating shared resources (exports) on remote server:
Share name
Type
Description
----------------------data
Disk
Wakko data share
tmp
Disk
Wakko tmp share
IPC$
IPC
IPC Service (Samba Server)
ADMIN$
IPC
IPC Service (Samba Server)
The following example displays a list of Samba users for a host named wakko:
~]$ net -l user -S wakko
root password:
User name
Comment
----------------------------andriusb
Documentation
joe
Marketing
lisa
Sales
nmblookup
nmblookup
The nmblookup program resolves NetBIOS names into IP addresses. The program broadcasts its
query on the local subnet until the target machine replies.
The following example displays the IP address of the NetBIOS name trek:
~]$ nmblookup trek
querying trek on 10.1.59.255
10.1.56.45 trek<00>
pdbedit
pdbedit
The pdbedit program manages accounts located in the SAM database. All back ends are supported
including smbpasswd, LDAP, and the tdb database library.
233
System Administrator's Guide
The following are examples of adding, deleting, and listing users:
~]$ pdbedit -a kristin
new password:
retype new password:
Unix username:
kristin
NT username:
Account Flags:
[U
]
User SID:
S-1-5-21-1210235352-3804200048-1474496110-2012
Primary Group SID:
S-1-5-21-1210235352-3804200048-1474496110-2077
Full Name: Home Directory:
\\wakko\kristin
HomeDir Drive:
Logon Script:
Profile Path:
\\wakko\kristin\profile
Domain:
WAKKO
Account desc:
Workstations: Munged
dial:
Logon time:
0
Logoff time:
Mon, 18 Jan 2038 22:14:07 GMT
Kickoff time:
Mon, 18 Jan 2038 22:14:07 GMT
Password last set:
Thu, 29 Jan 2004 08:29:28
GMT Password can change: Thu, 29 Jan 2004 08:29:28 GMT
Password must change: Mon, 18 Jan 2038 22:14:07 GMT
~]$ pdbedit -v -L kristin
Unix username:
kristin
NT username:
Account Flags:
[U
]
User SID:
S-1-5-21-1210235352-3804200048-1474496110-2012
Primary Group SID:
S-1-5-21-1210235352-3804200048-1474496110-2077
Full Name:
Home Directory:
\\wakko\kristin
HomeDir Drive:
Logon Script:
Profile Path:
\\wakko\kristin\profile
Domain:
WAKKO
Account desc:
Workstations: Munged
dial:
Logon time:
0
Logoff time:
Mon, 18 Jan 2038 22:14:07 GMT
Kickoff time:
Mon, 18 Jan 2038 22:14:07 GMT
Password last set:
Thu, 29 Jan 2004 08:29:28 GMT
Password can change: Thu, 29 Jan 2004 08:29:28 GMT
Password must change: Mon, 18 Jan 2038 22:14:07 GMT
~]$ pdbedit -L
andriusb:505:
joe:503:
lisa:504:
kristin:506:
~]$ pdbedit -x joe
~]$ pdbedit -L
andriusb:505: lisa:504: kristin:506:
rpcclient
234
CHAPTER 15. FILE AND PRINT SERVERS
rpcclient
The rpcclient program issues administrative commands using Microsoft RPCs, which provide access
to the Windows administration graphical user interfaces (GUIs) for systems management. This is most
often used by advanced users that understand the full complexity of Microsoft RPCs.
smbcacls
smbcacls
The smbcacls program modifies Windows ACLs on files and directories shared by a Samba server or a
Windows server.
smbclient
smbclient
The smbclient program is a versatile UNIX client which provides functionality similar to the ftp
utility.
smbcontrol
smbcontrol -i
smbcontrol
The smbcontrol program sends control messages to running smbd, nmbd, or winbindd daemons.
Executing smbcontrol -i runs commands interactively until a blank line or a 'q' is entered.
smbpasswd
smbpasswd
The smbpasswd program manages encrypted passwords. This program can be run by a superuser to
change any user's password and also by an ordinary user to change their own Samba password.
smbspool
smbspool <copies> <options> <filename>
The smbspool program is a CUPS-compatible printing interface to Samba. Although designed for use
with CUPS printers, smbspool can work with non-CUPS printers as well.
smbstatus
smbstatus <options>
The smbstatus program displays the status of current connections to a Samba server.
smbtar
smbtar <options>
235
System Administrator's Guide
The smbtar program performs backup and restores of Windows-based share files and directories to a
local tape archive. Though similar to the tar utility, the two are not compatible.
testparm
testparm <options> <filename> <hostname IP_address>
The testparm program checks the syntax of the /etc/samba/smb.conf file. If your smb.conf file
is in the default location (/etc/samba/smb.conf) you do not need to specify the location. Specifying
the host name and IP address to the testparm program verifies that the hosts.allow and
host.deny files are configured correctly. The testparm program also displays a summary of your
smb.conf file and the server's role (stand-alone, domain, etc.) after testing. This is convenient when
debugging as it excludes comments and concisely presents information for experienced administrators
to read. For example:
~]$ testparm
Load smb config files from /etc/samba/smb.conf
Processing section "[homes]"
Processing section "[printers]"
Processing section "[tmp]"
Processing section "[html]"
Loaded services file OK.
Server role: ROLE_STANDALONE
Press enter to see a dump of your service definitions
<enter>
# Global parameters
[global]
workgroup = MYGROUP
server string = Samba Server
security = SHARE
log file = /var/log/samba/%m.log
max log size = 50
socket options = TCP_NODELAY SO_RCVBUF=8192 SO_SNDBUF=8192
dns proxy = no
[homes]
comment = Home Directories
read only = no
browseable = no
[printers]
comment = All Printers
path = /var/spool/samba
printable = yes
browseable = no
[tmp]
comment = Wakko tmp
path = /tmp
guest only = yes
[html]
comment = Wakko www
path = /var/www/html
force user = andriusb
force group = users
read only = no
guest only = yes
236
CHAPTER 15. FILE AND PRINT SERVERS
wbinfo
wbinfo <options>
The wbinfo program displays information from the winbindd daemon. The winbindd daemon must
be running for wbinfo to work.
15.1.10. Additional Resources
The following sections give you the means to explore Samba in greater detail.
Installed Documentation
/usr/share/doc/samba-<version-number>/ — All additional files included with the
Samba distribution. This includes all helper scripts, sample configuration files, and
documentation.
See the following man pages for detailed information specific Samba features:
smb.conf(5)
samba(7)
smbd(8)
nmbd(8)
winbindd(8)
Useful Websites
http://www.samba.org/ — Homepage for the Samba distribution and all official documentation
created by the Samba development team. Many resources are available in HTML and PDF
formats, while others are only available for purchase. Although many of these links are not
Red Hat Enterprise Linux specific, some concepts may apply.
https://wiki.samba.org/index.php/User_Documentation — Upstream Samba Documentation.
http://samba.org/samba/archives.html — Active email lists for the Samba community.
Enabling digest mode is recommended due to high levels of list activity.
Samba newsgroups — Samba threaded newsgroups, such as www.gmane.org, that use the NNTP
protocol are also available. This an alternative to receiving mailing list emails.
15.2. FTP
The File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is one of the oldest and most commonly used protocols found on the
Internet today. Its purpose is to reliably transfer files between computer hosts on a network without
requiring the user to log directly in to the remote host or to have knowledge of how to use the remote
system. It allows users to access files on remote systems using a standard set of simple commands.
This section outlines the basics of the FTP protocol and introduces vsftpd, which is the preferred FTP
server in Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
15.2.1. The File Transfer Protocol
237
System Administrator's Guide
FTP uses a client-server architecture to transfer files using the TCP network protocol. Because FTP is
a rather old protocol, it uses unencrypted user name and password authentication. For this reason, it is
considered an insecure protocol and should not be used unless absolutely necessary. However,
because FTP is so prevalent on the Internet, it is often required for sharing files to the public. System
administrators, therefore, should be aware of FTP's unique characteristics.
This section describes how to configure vsftpd to establish connections secured by TLS and how to
secure an FTP server with the help of SELinux. A good substitute for FTP is sftp from the OpenSSH
suite of tools. For information about configuring OpenSSH and about the SSH protocol in general, refer
to Chapter 11, OpenSSH.
Unlike most protocols used on the Internet, FTP requires multiple network ports to work properly.
When an FTP client application initiates a connection to an FTP server, it opens port 21 on the server —
known as the command port. This port is used to issue all commands to the server. Any data requested
from the server is returned to the client via a data port. The port number for data connections, and the
way in which data connections are initialized, vary depending upon whether the client requests the
data in active or passive mode.
The following defines these modes:
active mode
Active mode is the original method used by the FTP protocol for transferring data to the client
application. When an active-mode data transfer is initiated by the FTP client, the server opens a
connection from port 20 on the server to the IP address and a random, unprivileged port (greater
than 1024) specified by the client. This arrangement means that the client machine must be
allowed to accept connections over any port above 1024. With the growth of insecure networks,
such as the Internet, the use of firewalls for protecting client machines is now prevalent. Because
these client-side firewalls often deny incoming connections from active-mode FTP servers, passive
mode was devised.
passive mode
Passive mode, like active mode, is initiated by the FTP client application. When requesting data
from the server, the FTP client indicates it wants to access the data in passive mode and the server
provides the IP address and a random, unprivileged port (greater than 1024) on the server. The
client then connects to that port on the server to download the requested information.
While passive mode does resolve issues for client-side firewall interference with data connections,
it can complicate administration of the server-side firewall. You can reduce the number of open
ports on a server by limiting the range of unprivileged ports on the FTP server. This also simplifies
the process of configuring firewall rules for the server.
15.2.2. The vsftpd Server
The Very Secure FTP Daemon (vsftpd) is designed from the ground up to be fast, stable, and, most
importantly, secure. vsftpd is the only stand-alone FTP server distributed with Red Hat
Enterprise Linux, due to its ability to handle large numbers of connections efficiently and securely.
The security model used by vsftpd has three primary aspects:
Strong separation of privileged and non-privileged processes— Separate processes handle
different tasks, and each of these processes runs with the minimal privileges required for the
task.
238
CHAPTER 15. FILE AND PRINT SERVERS
Tasks requiring elevated privileges are handled by processes with the minimal privilege necessary—
By taking advantage of compatibilities found in the libcap library, tasks that usually require
full root privileges can be executed more safely from a less privileged process.
Most processes run in a chroot jail — Whenever possible, processes are change-rooted to the
directory being shared; this directory is then considered a chroot jail. For example, if the
/var/ftp/ directory is the primary shared directory, vsftpd reassigns /var/ftp/ to the
new root directory, known as /. This disallows any potential malicious hacker activities for any
directories not contained in the new root directory.
Use of these security practices has the following effect on how vsftpd deals with requests:
The parent process runs with the least privileges required— The parent process dynamically
calculates the level of privileges it requires to minimize the level of risk. Child processes handle
direct interaction with the FTP clients and run with as close to no privileges as possible.
All operations requiring elevated privileges are handled by a small parent process— Much like the
Apache HTTP Server, vsftpd launches unprivileged child processes to handle incoming
connections. This allows the privileged, parent process to be as small as possible and handle
relatively few tasks.
All requests from unprivileged child processes are distrusted by the parent process—
Communication with child processes is received over a socket, and the validity of any
information from child processes is checked before being acted on.
Most interactions with FTP clients are handled by unprivileged child processes in achroot jail —
Because these child processes are unprivileged and only have access to the directory being
shared, any crashed processes only allow the attacker access to the shared files.
15.2.2.1. Starting and Stopping vsftpd
To start the vsftpd service in the current session, type the following at a shell prompt as root:
~]# systemctl start vsftpd.service
To stop the service in the current session, type as root:
~]# systemctl stop vsftpd.service
To restart the vsftpd service, run the following command as root:
~]# systemctl restart vsftpd.service
This command stops and immediately starts the vsftpd service, which is the most efficient way to
make configuration changes take effect after editing the configuration file for this FTP server.
Alternatively, you can use the following command to restart the vsftpd service only if it is already
running:
~]# systemctl try-restart vsftpd.service
By default, the vsftpd service does not start automatically at boot time. To configure the vsftpd
service to start at boot time, type the following at a shell prompt as root:
239
System Administrator's Guide
~]# systemctl enable vsftpd.service
Created symlink from /etc/systemd/system/multiuser.target.wants/vsftpd.service to
/usr/lib/systemd/system/vsftpd.service.
For more information on how to manage system services in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7, see Chapter 9,
Managing Services with systemd.
15.2.2.2. Starting Multiple Copies of vsftpd
Sometimes, one computer is used to serve multiple FTP domains. This is a technique called
multihoming. One way to multihome using vsftpd is by running multiple copies of the daemon, each
with its own configuration file.
To do this, first assign all relevant IP addresses to network devices or alias network devices on the
system. For more information about configuring network devices, device aliases, and additional
information about network configuration scripts, see the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Networking Guide .
Next, the DNS server for the FTP domains must be configured to reference the correct machine. For
information about BIND, the DNS protocol implementation used in Red Hat Enterprise Linux, and its
configuration files, see the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Networking Guide .
For vsftpd to answer requests on different IP addresses, multiple copies of the daemon must be
running. To facilitate launching multiple instances of the vsftpd daemon, a special systemd service
unit (vsftpd@.service) for launching vsftpd as an instantiated service is supplied in the vsftpd
package.
In order to make use of this service unit, a separate vsftpd configuration file for each required
instance of the FTP server must be created and placed in the /etc/vsftpd/ directory. Note that each
of these configuration files must have a unique name (such as /etc/vsftpd/vsftpd-site-2.conf)
and must be readable and writable only by the root user.
Within each configuration file for each FTP server listening on an IPv4 network, the following directive
must be unique:
listen_address=N.N.N.N
Replace N.N.N.N with a unique IP address for the FTP site being served. If the site is using IPv6, use
the listen_address6 directive instead.
Once there are multiple configuration files present in the /etc/vsftpd/ directory, individual
instances of the vsftpd daemon can be started by executing the following command as root:
~]# systemctl start vsftpd@configuration-file-name.service
In the above command, replace configuration-file-name with the unique name of the requested server's
configuration file, such as vsftpd-site-2. Note that the configuration file's .conf extension should
not be included in the command.
If you want to start several instances of the vsftpd daemon at once, you can make use of a systemd
target unit file (vsftpd.target), which is supplied in the vsftpd package. This systemd target causes
an independent vsftpd daemon to be launched for each available vsftpd configuration file in the
/etc/vsftpd/ directory. Execute the following command as root to enable the target:
240
CHAPTER 15. FILE AND PRINT SERVERS
~]# systemctl enable vsftpd.target
Created symlink from /etc/systemd/system/multiuser.target.wants/vsftpd.target to /usr/lib/systemd/system/vsftpd.target.
The above command configures the systemd service manager to launch the vsftpd service (along
with the configured vsftpd server instances) at boot time. To start the service immediately, without
rebooting the system, execute the following command as root:
~]# systemctl start vsftpd.target
See Section 9.3, “Working with systemd Targets” for more information on how to use systemd targets
to manage services.
Other directives to consider altering on a per-server basis are:
anon_root
local_root
vsftpd_log_file
xferlog_file
15.2.2.3. Encrypting vsftpd Connections Using TLS
In order to counter the inherently insecure nature of FTP, which transmits user names, passwords, and
data without encryption by default, the vsftpd daemon can be configured to utilize the TLS protocol
to authenticate connections and encrypt all transfers. Note that an FTP client that supports TLS is
needed to communicate with vsftpd with TLS enabled.
NOTE
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) is the name of an older implementation of the security
protocol. The new versions are called TLS (Transport Layer Security). Only the newer
versions (TLS) should be used as SSL suffers from serious security vulnerabilities. The
documentation included with the vsftpd server, as well as the configuration directives
used in the vsftpd.conf file, use the SSL name when referring to security-related
matters, but TLS is supported and used by default when the ssl_enable directive is
set to YES.
Set the ssl_enable configuration directive in the vsftpd.conf file to YES to turn on TLS support.
The default settings of other TLS-related directives that become automatically active when the
ssl_enable option is enabled provide for a reasonably well-configured TLS set up. This includes,
among other things, the requirement to only use the TLS v1 protocol for all connections (the use of the
insecure SSL protocol versions is disabled by default) or forcing all non-anonymous logins to use TLS
for sending passwords and data transfers.
Example 15.3. Configuring vsftpd to Use TLS
In this example, the configuration directives explicitly disable the older SSL versions of the security
protocol in the vsftpd.conf file:
241
System Administrator's Guide
ssl_enable=YES
ssl_tlsv1=YES
ssl_sslv2=NO
ssl_sslv3=NO
Restart the vsftpd service after you modify its configuration:
~]# systemctl restart vsftpd.service
See the vsftpd.conf(5) manual page for other TLS-related configuration directives for fine-tuning the
use of TLS by vsftpd.
15.2.2.4. SELinux Policy for vsftpd
The SELinux policy governing the vsftpd daemon (as well as other ftpd processes), defines a
mandatory access control, which, by default, is based on least access required. In order to allow the
FTP daemon to access specific files or directories, appropriate labels need to be assigned to them.
For example, in order to be able to share files anonymously, the public_content_t label must be
assigned to the files and directories to be shared. You can do this using the chcon command as root:
~]# chcon -R -t public_content_t /path/to/directory
In the above command, replace /path/to/directory with the path to the directory to which you want to
assign the label. Similarly, if you want to set up a directory for uploading files, you need to assign that
particular directory the public_content_rw_t label. In addition to that, the
allow_ftpd_anon_write SELinux Boolean option must be set to 1. Use the setsebool command
as root to do that:
~]# setsebool -P allow_ftpd_anon_write=1
If you want local users to be able to access their home directories through FTP, which is the default
setting on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7, the ftp_home_dir Boolean option needs to be set to 1. If
vsftpd is to be allowed to run in standalone mode, which is also enabled by default on Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 7, the ftpd_is_daemon option needs to be set to 1 as well.
See the ftpd_selinux(8) manual page for more information, including examples of other useful labels
and Boolean options, on how to configure the SELinux policy pertaining to FTP. Also, see the Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 7 SELinux User's and Administrator's Guide for more detailed information about
SELinux in general.
15.2.3. Additional Resources
For more information about vsftpd, see the following resources.
15.2.3.1. Installed Documentation
The /usr/share/doc/vsftpd-version-number/ directory — Replace version-number with
the installed version of the vsftpd package. This directory contains a README file with basic
information about the software. The TUNING file contains basic performance-tuning tips and
the SECURITY/ directory contains information about the security model employed by vsftpd.
242
CHAPTER 15. FILE AND PRINT SERVERS
vsftpd-related manual pages — There are a number of manual pages for the daemon and the
configuration files. The following lists some of the more important manual pages.
Server Applications
vsftpd(8) — Describes available command-line options for vsftpd.
Configuration Files
vsftpd.conf(5) — Contains a detailed list of options available within the configuration file
for vsftpd.
hosts_access(5) — Describes the format and options available within the TCP wrappers
configuration files: hosts.allow and hosts.deny.
Interaction with SELinux
ftpd_selinux(8) — Contains a description of the SELinux policy governing ftpd
processes as well as an explanation of the way SELinux labels need to be assigned and
Booleans set.
15.2.3.2. Online Documentation
About vsftpd and FTP in General
http://vsftpd.beasts.org/ — The vsftpd project page is a great place to locate the latest
documentation and to contact the author of the software.
http://slacksite.com/other/ftp.html — This website provides a concise explanation of the
differences between active and passive-mode FTP.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux Documentation
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Networking Guide — The Networking Guide for Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 7 documents relevant information regarding the configuration and
administration of network interfaces, networks, and network services in this system. It
provides an introduction to the hostnamectl utility and explains how to use it to view and
set host names on the command line, both locally and remotely.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 SELinux User's and Administrator's Guide — The SELinux User's
and Administrator's Guide for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 describes the basic principles of
SELinux and documents in detail how to configure and use SELinux with various services
such as the Apache HTTP Server, Postfix, PostgreSQL, or OpenShift. It explains how to
configure SELinux access permissions for system services managed by systemd.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Security Guide — The Security Guide for Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 7 assists users and administrators in learning the processes and practices
of securing their workstations and servers against local and remote intrusion, exploitation,
and malicious activity. It also explains how to secure critical system services.
Relevant RFC Documents
RFC 0959 — The original Request for Comments (RFC) of the FTP protocol from the IETF.
RFC 1123 — The small FTP-related section extends and clarifies RFC 0959.
243
System Administrator's Guide
RFC 2228 — FTP security extensions. vsftpd implements the small subset needed to
support TLS and SSL connections.
RFC 2389 — Proposes FEAT and OPTS commands.
RFC 2428 — IPv6 support.
15.3. PRINT SETTINGS
The Print Settings tool serves for printer configuring, maintenance of printer configuration files, print
spool directories and print filters, and printer classes management.
The tool is based on the Common Unix Printing System (CUPS). If you upgraded the system from a
previous Red Hat Enterprise Linux version that used CUPS, the upgrade process preserved the
configured printers.
IMPORTANT
The cupsd.conf man page documents configuration of a CUPS server. It includes
directives for enabling SSL support. However, CUPS does not allow control of the
protocol versions used. Due to the vulnerability described in Resolution for POODLE
SSLv3.0 vulnerability (CVE-2014-3566) for components that do not allow SSLv3 to be
disabled via configuration settings, Red Hat recommends that you do not rely on this for
security. It is recommend that you use stunnel to provide a secure tunnel and disable
SSLv3. For more information on using stunnel, see the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7
Security Guide.
For ad-hoc secure connections to a remote system's Print Settings tool, use X11
forwarding over SSH as described in Section 11.4.1, “X11 Forwarding”.
NOTE
You can perform the same and additional operations on printers directly from the CUPS
web application or command line. To access the application, in a web browser, go to
http://localhost:631/. For CUPS manuals refer to the links on the Home tab of the web
site.
15.3.1. Starting the Print Settings Configuration Tool
With the Print Settings configuration tool you can perform various operations on existing printers and
set up new printers. You can also use CUPS directly (go to http://localhost:631/ to access the CUPS
web application).
To start the Print Settings tool from the command line, type system-config-printer at a shell
prompt. The Print Settings tool appears. Alternatively, if using the GNOME desktop, press the Super
key to enter the Activities Overview, type Print Settings and then press Enter. The Print
Settings tool appears. The Super key appears in a variety of guises, depending on the keyboard and
other hardware, but often as either the Windows or Command key, and typically to the left of the
Spacebar.
The Print Settings window depicted in Figure 15.4, “Print Settings window” appears.
244
CHAPTER 15. FILE AND PRINT SERVERS
Figure 15.4. Print Settings window
15.3.2. Starting Printer Setup
Printer setup process varies depending on the printer queue type.
If you are setting up a local printer connected with USB, the printer is discovered and added
automatically. You will be prompted to confirm the packages to be installed and provide an
administrator or the root user password. Local printers connected with other port types and network
printers need to be set up manually.
Follow this procedure to start a manual printer setup:
1. Start the Print Settings tool (refer to Section 15.3.1, “Starting the Print Settings Configuration
Tool”).
2. Go to Server → New → Printer.
3. In the Authenticate dialog box, enter an administrator or root user password. If this is the
first time you have configured a remote printer you will be prompted to authorize an
adjustment to the firewall.
4. Select the printer connection type and provide its details in the area on the right.
15.3.3. Adding a Local Printer
Follow this procedure to add a local printer connected with other than a serial port:
1. Open the Add printer dialog (refer to Section 15.3.2, “Starting Printer Setup”).
2. If the device does not appear automatically, select the port to which the printer is connected
in the list on the left (such as Serial Port #1 or LPT #1).
3. On the right, enter the connection properties:
for Other
245
System Administrator's Guide
URI (for example file:/dev/lp0)
for Serial Port
Baud Rate
Parity
Data Bits
Flow Control
Figure 15.5. Adding a local printer
4. Click Forward.
5. Select the printer model. See Section 15.3.8, “Selecting the Printer Model and Finishing” for
details.
15.3.4. Adding an AppSocket/HP JetDirect printer
Follow this procedure to add an AppSocket/HP JetDirect printer:
1. Open the New Printer dialog (refer to Section 15.3.1, “Starting the Print Settings
Configuration Tool”).
246
CHAPTER 15. FILE AND PRINT SERVERS
2. In the list on the left, select Network Printer → AppSocket/HP JetDirect.
3. On the right, enter the connection settings:
Hostname
Printer host name or IP address.
Port Number
Printer port listening for print jobs (9100 by default).
Figure 15.6. Adding a JetDirect printer
4. Click Forward.
5. Select the printer model. See Section 15.3.8, “Selecting the Printer Model and Finishing” for
details.
15.3.5. Adding an IPP Printer
An IPP printer is a printer attached to a different system on the same TCP/IP network. The system
this printer is attached to may either be running CUPS or simply configured to use IPP.
If a firewall is enabled on the printer server, then the firewall must be configured to allow incoming TCP
connections on port 631. Note that the CUPS browsing protocol allows client machines to discover
247
System Administrator's Guide
shared CUPS queues automatically. To enable this, the firewall on the client machine must be
configured to allow incoming UDP packets on port 631.
Follow this procedure to add an IPP printer:
1. Open the New Printer dialog (refer to Section 15.3.2, “Starting Printer Setup”).
2. In the list of devices on the left, select Network Printer and Internet Printing Protocol (ipp) or
Internet Printing Protocol (https).
3. On the right, enter the connection settings:
Host
The host name of the IPP printer.
Queue
The queue name to be given to the new queue (if the box is left empty, a name based on the
device node will be used).
Figure 15.7. Adding an IPP printer
4. Click Forward to continue.
5. Select the printer model. See Section 15.3.8, “Selecting the Printer Model and Finishing” for
details.
15.3.6. Adding an LPD/LPR Host or Printer
248
CHAPTER 15. FILE AND PRINT SERVERS
Follow this procedure to add an LPD/LPR host or printer:
1. Open the New Printer dialog (refer to Section 15.3.2, “Starting Printer Setup”).
2. In the list of devices on the left, select Network Printer → LPD/LPR Host or Printer .
3. On the right, enter the connection settings:
Host
The host name of the LPD/LPR printer or host.
Optionally, click Probe to find queues on the LPD host.
Queue
The queue name to be given to the new queue (if the box is left empty, a name based on the
device node will be used).
Figure 15.8. Adding an LPD/LPR printer
4. Click Forward to continue.
5. Select the printer model. See Section 15.3.8, “Selecting the Printer Model and Finishing” for
details.
15.3.7. Adding a Samba (SMB) printer
Follow this procedure to add a Samba printer:
249
System Administrator's Guide
NOTE
Note that in order to add a Samba printer, you need to have the samba-client package
installed. You can do so by running, as root:
yum install samba-client
For more information on installing packages with Yum, refer to Section 8.2.4, “Installing
Packages”.
1. Open the New Printer dialog (refer to Section 15.3.2, “Starting Printer Setup”).
2. In the list on the left, select Network Printer → Windows Printer via SAMBA.
3. Enter the SMB address in the smb:// field. Use the format computer name/printer share. In
Figure 15.9, “Adding a SMB printer” , the computer name is dellbox and the printer share is r2.
Figure 15.9. Adding a SMB printer
4. Click Browse to see the available workgroups/domains. To display only queues of a particular
host, type in the host name (NetBios name) and click Browse.
5. Select either of the options:
Prompt user if authentication is required: user name and password are
collected from the user when printing a document.
Set authentication details now: provide authentication information now so it is
250
CHAPTER 15. FILE AND PRINT SERVERS
not required later. In the Username field, enter the user name to access the printer. This
user must exist on the SMB system, and the user must have permission to access the
printer. The default user name is typically guest for Windows servers, or nobody for
Samba servers.
6. Enter the Password (if required) for the user specified in the Username field.
WARNING
Samba printer user names and passwords are stored in the printer server
as unencrypted files readable by root and the Linux Printing Daemon,
lpd. Thus, other users that have root access to the printer server can
view the user name and password you use to access the Samba printer.
Therefore, when you choose a user name and password to access a Samba
printer, it is advisable that you choose a password that is different from
what you use to access your local Red Hat Enterprise Linux system.
If there are files shared on the Samba print server, it is recommended that
they also use a password different from what is used by the print queue.
7. Click Verify to test the connection. Upon successful verification, a dialog box appears
confirming printer share accessibility.
8. Click Forward.
9. Select the printer model. See Section 15.3.8, “Selecting the Printer Model and Finishing” for
details.
15.3.8. Selecting the Printer Model and Finishing
Once you have properly selected a printer connection type, the system attempts to acquire a driver. If
the process fails, you can locate or search for the driver resources manually.
Follow this procedure to provide the printer driver and finish the installation:
1. In the window displayed after the automatic driver detection has failed, select one of the
following options:
Select a Printer from database — the system chooses a driver based on the
selected make of your printer from the list of Makes. If your printer model is not listed,
choose Generic.
Provide PPD file — the system uses the provided PostScript Printer Description (PPD)
file for installation. A PPD file may also be delivered with your printer as being normally
provided by the manufacturer. If the PPD file is available, you can choose this option and
use the browser bar below the option description to select the PPD file.
251
System Administrator's Guide
Search for a printer driver to download — enter the make and model of your
printer into the Make and model field to search on OpenPrinting.org for the appropriate
packages.
Figure 15.10. Selecting a printer brand
2. Depending on your previous choice provide details in the area displayed below:
Printer brand for the Select printer from database option.
PPD file location for the Provide PPD file option.
Printer make and model for the Search for a printer driver to download
option.
3. Click Forward to continue.
4. If applicable for your option, window shown in Figure 15.11, “Selecting a printer model” appears.
Choose the corresponding model in the Models column on the left.
NOTE
On the right, the recommended printer driver is automatically selected;
however, you can select another available driver. The print driver processes the
data that you want to print into a format the printer can understand. Since a
local printer is attached directly to your computer, you need a printer driver to
process the data that is sent to the printer.
252
CHAPTER 15. FILE AND PRINT SERVERS
Figure 15.11. Selecting a printer model
5. Click Forward.
6. Under the Describe Printer enter a unique name for the printer in the Printer Name
field. The printer name can contain letters, numbers, dashes (-), and underscores (_); it must
not contain any spaces. You can also use the Description and Location fields to add
further printer information. Both fields are optional, and may contain spaces.
253
System Administrator's Guide
Figure 15.12. Printer setup
7. Click Apply to confirm your printer configuration and add the print queue if the settings are
correct. Click Back to modify the printer configuration.
8. After the changes are applied, a dialog box appears allowing you to print a test page. Click Yes
to print a test page now. Alternatively, you can print a test page later as described in
Section 15.3.9, “Printing a Test Page” .
15.3.9. Printing a Test Page
After you have set up a printer or changed a printer configuration, print a test page to make sure the
printer is functioning properly:
1. Right-click the printer in the Printing window and click Properties.
2. In the Properties window, click Settings on the left.
3. On the displayed Settings tab, click the Print Test Page button.
15.3.10. Modifying Existing Printers
To delete an existing printer, in the Print Settings window, select the printer and go to Printer →
Delete. Confirm the printer deletion. Alternatively, press the Delete key.
To set the default printer, right-click the printer in the printer list and click the Set as Default button
in the context menu.
254
CHAPTER 15. FILE AND PRINT SERVERS
15.3.10.1. The Settings Page
To change printer driver configuration, double-click the corresponding name in the Printer list and
click the Settings label on the left to display the Settings page.
You can modify printer settings such as make and model, print a test page, change the device location
(URI), and more.
Figure 15.13. Settings page
15.3.10.2. The Policies Page
Click the Policies button on the left to change settings in printer state and print output.
You can select the printer states, configure the Error Policy of the printer (you can decide to abort
the print job, retry, or stop it if an error occurs).
You can also create a banner page (a page that describes aspects of the print job such as the
originating printer, the user name from the which the job originated, and the security status of the
document being printed): click the Starting Banner or Ending Banner drop-down menu and
choose the option that best describes the nature of the print jobs (for example, confidential).
15.3.10.2.1. Sharing Printers
On the Policies page, you can mark a printer as shared: if a printer is shared, users published on the
network can use it. To allow the sharing function for printers, go to Server → Settings and select
Publish shared printers connected to this system.
255
System Administrator's Guide
Figure 15.14. Policies page
Make sure that the firewall allows incoming TCP connections to port 631, the port for the Network
Printing Server (IPP) protocol. To allow IPP traffic through the firewall on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7,
make use of firewalld's IPP service. To do so, proceed as follows:
Procedure 15.2. Enabling IPP Service in firewalld
1. To start the graphical firewall-config tool, press the Super key to enter the Activities
Overview, type firewall and then press Enter. The Firewall Configuration window
opens. You will be prompted for an administrator or root password.
Alternatively, to start the graphical firewall configuration tool using the command line, enter
the following command as root user:
~]# firewall-config
The Firewall Configuration window opens.
Look for the word “Connected” in the lower left corner. This indicates that the firewall-config
tool is connected to the user space daemon, firewalld.
To immediately change the current firewall settings, ensure the drop-down selection menu
labeled Configuration is set to Runtime. Alternatively, to edit the settings to be applied at
the next system start, or firewall reload, select Permanent from the drop-down list.
2. Select the Zones tab and then select the firewall zone to correspond with the network
interface to be used. The default is the public zone. The Interfaces tab shows what interfaces
have been assigned to a zone.
3. Select the Services tab and then select the ipp service to enable sharing. The ipp-client
service is required for accessing network printers.
256
CHAPTER 15. FILE AND PRINT SERVERS
4. Close the firewall-config tool.
For more information on opening and closing ports in firewalld, see the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7
Security Guide.
15.3.10.2.2. The Access Control Page
You can change user-level access to the configured printer on the Access Control page. Click the
Access Control label on the left to display the page. Select either Allow printing for
everyone except these users or Deny printing for everyone except these users
and define the user set below: enter the user name in the text box and click the Add button to add the
user to the user set.
Figure 15.15. Access Control page
15.3.10.2.3. The Printer Options Page
The Printer Options page contains various configuration options for the printer media and output,
and its content may vary from printer to printer. It contains general printing, paper, quality, and
printing size settings.
257
System Administrator's Guide
Figure 15.16. Printer Options page
15.3.10.2.4. Job Options Page
On the Job Options page, you can detail the printer job options. Click the Job Options label on the
left to display the page. Edit the default settings to apply custom job options, such as number of copies,
orientation, pages per side, scaling (increase or decrease the size of the printable area, which can be
used to fit an oversize print area onto a smaller physical sheet of print medium), detailed text options,
and custom job options.
258
CHAPTER 15. FILE AND PRINT SERVERS
Figure 15.17. Job Options page
15.3.10.2.5. Ink/Toner Levels Page
The Ink/Toner Levels page contains details on toner status if available and printer status
messages. Click the Ink/Toner Levels label on the left to display the page.
259
System Administrator's Guide
Figure 15.18. Ink/Toner Levels page
15.3.10.3. Managing Print Jobs
When you send a print job to the printer daemon, such as printing a text file from Emacs or printing an
image from GIMP, the print job is added to the print spool queue. The print spool queue is a list of print
jobs that have been sent to the printer and information about each print request, such as the status of
the request, the job number, and more.
During the printing process, the Printer Status icon appears in the Notification Area on the panel.
To check the status of a print job, click the Printer Status, which displays a window similar to
Figure 15.19, “GNOME Print Status” .
Figure 15.19. GNOME Print Status
To cancel, hold, release, reprint or authenticate a print job, select the job in the GNOME Print Status
and on the Job menu, click the respective command.
To view the list of print jobs in the print spool from a shell prompt, type the command lpstat -o. The
last few lines look similar to the following:
260
CHAPTER 15. FILE AND PRINT SERVERS
Example 15.4. Example of lpstat -o output
$ lpstat -o
Charlie-60
16:42:11 GMT
Aaron-61
16:42:44 GMT
Ben-62
16:45:42 GMT
twaugh
1024
Tue 08 Feb 2011
twaugh
1024
Tue 08 Feb 2011
root
1024
Tue 08 Feb 2011
If you want to cancel a print job, find the job number of the request with the command lpstat -o and
then use the command cancel job number. For example, cancel 60 would cancel the print job in
Example 15.4, “Example of lpstat -o output”. You cannot cancel print jobs that were started by
other users with the cancel command. However, you can enforce deletion of such job by issuing the
cancel -U root job_number command. To prevent such canceling, change the printer operation
policy to Authenticated to force root authentication.
You can also print a file directly from a shell prompt. For example, the command lp sample.txt
prints the text file sample.txt. The print filter determines what type of file it is and converts it into a
format the printer can understand.
15.3.11. Additional Resources
To learn more about printing on Red Hat Enterprise Linux, see the following resources.
Installed Documentation
lp(1) — The manual page for the lp command that allows you to print files from the command
line.
lpr(1) — The manual page for the lpr command that allows you to print files from the
command line.
cancel(1) — The manual page for the command-line utility to remove print jobs from the print
queue.
mpage(1) — The manual page for the command-line utility to print multiple pages on one
sheet of paper.
cupsd(8) — The manual page for the CUPS printer daemon.
cupsd.conf(5) — The manual page for the CUPS printer daemon configuration file.
classes.conf(5) — The manual page for the class configuration file for CUPS.
lpstat(1) — The manual page for the lpstat command, which displays status information
about classes, jobs, and printers.
Online Documentation
http://www.linuxprinting.org/ — The OpenPrinting group on the Linux Foundation website
contains a large amount of information about printing in Linux.
http://www.cups.org/ — The CUPS website provides documentation, FAQs, and newsgroups
261
System Administrator's Guide
about CUPS.
262
CHAPTER 16. CONFIGURING NTP USING THE CHRONY SUITE
CHAPTER 16. CONFIGURING NTP USING THE CHRONY SUITE
Accurate time keeping is important for a number of reasons in IT. In networking for example, accurate
time stamps in packets and logs are required. In Linux systems, the NTP protocol is implemented by a
daemon running in user space.
The user space daemon updates the system clock running in the kernel. The system clock can keep
time by using various clock sources. Usually, the Time Stamp Counter (TSC) is used. The TSC is a CPU
register which counts the number of cycles since it was last reset. It is very fast, has a high resolution,
and there are no interruptions.
There is a choice between the daemons ntpd and chronyd, available from the repositories in the ntp
and chrony packages respectively.
This chapter describes the use of the chrony suite.
16.1. INTRODUCTION TO THE CHRONY SUITE
Chrony is an implementation of the Network Time Protocol (NTP). You can use Chrony:
to synchronize the system clock with NTP servers,
to synchronize the system clock with a reference clock, for example a GPS receiver,
to synchronize the system clock with a manual time input,
as an NTPv4(RFC 5905) server or peer to provide a time service to other computers in the
network.
Chrony performs well in a wide range of conditions, including intermittent network connections,
heavily congested networks, changing temperatures (ordinary computer clocks are sensitive to
temperature), and systems that do not run continuously, or run on a virtual machine.
Typical accuracy between two machines synchronized over the Internet is within a few milliseconds,
and for machines on a LAN within tens of microseconds. Hardware timestamping or a hardware
reference clock may improve accuracy between two machines synchronized to a sub-microsecond
level.
Chrony consists of chronyd, a daemon that runs in user space, and chronyc, a command line program
which can be used to monitor the performance of chronyd and to change various operating
parameters when it is running.
16.1.1. Differences Between ntpd and chronyd
Things chronyd can do better than ntpd:
chronyd can work well in an environment where access to the time reference is intermittent,
whereas ntpd needs regular polling of time reference to work well.
chronyd can perform well even when the network is congested for longer periods of time.
chronyd can usually synchronize the clock faster and with better accuracy.
263
System Administrator's Guide
chronyd quickly adapts to sudden changes in the rate of the clock, for example, due to
changes in the temperature of the crystal oscillator, whereas ntpd may need a long time to
settle down again.
In the default configuration, chronyd never steps the time after the clock has been
synchronized at system start, in order not to upset other running programs. ntpd can be
configured to never step the time too, but it has to use a different means of adjusting the clock,
which has some disadvantages including negative effect on accuracy of the clock.
chronyd can adjust the rate of the clock on a Linux system in a larger range, which allows it to
operate even on machines with a broken or unstable clock. For example, on some virtual
machines.
chronyd is smaller, it uses less memory and it wakes up the CPU only when necessary, which
is better for power saving.
Things chronyd can do that ntpd cannot do:
chronyd provides support for isolated networks where the only method of time correction is
manual entry. For example, by the administrator looking at a clock. chronyd can examine the
errors corrected at different updates to estimate the rate at which the computer gains or loses
time, and use this estimate to adjust the computer clock subsequently.
chronyd provides support to work out the rate of gain or loss of the real-time clock, for
example the clock that maintains the time when the computer is turned off. It can use this data
when the system boots to set the system time using an adapted value of time taken from the
real-time clock. These real-time clock facilities are currently only available on Linux systems.
chronyd supports hardware timestamping on Linux, which allows extremely accurate
synchronization on local networks.
Things ntpd can do that chronyd cannot do:
ntpd supports all operating modes from NTP version 4 ( RFC 5905), including broadcast,
multicast and manycast clients and servers. Note that the broadcast and multicast modes are,
even with authentication, inherently less accurate and less secure than the ordinary server
and client mode, and should generally be avoided.
ntpd supports the Autokey protocol ( RFC 5906) to authenticate servers with public-key
cryptography. Note that the protocol has proven to be insecure and will be probably replaced
with an implementation of the Network Time Security (NTS) specification.
ntpd includes drivers for many reference clocks, whereas chronyd relies on other programs,
for example gpsd, to access the data from the reference clocks using shared memory (SHM) or
Unix domain socket (SOCK).
16.1.2. Choosing Between NTP Daemons
Chrony should be preferred for all systems except for the systems that are managed or monitored by
tools that do not support chrony, or the systems that have a hardware reference clock which cannot be
used with chrony.
264
CHAPTER 16. CONFIGURING NTP USING THE CHRONY SUITE
NOTE
Systems which are required to perform authentication of packets with the Autokey
protocol, can only be used with ntpd, because chronyd does not support this protocol.
The Autokey protocol has serious security issues, and thus using this protocol should
be avoided. Instead of Autokey, use authentication with symmetric keys, which is
supported by both chronyd and ntpd. Chrony supports stronger hash functions like
SHA256 and SHA512, while ntpd can use only MD5 and SHA1.
16.2. UNDERSTANDING CHRONY AND ITS CONFIGURATION
16.2.1. Understanding chronyd
The chrony daemon, chronyd, can be monitored and controlled by the command line utility chronyc.
This utility provides a command prompt which allows entering a number of commands to query the
current state of chronyd and make changes to its configuration. By default, chronyd accepts only
commands from a local instance of chronyc, but it can be configured to accept monitoring commands
also from remote hosts. The remote access should be restricted.
16.2.2. Understanding chronyc
The chrony daemon, chronyd, can be controlled by the command line utility chronyc. This utility
provides a command prompt which allows entering a number of commands to query the current state
of chronyd and to make changes to its configuration. The default configuration is for chronyd to only
accept commands from a local instance of chronyc, but it can be configured to accept monitoring
commands also from remote hosts. The remote access should be restricted.
16.2.3. Understanding the chrony Configuration Commands
The default configuration file for chronyd is /etc/chrony.conf. The -f option can be used to
specify an alternate configuration file path. See the chronyd man page for further options. For a
complete list of the directives that can be used see
http://chrony.tuxfamily.org/manual.html#Configuration-file.
Below is a selection of chronyd configuration options:
Comments
Comments should be preceded by #, %, ; or !
allow
Optionally specify a host, subnet, or network from which to allow NTP connections to a machine
acting as NTP server. The default is not to allow connections.
Examples:
1.
allow 192.0.2.0/24
Use this command to grant access to a specific network.
2.
allow 2001:0db8:85a3::8a2e:0370:7334
265
System Administrator's Guide
Use this this command to grant access to an IPv6.
The UDP port number 123 needs to be open in the firewall in order to allow the client access:
~]#
firewall-cmd --zone=public --add-port=123/udp
If you want to open port 123 permanently, use the --permanent option:
~]#
firewall-cmd --permanent --zone=public --add-port=123/udp
cmdallow
This is similar to the allow directive (see section allow), except that it allows control access
(rather than NTP client access) to a particular subnet or host. (By “control access” is meant that
chronyc can be run on those hosts and successfully connect to chronyd on this computer.) The
syntax is identical. There is also a cmddeny all directive with similar behavior to the cmdallow
all directive.
dumpdir
Path to the directory to save the measurement history across restarts of chronyd (assuming no
changes are made to the system clock behavior whilst it is not running). If this capability is to be
used (via the dumponexit command in the configuration file, or the dump command in chronyc),
the dumpdir command should be used to define the directory where the measurement histories are
saved.
dumponexit
If this command is present, it indicates that chronyd should save the measurement history for each
of its time sources recorded whenever the program exits. (See the dumpdir command above).
hwtimestamp
The hwtimestamp directive enables hardware timestamping for extremely accurate
synchronization. For more details, see chrony.conf(5) manual page.
local
The local keyword is used to allow chronyd to appear synchronized to real time from the
viewpoint of clients polling it, even if it has no current synchronization source. This option is
normally used on the “master” computer in an isolated network, where several computers are
required to synchronize to one another, and the “master” is kept in line with real time by manual
input.
An example of the command is:
local stratum 10
A large value of 10 indicates that the clock is so many hops away from a reference clock that its
time is unreliable. If the computer ever has access to another computer which is ultimately
synchronized to a reference clock, it will almost certainly be at a stratum less than 10. Therefore,
the choice of a high value like 10 for the local command prevents the machine’s own time from
ever being confused with real time, were it ever to leak out to clients that have visibility of real
servers.
266
CHAPTER 16. CONFIGURING NTP USING THE CHRONY SUITE
log
The log command indicates that certain information is to be logged. It accepts the following
options:
measurements
This option logs the raw NTP measurements and related information to a file called
measurements.log.
statistics
This option logs information about the regression processing to a file called statistics.log.
tracking
This option logs changes to the estimate of the system’s gain or loss rate, and any slews made, to
a file called tracking.log.
rtc
This option logs information about the system’s real-time clock.
refclocks
This option logs the raw and filtered reference clock measurements to a file called
refclocks.log.
tempcomp
This option logs the temperature measurements and system rate compensations to a file called
tempcomp.log.
The log files are written to the directory specified by the logdir command. An example of the
command is:
log measurements statistics tracking
logdir
This directive allows the directory where log files are written to be specified. An example of the use
of this directive is:
logdir /var/log/chrony
makestep
Normally chronyd will cause the system to gradually correct any time offset, by slowing down or
speeding up the clock as required. In certain situations, the system clock may be so far adrift that
this slewing process would take a very long time to correct the system clock. This directive forces
chronyd to step system clock if the adjustment is larger than a threshold value, but only if there
were no more clock updates since chronyd was started than a specified limit (a negative value can
be used to disable the limit). This is particularly useful when using reference clock, because the
initstepslew directive only works with NTP sources.
An example of the use of this directive is:
makestep 1000 10
267
System Administrator's Guide
This would step the system clock if the adjustment is larger than 1000 seconds, but only in the first
ten clock updates.
maxchange
This directive sets the maximum allowed offset corrected on a clock update. The check is
performed only after the specified number of updates to allow a large initial adjustment of the
system clock. When an offset larger than the specified maximum occurs, it will be ignored for the
specified number of times and then chronyd will give up and exit (a negative value can be used to
never exit). In both cases a message is sent to syslog.
An example of the use of this directive is:
maxchange 1000 1 2
After the first clock update, chronyd will check the offset on every clock update, it will ignore two
adjustments larger than 1000 seconds and exit on another one.
maxupdateskew
One of chronyd's tasks is to work out how fast or slow the computer’s clock runs relative to its
reference sources. In addition, it computes an estimate of the error bounds around the estimated
value. If the range of error is too large, it indicates that the measurements have not settled down
yet, and that the estimated gain or loss rate is not very reliable. The maxupdateskew parameter is
the threshold for determining whether an estimate is too unreliable to be used. By default, the
threshold is 1000 ppm. The format of the syntax is:
maxupdateskew skew-in-ppm
Typical values for skew-in-ppm might be 100 for a dial-up connection to servers over a telephone
line, and 5 or 10 for a computer on a LAN. It should be noted that this is not the only means of
protection against using unreliable estimates. At all times, chronyd keeps track of both the
estimated gain or loss rate, and the error bound on the estimate. When a new estimate is generated
following another measurement from one of the sources, a weighted combination algorithm is used
to update the master estimate. So if chronyd has an existing highly-reliable master estimate and a
new estimate is generated which has large error bounds, the existing master estimate will dominate
in the new master estimate.
minsources
The minsources directive sets the minimum number of sources that need to be considered as
selectable in the source selection algorithm before the local clock is updated.
The format of the syntax is:
minsources number-of-sources
By default, number-of-sources is 1. Setting minsources to a larger number can be used to improve
the reliability, because multiple sources will need to correspond with each other.
noclientlog
This directive, which takes no arguments, specifies that client accesses are not to be logged.
Normally they are logged, allowing statistics to be reported using the clients command in chronyc.
reselectdist
268
CHAPTER 16. CONFIGURING NTP USING THE CHRONY SUITE
When chronyd selects synchronization source from available sources, it will prefer the one with
minimum synchronization distance. However, to avoid frequent reselecting when there are sources
with similar distance, a fixed distance is added to the distance for sources that are currently not
selected. This can be set with the reselectdist option. By default, the distance is 100
microseconds.
The format of the syntax is:
reselectdist dist-in-seconds
stratumweight
The stratumweight directive sets how much distance should be added per stratum to the
synchronization distance when chronyd selects the synchronization source from available
sources.
The format of the syntax is:
stratumweight dist-in-seconds
By default, dist-in-seconds is 1 millisecond. This means that sources with lower stratum are usually
preferred to sources with higher stratum even when their distance is significantly worse. Setting
stratumweight to 0 makes chronyd ignore stratum when selecting the source.
rtcfile
The rtcfile directive defines the name of the file in which chronyd can save parameters
associated with tracking the accuracy of the system’s real-time clock (RTC). The format of the
syntax is:
rtcfile /var/lib/chrony/rtc
chronyd saves information in this file when it exits and when the writertc command is issued in
chronyc. The information saved is the RTC’s error at some epoch, that epoch (in seconds since
January 1 1970), and the rate at which the RTC gains or loses time. Not all real-time clocks are
supported as their code is system-specific. Note that if this directive is used then the real-time
clock should not be manually adjusted as this would interfere with chrony's need to measure the
rate at which the real-time clock drifts if it was adjusted at random intervals.
rtcsync
The rtcsync directive is present in the /etc/chrony.conf file by default. This will inform the
kernel the system clock is kept synchronized and the kernel will update the real-time clock every 11
minutes.
16.2.4. Security with chronyc
Chronyc can access chronyd in two ways:
Internet Protocol (IPv4 or IPv6,
Unix domain socket, which is accessible locally by the root or chrony user.
By default, chronyc connects to the Unix domain socket. The default path is
/var/run/chrony/chronyd.sock. If this connection fails, which can happen for example when
269
System Administrator's Guide
chronyc is running under a non-root user, chronyc tries to connect to 127.0.0.1 and then ::1.
Only the following monitoring commands, which do not affect the behavior of chronyd, are allowed
from the network:
activity
manual list
rtcdata
smoothing
sources
sourcestats
tracking
waitsync
The set of hosts from which chronyd accepts these commands can be configured with the cmdallow
directive in the configuration file of chronyd, or the cmdallow command in chronyc. By default, the
commands are accepted only from localhost (127.0.0.1 or ::1).
All other commands are allowed only through the Unix domain socket. When sent over the network,
chronyd responds with a Not authorised error, even if it is from localhost.
Procedure 16.1. Accessing chronyd remotely with chronyc
1. Allow access from both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses by adding the following to the
/etc/chrony.conf file:
bindcmdaddress 0.0.0.0
or
bindcmdaddress :
2. Allow commands from the remote IP address, network, or subnet by using the cmdallow
directive.
Example 16.1.
Add the following content to the /etc/chrony.conf file:
cmdallow 192.168.1.0/24
3. Open port 323 in the firewall to connect from a remote system.
~]#
firewall-cmd --zone=public --add-port=323/udp
If you want to open port 323 permanently, use the --permanent.
270
CHAPTER 16. CONFIGURING NTP USING THE CHRONY SUITE
~]#
firewall-cmd --permanent --zone=public --add-port=323/udp
Note that the allow directive is for NTP access whereas the cmdallow directive is to enable receiving
of remote commands. It is possible to make these changes temporarily using chronyc running locally.
Edit the configuration file to make permanent changes.
16.3. USING CHRONY
16.3.1. Installing chrony
The chrony suite is installed by default on some versions of Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7. If required, to
ensure that it is, run the following command as root:
~]# yum install chrony
The default location for the chrony daemon is /usr/sbin/chronyd. The command line utility will be
installed to /usr/bin/chronyc.
16.3.2. Checking the Status of chronyd
To check the status of chronyd, issue the following command:
~]$ systemctl status chronyd
chronyd.service - NTP client/server
Loaded: loaded (/usr/lib/systemd/system/chronyd.service; enabled)
Active: active (running) since Wed 2013-06-12 22:23:16 CEST; 11h ago
16.3.3. Starting chronyd
To start chronyd, issue the following command as root:
~]# systemctl start chronyd
To ensure chronyd starts automatically at system start, issue the following command as root:
~]# systemctl enable chronyd
16.3.4. Stopping chronyd
To stop chronyd, issue the following command as root:
~]# systemctl stop chronyd
To prevent chronyd from starting automatically at system start, issue the following command as
root:
~]# systemctl disable chronyd
16.3.5. Checking if chrony is Synchronized
271
System Administrator's Guide
To check if chrony is synchronized, make use of the tracking, sources, and sourcestats
commands.
16.3.5.1. Checking chrony Tracking
To check chrony tracking, issue the following command:
~]$ chronyc tracking
Reference ID
: CB00710F (foo.example.net)
Stratum
: 3
Ref time (UTC) : Fri Jan 27 09:49:17 2017
System time
: 0.000006523 seconds slow of NTP time
Last offset
: -0.000006747 seconds
RMS offset
: 0.000035822 seconds
Frequency
: 3.225 ppm slow
Residual freq
: 0.000 ppm
Skew
: 0.129 ppm
Root delay
: 0.013639022 seconds
Root dispersion : 0.001100737 seconds
Update interval : 64.2 seconds
Leap status
: Normal
The fields are as follows:
Reference ID
This is the reference ID and name (or IP address) if available, of the server to which the computer is
currently synchronized. Reference ID is a hexadecimal number to avoid confusion with IPv4
addresses.
Stratum
The stratum indicates how many hops away from a computer with an attached reference clock we
are. Such a computer is a stratum-1 computer, so the computer in the example is two hops away
(that is to say, a.b.c is a stratum-2 and is synchronized from a stratum-1).
Ref time
This is the time (UTC) at which the last measurement from the reference source was processed.
System time
In normal operation, chronyd never steps the system clock, because any jump in the timescale can
have adverse consequences for certain application programs. Instead, any error in the system clock
is corrected by slightly speeding up or slowing down the system clock until the error has been
removed, and then returning to the system clock’s normal speed. A consequence of this is that
there will be a period when the system clock (as read by other programs using the
gettimeofday() system call, or by the date command in the shell) will be different from
chronyd's estimate of the current true time (which it reports to NTP clients when it is operating in
server mode). The value reported on this line is the difference due to this effect.
Last offset
This is the estimated local offset on the last clock update.
RMS offset
This is a long-term average of the offset value.
272
CHAPTER 16. CONFIGURING NTP USING THE CHRONY SUITE
Frequency
The “frequency” is the rate by which the system’s clock would be wrong if chronyd was not
correcting it. It is expressed in ppm (parts per million). For example, a value of 1 ppm would mean
that when the system’s clock thinks it has advanced 1 second, it has actually advanced by 1.000001
seconds relative to true time.
Residual freq
This shows the “residual frequency” for the currently selected reference source. This reflects any
difference between what the measurements from the reference source indicate the frequency
should be and the frequency currently being used. The reason this is not always zero is that a
smoothing procedure is applied to the frequency. Each time a measurement from the reference
source is obtained and a new residual frequency computed, the estimated accuracy of this residual
is compared with the estimated accuracy (see skew next) of the existing frequency value. A
weighted average is computed for the new frequency, with weights depending on these accuracies.
If the measurements from the reference source follow a consistent trend, the residual will be driven
to zero over time.
Skew
This is the estimated error bound on the frequency.
Root delay
This is the total of the network path delays to the stratum-1 computer from which the computer is
ultimately synchronized. Root delay values are printed in nanosecond resolution. In certain extreme
situations, this value can be negative. (This can arise in a symmetric peer arrangement where the
computers’ frequencies are not tracking each other and the network delay is very short relative to
the turn-around time at each computer.)
Root dispersion
This is the total dispersion accumulated through all the computers back to the stratum-1 computer
from which the computer is ultimately synchronized. Dispersion is due to system clock resolution,
statistical measurement variations etc. Root dispersion values are printed in nanosecond
resolution.
Leap status
This is the leap status, which can be Normal, Insert second, Delete second or Not synchronized.
16.3.5.2. Checking chrony Sources
The sources command displays information about the current time sources that chronyd is accessing.
The optional argument -v can be specified, meaning verbose. In this case, extra caption lines are
shown as a reminder of the meanings of the columns.
~]$ chronyc sources
210 Number of sources = 3
MS Name/IP address
Stratum Poll Reach LastRx Last sample
==========================================================================
=====
#* GPS0
0
4
377
11
-479ns[ -621ns] +/134ns
^? a.b.c
2
6
377
23
-923us[ -924us] +/-
273
System Administrator's Guide
43ms
^+ d.e.f
86ms
1
6
377
21
-2629us[-2619us] +/-
The columns are as follows:
M
This indicates the mode of the source. ^ means a server, = means a peer and # indicates a locally
connected reference clock.
S
This column indicates the state of the sources. “*” indicates the source to which chronyd is
currently synchronized. “+” indicates acceptable sources which are combined with the selected
source. “-” indicates acceptable sources which are excluded by the combining algorithm. “?”
indicates sources to which connectivity has been lost or whose packets do not pass all tests. “x”
indicates a clock which chronyd thinks is a falseticker (its time is inconsistent with a majority of
other sources). “~” indicates a source whose time appears to have too much variability. The “?”
condition is also shown at start-up, until at least 3 samples have been gathered from it.
Name/IP address
This shows the name or the IP address of the source, or reference ID for reference clock.
Stratum
This shows the stratum of the source, as reported in its most recently received sample. Stratum 1
indicates a computer with a locally attached reference clock. A computer that is synchronized to a
stratum 1 computer is at stratum 2. A computer that is synchronized to a stratum 2 computer is at
stratum 3, and so on.
Poll
This shows the rate at which the source is being polled, as a base-2 logarithm of the interval in
seconds. Thus, a value of 6 would indicate that a measurement is being made every 64 seconds.
chronyd automatically varies the polling rate in response to prevailing conditions.
Reach
This shows the source’s reach register printed as an octal number. The register has 8 bits and is
updated on every received or missed packet from the source. A value of 377 indicates that a valid
reply was received for all of the last eight transmissions.
LastRx
This column shows how long ago the last sample was received from the source. This is normally in
seconds. The letters m, h, d or y indicate minutes, hours, days or years. A value of 10 years indicates
there were no samples received from this source yet.
Last sample
This column shows the offset between the local clock and the source at the last measurement. The
number in the square brackets shows the actual measured offset. This may be suffixed by ns
(indicating nanoseconds), us (indicating microseconds), ms (indicating milliseconds), or s
(indicating seconds). The number to the left of the square brackets shows the original
measurement, adjusted to allow for any slews applied to the local clock since. The number following
the +/- indicator shows the margin of error in the measurement. Positive offsets indicate that the
local clock is ahead of the source.
274
CHAPTER 16. CONFIGURING NTP USING THE CHRONY SUITE
16.3.5.3. Checking chrony Source Statistics
The sourcestats command displays information about the drift rate and offset estimation process
for each of the sources currently being examined by chronyd. The optional argument -v can be
specified, meaning verbose. In this case, extra caption lines are shown as a reminder of the meanings of
the columns.
~]$ chronyc sourcestats
210 Number of sources = 1
Name/IP Address
NP NR Span Frequency Freq Skew Offset
Std Dev
==========================================================================
=====
abc.def.ghi
11
5
46m
-0.001
0.045
1us
25us
The columns are as follows:
Name/IP address
This is the name or IP address of the NTP server (or peer) or reference ID of the reference clock to
which the rest of the line relates.
NP
This is the number of sample points currently being retained for the server. The drift rate and
current offset are estimated by performing a linear regression through these points.
NR
This is the number of runs of residuals having the same sign following the last regression. If this
number starts to become too small relative to the number of samples, it indicates that a straight line
is no longer a good fit to the data. If the number of runs is too low, chronyd discards older samples
and re-runs the regression until the number of runs becomes acceptable.
Span
This is the interval between the oldest and newest samples. If no unit is shown the value is in
seconds. In the example, the interval is 46 minutes.
Frequency
This is the estimated residual frequency for the server, in parts per million. In this case, the
computer’s clock is estimated to be running 1 part in 10 9 slow relative to the server.
Freq Skew
This is the estimated error bounds on Freq (again in parts per million).
Offset
This is the estimated offset of the source.
Std Dev
This is the estimated sample standard deviation.
275
System Administrator's Guide
16.3.6. Manually Adjusting the System Clock
To step the system clock immediately, bypassing any adjustments in progress by slewing, issue the
following command as root:
~]# chronyc makestep
If the rtcfile directive is used, the real-time clock should not be manually adjusted. Random
adjustments would interfere with chrony's need to measure the rate at which the real-time clock drifts.
16.4. SETTING UP CHRONY FOR DIFFERENT ENVIRONMENTS
16.4.1. Setting Up chrony for a System in an Isolated Network
For a network that is never connected to the Internet, one computer is selected to be the master
timeserver. The other computers are either direct clients of the master, or clients of clients. On the
master, the drift file must be manually set with the average rate of drift of the system clock. If the
master is rebooted, it will obtain the time from surrounding systems and calculate an average to set its
system clock. Thereafter it resumes applying adjustments based on the drift file. The drift file will be
updated automatically when the settime command is used.
On the system selected to be the master, using a text editor running as root, edit the
/etc/chrony.conf as follows:
driftfile /var/lib/chrony/drift
commandkey 1
keyfile /etc/chrony.keys
initstepslew 10 client1 client3 client6
local stratum 8
manual
allow 192.0.2.0
Where 192.0.2.0 is the network or subnet address from which the clients are allowed to connect.
On the systems selected to be direct clients of the master, using a text editor running as root, edit the
/etc/chrony.conf as follows:
server master
driftfile /var/lib/chrony/drift
logdir /var/log/chrony
log measurements statistics tracking
keyfile /etc/chrony.keys
commandkey 24
local stratum 10
initstepslew 20 master
allow 192.0.2.123
Where 192.0.2.123 is the address of the master, and master is the host name of the master. Clients
with this configuration will resynchronize the master if it restarts.
On the client systems which are not to be direct clients of the master, the /etc/chrony.conf file
should be the same except that the local and allow directives should be omitted.
276
CHAPTER 16. CONFIGURING NTP USING THE CHRONY SUITE
In an Isolated Network, you can also use the local directive that enables a local reference mode,
which allows chronyd operating as an NTP server to appear synchronized to real time, even when it
was never synchronized or the last update of the clock happened a long time ago.
To allow multiple servers in the network to use the same local configuration and to be synchronized to
one another, without confusing clients that poll more than one server, use the orphan option of the
local directive which enables the orphan mode. Each server needs to be configured to poll all other
servers with local. This ensures that only the server with the smallest reference ID has the local
reference active and other servers are synchronized to it. When the server fails, another one will take
over.
16.5. USING CHRONYC
16.5.1. Using chronyc to Control chronyd
To make changes to the local instance of chronyd using the command line utility chronyc in
interactive mode, enter the following command as root:
~]# chronyc
chronyc must run as root if some of the restricted commands are to be used.
The chronyc command prompt will be displayed as follows:
chronyc>
You can type help to list all of the commands.
The utility can also be invoked in non-interactive command mode if called together with a command as
follows:
chronyc command
NOTE
Changes made using chronyc are not permanent, they will be lost after a chronyd
restart. For permanent changes, modify /etc/chrony.conf.
16.6. CHRONY WITH HW TIMESTAMPING
16.6.1. Understanding Hardware Timestamping
Hardware timestamping is a feature supported in some Network Interface Controller (NICs) which
provides accurate timestamping of incoming and outgoing packets. NTP timestamps are usually
created by the kernel and chronyd with the use of the system clock. However, when HW timestamping
is enabled, the NIC uses its own clock to generate the timestamps when packets are entering or
leaving the link layer or the physical layer. When used with NTP, hardware timestamping can
significantly improve the accuracy of synchronization. For best accuracy, both NTP servers and NTP
clients need to use hardware timestamping. Under ideal conditions, a sub-microsecond accuracy may
be possible.
277
System Administrator's Guide
Another protocol for time synchronization that uses hardware timestamping is PTP. For further
information about PTP, see Chapter 18, Configuring PTP Using ptp4l. Unlike NTP, PTP relies on
assistance in network switches and routers. If you want to reach the best accuracy of synchronization,
use PTP on networks that have switches and routers with PTP support, and prefer NTP on networks
that do not have such switches and routers.
16.6.2. Verifying Support for Hardware Timestamping
To verify that hardware timestamping with NTP is supported by an interface, use the ethtool -T
command. An interface can be used for hardware timestamping with NTP if ethtool lists the
SOF_TIMESTAMPING_TX_HARDWARE and SOF_TIMESTAMPING_TX_SOFTWARE capabilities and also
the HWTSTAMP_FILTER_ALL filter mode.
Example 16.2. Verifying Support for Hardware Timestamping on a Specific Interface
~]# ethtool -T eth0
Output:
Timestamping parameters for eth0:
Capabilities:
hardware-transmit
(SOF_TIMESTAMPING_TX_HARDWARE)
software-transmit
(SOF_TIMESTAMPING_TX_SOFTWARE)
hardware-receive
(SOF_TIMESTAMPING_RX_HARDWARE)
software-receive
(SOF_TIMESTAMPING_RX_SOFTWARE)
software-system-clock (SOF_TIMESTAMPING_SOFTWARE)
hardware-raw-clock
(SOF_TIMESTAMPING_RAW_HARDWARE)
PTP Hardware Clock: 0
Hardware Transmit Timestamp Modes:
off
(HWTSTAMP_TX_OFF)
on
(HWTSTAMP_TX_ON)
Hardware Receive Filter Modes:
none
(HWTSTAMP_FILTER_NONE)
all
(HWTSTAMP_FILTER_ALL)
ptpv1-l4-sync
(HWTSTAMP_FILTER_PTP_V1_L4_SYNC)
ptpv1-l4-delay-req
(HWTSTAMP_FILTER_PTP_V1_L4_DELAY_REQ)
ptpv2-l4-sync
(HWTSTAMP_FILTER_PTP_V2_L4_SYNC)
ptpv2-l4-delay-req
(HWTSTAMP_FILTER_PTP_V2_L4_DELAY_REQ)
ptpv2-l2-sync
(HWTSTAMP_FILTER_PTP_V2_L2_SYNC)
ptpv2-l2-delay-req
(HWTSTAMP_FILTER_PTP_V2_L2_DELAY_REQ)
ptpv2-event
(HWTSTAMP_FILTER_PTP_V2_EVENT)
ptpv2-sync
(HWTSTAMP_FILTER_PTP_V2_SYNC)
ptpv2-delay-req
(HWTSTAMP_FILTER_PTP_V2_DELAY_REQ)
16.6.3. Enabling Hardware Timestamping
To enable hardware timestamping, use the hwtimestamp directive in the /etc/chrony.conf file.
The directive can either specify a single interface, or a wildcard character (*) can be used to enable
hardware timestamping on all interfaces that support it. Use the wildcard specification in case that no
other application, like ptp4l from the linuxptp package, is using hardware timestamping on an
interface. Multiple hwtimestamp directives are allowed in the chrony configuration file.
278
CHAPTER 16. CONFIGURING NTP USING THE CHRONY SUITE
Example 16.3. Enabling Hardware Timestamping by Using the hwtimestamp Directive
hwtimestamp eth0
hwtimestamp eth1
hwtimestamp *
16.6.4. Configuring Client Polling Interval
The default range of a polling interval (64-1024 seconds) is recommended for servers on the Internet.
For local servers and hardware timestamping, a shorter polling interval needs to be configured in order
to minimize offset of the system clock.
The following directive in /etc/chrony.conf specifies a local NTP server using one second polling
interval:
server ntp.local minpoll 0 maxpoll 0
16.6.5. Enabling Interleaved Mode
NTP servers that are not hardware NTP appliances, but rather general purpose computers running a
software NTP implementation, like chrony, will get a hardware transmit timestamp only after sending a
packet. This behavior prevents the server from saving the timestamp in the packet to which it
corresponds. In order to enable NTP clients receiving transmit timestamps that were generated after
the transmission, configure the clients to use the NTP interleaved mode by adding the xleave option
to the server directive in /etc/chrony.conf:
server ntp.local minpoll 0 maxpoll 0 xleave
16.6.6. Configuring Server for Large Number of Clients
The default server configuration allows a few thousands of clients at most to use the interleaved mode
concurrently. To configure the server for a larger number of clients, increase the clientloglimit
directive in /etc/chrony.conf. This directive specifies the maximum size of memory allocated for
logging of clients' access on the server:
clientloglimit 100000000
16.6.7. Verifying Hardware Timestamping
To verify that the interface has successfully enabled hardware timestamping, check the system log.
The log should contain a message from chronyd for each interface with successfully enabled hardware
timestamping.
Example 16.4. Log Messages for Interfaces with Enabled Hardware Timestamping
chronyd[4081]: Enabled HW timestamping on eth0
chronyd[4081]: Enabled HW timestamping on eth1
279
System Administrator's Guide
When chronyd is configured as an NTP client or peer, you can have the transmit and receive
timestamping modes and the interleaved mode reported for each NTP source by the chronyc
ntpdata command:
Example 16.5. Reporting the Transmit, Receive Timestamping and Interleaved Mode for Each
NTP Source
~]# chronyc ntpdata
Output:
Remote address :
Remote port
:
Local address
:
Leap status
:
Version
:
Mode
:
Stratum
:
Poll interval
:
Precision
:
Root delay
:
Root dispersion :
Reference ID
:
Reference time :
Offset
:
Peer delay
:
Peer dispersion :
Response time
:
Jitter asymmetry:
NTP tests
:
Interleaved
:
Authenticated
:
TX timestamping :
RX timestamping :
Total TX
:
Total RX
:
Total valid RX :
203.0.113.15 (CB00710F)
123
203.0.113.74 (CB00714A)
Normal
4
Server
1
0 (1 seconds)
-24 (0.000000060 seconds)
0.000015 seconds
0.000015 seconds
47505300 (GPS)
Wed May 03 13:47:45 2017
-0.000000134 seconds
0.000005396 seconds
0.000002329 seconds
0.000152073 seconds
+0.00
111 111 1111
Yes
No
Hardware
Hardware
27
27
27
Example 16.6. Reporting the Stability of NTP Measurements
# chronyc sourcestats
With hardware timestamping enabled, stability of NTP measurements should be in tens or hundreds
of nanoseconds, under normal load. This stability is reported in the Std Dev column of the output
of the chronyc sourcestats command:
Output:
210 Number of sources = 1
Name/IP Address
Std Dev
ntp.local
280
NP
NR
Span
Frequency
Freq Skew
12
7
11
+0.000
0.019
Offset
+0ns
CHAPTER 16. CONFIGURING NTP USING THE CHRONY SUITE
49ns
16.6.8. Configuring PTP-NTP bridge
If a highly accurate Precision Time Protocol (PTP) grandmaster is available in a network that does not
have switches or routers with PTP support, a computer may be dedicated to operate as a PTP slave
and a stratum-1 NTP server. Such a computer needs to have two or more network interfaces, and be
close to the grandmaster or have a direct connection to it. This will ensure highly accurate
synchronization in the network.
Configure the ptp4l and phc2sys programs from the linuxptp packages to use one interface to
synchronize the system clock using PTP. The configuration is described in the Chapter 18, Configuring
PTP Using ptp4l. Configure chronyd to provide the system time using the other interface:
Example 16.7. Configuring chronyd to Provide the System Time Using the Other Interface
bindaddress 203.0.113.74
hwtimestamp eth1
local stratum 1
16.7. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
The following sources of information provide additional resources regarding chrony.
16.7.1. Installed Documentation
chronyc(1) man page — Describes the chronyc command-line interface tool including
commands and command options.
chronyd(8) man page — Describes the chronyd daemon including commands and command
options.
chrony.conf(5) man page — Describes the chrony configuration file.
16.7.2. Online Documentation
http://chrony.tuxfamily.org/doc/3.1/chronyc.html
http://chrony.tuxfamily.org/doc/3.1/chronyd.html
http://chrony.tuxfamily.org/doc/3.1/chrony.conf.html
For answers to FAQs, see http://chrony.tuxfamily.org/faq.html
281
System Administrator's Guide
CHAPTER 17. CONFIGURING NTP USING NTPD
17.1. INTRODUCTION TO NTP
The Network Time Protocol (NTP) enables the accurate dissemination of time and date information in
order to keep the time clocks on networked computer systems synchronized to a common reference
over the network or the Internet. Many standards bodies around the world have atomic clocks which
may be made available as a reference. The satellites that make up the Global Position System contain
more than one atomic clock, making their time signals potentially very accurate. Their signals can be
deliberately degraded for military reasons. An ideal situation would be where each site has a server,
with its own reference clock attached, to act as a site-wide time server. Many devices which obtain the
time and date via low frequency radio transmissions or the Global Position System (GPS) exist.
However for most situations, a range of publicly accessible time servers connected to the Internet at
geographically dispersed locations can be used. These NTP servers provide “Coordinated Universal
Time” (UTC). Information about these time servers can found at www.pool.ntp.org.
Accurate time keeping is important for a number of reasons in IT. In networking for example, accurate
time stamps in packets and logs are required. Logs are used to investigate service and security issues
and so time stamps made on different systems must be made by synchronized clocks to be of real
value. As systems and networks become increasingly faster, there is a corresponding need for clocks
with greater accuracy and resolution. In some countries there are legal obligations to keep accurately
synchronized clocks. Please see www.ntp.org for more information. In Linux systems, NTP is
implemented by a daemon running in user space. The default NTP user space daemon in Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 7 is chronyd. It must be disabled if you want to use the ntpd daemon. See
Chapter 16, Configuring NTP Using the chrony Suitefor information on chrony.
The user space daemon updates the system clock, which is a software clock running in the kernel.
Linux uses a software clock as its system clock for better resolution than the typical embedded
hardware clock referred to as the “Real Time Clock” (RTC). See the rtc(4) and hwclock(8) man
pages for information on hardware clocks. The system clock can keep time by using various clock
sources. Usually, the Time Stamp Counter (TSC) is used. The TSC is a CPU register which counts the
number of cycles since it was last reset. It is very fast, has a high resolution, and there are no
interrupts. On system start, the system clock reads the time and date from the RTC. The time kept by
the RTC will drift away from actual time by up to 5 minutes per month due to temperature variations.
Hence the need for the system clock to be constantly synchronized with external time references.
When the system clock is being synchronized by ntpd, the kernel will in turn update the RTC every 11
minutes automatically.
17.2. NTP STRATA
NTP servers are classified according to their synchronization distance from the atomic clocks which
are the source of the time signals. The servers are thought of as being arranged in layers, or strata,
from 1 at the top down to 15. Hence the word stratum is used when referring to a specific layer. Atomic
clocks are referred to as Stratum 0 as this is the source, but no Stratum 0 packet is sent on the
Internet, all stratum 0 atomic clocks are attached to a server which is referred to as stratum 1. These
servers send out packets marked as Stratum 1. A server which is synchronized by means of packets
marked stratum n belongs to the next, lower, stratum and will mark its packets as stratum n+1.
Servers of the same stratum can exchange packets with each other but are still designated as
belonging to just the one stratum, the stratum one below the best reference they are synchronized to.
The designation Stratum 16 is used to indicate that the server is not currently synchronized to a
reliable time source.
Note that by default NTP clients act as servers for those systems in the stratum below them.
282
CHAPTER 17. CONFIGURING NTP USING NTPD
Here is a summary of the NTP Strata:
Stratum 0:
Atomic Clocks and their signals broadcast over Radio and GPS
GPS (Global Positioning System)
Mobile Phone Systems
Low Frequency Radio Broadcasts WWVB (Colorado, USA.), JJY-40 and JJY-60 (Japan),
DCF77 (Germany), and MSF (United Kingdom)
These signals can be received by dedicated devices and are usually connected by RS-232 to a
system used as an organizational or site-wide time server.
Stratum 1:
Computer with radio clock, GPS clock, or atomic clock attached
Stratum 2:
Reads from stratum 1; Serves to lower strata
Stratum 3:
Reads from stratum 2; Serves to lower strata
Stratum n+1:
Reads from stratum n; Serves to lower strata
Stratum 15:
Reads from stratum 14; This is the lowest stratum.
This process continues down to Stratum 15 which is the lowest valid stratum. The label Stratum 16 is
used to indicated an unsynchronized state.
17.3. UNDERSTANDING NTP
The version of NTP used by Red Hat Enterprise Linux is as described in RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol
(Version 3) Specification, Implementation and Analysis and RFC 5905 Network Time Protocol Version 4:
Protocol and Algorithms Specification
This implementation of NTP enables sub-second accuracy to be achieved. Over the Internet, accuracy
to 10s of milliseconds is normal. On a Local Area Network (LAN), 1 ms accuracy is possible under ideal
conditions. This is because clock drift is now accounted and corrected for, which was not done in
earlier, simpler, time protocol systems. A resolution of 233 picoseconds is provided by using 64-bit
time stamps. The first 32-bits of the time stamp is used for seconds, the last 32-bits are used for
fractions of seconds.
NTP represents the time as a count of the number of seconds since 00:00 (midnight) 1 January, 1900
GMT. As 32-bits is used to count the seconds, this means the time will “roll over” in 2036. However
NTP works on the difference between time stamps so this does not present the same level of problem
as other implementations of time protocols have done. If a hardware clock that is within 68 years of the
correct time is available at boot time then NTP will correctly interpret the current date. The NTP4
283
System Administrator's Guide
specification provides for an “Era Number” and an “Era Offset” which can be used to make software
more robust when dealing with time lengths of more than 68 years. Note, please do not confuse this
with the Unix Year 2038 problem.
The NTP protocol provides additional information to improve accuracy. Four time stamps are used to
allow the calculation of round-trip time and server response time. In order for a system in its role as
NTP client to synchronize with a reference time server, a packet is sent with an “originate time stamp ”.
When the packet arrives, the time server adds a “receive time stamp ”. After processing the request for
time and date information and just before returning the packet, it adds a “transmit time stamp”. When
the returning packet arrives at the NTP client, a “receive time stamp ” is generated. The client can now
calculate the total round trip time and by subtracting the processing time derive the actual traveling
time. By assuming the outgoing and return trips take equal time, the single-trip delay in receiving the
NTP data is calculated. The full NTP algorithm is much more complex than presented here.
When a packet containing time information is received it is not immediately responded to, but is first
subject to validation checks and then processed together with several other time samples to arrive at
an estimate of the time. This is then compared to the system clock to determine the time offset, the
difference between the system clock's time and what ntpd has determined the time should be. The
system clock is adjusted slowly, at most at a rate of 0.5 ms per second, to reduce this offset by
changing the frequency of the counter being used. It will take at least 2000 seconds to adjust the
clock by 1 second using this method. This slow change is referred to as slewing and cannot go
backwards. If the time offset of the clock is more than 128 ms (the default setting), ntpd can “step” the
clock forwards or backwards. If the time offset at system start is greater than 1000 seconds then the
user, or an installation script, should make a manual adjustment. See Chapter 2, Configuring the Date
and Time. With the -g option to the ntpd command (used by default), any offset at system start will be
corrected, but during normal operation only offsets of up to 1000 seconds will be corrected.
Some software may fail or produce an error if the time is changed backwards. For systems that are
sensitive to step changes in the time, the threshold can be changed to 600 s instead of 128 ms using
the -x option (unrelated to the -g option). Using the -x option to increase the stepping limit from
0.128 s to 600 s has a drawback because a different method of controlling the clock has to be used. It
disables the kernel clock discipline and may have a negative impact on the clock accuracy. The -x
option can be added to the /etc/sysconfig/ntpd configuration file.
17.4. UNDERSTANDING THE DRIFT FILE
The drift file is used to store the frequency offset between the system clock running at its nominal
frequency and the frequency required to remain in synchronization with UTC. If present, the value
contained in the drift file is read at system start and used to correct the clock source. Use of the drift
file reduces the time required to achieve a stable and accurate time. The value is calculated, and the
drift file replaced, once per hour by ntpd. The drift file is replaced, rather than just updated, and for
this reason the drift file must be in a directory for which the ntpd has write permissions.
17.5. UTC, TIMEZONES, AND DST
As NTP is entirely in UTC (Universal Time, Coordinated), Timezones and DST (Daylight Saving Time)
are applied locally by the system. The file /etc/localtime is a copy of, or symlink to, a zone
information file from /usr/share/zoneinfo. The RTC may be in localtime or in UTC, as specified by
the 3rd line of /etc/adjtime, which will be one of LOCAL or UTC to indicate how the RTC clock has
been set. Users can easily change this setting using the checkbox System Clock Uses UTC in the
Date and Time graphical configuration tool. See Chapter 2, Configuring the Date and Timefor
information on how to use that tool. Running the RTC in UTC is recommended to avoid various
problems when daylight saving time is changed.
284
CHAPTER 17. CONFIGURING NTP USING NTPD
The operation of ntpd is explained in more detail in the man page ntpd(8). The resources section
lists useful sources of information. See Section 17.20, “Additional Resources”.
17.6. AUTHENTICATION OPTIONS FOR NTP
NTPv4 NTPv4 added support for the Autokey Security Architecture, which is based on public
asymmetric cryptography while retaining support for symmetric key cryptography. The Autokey
protocol is described in RFC 5906 Network Time Protocol Version 4: Autokey Specification. Unfortunately,
it was found later that the protocol has serious security issues, and thus Red Hat strongly recommends
to use symmetric keys instead. The man page ntp_auth(5) describes the authentication options and
commands for ntpd.
An attacker on the network can attempt to disrupt a service by sending NTP packets with incorrect
time information. On systems using the public pool of NTP servers, this risk is mitigated by having more
than three NTP servers in the list of public NTP servers in /etc/ntp.conf. If only one time source is
compromised or spoofed, ntpd will ignore that source. You should conduct a risk assessment and
consider the impact of incorrect time on your applications and organization. If you have internal time
sources you should consider steps to protect the network over which the NTP packets are distributed.
If you conduct a risk assessment and conclude that the risk is acceptable, and the impact to your
applications minimal, then you can choose not to use authentication.
The broadcast and multicast modes require authentication by default. If you have decided to trust the
network then you can disable authentication by using disable auth directive in the ntp.conf file.
Alternatively, authentication needs to be configured by using SHA1 or MD5 symmetric keys, or by
public (asymmetric) key cryptography using the Autokey scheme. The Autokey scheme for
asymmetric cryptography is explained in the ntp_auth(8) man page and the generation of keys is
explained in ntp-keygen(8). To implement symmetric key cryptography, see Section 17.17.12,
“Configuring Symmetric Authentication Using a Key” for an explanation of the key option.
17.7. MANAGING THE TIME ON VIRTUAL MACHINES
Virtual machines cannot access a real hardware clock and a virtual clock is not stable enough as the
stability is dependent on the host systems work load. For this reason, para-virtualized clocks should be
provided by the virtualization application in use. On Red Hat Enterprise Linux with KVM the default
clock source is kvm-clock. See the KVM guest timing management chapter of the Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 7 Virtualization Deployment and Administration Guide.
17.8. UNDERSTANDING LEAP SECONDS
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) was derived by measuring the solar day, which is dependent on the
Earth's rotation. When atomic clocks were first made, the potential for more accurate definitions of
time became possible. In 1958, International Atomic Time (TAI) was introduced based on the more
accurate and very stable atomic clocks. A more accurate astronomical time, Universal Time 1 (UT1),
was also introduced to replace GMT. The atomic clocks are in fact far more stable than the rotation of
the Earth and so the two times began to drift apart. For this reason UTC was introduced as a practical
measure. It is kept within one second of UT1 but to avoid making many small trivial adjustments it was
decided to introduce the concept of a leap second in order to reconcile the difference in a manageable
way. The difference between UT1 and UTC is monitored until they drift apart by more than half a
second. Then only is it deemed necessary to introduce a one second adjustment, forward or backward.
Due to the erratic nature of the Earth's rotational speed, the need for an adjustment cannot be
predicted far into the future. The decision as to when to make an adjustment is made by the
International Earth Rotation and Reference Systems Service (IERS). However, these announcements are
important only to administrators of Stratum 1 servers because NTP transmits information about
pending leap seconds and applies them automatically.
285
System Administrator's Guide
17.9. UNDERSTANDING THE NTPD CONFIGURATION FILE
The daemon, ntpd, reads the configuration file at system start or when the service is restarted. The
default location for the file is /etc/ntp.conf and you can view the file by entering the following
command:
~]$ less /etc/ntp.conf
The configuration commands are explained briefly later in this chapter, see Section 17.17, “Configure
NTP”, and more verbosely in the ntp.conf(5) man page.
Here follows a brief explanation of the contents of the default configuration file:
The driftfile entry
A path to the drift file is specified, the default entry on Red Hat Enterprise Linux is:
driftfile /var/lib/ntp/drift
If you change this be certain that the directory is writable by ntpd. The file contains one value used
to adjust the system clock frequency after every system or service start. See Understanding the
Drift File for more information.
The access control entries
The following line sets the default access control restriction:
restrict default nomodify notrap nopeer noquery
The nomodify options prevents any changes to the configuration.
The notrap option prevents ntpdc control message protocol traps.
The nopeer option prevents a peer association being formed.
The noquery option prevents ntpq and ntpdc queries, but not time queries, from being
answered.
IMPORTANT
The ntpq and ntpdc queries can be used in amplification attacks, therefore do not
remove the noquery option from the restrict default command on publicly
accessible systems.
See CVE-2013-5211 for more details.
Addresses within the range 127.0.0.0/8 are sometimes required by various processes or
applications. As the "restrict default" line above prevents access to everything not explicitly
allowed, access to the standard loopback address for IPv4 and IPv6 is permitted by means of the
following lines:
# the administrative functions.
restrict 127.0.0.1
restrict ::1
286
CHAPTER 17. CONFIGURING NTP USING NTPD
Addresses can be added underneath if specifically required by another application.
Hosts on the local network are not permitted because of the "restrict default" line above. To change
this, for example to allow hosts from the 192.0.2.0/24 network to query the time and statistics
but nothing more, a line in the following format is required:
restrict 192.0.2.0 mask 255.255.255.0 nomodify notrap nopeer
To allow unrestricted access from a specific host, for example 192.0.2.250/32, a line in the
following format is required:
restrict 192.0.2.250
A mask of 255.255.255.255 is applied if none is specified.
The restrict commands are explained in the ntp_acc(5) man page.
The public servers entry
By default, the ntp.conf file contains four public server entries:
server
server
server
server
0.rhel.pool.ntp.org
1.rhel.pool.ntp.org
2.rhel.pool.ntp.org
3.rhel.pool.ntp.org
iburst
iburst
iburst
iburst
The broadcast multicast servers entry
By default, the ntp.conf file contains some commented out examples. These are largely self
explanatory. See Section 17.17, “Configure NTP” for the explanation of the specific commands. If
required, add your commands just below the examples.
NOTE
When the DHCP client program, dhclient, receives a list of NTP servers from the DHCP
server, it adds them to ntp.conf and restarts the service. To disable that feature, add
PEERNTP=no to /etc/sysconfig/network.
17.10. UNDERSTANDING THE NTPD SYSCONFIG FILE
The file will be read by the ntpd init script on service start. The default contents is as follows:
# Command line options for ntpd
OPTIONS="-g"
The -g option enables ntpd to ignore the offset limit of 1000 s and attempt to synchronize the time
even if the offset is larger than 1000 s, but only on system start. Without that option ntpd will exit if the
time offset is greater than 1000 s. It will also exit after system start if the service is restarted and the
offset is greater than 1000 s even with the -g option.
17.11. DISABLING CHRONY
287
System Administrator's Guide
In order to use ntpd the default user space daemon, chronyd, must be stopped and disabled. Issue the
following command as root:
~]# systemctl stop chronyd
To prevent it restarting at system start, issue the following command as root:
~]# systemctl disable chronyd
To check the status of chronyd, issue the following command:
~]$ systemctl status chronyd
17.12. CHECKING IF THE NTP DAEMON IS INSTALLED
To check if ntpd is installed, enter the following command as root:
~]# yum install ntp
NTP is implemented by means of the daemon or service ntpd, which is contained within the ntp
package.
17.13. INSTALLING THE NTP DAEMON (NTPD)
To install ntpd, enter the following command as root:
~]# yum install ntp
To enable ntpd at system start, enter the following command as root:
~]# systemctl enable ntpd
17.14. CHECKING THE STATUS OF NTP
To check if ntpd is running and configured to run at system start, issue the following command:
~]$ systemctl status ntpd
To obtain a brief status report from ntpd, issue the following command:
~]$ ntpstat
unsynchronised
time server re-starting
polling server every 64 s
~]$ ntpstat
synchronised to NTP server (10.5.26.10) at stratum 2
time correct to within 52 ms
polling server every 1024 s
288
CHAPTER 17. CONFIGURING NTP USING NTPD
17.15. CONFIGURE THE FIREWALL TO ALLOW INCOMING NTP PACKETS
The NTP traffic consists of UDP packets on port 123 and needs to be permitted through network and
host-based firewalls in order for NTP to function.
Check if the firewall is configured to allow incoming NTP traffic for clients using the graphical Firewall
Configuration tool.
To start the graphical firewall-config tool, press the Super key to enter the Activities Overview, type
firewall and then press Enter. The Firewall Configuration window opens. You will be
prompted for your user password.
To start the graphical firewall configuration tool using the command line, enter the following command
as root user:
~]# firewall-config
The Firewall Configuration window opens. Note, this command can be run as normal user but
you will then be prompted for the root password from time to time.
Look for the word “Connected” in the lower left corner. This indicates that the firewall-config tool is
connected to the user space daemon, firewalld.
17.15.1. Change the Firewall Settings
To immediately change the current firewall settings, ensure the drop-down selection menu labeled
Configuration is set to Runtime. Alternatively, to edit the settings to be applied at the next system
start, or firewall reload, select Permanent from the drop-down list.
NOTE
When making changes to the firewall settings in Runtime mode, your selection takes
immediate effect when you set or clear the check box associated with the service. You
should keep this in mind when working on a system that may be in use by other users.
When making changes to the firewall settings in Permanent mode, your selection will
only take effect when you reload the firewall or the system restarts. To reload the
firewall, select the Options menu and select Reload Firewall.
17.15.2. Open Ports in the Firewall for NTP Packets
To permit traffic through the firewall to a certain port, start the firewall-config tool and select the
network zone whose settings you want to change. Select the Ports tab and then click the Add button.
The Port and Protocol window opens.
Enter the port number 123 and select udp from the drop-down list.
17.16. CONFIGURE NTPDATE SERVERS
The purpose of the ntpdate service is to set the clock during system boot. This was used previously to
ensure that the services started after ntpdate would have the correct time and not observe a jump in
the clock. The use of ntpdate and the list of step-tickers is considered deprecated and so Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 7 uses the -g option to the ntpd command and not ntpdate by default.
289
System Administrator's Guide
The ntpdate service in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 is mostly useful only when used alone without
ntpd. With systemd, which starts services in parallel, enabling the ntpdate service will not ensure
that other services started after it will have correct time unless they specify an ordering dependency
on time-sync.target, which is provided by the ntpdate service. In order to ensure a service starts
with correct time, add After=time-sync.target to the service and enable one of the services
which provide the target (ntpdate or sntp). Some services on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 have the
dependency included by default ( for example, dhcpd, dhcpd6, and crond).
To check if the ntpdate service is enabled to run at system start, issue the following command:
~]$ systemctl status ntpdate
To enable the service to run at system start, issue the following command as root:
~]# systemctl enable ntpdate
In Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 the default /etc/ntp/step-tickers file contains
0.rhel.pool.ntp.org. To configure additional ntpdate servers, using a text editor running as
root, edit /etc/ntp/step-tickers. The number of servers listed is not very important as ntpdate
will only use this to obtain the date information once when the system is starting. If you have an
internal time server then use that host name for the first line. An additional host on the second line as a
backup is sensible. The selection of backup servers and whether the second host is internal or external
depends on your risk assessment. For example, what is the chance of any problem affecting the first
server also affecting the second server? Would connectivity to an external server be more likely to be
available than connectivity to internal servers in the event of a network failure disrupting access to the
first server?
17.17. CONFIGURE NTP
To change the default configuration of the NTP service, use a text editor running as root user to edit
the /etc/ntp.conf file. This file is installed together with ntpd and is configured to use time servers
from the Red Hat pool by default. The man page ntp.conf(5) describes the command options that
can be used in the configuration file apart from the access and rate limiting commands which are
explained in the ntp_acc(5) man page.
17.17.1. Configure Access Control to an NTP Service
To restrict or control access to the NTP service running on a system, make use of the restrict
command in the ntp.conf file. See the commented out example:
# Hosts on local network are less restricted.
#restrict 192.168.1.0 mask 255.255.255.0 nomodify notrap
The restrict command takes the following form:
restrict option
where option is one or more of:
ignore — All packets will be ignored, including ntpq and ntpdc queries.
kod — a “Kiss-o'-death” packet is to be sent to reduce unwanted queries.
290
CHAPTER 17. CONFIGURING NTP USING NTPD
limited — do not respond to time service requests if the packet violates the rate limit default
values or those specified by the discard command. ntpq and ntpdc queries are not affected.
For more information on the discard command and the default values, see Section 17.17.2,
“Configure Rate Limiting Access to an NTP Service”.
lowpriotrap — traps set by matching hosts to be low priority.
nomodify — prevents any changes to the configuration.
noquery — prevents ntpq and ntpdc queries, but not time queries, from being answered.
nopeer — prevents a peer association being formed.
noserve — deny all packets except ntpq and ntpdc queries.
notrap — prevents ntpdc control message protocol traps.
notrust — deny packets that are not cryptographically authenticated.
ntpport — modify the match algorithm to only apply the restriction if the source port is the
standard NTP UDP port 123.
version — deny packets that do not match the current NTP version.
To configure rate limit access to not respond at all to a query, the respective restrict command has
to have the limited option. If ntpd should reply with a KoD packet, the restrict command needs to
have both limited and kod options.
The ntpq and ntpdc queries can be used in amplification attacks (see CVE-2013-5211 for more details),
do not remove the noquery option from the restrict default command on publicly accessible
systems.
17.17.2. Configure Rate Limiting Access to an NTP Service
To enable rate limiting access to the NTP service running on a system, add the limited option to the
restrict command as explained in Section 17.17.1, “Configure Access Control to an NTP Service” . If
you do not want to use the default discard parameters, then also use the discard command as
explained here.
The discard command takes the following form:
discard [average value] [minimum value] [monitor value]
average — specifies the minimum average packet spacing to be permitted, it accepts an
argument in log2 seconds. The default value is 3 ( 23 equates to 8 seconds).
minimum — specifies the minimum packet spacing to be permitted, it accepts an argument in
log2 seconds. The default value is 1 ( 21 equates to 2 seconds).
monitor — specifies the discard probability for packets once the permitted rate limits have
been exceeded. The default value is 3000 seconds. This option is intended for servers that
receive 1000 or more requests per second.
Examples of the discard command are as follows:
291
System Administrator's Guide
discard average 4
discard average 4 minimum 2
17.17.3. Adding a Peer Address
To add the address of a peer, that is to say, the address of a server running an NTP service of the same
stratum, make use of the peer command in the ntp.conf file.
The peer command takes the following form:
peer address
where address is an IP unicast address or a DNS resolvable name. The address must only be that of a
system known to be a member of the same stratum. Peers should have at least one time source that is
different to each other. Peers are normally systems under the same administrative control.
17.17.4. Adding a Server Address
To add the address of a server, that is to say, the address of a server running an NTP service of a higher
stratum, make use of the server command in the ntp.conf file.
The server command takes the following form:
server address
where address is an IP unicast address or a DNS resolvable name. The address of a remote reference
server or local reference clock from which packets are to be received.
17.17.5. Adding a Broadcast or Multicast Server Address
To add a broadcast or multicast address for sending, that is to say, the address to broadcast or
multicast NTP packets to, make use of the broadcast command in the ntp.conf file.
The broadcast and multicast modes require authentication by default. See Section 17.6,
“Authentication Options for NTP”.
The broadcast command takes the following form:
broadcast address
where address is an IP broadcast or multicast address to which packets are sent.
This command configures a system to act as an NTP broadcast server. The address used must be a
broadcast or a multicast address. Broadcast address implies the IPv4 address 255.255.255.255. By
default, routers do not pass broadcast messages. The multicast address can be an IPv4 Class D
address, or an IPv6 address. The IANA has assigned IPv4 multicast address 224.0.1.1 and IPv6
address FF05::101 (site local) to NTP. Administratively scoped IPv4 multicast addresses can also be
used, as described in RFC 2365 Administratively Scoped IP Multicast.
17.17.6. Adding a Manycast Client Address
292
CHAPTER 17. CONFIGURING NTP USING NTPD
To add a manycast client address, that is to say, to configure a multicast address to be used for NTP
server discovery, make use of the manycastclient command in the ntp.conf file.
The manycastclient command takes the following form:
manycastclient address
where address is an IP multicast address from which packets are to be received. The client will send a
request to the address and select the best servers from the responses and ignore other servers. NTP
communication then uses unicast associations, as if the discovered NTP servers were listed in
ntp.conf.
This command configures a system to act as an NTP client. Systems can be both client and server at
the same time.
17.17.7. Adding a Broadcast Client Address
To add a broadcast client address, that is to say, to configure a broadcast address to be monitored for
broadcast NTP packets, make use of the broadcastclient command in the ntp.conf file.
The broadcastclient command takes the following form:
broadcastclient
Enables the receiving of broadcast messages. Requires authentication by default. See Section 17.6,
“Authentication Options for NTP”.
This command configures a system to act as an NTP client. Systems can be both client and server at
the same time.
17.17.8. Adding a Manycast Server Address
To add a manycast server address, that is to say, to configure an address to allow the clients to
discover the server by multicasting NTP packets, make use of the manycastserver command in the
ntp.conf file.
The manycastserver command takes the following form:
manycastserver address
Enables the sending of multicast messages. Where address is the address to multicast to. This should
be used together with authentication to prevent service disruption.
This command configures a system to act as an NTP server. Systems can be both client and server at
the same time.
17.17.9. Adding a Multicast Client Address
To add a multicast client address, that is to say, to configure a multicast address to be monitored for
multicast NTP packets, make use of the multicastclient command in the ntp.conf file.
The multicastclient command takes the following form:
293
System Administrator's Guide
multicastclient address
Enables the receiving of multicast messages. Where address is the address to subscribe to. This should
be used together with authentication to prevent service disruption.
This command configures a system to act as an NTP client. Systems can be both client and server at
the same time.
17.17.10. Configuring the Burst Option
Using the burst option against a public server is considered abuse. Do not use this option with public
NTP servers. Use it only for applications within your own organization.
To increase the average quality of time offset statistics, add the following option to the end of a server
command:
burst
At every poll interval, when the server responds, the system will send a burst of up to eight packets
instead of the usual one packet. For use with the server command to improve the average quality of
the time-offset calculations.
17.17.11. Configuring the iburst Option
To improve the time taken for initial synchronization, add the following option to the end of a server
command:
iburst
When the server is unreachable, send a burst of eight packets instead of the usual one packet. The
packet spacing is normally 2 s; however, the spacing between the first and second packets can be
changed with the calldelay command to allow additional time for a modem or ISDN call to complete.
For use with the server command to reduce the time taken for initial synchronization. This is now a
default option in the configuration file.
17.17.12. Configuring Symmetric Authentication Using a Key
To configure symmetric authentication using a key, add the following option to the end of a server or
peer command:
key number
where number is in the range 1 to 65534 inclusive. This option enables the use of a message
authentication code (MAC) in packets. This option is for use with the peer, server, broadcast, and
manycastclient commands.
The option can be used in the /etc/ntp.conf file as follows:
server 192.168.1.1 key 10
broadcast 192.168.1.255 key 20
manycastclient 239.255.254.254 key 30
294
CHAPTER 17. CONFIGURING NTP USING NTPD
See also Section 17.6, “Authentication Options for NTP” .
17.17.13. Configuring the Poll Interval
To change the default poll interval, add the following options to the end of a server or peer command:
minpoll value and maxpoll value
Options to change the default poll interval, where the interval in seconds will be calculated by raising 2
to the power of value, in other words, the interval is expressed in log2 seconds. The default minpoll
value is 6, 26 equates to 64 s. The default value for maxpoll is 10, which equates to 1024 s. Allowed
values are in the range 3 to 17 inclusive, which equates to 8 s to 36.4 h respectively. These options are
for use with the peer or server. Setting a shorter maxpoll may improve clock accuracy.
17.17.14. Configuring Server Preference
To specify that a particular server should be preferred above others of similar statistical quality, add
the following option to the end of a server or peer command:
prefer
Use this server for synchronization in preference to other servers of similar statistical quality. This
option is for use with the peer or server commands.
17.17.15. Configuring the Time-to-Live for NTP Packets
To specify that a particular time-to-live (TTL) value should be used in place of the default, add the
following option to the end of a server or peer command:
ttl value
Specify the time-to-live value to be used in packets sent by broadcast servers and multicast NTP
servers. Specify the maximum time-to-live value to use for the “expanding ring search” by a manycast
client. The default value is 127.
17.17.16. Configuring the NTP Version to Use
To specify that a particular version of NTP should be used in place of the default, add the following
option to the end of a server or peer command:
version value
Specify the version of NTP set in created NTP packets. The value can be in the range 1 to 4. The default
is 4.
17.18. CONFIGURING THE HARDWARE CLOCK UPDATE
The system clock can be used to update the hardware clock, also known as the real-time clock (RTC).
This section shows three approaches to the task:
Instant one-time update
295
System Administrator's Guide
To perform an instant one-time update of the hardware clock, run this command as root:
~]# hwclock --systohc
Update on every boot
To make the hardware clock update on every boot after executing the ntpdate synchronization
utility, do the following:
1. Add the following line to the /etc/sysconfig/ntpdate file:
SYNC_HWCLOCK=yes
2. Enable the ntpdate service as root:
~]# systemctl enable ntpdate.service
Note that the ntpdate service uses the NTP servers defined in the /etc/ntp/step-tickers file.
NOTE
On virtual machines, the hardware clock will be updated on the next boot of the host
machine, not of the virtual machine.
Update via NTP
You can make the hardware clock update every time the system clock is updated by the ntpd or
chronyd service:
Start the ntpd service as root:
~]# systemctl start ntpd.service
To make the behavior persistent across boots, make the service start automatically at the boot
time:
~]# systemctl enable ntpd.service
or
Start the chronyd service as root:
~]# systemctl start chronyd.service
To make the behavior persistent across boots, make the service start automatically at the boot
time:
~]# systemctl enable chronyd.service
As a result, every time the system clock is synchronized by ntpd or chronyd, the kernel
automatically updates the hardware clock in 11 minutes.
296
CHAPTER 17. CONFIGURING NTP USING NTPD
WARNING
This approach might not always work because the above mentioned 11-minute
mode is not always enabled. As a consequence, the hardware clock does not
necessarily get updated on the system clock update.
To check the synchronization of the software clock with the hardware clock, use the ntpdc -c
kerninfo or the ntptime command as root:
~]# ntpdc -c kerninfo
The result may look like this:
pll offset:
pll frequency:
maximum error:
estimated error:
status: 2001 pll nano
pll time constant:
precision:
frequency tolerance:
0 s
0.000 ppm
8.0185 s
0 s
6
1e-09 s
500 ppm
or
~]# ntptime
The result may look like this:
ntp_gettime() returns code 0 (OK)
time dcba5798.c3dfe2e0 Mon, May 8 2017 11:34:00.765, (.765135199),
maximum error 8010000 us, estimated error 0 us, TAI offset 0
ntp_adjtime() returns code 0 (OK)
modes 0x0 (),
offset 0.000 us, frequency 0.000 ppm, interval 1 s,
maximum error 8010000 us, estimated error 0 us,
status 0x2001 (PLL,NANO),
time constant 6, precision 0.001 us, tolerance 500 ppm,
To recognize whether the software clock is synchronized with the hardware clock, see the status
line in the output (highlighted).
If the third digit from the end is 4, the software clock is not synchronized with the hardware clock.
status 0x2401
297
System Administrator's Guide
If the second digit of the last four digits is not 4, the software clock is synchronized with the
hardware clock.
status 0x2001
17.19. CONFIGURING CLOCK SOURCES
To list the available clock sources on your system, issue the following commands:
~]$ cd /sys/devices/system/clocksource/clocksource0/
clocksource0]$ cat available_clocksource
kvm-clock tsc hpet acpi_pm
clocksource0]$ cat current_clocksource
kvm-clock
In the above example, the kernel is using kvm-clock. This was selected at boot time as this is a virtual
machine. Note that the available clock source is architecture dependent.
To override the default clock source, append the clocksource directive to the end of the kernel's
GRUB menu entry. Use the grubby tool to make the change. For example, to force the default kernel
on a system to use the tsc clock source, enter a command as follows:
~]# grubby --args=clocksource=tsc --update-kernel=DEFAULT
The --update-kernel parameter also accepts the keyword ALL, or a comma separated list of kernel
index numbers.
See Chapter 25, Working with GRUB 2 for more information on making changes to the GRUB menu.
17.20. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
The following sources of information provide additional resources regarding NTP and ntpd.
17.20.1. Installed Documentation
ntpd(8) man page — Describes ntpd in detail, including the command-line options.
ntp.conf(5) man page — Contains information on how to configure associations with servers
and peers.
ntpq(8) man page — Describes the NTP query utility for monitoring and querying an NTP
server.
ntpdc(8) man page — Describes the ntpd utility for querying and changing the state of ntpd.
ntp_auth(5) man page — Describes authentication options, commands, and key
management for ntpd.
ntp_keygen(8) man page — Describes generating public and private keys for ntpd.
ntp_acc(5) man page — Describes access control options using the restrict command.
298
CHAPTER 17. CONFIGURING NTP USING NTPD
ntp_mon(5) man page — Describes monitoring options for the gathering of statistics.
ntp_clock(5) man page — Describes commands for configuring reference clocks.
ntp_misc(5) man page — Describes miscellaneous options.
ntp_decode(5) man page — Lists the status words, event messages and error codes used for
ntpd reporting and monitoring.
ntpstat(8) man page — Describes a utility for reporting the synchronization state of the NTP
daemon running on the local machine.
ntptime(8) man page — Describes a utility for reading and setting kernel time variables.
tickadj(8) man page — Describes a utility for reading, and optionally setting, the length of
the tick.
17.20.2. Useful Websites
http://doc.ntp.org/
The NTP Documentation Archive
http://www.eecis.udel.edu/~mills/ntp.html
Network Time Synchronization Research Project.
http://www.eecis.udel.edu/~mills/ntp/html/manyopt.html
Information on Automatic Server Discovery in NTPv4.
299
System Administrator's Guide
CHAPTER 18. CONFIGURING PTP USING PTP4L
18.1. INTRODUCTION TO PTP
The Precision Time Protocol (PTP) is a protocol used to synchronize clocks in a network. When used in
conjunction with hardware support, PTP is capable of sub-microsecond accuracy, which is far better
than is normally obtainable with NTP. PTP support is divided between the kernel and user space. The
kernel in Red Hat Enterprise Linux includes support for PTP clocks, which are provided by network
drivers. The actual implementation of the protocol is known as linuxptp, a PTPv2 implementation
according to the IEEE standard 1588 for Linux.
The linuxptp package includes the ptp4l and phc2sys programs for clock synchronization. The ptp4l
program implements the PTP boundary clock and ordinary clock. With hardware time stamping, it is
used to synchronize the PTP hardware clock to the master clock, and with software time stamping it
synchronizes the system clock to the master clock. The phc2sys program is needed only with
hardware time stamping, for synchronizing the system clock to the PTP hardware clock on the network
interface card (NIC).
18.1.1. Understanding PTP
The clocks synchronized by PTP are organized in a master-slave hierarchy. The slaves are
synchronized to their masters which may be slaves to their own masters. The hierarchy is created and
updated automatically by the best master clock (BMC) algorithm, which runs on every clock. When a
clock has only one port, it can be master or slave, such a clock is called an ordinary clock (OC). A clock
with multiple ports can be master on one port and slave on another, such a clock is called a boundary
clock (BC). The top-level master is called the grandmaster clock, which can be synchronized by using a
Global Positioning System (GPS) time source. By using a GPS-based time source, disparate networks
can be synchronized with a high-degree of accuracy.
300
CHAPTER 18. CONFIGURING PTP USING PTP4L
Figure 18.1. PTP grandmaster, boundary, and slave Clocks
18.1.2. Advantages of PTP
One of the main advantages that PTP has over the Network Time Protocol (NTP) is hardware support
present in various network interface controllers (NIC) and network switches. This specialized hardware
allows PTP to account for delays in message transfer, and greatly improves the accuracy of time
synchronization. While it is possible to use non-PTP enabled hardware components within the network,
this will often cause an increase in jitter or introduce an asymmetry in the delay resulting in
synchronization inaccuracies, which add up with multiple non-PTP aware components used in the
communication path. To achieve the best possible accuracy, it is recommended that all networking
components between PTP clocks are PTP hardware enabled. Time synchronization in larger networks
where not all of the networking hardware supports PTP might be better suited for NTP.
With hardware PTP support, the NIC has its own on-board clock, which is used to time stamp the
received and transmitted PTP messages. It is this on-board clock that is synchronized to the PTP
master, and the computer's system clock is synchronized to the PTP hardware clock on the NIC. With
software PTP support, the system clock is used to time stamp the PTP messages and it is synchronized
to the PTP master directly. Hardware PTP support provides better accuracy since the NIC can time
stamp the PTP packets at the exact moment they are sent and received while software PTP support
301
System Administrator's Guide
requires additional processing of the PTP packets by the operating system.
18.2. USING PTP
In order to use PTP, the kernel network driver for the intended interface has to support either software
or hardware time stamping capabilities.
18.2.1. Checking for Driver and Hardware Support
In addition to hardware time stamping support being present in the driver, the NIC must also be
capable of supporting this functionality in the physical hardware. The best way to verify the time
stamping capabilities of a particular driver and NIC is to use the ethtool utility to query the interface as
follows:
~]# ethtool -T eth3
Time stamping parameters for eth3:
Capabilities:
hardware-transmit
(SOF_TIMESTAMPING_TX_HARDWARE)
software-transmit
(SOF_TIMESTAMPING_TX_SOFTWARE)
hardware-receive
(SOF_TIMESTAMPING_RX_HARDWARE)
software-receive
(SOF_TIMESTAMPING_RX_SOFTWARE)
software-system-clock (SOF_TIMESTAMPING_SOFTWARE)
hardware-raw-clock
(SOF_TIMESTAMPING_RAW_HARDWARE)
PTP Hardware Clock: 0
Hardware Transmit Timestamp Modes:
off
(HWTSTAMP_TX_OFF)
on
(HWTSTAMP_TX_ON)
Hardware Receive Filter Modes:
none
(HWTSTAMP_FILTER_NONE)
all
(HWTSTAMP_FILTER_ALL)
Where eth3 is the interface you want to check.
For software time stamping support, the parameters list should include:
SOF_TIMESTAMPING_SOFTWARE
SOF_TIMESTAMPING_TX_SOFTWARE
SOF_TIMESTAMPING_RX_SOFTWARE
For hardware time stamping support, the parameters list should include:
SOF_TIMESTAMPING_RAW_HARDWARE
SOF_TIMESTAMPING_TX_HARDWARE
SOF_TIMESTAMPING_RX_HARDWARE
18.2.2. Installing PTP
The kernel in Red Hat Enterprise Linux includes support for PTP. User space support is provided by the
tools in the linuxptp package. To install linuxptp, issue the following command as root:
~]# yum install linuxptp
302
CHAPTER 18. CONFIGURING PTP USING PTP4L
This will install ptp4l and phc2sys.
Do not run more than one service to set the system clock's time at the same time. If you intend to
serve PTP time using NTP, see Section 18.8, “Serving PTP Time with NTP” .
18.2.3. Starting ptp4l
The ptp4l program can be started from the command line or it can be started as a service. When
running as a service, options are specified in the /etc/sysconfig/ptp4l file. Options required for
use both by the service and on the command line should be specified in the /etc/ptp4l.conf file.
The /etc/sysconfig/ptp4l file includes the -f /etc/ptp4l.conf command line option, which
causes the ptp4l program to read the /etc/ptp4l.conf file and process the options it contains.
The use of the /etc/ptp4l.conf is explained in Section 18.4, “Specifying a Configuration File” . More
information on the different ptp4l options and the configuration file settings can be found in the
ptp4l(8) man page.
Starting ptp4l as a Service
To start ptp4l as a service, issue the following command as root:
~]# systemctl start ptp4l
For more information on managing system services in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7, see Chapter 9,
Managing Services with systemd.
Using ptp4l From The Command Line
The ptp4l program tries to use hardware time stamping by default. To use ptp4l with hardware time
stamping capable drivers and NICs, you must provide the network interface to use with the -i option.
Enter the following command as root:
~]# ptp4l -i eth3 -m
Where eth3 is the interface you want to configure. Below is example output from ptp4l when the PTP
clock on the NIC is synchronized to a master:
~]# ptp4l -i eth3 -m
selected eth3 as PTP clock
port 1: INITIALIZING to LISTENING on INITIALIZE
port 0: INITIALIZING to LISTENING on INITIALIZE
port 1: new foreign master 00a069.fffe.0b552d-1
selected best master clock 00a069.fffe.0b552d
port 1: LISTENING to UNCALIBRATED on RS_SLAVE
master offset -23947 s0 freq +0 path delay
11350
master offset -28867 s0 freq +0 path delay
11236
master offset -32801 s0 freq +0 path delay
10841
master offset -37203 s1 freq +0 path delay
10583
master offset -7275 s2 freq -30575 path delay
10583
port 1: UNCALIBRATED to SLAVE on MASTER_CLOCK_SELECTED
master offset -4552 s2 freq -30035 path delay
10385
The master offset value is the measured offset from the master in nanoseconds. The s0, s1, s2 strings
indicate the different clock servo states: s0 is unlocked, s1 is clock step and s2 is locked. Once the
servo is in the locked state (s2), the clock will not be stepped (only slowly adjusted) unless the
pi_offset_const option is set to a positive value in the configuration file (described in the
303
System Administrator's Guide
ptp4l(8) man page). The adj value is the frequency adjustment of the clock in parts per billion (ppb).
The path delay value is the estimated delay of the synchronization messages sent from the master in
nanoseconds. Port 0 is a Unix domain socket used for local PTP management. Port 1 is the eth3
interface (based on the example above.) INITIALIZING, LISTENING, UNCALIBRATED and SLAVE are
some of possible port states which change on the INITIALIZE, RS_SLAVE, MASTER_CLOCK_SELECTED
events. In the last state change message, the port state changed from UNCALIBRATED to SLAVE
indicating successful synchronization with a PTP master clock.
Logging Messages From ptp4l
By default, messages are sent to /var/log/messages. However, specifying the -m option enables
logging to standard output which can be useful for debugging purposes.
To enable software time stamping, the -S option needs to be used as follows:
~]# ptp4l -i eth3 -m -S
18.2.3.1. Selecting a Delay Measurement Mechanism
There are two different delay measurement mechanisms and they can be selected by means of an
option added to the ptp4l command as follows:
-P
The -P selects the peer-to-peer (P2P) delay measurement mechanism.
The P2P mechanism is preferred as it reacts to changes in the network topology faster, and may be
more accurate in measuring the delay, than other mechanisms. The P2P mechanism can only be
used in topologies where each port exchanges PTP messages with at most one other P2P port. It
must be supported and used by all hardware, including transparent clocks, on the communication
path.
-E
The -E selects the end-to-end (E2E) delay measurement mechanism. This is the default.
The E2E mechanism is also referred to as the delay “request-response” mechanism.
-A
The -A enables automatic selection of the delay measurement mechanism.
The automatic option starts ptp4l in E2E mode. It will change to P2P mode if a peer delay request
is received.
NOTE
All clocks on a single PTP communication path must use the same mechanism to
measure the delay. Warnings will be printed in the following circumstances:
When a peer delay request is received on a port using the E2E mechanism.
When a E2E delay request is received on a port using the P2P mechanism.
18.3. USING PTP WITH MULTIPLE INTERFACES
304
CHAPTER 18. CONFIGURING PTP USING PTP4L
When using PTP with multiple interfaces in different networks, it is necessary to change the reverse
path forwarding mode to loose mode. Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 defaults to using Strict Reverse Path
Forwarding following the Strict Reverse Path recommendation from RFC 3704, Ingress Filtering for
Multihomed Networks. See the Reverse Path Forwarding section in the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7
Security Guide for more details.
The sysctl utility is used to read and write values to the kernel. Changes to a running system can be
made using sysctl commands directly on the command line and permanent changes can be made by
adding lines to the /etc/sysctl.conf file.
To change to loose mode filtering globally, enter the following commands as root:
~]# sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.default.rp_filter=2
sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.all.rp_filter=2
To change the reverse path filtering mode per network interface, use the
net.ipv4.interface.rp_filter command on all PTP interfaces. For example, for an
interface with device name em1:
~]# sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.em1.rp_filter=2
To make these settings persistent across reboots, modify the /etc/sysctl.conf file. For example,
to change the mode for all interfaces, open the /etc/sysctl.conf file with an editor running as the
root user and add a line as follows:
net.ipv4.conf.all.rp_filter=2
To change only certain interfaces, enter multiple lines in the following format:
net.ipv4.conf.interface.rp_filter=2
18.4. SPECIFYING A CONFIGURATION FILE
The command line options and other options, which cannot be set on the command line, can be set in
an optional configuration file.
No configuration file is read by default, so it needs to be specified at runtime with the -f option. For
example:
~]# ptp4l -f /etc/ptp4l.conf
A configuration file equivalent to the -i eth3 -m -S options shown above would look as follows:
~]# cat /etc/ptp4l.conf
[global]
verbose
1
time_stamping
software
[eth3]
18.5. USING THE PTP MANAGEMENT CLIENT
The PTP management client, pmc, can be used to obtain additional information from ptp4l as follows:
305
System Administrator's Guide
~]# pmc -u -b 0 'GET CURRENT_DATA_SET'
sending: GET CURRENT_DATA_SET
90e2ba.fffe.20c7f8-0 seq 0 RESPONSE MANAGMENT CURRENT_DATA_SET
stepsRemoved
1
offsetFromMaster -142.0
meanPathDelay
9310.0
~]# pmc -u -b 0 'GET TIME_STATUS_NP'
sending: GET TIME_STATUS_NP
90e2ba.fffe.20c7f8-0 seq 0 RESPONSE MANAGMENT TIME_STATUS_NP
master_offset
310
ingress_time
1361545089345029441
cumulativeScaledRateOffset
+1.000000000
scaledLastGmPhaseChange
0
gmTimeBaseIndicator
0
lastGmPhaseChange
0x0000'0000000000000000.0000
gmPresent
true
gmIdentity
00a069.fffe.0b552d
Setting the -b option to zero limits the boundary to the locally running ptp4l instance. A larger
boundary value will retrieve the information also from PTP nodes further from the local clock. The
retrievable information includes:
stepsRemoved is the number of communication paths to the grandmaster clock.
offsetFromMaster and master_offset is the last measured offset of the clock from the
master in nanoseconds.
meanPathDelay is the estimated delay of the synchronization messages sent from the master
in nanoseconds.
if gmPresent is true, the PTP clock is synchronized to a master, the local clock is not the
grandmaster clock.
gmIdentity is the grandmaster's identity.
For a full list of pmc commands, type the following as root:
~]# pmc help
Additional information is available in the pmc(8) man page.
18.6. SYNCHRONIZING THE CLOCKS
The phc2sys program is used to synchronize the system clock to the PTP hardware clock ( PHC) on the
NIC. The phc2sys service is configured in the /etc/sysconfig/phc2sys configuration file. The
default setting in the /etc/sysconfig/phc2sys file is as follows:
OPTIONS="-a -r"
The -a option causes phc2sys to read the clocks to be synchronized from the ptp4l application. It will
follow changes in the PTP port states, adjusting the synchronization between the NIC hardware clocks
accordingly. The system clock is not synchronized, unless the -r option is also specified. If you want
306
CHAPTER 18. CONFIGURING PTP USING PTP4L
the system clock to be eligible to become a time source, specify the -r option twice.
After making changes to /etc/sysconfig/phc2sys, restart the phc2sys service from the command
line by issuing a command as root:
~]# systemctl restart phc2sys
Under normal circumstances, use systemctl commands to start, stop, and restart the phc2sys
service.
When you do not want to start phc2sys as a service, you can start it from the command line. For
example, enter the following command as root:
~]# phc2sys -a -r
The -a option causes phc2sys to read the clocks to be synchronized from the ptp4l application. If you
want the system clock to be eligible to become a time source, specify the -r option twice.
Alternately, use the -s option to synchronize the system clock to a specific interface's PTP hardware
clock. For example:
~]# phc2sys -s eth3 -w
The -w option waits for the running ptp4l application to synchronize the PTP clock and then retrieves
the TAI to UTC offset from ptp4l.
Normally, PTP operates in the International Atomic Time (TAI) timescale, while the system clock is kept
in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The current offset between the TAI and UTC timescales is 36
seconds. The offset changes when leap seconds are inserted or deleted, which typically happens every
few years. The -O option needs to be used to set this offset manually when the -w is not used, as
follows:
~]# phc2sys -s eth3 -O -36
Once the phc2sys servo is in a locked state, the clock will not be stepped, unless the -S option is used.
This means that the phc2sys program should be started after the ptp4l program has synchronized the
PTP hardware clock. However, with -w, it is not necessary to start phc2sys after ptp4l as it will wait for
it to synchronize the clock.
The phc2sys program can also be started as a service by running:
~]# systemctl start phc2sys
When running as a service, options are specified in the /etc/sysconfig/phc2sys file. More
information on the different phc2sys options can be found in the phc2sys(8) man page.
Note that the examples in this section assume the command is run on a slave system or slave port.
18.7. VERIFYING TIME SYNCHRONIZATION
When PTP time synchronization is working correctly, new messages with offsets and frequency
adjustments are printed periodically to the ptp4l and phc2sys outputs if hardware time stamping is
used. The output values converge shortly. You can see these messages in the /var/log/messages
307
System Administrator's Guide
file.
The following examples of the ptp4l and the phc2sys output contain:
offset (in nanoseconds)
frequency offset (in parts per billion (ppb))
path delay (in nanoseconds)
Example of the ptp4l output:
ptp4l[352.359]:
ptp4l[352.361]:
ptp4l[352.361]:
ptp4l[353.210]:
ptp4l[357.214]:
ptp4l[357.214]:
ptp4l[359.224]:
9202
ptp4l[360.224]:
9202
ptp4l[361.224]:
9202
ptp4l[361.224]:
ptp4l[362.223]:
9202
ptp4l[363.223]:
8972
ptp4l[364.223]:
9153
ptp4l[365.223]:
9153
ptp4l[366.223]:
9169
ptp4l[367.222]:
9169
ptp4l[368.223]:
9170
ptp4l[369.235]:
9196
ptp4l[370.235]:
9238
ptp4l[371.235]:
9199
ptp4l[372.235]:
9204
selected /dev/ptp0 as PTP clock
port 1: INITIALIZING to LISTENING on INITIALIZE
port 0: INITIALIZING to LISTENING on INITIALIZE
port 1: new foreign master 00a069.fffe.0b552d-1
selected best master clock 00a069.fffe.0b552d
port 1: LISTENING to UNCALIBRATED on RS_SLAVE
master offset
3304 s0 freq
+0 path delay
master offset
3708 s1 freq
-29492 path delay
master offset
-3145 s2 freq
-32637 path delay
port 1: UNCALIBRATED to SLAVE on MASTER_CLOCK_SELECTED
master offset
-145 s2 freq -30580 path delay
master offset
1043 s2 freq
-29436 path delay
master offset
266 s2 freq
-29900 path delay
master offset
430 s2 freq
-29656 path delay
master offset
615 s2 freq
-29342 path delay
master offset
-191 s2 freq
-29964 path delay
master offset
466 s2 freq
-29364 path delay
master offset
24 s2 freq
-29666 path delay
master offset
-375 s2 freq
-30058 path delay
master offset
285 s2 freq
-29511 path delay
master offset
-78 s2 freq
-29788 path delay
Example of the phc2sys output:
phc2sys[526.527]:
phc2sys[527.528]:
phc2sys[528.528]:
phc2sys[529.528]:
phc2sys[530.528]:
phc2sys[531.528]:
308
Waiting for ptp4l...
Waiting for ptp4l...
phc offset
55341 s0 freq
phc offset
54658 s1 freq
phc offset
888 s2 freq
phc offset
1156 s2 freq
+0
-37690
-36802
-36268
delay
delay
delay
delay
2729
2725
2756
2766
CHAPTER 18. CONFIGURING PTP USING PTP4L
phc2sys[532.528]:
phc2sys[533.528]:
phc2sys[534.528]:
phc2sys[535.529]:
phc2sys[536.529]:
phc2sys[537.529]:
phc2sys[538.529]:
phc2sys[539.529]:
phc2sys[540.529]:
phc2sys[541.529]:
phc2sys[542.529]:
phc2sys[543.529]:
phc2sys[544.530]:
phc2sys[545.530]:
phc2sys[546.530]:
phc
phc
phc
phc
phc
phc
phc
phc
phc
phc
phc
phc
phc
phc
phc
offset
offset
offset
offset
offset
offset
offset
offset
offset
offset
offset
offset
offset
offset
offset
411
-73
39
95
-359
-257
119
288
-149
-352
166
50
-31
-333
194
s2
s2
s2
s2
s2
s2
s2
s2
s2
s2
s2
s2
s2
s2
s2
freq
freq
freq
freq
freq
freq
freq
freq
freq
freq
freq
freq
freq
freq
freq
-36666
-37026
-36936
-36869
-37294
-37300
-37001
-36796
-37147
-37395
-36982
-37048
-37114
-37426
-36999
delay
delay
delay
delay
delay
delay
delay
delay
delay
delay
delay
delay
delay
delay
delay
2738
2764
2746
2733
2738
2753
2745
2766
2760
2771
2748
2756
2748
2747
2749
To reduce the ptp4l output and print only the values, use the summary_interval directive. The
summary_interval directive is specified as 2 to the power of n in seconds. For example, to reduce
the output to every 1024 seconds, add the following line to the /etc/ptp4l.conf file:
summary_interval 10
An example of the ptp4l output, with summary_interval set to 6:
ptp4l:
ptp4l:
ptp4l:
ptp4l:
ptp4l:
ptp4l:
ptp4l:
ptp4l:
ptp4l:
ptp4l:
ptp4l:
ptp4l:
ptp4l:
ptp4l:
ptp4l:
ptp4l:
[615.253] selected /dev/ptp0 as PTP clock
[615.255] port 1: INITIALIZING to LISTENING on INITIALIZE
[615.255] port 0: INITIALIZING to LISTENING on INITIALIZE
[615.564] port 1: new foreign master 00a069.fffe.0b552d-1
[619.574] selected best master clock 00a069.fffe.0b552d
[619.574] port 1: LISTENING to UNCALIBRATED on RS_SLAVE
[623.573] port 1: UNCALIBRATED to SLAVE on MASTER_CLOCK_SELECTED
[684.649] rms 669 max 3691 freq -29383 ± 3735 delay 9232 ± 122
[748.724] rms 253 max 588 freq -29787 ± 221 delay 9219 ± 158
[812.793] rms 287 max 673 freq -29802 ± 248 delay 9211 ± 183
[876.853] rms 226 max 534 freq -29795 ± 197 delay 9221 ± 138
[940.925] rms 250 max 562 freq -29801 ± 218 delay 9199 ± 148
[1004.988] rms 226 max 525 freq -29802 ± 196 delay 9228 ± 143
[1069.065] rms 300 max 646 freq -29802 ± 259 delay 9214 ± 176
[1133.125] rms 226 max 505 freq -29792 ± 197 delay 9225 ± 159
[1197.185] rms 244 max 688 freq -29790 ± 211 delay 9201 ± 162
By default, summary_interval is set to 0, so messages are printed once per second, which is the
maximum frequency. The messages are logged at the LOG_INFO level. To disable messages, use the l option to set the maximum log level to 5 or lower:
~]# phc2sys -l 5
You can use the -u option to reduce the phc2sys output:
~]# phc2sys -u summary-updates
Where summary-updates is the number of clock updates to include in summary statistics. An example
follows:
309
System Administrator's Guide
~]# phc2sys -s eth3 -w -m -u 60
phc2sys[700.948]: rms 1837 max 10123 freq -36474 ± 4752 delay 2752 ± 16
phc2sys[760.954]: rms 194 max 457 freq -37084 ± 174 delay 2753 ± 12
phc2sys[820.963]: rms 211 max 487 freq -37085 ± 185 delay 2750 ± 19
phc2sys[880.968]: rms 183 max 440 freq -37102 ± 164 delay 2734 ± 91
phc2sys[940.973]: rms 244 max 584 freq -37095 ± 216 delay 2748 ± 16
phc2sys[1000.979]: rms 220 max 573 freq -36666 ± 182 delay 2747 ± 43
phc2sys[1060.984]: rms 266 max 675 freq -36759 ± 234 delay 2753 ± 17
When used with these options, the interval for updating the statistics is set to 60 seconds (-u),
phc2sys waits until ptp4l is in synchronized state ( -w), and messages are printed to the standard
output (-m). For further details about the phc2sys options, see the phc2sys(5) man page.
The output includes:
offset root mean square (rms)
maximum absolute offset (max)
frequency offset (freq): its mean, and standard deviation
path delay (delay): its mean, and standard deviation
18.8. SERVING PTP TIME WITH NTP
The ntpd daemon can be configured to distribute the time from the system clock synchronized by
ptp4l or phc2sys by using the LOCAL reference clock driver. To prevent ntpd from adjusting the
system clock, the ntp.conf file must not specify any NTP servers. The following is a minimal example
of ntp.conf:
~]# cat /etc/ntp.conf
server
127.127.1.0
fudge
127.127.1.0 stratum 0
NOTE
When the DHCP client program, dhclient, receives a list of NTP servers from the DHCP
server, it adds them to ntp.conf and restarts the service. To disable that feature, add
PEERNTP=no to /etc/sysconfig/network.
18.9. SERVING NTP TIME WITH PTP
NTP to PTP synchronization in the opposite direction is also possible. When ntpd is used to
synchronize the system clock, ptp4l can be configured with the priority1 option (or other clock
options included in the best master clock algorithm) to be the grandmaster clock and distribute the
time from the system clock via PTP:
~]# cat /etc/ptp4l.conf
[global]
priority1 127
[eth3]
# ptp4l -f /etc/ptp4l.conf
310
CHAPTER 18. CONFIGURING PTP USING PTP4L
With hardware time stamping, phc2sys needs to be used to synchronize the PTP hardware clock to the
system clock. If running phc2sys as a service, edit the /etc/sysconfig/phc2sys configuration file.
The default setting in the /etc/sysconfig/phc2sys file is as follows:
OPTIONS="-a -r"
As root, edit that line as follows:
~]# vi /etc/sysconfig/phc2sys
OPTIONS="-a -r -r"
The -r option is used twice here to allow synchronization of the PTP hardware clock on the NIC from
the system clock. Restart the phc2sys service for the changes to take effect:
~]# systemctl restart phc2sys
To prevent quick changes in the PTP clock's frequency, the synchronization to the system clock can be
loosened by using smaller P (proportional) and I (integral) constants for the PI servo:
~]# phc2sys -a -r -r -P 0.01 -I 0.0001
18.10. SYNCHRONIZE TO PTP OR NTP TIME USING TIMEMASTER
When there are multiple PTP domains available on the network, or fallback to NTP is needed, the
timemaster program can be used to synchronize the system clock to all available time sources. The
PTP time is provided by phc2sys and ptp4l via shared memory driver (SHM reference clocks to
chronyd or ntpd (depending on the NTP daemon that has been configured on the system). The NTP
daemon can then compare all time sources, both PTP and NTP, and use the best sources to
synchronize the system clock.
On start, timemaster reads a configuration file that specifies the NTP and PTP time sources, checks
which network interfaces have their own or share a PTP hardware clock (PHC), generates
configuration files for ptp4l and chronyd or ntpd, and starts the ptp4l, phc2sys, and chronyd or
ntpd processes as needed. It will remove the generated configuration files on exit. It writes
configuration files for chronyd, ntpd, and ptp4l to /var/run/timemaster/.
18.10.1. Starting timemaster as a Service
To start timemaster as a service, issue the following command as root:
~]# systemctl start timemaster
This will read the options in /etc/timemaster.conf. For more information on managing system
services in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7, see Chapter 9, Managing Services with systemd.
18.10.2. Understanding the timemaster Configuration File
Red Hat Enterprise Linux provides a default /etc/timemaster.conf file with a number of sections
containing default options. The section headings are enclosed in brackets.
To view the default configuration, issue a command as follows:
311
System Administrator's Guide
~]$ less /etc/timemaster.conf
# Configuration file for timemaster
#[ntp_server ntp-server.local]
#minpoll 4
#maxpoll 4
#[ptp_domain 0]
#interfaces eth0
[timemaster]
ntp_program chronyd
[chrony.conf]
include /etc/chrony.conf
[ntp.conf]
includefile /etc/ntp.conf
[ptp4l.conf]
[chronyd]
path /usr/sbin/chronyd
options -u chrony
[ntpd]
path /usr/sbin/ntpd
options -u ntp:ntp -g
[phc2sys]
path /usr/sbin/phc2sys
[ptp4l]
path /usr/sbin/ptp4l
Notice the section named as follows:
[ntp_server address]
This is an example of an NTP server section, “ntp-server.local” is an example of a host name for an NTP
server on the local LAN. Add more sections as required using a host name or IP address as part of the
section name. Note that the short polling values in that example section are not suitable for a public
server, see Chapter 17, Configuring NTP Using ntpd for an explanation of suitable minpoll and
maxpoll values.
Notice the section named as follows:
[ptp_domain number]
A “PTP domain ” is a group of one or more PTP clocks that synchronize to each other. They may or may
not be synchronized to clocks in another domain. Clocks that are configured with the same domain
number make up the domain. This includes a PTP grandmaster clock. The domain number in each “PTP
domain” section needs to correspond to one of the PTP domains configured on the network.
An instance of ptp4l is started for every interface which has its own PTP clock and hardware time
312
CHAPTER 18. CONFIGURING PTP USING PTP4L
stamping is enabled automatically. Interfaces that support hardware time stamping have a PTP clock
(PHC) attached, however it is possible for a group of interfaces on a NIC to share a PHC. A separate
ptp4l instance will be started for each group of interfaces sharing the same PHC and for each interface
that supports only software time stamping. All ptp4l instances are configured to run as a slave. If an
interface with hardware time stamping is specified in more than one PTP domain, then only the first
ptp4l instance created will have hardware time stamping enabled.
Notice the section named as follows:
[timemaster]
The default timemaster configuration includes the system ntpd and chrony configuration
(/etc/ntp.conf or /etc/chronyd.conf) in order to include the configuration of access
restrictions and authentication keys. That means any NTP servers specified there will be used with
timemaster too.
The section headings are as follows:
[ntp_server ntp-server.local] — Specify polling intervals for this server. Create
additional sections as required. Include the host name or IP address in the section heading.
[ptp_domain 0] — Specify interfaces that have PTP clocks configured for this domain.
Create additional sections with, the appropriate domain number, as required.
[timemaster] — Specify the NTP daemon to be used. Possible values are chronyd and ntpd.
[chrony.conf] — Specify any additional settings to be copied to the configuration file
generated for chronyd.
[ntp.conf] — Specify any additional settings to be copied to the configuration file generated
for ntpd.
[ptp4l.conf] — Specify options to be copied to the configuration file generated for ptp4l.
[chronyd] — Specify any additional settings to be passed on the command line to chronyd.
[ntpd] — Specify any additional settings to be passed on the command line to ntpd.
[phc2sys] — Specify any additional settings to be passed on the command line to phc2sys.
[ptp4l] — Specify any additional settings to be passed on the command line to all instances of
ptp4l.
The section headings and there contents are explained in detail in the timemaster(8) manual page.
18.10.3. Configuring timemaster Options
Procedure 18.1. Editing the timemaster Configuration File
1. To change the default configuration, open the /etc/timemaster.conf file for editing as
root:
~]# vi /etc/timemaster.conf
313
System Administrator's Guide
2. For each NTP server you want to control using timemaster, create [ntp_server address]
sections . Note that the short polling values in the example section are not suitable for a public
server, see Chapter 17, Configuring NTP Using ntpd for an explanation of suitable minpoll and
maxpoll values.
3. To add interfaces that should be used in a domain, edit the #[ptp_domain 0] section and
add the interfaces. Create additional domains as required. For example:
[ptp_domain 0]
interfaces eth0
[ptp_domain 1]
interfaces eth1
4. If required to use ntpd as the NTP daemon on this system, change the default entry in the
[timemaster] section from chronyd to ntpd. See Chapter 16, Configuring NTP Using the
chrony Suite for information on the differences between ntpd and chronyd.
5. If using chronyd as the NTP server on this system, add any additional options below the
default include /etc/chrony.conf entry in the [chrony.conf] section. Edit the default
include entry if the path to /etc/chrony.conf is known to have changed.
6. If using ntpd as the NTP server on this system, add any additional options below the default
include /etc/ntp.conf entry in the [ntp.conf] section. Edit the default include entry
if the path to /etc/ntp.conf is known to have changed.
7. In the [ptp4l.conf] section, add any options to be copied to the configuration file generated
for ptp4l. This chapter documents common options and more information is available in the
ptp4l(8) manual page.
8. In the [chronyd] section, add any command line options to be passed to chronyd when
called by timemaster. See Chapter 16, Configuring NTP Using the chrony Suitefor information
on using chronyd.
9. In the [ntpd] section, add any command line options to be passed to ntpd when called by
timemaster. See Chapter 17, Configuring NTP Using ntpd for information on using ntpd.
10. In the [phc2sys] section, add any command line options to be passed to phc2sys when called
by timemaster. This chapter documents common options and more information is available in
the phy2sys(8) manual page.
11. In the [ptp4l] section, add any command line options to be passed to ptp4l when called by
timemaster. This chapter documents common options and more information is available in the
ptp4l(8) manual page.
12. Save the configuration file and restart timemaster by issuing the following command as root:
~]# systemctl restart timemaster
18.11. IMPROVING ACCURACY
Previously, test results indicated that disabling the tickless kernel capability could significantly
improve the stability of the system clock, and thus improve the PTP synchronization accuracy (at the
cost of increased power consumption). The kernel tickless mode can be disabled by adding nohz=off
314
CHAPTER 18. CONFIGURING PTP USING PTP4L
to the kernel boot option parameters. However, recent improvements applied to kernel-3.10.0197.el7 have greatly improved the stability of the system clock and the difference in stability of the
clock with and without nohz=off should be much smaller now for most users.
The ptp4l and phc2sys applications can be configured to use a new adaptive servo. The advantage
over the PI servo is that it does not require configuration of the PI constants to perform well. To make
use of this for ptp4l, add the following line to the /etc/ptp4l.conf file:
clock_servo linreg
After making changes to /etc/ptp4l.conf, restart the ptp4l service from the command line by
issuing the following command as root:
~]# systemctl restart ptp4l
To make use of this for phc2sys, add the following line to the /etc/sysconfig/phc2sys file:
-E linreg
After making changes to /etc/sysconfig/phc2sys, restart the phc2sys service from the command
line by issuing the following command as root:
~]# systemctl restart phc2sys
18.12. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
The following sources of information provide additional resources regarding PTP and the ptp4l tools.
18.12.1. Installed Documentation
ptp4l(8) man page — Describes ptp4l options including the format of the configuration file.
pmc(8) man page — Describes the PTP management client and its command options.
phc2sys(8) man page — Describes a tool for synchronizing the system clock to a PTP
hardware clock (PHC).
timemaster(8) man page — Describes a program that uses ptp4l and phc2sys to
synchronize the system clock using chronyd or ntpd.
18.12.2. Useful Websites
http://www.nist.gov/el/isd/ieee/ieee1588.cfm
The IEEE 1588 Standard.
315
System Administrator's Guide
PART VI. MONITORING AND AUTOMATION
This part describes various tools that allow system administrators to monitor system performance,
automate system tasks, and report bugs.
316
CHAPTER 19. SYSTEM MONITORING TOOLS
CHAPTER 19. SYSTEM MONITORING TOOLS
In order to configure the system, system administrators often need to determine the amount of free
memory, how much free disk space is available, how the hard drive is partitioned, or what processes
are running.
19.1. VIEWING SYSTEM PROCESSES
19.1.1. Using the ps Command
The ps command allows you to display information about running processes. It produces a static list,
that is, a snapshot of what is running when you execute the command. If you want a constantly updated
list of running processes, use the top command or the System Monitor application instead.
To list all processes that are currently running on the system including processes owned by other
users, type the following at a shell prompt:
ps ax
For each listed process, the ps ax command displays the process ID ( PID), the terminal that is
associated with it (TTY), the current status ( STAT), the cumulated CPU time ( TIME), and the name of
the executable file (COMMAND). For example:
~]$ ps ax
PID TTY
STAT
1 ?
Ss
--deserialize 23
2 ?
S
3 ?
S
5 ?
S>
[output truncated]
TIME COMMAND
0:01 /usr/lib/systemd/systemd --switched-root --system
0:00 [kthreadd]
0:00 [ksoftirqd/0]
0:00 [kworker/0:0H]
To display the owner alongside each process, use the following command:
ps aux
Apart from the information provided by the ps ax command, ps aux displays the effective user name
of the process owner (USER), the percentage of the CPU ( %CPU) and memory ( %MEM) usage, the virtual
memory size in kilobytes (VSZ), the non-swapped physical memory size in kilobytes ( RSS), and the
time or date the process was started. For example:
~]$ ps aux
USER PID %CPU %MEM
VSZ
RSS TTY
STAT START
TIME
root
1 0.3 0.3 134776 6840 ?
Ss
09:28
0:01
/usr/lib/systemd/systemd --switched-root --system --d
root
2 0.0 0.0
0
0 ?
S
09:28
0:00
root
3 0.0 0.0
0
0 ?
S
09:28
0:00
root
5 0.0 0.0
0
0 ?
S>
09:28
0:00
[output truncated]
COMMAND
[kthreadd]
[ksoftirqd/0]
[kworker/0:0H]
You can also use the ps command in a combination with grep to see if a particular process is running.
For example, to determine if Emacs is running, type:
317
System Administrator's Guide
~]$ ps ax | grep emacs
12056 pts/3
S+
0:00 emacs
12060 pts/2
S+
0:00 grep --color=auto emacs
For a complete list of available command line options, see the ps(1) manual page.
19.1.2. Using the top Command
The top command displays a real-time list of processes that are running on the system. It also displays
additional information about the system uptime, current CPU and memory usage, or total number of
running processes, and allows you to perform actions such as sorting the list or killing a process.
To run the top command, type the following at a shell prompt:
top
For each listed process, the top command displays the process ID ( PID), the effective user name of the
process owner (USER), the priority (PR), the nice value ( NI), the amount of virtual memory the process
uses (VIRT), the amount of non-swapped physical memory the process uses ( RES), the amount of
shared memory the process uses (SHR), the process status field S), the percentage of the CPU ( %CPU)
and memory (%MEM) usage, the cumulated CPU time ( TIME+), and the name of the executable file
(COMMAND). For example:
~]$ top
top - 16:42:12 up 13 min, 2 users, load average: 0.67, 0.31, 0.19
Tasks: 165 total,
2 running, 163 sleeping,
0 stopped,
0 zombie
%Cpu(s): 37.5 us, 3.0 sy, 0.0 ni, 59.5 id, 0.0 wa, 0.0 hi, 0.0 si,
0.0 st
KiB Mem : 1016800 total,
77368 free,
728936 used,
210496
buff/cache
KiB Swap:
839676 total,
776796 free,
62880 used.
122628 avail Mem
PID USER
COMMAND
3168 sjw
shell
4006 sjw
1683 root
4125 sjw
terminal10 root
rcu_sched
3091 sjw
daemon
3096 sjw
spi2-registr
3925 root
kworker/0:0
1 root
systemd
2 root
kthreadd
3 root
ksoftirqd/0
318
PR
NI
VIRT
RES
SHR S %CPU %MEM
TIME+
20
0 1454628 143240
15016 S 20.3 14.1
0:22.53 gnome-
20
20
20
0 1367832 298876
0 242204 50464
0 555148 19820
27856 S 13.0 29.4
4268 S 6.0 5.0
12644 S 1.3 1.9
0:15.58 firefox
0:07.76 Xorg
0:00.48 gnome-
20
0
0
0
0 S
0.3
0.0
0:00.39
20
0
37000
1468
904 S
0.3
0.1
0:00.31 dbus-
20
0
129688
2164
1492 S
0.3
0.2
0:00.14 at-
20
0
0
0
0 S
0.3
0.0
0:00.05
20
0
126568
3884
1052 S
0.0
0.4
0:01.61
20
0
0
0
0 S
0.0
0.0
0:00.00
20
0
0
0
0 S
0.0
0.0
0:00.00
CHAPTER 19. SYSTEM MONITORING TOOLS
6 root
20
kworker/u2:0
[output truncated]
0
0
0
0 S
0.0
0.0
0:00.07
Table 19.1, “Interactive top commands” contains useful interactive commands that you can use with
top. For more information, see the top(1) manual page.
Table 19.1. Interactive top commands
Command
Description
Enter, Space
Immediately refreshes the display.
h
Displays a help screen for interactive commands.
h, ?
Displays a help screen for windows and field groups.
k
Kills a process. You are prompted for the process ID and the signal to send to it.
n
Changes the number of displayed processes. You are prompted to enter the
number.
u
Sorts the list by user.
M
Sorts the list by memory usage.
P
Sorts the list by CPU usage.
q
Terminates the utility and returns to the shell prompt.
19.1.3. Using the System Monitor Tool
The Processes tab of the System Monitor tool allows you to view, search for, change the priority of,
and kill processes from the graphical user interface.
To start the System Monitor tool from the command line, type gnome-system-monitor at a shell
prompt. The System Monitor tool appears. Alternatively, if using the GNOME desktop, press the
Super key to enter the Activities Overview, type System Monitor and then press Enter. The
System Monitor tool appears. The Super key appears in a variety of guises, depending on the
keyboard and other hardware, but often as either the Windows or Command key, and typically to the
left of the Spacebar.
Click the Processes tab to view the list of running processes.
319
System Administrator's Guide
Figure 19.1. System Monitor — Processes
For each listed process, the System Monitor tool displays its name ( Process Name), current status
(Status), percentage of the CPU usage ( % CPU), nice value ( Nice), process ID ( ID), memory usage
(Memory), the channel the process is waiting in ( Waiting Channel), and additional details about the
session (Session). To sort the information by a specific column in ascending order, click the name of
that column. Click the name of the column again to toggle the sort between ascending and descending
order.
By default, the System Monitor tool displays a list of processes that are owned by the current user.
Selecting various options from the View menu allows you to:
view only active processes,
view all processes,
view your processes,
view process dependencies,
Additionally, two buttons enable you to:
refresh the list of processes,
end a process by selecting it from the list and then clicking the End Process button.
19.2. VIEWING MEMORY USAGE
19.2.1. Using the free Command
The free command allows you to display the amount of free and used memory on the system. To do
so, type the following at a shell prompt:
free
320
CHAPTER 19. SYSTEM MONITORING TOOLS
The free command provides information about both the physical memory ( Mem) and swap space
(Swap). It displays the total amount of memory ( total), as well as the amount of memory that is in use
(used), free (free), shared (shared), sum of buffers and cached ( buff/cache), and available
(available). For example:
~]$ free
available
Mem:
124068
Swap:
total
used
free
shared
buff/cache
1016800
727300
84684
3500
204816
839676
66920
772756
By default, free displays the values in kilobytes. To display the values in megabytes, supply the -m
command line option:
free -m
For instance:
~]$ free -m
available
Mem:
120
Swap:
total
used
free
shared
buff/cache
992
711
81
3
200
819
65
754
For a complete list of available command line options, see the free(1) manual page.
19.2.2. Using the System Monitor Tool
The Resources tab of the System Monitor tool allows you to view the amount of free and used
memory on the system.
To start the System Monitor tool from the command line, type gnome-system-monitor at a shell
prompt. The System Monitor tool appears. Alternatively, if using the GNOME desktop, press the
Super key to enter the Activities Overview, type System Monitor and then press Enter. The
System Monitor tool appears. The Super key appears in a variety of guises, depending on the
keyboard and other hardware, but often as either the Windows or Command key, and typically to the
left of the Spacebar.
Click the Resources tab to view the system's memory usage.
321
System Administrator's Guide
Figure 19.2. System Monitor — Resources
In the Memory and Swap History section, the System Monitor tool displays a graphical
representation of the memory and swap usage history, as well as the total amount of the physical
memory (Memory) and swap space ( Swap) and how much of it is in use.
19.3. VIEWING CPU USAGE
19.3.1. Using the System Monitor Tool
The Resources tab of the System Monitor tool allows you to view the current CPU usage on the
system.
To start the System Monitor tool from the command line, type gnome-system-monitor at a shell
prompt. The System Monitor tool appears. Alternatively, if using the GNOME desktop, press the
Super key to enter the Activities Overview, type System Monitor and then press Enter. The
System Monitor tool appears. The Super key appears in a variety of guises, depending on the
keyboard and other hardware, but often as either the Windows or Command key, and typically to the
left of the Spacebar.
Click the Resources tab to view the system's CPU usage.
In the CPU History section, the System Monitor tool displays a graphical representation of the CPU
usage history and shows the percentage of how much CPU is currently in use.
19.4. VIEWING BLOCK DEVICES AND FILE SYSTEMS
19.4.1. Using the lsblk Command
The lsblk command allows you to display a list of available block devices. It provides more
information and better control on output formatting than the blkid command. It reads information
from udev, therefore it is usable by non- root users. To display a list of block devices, type the
322
CHAPTER 19. SYSTEM MONITORING TOOLS
following at a shell prompt:
lsblk
For each listed block device, the lsblk command displays the device name ( NAME), major and minor
device number (MAJ:MIN), if the device is removable ( RM), its size ( SIZE), if the device is read-only ( RO),
what type it is (TYPE), and where the device is mounted ( MOUNTPOINT). For example:
~]$ lsblk
NAME
MAJ:MIN RM
sr0
11:0
1
vda
252:0
0
|-vda1
252:1
0
`-vda2
252:2
0
|-vg_kvm-lv_root (dm-0) 253:0
0
`-vg_kvm-lv_swap (dm-1) 253:1
0
SIZE RO TYPE
1024M 0 rom
20G 0 rom
500M 0 part
19.5G 0 part
18G 0 lvm
1.5G 0 lvm
MOUNTPOINT
/boot
/
[SWAP]
By default, lsblk lists block devices in a tree-like format. To display the information as an ordinary
list, add the -l command line option:
lsblk -l
For instance:
~]$ lsblk -l
NAME
MAJ:MIN RM
sr0
11:0
1
vda
252:0
0
vda1
252:1
0
vda2
252:2
0
vg_kvm-lv_root (dm-0) 253:0
0
vg_kvm-lv_swap (dm-1) 253:1
0
SIZE RO TYPE
1024M 0 rom
20G 0 rom
500M 0 part
19.5G 0 part
18G 0 lvm
1.5G 0 lvm
MOUNTPOINT
/boot
/
[SWAP]
For a complete list of available command line options, see the lsblk(8) manual page.
19.4.2. Using the blkid Command
The blkid command allows you to display low-level information about available block devices. It
requires root privileges, therefore non- root users should use the lsblk command. To do so, type the
following at a shell prompt as root:
blkid
For each listed block device, the blkid command displays available attributes such as its universally
unique identifier (UUID), file system type ( TYPE), or volume label ( LABEL). For example:
~]# blkid
/dev/vda1: UUID="7fa9c421-0054-4555-b0ca-b470a97a3d84" TYPE="ext4"
/dev/vda2: UUID="7IvYzk-TnnK-oPjf-ipdD-cofz-DXaJ-gPdgBW"
TYPE="LVM2_member"
/dev/mapper/vg_kvm-lv_root: UUID="a07b967c-71a0-4925-ab02-aebcad2ae824"
323
System Administrator's Guide
TYPE="ext4"
/dev/mapper/vg_kvm-lv_swap: UUID="d7ef54ca-9c41-4de4-ac1b-4193b0c1ddb6"
TYPE="swap"
By default, the blkid command lists all available block devices. To display information about a
particular device only, specify the device name on the command line:
blkid device_name
For instance, to display information about /dev/vda1, type as root:
~]# blkid /dev/vda1
/dev/vda1: UUID="7fa9c421-0054-4555-b0ca-b470a97a3d84" TYPE="ext4"
You can also use the above command with the -p and -o udev command line options to obtain more
detailed information. Note that root privileges are required to run this command:
blkid -po udev device_name
For example:
~]# blkid -po udev /dev/vda1
ID_FS_UUID=7fa9c421-0054-4555-b0ca-b470a97a3d84
ID_FS_UUID_ENC=7fa9c421-0054-4555-b0ca-b470a97a3d84
ID_FS_VERSION=1.0
ID_FS_TYPE=ext4
ID_FS_USAGE=filesystem
For a complete list of available command line options, see the blkid(8) manual page.
19.4.3. Using the findmnt Command
The findmnt command allows you to display a list of currently mounted file systems. To do so, type
the following at a shell prompt:
findmnt
For each listed file system, the findmnt command displays the target mount point ( TARGET), source
device (SOURCE), file system type ( FSTYPE), and relevant mount options ( OPTIONS). For example:
~]$ findmnt
TARGET
OPTIONS
/
SOURCE
FSTYPE
/dev/mapper/rhel-root
xfs
rw,relatime,seclabel,attr2,inode64,noquota
├─/proc
proc
proc
rw,nosuid,nodev,noexec,relatime
│ ├─/proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc
systemd-1
autofs
rw,relatime,fd=32,pgrp=1,timeout=300,minproto=5,maxproto=5,direct
│ └─/proc/fs/nfsd
sunrpc
nfsd
rw,relatime
├─/sys
sysfs
sysfs
324
CHAPTER 19. SYSTEM MONITORING TOOLS
rw,nosuid,nodev,noexec,relatime,seclabel
│ ├─/sys/kernel/security
securityfs
rw,nosuid,nodev,noexec,relatime
│ ├─/sys/fs/cgroup
tmpfs
rw,nosuid,nodev,noexec,seclabel,mode=755
[output truncated]
securityfs
tmpfs
By default, findmnt lists file systems in a tree-like format. To display the information as an ordinary
list, add the -l command line option:
findmnt -l
For instance:
~]$ findmnt -l
TARGET
SOURCE
FSTYPE
/proc
proc
proc
rw,nosuid,nodev,noexec,relatime
/sys
sysfs
sysfs
rw,nosuid,nodev,noexec,relatime,seclabel
/dev
devtmpfs
devtmpfs
rw,nosuid,seclabel,size=933372k,nr_inodes=233343,mode=755
/sys/kernel/security
securityfs
securityfs
rw,nosuid,nodev,noexec,relatime
/dev/shm
tmpfs
tmpfs
rw,nosuid,nodev,seclabel
/dev/pts
devpts
devpts
rw,nosuid,noexec,relatime,seclabel,gid=5,mode=620,ptmxmode=000
/run
tmpfs
tmpfs
rw,nosuid,nodev,seclabel,mode=755
/sys/fs/cgroup
tmpfs
tmpfs
rw,nosuid,nodev,noexec,seclabel,mode=755
[output truncated]
OPTIONS
You can also choose to list only file systems of a particular type. To do so, add the -t command line
option followed by a file system type:
findmnt -t type
For example, to all list xfs file systems, type:
~]$ findmnt -t xfs
TARGET SOURCE
FSTYPE OPTIONS
/
/dev/mapper/rhel-root xfs
rw,relatime,seclabel,attr2,inode64,noquota
└─/boot /dev/vda1
xfs
rw,relatime,seclabel,attr2,inode64,noquota
For a complete list of available command line options, see the findmnt(8) manual page.
19.4.4. Using the df Command
The df command allows you to display a detailed report on the system's disk space usage. To do so,
type the following at a shell prompt:
325
System Administrator's Guide
df
For each listed file system, the df command displays its name ( Filesystem), size ( 1K-blocks or
Size), how much space is used ( Used), how much space is still available ( Available), the percentage
of space usage (Use%), and where is the file system mounted ( Mounted on). For example:
~]$ df
Filesystem
1K-blocks
/dev/mapper/vg_kvm-lv_root 18618236
tmpfs
380376
/dev/vda1
495844
Used Available Use% Mounted on
4357360 13315112 25% /
288
380088
1% /dev/shm
77029
393215 17% /boot
By default, the df command shows the partition size in 1 kilobyte blocks and the amount of used and
available disk space in kilobytes. To view the information in megabytes and gigabytes, supply the -h
command line option, which causes df to display the values in a human-readable format:
df -h
For instance:
~]$ df -h
Filesystem
/dev/mapper/vg_kvm-lv_root
tmpfs
/dev/vda1
Size
18G
372M
485M
Used Avail Use% Mounted on
4.2G
13G 25% /
288K 372M
1% /dev/shm
76M 384M 17% /boot
For a complete list of available command line options, see the df(1) manual page.
19.4.5. Using the du Command
The du command allows you to displays the amount of space that is being used by files in a directory.
To display the disk usage for each of the subdirectories in the current working directory, run the
command with no additional command line options:
du
For example:
~]$ du
14972
4
4
12
15004
./Downloads
./.mozilla/extensions
./.mozilla/plugins
./.mozilla
.
By default, the du command displays the disk usage in kilobytes. To view the information in megabytes
and gigabytes, supply the -h command line option, which causes the utility to display the values in a
human-readable format:
du -h
For instance:
326
CHAPTER 19. SYSTEM MONITORING TOOLS
~]$ du -h
15M
./Downloads
4.0K
./.mozilla/extensions
4.0K
./.mozilla/plugins
12K
./.mozilla
15M
.
At the end of the list, the du command always shows the grand total for the current directory. To
display only this information, supply the -s command line option:
du -sh
For example:
~]$ du -sh
15M
.
For a complete list of available command line options, see the du(1) manual page.
19.4.6. Using the System Monitor Tool
The File Systems tab of the System Monitor tool allows you to view file systems and disk space
usage in the graphical user interface.
To start the System Monitor tool from the command line, type gnome-system-monitor at a shell
prompt. The System Monitor tool appears. Alternatively, if using the GNOME desktop, press the
Super key to enter the Activities Overview, type System Monitor and then press Enter. The
System Monitor tool appears. The Super key appears in a variety of guises, depending on the
keyboard and other hardware, but often as either the Windows or Command key, and typically to the
left of the Spacebar.
Click the File Systems tab to view a list of file systems.
Figure 19.3. System Monitor — File Systems
For each listed file system, the System Monitor tool displays the source device ( Device), target
mount point (Directory), and file system type ( Type), as well as its size ( Total), and how much space
is available (Available), and used ( Used).
327
System Administrator's Guide
19.5. VIEWING HARDWARE INFORMATION
19.5.1. Using the lspci Command
The lspci command allows you to display information about PCI buses and devices that are attached
to them. To list all PCI devices that are in the system, type the following at a shell prompt:
lspci
This displays a simple list of devices, for example:
~]$ lspci
00:00.0 Host bridge: Intel Corporation 82X38/X48 Express DRAM Controller
00:01.0 PCI bridge: Intel Corporation 82X38/X48 Express Host-Primary PCI
Express Bridge
00:1a.0 USB Controller: Intel Corporation 82801I (ICH9 Family) USB UHCI
Controller #4 (rev 02)
00:1a.1 USB Controller: Intel Corporation 82801I (ICH9 Family) USB UHCI
Controller #5 (rev 02)
00:1a.2 USB Controller: Intel Corporation 82801I (ICH9 Family) USB UHCI
Controller #6 (rev 02)
[output truncated]
You can also use the -v command line option to display more verbose output, or -vv for very verbose
output:
lspci -v|-vv
For instance, to determine the manufacturer, model, and memory size of a system's video card, type:
~]$ lspci -v
[output truncated]
01:00.0 VGA compatible controller: nVidia Corporation G84 [Quadro FX 370]
(rev a1) (prog-if 00 [VGA controller])
Subsystem: nVidia Corporation Device 0491
Physical Slot: 2
Flags: bus master, fast devsel, latency 0, IRQ 16
Memory at f2000000 (32-bit, non-prefetchable) [size=16M]
Memory at e0000000 (64-bit, prefetchable) [size=256M]
Memory at f0000000 (64-bit, non-prefetchable) [size=32M]
I/O ports at 1100 [size=128]
Expansion ROM at <unassigned> [disabled]
Capabilities: <access denied>
Kernel driver in use: nouveau
Kernel modules: nouveau, nvidiafb
[output truncated]
For a complete list of available command line options, see the lspci(8) manual page.
19.5.2. Using the lsusb Command
328
CHAPTER 19. SYSTEM MONITORING TOOLS
The lsusb command allows you to display information about USB buses and devices that are attached
to them. To list all USB devices that are in the system, type the following at a shell prompt:
lsusb
This displays a simple list of devices, for example:
~]$ lsusb
Bus 001 Device 001: ID 1d6b:0002
Bus 002 Device 001: ID 1d6b:0002
[output truncated]
Bus 001 Device 002: ID 0bda:0151
Device (Multicard Reader)
Bus 008 Device 002: ID 03f0:2c24
Bus 008 Device 003: ID 04b3:3025
Linux Foundation 2.0 root hub
Linux Foundation 2.0 root hub
Realtek Semiconductor Corp. Mass Storage
Hewlett-Packard Logitech M-UAL-96 Mouse
IBM Corp.
You can also use the -v command line option to display more verbose output:
lsusb -v
For instance:
~]$ lsusb -v
[output truncated]
Bus 008 Device 002: ID 03f0:2c24 Hewlett-Packard Logitech M-UAL-96 Mouse
Device Descriptor:
bLength
18
bDescriptorType
1
bcdUSB
2.00
bDeviceClass
0 (Defined at Interface level)
bDeviceSubClass
0
bDeviceProtocol
0
bMaxPacketSize0
8
idVendor
0x03f0 Hewlett-Packard
idProduct
0x2c24 Logitech M-UAL-96 Mouse
bcdDevice
31.00
iManufacturer
1
iProduct
2
iSerial
0
bNumConfigurations
1
Configuration Descriptor:
bLength
9
bDescriptorType
2
[output truncated]
For a complete list of available command line options, see the lsusb(8) manual page.
19.5.3. Using the lscpu Command
The lscpu command allows you to list information about CPUs that are present in the system,
including the number of CPUs, their architecture, vendor, family, model, CPU caches, etc. To do so, type
the following at a shell prompt:
329
System Administrator's Guide
lscpu
For example:
~]$ lscpu
Architecture:
CPU op-mode(s):
Byte Order:
CPU(s):
On-line CPU(s) list:
Thread(s) per core:
Core(s) per socket:
Socket(s):
NUMA node(s):
Vendor ID:
CPU family:
Model:
Stepping:
CPU MHz:
BogoMIPS:
Virtualization:
L1d cache:
L1i cache:
L2 cache:
NUMA node0 CPU(s):
x86_64
32-bit, 64-bit
Little Endian
4
0-3
1
4
1
1
GenuineIntel
6
23
7
1998.000
4999.98
VT-x
32K
32K
3072K
0-3
For a complete list of available command line options, see the lscpu(1) manual page.
19.6. CHECKING FOR HARDWARE ERRORS
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 introduced the new hardware event report mechanism (HERM.) This
mechanism gathers system-reported memory errors as well as errors reported by the error detection
and correction (EDAC) mechanism for dual in-line memory modules ( DIMMs) and reports them to user
space. The user-space daemon rasdaemon, catches and handles all reliability, availability, and
serviceability (RAS) error events that come from the kernel tracing mechanism, and logs them. The
functions previously provided by edac-utils are now replaced by rasdaemon.
To install rasdaemon, enter the following command as root:
~]# yum install rasdaemon
Start the service as follows:
~]# systemctl start rasdaemon
To make the service run at system start, enter the following command:
~]# systemctl enable rasdaemon
The ras-mc-ctl utility provides a means to work with EDAC drivers. Enter the following command to
see a list of command options:
~]$ ras-mc-ctl --help
330
CHAPTER 19. SYSTEM MONITORING TOOLS
Usage: ras-mc-ctl [OPTIONS...]
--quiet
Quiet operation.
--mainboard
Print mainboard vendor and model for this hardware.
--status
Print status of EDAC drivers.
output truncated
To view a summary of memory controller events, run as root:
~]# ras-mc-ctl --summary
Memory controller events summary:
Corrected on DIMM Label(s): 'CPU_SrcID#0_Ha#0_Chan#0_DIMM#0'
location: 0:0:0:-1 errors: 1
No PCIe AER errors.
No Extlog errors.
MCE records summary:
1 MEMORY CONTROLLER RD_CHANNEL0_ERR Transaction: Memory read error
errors
2 No Error errors
To view a list of errors reported by the memory controller, run as root:
~]# ras-mc-ctl --errors
Memory controller events:
1 3172-02-17 00:47:01 -0500 1 Corrected error(s): memory read error at
CPU_SrcID#0_Ha#0_Chan#0_DIMM#0 location: 0:0:0:-1, addr 65928, grain 7,
syndrome 0 area:DRAM err_code:0001:0090 socket:0 ha:0 channel_mask:1
rank:0
No PCIe AER errors.
No Extlog errors.
MCE events:
1 3171-11-09 06:20:21 -0500 error: MEMORY CONTROLLER RD_CHANNEL0_ERR
Transaction: Memory read error, mcg mcgstatus=0, mci Corrected_error,
n_errors=1, mcgcap=0x01000c16, status=0x8c00004000010090,
addr=0x1018893000, misc=0x15020a086, walltime=0x57e96780,
cpuid=0x00050663, bank=0x00000007
2 3205-06-22 00:13:41 -0400 error: No Error, mcg mcgstatus=0, mci
Corrected_error Error_enabled, mcgcap=0x01000c16,
status=0x9400000000000000, addr=0x0000abcd, walltime=0x57e967ea,
cpuid=0x00050663, bank=0x00000001
3 3205-06-22 00:13:41 -0400 error: No Error, mcg mcgstatus=0, mci
Corrected_error Error_enabled, mcgcap=0x01000c16,
status=0x9400000000000000, addr=0x00001234, walltime=0x57e967ea,
cpu=0x00000001, cpuid=0x00050663, apicid=0x00000002, bank=0x00000002
These commands are also described in the ras-mc-ctl(8) manual page.
19.7. MONITORING PERFORMANCE WITH NET-SNMP
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 includes the Net-SNMP software suite, which includes a flexible and
331
System Administrator's Guide
extensible simple network management protocol (SNMP) agent. This agent and its associated utilities
can be used to provide performance data from a large number of systems to a variety of tools which
support polling over the SNMP protocol.
This section provides information on configuring the Net-SNMP agent to securely provide performance
data over the network, retrieving the data using the SNMP protocol, and extending the SNMP agent to
provide custom performance metrics.
19.7.1. Installing Net-SNMP
The Net-SNMP software suite is available as a set of RPM packages in the Red Hat Enterprise Linux
software distribution. Table 19.2, “Available Net-SNMP packages” summarizes each of the packages
and their contents.
Table 19.2. Available Net-SNMP packages
Package
Provides
net-snmp
The SNMP Agent Daemon and documentation. This package is required for
exporting performance data.
net-snmp-libs
The netsnmp library and the bundled management information bases (MIBs). This
package is required for exporting performance data.
net-snmp-utils
SNMP clients such as snmpget and snmpwalk. This package is required in
order to query a system's performance data over SNMP.
net-snmp-perl
The mib2c utility and the NetSNMP Perl module. Note that this package is
provided by the Optional channel. See Section 8.5.7, “Adding the Optional and
Supplementary Repositories” for more information on Red Hat additional
channels.
net-snmp-python
An SNMP client library for Python. Note that this package is provided by the
Optional channel. See Section 8.5.7, “Adding the Optional and Supplementary
Repositories” for more information on Red Hat additional channels.
To install any of these packages, use the yum command in the following form:
yum install package…
For example, to install the SNMP Agent Daemon and SNMP clients used in the rest of this section, type
the following at a shell prompt as root:
~]# yum install net-snmp net-snmp-libs net-snmp-utils
For more information on how to install new packages in Red Hat Enterprise Linux, see Section 8.2.4,
“Installing Packages”.
19.7.2. Running the Net-SNMP Daemon
The net-snmp package contains snmpd, the SNMP Agent Daemon. This section provides information
on how to start, stop, and restart the snmpd service. For more information on managing system
332
CHAPTER 19. SYSTEM MONITORING TOOLS
services in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7, see Chapter 9, Managing Services with systemd.
19.7.2.1. Starting the Service
To run the snmpd service in the current session, type the following at a shell prompt as root:
systemctl start snmpd.service
To configure the service to be automatically started at boot time, use the following command:
systemctl enable snmpd.service
19.7.2.2. Stopping the Service
To stop the running snmpd service, type the following at a shell prompt as root:
systemctl stop snmpd.service
To disable starting the service at boot time, use the following command:
systemctl disable snmpd.service
19.7.2.3. Restarting the Service
To restart the running snmpd service, type the following at a shell prompt:
systemctl restart snmpd.service
This command stops the service and starts it again in quick succession. To only reload the
configuration without stopping the service, run the following command instead:
systemctl reload snmpd.service
This causes the running snmpd service to reload its configuration.
19.7.3. Configuring Net-SNMP
To change the Net-SNMP Agent Daemon configuration, edit the /etc/snmp/snmpd.conf
configuration file. The default snmpd.conf file included with Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 is heavily
commented and serves as a good starting point for agent configuration.
This section focuses on two common tasks: setting system information and configuring authentication.
For more information about available configuration directives, see the snmpd.conf(5) manual page.
Additionally, there is a utility in the net-snmp package named snmpconf which can be used to
interactively generate a valid agent configuration.
Note that the net-snmp-utils package must be installed in order to use the snmpwalk utility described
in this section.
333
System Administrator's Guide
NOTE
For any changes to the configuration file to take effect, force the snmpd service to reread the configuration by running the following command as root:
systemctl reload snmpd.service
19.7.3.1. Setting System Information
Net-SNMP provides some rudimentary system information via the system tree. For example, the
following snmpwalk command shows the system tree with a default agent configuration.
~]# snmpwalk -v2c -c public localhost system
SNMPv2-MIB::sysDescr.0 = STRING: Linux localhost.localdomain 3.10.0123.el7.x86_64 #1 SMP Mon May 5 11:16:57 EDT 2014 x86_64
SNMPv2-MIB::sysObjectID.0 = OID: NET-SNMP-MIB::netSnmpAgentOIDs.10
DISMAN-EVENT-MIB::sysUpTimeInstance = Timeticks: (464) 0:00:04.64
SNMPv2-MIB::sysContact.0 = STRING: Root <root@localhost> (configure
/etc/snmp/snmp.local.conf)
[output truncated]
By default, the sysName object is set to the host name. The sysLocation and sysContact objects
can be configured in the /etc/snmp/snmpd.conf file by changing the value of the syslocation
and syscontact directives, for example:
syslocation Datacenter, Row 4, Rack 3
syscontact UNIX Admin <admin@example.com>
After making changes to the configuration file, reload the configuration and test it by running the
snmpwalk command again:
~]# systemctl reload snmp.service
~]# snmpwalk -v2c -c public localhost system
SNMPv2-MIB::sysDescr.0 = STRING: Linux localhost.localdomain 3.10.0123.el7.x86_64 #1 SMP Mon May 5 11:16:57 EDT 2014 x86_64
SNMPv2-MIB::sysObjectID.0 = OID: NET-SNMP-MIB::netSnmpAgentOIDs.10
DISMAN-EVENT-MIB::sysUpTimeInstance = Timeticks: (35424) 0:05:54.24
SNMPv2-MIB::sysContact.0 = STRING: UNIX Admin <admin@example.com>
SNMPv2-MIB::sysName.0 = STRING: localhost.localdomain
SNMPv2-MIB::sysLocation.0 = STRING: Datacenter, Row 4, Rack 3
[output truncated]
19.7.3.2. Configuring Authentication
The Net-SNMP Agent Daemon supports all three versions of the SNMP protocol. The first two versions
(1 and 2c) provide for simple authentication using a community string. This string is a shared secret
between the agent and any client utilities. The string is passed in clear text over the network however
and is not considered secure. Version 3 of the SNMP protocol supports user authentication and
message encryption using a variety of protocols. The Net-SNMP agent also supports tunneling over
SSH, TLS authentication with X.509 certificates, and Kerberos authentication.
Configuring SNMP Version 2c Community
334
CHAPTER 19. SYSTEM MONITORING TOOLS
To configure an SNMP version 2c community , use either the rocommunity or rwcommunity
directive in the /etc/snmp/snmpd.conf configuration file. The format of the directives is as follows:
directive community [source [OID]]
… where community is the community string to use, source is an IP address or subnet, and OID is the
SNMP tree to provide access to. For example, the following directive provides read-only access to the
system tree to a client using the community string “redhat” on the local machine:
rocommunity redhat 127.0.0.1 .1.3.6.1.2.1.1
To test the configuration, use the snmpwalk command with the -v and -c options.
~]# snmpwalk -v2c -c redhat localhost system
SNMPv2-MIB::sysDescr.0 = STRING: Linux localhost.localdomain 3.10.0123.el7.x86_64 #1 SMP Mon May 5 11:16:57 EDT 2014 x86_64
SNMPv2-MIB::sysObjectID.0 = OID: NET-SNMP-MIB::netSnmpAgentOIDs.10
DISMAN-EVENT-MIB::sysUpTimeInstance = Timeticks: (101376) 0:16:53.76
SNMPv2-MIB::sysContact.0 = STRING: UNIX Admin <admin@example.com>
SNMPv2-MIB::sysName.0 = STRING: localhost.localdomain
SNMPv2-MIB::sysLocation.0 = STRING: Datacenter, Row 4, Rack 3
[output truncated]
Configuring SNMP Version 3 User
To configure an SNMP version 3 user , use the net-snmp-create-v3-user command. This
command adds entries to the /var/lib/net-snmp/snmpd.conf and /etc/snmp/snmpd.conf
files which create the user and grant access to the user. Note that the net-snmp-create-v3-user
command may only be run when the agent is not running. The following example creates the “admin”
user with the password “redhatsnmp”:
~]# systemctl stop snmpd.service
~]# net-snmp-create-v3-user
Enter a SNMPv3 user name to create:
admin
Enter authentication pass-phrase:
redhatsnmp
Enter encryption pass-phrase:
[press return to reuse the authentication pass-phrase]
adding the following line to /var/lib/net-snmp/snmpd.conf:
createUser admin MD5 "redhatsnmp" DES
adding the following line to /etc/snmp/snmpd.conf:
rwuser admin
~]# systemctl start snmpd.service
The rwuser directive (or rouser when the -ro command line option is supplied) that net-snmpcreate-v3-user adds to /etc/snmp/snmpd.conf has a similar format to the rwcommunity and
rocommunity directives:
directive user [noauth|auth|priv] [OID]
… where user is a user name and OID is the SNMP tree to provide access to. By default, the Net-SNMP
Agent Daemon allows only authenticated requests (the auth option). The noauth option allows you to
335
System Administrator's Guide
permit unauthenticated requests, and the priv option enforces the use of encryption. The authpriv
option specifies that requests must be authenticated and replies should be encrypted.
For example, the following line grants the user “admin” read-write access to the entire tree:
rwuser admin authpriv .1
To test the configuration, create a .snmp/ directory in your user's home directory and a configuration
file named snmp.conf in that directory ( ~/.snmp/snmp.conf) with the following lines:
defVersion 3
defSecurityLevel authPriv
defSecurityName admin
defPassphrase redhatsnmp
The snmpwalk command will now use these authentication settings when querying the agent:
~]$ snmpwalk -v3 localhost system
SNMPv2-MIB::sysDescr.0 = STRING: Linux localhost.localdomain 3.10.0123.el7.x86_64 #1 SMP Mon May 5 11:16:57 EDT 2014 x86_64
[output truncated]
19.7.4. Retrieving Performance Data over SNMP
The Net-SNMP Agent in Red Hat Enterprise Linux provides a wide variety of performance information
over the SNMP protocol. In addition, the agent can be queried for a listing of the installed RPM
packages on the system, a listing of currently running processes on the system, or the network
configuration of the system.
This section provides an overview of OIDs related to performance tuning available over SNMP. It
assumes that the net-snmp-utils package is installed and that the user is granted access to the SNMP
tree as described in Section 19.7.3.2, “Configuring Authentication”.
19.7.4.1. Hardware Configuration
The Host Resources MIB included with Net-SNMP presents information about the current hardware
and software configuration of a host to a client utility. Table 19.3, “Available OIDs” summarizes the
different OIDs available under that MIB.
Table 19.3. Available OIDs
OID
Description
HOST-RESOURCES-MIB::hrSystem
Contains general system information such as
uptime, number of users, and number of running
processes.
HOST-RESOURCES-MIB::hrStorage
Contains data on memory and file system usage.
HOST-RESOURCES-MIB::hrDevices
Contains a listing of all processors, network devices,
and file systems.
336
CHAPTER 19. SYSTEM MONITORING TOOLS
OID
Description
HOST-RESOURCES-MIB::hrSWRun
Contains a listing of all running processes.
HOST-RESOURCES-MIB::hrSWRunPerf
Contains memory and CPU statistics on the process
table from HOST-RESOURCES-MIB::hrSWRun.
HOST-RESOURCES-MIB::hrSWInstalled
Contains a listing of the RPM database.
There are also a number of SNMP tables available in the Host Resources MIB which can be used to
retrieve a summary of the available information. The following example displays HOST-RESOURCESMIB::hrFSTable:
~]$ snmptable -Cb localhost HOST-RESOURCES-MIB::hrFSTable
SNMP table: HOST-RESOURCES-MIB::hrFSTable
Index MountPoint RemoteMountPoint
Type
Access Bootable StorageIndex LastFullBackupDate LastPartialBackupDate
1
"/"
"" HOST-RESOURCES-TYPES::hrFSLinuxExt2
readWrite
true
31
0-1-1,0:0:0.0
0-1-1,0:0:0.0
5 "/dev/shm"
""
HOST-RESOURCES-TYPES::hrFSOther
readWrite
false
35
0-1-1,0:0:0.0
0-1-1,0:0:0.0
6
"/boot"
"" HOST-RESOURCES-TYPES::hrFSLinuxExt2
readWrite
false
36
0-1-1,0:0:0.0
0-1-1,0:0:0.0
For more information about HOST-RESOURCES-MIB, see the /usr/share/snmp/mibs/HOSTRESOURCES-MIB.txt file.
19.7.4.2. CPU and Memory Information
Most system performance data is available in the UCD SNMP MIB. The systemStats OID provides a
number of counters around processor usage:
~]$ snmpwalk localhost UCD-SNMP-MIB::systemStats
UCD-SNMP-MIB::ssIndex.0 = INTEGER: 1
UCD-SNMP-MIB::ssErrorName.0 = STRING: systemStats
UCD-SNMP-MIB::ssSwapIn.0 = INTEGER: 0 kB
UCD-SNMP-MIB::ssSwapOut.0 = INTEGER: 0 kB
UCD-SNMP-MIB::ssIOSent.0 = INTEGER: 0 blocks/s
UCD-SNMP-MIB::ssIOReceive.0 = INTEGER: 0 blocks/s
UCD-SNMP-MIB::ssSysInterrupts.0 = INTEGER: 29 interrupts/s
UCD-SNMP-MIB::ssSysContext.0 = INTEGER: 18 switches/s
UCD-SNMP-MIB::ssCpuUser.0 = INTEGER: 0
UCD-SNMP-MIB::ssCpuSystem.0 = INTEGER: 0
UCD-SNMP-MIB::ssCpuIdle.0 = INTEGER: 99
UCD-SNMP-MIB::ssCpuRawUser.0 = Counter32: 2278
UCD-SNMP-MIB::ssCpuRawNice.0 = Counter32: 1395
UCD-SNMP-MIB::ssCpuRawSystem.0 = Counter32: 6826
UCD-SNMP-MIB::ssCpuRawIdle.0 = Counter32: 3383736
UCD-SNMP-MIB::ssCpuRawWait.0 = Counter32: 7629
UCD-SNMP-MIB::ssCpuRawKernel.0 = Counter32: 0
UCD-SNMP-MIB::ssCpuRawInterrupt.0 = Counter32: 434
337
System Administrator's Guide
UCD-SNMP-MIB::ssIORawSent.0 = Counter32: 266770
UCD-SNMP-MIB::ssIORawReceived.0 = Counter32: 427302
UCD-SNMP-MIB::ssRawInterrupts.0 = Counter32: 743442
UCD-SNMP-MIB::ssRawContexts.0 = Counter32: 718557
UCD-SNMP-MIB::ssCpuRawSoftIRQ.0 = Counter32: 128
UCD-SNMP-MIB::ssRawSwapIn.0 = Counter32: 0
UCD-SNMP-MIB::ssRawSwapOut.0 = Counter32: 0
In particular, the ssCpuRawUser, ssCpuRawSystem, ssCpuRawWait, and ssCpuRawIdle OIDs
provide counters which are helpful when determining whether a system is spending most of its
processor time in kernel space, user space, or I/O. ssRawSwapIn and ssRawSwapOut can be helpful
when determining whether a system is suffering from memory exhaustion.
More memory information is available under the UCD-SNMP-MIB::memory OID, which provides
similar data to the free command:
~]$ snmpwalk localhost UCD-SNMP-MIB::memory
UCD-SNMP-MIB::memIndex.0 = INTEGER: 0
UCD-SNMP-MIB::memErrorName.0 = STRING: swap
UCD-SNMP-MIB::memTotalSwap.0 = INTEGER: 1023992 kB
UCD-SNMP-MIB::memAvailSwap.0 = INTEGER: 1023992 kB
UCD-SNMP-MIB::memTotalReal.0 = INTEGER: 1021588 kB
UCD-SNMP-MIB::memAvailReal.0 = INTEGER: 634260 kB
UCD-SNMP-MIB::memTotalFree.0 = INTEGER: 1658252 kB
UCD-SNMP-MIB::memMinimumSwap.0 = INTEGER: 16000 kB
UCD-SNMP-MIB::memBuffer.0 = INTEGER: 30760 kB
UCD-SNMP-MIB::memCached.0 = INTEGER: 216200 kB
UCD-SNMP-MIB::memSwapError.0 = INTEGER: noError(0)
UCD-SNMP-MIB::memSwapErrorMsg.0 = STRING:
Load averages are also available in the UCD SNMP MIB. The SNMP table UCD-SNMP-MIB::laTable
has a listing of the 1, 5, and 15 minute load averages:
~]$ snmptable localhost UCD-SNMP-MIB::laTable
SNMP table: UCD-SNMP-MIB::laTable
laIndex laNames laLoad laConfig laLoadInt laLoadFloat laErrorFlag
laErrMessage
1 Load-1
0.00
12.00
0
0.000000
noError
2 Load-5
0.00
12.00
0
0.000000
noError
3 Load-15
0.00
12.00
0
0.000000
noError
19.7.4.3. File System and Disk Information
The Host Resources MIB provides information on file system size and usage. Each file system (and
also each memory pool) has an entry in the HOST-RESOURCES-MIB::hrStorageTable table:
~]$ snmptable -Cb localhost HOST-RESOURCES-MIB::hrStorageTable
SNMP table: HOST-RESOURCES-MIB::hrStorageTable
Index
Type
Descr
AllocationUnits
Size
Used AllocationFailures
1
HOST-RESOURCES-TYPES::hrStorageRam Physical memory
1024 Bytes 1021588 388064
?
338
CHAPTER 19. SYSTEM MONITORING TOOLS
3 HOST-RESOURCES-TYPES::hrStorageVirtualMemory
1024 Bytes 2045580 388064
?
6
HOST-RESOURCES-TYPES::hrStorageOther
1024 Bytes 1021588 31048
?
7
HOST-RESOURCES-TYPES::hrStorageOther
1024 Bytes 216604 216604
?
10 HOST-RESOURCES-TYPES::hrStorageVirtualMemory
1024 Bytes 1023992
0
?
31
HOST-RESOURCES-TYPES::hrStorageFixedDisk
4096 Bytes 2277614 250391
?
35
HOST-RESOURCES-TYPES::hrStorageFixedDisk
4096 Bytes 127698
0
?
36
HOST-RESOURCES-TYPES::hrStorageFixedDisk
1024 Bytes 198337 26694
?
Virtual memory
Memory buffers
Cached memory
Swap space
/
/dev/shm
/boot
The OIDs under HOST-RESOURCES-MIB::hrStorageSize and HOST-RESOURCESMIB::hrStorageUsed can be used to calculate the remaining capacity of each mounted file system.
I/O data is available both in UCD-SNMP-MIB::systemStats (ssIORawSent.0 and
ssIORawRecieved.0) and in UCD-DISKIO-MIB::diskIOTable. The latter provides much more
granular data. Under this table are OIDs for diskIONReadX and diskIONWrittenX, which provide
counters for the number of bytes read from and written to the block device in question since the
system boot:
~]$ snmptable -Cb localhost UCD-DISKIO-MIB::diskIOTable
SNMP table: UCD-DISKIO-MIB::diskIOTable
Index Device
NRead NWritten Reads Writes LA1 LA5 LA15
NReadX
NWrittenX
...
25
sda 216886272 139109376 16409
4894
?
?
? 216886272
139109376
26
sda1
2455552
5120
613
2
?
?
?
2455552
5120
27
sda2
1486848
0
332
0
?
?
?
1486848
0
28
sda3 212321280 139104256 15312
4871
?
?
? 212321280
139104256
19.7.4.4. Network Information
The Interfaces MIB provides information on network devices. IF-MIB::ifTable provides an
SNMP table with an entry for each interface on the system, the configuration of the interface, and
various packet counters for the interface. The following example shows the first few columns of
ifTable on a system with two physical network interfaces:
~]$ snmptable -Cb localhost IF-MIB::ifTable
SNMP table: IF-MIB::ifTable
Index Descr
Type
Mtu
Speed
PhysAddress AdminStatus
1
lo softwareLoopback 16436 10000000
up
2 eth0
ethernetCsmacd 1500
0 52:54:0:c7:69:58
up
3 eth1
ethernetCsmacd 1500
0 52:54:0:a7:a3:24
down
339
System Administrator's Guide
Network traffic is available under the OIDs IF-MIB::ifOutOctets and IF-MIB::ifInOctets. The
following SNMP queries will retrieve network traffic for each of the interfaces on this system:
~]$ snmpwalk localhost IF-MIB::ifDescr
IF-MIB::ifDescr.1 = STRING: lo
IF-MIB::ifDescr.2 = STRING: eth0
IF-MIB::ifDescr.3 = STRING: eth1
~]$ snmpwalk localhost IF-MIB::ifOutOctets
IF-MIB::ifOutOctets.1 = Counter32: 10060699
IF-MIB::ifOutOctets.2 = Counter32: 650
IF-MIB::ifOutOctets.3 = Counter32: 0
~]$ snmpwalk localhost IF-MIB::ifInOctets
IF-MIB::ifInOctets.1 = Counter32: 10060699
IF-MIB::ifInOctets.2 = Counter32: 78650
IF-MIB::ifInOctets.3 = Counter32: 0
19.7.5. Extending Net-SNMP
The Net-SNMP Agent can be extended to provide application metrics in addition to raw system
metrics. This allows for capacity planning as well as performance issue troubleshooting. For example, it
may be helpful to know that an email system had a 5-minute load average of 15 while being tested, but
it is more helpful to know that the email system has a load average of 15 while processing 80,000
messages a second. When application metrics are available via the same interface as the system
metrics, this also allows for the visualization of the impact of different load scenarios on system
performance (for example, each additional 10,000 messages increases the load average linearly until
100,000).
A number of the applications included in Red Hat Enterprise Linux extend the Net-SNMP Agent to
provide application metrics over SNMP. There are several ways to extend the agent for custom
applications as well. This section describes extending the agent with shell scripts and the Perl plug-ins
from the Optional channel. It assumes that the net-snmp-utils and net-snmp-perl packages are
installed, and that the user is granted access to the SNMP tree as described in Section 19.7.3.2,
“Configuring Authentication”.
19.7.5.1. Extending Net-SNMP with Shell Scripts
The Net-SNMP Agent provides an extension MIB (NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB) that can be used to query
arbitrary shell scripts. To specify the shell script to run, use the extend directive in the
/etc/snmp/snmpd.conf file. Once defined, the Agent will provide the exit code and any output of the
command over SNMP. The example below demonstrates this mechanism with a script which
determines the number of httpd processes in the process table.
NOTE
The Net-SNMP Agent also provides a built-in mechanism for checking the process table
via the proc directive. See the snmpd.conf(5) manual page for more information.
The exit code of the following shell script is the number of httpd processes running on the system at a
given point in time:
#!/bin/sh
NUMPIDS=`pgrep httpd | wc -l`
340
CHAPTER 19. SYSTEM MONITORING TOOLS
exit $NUMPIDS
To make this script available over SNMP, copy the script to a location on the system path, set the
executable bit, and add an extend directive to the /etc/snmp/snmpd.conf file. The format of the
extend directive is the following:
extend name prog args
… where name is an identifying string for the extension, prog is the program to run, and args are the
arguments to give the program. For instance, if the above shell script is copied to
/usr/local/bin/check_apache.sh, the following directive will add the script to the SNMP tree:
extend httpd_pids /bin/sh /usr/local/bin/check_apache.sh
The script can then be queried at NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendObjects:
~]$ snmpwalk localhost NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendObjects
NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendNumEntries.0 = INTEGER: 1
NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendCommand."httpd_pids" = STRING: /bin/sh
NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendArgs."httpd_pids" = STRING:
/usr/local/bin/check_apache.sh
NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendInput."httpd_pids" = STRING:
NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendCacheTime."httpd_pids" = INTEGER: 5
NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendExecType."httpd_pids" = INTEGER: exec(1)
NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendRunType."httpd_pids" = INTEGER: run-onread(1)
NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendStorage."httpd_pids" = INTEGER: permanent(4)
NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendStatus."httpd_pids" = INTEGER: active(1)
NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendOutput1Line."httpd_pids" = STRING:
NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendOutputFull."httpd_pids" = STRING:
NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendOutNumLines."httpd_pids" = INTEGER: 1
NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendResult."httpd_pids" = INTEGER: 8
NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendOutLine."httpd_pids".1 = STRING:
Note that the exit code (“8” in this example) is provided as an INTEGER type and any output is
provided as a STRING type. To expose multiple metrics as integers, supply different arguments to the
script using the extend directive. For example, the following shell script can be used to determine the
number of processes matching an arbitrary string, and will also output a text string giving the number
of processes:
#!/bin/sh
PATTERN=$1
NUMPIDS=`pgrep $PATTERN | wc -l`
echo "There are $NUMPIDS $PATTERN processes."
exit $NUMPIDS
The following /etc/snmp/snmpd.conf directives will give both the number of httpd PIDs as well as
the number of snmpd PIDs when the above script is copied to /usr/local/bin/check_proc.sh:
extend httpd_pids /bin/sh /usr/local/bin/check_proc.sh httpd
extend snmpd_pids /bin/sh /usr/local/bin/check_proc.sh snmpd
341
System Administrator's Guide
The following example shows the output of an snmpwalk of the nsExtendObjects OID:
~]$ snmpwalk localhost NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendObjects
NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendNumEntries.0 = INTEGER: 2
NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendCommand."httpd_pids" = STRING: /bin/sh
NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendCommand."snmpd_pids" = STRING: /bin/sh
NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendArgs."httpd_pids" = STRING:
/usr/local/bin/check_proc.sh httpd
NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendArgs."snmpd_pids" = STRING:
/usr/local/bin/check_proc.sh snmpd
NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendInput."httpd_pids" = STRING:
NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendInput."snmpd_pids" = STRING:
...
NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendResult."httpd_pids" = INTEGER: 8
NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendResult."snmpd_pids" = INTEGER: 1
NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendOutLine."httpd_pids".1 = STRING: There are 8
httpd processes.
NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendOutLine."snmpd_pids".1 = STRING: There are 1
snmpd processes.
WARNING
Integer exit codes are limited to a range of 0–255. For values that are likely to
exceed 256, either use the standard output of the script (which will be typed as a
string) or a different method of extending the agent.
This last example shows a query for the free memory of the system and the number of httpd
processes. This query could be used during a performance test to determine the impact of the number
of processes on memory pressure:
~]$ snmpget localhost \
'NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendResult."httpd_pids"' \
UCD-SNMP-MIB::memAvailReal.0
NET-SNMP-EXTEND-MIB::nsExtendResult."httpd_pids" = INTEGER: 8
UCD-SNMP-MIB::memAvailReal.0 = INTEGER: 799664 kB
19.7.5.2. Extending Net-SNMP with Perl
Executing shell scripts using the extend directive is a fairly limited method for exposing custom
application metrics over SNMP. The Net-SNMP Agent also provides an embedded Perl interface for
exposing custom objects. The net-snmp-perl package in the Optional channel provides the
NetSNMP::agent Perl module that is used to write embedded Perl plug-ins on Red Hat
Enterprise Linux.
342
CHAPTER 19. SYSTEM MONITORING TOOLS
NOTE
Before subscribing to the Optional and Supplementary channels see the Scope of
Coverage Details. If you decide to install packages from these channels, follow the steps
documented in the article called How to access Optional and Supplementary channels,
and -devel packages using Red Hat Subscription Manager (RHSM)? on the Red Hat
Customer Portal.
The NetSNMP::agent Perl module provides an agent object which is used to handle requests for a
part of the agent's OID tree. The agent object's constructor has options for running the agent as a
sub-agent of snmpd or a standalone agent. No arguments are necessary to create an embedded agent:
use NetSNMP::agent (':all');
my $agent = new NetSNMP::agent();
The agent object has a register method which is used to register a callback function with a
particular OID. The register function takes a name, OID, and pointer to the callback function. The
following example will register a callback function named hello_handler with the SNMP Agent
which will handle requests under the OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.8072.9999.9999:
$agent->register("hello_world", ".1.3.6.1.4.1.8072.9999.9999",
\&hello_handler);
NOTE
The OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.8072.9999.9999 (NET-SNMP-MIB::netSnmpPlaypen) is
typically used for demonstration purposes only. If your organization does not already
have a root OID, you can obtain one by contacting an ISO Name Registration Authority
(ANSI in the United States).
The handler function will be called with four parameters, HANDLER, REGISTRATION_INFO,
REQUEST_INFO, and REQUESTS. The REQUESTS parameter contains a list of requests in the current
call and should be iterated over and populated with data. The request objects in the list have get and
set methods which allow for manipulating the OID and value of the request. For example, the following
call will set the value of a request object to the string “hello world”:
$request->setValue(ASN_OCTET_STR, "hello world");
The handler function should respond to two types of SNMP requests: the GET request and the
GETNEXT request. The type of request is determined by calling the getMode method on the
request_info object passed as the third parameter to the handler function. If the request is a GET
request, the caller will expect the handler to set the value of the request object, depending on the OID
of the request. If the request is a GETNEXT request, the caller will also expect the handler to set the
OID of the request to the next available OID in the tree. This is illustrated in the following code
example:
my $request;
my $string_value = "hello world";
my $integer_value = "8675309";
for($request = $requests; $request; $request = $request->next()) {
343
System Administrator's Guide
my $oid = $request->getOID();
if ($request_info->getMode() == MODE_GET) {
if ($oid == new NetSNMP::OID(".1.3.6.1.4.1.8072.9999.9999.1.0")) {
$request->setValue(ASN_OCTET_STR, $string_value);
}
elsif ($oid == new NetSNMP::OID(".1.3.6.1.4.1.8072.9999.9999.1.1")) {
$request->setValue(ASN_INTEGER, $integer_value);
}
} elsif ($request_info->getMode() == MODE_GETNEXT) {
if ($oid == new NetSNMP::OID(".1.3.6.1.4.1.8072.9999.9999.1.0")) {
$request->setOID(".1.3.6.1.4.1.8072.9999.9999.1.1");
$request->setValue(ASN_INTEGER, $integer_value);
}
elsif ($oid < new NetSNMP::OID(".1.3.6.1.4.1.8072.9999.9999.1.0")) {
$request->setOID(".1.3.6.1.4.1.8072.9999.9999.1.0");
$request->setValue(ASN_OCTET_STR, $string_value);
}
}
}
When getMode returns MODE_GET, the handler analyzes the value of the getOID call on the request
object. The value of the request is set to either string_value if the OID ends in “.1.0”, or set to
integer_value if the OID ends in “.1.1”. If the getMode returns MODE_GETNEXT, the handler
determines whether the OID of the request is “.1.0”, and then sets the OID and value for “.1.1”. If the
request is higher on the tree than “.1.0”, the OID and value for “.1.0” is set. This in effect returns the
“next” value in the tree so that a program like snmpwalk can traverse the tree without prior
knowledge of the structure.
The type of the variable is set using constants from NetSNMP::ASN. See the perldoc for
NetSNMP::ASN for a full list of available constants.
The entire code listing for this example Perl plug-in is as follows:
#!/usr/bin/perl
use NetSNMP::agent (':all');
use NetSNMP::ASN qw(ASN_OCTET_STR ASN_INTEGER);
sub hello_handler {
my ($handler, $registration_info, $request_info, $requests) = @_;
my $request;
my $string_value = "hello world";
my $integer_value = "8675309";
for($request = $requests; $request; $request = $request->next()) {
my $oid = $request->getOID();
if ($request_info->getMode() == MODE_GET) {
if ($oid == new NetSNMP::OID(".1.3.6.1.4.1.8072.9999.9999.1.0")) {
$request->setValue(ASN_OCTET_STR, $string_value);
}
elsif ($oid == new NetSNMP::OID(".1.3.6.1.4.1.8072.9999.9999.1.1"))
{
$request->setValue(ASN_INTEGER, $integer_value);
}
} elsif ($request_info->getMode() == MODE_GETNEXT) {
if ($oid == new NetSNMP::OID(".1.3.6.1.4.1.8072.9999.9999.1.0")) {
344
CHAPTER 19. SYSTEM MONITORING TOOLS
$request->setOID(".1.3.6.1.4.1.8072.9999.9999.1.1");
$request->setValue(ASN_INTEGER, $integer_value);
}
elsif ($oid < new NetSNMP::OID(".1.3.6.1.4.1.8072.9999.9999.1.0")) {
$request->setOID(".1.3.6.1.4.1.8072.9999.9999.1.0");
$request->setValue(ASN_OCTET_STR, $string_value);
}
}
}
}
my $agent = new NetSNMP::agent();
$agent->register("hello_world", ".1.3.6.1.4.1.8072.9999.9999",
\&hello_handler);
To test the plug-in, copy the above program to /usr/share/snmp/hello_world.pl and add the
following line to the /etc/snmp/snmpd.conf configuration file:
perl do "/usr/share/snmp/hello_world.pl"
The SNMP Agent Daemon will need to be restarted to load the new Perl plug-in. Once it has been
restarted, an snmpwalk should return the new data:
~]$ snmpwalk localhost NET-SNMP-MIB::netSnmpPlaypen
NET-SNMP-MIB::netSnmpPlaypen.1.0 = STRING: "hello world"
NET-SNMP-MIB::netSnmpPlaypen.1.1 = INTEGER: 8675309
The snmpget should also be used to exercise the other mode of the handler:
~]$ snmpget localhost \
NET-SNMP-MIB::netSnmpPlaypen.1.0 \
NET-SNMP-MIB::netSnmpPlaypen.1.1
NET-SNMP-MIB::netSnmpPlaypen.1.0 = STRING: "hello world"
NET-SNMP-MIB::netSnmpPlaypen.1.1 = INTEGER: 8675309
19.8. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
To learn more about gathering system information, see the following resources.
19.8.1. Installed Documentation
lscpu(1) — The manual page for the lscpu command.
lsusb(8) — The manual page for the lsusb command.
findmnt(8) — The manual page for the findmnt command.
blkid(8) — The manual page for the blkid command.
lsblk(8) — The manual page for the lsblk command.
ps(1) — The manual page for the ps command.
345
System Administrator's Guide
top(1) — The manual page for the top command.
free(1) — The manual page for the free command.
df(1) — The manual page for the df command.
du(1) — The manual page for the du command.
lspci(8) — The manual page for the lspci command.
snmpd(8) — The manual page for the snmpd service.
snmpd.conf(5) — The manual page for the /etc/snmp/snmpd.conf file containing full
documentation of available configuration directives.
346
CHAPTER 20. OPENLMI
CHAPTER 20. OPENLMI
The Open Linux Management Infrastructure, commonly abbreviated as OpenLMI, is a common
infrastructure for the management of Linux systems. It builds on top of existing tools and serves as an
abstraction layer in order to hide much of the complexity of the underlying system from system
administrators. OpenLMI is distributed with a set of services that can be accessed locally or remotely
and provides multiple language bindings, standard APIs, and standard scripting interfaces that can be
used to manage and monitor hardware, operating systems, and system services.
20.1. ABOUT OPENLMI
OpenLMI is designed to provide a common management interface to production servers running the
Red Hat Enterprise Linux system on both physical and virtual machines. It consists of the following
three components:
1. System management agents — these agents are installed on a managed system and implement
an object model that is presented to a standard object broker. The initial agents implemented
in OpenLMI include storage configuration and network configuration, but later work will
address additional elements of system management. The system management agents are
commonly referred to as Common Information Model providers or CIM providers.
2. A standard object broker — the object broker manages system management agents and
provides an interface to them. The standard object broker is also known as a CIM Object
Monitor or CIMOM.
3. Client applications and scripts — the client applications and scripts call the system management
agents through the standard object broker.
The OpenLMI project complements existing management initiatives by providing a low-level interface
that can be used by scripts or system management consoles. Interfaces distributed with OpenLMI
include C, C++, Python, Java, and an interactive command line client, and all of them offer the same full
access to the capabilities implemented in each agent. This ensures that you always have access to
exactly the same capabilities no matter which programming interface you decide to use.
20.1.1. Main Features
The following are key benefits of installing and using OpenLMI on your system:
OpenLMI provides a standard interface for configuration, management, and monitoring of your
local and remote systems.
It allows you to configure, manage, and monitor production servers running on both physical
and virtual machines.
It is distributed with a collection of CIM providers that allow you to configure, manage, and
monitor storage devices and complex networks.
It allows you to call system management functions from C, C++, Python, and Java programs,
and includes LMIShell, which provides a command line interface.
It is free software based on open industry standards.
20.1.2. Management Capabilities
Key capabilities of OpenLMI include the management of storage devices, networks, system services,
347
System Administrator's Guide
user accounts, hardware and software configuration, power management, and interaction with Active
Directory. For a complete list of CIM providers that are distributed with Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7, see
Table 20.1, “Available CIM Providers” .
Table 20.1. Available CIM Providers
Package Name
Description
openlmi-account
A CIM provider for managing user accounts.
openlmi-logicalfile
A CIM provider for reading files and directories.
openlmi-networking
A CIM provider for network management.
openlmi-powermanagement
A CIM provider for power management.
openlmi-service
A CIM provider for managing system services.
openlmi-storage
A CIM provider for storage management.
openlmi-fan
A CIM provider for controlling computer fans.
openlmi-hardware
A CIM provider for retrieving hardware information.
openlmi-realmd
A CIM provider for configuring realmd.
openlmi-software [a]
A CIM provider for software management.
[a] In Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7, the OpenLMI Software provider is included as a Technology Preview. This provider is
fully functional, but has a known performance scaling issue where listing large numbers of software packages may
consume excessive amount of memory and time. To work around this issue, adjust package searches to return as few
packages as possible.
20.2. INSTALLING OPENLMI
OpenLMI is distributed as a collection of RPM packages that include the CIMOM, individual CIM
providers, and client applications. This allows you distinguish between a managed and client system
and install only those components you need.
20.2.1. Installing OpenLMI on a Managed System
A managed system is the system you intend to monitor and manage by using the OpenLMI client tools.
To install OpenLMI on a managed system, complete the following steps:
1. Install the tog-pegasus package by typing the following at a shell prompt as root:
yum install tog-pegasus
This command installs the OpenPegasus CIMOM and all its dependencies to the system and
creates a user account for the pegasus user.
348
CHAPTER 20. OPENLMI
2. Install required CIM providers by running the following command as root:
yum install openlmi{storage,networking,service,account,powermanagement}
This command installs the CIM providers for storage, network, service, account, and power
management. For a complete list of CIM providers distributed with Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7,
see Table 20.1, “Available CIM Providers” .
3. Edit the /etc/Pegasus/access.conf configuration file to customize the list of users that
are allowed to connect to the OpenPegasus CIMOM. By default, only the pegasus user is
allowed to access the CIMOM both remotely and locally. To activate this user account, run the
following command as root to set the user's password:
passwd pegasus
4. Start the OpenPegasus CIMOM by activating the tog-pegasus.service unit. To activate the
tog-pegasus.service unit in the current session, type the following at a shell prompt as
root:
systemctl start tog-pegasus.service
To configure the tog-pegasus.service unit to start automatically at boot time, type as
root:
systemctl enable tog-pegasus.service
5. If you intend to interact with the managed system from a remote machine, enable TCP
communication on port 5989 (wbem-https). To open this port in the current session, run the
following command as root:
firewall-cmd --add-port 5989/tcp
To open port 5989 for TCP communication permanently, type as root:
firewall-cmd --permanent --add-port 5989/tcp
You can now connect to the managed system and interact with it by using the OpenLMI client tools as
described in Section 20.4, “Using LMIShell”. If you intend to perform OpenLMI operations directly on
the managed system, also complete the steps described in Section 20.2.2, “Installing OpenLMI on a
Client System”.
20.2.2. Installing OpenLMI on a Client System
A client system is the system from which you intend to interact with the managed system. In a typical
scenario, the client system and the managed system are installed on two separate machines, but you
can also install the client tools on the managed system and interact with it directly.
To install OpenLMI on a client system, complete the following steps:
1. Install the openlmi-tools package by typing the following at a shell prompt as root:
349
System Administrator's Guide
yum install openlmi-tools
This command installs LMIShell, an interactive client and interpreter for accessing CIM objects
provided by OpenPegasus, and all its dependencies to the system.
2. Configure SSL certificates for OpenPegasus as described in Section 20.3, “Configuring SSL
Certificates for OpenPegasus”.
You can now use the LMIShell client to interact with the managed system as described in Section 20.4,
“Using LMIShell”.
20.3. CONFIGURING SSL CERTIFICATES FOR OPENPEGASUS
OpenLMI uses the Web-Based Enterprise Management (WBEM) protocol that functions over an HTTP
transport layer. Standard HTTP Basic authentication is performed in this protocol, which means that
the user name and password are transmitted alongside the requests.
Configuring the OpenPegasus CIMOM to use HTTPS for communication is necessary to ensure secure
authentication. A Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) certificate is required
on the managed system to establish an encrypted channel.
There are two ways of managing SSL/TLS certificates on a system:
Self-signed certificates require less infrastructure to use, but are more difficult to deploy to
clients and manage securely.
Authority-signed certificates are easier to deploy to clients once they are set up, but may
require a greater initial investment.
When using an authority-signed certificate, it is necessary to configure a trusted certificate authority
on the client systems. The authority can then be used for signing all of the managed systems' CIMOM
certificates. Certificates can also be part of a certificate chain, so the certificate used for signing the
managed systems' certificates may in turn be signed by another, higher authority (such as Verisign,
CAcert, RSA and many others).
The default certificate and trust store locations on the file system are listed in Table 20.2, “Certificate
and Trust Store Locations”.
Table 20.2. Certificate and Trust Store Locations
Configuration Option
Location
Description
sslCertificateFilePa
th
/etc/Pegasus/server.
pem
Public certificate of the CIMOM.
sslKeyFilePath
/etc/Pegasus/file.pe
m
Private key known only to the CIMOM.
sslTrustStore
/etc/Pegasus/client.
pem
The file or directory providing the list of
trusted certificate authorities.
350
CHAPTER 20. OPENLMI
IMPORTANT
If you modify any of the files mentioned in Table 20.2, “Certificate and Trust Store
Locations”, restart the tog-pegasus service to make sure it recognizes the new
certificates. To restart the service, type the following at a shell prompt as root:
systemctl restart tog-pegasus.service
For more information on how to manage system services in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7,
see Chapter 9, Managing Services with systemd.
20.3.1. Managing Self-signed Certificates
A self-signed certificate uses its own private key to sign itself and it is not connected to any chain of
trust. On a managed system, if certificates have not been provided by the administrator prior to the
first time that the tog-pegasus service is started, a set of self-signed certificates will be
automatically generated using the system's primary host name as the certificate subject.
IMPORTANT
The automatically generated self-signed certificates are valid by default for 10 years,
but they have no automatic-renewal capability. Any modification to these certificates
will require manually creating new certificates following guidelines provided by the
OpenSSL or Mozilla NSS documentation on the subject.
To configure client systems to trust the self-signed certificate, complete the following steps:
1. Copy the /etc/Pegasus/server.pem certificate from the managed system to the
/etc/pki/ca-trust/source/anchors/ directory on the client system. To do so, type the
following at a shell prompt as root:
scp root@hostname:/etc/Pegasus/server.pem /etc/pki/catrust/source/anchors/pegasus-hostname.pem
Replace hostname with the host name of the managed system. Note that this command only
works if the sshd service is running on the managed system and is configured to allow the
root user to log in to the system over the SSH protocol. For more information on how to
install and configure the sshd service and use the scp command to transfer files over the SSH
protocol, see Chapter 11, OpenSSH.
2. Verify the integrity of the certificate on the client system by comparing its check sum with the
check sum of the original file. To calculate the check sum of the /etc/Pegasus/server.pem
file on the managed system, run the following command as root on that system:
sha1sum /etc/Pegasus/server.pem
To calculate the check sum of the /etc/pki/catrust/source/anchors/pegasus-hostname.pem file on the client system, run the
following command on this system:
sha1sum /etc/pki/ca-trust/source/anchors/pegasus-hostname.pem
351
System Administrator's Guide
Replace hostname with the host name of the managed system.
3. Update the trust store on the client system by running the following command as root:
update-ca-trust extract
20.3.2. Managing Authority-signed Certificates with Identity Management
(Recommended)
The Identity Management feature of Red Hat Enterprise Linux provides a domain controller which
simplifies the management of SSL certificates within systems joined to the domain. Among others, the
Identity Management server provides an embedded Certificate Authority. See the Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 7 Linux Domain Identity, Authentication, and Policy Guide or the FreeIPA
documentation for information on how to join the client and managed systems to the domain.
It is necessary to register the managed system to Identity Management; for client systems the
registration is optional.
The following steps are required on the managed system:
1. Install the ipa-client package and register the system to Identity Management as described in
the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Linux Domain Identity, Authentication, and Policy Guide .
2. Copy the Identity Management signing certificate to the trusted store by typing the following
command as root:
cp /etc/ipa/ca.crt /etc/pki/ca-trust/source/anchors/ipa.crt
3. Update the trust store by running the following command as root:
update-ca-trust extract
4. Register Pegasus as a service in the Identity Management domain by running the following
command as a privileged domain user:
ipa service-add CIMOM/hostname
Replace hostname with the host name of the managed system.
This command can be run from any system in the Identity Management domain that has the
ipa-admintools package installed. It creates a service entry in Identity Management that can be
used to generate signed SSL certificates.
5. Back up the PEM files located in the /etc/Pegasus/ directory (recommended).
6. Retrieve the signed certificate by running the following command as root:
ipa-getcert request -f /etc/Pegasus/server.pem -k
/etc/Pegasus/file.pem -N CN=hostname -K CIMOM/hostname
Replace hostname with the host name of the managed system.
352
CHAPTER 20. OPENLMI
The certificate and key files are now kept in proper locations. The certmonger daemon
installed on the managed system by the ipa-client-install script ensures that the
certificate is kept up-to-date and renewed as necessary.
For more information, see the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Linux Domain Identity,
Authentication, and Policy Guide.
To register the client system and update the trust store, follow the steps below.
1. Install the ipa-client package and register the system to Identity Management as described in
the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Linux Domain Identity, Authentication, and Policy Guide .
2. Copy the Identity Management signing certificate to the trusted store by typing the following
command as root:
cp /etc/ipa/ca.crt /etc/pki/ca-trust/source/anchors/ipa.crt
3. Update the trust store by running the following command as root:
update-ca-trust extract
If the client system is not meant to be registered in Identity Management, complete the following steps
to update the trust store.
1. Copy the /etc/ipa/ca.crt file securely from any other system joined to the same Identity
Management domain to the trusted store /etc/pki/ca-trust/source/anchors/
directory as root.
2. Update the trust store by running the following command as root:
update-ca-trust extract
20.3.3. Managing Authority-signed Certificates Manually
Managing authority-signed certificates with other mechanisms than Identity Management requires
more manual configuration.
It is necessary to ensure that all of the clients trust the certificate of the authority that will be signing
the managed system certificates:
If a certificate authority is trusted by default, it is not necessary to perform any particular
steps to accomplish this.
If the certificate authority is not trusted by default, the certificate has to be imported on the
client and managed systems.
1. Copy the certificate to the trusted store by typing the following command as root:
cp /path/to/ca.crt /etc/pki/ca-trust/source/anchors/ca.crt
2. Update the trust store by running the following command as root:
update-ca-trust extract
353
System Administrator's Guide
On the managed system, complete the following steps:
1. Create a new SSL configuration file /etc/Pegasus/ssl.cnf to store information about the
certificate. The contents of this file must be similar to the following example:
[ req ]
distinguished_name
=
prompt
=
[ req_distinguished_name
C
=
ST
=
L
=
O
=
OU
=
CN
=
req_distinguished_name
no
]
US
Massachusetts
Westford
Fedora
Fedora OpenLMI
hostname
Replace hostname with the fully qualified domain name of the managed system.
2. Generate a private key on the managed system by using the following command as root:
openssl genrsa -out /etc/Pegasus/file.pem 1024
3. Generate a certificate signing request (CSR) by running this command as root:
openssl req -config /etc/Pegasus/ssl.cnf -new -key
/etc/Pegasus/file.pem -out /etc/Pegasus/server.csr
4. Send the /etc/Pegasus/server.csr file to the certificate authority for signing. The
detailed procedure of submitting the file depends on the particular certificate authority.
5. When the signed certificate is received from the certificate authority, save it as
/etc/Pegasus/server.pem.
6. Copy the certificate of the trusted authority to the Pegasus trust store to make sure that
Pegasus is capable of trusting its own certificate by running as root:
cp /path/to/ca.crt /etc/Pegasus/client.pem
After accomplishing all the described steps, the clients that trust the signing authority are able to
successfully communicate with the managed server's CIMOM.
IMPORTANT
Unlike the Identity Management solution, if the certificate expires and needs to be
renewed, all of the described manual steps have to be carried out again. It is
recommended to renew the certificates before they expire.
20.4. USING LMISHELL
LMIShell is an interactive client and non-interactive interpreter that can be used to access CIM objects
provided by the OpenPegasus CIMOM. It is based on the Python interpreter, but also implements
additional functions and classes for interacting with CIM objects.
354
CHAPTER 20. OPENLMI
20.4.1. Starting, Using, and Exiting LMIShell
Similarly to the Python interpreter, you can use LMIShell either as an interactive client, or as a noninteractive interpreter for LMIShell scripts.
Starting LMIShell in Interactive Mode
To start the LMIShell interpreter in interactive mode, run the lmishell command with no additional
arguments:
lmishell
By default, when LMIShell attempts to establish a connection with a CIMOM, it validates the server-side
certificate against the Certification Authorities trust store. To disable this validation, run the
lmishell command with the --noverify or -n command line option:
lmishell --noverify
Using Tab Completion
When running in interactive mode, the LMIShell interpreter allows you press the Tab key to complete
basic programming structures and CIM objects, including namespaces, classes, methods, and object
properties.
Browsing History
By default, LMIShell stores all commands you type at the interactive prompt in the
~/.lmishell_history file. This allows you to browse the command history and re-use already
entered lines in interactive mode without the need to type them at the prompt again. To move
backward in the command history, press the Up Arrow key or the Ctrl+p key combination. To move
forward in the command history, press the Down Arrow key or the Ctrl+n key combination.
LMIShell also supports an incremental reverse search. To look for a particular line in the command
history, press Ctrl+r and start typing any part of the command. For example:
> (reverse-i-search)`connect': c = connect("server.example.com",
"pegasus")
To clear the command history, use the clear_history() function as follows:
clear_history()
You can configure the number of lines that are stored in the command history by changing the value of
the history_length option in the ~/.lmishellrc configuration file. In addition, you can change
the location of the history file by changing the value of the history_file option in this configuration
file. For example, to set the location of the history file to ~/.lmishell_history and configure
LMIShell to store the maximum of 1000 lines in it, add the following lines to the ~/.lmishellrc file:
history_file = "~/.lmishell_history"
history_length = 1000
Handling Exceptions
By default, the LMIShell interpreter handles all exceptions and uses return values. To disable this
behavior in order to handle all exceptions in the code, use the use_exceptions() function as
follows:
355
System Administrator's Guide
use_exceptions()
To re-enable the automatic exception handling, use:
use_exception(False)
You can permanently disable the exception handling by changing the value of the use_exceptions
option in the ~/.lmishellrc configuration file to True:
use_exceptions = True
Configuring a Temporary Cache
With the default configuration, LMIShell connection objects use a temporary cache for storing CIM
class names and CIM classes in order to reduce network communication. To clear this temporary
cache, use the clear_cache() method as follows:
object_name.clear_cache()
Replace object_name with the name of a connection object.
To disable the temporary cache for a particular connection object, use the use_cache() method as
follows:
object_name.use_cache(False)
To enable it again, use:
object_name.use_cache(True)
You can permanently disable the temporary cache for connection objects by changing the value of the
use_cache option in the ~/.lmishellrc configuration file to False:
use_cache = False
Exiting LMIShell
To terminate the LMIShell interpreter and return to the shell prompt, press the Ctrl+d key
combination or issue the quit() function as follows:
> quit()
~]$
Running an LMIShell Script
To run an LMIShell script, run the lmishell command as follows:
lmishell file_name
Replace file_name with the name of the script. To inspect an LMIShell script after its execution, also
specify the --interact or -i command line option:
lmishell --interact file_name
356
CHAPTER 20. OPENLMI
The preferred file extension of LMIShell scripts is .lmi.
20.4.2. Connecting to a CIMOM
LMIShell allows you to connect to a CIMOM that is running either locally on the same system, or on a
remote machine accessible over the network.
Connecting to a Remote CIMOM
To access CIM objects provided by a remote CIMOM, create a connection object by using the
connect() function as follows:
connect(host_name, user_name[, password])
Replace host_name with the host name of the managed system, user_name with the name of a user that
is allowed to connect to the OpenPegasus CIMOM running on that system, and password with the
user's password. If the password is omitted, LMIShell prompts the user to enter it. The function returns
an LMIConnection object.
Example 20.1. Connecting to a Remote CIMOM
To connect to the OpenPegasus CIMOM running on server.example.com as user pegasus, type
the following at the interactive prompt:
> c = connect("server.example.com", "pegasus")
password:
>
Connecting to a Local CIMOM
LMIShell allows you to connect to a local CIMOM by using a Unix socket. For this type of connection,
you must run the LMIShell interpreter as the root user and the /var/run/togpegasus/cimxml.socket socket must exist.
To access CIM objects provided by a local CIMOM, create a connection object by using the connect()
function as follows:
connect(host_name)
Replace host_name with localhost, 127.0.0.1, or ::1. The function returns an LMIConnection
object or None.
Example 20.2. Connecting to a Local CIMOM
To connect to the OpenPegasus CIMOM running on localhost as the root user, type the
following at the interactive prompt:
> c = connect("localhost")
>
Verifying a Connection to a CIMOM
357
System Administrator's Guide
The connect() function returns either an LMIConnection object, or None if the connection could
not be established. In addition, when the connect() function fails to establish a connection, it prints
an error message to standard error output.
To verify that a connection to a CIMOM has been established successfully, use the isinstance()
function as follows:
isinstance(object_name, LMIConnection)
Replace object_name with the name of the connection object. This function returns True if object_name
is an LMIConnection object, or False otherwise.
Example 20.3. Verifying a Connection to a CIMOM
To verify that the c variable created in Example 20.1, “Connecting to a Remote CIMOM” contains an
LMIConnection object, type the following at the interactive prompt:
> isinstance(c, LMIConnection)
True
>
Alternatively, you can verify that c is not None:
> c is None
False
>
20.4.3. Working with Namespaces
LMIShell namespaces provide a natural means of organizing available classes and serve as a hierarchic
access point to other namespaces and classes. The root namespace is the first entry point of a
connection object.
Listing Available Namespaces
To list all available namespaces, use the print_namespaces() method as follows:
object_name.print_namespaces()
Replace object_name with the name of the object to inspect. This method prints available namespaces
to standard output.
To get a list of available namespaces, access the object attribute namespaces:
object_name.namespaces
This returns a list of strings.
Example 20.4. Listing Available Namespaces
358
CHAPTER 20. OPENLMI
To inspect the root namespace object of the c connection object created in Example 20.1,
“Connecting to a Remote CIMOM” and list all available namespaces, type the following at the
interactive prompt:
> c.root.print_namespaces()
cimv2
interop
PG_InterOp
PG_Internal
>
To assign a list of these namespaces to a variable named root_namespaces, type:
> root_namespaces = c.root.namespaces
>
Accessing Namespace Objects
To access a particular namespace object, use the following syntax:
object_name.namespace_name
Replace object_name with the name of the object to inspect and namespace_name with the name of the
namespace to access. This returns an LMINamespace object.
Example 20.5. Accessing Namespace Objects
To access the cimv2 namespace of the c connection object created in Example 20.1, “Connecting
to a Remote CIMOM” and assign it to a variable named ns, type the following at the interactive
prompt:
> ns = c.root.cimv2
>
20.4.4. Working with Classes
LMIShell classes represent classes provided by a CIMOM. You can access and list their properties,
methods, instances, instance names, and ValueMap properties, print their documentation strings, and
create new instances and instance names.
Listing Available Classes
To list all available classes in a particular namespace, use the print_classes() method as follows:
namespace_object.print_classes()
Replace namespace_object with the namespace object to inspect. This method prints available classes
to standard output.
To get a list of available classes, use the classes() method:
namespace_object.classes()
359
System Administrator's Guide
This method returns a list of strings.
Example 20.6. Listing Available Classes
To inspect the ns namespace object created in Example 20.5, “Accessing Namespace Objects” and
list all available classes, type the following at the interactive prompt:
> ns.print_classes()
CIM_CollectionInSystem
CIM_ConcreteIdentity
CIM_ControlledBy
CIM_DeviceSAPImplementation
CIM_MemberOfStatusCollection
...
>
To assign a list of these classes to a variable named cimv2_classes, type:
> cimv2_classes = ns.classes()
>
Accessing Class Objects
To access a particular class object that is provided by the CIMOM, use the following syntax:
namespace_object.class_name
Replace namespace_object with the name of the namespace object to inspect and class_name with the
name of the class to access.
Example 20.7. Accessing Class Objects
To access the LMI_IPNetworkConnection class of the ns namespace object created in
Example 20.5, “Accessing Namespace Objects” and assign it to a variable named cls, type the
following at the interactive prompt:
> cls = ns.LMI_IPNetworkConnection
>
Examining Class Objects
All class objects store information about their name and the namespace they belong to, as well as
detailed class documentation. To get the name of a particular class object, use the following syntax:
class_object.classname
Replace class_object with the name of the class object to inspect. This returns a string representation
of the object name.
To get information about the namespace a class object belongs to, use:
class_object.namespace
360
CHAPTER 20. OPENLMI
This returns a string representation of the namespace.
To display detailed class documentation, use the doc() method as follows:
class_object.doc()
Example 20.8. Examining Class Objects
To inspect the cls class object created in Example 20.7, “Accessing Class Objects” and display its
name and corresponding namespace, type the following at the interactive prompt:
> cls.classname
'LMI_IPNetworkConnection'
> cls.namespace
'root/cimv2'
>
To access class documentation, type:
> cls.doc()
Class: LMI_IPNetworkConnection
SuperClass: CIM_IPNetworkConnection
[qualifier] string UMLPackagePath: 'CIM::Network::IP'
[qualifier] string Version: '0.1.0'
...
Listing Available Methods
To list all available methods of a particular class object, use the print_methods() method as follows:
class_object.print_methods()
Replace class_object with the name of the class object to inspect. This method prints available methods
to standard output.
To get a list of available methods, use the methods() method:
class_object.methods()
This method returns a list of strings.
Example 20.9. Listing Available Methods
To inspect the cls class object created in Example 20.7, “Accessing Class Objects” and list all
available methods, type the following at the interactive prompt:
> cls.print_methods()
RequestStateChange
>
To assign a list of these methods to a variable named service_methods, type:
361
System Administrator's Guide
> service_methods = cls.methods()
>
Listing Available Properties
To list all available properties of a particular class object, use the print_properties() method as
follows:
class_object.print_properties()
Replace class_object with the name of the class object to inspect. This method prints available
properties to standard output.
To get a list of available properties, use the properties() method:
class_object.properties()
This method returns a list of strings.
Example 20.10. Listing Available Properties
To inspect the cls class object created in Example 20.7, “Accessing Class Objects” and list all
available properties, type the following at the interactive prompt:
> cls.print_properties()
RequestedState
HealthState
StatusDescriptions
TransitioningToState
Generation
...
>
To assign a list of these classes to a variable named service_properties, type:
> service_properties = cls.properties()
>
Listing and Viewing ValueMap Properties
CIM classes may contain ValueMap properties in their Managed Object Format ( MOF) definition.
ValueMap properties contain constant values, which may be useful when calling methods or checking
returned values.
To list all available ValueMap properties of a particular class object, use the
print_valuemap_properties() method as follows:
class_object.print_valuemap_properties()
Replace class_object with the name of the class object to inspect. This method prints available
ValueMap properties to standard output:
To get a list of available ValueMap properties, use the valuemap_properties() method:
362
CHAPTER 20. OPENLMI
class_object.valuemap_properties()
This method returns a list of strings.
Example 20.11. Listing ValueMap Properties
To inspect the cls class object created in Example 20.7, “Accessing Class Objects” and list all
available ValueMap properties, type the following at the interactive prompt:
> cls.print_valuemap_properties()
RequestedState
HealthState
TransitioningToState
DetailedStatus
OperationalStatus
...
>
To assign a list of these ValueMap properties to a variable named
service_valuemap_properties, type:
> service_valuemap_properties = cls.valuemap_properties()
>
To access a particular ValueMap property, use the following syntax:
class_object.valuemap_propertyValues
Replace valuemap_property with the name of the ValueMap property to access.
To list all available constant values, use the print_values() method as follows:
class_object.valuemap_propertyValues.print_values()
This method prints available named constant values to standard output. You can also get a list of
available constant values by using the values() method:
class_object.valuemap_propertyValues.values()
This method returns a list of strings.
Example 20.12. Accessing ValueMap Properties
Example 20.11, “Listing ValueMap Properties” mentions a ValueMap property named
RequestedState. To inspect this property and list available constant values, type the following at
the interactive prompt:
> cls.RequestedStateValues.print_values()
Reset
NoChange
NotApplicable
Quiesce
363
System Administrator's Guide
Unknown
...
>
To assign a list of these constant values to a variable named requested_state_values, type:
> requested_state_values = cls.RequestedStateValues.values()
>
To access a particular constant value, use the following syntax:
class_object.valuemap_propertyValues.constant_value_name
Replace constant_value_name with the name of the constant value. Alternatively, you can use the
value() method as follows:
class_object.valuemap_propertyValues.value("constant_value_name")
To determine the name of a particular constant value, use the value_name() method:
class_object.valuemap_propertyValues.value_name("constant_value")
This method returns a string.
Example 20.13. Accessing Constant Values
Example 20.12, “Accessing ValueMap Properties” shows that the RequestedState property
provides a constant value named Reset. To access this named constant value, type the following at
the interactive prompt:
> cls.RequestedStateValues.Reset
11
> cls.RequestedStateValues.value("Reset")
11
>
To determine the name of this constant value, type:
> cls.RequestedStateValues.value_name(11)
u'Reset'
>
Fetching a CIMClass Object
Many class methods do not require access to a CIMClass object, which is why LMIShell only fetches
this object from the CIMOM when a called method actually needs it. To fetch the CIMClass object
manually, use the fetch() method as follows:
class_object.fetch()
364
CHAPTER 20. OPENLMI
Replace class_object with the name of the class object. Note that methods that require access to a
CIMClass object fetch it automatically.
20.4.5. Working with Instances
LMIShell instances represent instances provided by a CIMOM. You can get and set their properties, list
and call their methods, print their documentation strings, get a list of associated or association objects,
push modified objects to the CIMOM, and delete individual instances from the CIMOM.
Accessing Instances
To get a list of all available instances of a particular class object, use the instances() method as
follows:
class_object.instances()
Replace class_object with the name of the class object to inspect. This method returns a list of
LMIInstance objects.
To access the first instance of a class object, use the first_instance() method:
class_object.first_instance()
This method returns an LMIInstance object.
In addition to listing all instances or returning the first one, both instances() and
first_instance() support an optional argument to allow you to filter the results:
class_object.instances(criteria)
class_object.first_instance(criteria)
Replace criteria with a dictionary consisting of key-value pairs, where keys represent instance
properties and values represent required values of these properties.
Example 20.14. Accessing Instances
To find the first instance of the cls class object created in Example 20.7, “Accessing Class
Objects” that has the ElementName property equal to eth0 and assign it to a variable named
device, type the following at the interactive prompt:
> device = cls.first_instance({"ElementName": "eth0"})
>
Examining Instances
All instance objects store information about their class name and the namespace they belong to, as
well as detailed documentation about their properties and values. In addition, instance objects allow
you to retrieve a unique identification object.
To get the class name of a particular instance object, use the following syntax:
instance_object.classname
365
System Administrator's Guide
Replace instance_object with the name of the instance object to inspect. This returns a string
representation of the class name.
To get information about the namespace an instance object belongs to, use:
instance_object.namespace
This returns a string representation of the namespace.
To retrieve a unique identification object for an instance object, use:
instance_object.path
This returns an LMIInstanceName object.
Finally, to display detailed documentation, use the doc() method as follows:
instance_object.doc()
Example 20.15. Examining Instances
To inspect the device instance object created in Example 20.14, “Accessing Instances” and
display its class name and the corresponding namespace, type the following at the interactive
prompt:
> device.classname
u'LMI_IPNetworkConnection'
> device.namespace
'root/cimv2'
>
To access instance object documentation, type:
> device.doc()
Instance of LMI_IPNetworkConnection
[property] uint16 RequestedState = '12'
[property] uint16 HealthState
[property array] string [] StatusDescriptions
...
Creating New Instances
Certain CIM providers allow you to create new instances of specific classes objects. To create a new
instance of a class object, use the create_instance() method as follows:
class_object.create_instance(properties)
Replace class_object with the name of the class object and properties with a dictionary that consists of
key-value pairs, where keys represent instance properties and values represent property values. This
method returns an LMIInstance object.
366
CHAPTER 20. OPENLMI
Example 20.16. Creating New Instances
The LMI_Group class represents system groups and the LMI_Account class represents user
accounts on the managed system. To use the ns namespace object created in Example 20.5,
“Accessing Namespace Objects”, create instances of these two classes for the system group named
pegasus and the user named lmishell-user, and assign them to variables named group and
user, type the following at the interactive prompt:
> group = ns.LMI_Group.first_instance({"Name" : "pegasus"})
> user = ns.LMI_Account.first_instance({"Name" : "lmishell-user"})
>
To get an instance of the LMI_Identity class for the lmishell-user user, type:
> identity = user.first_associator(ResultClass="LMI_Identity")
>
The LMI_MemberOfGroup class represents system group membership. To use the
LMI_MemberOfGroup class to add the lmishell-user to the pegasus group, create a new
instance of this class as follows:
> ns.LMI_MemberOfGroup.create_instance({
...
"Member" : identity.path,
...
"Collection" : group.path})
LMIInstance(classname="LMI_MemberOfGroup", ...)
>
Deleting Individual Instances
To delete a particular instance from the CIMOM, use the delete() method as follows:
instance_object.delete()
Replace instance_object with the name of the instance object to delete. This method returns a boolean.
Note that after deleting an instance, its properties and methods become inaccessible.
Example 20.17. Deleting Individual Instances
The LMI_Account class represents user accounts on the managed system. To use the ns
namespace object created in Example 20.5, “Accessing Namespace Objects” , create an instance of
the LMI_Account class for the user named lmishell-user, and assign it to a variable named
user, type the following at the interactive prompt:
> user = ns.LMI_Account.first_instance({"Name" : "lmishell-user"})
>
To delete this instance and remove the lmishell-user from the system, type:
> user.delete()
True
>
367
System Administrator's Guide
Listing and Accessing Available Properties
To list all available properties of a particular instance object, use the print_properties() method
as follows:
instance_object.print_properties()
Replace instance_object with the name of the instance object to inspect. This method prints available
properties to standard output.
To get a list of available properties, use the properties() method:
instance_object.properties()
This method returns a list of strings.
Example 20.18. Listing Available Properties
To inspect the device instance object created in Example 20.14, “Accessing Instances” and list all
available properties, type the following at the interactive prompt:
> device.print_properties()
RequestedState
HealthState
StatusDescriptions
TransitioningToState
Generation
...
>
To assign a list of these properties to a variable named device_properties, type:
> device_properties = device.properties()
>
To get the current value of a particular property, use the following syntax:
instance_object.property_name
Replace property_name with the name of the property to access.
To modify the value of a particular property, assign a value to it as follows:
instance_object.property_name = value
Replace value with the new value of the property. Note that in order to propagate the change to the
CIMOM, you must also execute the push() method:
instance_object.push()
This method returns a three-item tuple consisting of a return value, return value parameters, and an
error string.
368
CHAPTER 20. OPENLMI
Example 20.19. Accessing Individual Properties
To inspect the device instance object created in Example 20.14, “Accessing Instances” and
display the value of the property named SystemName, type the following at the interactive prompt:
> device.SystemName
u'server.example.com'
>
Listing and Using Available Methods
To list all available methods of a particular instance object, use the print_methods() method as
follows:
instance_object.print_methods()
Replace instance_object with the name of the instance object to inspect. This method prints available
methods to standard output.
To get a list of available methods, use the method() method:
instance_object.methods()
This method returns a list of strings.
Example 20.20. Listing Available Methods
To inspect the device instance object created in Example 20.14, “Accessing Instances” and list all
available methods, type the following at the interactive prompt:
> device.print_methods()
RequestStateChange
>
To assign a list of these methods to a variable named network_device_methods, type:
> network_device_methods = device.methods()
>
To call a particular method, use the following syntax:
instance_object.method_name(
parameter=value,
...)
Replace instance_object with the name of the instance object to use, method_name with the name of the
method to call, parameter with the name of the parameter to set, and value with the value of this
parameter. Methods return a three-item tuple consisting of a return value, return value parameters,
and an error string.
369
System Administrator's Guide
IMPORTANT
LMIInstance objects do not automatically refresh their contents (properties, methods,
qualifiers, and so on). To do so, use the refresh() method as described below.
Example 20.21. Using Methods
The PG_ComputerSystem class represents the system. To create an instance of this class by using
the ns namespace object created in Example 20.5, “Accessing Namespace Objects” and assign it to
a variable named sys, type the following at the interactive prompt:
> sys = ns.PG_ComputerSystem.first_instance()
>
The LMI_AccountManagementService class implements methods that allow you to manage
users and groups in the system. To create an instance of this class and assign it to a variable named
acc, type:
> acc = ns.LMI_AccountManagementService.first_instance()
>
To create a new user named lmishell-user in the system, use the CreateAccount() method
as follows:
> acc.CreateAccount(Name="lmishell-user", System=sys)
LMIReturnValue(rval=0, rparams=NocaseDict({u'Account':
LMIInstanceName(classname="LMI_Account"...), u'Identities':
[LMIInstanceName(classname="LMI_Identity"...),
LMIInstanceName(classname="LMI_Identity"...)]}), errorstr='')
LMIShell support synchronous method calls: when you use a synchronous method, LMIShell waits for
the corresponding Job object to change its state to “finished” and then returns the return parameters
of this job. LMIShell is able to perform a synchronous method call if the given method returns an object
of one of the following classes:
LMI_StorageJob
LMI_SoftwareInstallationJob
LMI_NetworkJob
LMIShell first tries to use indications as the waiting method. If it fails, it uses a polling method instead.
To perform a synchronous method call, use the following syntax:
instance_object.Syncmethod_name(
parameter=value,
...)
Replace instance_object with the name of the instance object to use, method_name with the name of the
method to call, parameter with the name of the parameter to set, and value with the value of this
parameter. All synchronous methods have the Sync prefix in their name and return a three-item tuple
370
CHAPTER 20. OPENLMI
consisting of the job's return value, job's return value parameters, and job's error string.
You can also force LMIShell to use only polling method. To do so, specify the PreferPolling
parameter as follows:
instance_object.Syncmethod_name(
PreferPolling=True
parameter=value,
...)
Listing and Viewing ValueMap Parameters
CIM methods may contain ValueMap parameters in their Managed Object Format ( MOF) definition.
ValueMap parameters contain constant values.
To list all available ValueMap parameters of a particular method, use the
print_valuemap_parameters() method as follows:
instance_object.method_name.print_valuemap_parameters()
Replace instance_object with the name of the instance object and method_name with the name of the
method to inspect. This method prints available ValueMap parameters to standard output.
To get a list of available ValueMap parameters, use the valuemap_parameters() method:
instance_object.method_name.valuemap_parameters()
This method returns a list of strings.
Example 20.22. Listing ValueMap Parameters
To inspect the acc instance object created in Example 20.21, “Using Methods” and list all available
ValueMap parameters of the CreateAccount() method, type the following at the interactive
prompt:
> acc.CreateAccount.print_valuemap_parameters()
CreateAccount
>
To assign a list of these ValueMap parameters to a variable named
create_account_parameters, type:
> create_account_parameters = acc.CreateAccount.valuemap_parameters()
>
To access a particular ValueMap parameter, use the following syntax:
instance_object.method_name.valuemap_parameterValues
Replace valuemap_parameter with the name of the ValueMap parameter to access.
To list all available constant values, use the print_values() method as follows:
371
System Administrator's Guide
instance_object.method_name.valuemap_parameterValues.print_values()
This method prints available named constant values to standard output. You can also get a list of
available constant values by using the values() method:
instance_object.method_name.valuemap_parameterValues.values()
This method returns a list of strings.
Example 20.23. Accessing ValueMap Parameters
Example 20.22, “Listing ValueMap Parameters” mentions a ValueMap parameter named
CreateAccount. To inspect this parameter and list available constant values, type the following at
the interactive prompt:
> acc.CreateAccount.CreateAccountValues.print_values()
Operationunsupported
Failed
Unabletosetpasswordusercreated
Unabletocreatehomedirectoryusercreatedandpasswordset
Operationcompletedsuccessfully
>
To assign a list of these constant values to a variable named create_account_values, type:
> create_account_values = acc.CreateAccount.CreateAccountValues.values()
>
To access a particular constant value, use the following syntax:
instance_object.method_name.valuemap_parameterValues.constant_value_name
Replace constant_value_name with the name of the constant value. Alternatively, you can use the
value() method as follows:
instance_object.method_name.valuemap_parameterValues.value("constant_value
_name")
To determine the name of a particular constant value, use the value_name() method:
instance_object.method_name.valuemap_parameterValues.value_name("constant_
value")
This method returns a string.
Example 20.24. Accessing Constant Values
Example 20.23, “Accessing ValueMap Parameters” shows that the CreateAccount ValueMap
parameter provides a constant value named Failed. To access this named constant value, type the
following at the interactive prompt:
372
CHAPTER 20. OPENLMI
> acc.CreateAccount.CreateAccountValues.Failed
2
> acc.CreateAccount.CreateAccountValues.value("Failed")
2
>
To determine the name of this constant value, type:
> acc.CreateAccount.CreateAccountValues.value_name(2)
u'Failed'
>
Refreshing Instance Objects
Local objects used by LMIShell, which represent CIM objects at CIMOM side, can get outdated, if such
objects change while working with LMIShell's ones. To update the properties and methods of a
particular instance object, use the refresh() method as follows:
instance_object.refresh()
Replace instance_object with the name of the object to refresh. This method returns a three-item tuple
consisting of a return value, return value parameter, and an error string.
Example 20.25. Refreshing Instance Objects
To update the properties and methods of the device instance object created in Example 20.14,
“Accessing Instances”, type the following at the interactive prompt:
> device.refresh()
LMIReturnValue(rval=True, rparams=NocaseDict({}), errorstr='')
>
Displaying MOF Representation
To display the Managed Object Format (MOF) representation of an instance object, use the tomof()
method as follows:
instance_object.tomof()
Replace instance_object with the name of the instance object to inspect. This method prints the MOF
representation of the object to standard output.
Example 20.26. Displaying MOF Representation
To display the MOF representation of the device instance object created in Example 20.14,
“Accessing Instances”, type the following at the interactive prompt:
> device.tomof()
instance of LMI_IPNetworkConnection {
RequestedState = 12;
HealthState = NULL;
373
System Administrator's Guide
StatusDescriptions = NULL;
TransitioningToState = 12;
...
20.4.6. Working with Instance Names
LMIShell instance names are objects that hold a set of primary keys and their values. This type of an
object exactly identifies an instance.
Accessing Instance Names
CIMInstance objects are identified by CIMInstanceName objects. To get a list of all available
instance name objects, use the instance_names() method as follows:
class_object.instance_names()
Replace class_object with the name of the class object to inspect. This method returns a list of
LMIInstanceName objects.
To access the first instance name object of a class object, use the first_instance_name() method:
class_object.first_instance_name()
This method returns an LMIInstanceName object.
In addition to listing all instance name objects or returning the first one, both instance_names() and
first_instance_name() support an optional argument to allow you to filter the results:
class_object.instance_names(criteria)
class_object.first_instance_name(criteria)
Replace criteria with a dictionary consisting of key-value pairs, where keys represent key properties
and values represent required values of these key properties.
Example 20.27. Accessing Instance Names
To find the first instance name of the cls class object created in Example 20.7, “Accessing Class
Objects” that has the Name key property equal to eth0 and assign it to a variable named
device_name, type the following at the interactive prompt:
> device_name = cls.first_instance_name({"Name": "eth0"})
>
Examining Instance Names
All instance name objects store information about their class name and the namespace they belong to.
To get the class name of a particular instance name object, use the following syntax:
instance_name_object.classname
374
CHAPTER 20. OPENLMI
Replace instance_name_object with the name of the instance name object to inspect. This returns a
string representation of the class name.
To get information about the namespace an instance name object belongs to, use:
instance_name_object.namespace
This returns a string representation of the namespace.
Example 20.28. Examining Instance Names
To inspect the device_name instance name object created in Example 20.27, “Accessing Instance
Names” and display its class name and the corresponding namespace, type the following at the
interactive prompt:
> device_name.classname
u'LMI_IPNetworkConnection'
> device_name.namespace
'root/cimv2'
>
Creating New Instance Names
LMIShell allows you to create a new wrapped CIMInstanceName object if you know all primary keys
of a remote object. This instance name object can then be used to retrieve the whole instance object.
To create a new instance name of a class object, use the new_instance_name() method as follows:
class_object.new_instance_name(key_properties)
Replace class_object with the name of the class object and key_properties with a dictionary that
consists of key-value pairs, where keys represent key properties and values represent key property
values. This method returns an LMIInstanceName object.
Example 20.29. Creating New Instance Names
The LMI_Account class represents user accounts on the managed system. To use the ns
namespace object created in Example 20.5, “Accessing Namespace Objects” and create a new
instance name of the LMI_Account class representing the lmishell-user user on the managed
system, type the following at the interactive prompt:
> instance_name = ns.LMI_Account.new_instance_name({
...
"CreationClassName" : "LMI_Account",
...
"Name" : "lmishell-user",
...
"SystemCreationClassName" : "PG_ComputerSystem",
...
"SystemName" : "server"})
>
Listing and Accessing Key Properties
To list all available key properties of a particular instance name object, use the
print_key_properties() method as follows:
375
System Administrator's Guide
instance_name_object.print_key_properties()
Replace instance_name_object with the name of the instance name object to inspect. This method
prints available key properties to standard output.
To get a list of available key properties, use the key_properties() method:
instance_name_object.key_properties()
This method returns a list of strings.
Example 20.30. Listing Available Key Properties
To inspect the device_name instance name object created in Example 20.27, “Accessing Instance
Names” and list all available key properties, type the following at the interactive prompt:
> device_name.print_key_properties()
CreationClassName
SystemName
Name
SystemCreationClassName
>
To assign a list of these key properties to a variable named device_name_properties, type:
> device_name_properties = device_name.key_properties()
>
To get the current value of a particular key property, use the following syntax:
instance_name_object.key_property_name
Replace key_property_name with the name of the key property to access.
Example 20.31. Accessing Individual Key Properties
To inspect the device_name instance name object created in Example 20.27, “Accessing Instance
Names” and display the value of the key property named SystemName, type the following at the
interactive prompt:
> device_name.SystemName
u'server.example.com'
>
Converting Instance Names to Instances
Each instance name can be converted to an instance. To do so, use the to_instance() method as
follows:
instance_name_object.to_instance()
376
CHAPTER 20. OPENLMI
Replace instance_name_object with the name of the instance name object to convert. This method
returns an LMIInstance object.
Example 20.32. Converting Instance Names to Instances
To convert the device_name instance name object created in Example 20.27, “Accessing
Instance Names” to an instance object and assign it to a variable named device, type the following
at the interactive prompt:
> device = device_name.to_instance()
>
20.4.7. Working with Associated Objects
The Common Information Model defines an association relationship between managed objects.
Accessing Associated Instances
To get a list of all objects associated with a particular instance object, use the associators()
method as follows:
instance_object.associators(
AssocClass=class_name,
ResultClass=class_name,
ResultRole=role,
IncludeQualifiers=include_qualifiers,
IncludeClassOrigin=include_class_origin,
PropertyList=property_list)
To access the first object associated with a particular instance object, use the first_associator()
method:
instance_object.first_associator(
AssocClass=class_name,
ResultClass=class_name,
ResultRole=role,
IncludeQualifiers=include_qualifiers,
IncludeClassOrigin=include_class_origin,
PropertyList=property_list)
Replace instance_object with the name of the instance object to inspect. You can filter the results by
specifying the following parameters:
AssocClass — Each returned object must be associated with the source object through an
instance of this class or one of its subclasses. The default value is None.
ResultClass — Each returned object must be either an instance of this class or one of its
subclasses, or it must be this class or one of its subclasses. The default value is None.
Role — Each returned object must be associated with the source object through an association
in which the source object plays the specified role. The name of the property in the association
class that refers to the source object must match the value of this parameter. The default value
is None.
377
System Administrator's Guide
ResultRole — Each returned object must be associated with the source object through an
association in which the returned object plays the specified role. The name of the property in
the association class that refers to the returned object must match the value of this parameter.
The default value is None.
The remaining parameters refer to:
IncludeQualifiers — A boolean indicating whether all qualifiers of each object (including
qualifiers on the object and on any returned properties) should be included as QUALIFIER
elements in the response. The default value is False.
IncludeClassOrigin — A boolean indicating whether the CLASSORIGIN attribute should be
present on all appropriate elements in each returned object. The default value is False.
PropertyList — The members of this list define one or more property names. Returned
objects will not include elements for any properties missing from this list. If PropertyList is
an empty list, no properties are included in returned objects. If it is None, no additional filtering
is defined. The default value is None.
Example 20.33. Accessing Associated Instances
The LMI_StorageExtent class represents block devices available in the system. To use the ns
namespace object created in Example 20.5, “Accessing Namespace Objects” , create an instance of
the LMI_StorageExtent class for the block device named /dev/vda, and assign it to a variable
named vda, type the following at the interactive prompt:
> vda = ns.LMI_StorageExtent.first_instance({
...
"DeviceID" : "/dev/vda"})
>
To get a list of all disk partitions on this block device and assign it to a variable named
vda_partitions, use the associators() method as follows:
> vda_partitions = vda.associators(ResultClass="LMI_DiskPartition")
>
Accessing Associated Instance Names
To get a list of all associated instance names of a particular instance object, use the
associator_names() method as follows:
instance_object.associator_names(
AssocClass=class_name,
ResultClass=class_name,
Role=role,
ResultRole=role)
To access the first associated instance name of a particular instance object, use the
first_associator_name() method:
instance_object.first_associator_name(
AssocClass=class_object,
ResultClass=class_object,
378
CHAPTER 20. OPENLMI
Role=role,
ResultRole=role)
Replace instance_object with the name of the instance object to inspect. You can filter the results by
specifying the following parameters:
AssocClass — Each returned name identifies an object that must be associated with the
source object through an instance of this class or one of its subclasses. The default value is
None.
ResultClass — Each returned name identifies an object that must be either an instance of
this class or one of its subclasses, or it must be this class or one of its subclasses. The default
value is None.
Role — Each returned name identifies an object that must be associated with the source object
through an association in which the source object plays the specified role. The name of the
property in the association class that refers to the source object must match the value of this
parameter. The default value is None.
ResultRole — Each returned name identifies an object that must be associated with the
source object through an association in which the returned named object plays the specified
role. The name of the property in the association class that refers to the returned object must
match the value of this parameter. The default value is None.
Example 20.34. Accessing Associated Instance Names
To use the vda instance object created in Example 20.33, “Accessing Associated Instances” , get a
list of its associated instance names, and assign it to a variable named vda_partitions, type:
> vda_partitions = vda.associator_names(ResultClass="LMI_DiskPartition")
>
20.4.8. Working with Association Objects
The Common Information Model defines an association relationship between managed objects.
Association objects define the relationship between two other objects.
Accessing Association Instances
To get a list of association objects that refer to a particular target object, use the references()
method as follows:
instance_object.references(
ResultClass=class_name,
Role=role,
IncludeQualifiers=include_qualifiers,
IncludeClassOrigin=include_class_origin,
PropertyList=property_list)
To access the first association object that refers to a particular target object, use the
first_reference() method:
instance_object.first_reference(
...
ResultClass=class_name,
379
System Administrator's Guide
...
...
...
...
>
Role=role,
IncludeQualifiers=include_qualifiers,
IncludeClassOrigin=include_class_origin,
PropertyList=property_list)
Replace instance_object with the name of the instance object to inspect. You can filter the results by
specifying the following parameters:
ResultClass — Each returned object must be either an instance of this class or one of its
subclasses, or it must be this class or one of its subclasses. The default value is None.
Role — Each returned object must refer to the target object through a property with a name
that matches the value of this parameter. The default value is None.
The remaining parameters refer to:
IncludeQualifiers — A boolean indicating whether each object (including qualifiers on the
object and on any returned properties) should be included as a QUALIFIER element in the
response. The default value is False.
IncludeClassOrigin — A boolean indicating whether the CLASSORIGIN attribute should be
present on all appropriate elements in each returned object. The default value is False.
PropertyList — The members of this list define one or more property names. Returned
objects will not include elements for any properties missing from this list. If PropertyList is
an empty list, no properties are included in returned objects. If it is None, no additional filtering
is defined. The default value is None.
Example 20.35. Accessing Association Instances
The LMI_LANEndpoint class represents a communication endpoint associated with a certain
network interface device. To use the ns namespace object created in Example 20.5, “Accessing
Namespace Objects”, create an instance of the LMI_LANEndpoint class for the network interface
device named eth0, and assign it to a variable named lan_endpoint, type the following at the
interactive prompt:
> lan_endpoint = ns.LMI_LANEndpoint.first_instance({
...
"Name" : "eth0"})
>
To access the first association object that refers to an LMI_BindsToLANEndpoint object and
assign it to a variable named bind, type:
> bind = lan_endpoint.first_reference(
...
ResultClass="LMI_BindsToLANEndpoint")
>
You can now use the Dependent property to access the dependent LMI_IPProtocolEndpoint
class that represents the IP address of the corresponding network interface device:
> ip = bind.Dependent.to_instance()
> print ip.IPv4Address
192.168.122.1
380
CHAPTER 20. OPENLMI
>
Accessing Association Instance Names
To get a list of association instance names of a particular instance object, use the
reference_names() method as follows:
instance_object.reference_names(
ResultClass=class_name,
Role=role)
To access the first association instance name of a particular instance object, use the
first_reference_name() method:
instance_object.first_reference_name(
ResultClass=class_name,
Role=role)
Replace instance_object with the name of the instance object to inspect. You can filter the results by
specifying the following parameters:
ResultClass — Each returned object name identifies either an instance of this class or one of
its subclasses, or this class or one of its subclasses. The default value is None.
Role — Each returned object identifies an object that refers to the target instance through a
property with a name that matches the value of this parameter. The default value is None.
Example 20.36. Accessing Association Instance Names
To use the lan_endpoint instance object created in Example 20.35, “Accessing Association
Instances”, access the first association instance name that refers to an
LMI_BindsToLANEndpoint object, and assign it to a variable named bind, type:
> bind = lan_endpoint.first_reference_name(
...
ResultClass="LMI_BindsToLANEndpoint")
You can now use the Dependent property to access the dependent LMI_IPProtocolEndpoint
class that represents the IP address of the corresponding network interface device:
> ip = bind.Dependent.to_instance()
> print ip.IPv4Address
192.168.122.1
>
20.4.9. Working with Indications
Indication is a reaction to a specific event that occurs in response to a particular change in data.
LMIShell can subscribe to an indication in order to receive such event responses.
Subscribing to Indications
To subscribe to an indication, use the subscribe_indication() method as follows:
381
System Administrator's Guide
connection_object.subscribe_indication(
QueryLanguage="WQL",
Query='SELECT * FROM CIM_InstModification',
Name="cpu",
CreationNamespace="root/interop",
SubscriptionCreationClassName="CIM_IndicationSubscription",
FilterCreationClassName="CIM_IndicationFilter",
FilterSystemCreationClassName="CIM_ComputerSystem",
FilterSourceNamespace="root/cimv2",
HandlerCreationClassName="CIM_IndicationHandlerCIMXML",
HandlerSystemCreationClassName="CIM_ComputerSystem",
Destination="http://host_name:5988")
Alternatively, you can use a shorter version of the method call as follows:
connection_object.subscribe_indication(
Query='SELECT * FROM CIM_InstModification',
Name="cpu",
Destination="http://host_name:5988")
Replace connection_object with a connection object and host_name with the host name of the system
you want to deliver the indications to.
By default, all subscriptions created by the LMIShell interpreter are automatically deleted when the
interpreter terminates. To change this behavior, pass the Permanent=True keyword parameter to the
subscribe_indication() method call. This will prevent LMIShell from deleting the subscription.
Example 20.37. Subscribing to Indications
To use the c connection object created in Example 20.1, “Connecting to a Remote CIMOM” and
subscribe to an indication named cpu, type the following at the interactive prompt:
> c.subscribe_indication(
...
QueryLanguage="WQL",
...
Query='SELECT * FROM CIM_InstModification',
...
Name="cpu",
...
CreationNamespace="root/interop",
...
SubscriptionCreationClassName="CIM_IndicationSubscription",
...
FilterCreationClassName="CIM_IndicationFilter",
...
FilterSystemCreationClassName="CIM_ComputerSystem",
...
FilterSourceNamespace="root/cimv2",
...
HandlerCreationClassName="CIM_IndicationHandlerCIMXML",
...
HandlerSystemCreationClassName="CIM_ComputerSystem",
...
Destination="http://server.example.com:5988")
LMIReturnValue(rval=True, rparams=NocaseDict({}), errorstr='')
>
Listing Subscribed Indications
To list all the subscribed indications, use the print_subscribed_indications() method as
follows:
connection_object.print_subscribed_indications()
382
CHAPTER 20. OPENLMI
Replace connection_object with the name of the connection object to inspect. This method prints
subscribed indications to standard output.
To get a list of subscribed indications, use the subscribed_indications() method:
connection_object.subscribed_indications()
This method returns a list of strings.
Example 20.38. Listing Subscribed Indications
To inspect the c connection object created in Example 20.1, “Connecting to a Remote CIMOM” and
list all subscribed indications, type the following at the interactive prompt:
> c.print_subscribed_indications()
>
To assign a list of these indications to a variable named indications, type:
> indications = c.subscribed_indications()
>
Unsubscribing from Indications
By default, all subscriptions created by the LMIShell interpreter are automatically deleted when the
interpreter terminates. To delete an individual subscription sooner, use the
unsubscribe_indication() method as follows:
connection_object.unsubscribe_indication(indication_name)
Replace connection_object with the name of the connection object and indication_name with the name
of the indication to delete.
To delete all subscriptions, use the unsubscribe_all_indications() method:
connection_object.unsubscribe_all_indications()
Example 20.39. Unsubscribing from Indications
To use the c connection object created in Example 20.1, “Connecting to a Remote CIMOM” and
unsubscribe from the indication created in Example 20.37, “Subscribing to Indications”, type the
following at the interactive prompt:
> c.unsubscribe_indication('cpu')
LMIReturnValue(rval=True, rparams=NocaseDict({}), errorstr='')
>
Implementing an Indication Handler
The subscribe_indication() method allows you to specify the host name of the system you want
to deliver the indications to. The following example shows how to implement an indication handler:
383
System Administrator's Guide
> def handler(ind, arg1, arg2, **kwargs):
...
exported_objects = ind.exported_objects()
...
do_something_with(exported_objects)
> listener = LmiIndicationListener("0.0.0.0", listening_port)
> listener.add_handler("indication-name-XXXXXXXX", handler, arg1, arg2,
**kwargs)
> listener.start()
>
The first argument of the handler is an LmiIndication object, which contains a list of methods and
objects exported by the indication. Other parameters are user specific: those arguments need to be
specified when adding a handler to the listener.
In the example above, the add_handler() method call uses a special string with eight “X”
characters. These characters are replaced with a random string that is generated by listeners in order
to avoid a possible handler name collision. To use the random string, start the indication listener first
and then subscribe to an indication so that the Destination property of the handler object contains
the following value: schema://host_name/random_string.
Example 20.40. Implementing an Indication Handler
The following script illustrates how to write a handler that monitors a managed system located at
192.168.122.1 and calls the indication_callback() function whenever a new user account
is created:
#!/usr/bin/lmishell
import sys
from time import sleep
from lmi.shell.LMIUtil import LMIPassByRef
from lmi.shell.LMIIndicationListener import LMIIndicationListener
# These are passed by reference to indication_callback
var1 = LMIPassByRef("some_value")
var2 = LMIPassByRef("some_other_value")
def indication_callback(ind, var1, var2):
# Do something with ind, var1 and var2
print ind.exported_objects()
print var1.value
print var2.value
c = connect("hostname", "username", "password")
listener = LMIIndicationListener("0.0.0.0", 65500)
unique_name = listener.add_handler(
"demo-XXXXXXXX",
# Creates a unique name for me
indication_callback, # Callback to be called
var1,
# Variable passed by ref
var2
# Variable passed by ref
)
listener.start()
print c.subscribe_indication(
384
CHAPTER 20. OPENLMI
Name=unique_name,
Query="SELECT * FROM LMI_AccountInstanceCreationIndication WHERE
SOURCEINSTANCE ISA LMI_Account",
Destination="192.168.122.1:65500"
)
try:
while True:
sleep(60)
except KeyboardInterrupt:
sys.exit(0)
20.4.10. Example Usage
This section provides a number of examples for various CIM providers distributed with the OpenLMI
packages. All examples in this section use the following two variable definitions:
c = connect("host_name", "user_name", "password")
ns = c.root.cimv2
Replace host_name with the host name of the managed system, user_name with the name of user that
is allowed to connect to OpenPegasus CIMOM running on that system, and password with the user's
password.
Using the OpenLMI Service Provider
The openlmi-service package installs a CIM provider for managing system services. The examples
below illustrate how to use this CIM provider to list available system services and how to start, stop,
enable, and disable them.
Example 20.41. Listing Available Services
To list all available services on the managed machine along with information regarding whether the
service has been started (TRUE) or stopped ( FALSE) and the status string, use the following code
snippet:
for service in ns.LMI_Service.instances():
print "%s:\t%s" % (service.Name, service.Status)
To list only the services that are enabled by default, use this code snippet:
cls = ns.LMI_Service
for service in cls.instances():
if service.EnabledDefault == cls.EnabledDefaultValues.Enabled:
print service.Name
Note that the value of the EnabledDefault property is equal to 2 for enabled services and 3 for
disabled services.
To display information about the cups service, use the following:
cups = ns.LMI_Service.first_instance({"Name": "cups.service"})
cups.doc()
385
System Administrator's Guide
Example 20.42. Starting and Stopping Services
To start and stop the cups service and to see its current status, use the following code snippet:
cups = ns.LMI_Service.first_instance({"Name": "cups.service"})
cups.StartService()
print cups.Status
cups.StopService()
print cups.Status
Example 20.43. Enabling and Disabling Services
To enable and disable the cups service and to display its EnabledDefault property, use the
following code snippet:
cups = ns.LMI_Service.first_instance({"Name": "cups.service"})
cups.TurnServiceOff()
print cups.EnabledDefault
cups.TurnServiceOn()
print cups.EnabledDefault
Using the OpenLMI Networking Provider
The openlmi-networking package installs a CIM provider for networking. The examples below illustrate
how to use this CIM provider to list IP addresses associated with a certain port number, create a new
connection, configure a static IP address, and activate a connection.
Example 20.44. Listing IP Addresses Associated with a Given Port Number
To list all IP addresses associated with the eth0 network interface, use the following code snippet:
device = ns.LMI_IPNetworkConnection.first_instance({'ElementName':
'eth0'})
for endpoint in
device.associators(AssocClass="LMI_NetworkSAPSAPDependency",
ResultClass="LMI_IPProtocolEndpoint"):
if endpoint.ProtocolIFType ==
ns.LMI_IPProtocolEndpoint.ProtocolIFTypeValues.IPv4:
print "IPv4: %s/%s" % (endpoint.IPv4Address,
endpoint.SubnetMask)
elif endpoint.ProtocolIFType ==
ns.LMI_IPProtocolEndpoint.ProtocolIFTypeValues.IPv6:
print "IPv6: %s/%d" % (endpoint.IPv6Address,
endpoint.IPv6SubnetPrefixLength)
This code snippet uses the LMI_IPProtocolEndpoint class associated with a given
LMI_IPNetworkConnection class.
To display the default gateway, use this code snippet:
for rsap in
386
CHAPTER 20. OPENLMI
device.associators(AssocClass="LMI_NetworkRemoteAccessAvailableToElement
", ResultClass="LMI_NetworkRemoteServiceAccessPoint"):
if rsap.AccessContext ==
ns.LMI_NetworkRemoteServiceAccessPoint.AccessContextValues.DefaultGatewa
y:
print "Default Gateway: %s" % rsap.AccessInfo
The default gateway is represented by an LMI_NetworkRemoteServiceAccessPoint instance
with the AccessContext property equal to DefaultGateway.
To get a list of DNS servers, the object model needs to be traversed as follows:
1. Get the LMI_IPProtocolEndpoint instances associated with a given
LMI_IPNetworkConnection using LMI_NetworkSAPSAPDependency.
2. Use the same association for the LMI_DNSProtocolEndpoint instances.
The LMI_NetworkRemoteServiceAccessPoint instances with the AccessContext property
equal to the DNS Server associated through LMI_NetworkRemoteAccessAvailableToElement
have the DNS server address in the AccessInfo property.
There can be more possible paths to get to the RemoteServiceAccessPath and entries can be
duplicated. The following code snippet uses the set() function to remove duplicate entries from
the list of DNS servers:
dnsservers = set()
for ipendpoint in
device.associators(AssocClass="LMI_NetworkSAPSAPDependency",
ResultClass="LMI_IPProtocolEndpoint"):
for dnsedpoint in
ipendpoint.associators(AssocClass="LMI_NetworkSAPSAPDependency",
ResultClass="LMI_DNSProtocolEndpoint"):
for rsap in
dnsedpoint.associators(AssocClass="LMI_NetworkRemoteAccessAvailableToEle
ment", ResultClass="LMI_NetworkRemoteServiceAccessPoint"):
if rsap.AccessContext ==
ns.LMI_NetworkRemoteServiceAccessPoint.AccessContextValues.DNSServer:
dnsservers.add(rsap.AccessInfo)
print "DNS:", ", ".join(dnsservers)
Example 20.45. Creating a New Connection and Configuring a Static IP Address
To create a new setting with a static IPv4 and stateless IPv6 configuration for network interface
eth0, use the following code snippet:
capability = ns.LMI_IPNetworkConnectionCapabilities.first_instance({
'ElementName': 'eth0' })
result = capability.LMI_CreateIPSetting(Caption='eth0 Static',
IPv4Type=capability.LMI_CreateIPSetting.IPv4TypeValues.Static,
IPv6Type=capability.LMI_CreateIPSetting.IPv6TypeValues.Stateless)
setting = result.rparams["SettingData"].to_instance()
for settingData in
setting.associators(AssocClass="LMI_OrderedIPAssignmentComponent"):
387
System Administrator's Guide
if setting.ProtocolIFType ==
ns.LMI_IPAssignmentSettingData.ProtocolIFTypeValues.IPv4:
# Set static IPv4 address
settingData.IPAddresses = ["192.168.1.100"]
settingData.SubnetMasks = ["255.255.0.0"]
settingData.GatewayAddresses = ["192.168.1.1"]
settingData.push()
This code snippet creates a new setting by calling the LMI_CreateIPSetting() method on the
instance of LMI_IPNetworkConnectionCapabilities, which is associated with
LMI_IPNetworkConnection through LMI_IPNetworkConnectionElementCapabilities. It
also uses the push() method to modify the setting.
Example 20.46. Activating a Connection
To apply a setting to the network interface, call the ApplySettingToIPNetworkConnection()
method of the LMI_IPConfigurationService class. This method is asynchronous and returns a
job. The following code snippets illustrates how to call this method synchronously:
setting = ns.LMI_IPAssignmentSettingData.first_instance({ "Caption":
"eth0 Static" })
port = ns.LMI_IPNetworkConnection.first_instance({ 'ElementName': 'ens8'
})
service = ns.LMI_IPConfigurationService.first_instance()
service.SyncApplySettingToIPNetworkConnection(SettingData=setting,
IPNetworkConnection=port, Mode=32768)
The Mode parameter affects how the setting is applied. The most commonly used values of this
parameter are as follows:
1 — apply the setting now and make it auto-activated.
2 — make the setting auto-activated and do not apply it now.
4 — disconnect and disable auto-activation.
5 — do not change the setting state, only disable auto-activation.
32768 — apply the setting.
32769 — disconnect.
Using the OpenLMI Storage Provider
The openlmi-storage package installs a CIM provider for storage management. The examples below
illustrate how to use this CIM provider to create a volume group, create a logical volume, build a file
system, mount a file system, and list block devices known to the system.
In addition to the c and ns variables, these examples use the following variable definitions:
MEGABYTE = 1024*1024
storage_service = ns.LMI_StorageConfigurationService.first_instance()
filesystem_service =
388
CHAPTER 20. OPENLMI
ns.LMI_FileSystemConfigurationService.first_instance()
Example 20.47. Creating a Volume Group
To create a new volume group located in /dev/myGroup/ that has three members and the default
extent size of 4 MB, use the following code snippet:
# Find the devices to add to the volume group
# (filtering the CIM_StorageExtent.instances()
# call would be faster, but this is easier to read):
sda1 = ns.CIM_StorageExtent.first_instance({"Name": "/dev/sda1"})
sdb1 = ns.CIM_StorageExtent.first_instance({"Name": "/dev/sdb1"})
sdc1 = ns.CIM_StorageExtent.first_instance({"Name": "/dev/sdc1"})
# Create a new volume group:
(ret, outparams, err) = storage_service.SyncCreateOrModifyVG(
ElementName="myGroup",
InExtents=[sda1, sdb1, sdc1])
vg = outparams['Pool'].to_instance()
print "VG", vg.PoolID, \
"with extent size", vg.ExtentSize, \
"and", vg.RemainingExtents, "free extents created."
Example 20.48. Creating a Logical Volume
To create two logical volumes with the size of 100 MB, use this code snippet:
# Find the volume group:
vg = ns.LMI_VGStoragePool.first_instance({"Name":
"/dev/mapper/myGroup"})
# Create the first logical volume:
(ret, outparams, err) = storage_service.SyncCreateOrModifyLV(
ElementName="Vol1",
InPool=vg,
Size=100 * MEGABYTE)
lv = outparams['TheElement'].to_instance()
print "LV", lv.DeviceID, \
"with", lv.BlockSize * lv.NumberOfBlocks,\
"bytes created."
# Create the second logical volume:
(ret, outparams, err) = storage_service.SyncCreateOrModifyLV(
ElementName="Vol2",
InPool=vg,
Size=100 * MEGABYTE)
lv = outparams['TheElement'].to_instance()
print "LV", lv.DeviceID, \
"with", lv.BlockSize * lv.NumberOfBlocks, \
"bytes created."
Example 20.49. Creating a File System
389
System Administrator's Guide
To create an ext3 file system on logical volume lv from Example 20.48, “Creating a Logical
Volume”, use the following code snippet:
(ret, outparams, err) = filesystem_service.SyncLMI_CreateFileSystem(
FileSystemType=filesystem_service.LMI_CreateFileSystem.FileSystemTypeVal
ues.EXT3,
InExtents=[lv])
Example 20.50. Mounting a File System
To mount the file system created in Example 20.49, “Creating a File System” , use the following
code snippet:
# Find the file system on the logical volume:
fs = lv.first_associator(ResultClass="LMI_LocalFileSystem")
mount_service = ns.LMI_MountConfigurationService.first_instance()
(rc, out, err) = mount_service.SyncCreateMount(
FileSystemType='ext3',
Mode=32768, # just mount
FileSystem=fs,
MountPoint='/mnt/test',
FileSystemSpec=lv.Name)
Example 20.51. Listing Block Devices
To list all block devices known to the system, use the following code snippet:
devices = ns.CIM_StorageExtent.instances()
for device in devices:
if lmi_isinstance(device, ns.CIM_Memory):
# Memory and CPU caches are StorageExtents too, do not print
them
continue
print device.classname,
print device.DeviceID,
print device.Name,
print device.BlockSize*device.NumberOfBlocks
Using the OpenLMI Hardware Provider
The openlmi-hardware package installs a CIM provider for monitoring hardware. The examples below
illustrate how to use this CIM provider to retrieve information about CPU, memory modules, PCI
devices, and the manufacturer and model of the machine.
Example 20.52. Viewing CPU Information
To display basic CPU information such as the CPU name, the number of processor cores, and the
number of hardware threads, use the following code snippet:
390
CHAPTER 20. OPENLMI
cpu = ns.LMI_Processor.first_instance()
cpu_cap = cpu.associators(ResultClass="LMI_ProcessorCapabilities")[0]
print cpu.Name
print cpu_cap.NumberOfProcessorCores
print cpu_cap.NumberOfHardwareThreads
Example 20.53. Viewing Memory Information
To display basic information about memory modules such as their individual sizes, use the following
code snippet:
mem = ns.LMI_Memory.first_instance()
for i in mem.associators(ResultClass="LMI_PhysicalMemory"):
print i.Name
Example 20.54. Viewing Chassis Information
To display basic information about the machine such as its manufacturer or its model, use the
following code snippet:
chassis = ns.LMI_Chassis.first_instance()
print chassis.Manufacturer
print chassis.Model
Example 20.55. Listing PCI Devices
To list all PCI devices known to the system, use the following code snippet:
for pci in ns.LMI_PCIDevice.instances():
print pci.Name
20.5. USING OPENLMI SCRIPTS
The LMIShell interpreter is built on top of Python modules that can be used to develop custom
management tools. The OpenLMI Scripts project provides a number of Python libraries for interfacing
with OpenLMI providers. In addition, it is distributed with lmi, an extensible utility that can be used to
interact with these libraries from the command line.
To install OpenLMI Scripts on your system, type the following at a shell prompt:
easy_install --user openlmi-scripts
This command installs the Python modules and the lmi utility in the ~/.local/ directory. To extend
the functionality of the lmi utility, install additional OpenLMI modules by using the following
command:
easy_install --user package_name
391
System Administrator's Guide
For a complete list of available modules, see the Python website. For more information about OpenLMI
Scripts, see the official OpenLMI Scripts documentation .
20.6. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
For more information about OpenLMI and system management in general, see the resources listed
below.
Installed Documentation
lmishell(1) — The manual page for the lmishell client and interpreter provides detailed
information about its execution and usage.
Online Documentation
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Networking Guide — The Networking Guide for Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 7 documents relevant information regarding the configuration and
administration of network interfaces and network services on the system.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Storage Administration Guide — The Storage Administration Guide
for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 provides instructions on how to manage storage devices and file
systems on the system.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Power Management Guide — The Power Management Guide for
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 explains how to manage power consumption of the system
effectively. It discusses different techniques that lower power consumption for both servers
and laptops, and explains how each technique affects the overall performance of the system.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Linux Domain Identity, Authentication, and Policy Guide — The
Linux Domain Identity, Authentication, and Policy Guidefor Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 covers all
aspects of installing, configuring, and managing IPA domains, including both servers and
clients. The guide is intended for IT and systems administrators.
FreeIPA Documentation — The FreeIPA Documentation serves as the primary user
documentation for using the FreeIPA Identity Management project.
OpenSSL Home Page — The OpenSSL home page provides an overview of the OpenSSL project.
Mozilla NSS Documentation — The Mozilla NSS Documentation serves as the primary user
documentation for using the Mozilla NSS project.
See Also
Chapter 3, Managing Users and Groups documents how to manage system users and groups in
the graphical user interface and on the command line.
Chapter 8, Yum describes how to use the Yum package manager to search, install, update, and
uninstall packages on the command line.
Chapter 9, Managing Services with systemd provides an introduction to systemd and
documents how to use the systemctl command to manage system services, configure
systemd targets, and execute power management commands.
Chapter 11, OpenSSH describes how to configure an SSH server and how to use the ssh, scp,
and sftp client utilities to access it.
392
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
Log files are files that contain messages about the system, including the kernel, services, and
applications running on it. There are different log files for different information. For example, there is a
default system log file, a log file just for security messages, and a log file for cron tasks.
Log files can be very useful when trying to troubleshoot a problem with the system such as trying to
load a kernel driver or when looking for unauthorized login attempts to the system. This chapter
discusses where to find log files, how to view log files, and what to look for in log files.
Some log files are controlled by a daemon called rsyslogd. The rsyslogd daemon is an enhanced
replacement for sysklogd, and provides extended filtering, encryption protected relaying of messages,
various configuration options, input and output modules, support for transportation via the TCP or UDP
protocols. Note that rsyslog is compatible with sysklogd.
Log files can also be managed by the journald daemon – a component of systemd. The journald
daemon captures Syslog messages, kernel log messages, initial RAM disk and early boot messages as
well as messages written to standard output and standard error output of all services, indexes them
and makes this available to the user. The native journal file format, which is a structured and indexed
binary file, improves searching and provides faster operation, and it also stores meta data information
like time stamps or user IDs. Log files produced by journald are by default not persistent, log files are
stored only in memory or a small ring-buffer in the /run/log/journal/ directory. The amount of
logged data depends on free memory, when you reach the capacity limit, the oldest entries are deleted.
However, this setting can be altered – see Section 21.10.5, “Enabling Persistent Storage”. For more
information on Journal see Section 21.10, “Using the Journal” .
By default, these two logging tools coexist on your system. The journald daemon is the primary tool
for troubleshooting. It also provides additional data necessary for creating structured log messages.
Data acquired by journald is forwarded into the /run/systemd/journal/syslog socket that may
be used by rsyslogd to process the data further. However, rsyslog does the actual integration by
default via the imjournal input module, thus avoiding the aforementioned socket. You can also
transfer data in the opposite direction, from rsyslogd to journald with use of omjournal module.
See Section 21.7, “Interaction of Rsyslog and Journal” for further information. The integration enables
maintaining text-based logs in a consistent format to ensure compatibility with possible applications or
configurations dependent on rsyslogd. Also, you can maintain rsyslog messages in a structured
format (see Section 21.8, “Structured Logging with Rsyslog” ).
21.1. LOCATING LOG FILES
A list of log files maintained by rsyslogd can be found in the /etc/rsyslog.conf configuration file.
Most log files are located in the /var/log/ directory. Some applications such as httpd and samba
have a directory within /var/log/ for their log files.
You may notice multiple files in the /var/log/ directory with numbers after them (for example,
cron-20100906). These numbers represent a time stamp that has been added to a rotated log file.
Log files are rotated so their file sizes do not become too large. The logrotate package contains a
cron task that automatically rotates log files according to the /etc/logrotate.conf configuration
file and the configuration files in the /etc/logrotate.d/ directory.
21.2. BASIC CONFIGURATION OF RSYSLOG
The main configuration file for rsyslog is /etc/rsyslog.conf. Here, you can specify global directives,
modules, and rules that consist of filter and action parts. Also, you can add comments in the form of text
following a hash sign (#).
393
System Administrator's Guide
21.2.1. Filters
A rule is specified by a filter part, which selects a subset of syslog messages, and an action part, which
specifies what to do with the selected messages. To define a rule in your /etc/rsyslog.conf
configuration file, define both, a filter and an action, on one line and separate them with one or more
spaces or tabs.
rsyslog offers various ways to filter syslog messages according to selected properties. The available
filtering methods can be divided into Facility/Priority-based, Property-based, and Expression-based
filters.
Facility/Priority-based filters
The most used and well-known way to filter syslog messages is to use the facility/priority-based
filters which filter syslog messages based on two conditions: facility and priority separated by a dot.
To create a selector, use the following syntax:
FACILITY.PRIORITY
where:
FACILITY specifies the subsystem that produces a specific syslog message. For example,
the mail subsystem handles all mail-related syslog messages. FACILITY can be
represented by one of the following keywords (or by a numerical code): kern (0), user (1),
mail (2), daemon (3), auth (4), syslog (5), lpr (6), news (7), uucp (8), cron (9),
authpriv (10), ftp (11), and local0 through local7 (16 - 23).
PRIORITY specifies a priority of a syslog message. PRIORITY can be represented by one of
the following keywords (or by a number): debug (7), info (6), notice (5), warning (4),
err (3), crit (2), alert (1), and emerg (0).
The aforementioned syntax selects syslog messages with the defined or higher priority. By
preceding any priority keyword with an equal sign (=), you specify that only syslog
messages with the specified priority will be selected. All other priorities will be ignored.
Conversely, preceding a priority keyword with an exclamation mark (!) selects all syslog
messages except those with the defined priority.
In addition to the keywords specified above, you may also use an asterisk (*) to define all facilities
or priorities (depending on where you place the asterisk, before or after the comma). Specifying the
priority keyword none serves for facilities with no given priorities. Both facility and priority
conditions are case-insensitive.
To define multiple facilities and priorities, separate them with a comma (,). To define multiple
selectors on one line, separate them with a semi-colon (;). Note that each selector in the selector
field is capable of overwriting the preceding ones, which can exclude some priorities from the
pattern.
Example 21.1. Facility/Priority-based Filters
The following are a few examples of simple facility/priority-based filters that can be specified in
/etc/rsyslog.conf. To select all kernel syslog messages with any priority, add the following
text into the configuration file:
kern.*
To select all mail syslog messages with priority crit and higher, use this form:
394
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
mail.crit
To select all cron syslog messages except those with the info or debug priority, set the
configuration in the following form:
cron.!info,!debug
Property-based filters
Property-based filters let you filter syslog messages by any property, such as timegenerated or
syslogtag. For more information on properties, see the section called “Properties”. You can
compare each of the specified properties to a particular value using one of the compare-operations
listed in Table 21.1, “Property-based compare-operations”. Both property names and compare
operations are case-sensitive.
Property-based filter must start with a colon (:). To define the filter, use the following syntax:
:PROPERTY, [!]COMPARE_OPERATION, "STRING"
where:
The PROPERTY attribute specifies the desired property.
The optional exclamation point (!) negates the output of the compare-operation. Other
Boolean operators are currently not supported in property-based filters.
The COMPARE_OPERATION attribute specifies one of the compare-operations listed in
Table 21.1, “Property-based compare-operations”.
The STRING attribute specifies the value that the text provided by the property is compared
to. This value must be enclosed in quotation marks. To escape certain character inside the
string (for example a quotation mark (")), use the backslash character ( \).
Table 21.1. Property-based compare-operations
Compare-operation
Description
contains
Checks whether the provided string matches any part of the
text provided by the property. To perform case-insensitive
comparisons, use contains_i.
isequal
Compares the provided string against all of the text provided by
the property. These two values must be exactly equal to match.
startswith
Checks whether the provided string is found exactly at the
beginning of the text provided by the property. To perform caseinsensitive comparisons, use startswith_i.
regex
Compares the provided POSIX BRE (Basic Regular Expression)
against the text provided by the property.
395
System Administrator's Guide
Compare-operation
Description
ereregex
Compares the provided POSIX ERE (Extended Regular
Expression) regular expression against the text provided by the
property.
isempty
Checks if the property is empty. The value is discarded. This is
especially useful when working with normalized data, where
some fields may be populated based on normalization result.
Example 21.2. Property-based Filters
The following are a few examples of property-based filters that can be specified in
/etc/rsyslog.conf. To select syslog messages which contain the string error in their
message text, use:
:msg, contains, "error"
The following filter selects syslog messages received from the host name host1:
:hostname, isequal, "host1"
To select syslog messages which do not contain any mention of the words fatal and error
with any or no text between them (for example, fatal lib error), type:
:msg, !regex, "fatal .* error"
Expression-based filters
Expression-based filters select syslog messages according to defined arithmetic, Boolean or string
operations. Expression-based filters use rsyslog's own scripting language called RainerScript to
build complex filters.
The basic syntax of expression-based filter looks as follows:
if EXPRESSION then ACTION else ACTION
where:
The EXPRESSION attribute represents an expression to be evaluated, for example: $msg
startswith 'DEVNAME' or $syslogfacility-text == 'local0'. You can specify
more than one expression in a single filter by using and and or operators.
The ACTION attribute represents an action to be performed if the expression returns the
value true. This can be a single action, or an arbitrary complex script enclosed in curly
braces.
Expression-based filters are indicated by the keyword if at the start of a new line. The then
keyword separates the EXPRESSION from the ACTION. Optionally, you can employ the else
keyword to specify what action is to be performed in case the condition is not met.
396
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
With expression-based filters, you can nest the conditions by using a script enclosed in curly braces
as in Example 21.3, “Expression-based Filters” . The script allows you to use facility/priority-based
filters inside the expression. On the other hand, property-based filters are not recommended here.
RainerScript supports regular expressions with specialized functions re_match() and
re_extract().
Example 21.3. Expression-based Filters
The following expression contains two nested conditions. The log files created by a program
called prog1 are split into two files based on the presence of the "test" string in the message.
if $programname == 'prog1' then {
action(type="omfile" file="/var/log/prog1.log")
if $msg contains 'test' then
action(type="omfile" file="/var/log/prog1test.log")
else
action(type="omfile" file="/var/log/prog1notest.log")
}
See the section called “Online Documentation” for more examples of various expression-based filters.
RainerScript is the basis for rsyslog's new configuration format, see Section 21.3, “Using the New
Configuration Format”
21.2.2. Actions
Actions specify what is to be done with the messages filtered out by an already defined selector. The
following are some of the actions you can define in your rule:
Saving syslog messages to log files
The majority of actions specify to which log file a syslog message is saved. This is done by
specifying a file path after your already-defined selector:
FILTER PATH
where FILTER stands for user-specified selector and PATH is a path of a target file.
For instance, the following rule is comprised of a selector that selects all cron syslog messages and
an action that saves them into the /var/log/cron.log log file:
cron.* /var/log/cron.log
By default, the log file is synchronized every time a syslog message is generated. Use a dash mark
(-) as a prefix of the file path you specified to omit syncing:
FILTER -PATH
Note that you might lose information if the system terminates right after a write attempt. However,
this setting can improve performance, especially if you run programs that produce very verbose log
messages.
397
System Administrator's Guide
Your specified file path can be either static or dynamic. Static files are represented by a fixed file
path as shown in the example above. Dynamic file paths can differ according to the received
message. Dynamic file paths are represented by a template and a question mark (?) prefix:
FILTER ?DynamicFile
where DynamicFile is a name of a predefined template that modifies output paths. You can use the
dash prefix (-) to disable syncing, also you can use multiple templates separated by a colon ( ;). For
more information on templates, see the section called “Generating Dynamic File Names” .
If the file you specified is an existing terminal or /dev/console device, syslog messages are sent
to standard output (using special terminal-handling) or your console (using special
/dev/console-handling) when using the X Window System, respectively.
Sending syslog messages over the network
rsyslog allows you to send and receive syslog messages over the network. This feature allows you
to administer syslog messages of multiple hosts on one machine. To forward syslog messages to a
remote machine, use the following syntax:
@[(zNUMBER)]HOST:[PORT]
where:
The at sign (@) indicates that the syslog messages are forwarded to a host using the UDP
protocol. To use the TCP protocol, use two at signs with no space between them ( @@).
The optional zNUMBER setting enables zlib compression for syslog messages. The NUMBER
attribute specifies the level of compression (from 1 – lowest to 9 – maximum). Compression
gain is automatically checked by rsyslogd, messages are compressed only if there is any
compression gain and messages below 60 bytes are never compressed.
The HOST attribute specifies the host which receives the selected syslog messages.
The PORT attribute specifies the host machine's port.
When specifying an IPv6 address as the host, enclose the address in square brackets ( [, ]).
Example 21.4. Sending syslog Messages over the Network
The following are some examples of actions that forward syslog messages over the network
(note that all actions are preceded with a selector that selects all messages with any priority). To
forward messages to 192.168.0.1 via the UDP protocol, type:
*.* @192.168.0.1
To forward messages to "example.com" using port 6514 and the TCP protocol, use:
*.* @@example.com:6514
The following compresses messages with zlib (level 9 compression) and forwards them to
2001:db8::1 using the UDP protocol
*.* @(z9)[2001:db8::1]
398
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
Output channels
Output channels are primarily used to specify the maximum size a log file can grow to. This is very
useful for log file rotation (for more information see Section 21.2.5, “Log Rotation” ). An output
channel is basically a collection of information about the output action. Output channels are defined
by the $outchannel directive. To define an output channel in /etc/rsyslog.conf, use the
following syntax:
$outchannel NAME, FILE_NAME, MAX_SIZE, ACTION
where:
The NAME attribute specifies the name of the output channel.
The FILE_NAME attribute specifies the name of the output file. Output channels can write
only into files, not pipes, terminal, or other kind of output.
The MAX_SIZE attribute represents the maximum size the specified file (in FILE_NAME) can
grow to. This value is specified in bytes.
The ACTION attribute specifies the action that is taken when the maximum size, defined in
MAX_SIZE, is hit.
To use the defined output channel as an action inside a rule, type:
FILTER :omfile:$NAME
Example 21.5. Output channel log rotation
The following output shows a simple log rotation through the use of an output channel. First, the
output channel is defined via the $outchannel directive:
$outchannel log_rotation, /var/log/test_log.log, 104857600,
/home/joe/log_rotation_script
and then it is used in a rule that selects every syslog message with any priority and executes the
previously-defined output channel on the acquired syslog messages:
*.* :omfile:$log_rotation
Once the limit (in the example 100 MB) is hit, the /home/joe/log_rotation_script is
executed. This script can contain anything from moving the file into a different folder, editing
specific content out of it, or simply removing it.
Sending syslog messages to specific users
rsyslog can send syslog messages to specific users by specifying a user name of the user you want
to send the messages to (as in Example 21.7, “Specifying Multiple Actions” ). To specify more than
one user, separate each user name with a comma (,). To send messages to every user that is
currently logged on, use an asterisk (*).
399
System Administrator's Guide
Executing a program
rsyslog lets you execute a program for selected syslog messages and uses the system() call to
execute the program in shell. To specify a program to be executed, prefix it with a caret character
(^). Consequently, specify a template that formats the received message and passes it to the
specified executable as a one line parameter (for more information on templates, see
Section 21.2.3, “Templates”).
FILTER ^EXECUTABLE; TEMPLATE
Here an output of the FILTER condition is processed by a program represented by EXECUTABLE.
This program can be any valid executable. Replace TEMPLATE with the name of the formatting
template.
Example 21.6. Executing a Program
In the following example, any syslog message with any priority is selected, formatted with the
template template and passed as a parameter to the test-program program, which is then
executed with the provided parameter:
*.* ^test-program;template
WARNING
When accepting messages from any host, and using the shell execute action,
you may be vulnerable to command injection. An attacker may try to inject and
execute commands in the program you specified to be executed in your action.
To avoid any possible security threats, thoroughly consider the use of the shell
execute action.
Storing syslog messages in a database
Selected syslog messages can be directly written into a database table using the database writer
action. The database writer uses the following syntax:
:PLUGIN:DB_HOST,DB_NAME,DB_USER,DB_PASSWORD;[TEMPLATE]
where:
The PLUGIN calls the specified plug-in that handles the database writing (for example, the
ommysql plug-in).
The DB_HOST attribute specifies the database host name.
The DB_NAME attribute specifies the name of the database.
The DB_USER attribute specifies the database user.
400
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
The DB_PASSWORD attribute specifies the password used with the aforementioned
database user.
The TEMPLATE attribute specifies an optional use of a template that modifies the syslog
message. For more information on templates, see Section 21.2.3, “Templates”.
IMPORTANT
Currently, rsyslog provides support for MySQL and PostgreSQL databases only. In
order to use the MySQL and PostgreSQL database writer functionality, install the
rsyslog-mysql and rsyslog-pgsql packages, respectively. Also, make sure you load
the appropriate modules in your /etc/rsyslog.conf configuration file:
module(load=”ommysql”)
module(load=”ompgsql”)
support
# Output module for MySQL support
# Output module for PostgreSQL
For more information on rsyslog modules, see Section 21.6, “Using Rsyslog
Modules”.
Alternatively, you may use a generic database interface provided by the omlibdb
module (supports: Firebird/Interbase, MS SQL, Sybase, SQLLite, Ingres, Oracle,
mSQL).
Discarding syslog messages
To discard your selected messages, use the tilde character (~).
FILTER ~
The discard action is mostly used to filter out messages before carrying on any further processing.
It can be effective if you want to omit some repeating messages that would otherwise fill the log
files. The results of discard action depend on where in the configuration file it is specified, for the
best results place these actions on top of the actions list. Please note that once a message has been
discarded there is no way to retrieve it in later configuration file lines.
For instance, the following rule discards any cron syslog messages:
cron.* ~
Specifying Multiple Actions
For each selector, you are allowed to specify multiple actions. To specify multiple actions for one
selector, write each action on a separate line and precede it with an ampersand (&) character:
FILTER ACTION
& ACTION
& ACTION
Specifying multiple actions improves the overall performance of the desired outcome since the
specified selector has to be evaluated only once.
Example 21.7. Specifying Multiple Actions
401
System Administrator's Guide
In the following example, all kernel syslog messages with the critical priority (crit) are sent to user
user1, processed by the template temp and passed on to the test-program executable, and
forwarded to 192.168.0.1 via the UDP protocol.
kern.=crit user1
& ^test-program;temp
& @192.168.0.1
Any action can be followed by a template that formats the message. To specify a template, suffix an
action with a semicolon (;) and specify the name of the template. For more information on templates,
see Section 21.2.3, “Templates”.
WARNING
A template must be defined before it is used in an action, otherwise it is ignored. In
other words, template definitions should always precede rule definitions in
/etc/rsyslog.conf.
21.2.3. Templates
Any output that is generated by rsyslog can be modified and formatted according to your needs with
the use of templates. To create a template use the following syntax in /etc/rsyslog.conf:
template(name=”TEMPLATE_NAME” type=”string” string="text %PROPERTY% more
text" [option.OPTION="on"])
where:
template() is the directive introducing block defining a template.
The TEMPLATE_NAME mandatory argument is used to refer to the template. Note that
TEMPLATE_NAME should be unique.
The type mandatory argument can acquire one of these values: “list”, “subtree”, “string” or
“plugin”.
The string argument is the actual template text. Within this text, special characters, such as
\n for newline or \r for carriage return, can be used. Other characters, such as % or ", have to
be escaped if you want to use those characters literally. Within this text, special characters,
such as \n for new line or \r for carriage return, can be used. Other characters, such as % or ",
have to be escaped if you want to use those characters literally.
The text specified between two percent signs (%) specifies a property that allows you to access
specific contents of a syslog message. For more information on properties, see the section
called “Properties”.
The OPTION attribute specifies any options that modify the template functionality. The
currently supported template options are sql and stdsql, which are used for formatting the
402
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
text as an SQL query, or json which formats text to be suitable for JSON processing, and
casesensitive which sets case sensitiveness of property names.
NOTE
Note that the database writer checks whether the sql or stdsql options are
specified in the template. If they are not, the database writer does not perform
any action. This is to prevent any possible security threats, such as SQL
injection.
See section Storing syslog messages in a database in Section 21.2.2, “Actions” for
more information.
Generating Dynamic File Names
Templates can be used to generate dynamic file names. By specifying a property as a part of the file
path, a new file will be created for each unique property, which is a convenient way to classify syslog
messages.
For example, use the timegenerated property, which extracts a time stamp from the message, to
generate a unique file name for each syslog message:
template(name=”DynamicFile” type=”list”) {
constant(value=”/var/log/test_logs/”)
property(name=”timegenerated”)
constant(value”-test.log”)
}
Keep in mind that the $template directive only specifies the template. You must use it inside a rule
for it to take effect. In /etc/rsyslog.conf, use the question mark ( ?) in an action definition to mark
the dynamic file name template:
*.* ?DynamicFile
Properties
Properties defined inside a template (between two percent signs (%)) enable access various contents of
a syslog message through the use of a property replacer. To define a property inside a template
(between the two quotation marks ("…")), use the following syntax:
%PROPERTY_NAME[:FROM_CHAR:TO_CHAR:OPTION]%
where:
The PROPERTY_NAME attribute specifies the name of a property. A list of all available
properties and their detailed description can be found in the rsyslog.conf(5) manual page
under the section Available Properties.
FROM_CHAR and TO_CHAR attributes denote a range of characters that the specified property
will act upon. Alternatively, regular expressions can be used to specify a range of characters.
To do so, set the letter R as the FROM_CHAR attribute and specify your desired regular
expression as the TO_CHAR attribute.
403
System Administrator's Guide
The OPTION attribute specifies any property options, such as the lowercase option to convert
the input to lowercase. A list of all available property options and their detailed description can
be found in the rsyslog.conf(5) manual page under the section Property Options.
The following are some examples of simple properties:
The following property obtains the whole message text of a syslog message:
%msg%
The following property obtains the first two characters of the message text of a syslog
message:
%msg:1:2%
The following property obtains the whole message text of a syslog message and drops its last
line feed character:
%msg:::drop-last-lf%
The following property obtains the first 10 characters of the time stamp that is generated
when the syslog message is received and formats it according to the RFC 3999 date standard.
%timegenerated:1:10:date-rfc3339%
Template Examples
This section presents a few examples of rsyslog templates.
Example 21.8, “A verbose syslog message template” shows a template that formats a syslog message
so that it outputs the message's severity, facility, the time stamp of when the message was received,
the host name, the message tag, the message text, and ends with a new line.
Example 21.8. A verbose syslog message template
template(name=”verbose” type=”list”) {
property(name="syslogseverity”)
property(name="syslogfacility”)
property(name="timegenerated”)
property(name="HOSTNAME”)
property(name="syslogtag”)
property(name="msg”)
constant(value=”\n")
}
Example 21.9, “A wall message template” shows a template that resembles a traditional wall message
(a message that is send to every user that is logged in and has their mesg(1) permission set to yes).
This template outputs the message text, along with a host name, message tag and a time stamp, on a
new line (using \r and \n) and rings the bell (using \7).
Example 21.9. A wall message template
404
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
template(name=”wallmsg” type=”list”) {
constant(value="\r\n\7Message from syslogd@”)
property(name="HOSTNAME”)
constant(value=” at ")
property(name="timegenerated”)
constant(value=" ...\r\n ”)
property(name="syslogtag”)
constant(value=” “)
property(name="msg”)
constant(value=”\n\r”)
}
Example 21.10, “A database formatted message template” shows a template that formats a syslog
message so that it can be used as a database query. Notice the use of the sql option at the end of the
template specified as the template option. It tells the database writer to format the message as an
MySQL SQL query.
Example 21.10. A database formatted message template
template(name="dbFormat" type="list" option.sql="on") {
constant(value="insert into SystemEvents (Message, Facility, FromHost,
Priority, DeviceReportedTime, ReceivedAt, InfoUnitID, SysLogTag)")
constant(value=" values ('")
property(name="msg")
constant(value="', ")
property(name="syslogfacility")
constant(value=", '")
property(name="hostname")
constant(value="', ")
property(name="syslogpriority")
constant(value=", '")
property(name="timereported" dateFormat="mysql")
constant(value="', '")
property(name="timegenerated" dateFormat="mysql")
constant(value="', ")
property(name="iut")
constant(value=", '")
property(name="syslogtag")
constant(value="')")
}
rsyslog also contains a set of predefined templates identified by the RSYSLOG_ prefix. These are
reserved for the syslog's use and it is advisable to not create a template using this prefix to avoid
conflicts. The following list shows these predefined templates along with their definitions.
RSYSLOG_DebugFormat
A special format used for troubleshooting property problems.
template(name=”RSYSLOG_DebugFormat” type=”string” string="Debug line
with all properties:\nFROMHOST: '%FROMHOST%', fromhost-ip: '%fromhostip%', HOSTNAME: '%HOSTNAME%', PRI: %PRI%,\nsyslogtag '%syslogtag%',
405
System Administrator's Guide
programname: '%programname%', APP-NAME: '%APP-NAME%', PROCID:
'%PROCID%', MSGID: '%MSGID%',\nTIMESTAMP: '%TIMESTAMP%', STRUCTUREDDATA: '%STRUCTURED-DATA%',\nmsg: '%msg%'\nescaped msg: '%msg:::dropcc%'\nrawmsg: '%rawmsg%'\n\n\")
RSYSLOG_SyslogProtocol23Format
The format specified in IETF's internet-draft ietf-syslog-protocol-23, which is assumed to become
the new syslog standard RFC.
template(name=”RSYSLOG_SyslogProtocol23Format” type=”string”
string="%PRI%1 %TIMESTAMP:::date-rfc3339% %HOSTNAME% %APP-NAME% %PROCID%
%MSGID% %STRUCTURED-DATA% %msg%\n\")
RSYSLOG_FileFormat
A modern-style logfile format similar to TraditionalFileFormat, but with high-precision time stamps
and time zone information.
template(name="RSYSLOG_FileFormat" type="list") {
property(name="timestamp" dateFormat="rfc3339")
constant(value=" ")
property(name="hostname")
constant(value=" ")
property(name="syslogtag")
property(name="msg" spifno1stsp="on" )
property(name="msg" droplastlf="on" )
constant(value="\n")
}
RSYSLOG_TraditionalFileFormat
The older default log file format with low-precision time stamps.
template(name="RSYSLOG_TraditionalFileFormat" type="list") {
property(name="timestamp")
constant(value=" ")
property(name="hostname")
constant(value=" ")
property(name="syslogtag")
property(name="msg" spifno1stsp="on" )
property(name="msg" droplastlf="on" )
constant(value="\n")
}
RSYSLOG_ForwardFormat
A forwarding format with high-precision time stamps and time zone information.
template(name="ForwardFormat" type="list") {
constant(value="<")
property(name="pri")
constant(value=">")
property(name="timestamp" dateFormat="rfc3339")
406
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
constant(value=" ")
property(name="hostname")
constant(value=" ")
property(name="syslogtag" position.from="1" position.to="32")
property(name="msg" spifno1stsp="on" )
property(name="msg")
}
RSYSLOG_TraditionalForwardFormat
The traditional forwarding format with low-precision time stamps.
template(name="TraditionalForwardFormat" type="list") {
constant(value="<")
property(name="pri")
constant(value=">")
property(name="timestamp")
constant(value=" ")
property(name="hostname")
constant(value=" ")
property(name="syslogtag" position.from="1" position.to="32")
property(name="msg" spifno1stsp="on" )
property(name="msg")
}
21.2.4. Global Directives
Global directives are configuration options that apply to the rsyslogd daemon. They usually specify a
value for a specific predefined variable that affects the behavior of the rsyslogd daemon or a rule
that follows. All of the global directives are enclosed in a global configuration block. The following is
an example of a global directive that specifies overriding local host name for log messages:
global(localHostname=”machineXY”)
The default size defined for this directive (10,000 messages) can be overridden by specifying a
different value (as shown in the example above).
You can define multiple directives in your /etc/rsyslog.conf configuration file. A directive affects
the behavior of all configuration options until another occurrence of that same directive is detected.
Global directives can be used to configure actions, queues and for debugging. A comprehensive list of
all available configuration directives can be found in the section called “Online Documentation” .
Currently, a new configuration format has been developed that replaces the $-based syntax (see
Section 21.3, “Using the New Configuration Format” ). However, classic global directives remain
supported as a legacy format.
21.2.5. Log Rotation
The following is a sample /etc/logrotate.conf configuration file:
# rotate log files weekly
weekly
# keep 4 weeks worth of backlogs
407
System Administrator's Guide
rotate 4
# uncomment this if you want your log files compressed
compress
All of the lines in the sample configuration file define global options that apply to every log file. In our
example, log files are rotated weekly, rotated log files are kept for four weeks, and all rotated log files
are compressed by gzip into the .gz format. Any lines that begin with a hash sign (#) are comments
and are not processed.
You may define configuration options for a specific log file and place it under the global options.
However, it is advisable to create a separate configuration file for any specific log file in the
/etc/logrotate.d/ directory and define any configuration options there.
The following is an example of a configuration file placed in the /etc/logrotate.d/ directory:
/var/log/messages {
rotate 5
weekly
postrotate
/usr/bin/killall -HUP syslogd
endscript
}
The configuration options in this file are specific for the /var/log/messages log file only. The
settings specified here override the global settings where possible. Thus the rotated
/var/log/messages log file will be kept for five weeks instead of four weeks as was defined in the
global options.
The following is a list of some of the directives you can specify in your logrotate configuration file:
weekly — Specifies the rotation of log files to be done weekly. Similar directives include:
daily
monthly
yearly
compress — Enables compression of rotated log files. Similar directives include:
nocompress
compresscmd — Specifies the command to be used for compressing.
uncompresscmd
compressext — Specifies what extension is to be used for compressing.
compressoptions — Specifies any options to be passed to the compression program
used.
delaycompress — Postpones the compression of log files to the next rotation of log files.
rotate INTEGER — Specifies the number of rotations a log file undergoes before it is
removed or mailed to a specific address. If the value 0 is specified, old log files are removed
instead of rotated.
408
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
mail ADDRESS — This option enables mailing of log files that have been rotated as many
times as is defined by the rotate directive to the specified address. Similar directives include:
nomail
mailfirst — Specifies that the just-rotated log files are to be mailed, instead of the
about-to-expire log files.
maillast — Specifies that the about-to-expire log files are to be mailed, instead of the
just-rotated log files. This is the default option when mail is enabled.
For the full list of directives and various configuration options, see the logrotate(5) manual page.
21.3. USING THE NEW CONFIGURATION FORMAT
In rsyslog version 7, installed by default for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 in the rsyslog package, a new
configuration syntax is introduced. This new configuration format aims to be more powerful, more
intuitive, and to prevent common mistakes by not permitting certain invalid constructs. The syntax
enhancement is enabled by the new configuration processor that relies on RainerScript. The legacy
format is still fully supported and it is used by default in the /etc/rsyslog.conf configuration file.
RainerScript is a scripting language designed for processing network events and configuring event
processors such as rsyslog. RainerScript was first used to define expression-based filters, see
Example 21.3, “Expression-based Filters” . The version of RainerScript in rsyslog version 7 implements
the input() and ruleset() statements, which permit the /etc/rsyslog.conf configuration file to
be written in the new syntax. The new syntax differs mainly in that it is much more structured;
parameters are passed as arguments to statements, such as input, action, template, and module load.
The scope of options is limited by blocks. This enhances readability and reduces the number of bugs
caused by misconfiguration. There is also a significant performance gain. Some functionality is
exposed in both syntaxes, some only in the new one.
Compare the configuration written with legacy-style parameters:
$InputFileName /tmp/inputfile
$InputFileTag tag1:
$InputFileStateFile inputfile-state
$InputRunFileMonitor
and the same configuration with the use of the new format statement:
input(type="imfile" file="/tmp/inputfile" tag="tag1:"
statefile="inputfile-state")
This significantly reduces the number of parameters used in configuration, improves readability, and
also provides higher execution speed. For more information on RainerScript statements and
parameters see the section called “Online Documentation” .
21.3.1. Rulesets
Leaving special directives aside, rsyslog handles messages as defined by rules that consist of a filter
condition and an action to be performed if the condition is true. With a traditionally written
/etc/rsyslog.conf file, all rules are evaluated in order of appearance for every input message. This
process starts with the first rule and continues until all rules have been processed or until the message
is discarded by one of the rules.
409
System Administrator's Guide
However, rules can be grouped into sequences called rulesets. With rulesets, you can limit the effect of
certain rules only to selected inputs or enhance the performance of rsyslog by defining a distinct set
of actions bound to a specific input. In other words, filter conditions that will be inevitably evaluated as
false for certain types of messages can be skipped. The legacy ruleset definition in
/etc/rsyslog.conf can look as follows:
$RuleSet rulesetname
rule
rule2
The rule ends when another rule is defined, or the default ruleset is called as follows:
$RuleSet RSYSLOG_DefaultRuleset
With the new configuration format in rsyslog 7, the input() and ruleset() statements are reserved
for this operation. The new format ruleset definition in /etc/rsyslog.conf can look as follows:
ruleset(name="rulesetname") {
rule
rule2
call rulesetname2
…
}
Replace rulesetname with an identifier for your ruleset. The ruleset name cannot start with RSYSLOG_
since this namespace is reserved for use by rsyslog. RSYSLOG_DefaultRuleset then defines the
default set of rules to be performed if the message has no other ruleset assigned. With rule and rule2
you can define rules in filter-action format mentioned above. With the call parameter, you can nest
rulesets by calling them from inside other ruleset blocks.
After creating a ruleset, you need to specify what input it will apply to:
input(type="input_type" port="port_num" ruleset="rulesetname");
Here you can identify an input message by input_type, which is an input module that gathered the
message, or by port_num – the port number. Other parameters such as file or tag can be specified for
input(). Replace rulesetname with a name of the ruleset to be evaluated against the message. In case
an input message is not explicitly bound to a ruleset, the default ruleset is triggered.
You can also use the legacy format to define rulesets, for more information see the section called
“Online Documentation”.
Example 21.11. Using rulesets
The following rulesets ensure different handling of remote messages coming from different ports.
Add the following into /etc/rsyslog.conf:
ruleset(name="remote-6514") {
action(type="omfile" file="/var/log/remote-6514")
}
ruleset(name="remote-601") {
cron.* action(type="omfile" file="/var/log/remote-601-cron")
mail.* action(type="omfile" file="/var/log/remote-601-mail")
410
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
}
input(type="imtcp" port="6514" ruleset="remote-6514");
input(type="imtcp" port="601" ruleset="remote-601");
Rulesets shown in the above example define log destinations for the remote input from two ports,
in case of port 601, messages are sorted according to the facility. Then, the TCP input is enabled
and bound to rulesets. Note that you must load the required modules (imtcp) for this configuration
to work.
21.3.2. Compatibility with sysklogd
The compatibility mode specified via the -c option exists in rsyslog version 5 but not in version 7.
Also, the sysklogd-style command-line options are deprecated and configuring rsyslog through these
command-line options should be avoided. However, you can use several templates and directives to
configure rsyslogd to emulate sysklogd-like behavior.
For more information on various rsyslogd options, see the rsyslogd(8)manual page.
21.4. WORKING WITH QUEUES IN RSYSLOG
Queues are used to pass content, mostly syslog messages, between components of rsyslog. With
queues, rsyslog is capable of processing multiple messages simultaneously and to apply several
actions to a single message at once. The data flow inside rsyslog can be illustrated as follows:
Figure 21.1. Message Flow in Rsyslog
Whenever rsyslog receives a message, it passes this message to the preprocessor and then places it
into the main message queue. Messages wait there to be dequeued and passed to the rule processor.
The rule processor is a parsing and filtering engine. Here, the rules defined in /etc/rsyslog.conf are
applied. Based on these rules, the rule processor evaluates which actions are to be performed. Each
action has its own action queue. Messages are passed through this queue to the respective action
411
System Administrator's Guide
processor which creates the final output. Note that at this point, several actions can run
simultaneously on one message. For this purpose, a message is duplicated and passed to multiple
action processors.
Only one queue per action is possible. Depending on configuration, the messages can be sent right to
the action processor without action queuing. This is the behavior of direct queues (see below). In case
the output action fails, the action processor notifies the action queue, which then takes an unprocessed
element back and after some time interval, the action is attempted again.
To sum up, there are two positions where queues stand in rsyslog: either in front of the rule processor
as a single main message queue or in front of various types of output actions as action queues. Queues
provide two main advantages that both lead to increased performance of message processing:
they serve as buffers that decouple producers and consumers in the structure of rsyslog
they allow for parallelization of actions performed on messages
Apart from this, queues can be configured with several directives to provide optimal performance for
your system. These configuration options are covered in the following sections.
WARNING
If an output plug-in is unable to deliver a message, it is stored in the preceding
message queue. If the queue fills, the inputs block until it is no longer full. This will
prevent new messages from being logged via the blocked queue. In the absence of
separate action queues this can have severe consequences, such as preventing
SSH logging, which in turn can prevent SSH access. Therefore it is advised to use
dedicated action queues for outputs which are forwarded over a network or to a
database.
21.4.1. Defining Queues
Based on where the messages are stored, there are several types of queues: direct, in-memory, disk,
and disk-assisted in-memory queues that are most widely used. You can choose one of these types for
the main message queue and also for action queues. Add the following into /etc/rsyslog.conf:
object(queue.type=”queue_type”)
By adding this you can apply the setting for:
main message queue: replace object with main_queue
an action queue: replace object with action
ruleset: replace object with ruleset
Replace queue_type with one of direct, linkedlist or fixedarray (which are in-memory queues),
or disk.
The default setting for a main message queue is the FixedArray queue with a limit of 10,000 messages.
Action queues are by default set as Direct queues.
412
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
Direct Queues
For many simple operations, such as when writing output to a local file, building a queue in front of an
action is not needed. To avoid queuing, use:
object(queue.type=”Direct”)
Replace object with main_queue, action or ruleset to use this option to the main message queue,
an action queue or for the ruleset respectively. With direct queue, messages are passed directly and
immediately from the producer to the consumer.
Disk Queues
Disk queues store messages strictly on a hard drive, which makes them highly reliable but also the
slowest of all possible queuing modes. This mode can be used to prevent the loss of highly important
log data. However, disk queues are not recommended in most use cases. To set a disk queue, type the
following into /etc/rsyslog.conf:
object(queue.type=”Disk”)
Replace object with main_queue, action or ruleset to use this option to the main message queue,
an action queue or for the ruleset respectively. Disk queues are written in parts, with a default size 10
Mb. This default size can be modified with the following configuration directive:
object(queue.size=”size”)
where size represents the specified size of disk queue part. The defined size limit is not restrictive,
rsyslog always writes one complete queue entry, even if it violates the size limit. Each part of a disk
queue matches with an individual file. The naming directive for these files looks as follows:
object(queue.filename=”name”)
This sets a name prefix for the file followed by a 7-digit number starting at one and incremented for
each file.
In-memory Queues
With in-memory queue, the enqueued messages are held in memory which makes the process very
fast. The queued data is lost if the computer is power cycled or shut down. However, you can use the
action (queue.saveonshutdown=”on”) setting to save the data before shutdown. There are two
types of in-memory queues:
FixedArray queue — the default mode for the main message queue, with a limit of 10,000
elements. This type of queue uses a fixed, pre-allocated array that holds pointers to queue
elements. Due to these pointers, even if the queue is empty a certain amount of memory is
consumed. However, FixedArray offers the best run time performance and is optimal when you
expect a relatively low number of queued messages and high performance.
LinkedList queue — here, all structures are dynamically allocated in a linked list, thus the
memory is allocated only when needed. LinkedList queues handle occasional message bursts
very well.
In general, use LinkedList queues when in doubt. Compared to FixedArray, it consumes less memory
and lowers the processing overhead.
Use the following syntax to configure in-memory queues:
413
System Administrator's Guide
object(queue.type=”LinkedList”)
object(queue.type=”FixedArray”)
Replace object with main_queue, action or ruleset to use this option to the main message queue,
an action queue or for the ruleset respectively.
Disk-Assisted In-memory Queues
Both disk and in-memory queues have their advantages and rsyslog lets you combine them in diskassisted in-memory queues. To do so, configure a normal in-memory queue and then add the
queue.filename=”file_name” directive to its block to define a file name for disk assistance. This
queue then becomes disk-assisted, which means it couples an in-memory queue with a disk queue to
work in tandem.
The disk queue is activated if the in-memory queue is full or needs to persist after shutdown. With a
disk-assisted queue, you can set both disk-specific and in-memory specific configuration parameters.
This type of queue is probably the most commonly used, it is especially useful for potentially longrunning and unreliable actions.
To specify the functioning of a disk-assisted in-memory queue, use the so-called watermarks:
object(queue.highwatermark=”number”)
object(queue.lowwatermark=”number”)
Replace object with main_queue, action or ruleset to use this option to the main message queue,
an action queue or for the ruleset respectively. Replace number with a number of enqueued messages.
When an in-memory queue reaches the number defined by the high watermark, it starts writing
messages to disk and continues until the in-memory queue size drops to the number defined with the
low watermark. Correctly set watermarks minimize unnecessary disk writes, but also leave memory
space for message bursts since writing to disk files is rather lengthy. Therefore, the high watermark
must be lower than the whole queue capacity set with queue.size. The difference between the high
watermark and the overall queue size is a spare memory buffer reserved for message bursts. On the
other hand, setting the high watermark too low will turn on disk assistance unnecessarily often.
Example 21.12. Reliable Forwarding of Log Messages to a Server
Rsyslog is often used to maintain a centralized logging system, where log messages are forwarded
to a server over the network. To avoid message loss when the server is not available, it is advisable
to configure an action queue for the forwarding action. This way, messages that failed to be sent are
stored locally until the server is reachable again. Note that such queues are not configurable for
connections using the UDP protocol.
Procedure 21.1. Forwarding To a Single Server
Suppose the task is to forward log messages from the system to a server with host name
example.com, and to configure an action queue to buffer the messages in case of a server outage. To
do so, perform the following steps:
Use the following configuration in /etc/rsyslog.conf or create a file with the following
content in the /etc/rsyslog.d/ directory:
*.* action(type=”omfwd”
queue.type=”LinkedList”
414
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
queue.filename=”example_fwd”
action.resumeRetryCount="-1"
queue.saveonshutdown="on"
arget="example.com" Port="6514" Protocol="tcp")
Where:
queue.type enables a LinkedList in-memory queue,
queue.filename defines a disk storage, in this case the backup files are created in
the /var/lib/rsyslog/ directory with the example_fwd prefix,
the action.resumeRetryCount= “-1” setting prevents rsyslog from dropping
messages when retrying to connect if server is not responding,
enabled queue.saveonshutdown saves in-memory data if rsyslog shuts down,
the last line forwards all received messages to the logging server using reliable TCP
delivery, port specification is optional.
With the above configuration, rsyslog keeps messages in memory if the remote server is
not reachable. A file on disk is created only if rsyslog runs out of the configured memory
queue space or needs to shut down, which benefits the system performance.
Procedure 21.2. Forwarding To Multiple Servers
The process of forwarding log messages to multiple servers is similar to the previous procedure:
Each destination server requires a separate forwarding rule, action queue specification, and
backup file on disk. For example, use the following configuration in /etc/rsyslog.conf
or create a file with the following content in the /etc/rsyslog.d/ directory:
*.* action(type=”omfwd”
queue.type=”LinkedList”
queue.filename=”example_fwd1”
action.resumeRetryCount="-1"
queue.saveonshutdown="on"
Target="example1.com" Protocol="tcp")
*.* action(type=”omfwd”
queue.type=”LinkedList”
queue.filename=”example_fwd2”
action.resumeRetryCount="-1"
queue.saveonshutdown="on"
Target="example2.com" Protocol="tcp")
21.4.2. Creating a New Directory for rsyslog Log Files
Rsyslog runs as the syslogd daemon and is managed by SELinux. Therefore all files to which rsyslog
is required to write to, must have the appropriate SELinux file context.
Procedure 21.3. Creating a New Working Directory
1. If required to use a different directory to store working files, create a directory as follows:
415
System Administrator's Guide
~]# mkdir /rsyslog
2. Install utilities to manage SELinux policy:
~]# yum install policycoreutils-python
3. Set the SELinux directory context type to be the same as the /var/lib/rsyslog/ directory:
~]# semanage fcontext -a -t syslogd_var_lib_t /rsyslog
4. Apply the SELinux context:
~]# restorecon -R -v /rsyslog
restorecon reset /rsyslog context
unconfined_u:object_r:default_t:s0>unconfined_u:object_r:syslogd_var_lib_t:s0
5. If required, check the SELinux context as follows:
~]# ls -Zd /rsyslog
drwxr-xr-x. root root system_u:object_r:syslogd_var_lib_t:s0
/rsyslog
6. Create subdirectories as required. For example:
~]# mkdir /rsyslog/work/
The subdirectories will be created with the same SELinux context as the parent directory.
7. Add the following line in /etc/rsyslog.conf immediately before it is required to take
effect:
global(workDirectory=”/rsyslog/work”)
This setting will remain in effect until the next WorkDirectory directive is encountered while
parsing the configuration files.
21.4.3. Managing Queues
All types of queues can be further configured to match your requirements. You can use several
directives to modify both action queues and the main message queue. Currently, there are more than
20 queue parameters available, see the section called “Online Documentation” . Some of these settings
are used commonly, others, such as worker thread management, provide closer control over the queue
behavior and are reserved for advanced users. With advanced settings, you can optimize rsyslog's
performance, schedule queuing, or modify the behavior of a queue on system shutdown.
Limiting Queue Size
You can limit the number of messages that queue can contain with the following setting:
object(queue.highwatermark=”number”)
Replace object with main_queue, action or ruleset to use this option to the main message queue,
an action queue or for the ruleset respectively. Replace number with a number of enqueued messages.
416
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
You can set the queue size only as the number of messages, not as their actual memory size. The
default queue size is 10,000 messages for the main message queue and ruleset queues, and 1000 for
action queues.
Disk assisted queues are unlimited by default and can not be restricted with this directive, but you can
reserve them physical disk space in bytes with the following settings:
object(queue.maxdiskspace=”number”)
Replace object with main_queue, action or ruleset. When the size limit specified by number is hit,
messages are discarded until sufficient amount of space is freed by dequeued messages.
Discarding Messages
When a queue reaches a certain number of messages, you can discard less important messages in
order to save space in the queue for entries of higher priority. The threshold that launches the
discarding process can be set with the so-called discard mark:
object(queue.discardmark=”number”)
Replace object with MainMsg or with Action to use this option to the main message queue or for an
action queue respectively. Here, number stands for a number of messages that have to be in the queue
to start the discarding process. To define which messages to discard, use:
object(queue.discardseverity=”number”)
Replace number with one of the following numbers for respective priorities: 7 (debug), 6 (info), 5
(notice), 4 (warning), 3 (err), 2 (crit), 1 (alert), or 0 (emerg). With this setting, both newly incoming and
already queued messages with lower than defined priority are erased from the queue immediately
after the discard mark is reached.
Using Timeframes
You can configure rsyslog to process queues during a specific time period. With this option you can,
for example, transfer some processing into off-peak hours. To define a time frame, use the following
syntax:
object(queue.dequeuetimebegin=”hour”)
object(queue.dequeuetimeend=”hour”)
With hour you can specify hours that bound your time frame. Use the 24-hour format without minutes.
Configuring Worker Threads
A worker thread performs a specified action on the enqueued message. For example, in the main
message queue, a worker task is to apply filter logic to each incoming message and enqueue them to
the relevant action queues. When a message arrives, a worker thread is started automatically. When
the number of messages reaches a certain number, another worker thread is turned on. To specify this
number, use:
object(queue.workerthreadminimummessages=”number”)
Replace number with a number of messages that will trigger a supplemental worker thread. For
example, with number set to 100, a new worker thread is started when more than 100 messages arrive.
When more than 200 messages arrive, the third worker thread starts and so on. However, too many
417
System Administrator's Guide
working threads running in parallel becomes ineffective, so you can limit the maximum number of
them by using:
object(queue.workerthreads=”number”)
where number stands for a maximum number of working threads that can run in parallel. For the main
message queue, the default limit is 1 thread. Once a working thread has been started, it keeps running
until an inactivity timeout appears. To set the length of timeout, type:
object(queue.timeoutworkerthreadshutdown=”time”)
Replace time with the duration set in milliseconds. Specifies time without new messages after which
the worker thread will be closed. Default setting is one minute.
Batch Dequeuing
To increase performance, you can configure rsyslog to dequeue multiple messages at once. To set the
upper limit for such dequeueing, use:
$object(queue.DequeueBatchSize= ”number”)
Replace number with the maximum number of messages that can be dequeued at once. Note that a
higher setting combined with a higher number of permitted working threads results in greater memory
consumption.
Terminating Queues
When terminating a queue that still contains messages, you can try to minimize the data loss by
specifying a time interval for worker threads to finish the queue processing:
object(queue.timeoutshutdown=”time”)
Specify time in milliseconds. If after that period there are still some enqueued messages, workers finish
the current data element and then terminate. Unprocessed messages are therefore lost. Another time
interval can be set for workers to finish the final element:
object(queue.timeoutactioncompletion=”time”)
In case this timeout expires, any remaining workers are shut down. To save data at shutdown, use:
object(queue.saveonshutdown=”on”)
If set, all queue elements are saved to disk before rsyslog terminates.
21.4.4. Using the New Syntax for rsyslog queues
In the new syntax available in rsyslog 7, queues are defined inside the action() object that can be
used both separately or inside a ruleset in /etc/rsyslog.conf. The format of an action queue is as
follows:
action(type="action_type "queue.size="queue_size" queue.type="queue_type"
queue.filename="file_name"
Replace action_type with the name of the module that is to perform the action and replace queue_size
with a maximum number of messages the queue can contain. For queue_type, choose disk or select
418
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
from one of the in-memory queues: direct, linkedlist or fixedarray. For file_name specify only
a file name, not a path. Note that if creating a new directory to hold log files, the SELinux context must
be set. See Section 21.4.2, “Creating a New Directory for rsyslog Log Files” for an example.
Example 21.13. Defining an Action Queue
To configure the output action with an asynchronous linked-list based action queue which can hold
a maximum of 10,000 messages, enter a command as follows:
action(type="omfile" queue.size="10000" queue.type="linkedlist"
queue.filename="logfile")
The rsyslog 7 syntax for a direct action queues is as follows:
*.* action(type="omfile" file="/var/lib/rsyslog/log_file
)
The rsyslog 7 syntax for an action queue with multiple parameters can be written as follows:
*.* action(type="omfile"
queue.filename="log_file"
queue.type="linkedlist"
queue.size="10000"
)
The default work directory, or the last work directory to be set, will be used. If required to use a
different work directory, add a line as follows before the action queue:
global(workDirectory="/directory")
Example 21.14. Forwarding To a Single Server Using the New Syntax
The following example is based on the procedure Procedure 21.1, “Forwarding To a Single Server”
in order to show the difference between the traditional sysntax and the rsyslog 7 syntax. The omfwd
plug-in is used to provide forwarding over UDP or TCP. The default is UDP. As the plug-in is built in it
does not have to be loaded.
Use the following configuration in /etc/rsyslog.conf or create a file with the following content
in the /etc/rsyslog.d/ directory:
*.* action(type="omfwd"
queue.type="linkedlist"
queue.filename="example_fwd"
action.resumeRetryCount="-1"
queue.saveOnShutdown="on"
target="example.com" port="6514" protocol="tcp"
)
Where:
queue.type="linkedlist" enables a LinkedList in-memory queue,
queue.filename defines a disk storage. The backup files are created with the
419
System Administrator's Guide
example_fwd prefix, in the working directory specified by the preceding global
workDirectory directive,
the action.resumeRetryCount -1 setting prevents rsyslog from dropping messages
when retrying to connect if server is not responding,
enabled queue.saveOnShutdown="on" saves in-memory data if rsyslog shuts down,
the last line forwards all received messages to the logging server, port specification is
optional.
21.5. CONFIGURING RSYSLOG ON A LOGGING SERVER
The rsyslog service provides facilities both for running a logging server and for configuring individual
systems to send their log files to the logging server. See Example 21.12, “Reliable Forwarding of Log
Messages to a Server” for information on client rsyslog configuration.
The rsyslog service must be installed on the system that you intend to use as a logging server and all
systems that will be configured to send logs to it. Rsyslog is installed by default in Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 7. If required, to ensure that it is, enter the following command as root:
~]# yum install rsyslog
The default protocol and port for syslog traffic is UDP and 514, as listed in the /etc/services file.
However, rsyslog defaults to using TCP on port 514. In the configuration file, /etc/rsyslog.conf,
TCP is indicated by @@.
Other ports are sometimes used in examples, however SELinux is only configured to allow sending and
receiving on the following ports by default:
~]# semanage port -l | grep syslog
syslogd_port_t
tcp
syslogd_port_t
udp
6514, 601
514, 6514, 601
The semanage utility is provided as part of the policycoreutils-python package. If required, install the
package as follows:
~]# yum install policycoreutils-python
In addition, by default the SELinux type for rsyslog, rsyslogd_t, is configured to permit sending and
receiving to the remote shell (rsh) port with SELinux type rsh_port_t, which defaults to TCP on port
514. Therefore it is not necessary to use semanage to explicitly permit TCP on port 514. For example,
to check what SELinux is set to permit on port 514, enter a command as follows:
~]# semanage port -l | grep 514
output omitted
rsh_port_t
tcp
syslogd_port_t
tcp
syslogd_port_t
udp
514
6514, 601
514, 6514, 601
For more information on SELinux, see Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 SELinux User's and Administrator's
Guide.
420
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
Perform the steps in the following procedures on the system that you intend to use as your logging
server. All steps in these procedure must be made as the root user.
Procedure 21.4. Configure SELinux to Permit rsyslog Traffic on a Port
If required to use a new port for rsyslog traffic, follow this procedure on the logging server and the
clients. For example, to send and receive TCP traffic on port 10514, proceed as follows:
1.
~]# semanage port -a -t syslogd_port_t -p tcp 10514
2. Review the SELinux ports by entering the following command:
~]# semanage port -l | grep syslog
3. If the new port was already configured in /etc/rsyslog.conf, restart rsyslog now for the
change to take effect:
~]# service rsyslog restart
4. Verify which ports rsyslog is now listening to:
~]# netstat -tnlp | grep rsyslog
tcp
0
0 0.0.0.0:10514
2528/rsyslogd
tcp
0
0 :::10514
2528/rsyslogd
0.0.0.0:*
LISTEN
:::*
LISTEN
See the semanage-port(8) manual page for more information on the semanage port command.
Procedure 21.5. Configuring firewalld
Configure firewalld to allow incoming rsyslog traffic. For example, to allow TCP traffic on port
10514, proceed as follows:
1.
~]# firewall-cmd --zone=zone --add-port=10514/tcp
success
Where zone is the zone of the interface to use. Note that these changes will not persist after
the next system start. To make permanent changes to the firewall, repeat the commands
adding the --permanent option. For more information on opening and closing ports in
firewalld, see the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Security Guide .
2. To verify the above settings, use a command as follows:
~]# firewall-cmd --list-all
public (default, active)
interfaces: eth0
sources:
services: dhcpv6-client ssh
ports: 10514/tcp
masquerade: no
421
System Administrator's Guide
forward-ports:
icmp-blocks:
rich rules:
Procedure 21.6. Configuring rsyslog to Receive and Sort Remote Log Messages
1. Open the /etc/rsyslog.conf file in a text editor and proceed as follows:
a. Add these lines below the modules section but above the Provides UDP syslog
reception section:
# Define templates before the rules that use them
### Per-Host Templates for Remote Systems ###
$template TmplAuthpriv,
"/var/log/remote/auth/%HOSTNAME%/%PROGRAMNAME:::secpathreplace%.log"
$template TmplMsg,
"/var/log/remote/msg/%HOSTNAME%/%PROGRAMNAME:::secpathreplace%.log"
b. Replace the default Provides TCP syslog reception section with the following:
# Provides TCP syslog reception
$ModLoad imtcp
# Adding this ruleset to process remote messages
$RuleSet remote1
authpriv.*
?TmplAuthpriv
*.info;mail.none;authpriv.none;cron.none
?TmplMsg
$RuleSet RSYSLOG_DefaultRuleset
#End the rule set by switching
back to the default rule set
$InputTCPServerBindRuleset remote1 #Define a new input and bind
it to the "remote1" rule set
$InputTCPServerRun 10514
Save the changes to the /etc/rsyslog.conf file.
2. The rsyslog service must be running on both the logging server and the systems attempting
to log to it.
a. Use the systemctl command to start the rsyslog service.
~]# systemctl start rsyslog
b. To ensure the rsyslog service starts automatically in future, enter the following
command as root:
~]# systemctl enable rsyslog
Your log server is now configured to receive and store log files from the other systems in your
environment.
422
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
21.5.1. Using The New Template Syntax on a Logging Server
Rsyslog 7 has a number of different templates styles. The string template most closely resembles the
legacy format. Reproducing the templates from the example above using the string format would look
as follows:
template(name="TmplAuthpriv" type="string"
string="/var/log/remote/auth/%HOSTNAME%/%PROGRAMNAME:::secpathreplace%.log"
)
template(name="TmplMsg" type="string"
string="/var/log/remote/msg/%HOSTNAME%/%PROGRAMNAME:::secpathreplace%.log"
)
These templates can also be written in the list format as follows:
template(name="TmplAuthpriv" type="list") {
constant(value="/var/log/remote/auth/")
property(name="hostname")
constant(value="/")
property(name="programname" SecurePath="replace")
constant(value=".log")
}
template(name="TmplMsg" type="list") {
constant(value="/var/log/remote/msg/")
property(name="hostname")
constant(value="/")
property(name="programname" SecurePath="replace")
constant(value=".log")
}
This template text format might be easier to read for those new to rsyslog and therefore can be easier
to adapt as requirements change.
To complete the change to the new syntax, we need to reproduce the module load command, add a
rule set, and then bind the rule set to the protocol, port, and ruleset:
module(load="imtcp")
ruleset(name="remote1"){
authpriv.*
action(type="omfile" DynaFile="TmplAuthpriv")
*.info;mail.none;authpriv.none;cron.none action(type="omfile"
DynaFile="TmplMsg")
}
input(type="imtcp" port="10514" ruleset="remote1")
21.6. USING RSYSLOG MODULES
Due to its modular design, rsyslog offers a variety of modules which provide additional functionality.
Note that modules can be written by third parties. Most modules provide additional inputs (see Input
423
System Administrator's Guide
Modules below) or outputs (see Output Modules below). Other modules provide special functionality
specific to each module. The modules may provide additional configuration directives that become
available after a module is loaded. To load a module, use the following syntax:
module(load=”MODULE”)
where MODULE represents your desired module. For example, if you want to load the Text File Input
Module (imfile) that enables rsyslog to convert any standard text files into syslog messages, specify
the following line in the /etc/rsyslog.conf configuration file:
module(load=”imfile”)
rsyslog offers a number of modules which are split into the following main categories:
Input Modules — Input modules gather messages from various sources. The name of an input
module always starts with the im prefix, such as imfile and imjournal.
Output Modules — Output modules provide a facility to issue message to various targets such
as sending across a network, storing in a database, or encrypting. The name of an output
module always starts with the om prefix, such as omsnmp, omrelp, and so on.
Parser Modules — These modules are useful in creating custom parsing rules or to parse
malformed messages. With moderate knowledge of the C programming language, you can
create your own message parser. The name of a parser module always starts with the pm prefix,
such as pmrfc5424, pmrfc3164, and so on.
Message Modification Modules — Message modification modules change content of syslog
messages. Names of these modules start with the mm prefix. Message Modification Modules
such as mmanon, mmnormalize, or mmjsonparse are used for anonymization or
normalization of messages.
String Generator Modules — String generator modules generate strings based on the message
content and strongly cooperate with the template feature provided by rsyslog. For more
information on templates, see Section 21.2.3, “Templates”. The name of a string generator
module always starts with the sm prefix, such as smfile or smtradfile.
Library Modules — Library modules provide functionality for other loadable modules. These
modules are loaded automatically by rsyslog when needed and cannot be configured by the
user.
A comprehensive list of all available modules and their detailed description can be found at
http://www.rsyslog.com/doc/rsyslog_conf_modules.html.
WARNING
Note that when rsyslog loads any modules, it provides them with access to some of
its functions and data. This poses a possible security threat. To minimize security
risks, use trustworthy modules only.
21.6.1. Importing Text Files
424
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
The Text File Input Module, abbreviated as imfile, enables rsyslog to convert any text file into a
stream of syslog messages. You can use imfile to import log messages from applications that create
their own text file logs. To load imfile, add the following into /etc/rsyslog.conf:
module(load=”imfile”
PollingInterval=”int”)
It is sufficient to load imfile once, even when importing multiple files. The PollingInterval module
argument specifies how often rsyslog checks for changes in connected text files. The default interval
is 10 seconds, to change it, replace int with a time interval specified in seconds.
To identify the text files to import, use the following syntax in /etc/rsyslog.conf:
# File 1
input(type="imfile"
File="path_to_file"
Tag="tag:"
Severity="severity"
Facility="facility")
# File 2
input(type="imfile"
File="path_to_file2")
...
Settings required to specify an input text file:
replace path_to_file with a path to the text file.
replace tag: with a tag name for this message.
Apart from the required directives, there are several other settings that can be applied on the text
input. Set the severity of imported messages by replacing severity with an appropriate keyword.
Replace facility with a keyword to define the subsystem that produced the message. The keywords for
severity and facility are the same as those used in facility/priority-based filters, see Section 21.2.1,
“Filters”.
Example 21.15. Importing Text Files
The Apache HTTP server creates log files in text format. To apply the processing capabilities of
rsyslog to apache error messages, first use the imfile module to import the messages. Add the
following into /etc/rsyslog.conf:
module(load=”imfile”)
input(type="imfile"
File="/var/log/httpd/error_log"
Tag="apache-error:")
21.6.2. Exporting Messages to a Database
Processing of log data can be faster and more convenient when performed in a database rather than
with text files. Based on the type of DBMS used, choose from various output modules such as
ommysql, ompgsql, omoracle, or ommongodb. As an alternative, use the generic omlibdbi output
425
System Administrator's Guide
module that relies on the libdbi library. The omlibdbi module supports database systems
Firebird/Interbase, MS SQL, Sybase, SQLite, Ingres, Oracle, mSQL, MySQL, and PostgreSQL.
Example 21.16. Exporting Rsyslog Messages to a Database
To store the rsyslog messages in a MySQL database, add the following into /etc/rsyslog.conf:
module(load=”ommysql”)
*.* action(type”ommysql”
server=”database-server”
db=”database-name”
uid=”database-userid”
pwd=”database-password”
serverport=”1234”)
First, the output module is loaded, then the communication port is specified. Additional information,
such as name of the server and the database, and authentication data, is specified on the last line of
the above example.
21.6.3. Enabling Encrypted Transport
Confidentiality and integrity in network transmissions can be provided by either the TLS or GSSAPI
encryption protocol.
Transport Layer Security (TLS) is a cryptographic protocol designed to provide communication security
over the network. When using TLS, rsyslog messages are encrypted before sending, and mutual
authentication exists between the sender and receiver. For configuring TLS, see the section called
“Configuring Encrypted Message Transfer with TLS”.
Generic Security Service API (GSSAPI) is an application programming interface for programs to access
security services. To use it in connection with rsyslog you must have a functioning Kerberos
environment. For configuring GSSAPI, see the section called “Configuring Encrypted Message Transfer
with GSSAPI”.
Configuring Encrypted Message Transfer with TLS
To use encrypted transport through TLS, you need to configure both the server and the client.
1. Create public key, private key and certificate file, see Section 13.1.11, “Generating a New Key
and Certificate”.
2. On the server side, configure the following in the /etc/rsyslog.conf configuration file:
a. Set the gtls netstream driver as the default driver:
global(defaultnetstreamdriver="gtls")
b. Provide paths to certificate files:
global(defaultnetstreamdrivercafile="path_ca.pem"
defaultnetstreamdrivercertfile="path_cert.pem"
defaultnetstreamdriverkeyfile="path_key.pem")
426
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
You can merge all global directives into single block if you prefer a less cluttered
configuration file.
Replace:
path_ca.pem with a path to your public key
path_cert.pem with a path to the certificate file
path_key.pem with a path to the private key
c. Load the imtcp moduleand set driver options:
module(load=”imtcp”
StreamDriver.Mode=“number”
StreamDriver.AuthMode=”anon”)
d. Start a server:
input(type="imtcp" port="port″)
Replace:
number to specify the driver mode. To enable TCP-only mode, use 1
port with the port number at which to start a listener, for example 10514
The anon setting means that the client is not authenticated.
3. On the client side, configure the following in the /etc/rsyslog.conf configuration file:
a. Load the public key:
global(defaultnetstreamdrivercafile="path_ca.pem")
Replace path_ca.pem with a path to the public key.
b. Set the gtls netstream driver as the default driver:
global(defaultnetstreamdriver="gtls")
c. Configure the driver and specify what action will be performed:
module(load=”imtcp”
streamdrivermode=”number”
streamdriverauthmode=”anon”)
input(type=”imtcp”
address=”server.net”
port=”port”)
Replace number, anon, and port with the same values as on the server.
On the last line in the above listing, an example action forwards messages from the server
to the specified TCP port.
427
System Administrator's Guide
Configuring Encrypted Message Transfer with GSSAPI
In rsyslog, interaction with GSSAPI is provided by the imgssapi module. To turn on the GSSAPI transfer
mode:
1. Put the following configuration in /etc/rsyslog.conf:
$ModLoad imgssapi
This directive loads the imgssapi module.
2. Specify the input as follows:
$InputGSSServerServiceName name
$InputGSSServerPermitPlainTCP on
$InputGSSServerMaxSessions number
$InputGSSServerRun port
Replace name with the name of the GSS server.
Replace number to set the maximum number of sessions supported. This number is not
limited by default.
Replace port with a selected port on which you want to start a GSS server.
The $InputGSSServerPermitPlainTCP on setting permits the server to receive also plain
TCP messages on the same port. This is off by default.
NOTE
The imgssapi module is initialized as soon as the configuration file reader encounters
the $InputGSSServerRun directive in the /etc/rsyslog.conf configuration file. The
supplementary options configured after $InputGSSServerRun are therefore ignored.
For configuration to take effect, all imgssapi configuration options must be placed
before $InputGSSServerRun.
Example 21.17. Using GSSAPI
The following configuration enables a GSS server on the port 1514 that also permits to receive plain
tcp syslog messages on the same port.
$ModLoad imgssapi
$InputGSSServerPermitPlainTCP on
$InputGSSServerRun 1514
21.6.4. Using RELP
Reliable Event Logging Protocol (RELP) is a networking protocol for data logging in computer networks.
It is designed to provide reliable delivery of event messages, which makes it useful in environments
where message loss is not acceptable.
To configure RELP, you need to configure both the server and the client using the
/etc/rsyslog.conf file.
428
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
1. To configure the client:
a. Load the required modules:
module(load="imuxsock")
module(load="omrelp")
module(load="imtcp")
b. Configure the TCP input as follows:
input(type="imtcp" port="port″)
Replace port to start a listener at the required port.
c. Configure the transport settings:
action(type="omrelp" target="target_IP″ port="target_port″)
Replace target_IP and target_port with the IP address and port that identify the target
server.
2. To configure the server:
a. Configure loading the module:
module(load="imuxsock")
module(load="imrelp" ruleset="relp")
b. Configure the TCP input similarly to the client configuration:
input(type="imrelp" port="target_port″)
Replace target_port with the same value as on the clients.
c. Configure the rules and choose an action to be performed. In the following example,
log_path specifies the path for storing messages:
ruleset (name="relp") {
action(type="omfile" file="log_path")
}
21.7. INTERACTION OF RSYSLOG AND JOURNAL
As mentioned above, Rsyslog and Journal, the two logging applications present on your system, have
several distinctive features that make them suitable for specific use cases. In many situations it is
useful to combine their capabilities, for example to create structured messages and store them in a file
database (see Section 21.8, “Structured Logging with Rsyslog” ). A communication interface needed for
this cooperation is provided by input and output modules on the side of Rsyslog and by the Journal's
communication socket.
By default, rsyslogd uses the imjournal module as a default input mode for journal files. With this
module, you import not only the messages but also the structured data provided by journald. Also,
older data can be imported from journald (unless forbidden with the IgnorePreviousMessages
429
System Administrator's Guide
option). See Section 21.8.1, “Importing Data from Journal” for basic configuration of imjournal.
As an alternative, configure rsyslogd to read from the socket provided by journal as an output for
syslog-based applications. The path to the socket is /run/systemd/journal/syslog. Use this
option when you want to maintain plain rsyslog messages. Compared to imjournal the socket input
currently offers more features, such as ruleset binding or filtering. To import Journal data trough the
socket, use the following configuration in /etc/rsyslog.conf:
module(load="imuxsock"
SysSock.Use="on"
SysSock.Name="/run/systemd/journal/syslog")
You can also output messages from Rsyslog to Journal with the omjournal module. Configure the
output in /etc/rsyslog.conf as follows:
module(load="omjournal")
action(type="omjournal")
For instance, the following configuration forwards all received messages on tcp port 10514 to the
Journal:
module(load="imtcp")
module(load="omjournal")
ruleset(name="remote") {
action(type="omjournal")
}
input(type="imtcp" port="10514" ruleset="remote")
21.8. STRUCTURED LOGGING WITH RSYSLOG
On systems that produce large amounts of log data, it can be convenient to maintain log messages in a
structured format. With structured messages, it is easier to search for particular information, to produce
statistics and to cope with changes and inconsistencies in message structure. Rsyslog uses the JSON
(JavaScript Object Notation) format to provide structure for log messages.
Compare the following unstructured log message:
Oct 25 10:20:37 localhost anacron[1395]: Jobs will be executed
sequentially
with a structured one:
{"timestamp":"2013-10-25T10:20:37", "host":"localhost",
"program":"anacron", "pid":"1395", "msg":"Jobs will be executed
sequentially"}
Searching structured data with use of key-value pairs is faster and more precise than searching text
files with regular expressions. The structure also lets you to search for the same entry in messages
produced by various applications. Also, JSON files can be stored in a document database such as
MongoDB, which provides additional performance and analysis capabilities. On the other hand, a
structured message requires more disk space than the unstructured one.
430
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
In rsyslog, log messages with meta data are pulled from Journal with use of the imjournal module.
With the mmjsonparse module, you can parse data imported from Journal and from other sources
and process them further, for example as a database output. For parsing to be successful,
mmjsonparse requires input messages to be structured in a way that is defined by the Lumberjack
project.
The Lumberjack project aims to add structured logging to rsyslog in a backward-compatible way. To
identify a structured message, Lumberjack specifies the @cee: string that prepends the actual JSON
structure. Also, Lumberjack defines the list of standard field names that should be used for entities in
the JSON string. For more information on Lumberjack, see the section called “Online Documentation” .
The following is an example of a lumberjack-formatted message:
@cee: {"pid":17055, "uid":1000, "gid":1000, "appname":"logger",
"msg":"Message text."}
To build this structure inside Rsyslog, a template is used, see Section 21.8.2, “Filtering Structured
Messages”. Applications and servers can employ the libumberlog library to generate messages in
the lumberjack-compliant form. For more information on libumberlog, see the section called “Online
Documentation”.
21.8.1. Importing Data from Journal
The imjournal module is Rsyslog's input module to natively read the journal files (see Section 21.7,
“Interaction of Rsyslog and Journal”). Journal messages are then logged in text format as other
rsyslog messages. However, with further processing, it is possible to translate meta data provided by
Journal into a structured message.
To import data from Journal to Rsyslog, use the following configuration in /etc/rsyslog.conf:
module(load=”imjournal”
PersistStateInterval=”number_of_messages”
StateFile=”path”
ratelimit.interval=”seconds”
ratelimit.burst=”burst_number”
IgnorePreviousMessages=”off/on”)
With number_of_messages, you can specify how often the journal data must be saved. This will
happen each time the specified number of messages is reached.
Replace path with a path to the state file. This file tracks the journal entry that was the last one
processed.
With seconds, you set the length of the rate limit interval. The number of messages processed
during this interval can not exceed the value specified in burst_number. The default setting is
20,000 messages per 600 seconds. Rsyslog discards messages that come after the maximum
burst within the time frame specified.
With IgnorePreviousMessages you can ignore messages that are currently in Journal and
import only new messages, which is used when there is no state file specified. The default
setting is off. Please note that if this setting is off and there is no state file, all messages in
the Journal are processed, even if they were already processed in a previous rsyslog session.
431
System Administrator's Guide
NOTE
You can use imjournal simultaneously with imuxsock module that is the traditional
system log input. However, to avoid message duplication, you must prevent imuxsock
from reading the Journal's system socket. To do so, use the SysSock.Use directive:
module(load”imjournal”)
module(load”imuxsock”
SysSock.Use=”off”
Socket="/run/systemd/journal/syslog")
You can translate all data and meta data stored by Journal into structured messages. Some of these
meta data entries are listed in Example 21.19, “Verbose journalctl Output”, for a complete list of journal
fields see the systemd.journal-fields(7) manual page. For example, it is possible to focus on
kernel journal fields, that are used by messages originating in the kernel.
21.8.2. Filtering Structured Messages
To create a lumberjack-formatted message that is required by rsyslog's parsing module, use the
following template:
template(name="CEETemplate" type="string" string="%TIMESTAMP% %HOSTNAME%
%syslogtag% @cee: %$!all-json%\n")
This template prepends the @cee: string to the JSON string and can be applied, for example, when
creating an output file with omfile module. To access JSON field names, use the $! prefix. For
example, the following filter condition searches for messages with specific hostname and UID:
($!hostname == "hostname" && $!UID== "UID")
21.8.3. Parsing JSON
The mmjsonparse module is used for parsing structured messages. These messages can come from
Journal or from other input sources, and must be formatted in a way defined by the Lumberjack
project. These messages are identified by the presence of the @cee: string. Then, mmjsonparse
checks if the JSON structure is valid and then the message is parsed.
To parse lumberjack-formatted JSON messages with mmjsonparse, use the following configuration in
the /etc/rsyslog.conf:
module(load”mmjsonparse”)
*.* :mmjsonparse:
In this example, the mmjsonparse module is loaded on the first line, then all messages are forwarded
to it. Currently, there are no configuration parameters available for mmjsonparse.
21.8.4. Storing Messages in the MongoDB
Rsyslog supports storing JSON logs in the MongoDB document database through the ommongodb
output module.
432
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
To forward log messages into MongoDB, use the following syntax in the /etc/rsyslog.conf
(configuration parameters for ommongodb are available only in the new configuration format; see
Section 21.3, “Using the New Configuration Format” ):
module(load”ommongodb”)
*.* action(type="ommongodb" server="DB_server" serverport="port"
db="DB_name" collection="collection_name" uid="UID" pwd="password")
Replace DB_server with the name or address of the MongoDB server. Specify port to select a
non-standard port from the MongoDB server. The default port value is 0 and usually there is no
need to change this parameter.
With DB_name, you identify to which database on the MongoDB server you want to direct the
output. Replace collection_name with the name of a collection in this database. In MongoDB,
collection is a group of documents, the equivalent of an RDBMS table.
You can set your login details by replacing UID and password.
You can shape the form of the final database output with use of templates. By default, rsyslog uses a
template based on standard lumberjack field names.
21.9. DEBUGGING RSYSLOG
To run rsyslogd in debugging mode, use the following command:
rsyslogd -dn
With this command, rsyslogd produces debugging information and prints it to the standard output.
The -n stands for "no fork". You can modify debugging with environmental variables, for example, you
can store the debug output in a log file. Before starting rsyslogd, type the following on the command
line:
export RSYSLOG_DEBUGLOG="path"
export RSYSLOG_DEBUG="Debug"
Replace path with a desired location for the file where the debugging information will be logged. For a
complete list of options available for the RSYSLOG_DEBUG variable, see the related section in the
rsyslogd(8) manual page.
To check if syntax used in the /etc/rsyslog.conf file is valid use:
rsyslogd -N 1
Where 1 represents level of verbosity of the output message. This is a forward compatibility option
because currently, only one level is provided. However, you must add this argument to run the
validation.
21.10. USING THE JOURNAL
The Journal is a component of systemd that is responsible for viewing and management of log files. It
can be used in parallel, or in place of a traditional syslog daemon, such as rsyslogd. The Journal was
developed to address problems connected with traditional logging. It is closely integrated with the rest
433
System Administrator's Guide
of the system, supports various logging technologies and access management for the log files.
Logging data is collected, stored, and processed by the Journal's journald service. It creates and
maintains binary files called journals based on logging information that is received from the kernel,
from user processes, from standard output, and standard error output of system services or via its
native API. These journals are structured and indexed, which provides relatively fast seek times.
Journal entries can carry a unique identifier. The journald service collects numerous meta data fields
for each log message. The actual journal files are secured, and therefore cannot be manually edited.
21.10.1. Viewing Log Files
To access the journal logs, use the journalctl tool. For a basic view of the logs type as root:
journalctl
An output of this command is a list of all log files generated on the system including messages
generated by system components and by users. The structure of this output is similar to one used in
/var/log/messages/ but with certain improvements:
the priority of entries is marked visually. Lines of error priority and higher are highlighted with
red color and a bold font is used for lines with notice and warning priority
the time stamps are converted for the local time zone of your system
all logged data is shown, including rotated logs
the beginning of a boot is tagged with a special line
Example 21.18. Example Output of journalctl
The following is an example output provided by the journalctl tool. When called without
parameters, the listed entries begin with a time stamp, then the host name and application that
performed the operation is mentioned followed by the actual message. This example shows the first
three entries in the journal log:
# journalctl
-- Logs begin at Thu 2013-08-01 15:42:12 CEST,
15:48:48 CEST. -Aug 01 15:42:12 localhost systemd-journal[54]:
files to grow to 49.7M.
Aug 01 15:42:12 localhost kernel: Initializing
Aug 01 15:42:12 localhost kernel: Initializing
end at Thu 2013-08-01
Allowing runtime journal
cgroup subsys cpuset
cgroup subsys cpu
[...]
In many cases, only the latest entries in the journal log are relevant. The simplest way to reduce
journalctl output is to use the -n option that lists only the specified number of most recent log
entries:
journalctl -n Number
Replace Number with the number of lines to be shown. When no number is specified, journalctl
displays the ten most recent entries.
434
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
The journalctl command allows controlling the form of the output with the following syntax:
journalctl -o form
Replace form with a keyword specifying a desired form of output. There are several options, such as
verbose, which returns full-structured entry items with all fields, export, which creates a binary
stream suitable for backups and network transfer, and json, which formats entries as JSON data
structures. For the full list of keywords, see the journalctl(1) manual page.
Example 21.19. Verbose journalctl Output
To view full meta data about all entries, type:
# journalctl -o verbose
[...]
Fri 2013-08-02 14:41:22 CEST
[s=e1021ca1b81e4fc688fad6a3ea21d35b;i=55c;b=78c81449c920439da57da7bd5c56
a770;m=27cc
_BOOT_ID=78c81449c920439da57da7bd5c56a770
PRIORITY=5
SYSLOG_FACILITY=3
_TRANSPORT=syslog
_MACHINE_ID=69d27b356a94476da859461d3a3bc6fd
_HOSTNAME=localhost.localdomain
_PID=562
_COMM=dbus-daemon
_EXE=/usr/bin/dbus-daemon
_CMDLINE=/bin/dbus-daemon --system --address=systemd: --nofork
--nopidfile --systemd-activation
_SYSTEMD_CGROUP=/system/dbus.service
_SYSTEMD_UNIT=dbus.service
SYSLOG_IDENTIFIER=dbus
SYSLOG_PID=562
_UID=81
_GID=81
_SELINUX_CONTEXT=system_u:system_r:system_dbusd_t:s0s0:c0.c1023
MESSAGE=[system] Successfully activated service
'net.reactivated.Fprint'
_SOURCE_REALTIME_TIMESTAMP=1375447282839181
[...]
This example lists fields that identify a single log entry. These meta data can be used for message
filtering as shown in the section called “Advanced Filtering” . For a complete description of all
possible fields see the systemd.journal-fields(7) manual page.
21.10.2. Access Control
By default, Journal users without root privileges can only see log files generated by them. The
system administrator can add selected users to the adm group, which grants them access to complete
log files. To do so, type as root:
435
System Administrator's Guide
usermod -a -G adm username
Here, replace username with a name of the user to be added to the adm group. This user then receives
the same output of the journalctl command as the root user. Note that access control only works
when persistent storage is enabled for Journal.
21.10.3. Using The Live View
When called without parameters, journalctl shows the full list of entries, starting with the oldest
entry collected. With the live view, you can supervise the log messages in real time as new entries are
continuously printed as they appear. To start journalctl in live view mode, type:
journalctl -f
This command returns a list of the ten most current log lines. The journalctl utility then stays running
and waits for new changes to show them immediately.
21.10.4. Filtering Messages
The output of the journalctl command executed without parameters is often extensive, therefore
you can use various filtering methods to extract information to meet your needs.
Filtering by Priority
Log messages are often used to track erroneous behavior on the system. To view only entries with a
selected or higher priority, use the following syntax:
journalctl -p priority
Here, replace priority with one of the following keywords (or with a number): debug (7), info (6),
notice (5), warning (4), err (3), crit (2), alert (1), and emerg (0).
Example 21.20. Filtering by Priority
To view only entries with error or higher priority, use:
journalctl -p err
Filtering by Time
To view log entries only from the current boot, type:
journalctl -b
If you reboot your system just occasionally, the -b will not significantly reduce the output of
journalctl. In such cases, time-based filtering is more helpful:
journalctl --since=value --until=value
With --since and --until, you can view only log messages created within a specified time range.
You can pass values to these options in form of date or time or both as shown in the following example.
436
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
Example 21.21. Filtering by Time and Priority
Filtering options can be combined to reduce the set of results according to specific requests. For
example, to view the warning or higher priority messages from a certain point in time, type:
journalctl -p warning --since="2013-3-16 23:59:59"
Advanced Filtering
Example 21.19, “Verbose journalctl Output” lists a set of fields that specify a log entry and can all be
used for filtering. For a complete description of meta data that systemd can store, see the
systemd.journal-fields(7) manual page. This meta data is collected for each log message,
without user intervention. Values are usually text-based, but can take binary and large values; fields
can have multiple values assigned though it is not very common.
To view a list of unique values that occur in a specified field, use the following syntax:
journalctl -F fieldname
Replace fieldname with a name of a field you are interested in.
To show only log entries that fit a specific condition, use the following syntax:
journalctl fieldname=value
Replace fieldname with a name of a field and value with a specific value contained in that field. As a
result, only lines that match this condition are returned.
NOTE
As the number of meta data fields stored by systemd is quite large, it is easy to forget
the exact name of the field of interest. When unsure, type:
journalctl
and press the Tab key two times. This shows a list of available field names. Tab
completion based on context works on field names, so you can type a distinctive set of
letters from a field name and then press Tab to complete the name automatically.
Similarly, you can list unique values from a field. Type:
journalctl fieldname=
and press Tab two times. This serves as an alternative to journalctl -F fieldname.
You can specify multiple values for one field:
journalctl fieldname=value1 fieldname=value2 ...
Specifying two matches for the same field results in a logical OR combination of the matches. Entries
matching value1 or value2 are displayed.
Also, you can specify multiple field-value pairs to further reduce the output set:
437
System Administrator's Guide
journalctl fieldname1=value fieldname2=value ...
If two matches for different field names are specified, they will be combined with a logical AND. Entries
have to match both conditions to be shown.
With use of the + symbol, you can set a logical OR combination of matches for multiple fields:
journalctl fieldname1=value + fieldname2=value ...
This command returns entries that match at least one of the conditions, not only those that match both
of them.
Example 21.22. Advanced filtering
To display entries created by avahi-daemon.service or crond.service under user with UID
70, use the following command:
journalctl _UID=70 _SYSTEMD_UNIT=avahi-daemon.service
_SYSTEMD_UNIT=crond.service
Since there are two values set for the _SYSTEMD_UNIT field, both results will be displayed, but only
when matching the _UID=70 condition. This can be expressed simply as: (UID=70 and (avahi or
cron)).
You can apply the aforementioned filtering also in the live-view mode to keep track of the latest
changes in the selected group of log entries:
journalctl -f fieldname=value ...
21.10.5. Enabling Persistent Storage
By default, Journal stores log files only in memory or a small ring-buffer in the /run/log/journal/
directory. This is sufficient to show recent log history with journalctl. This directory is volatile, log
data is not saved permanently. With the default configuration, syslog reads the journal logs and stores
them in the /var/log/ directory. With persistent logging enabled, journal files are stored in
/var/log/journal which means they persist after reboot. Journal can then replace rsyslog for
some users (but see the chapter introduction).
Enabled persistent storage has the following advantages
Richer data is recorded for troubleshooting in a longer period of time
For immediate troubleshooting, richer data is available after a reboot
Server console currently reads data from journal, not log files
Persistent storage has also certain disadvantages:
Even with persistent storage the amount of data stored depends on free memory, there is no
guarantee to cover a specific time span
More disk space is needed for logs
438
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
To enable persistent storage for Journal, create the journal directory manually as shown in the
following example. As root type:
mkdir -p /var/log/journal/
Then, restart journald to apply the change:
systemctl restart systemd-journald
21.11. MANAGING LOG FILES IN A GRAPHICAL ENVIRONMENT
As an alternative to the aforementioned command-line utilities, Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 provides
an accessible GUI for managing log messages.
21.11.1. Viewing Log Files
Most log files are stored in plain text format. You can view them with any text editor such as Vi or
Emacs. Some log files are readable by all users on the system; however, root privileges are required to
read most log files.
To view system log files in an interactive, real-time application, use the System Log.
NOTE
In order to use the System Log, first ensure the gnome-system-log package is installed
on your system by running, as root:
~]# yum install gnome-system-log
For more information on installing packages with Yum, see Section 8.2.4, “Installing
Packages”.
After you have installed the gnome-system-log package, open the System Log by clicking
Applications → System Tools → System Log, or type the following command at a shell prompt:
~]$ gnome-system-log
The application only displays log files that exist; thus, the list might differ from the one shown in
Figure 21.2, “System Log”.
439
System Administrator's Guide
Figure 21.2. System Log
The System Log application lets you filter any existing log file. Click on the button marked with the
gear symbol to view the menu, select Filters → Manage Filters to define or edit the desired filter.
Figure 21.3. System Log - Filters
Adding or editing a filter lets you define its parameters as is shown in Figure 21.4, “System Log defining a filter”.
440
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
Figure 21.4. System Log - defining a filter
When defining a filter, the following parameters can be edited:
Name — Specifies the name of the filter.
Regular Expression — Specifies the regular expression that will be applied to the log file
and will attempt to match any possible strings of text in it.
Effect
Highlight — If checked, the found results will be highlighted with the selected color. You
may select whether to highlight the background or the foreground of the text.
Hide — If checked, the found results will be hidden from the log file you are viewing.
When you have at least one filter defined, it can be selected from the Filters menu and it will
automatically search for the strings you have defined in the filter and highlight or hide every
successful match in the log file you are currently viewing.
441
System Administrator's Guide
Figure 21.5. System Log - enabling a filter
When you select the Show matches only option, only the matched strings will be shown in the log
file you are currently viewing.
21.11.2. Adding a Log File
To add a log file you want to view in the list, select File → Open. This will display the Open Log window
where you can select the directory and file name of the log file you want to view. Figure 21.6, “System
Log - adding a log file” illustrates the Open Log window.
442
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
Figure 21.6. System Log - adding a log file
Click on the Open button to open the file. The file is immediately added to the viewing list where you
can select it and view its contents.
NOTE
The System Log also allows you to open log files zipped in the .gz format.
21.11.3. Monitoring Log Files
System Log monitors all opened logs by default. If a new line is added to a monitored log file, the log
name appears in bold in the log list. If the log file is selected or displayed, the new lines appear in bold
at the bottom of the log file. Figure 21.7, “System Log - new log alert” illustrates a new alert in the
cron log file and in the messages log file. Clicking on the messages log file displays the logs in the file
with the new lines in bold.
443
System Administrator's Guide
Figure 21.7. System Log - new log alert
21.12. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
For more information on how to configure the rsyslog daemon and how to locate, view, and monitor
log files, see the resources listed below.
Installed Documentation
rsyslogd(8) — The manual page for the rsyslogd daemon documents its usage.
rsyslog.conf(5) — The manual page named rsyslog.conf documents available
configuration options.
logrotate(8) — The manual page for the logrotate utility explains in greater detail how to
configure and use it.
journalctl(1) — The manual page for the journalctl daemon documents its usage.
journald.conf(5) — This manual page documents available configuration options.
systemd.journal-fields(7) — This manual page lists special Journal fields.
Installable Documentation
/usr/share/doc/rsyslogversion/html/index.html — This file, which is provided by the
rsyslog-doc package from the Optional channel, contains information on rsyslog. See Section 8.5.7,
“Adding the Optional and Supplementary Repositories” for more information on Red Hat additional
channels. Before accessing the documentation, you must run the following command as root:
~]# yum install rsyslog-doc
444
CHAPTER 21. VIEWING AND MANAGING LOG FILES
Online Documentation
The rsyslog home page offers additional documentation, configuration examples, and video tutorials.
Make sure to consult the documents relevant to the version you are using:
RainerScript documentation on the rsyslog Home Page — Commented summary of data types,
expressions, and functions available in RainerScript.
rsyslog version 7 documentation on the rsyslog home page — Version 7 of rsyslog is available
for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 in the rsyslog package.
Description of queues on the rsyslog Home Page — General information on various types of
message queues and their usage.
See Also
Chapter 5, Gaining Privileges documents how to gain administrative privileges by using the su
and sudo commands.
Chapter 9, Managing Services with systemd provides more information on systemd and
documents how to use the systemctl command to manage system services.
445
System Administrator's Guide
CHAPTER 22. AUTOMATING SYSTEM TASKS
You can configure Red Hat Enterprise Linux to automatically run tasks, also known as jobs:
regularly at specified time using cron, see Section 22.1, “Scheduling a Recurring Job Using
Cron”
asynchronously at certain days using anacron, see Section 22.2, “Scheduling a Recurring
Asynchronous Job Using Anacron”
once at a specific time using at, see Section 22.3, “Scheduling a Job to Run at a Specific Time
Using at”
once when system load average drops to a specified value using batch, see Section 22.4,
“Scheduling a Job to Run on System Load Drop Using batch”
once on the next boot, see Section 22.5, “Scheduling a Job to Run on Next Boot Using a
systemd Unit File”
This chapter describes how to perform these tasks.
22.1. SCHEDULING A RECURRING JOB USING CRON
Cron is a service that enables you to schedule running a task, often called a job, at regular times. A
cron job is only executed if the system is running on the scheduled time. For scheduling jobs that can
postpone their execution to when the system boots up, so a job is not "lost" if the system is not
running, see Section 22.3, “Scheduling a Job to Run at a Specific Time Using at” .
Users specify cron jobs in cron table files, also called crontab files. These files are then read by the
crond service, which executes the jobs.
22.1.1. Prerequisites for Cron Jobs
Before scheduling a cron job:
1. Install the cronie package:
~]# yum install cronie
2. The crond service is enabled - made to start automatically at boot time - upon installation. If
you disabled the service, enable it:
~]# systemctl enable crond.service
3. Start the crond service for the current session:
~]# systemctl start crond.service
4. (optional) Configure cron. For example, you can change:
shell to be used when executing jobs
the PATH environment variable
446
CHAPTER 22. AUTOMATING SYSTEM TASKS
mail addressee if a job sends emails.
See the crontab(5) manual page for information on configuring cron.
22.1.2. Scheduling a Cron Job
Scheduling a Job as root User
The root user uses the cron table in /etc/crontab, or, preferably, creates a cron table file in
/etc/cron.d/. Use this procedure to schedule a job as root:
1. Choose:
in which minutes of an hour to execute the job. For example, use 0,10,20,30,40,50 or
0/10 to specify every 10 minutes of an hour.
in which hours of a day to execute the job. For example, use 17-20 to specify time from
17:00 to 20:59.
in which days of a month to execute the job. For example, use 15 to specify 15th day of a
month.
in which months of a year to execute the job. For example, use Jun,Jul,Aug or 6,7,8 to
specify the summer months of the year.
in which days of the week to execute the job. For example, use * for the job to execute
independently of the day of week.
Combine the chosen values into the time specification. The above example values result into
this specification:
0,10,20,30,40,50 17-20 15 Jun,Jul,Aug *
2. Specify the user. The job will execute as if run by this user. For example, use root.
3. Specify the command to execute. For example, use /usr/local/bin/my-script.sh
4. Put the above specifications into a single line:
0,10,20,30,40,50 17-20 15 Jun,Jul,Aug * root /usr/local/bin/myscript.sh
5. Add the resulting line to /etc/crontab, or, preferably, create a cron table file in
/etc/cron.d/ and add the line there.
The job will now run as scheduled.
For full reference on how to specify a job, see the crontab(5) manual page. For basic information, see
the beginning of the /etc/crontab file:
SHELL=/bin/bash
PATH=/sbin:/bin:/usr/sbin:/usr/bin
MAILTO=root
# For details see man 4 crontabs
447
System Administrator's Guide
# Example of job definition:
# .---------------- minute (0 - 59)
# | .------------- hour (0 - 23)
# | | .---------- day of month (1 - 31)
# | | | .------- month (1 - 12) OR jan,feb,mar,apr ...
# | | | | .---- day of week (0 - 6) (Sunday=0 or 7) OR
sun,mon,tue,wed,thu,fri,sat
# | | | | |
# * * * * * user-name command to be executed
Scheduling a Job as Non-root User
Non-root users can use the crontab utility to configure cron jobs. The jobs will run as if executed by
that user.
To create a cron job as a specific user:
1. From the user's shell, run:
[bob@localhost ~]$ crontab -e
This will start editing of the user's own crontab file using the editor specified by the VISUAL
or EDITOR environment variable.
2. Specify the job in the same way as in Scheduling a cron Job as root user , but leave out the field
with user name. For example, instead of adding
0,10,20,30,40,50 17-20 15 Jun,Jul,Aug * bob /home/bob/bin/script.sh
add:
0,10,20,30,40,50 17-20 15 Jun,Jul,Aug * /home/bob/bin/script.sh
3. Save the file and exit the editor.
4. (optional) To verify the new job, list the contents of the current user's crontab file by running:
[bob@localhost ~]$ crontab -l
@daily /home/bob/bin/script.sh
Scheduling Hourly, Daily, Weekly, and Monthly Jobs
To schedule an hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly job:
1. Put the actions you want your job to execute into a shell script.
2. Put the shell script into one of the following directories:
/etc/cron.hourly/
/etc/cron.daily/
/etc/cron.weekly/
/etc/cron.monthly/
448
CHAPTER 22. AUTOMATING SYSTEM TASKS
From now, your script will be executed - the crond service automatically executes any scripts present
in /etc/cron.hourly, /etc/cron.daily, /etc/cron.weekly, and /etc/cron.monthly
directories at their corresponding times.
22.2. SCHEDULING A RECURRING ASYNCHRONOUS JOB USING
ANACRON
Anacron, like cron, is a service that enables you to schedule running a task, often called a job, at
regular times. However, anacron differs from cron in two ways:
If the system is not running at the scheduled time, an anacron job is postponed until the
system is running;
An anacron job can run once per day at most.
Users specify anacron jobs in anacron table files, also called anacrontab files. These files are then
read by the crond service, which executes the jobs.
22.2.1. Prerequisites for Anacrob Jobs
Before scheduling an anacron job:
1. Verify that you have the cronie-anacron package installed:
~]# rpm -q cronie-anacron
The cronie-anacron is likely to be installed already, because it is a sub-package of the cronie
package. If it is not installed, use this command:
~]# yum install cronie-anacron
2. The crond service is enabled - made to start automatically at boot time - upon installation. If
you disabled the service, enable it:
~]# systemctl enable crond.service
3. Start the crond service for the current session:
~]# systemctl start crond.service
4. (optional) Configure anacron. For example, you can change:
shell to be used when executing jobs
the PATH environment variable
mail addressee if a job sends emails.
See the anacrontab(5) manual page for information on configuring anacron.
22.2.2. Scheduling an Anacron Job
449
System Administrator's Guide
Scheduling an anacron Job as root User
The root user uses the anacron table in /etc/anacrontab. Use the following procedure to schedule
a job as root.
Procedure 22.1. Scheduling an anacron Job as root User
1. Choose:
Frequency of executing the job. For example, use 1 to specify every day or 3 to specify
once in 3 days.
The delay of executing the job. For example, use 0 to specify no delay or 60 to specify 1
hour of delay.
The job identifier, which will be used for logging. For example, use my.anacron.job to log
the job with the my.anacron.job string.
The command to execute. For example, use /usr/local/bin/my-script.sh
Combine the chosen values into the job specification. Here is an example specification:
3 60 cron.daily /usr/local/bin/my-script.sh
2. Add the resulting line to /etc/anacrontab.
The job will now run as scheduled.
For simple job examples, see the /etc/anacrontab file. For full reference on how to specify a job, see
the anacrontab(5) manual page.
Scheduling Hourly, Daily, Weekly, and Monthly Jobs
You can schedule daily, weekly, and monthly jobs with anacron. See the section called “Scheduling
Hourly, Daily, Weekly, and Monthly Jobs”.
22.3. SCHEDULING A JOB TO RUN AT A SPECIFIC TIME USING AT
To schedule a one-time task, also called a job, to run once at a specific time, use the at utility.
Users specify at jobs using the at utility. The jobs are then executed by the atd service.
22.3.1. Prerequisites for At Jobs
Before scheduling an at job:
1. Install the at package:
~]# yum install at
2. The atd service is enabled - made to start automatically at boot time - upon installation. If you
disabled the service, enable it:
~]# systemctl enable atd.service
450
CHAPTER 22. AUTOMATING SYSTEM TASKS
3. Start the atd service for the current session:
~]# systemctl start atd.service
22.3.2. Scheduling an At Job
1. A job is always run by some user. Log in as the desired user and run:
~]# at time
Replace time with the time specification.
For details on specifying time, see the at(1) manual page and the
/usr/share/doc/at/timespec file.
Example 22.1. Specifying Time for At
To execute the job at 15:00, run:
~]# at 15:00
If the specified time has passed, the job is executed at the same time the next day.
To execute the job on August 20 2017, run:
~]# at August 20 2017
or
~]# at 082017
To execute the job 5 days from now, run:
~]# now + 5 days
2. At the displayed at> prompt, enter the command to execute and press Enter:
~]# at 15:00
at> sh /usr/local/bin/my-script.sh
at>
Repeat this step for every command you want to execute.
451
System Administrator's Guide
NOTE
The at> prompt shows which shell it will use:
warning: commands will be executed using /bin/sh
The at utility uses the shell set in user's SHELL environment variable, or the
user's login shell, or /bin/sh, whichever is found first.
3. Press Ctrl+D on an empty line to finish specifying the job.
NOTE
If the set of commands or the script tries to display information to standard output, the
output is emailed to the user.
Viewing Pending Jobs
To view the list of pending jobs, use the atq command:
~]# atq
26
Thu Feb 23 15:00:00 2017 a root
28
Thu Feb 24 17:30:00 2017 a root
Each job is listed on a separate line in the following format:
job_number scheduled_date scheduled_hour job_class user_name
The job_queue column specifies whether a job is an at or a batch job. a stands for at, b stands for
batch.
Non-root users only see their own jobs. The root user sees jobs for all users.
Deleting a Scheduled Job
To delete a scheduled job:
1. List pending jobs with the atq command:
~]# atq
26
Thu Feb 23 15:00:00 2017 a root
28
Thu Feb 24 17:30:00 2017 a root
2. Find the job you want to delete by its scheduled time and the user.
3. Run the atrm command, specifying the job by its number:
~]# atrm 26
22.3.2.1. Controlling Access to At and Batch
You can restrict access to the at and batch commands for specific users. To do this, put user names
into /etc/at.allow or /etc/at.deny according to these rules:
452
CHAPTER 22. AUTOMATING SYSTEM TASKS
Both access control files use the same format: one user name on each line.
No white space is permitted in either file.
If the at.allow file exists, only users listed in the file are allowed to use at or batch, and the
at.deny file is ignored.
If at.allow does not exist, users listed in at.deny are not allowed to use at or batch.
The root user is not affected by the access control files and can always execute the at and
batch commands.
The at daemon ( atd) does not have to be restarted if the access control files are modified. The access
control files are read each time a user tries to execute the at or batch commands.
22.4. SCHEDULING A JOB TO RUN ON SYSTEM LOAD DROP USING
BATCH
To schedule a one-time task, also called a job, to run when the system load average drops below the
specified value, use the batch utility. This can be useful for performing resource-demanding tasks or
for preventing the system from being idle.
Users specify batch jobs using the batch utility. The jobs are then executed by the atd service.
22.4.1. Prerequisites for Batch Jobs
The batch utility is provided in the at package, and batch jobs are managed by the atd service.
Hence, the prerequisites for batch jobs are the same as for at jobs. See Section 22.3.1, “Prerequisites
for At Jobs”.
22.4.2. Scheduling a Batch Job
1. A job is always run by some user. Log in as the desired user and run:
~]# batch
2. At the displayed at> prompt, enter the command to execute and press Enter:
~]# batch
at> sh /usr/local/bin/my-script.sh
Repeat this step for every command you want to execute.
NOTE
The at> prompt shows which shell it will use:
warning: commands will be executed using /bin/sh
The batch utility uses the shell set in user's SHELL environment variable, or the
user's login shell, or /bin/sh, whichever is found first.
453
System Administrator's Guide
3. Press Ctrl+D on an empty line to finish specifying the job.
NOTE
If the set of commands or the script tries to display information to standard output, the
output is emailed to the user.
Changing the Default System Load Average Limit
By default, batch jobs start when system load average drops below 0.8. This setting is kept in the atq
service. To change the system load limit:
1. To the /etc/sysconfig/atd file, add this line:
OPTS='-l x'
Substitute x with the new load average. For example:
OPTS='-l 0.5'
2. Restart the atq service:
# systemctl restart atq
Viewing Pending Jobs
To view the list of pending jobs, use the atq command. See the section called “Viewing Pending Jobs” .
Deleting a Scheduled Job
To delete a scheduled job, use the atrm command. See the section called “Deleting a Scheduled Job” .
Controlling Access to Batch
You can also restrict the usage of the batch utility. This is done for the batch and at utilities
together. See Section 22.3.2.1, “Controlling Access to At and Batch” .
22.5. SCHEDULING A JOB TO RUN ON NEXT BOOT USING A SYSTEMD
UNIT FILE
The cron, anacron, at, and batch utilities allow scheduling jobs for specific times or for when system
workload reaches a certain level. It is also possible to create a job that will run during the next system
boot. This is done by creating a systemd unit file that specifies the script to run and its dependencies.
To configure a script to run on the next boot:
1. Create the systemd unit file that specifies at which stage of the boot process to run the script.
This example shows a unit file with a reasonable set of Wants= and After= dependencies:
~]# cat /etc/systemd/system/one-time.service
[Unit]
# The script needs to execute after:
# network interfaces are configured
Wants=network-online.target
After=network-online.target
# all remote filesystems (NFS/_netdev) are mounted
454
CHAPTER 22. AUTOMATING SYSTEM TASKS
After=remote-fs.target
# name (DNS) and user resolution from remote databases (AD/LDAP) are
available
After=nss-user-lookup.target nss-lookup.target
# the system clock has synchronized
After=time-sync.target
[Service]
Type=oneshot
ExecStart=/usr/local/bin/foobar.sh
[Install]
WantedBy=multi-user.target
If you use this example:
substitute /usr/local/bin/foobar.sh with the name of your script
modify the set of After= entries if necessary
For information on specifying the stage of boot, see Section 9.6, “Creating and Modifying
systemd Unit Files”.
2. If you want the systemd service to stay active after executing the script, add the
RemainAfterExit=yes line to the [Service] section:
[Service]
Type=oneshot
RemainAfterExit=yes
ExecStart=/usr/local/bin/foobar.sh
3. Reload the systemd daemon:
~]# systemctl daemon-reload
4. Enable the systemd service:
~]# systemctl enable one-time.service
5. Create the script to execute:
~]# cat /usr/local/bin/foobar.sh
#!/bin/bash
touch /root/test_file
6. If you want the script to run during the next boot only, and not on every boot, add a line that
disables the systemd unit:
#!/bin/bash
touch /root/test_file
systemctl disable one-time.service
455
System Administrator's Guide
7. Make the script executable:
~]# chmod +x /usr/local/bin/foobar.sh
22.6. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
For more information on automating system tasks on Red Hat Enterprise Linux, see the resources
listed below.
Installed Documentation
cron - The manual page for the crond daemon documents how crond works and how to
change its behavior.
crontab - The manual page for the crontab utility provides a complete list of supported
options.
crontab(5) - This section of the manual page for the crontab utility documents the format of
crontab files.
456
CHAPTER 23. AUTOMATIC BUG REPORTING TOOL (ABRT)
CHAPTER 23. AUTOMATIC BUG REPORTING TOOL (ABRT)
23.1. INTRODUCTION TO ABRT
The Automatic Bug Reporting Tool , commonly abbreviated as ABRT, is a set of tools that is designed
to help users detect and report application crashes. Its main purpose is to ease the process of
reporting issues and finding solutions. In this context, the solution can be a Bugzilla ticket, a
knowledge-base article, or a suggestion to update a package to a version containing a fix.
ABRT consists of the abrtd daemon and a number of system services and utilities for processing,
analyzing, and reporting detected problems. The daemon runs silently in the background most of the
time and springs into action when an application crashes or a kernel oops is detected. The daemon then
collects the relevant problem data, such as a core file if there is one, the crashing application's
command line parameters, and other data of forensic utility.
ABRT currently supports the detection of crashes in applications written in the C, C++, Java, Python,
and Ruby programming languages, as well as X.Org crashes, kernel oopses, and kernel panics. See
Section 23.4, “Detecting Software Problems” for more detailed information on the types of failures
and crashes supported, and the way the various types of crashes are detected.
The identified problems can be reported to a remote issue tracker, and the reporting can be configured
to happen automatically whenever an issue is detected. Problem data can also be stored locally or on a
dedicated system and reviewed, reported, and deleted manually by the user. The reporting tools can
send problem data to a Bugzilla database or the Red Hat Technical Support (RHTSupport) website. The
tools can also upload it using FTP or SCP, send it as an email, or write it to a file.
The ABRT component that handles existing problem data (as opposed to, for example, the creation of
new problem data) is a part of a separate project, libreport. The libreport library provides a generic
mechanism for analyzing and reporting problems, and it is used by applications other than ABRT as
well. However, ABRT and libreport operation and configuration are closely integrated. They are,
therefore, discussed as one in this document.
23.2. INSTALLING ABRT AND STARTING ITS SERVICES
In order to use ABRT, ensure that the abrt-desktop or the abrt-cli package is installed on your system.
The abrt-desktop package provides a graphical user interface for ABRT, and the abrt-cli package
contains a tool for using ABRT on the command line. You can also install both. The general workflow
with both the ABRT GUI and the command line tool is procedurally similar and follows the same
pattern.
WARNING
Please note that installing the ABRT packages overwrites the
/proc/sys/kernel/core_pattern file, which can contain a template used to
name core-dump files. The content of this file will be overwritten to:
|/usr/libexec/abrt-hook-ccpp %s %c %p %u %g %t e
457
System Administrator's Guide
See Section 8.2.4, “Installing Packages” for general information on how to install packages using the
Yum package manager.
23.2.1. Installing the ABRT GUI
The ABRT graphical user interface provides an easy-to-use front end for working in a desktop
environment. You can install the required package by running the following command as the root
user:
~]# yum install abrt-desktop
Upon installation, the ABRT notification applet is configured to start automatically when your
graphical desktop session starts. You can verify that the ABRT applet is running by issuing the
following command in a terminal:
~]$ ps -el | grep abrt-applet
0 S
500 2036 1824 0 80
applet
0 - 61604 poll_s ?
00:00:00 abrt-
If the applet is not running, you can start it manually in your current desktop session by running the
abrt-applet program:
~]$ abrt-applet &
[1] 2261
23.2.2. Installing ABRT for the Command Line
The command line interface is useful on headless machines, remote systems connected over a network,
or in scripts. You can install the required package by running the following command as the root user:
~]# yum install abrt-cli
23.2.3. Installing Supplementary ABRT Tools
To receive email notifications about crashes detected by ABRT, you need to have the libreport-pluginmailx package installed. You can install it by executing the following command as root:
~]# yum install libreport-plugin-mailx
By default, it sends notifications to the root user at the local machine. The email destination can be
configured in the /etc/libreport/plugins/mailx.conf file.
To have notifications displayed in your console at login time, install the abrt-console-notification
package as well.
ABRT can detect, analyze, and report various types of software failures. By default, ABRT is installed
with support for the most common types of failures, such as crashes of C and C++ applications.
Support for other types of failures is provided by independent packages. For example, to install
support for detecting exceptions in applications written using the Java language, run the following
command as root:
~]# yum install abrt-java-connector
458
CHAPTER 23. AUTOMATIC BUG REPORTING TOOL (ABRT)
See Section 23.4, “Detecting Software Problems” for a list of languages and software projects which
ABRT supports. The section also includes a list of all corresponding packages that enable the
detection of the various types of failures.
23.2.4. Starting the ABRT Services
The abrtd daemon requires the abrt user to exist for file system operations in the
/var/spool/abrt directory. When the abrt package is installed, it automatically creates the abrt
user whose UID and GID is 173, if such user does not already exist. Otherwise, the abrt user can be
created manually. In that case, any UID and GID can be chosen, because abrtd does not require a
specific UID and GID.
The abrtd daemon is configured to start at boot time. You can use the following command to verify its
current status:
~]$ systemctl is-active abrtd.service
active
If systemctl returns inactive or unknown, the daemon is not running. You can start it for the
current session by entering the following command as root:
~]# systemctl start abrtd.service
You can use the same commands to start or check status of related error-detection services. For
example, make sure the abrt-ccpp service is running if you want ABRT to detect C or C++ crashes.
See Section 23.4, “Detecting Software Problems” for a list of all available ABRT detection services
and their respective packages.
With the exception of the abrt-vmcore and abrt-pstoreoops services, which are only started
when a kernel panic or kernel oops occurs, all ABRT services are automatically enabled and started at
boot time when their respective packages are installed. You can disable or enable any ABRT service
by using the systemctl utility as described in Chapter 9, Managing Services with systemd.
23.2.5. Testing ABRT Crash Detection
To test that ABRT works properly, use the kill command to send the SEGV signal to terminate a
process. For example, start a sleep process and terminate it with the kill command in the following
way:
~]$ sleep 100 &
[1] 2823
~]$ kill -s SEGV 2823
ABRT detects a crash shortly after executing the kill command, and, provided a graphical session is
running, the user is notified of the detected problem by the GUI notification applet. On the command
line, you can check that the crash was detected by running the abrt-cli list command or by
examining the crash dump created in the /var/tmp/abrt/ directory. See Section 23.5, “Handling
Detected Problems” for more information on how to work with detected crashes.
23.3. CONFIGURING ABRT
A problem life cycle is driven by events in ABRT. For example:
459
System Administrator's Guide
Event #1 — a problem-data directory is created.
Event #2 — problem data is analyzed.
Event #3 — the problem is reported to Bugzilla.
Whenever a problem is detected, ABRT compares it with all existing problem data and determines
whether that same problem has already been recorded. If it has, the existing problem data is updated,
and the most recent (duplicate) problem is not recorded again. If the problem is not recognized by
ABRT, a problem-data directory is created. A problem-data directory typically consists of files such
as: analyzer, architecture, coredump, cmdline, executable, kernel, os_release, reason,
time, and uid.
Other files, such as backtrace, can be created during the analysis of the problem, depending on which
analyzer method is used and its configuration settings. Each of these files holds specific information
about the system and the problem itself. For example, the kernel file records the version of a crashed
kernel.
After the problem-data directory is created and problem data gathered, you can process the problem
using either the ABRT GUI, or the abrt-cli utility for the command line. See Section 23.5, “Handling
Detected Problems” for more information about the ABRT tools provided for working with recorded
problems.
23.3.1. Configuring Events
ABRT events use plugins to carry out the actual reporting operations. Plugins are compact utilities
that the events call to process the content of problem-data directories. Using plugins, ABRT is capable
of reporting problems to various destinations, and almost every reporting destination requires some
configuration. For instance, Bugzilla requires a user name, password, and a URL pointing to an instance
of the Bugzilla service.
Some configuration details can have default values (such as a Bugzilla URL), but others cannot have
sensible defaults (for example, a user name). ABRT looks for these settings in configuration files, such
as report_Bugzilla.conf, in the /etc/libreport/events/ or $HOME/.cache/abrt/events/
directories for system-wide or user-specific settings respectively. The configuration files contain pairs
of directives and values.
These files are the bare minimum necessary for running events and processing the problem-data
directories. The gnome-abrt and abrt-cli tools read the configuration data from these files and
pass it to the events they run.
Additional information about events (such as their description, names, types of parameters that can be
passed to them as environment variables, and other properties) is stored in event_name.xml files in
the /usr/share/libreport/events/ directory. These files are used by both gnome-abrt and abrtcli to make the user interface more friendly. Do not edit these files unless you want to modify the
standard installation. If you intend to do that, copy the file to be modified to the
/etc/libreport/events/ directory and modify the new file. These files can contain the following
information:
a user-friendly event name and description (Bugzilla, Report to Bugzilla bug tracker),
a list of items in a problem-data directory that are required for the event to succeed,
a default and mandatory selection of items to send or not send,
whether the GUI should prompt for data review,
460
CHAPTER 23. AUTOMATIC BUG REPORTING TOOL (ABRT)
what configuration options exist, their types (string, Boolean, etc.), default value, prompt
string, etc.; this lets the GUI build appropriate configuration dialogs.
For example, the report_Logger event accepts an output filename as a parameter. Using the
respective event_name.xml file, the ABRT GUI determines which parameters can be specified for a
selected event and allows the user to set the values for these parameters. The values are saved by the
ABRT GUI and reused on subsequent invocations of these events. Note that the ABRT GUI saves
configuration options using the GNOME Keyring tool and by passing them to events, it overrides data
from text configuration files.
To open the graphical Configuration window, choose Automatic Bug Reporting Tool →
Preferences from within a running instance of the gnome-abrt application. This window shows a list of
events that can be selected during the reporting process when using the GUI. When you select one of
the configurable events, you can click the Configure button and modify the settings for that event.
Figure 23.1. Configuring ABRT Events
461
System Administrator's Guide
IMPORTANT
All files in the /etc/libreport/ directory hierarchy are world-readable and are
meant to be used as global settings. Thus, it is not advisable to store user names,
passwords, or any other sensitive data in them. The per-user settings (set in the GUI
application and readable by the owner of $HOME only) are safely stored in GNOME
Keyring, or they can be stored in a text configuration file in $HOME/.abrt/ for use with
abrt-cli.
The following table shows a selection of the default analyzing, collecting, and reporting events
provided by the standard installation of ABRT. The table lists each event's name, identifier,
configuration file from the /etc/libreport/events.d/ directory, and a brief description. Note that
while the configuration files use the event identifiers, the ABRT GUI refers to the individual events
using their names. Note also that not all of the events can be set up using the GUI. For information on
how to define a custom event, see Section 23.3.2, “Creating Custom Events” .
Table 23.1. Standard ABRT Events
Name
Identifier and
Configuration File
Description
uReport
report_uReport
Uploads a μReport to the FAF server.
Mailx
report_Mailx
Sends the problem report via the Mailx utility to a
specified email address.
mailx_event.conf
Bugzilla
report_Bugzilla
bugzilla_event.conf
Red Hat Customer
Support
report_RHTSupport
Analyze C or C++
Crash
analyze_CCpp
Report uploader
report_Uploader
rhtsupport_event.conf
ccpp_event.conf
uploader_event.conf
Analyze VM core
analyze_VMcore
vmcore_event.conf
Local GNU
Debugger
462
analyze_LocalGDB
ccpp_event.conf
Reports the problem to the specified installation
of the Bugzilla bug tracker.
Reports the problem to the Red Hat Technical
Support system.
Sends the core dump to a remote retrace server
for analysis or performs a local analysis if the
remote one fails.
Uploads a tarball (.tar.gz) archive with
problem data to the chosen destination using the
FTP or the SCP protocol.
Runs the GDB (the GNU debugger) on the
problem data of a kernel oops and generates a
backtrace of the kernel.
Runs GDB (the GNU debugger) on the problem
data of an application and generates a
backtrace of the program.
CHAPTER 23. AUTOMATIC BUG REPORTING TOOL (ABRT)
Name
Identifier and
Configuration File
Description
Collect .xsessionerrors
analyze_xsession_errors
Saves relevant lines from the ~/.xsessionerrors file to the problem report.
Logger
report_Logger
ccpp_event.conf
print_event.conf
Kerneloops.org
report_Kerneloops
koops_event.conf
Creates a problem report and saves it to a
specified local file.
Sends a kernel problem to the oops tracker at
kerneloops.org.
23.3.2. Creating Custom Events
Each event is defined by one rule structure in a respective configuration file. The configuration files are
typically stored in the /etc/libreport/events.d/ directory. These configuration files are loaded
by the main configuration file, /etc/libreport/report_event.conf. There is no need to edit the
default configuration files because abrt will run the scripts contained in
/etc/libreport/events.d/. This file accepts shell metacharacters (*, $, ?, etc.) and interprets
relative paths relatively to its location.
Each rule starts with a line with a non-space leading character, and all subsequent lines starting with
the space character or the tab character are considered a part of this rule. Each rule consists of two
parts, a condition part and a program part. The condition part contains conditions in one of the following
forms:
VAR=VAL
VAR!=VAL
VAL~=REGEX
where:
VAR is either the EVENT key word or a name of a problem-data directory element (such as
executable, package, hostname, etc.),
VAL is either a name of an event or a problem-data element, and
REGEX is a regular expression.
The program part consists of program names and shell-interpretable code. If all conditions in the
condition part are valid, the program part is run in the shell. The following is an event example:
EVENT=post-create date > /tmp/dt
echo $HOSTNAME `uname -r`
This event would overwrite the contents of the /tmp/dt file with the current date and time and print
the host name of the machine and its kernel version on the standard output.
Here is an example of a more complex event, which is actually one of the predefined events. It saves
relevant lines from the ~/.xsession-errors file to the problem report of any problem for which the
463
System Administrator's Guide
abrt-ccpp service has been used, provided the crashed application had any X11 libraries loaded at the
time of the crash:
EVENT=analyze_xsession_errors analyzer=CCpp dso_list~=.*/libX11.*
test -f ~/.xsession-errors || { echo "No ~/.xsession-errors";
exit 1; }
test -r ~/.xsession-errors || { echo "Can't read ~/.xsessionerrors"; exit 1; }
executable=`cat executable` &&
base_executable=${executable##*/} &&
grep -F -e "$base_executable" ~/.xsession-errors | tail -999
>xsession_errors &&
echo "Element 'xsession_errors' saved"
The set of possible events is not definitive. System administrators can add events according to their
need in the /etc/libreport/events.d/ directory.
Currently, the following event names are provided with the standard ABRT and libreport installations:
post-create
This event is run by abrtd to process newly created problem-data directories. When the postcreate event is run, abrtd checks whether the new problem data matches any of the already
existing problem directories. If such a problem directory exists, it is updated and the new problem
data is discarded. Note that if the script in any definition of the post-create event exits with a
non-zero value, abrtd will terminate the process and will drop the problem data.
notify, notify-dup
The notify event is run following the completion of post-create. When the event is run, the
user can be sure that the problem deserves their attention. The notify-dup is similar, except it is
used for duplicate occurrences of the same problem.
analyze_name_suffix
where name_suffix is the replaceable part of the event name. This event is used to process collected
data. For example, the analyze_LocalGDB event uses the GNU Debugger ( GDB) utility to process
the core dump of an application and produce a backtrace of the crash.
collect_name_suffix
…where name_suffix is the adjustable part of the event name. This event is used to collect
additional information on problems.
report_name_suffix
…where name_suffix is the adjustable part of the event name. This event is used to report a
problem.
23.3.3. Setting Up Automatic Reporting
ABRT can be configured to send initial anonymous reports, or μReports, of any detected issues or
crashes automatically without any user interaction. When automatic reporting is turned on, the so
called μReport, which is normally sent at the beginning of the crash-reporting process, is sent
immediately after a crash is detected. This prevents duplicate support cases based on identical
crashes. To enable the autoreporting feature, issue the following command as root:
464
CHAPTER 23. AUTOMATIC BUG REPORTING TOOL (ABRT)
~]# abrt-auto-reporting enabled
The above command sets the AutoreportingEnabled directive in the /etc/abrt/abrt.conf
configuration file to yes. This system-wide setting applies to all users of the system. Note that by
enabling this option, automatic reporting will also be enabled in the graphical desktop environment. To
only enable autoreporting in the ABRT GUI, switch the Automatically send uReport option to
YES in the Problem Reporting Configuration window. To open this window, choose Automatic
Bug Reporting Tool → ABRT Configuration from within a running instance of the gnome-abrt
application. To launch the application, go to Applications → Sundry → Automatic Bug Reporting Tool .
Figure 23.2. Configuring ABRT Problem Reporting
Upon detection of a crash, by default, ABRT submits a μReport with basic information about the
problem to Red Hat's ABRT server. The server determines whether the problem is known and either
provides a short description of the problem along with a URL of the reported case if known, or invites
the user to report it if not known.
465
System Administrator's Guide
NOTE
A μReport (microreport) is a JSON object representing a problem, such as a binary
crash or a kernel oops. These reports are designed to be brief, machine readable, and
completely anonymous, which is why they can be used for automated reporting. The
μReports make it possible to keep track of bug occurrences, but they usually do not
provide enough information for engineers to fix the bug. A full bug report is needed for a
support case to be opened.
To change the default behavior of the autoreporting facility from sending a μReport, modify the value
of the AutoreportingEvent directive in the /etc/abrt/abrt.conf configuration file to point to a
different ABRT event. See Table 23.1, “Standard ABRT Events” for an overview of the standard events.
23.4. DETECTING SOFTWARE PROBLEMS
ABRT is capable of detecting, analyzing, and processing crashes in applications written in a variety of
different programming languages. Many of the packages that contain the support for detecting the
various types of crashes are installed automatically when either one of the main ABRT packages ( abrtdesktop, abrt-cli) is installed. See Section 23.2, “Installing ABRT and Starting its Services” for
instructions on how to install ABRT. See the table below for a list of the supported types of crashes
and the respective packages.
Table 23.2. Supported Programming Languages and Software Projects
Langauge/Project
Package
C or C++
abrt-addon-ccpp
Python
abrt-addon-python
Ruby
rubygem-abrt
Java
abrt-java-connector
X.Org
abrt-addon-xorg
Linux (kernel oops)
abrt-addon-kerneloops
Linux (kernel panic)
abrt-addon-vmcore
Linux (persistent storage)
abrt-addon-pstoreoops
23.4.1. Detecting C and C++ Crashes
The abrt-ccpp service installs its own core-dump handler, which, when started, overrides the default
value of the kernel's core_pattern variable, so that C and C++ crashes are handled by abrtd. If you
stop the abrt-ccpp service, the previously specified value of core_pattern is reinstated.
By default, the /proc/sys/kernel/core_pattern file contains the string core, which means that
the kernel produces files with the core. prefix in the current directory of the crashed process. The
abrt-ccpp service overwrites the core_pattern file to contain the following command:
466
CHAPTER 23. AUTOMATIC BUG REPORTING TOOL (ABRT)
|/usr/libexec/abrt-hook-ccpp %s %c %p %u %g %t e
This command instructs the kernel to pipe the core dump to the abrt-hook-ccpp program, which
stores it in ABRT's dump location and notifies the abrtd daemon of the new crash. It also stores the
following files from the /proc/PID/ directory (where PID is the ID of the crashed process) for
debugging purposes: maps, limits, cgroup, status. See proc(5) for a description of the format and
the meaning of these files.
23.4.2. Detecting Python Exceptions
The abrt-addon-python package installs a custom exception handler for Python applications. The
Python interpreter then automatically imports the abrt.pth file installed in
/usr/lib64/python2.7/site-packages/, which in turn imports
abrt_exception_handler.py. This overrides Python's default sys.excepthook with a custom
handler, which forwards unhandled exceptions to abrtd via its Socket API.
To disable the automatic import of site-specific modules, and thus prevent the ABRT custom
exception handler from being used when running a Python application, pass the -S option to the
Python interpreter:
~]$ python -S file.py
In the above command, replace file.py with the name of the Python script you want to execute without
the use of site-specific modules.
23.4.3. Detecting Ruby Exceptions
The rubygem-abrt package registers a custom handler using the at_exit feature, which is executed
when a program ends. This allows for checking for possible unhandled exceptions. Every time an
unhandled exception is captured, the ABRT handler prepares a bug report, which can be submitted to
Red Hat Bugzilla using standard ABRT tools.
23.4.4. Detecting Java Exceptions
The ABRT Java Connector is a JVM agent that reports uncaught Java exceptions to abrtd. The agent
registers several JVMTI event callbacks and has to be loaded into the JVM using the -agentlib
command line parameter. Note that the processing of the registered callbacks negatively impacts the
performance of the application. Use the following command to have ABRT catch exceptions from a
Java class:
~]$ java -agentlib:abrt-java-connector[=abrt=on] $MyClass platform.jvmtiSupported true
In the above command, replace $MyClass with the name of the Java class you want to test. By passing
the abrt=on option to the connector, you ensure that the exceptions are handled by abrtd. In case
you want to have the connector output the exceptions to standard output, omit this option.
23.4.5. Detecting X.Org Crashes
The abrt-xorg service collects and processes information about crashes of the X.Org server from
the /var/log/Xorg.0.log file. Note that no report is generated if a blacklisted X.org module is
loaded. Instead, a not-reportable file is created in the problem-data directory with an appropriate
467
System Administrator's Guide
explanation. You can find the list of offending modules in the /etc/abrt/plugins/xorg.conf file.
Only proprietary graphics-driver modules are blacklisted by default.
23.4.6. Detecting Kernel Oopses and Panics
By checking the output of kernel logs, ABRT is able to catch and process the so-called kernel oopses —
non-fatal deviations from the correct behavior of the Linux kernel. This functionality is provided by the
abrt-oops service.
ABRT can also detect and process kernel panics — fatal, non-recoverable errors that require a reboot,
using the abrt-vmcore service. The service only starts when a vmcore file (a kernel-core dump)
appears in the /var/crash/ directory. When a core-dump file is found, abrt-vmcore creates a new
problem-data directory in the /var/tmp/abrt/ directory and moves the core-dump file to the
newly created problem-data directory. After the /var/crash/ directory is searched, the service is
stopped.
For ABRT to be able to detect a kernel panic, the kdump service must be enabled on the system. The
amount of memory that is reserved for the kdump kernel has to be set correctly. You can set it using
the system-config-kdump graphical tool or by specifying the crashkernel parameter in the list of
kernel options in the GRUB menu. For details on how to enable and configure kdump, see the Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 7 Kernel Crash Dump Guide. For information on making changes to the GRUB menu
see Chapter 25, Working with GRUB 2.
Using the abrt-pstoreoops service, ABRT is capable of collecting and processing information about
kernel panics, which, on systems that support pstore, is stored in the automatically-mounted
/sys/fs/pstore/ directory. The platform-dependent pstore interface (persistent storage) provides
a mechanism for storing data across system reboots, thus allowing for preserving kernel panic
information. The service starts automatically when kernel crash-dump files appear in the
/sys/fs/pstore/ directory.
23.5. HANDLING DETECTED PROBLEMS
Problem data saved by abrtd can be viewed, reported, and deleted using either the command line tool,
abrt-cli, or the graphical tool, gnome-abrt.
NOTE
Note that ABRT identifies duplicate problems by comparing new problems with all
locally saved problems. For a repeating crash, ABRT requires you to act upon it only
once. However, if you delete the crash dump of that problem, the next time this specific
problem occurs, ABRT will treat it as a new crash: ABRT will alert you about it, prompt
you to fill in a description, and report it. To avoid having ABRT notifying you about a
recurring problem, do not delete its problem data.
23.5.1. Using the Command Line Tool
In the command line environment, the user is notified of new crashes on login, provided they have the
abrt-console-notification package installed. The console notification looks like the following:
ABRT has detected 1 problem(s). For more info run: abrt-cli list --since
1398783164
To view detected problems, enter the abrt-cli list command:
468
CHAPTER 23. AUTOMATIC BUG REPORTING TOOL (ABRT)
~]$ abrt-cli list
id 6734c6f1a1ed169500a7bfc8bd62aabaf039f9aa
Directory:
/var/tmp/abrt/ccpp-2014-04-21-09:47:51-3430
count:
1
executable:
/usr/bin/sleep
package:
coreutils-8.22-11.el7
time:
Mon 21 Apr 2014 09:47:51 AM EDT
uid:
1000
Run 'abrt-cli report /var/tmp/abrt/ccpp-2014-04-21-09:47:51-3430' for
creating a case in Red Hat Customer Portal
Each crash listed in the output of the abrt-cli list command has a unique identifier and a
directory that can be used for further manipulation using abrt-cli.
To view information about just one particular problem, use the abrt-cli info command:
abrt-cli info [-d] directory_or_id
To increase the amount of information displayed when using both the list and info sub-commands,
pass them the -d (--detailed) option, which shows all stored information about the problems listed,
including respective backtrace files if they have already been generated.
To analyze and report a certain problem, use the abrt-cli report command:
abrt-cli report directory_or_id
Upon invocation of the above command, you will be asked to provide your credentials for opening a
support case with Red Hat Customer Support. Next, abrt-cli opens a text editor with the content of
the report. You can see what is being reported, and you can fill in instructions on how to reproduce the
crash and other comments. You should also check the backtrace because the backtrace might be sent
to a public server and viewed by anyone, depending on the problem-reporter event settings.
NOTE
You can choose which text editor is used to check the reports. abrt-cli uses the
editor defined in the ABRT_EDITOR environment variable. If the variable is not defined,
it checks the VISUAL and EDITOR variables. If none of these variables is set, the vi
editor is used. You can set the preferred editor in your .bashrc configuration file. For
example, if you prefer GNU Emacs, add the following line to the file:
export VISUAL=emacs
When you are done with the report, save your changes and close the editor. If you have reported your
problem to the Red Hat Customer Support database, a problem case is filed in the database. From now
on, you will be informed about the problem-resolution progress via email you provided during the
process of reporting. You can also monitor the problem case using the URL that is provided to you
when the problem case is created or via emails received from Red Hat Support.
If you are certain that you do not want to report a particular problem, you can delete it. To delete a
problem, so that ABRT does not keep information about it, use the command:
abrt-cli rm directory_or_id
469
System Administrator's Guide
To display help about a particular abrt-cli command, use the --help option:
abrt-cli command --help
23.5.2. Using the GUI
The ABRT daemon broadcasts a D-Bus message whenever a problem report is created. If the ABRT
applet is running in a graphical desktop environment, it catches this message and displays a
notification dialog on the desktop. You can open the ABRT GUI using this dialog by clicking on the
Report button. You can also open the ABRT GUI by selecting the Applications → Sundry →
Automatic Bug Reporting Tool menu item.
Alternatively, you can run the ABRT GUI from the command line as follows:
~]$ gnome-abrt &
The ABRT GUI window displays a list of detected problems. Each problem entry consists of the name of
the failing application, the reason why the application crashed, and the date of the last occurrence of
the problem.
Figure 23.3. ABRT GUI
To access a detailed problem description, double-click on a problem-report line or click on the Report
button while the respective problem line is selected. You can then follow the instructions to proceed
with the process of describing the problem, determining how it should be analyzed, and where it should
be reported. To discard a problem, click on the Delete button.
23.6. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
For more information about ABRT and related topics, see the resources listed below.
Installed Documentation
abrtd(8) — The manual page for the abrtd daemon provides information about options that
can be used with the daemon.
470
CHAPTER 23. AUTOMATIC BUG REPORTING TOOL (ABRT)
abrt_event.conf(5) — The manual page for the abrt_event.conf configuration file describes
the format of its directives and rules and provides reference information about event metadata configuration in XML files.
Online Documentation
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Networking Guide — The Networking Guide for Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 7 documents relevant information regarding the configuration and
administration of network interfaces and network services on this system.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Kernel Crash Dump Guide — The Kernel Crash Dump Guide for
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 documents how to configure, test, and use the kdump crash
recovery service and provides a brief overview of how to analyze the resulting core dump using
the crash debugging utility.
See Also
Chapter 21, Viewing and Managing Log Files describes the configuration of the rsyslog daemon
and the systemd journal and explains how to locate, view, and monitor system logs.
Chapter 8, Yum describes how to use the Yum package manager to search, install, update, and
uninstall packages on the command line.
Chapter 9, Managing Services with systemd provides an introduction to systemd and
documents how to use the systemctl command to manage system services, configure
systemd targets, and execute power management commands.
471
System Administrator's Guide
CHAPTER 24. OPROFILE
OProfile is a low overhead, system-wide performance monitoring tool. It uses the performance
monitoring hardware on the processor to retrieve information about the kernel and executables on the
system, such as when memory is referenced, the number of L2 cache requests, and the number of
hardware interrupts received. On a Red Hat Enterprise Linux system, the oprofile package must be
installed to use this tool.
Many processors include dedicated performance monitoring hardware. This hardware makes it
possible to detect when certain events happen (such as the requested data not being in cache). The
hardware normally takes the form of one or more counters that are incremented each time an event
takes place. When the counter value increments, an interrupt is generated, making it possible to
control the amount of detail (and therefore, overhead) produced by performance monitoring.
OProfile uses this hardware (or a timer-based substitute in cases where performance monitoring
hardware is not present) to collect samples of performance-related data each time a counter
generates an interrupt. These samples are periodically written out to disk; later, the data contained in
these samples can then be used to generate reports on system-level and application-level
performance.
Be aware of the following limitations when using OProfile:
Use of shared libraries — Samples for code in shared libraries are not attributed to the particular
application unless the --separate=library option is used.
Performance monitoring samples are inexact— When a performance monitoring register triggers
a sample, the interrupt handling is not precise like a divide by zero exception. Due to the outof-order execution of instructions by the processor, the sample may be recorded on a nearby
instruction.
opreport does not associate samples for inline functions properly— opreport uses a simple
address range mechanism to determine which function an address is in. Inline function
samples are not attributed to the inline function but rather to the function the inline function
was inserted into.
OProfile accumulates data from multiple runs — OProfile is a system-wide profiler and expects
processes to start up and shut down multiple times. Thus, samples from multiple runs
accumulate. Use the command opcontrol --reset to clear out the samples from previous
runs.
Hardware performance counters do not work on guest virtual machines— Because the hardware
performance counters are not available on virtual systems, you need to use the timer mode.
Enter the command opcontrol --deinit, and then execute modprobe oprofile
timer=1 to enable the timer mode.
Non-CPU-limited performance problems — OProfile is oriented to finding problems with CPUlimited processes. OProfile does not identify processes that are asleep because they are
waiting on locks or for some other event to occur (for example an I/O device to finish an
operation).
24.1. OVERVIEW OF TOOLS
Table 24.1, “OProfile Commands” provides a brief overview of the most commonly used tools provided
with the oprofile package.
472
CHAPTER 24. OPROFILE
Table 24.1. OProfile Commands
Command
Description
ophelp
Displays available events for the system's processor along with a brief
description of each.
opimport
Converts sample database files from a foreign binary format to the native
format for the system. Only use this option when analyzing a sample
database from a different architecture.
opannotate
Creates annotated source for an executable if the application was compiled
with debugging symbols. See Section 24.6.4, “Using opannotate” for
details.
opcontrol
Configures what data is collected. See Section 24.3, “Configuring OProfile
Using Legacy Mode” for details.
operf
Recommended tool to be used in place of opcontrol for profiling. See
Section 24.2, “Using operf” for details.
For differences between operf and opcontrol see Section 24.1.1, “operf
vs. opcontrol”.
opreport
Retrieves profile data. See Section 24.6.1, “Using opreport” for details.
oprofiled
Runs as a daemon to periodically write sample data to disk.
24.1.1. operf vs. opcontrol
There are two mutually exclusive methods for collecting profiling data with OProfile. You can either
use the newer and preferred operf or the opcontrol tool.
operf
This is the recommended mode for profiling. The operf tool uses the Linux Performance Events
Subsystem, and therefore does not require the oprofile kernel driver. The operf tool allows you to
target your profiling more precisely, as a single process or system-wide, and also allows OProfile to
co-exist better with other tools using the performance monitoring hardware on your system. Unlike
opcontrol, it can be used without the root privileges. However, operf is also capable of systemwide operations with use of the --system-wide option, where root authority is required.
With operf, there is no initial setup needed. You can invoke operf with command-line options to
specify your profiling settings. After that, you can run the OProfile post-processing tools described in
Section 24.6, “Analyzing the Data”. See Section 24.2, “Using operf” for further information.
opcontrol
This mode consists of the opcontrol shell script, the oprofiled daemon, and several postprocessing tools. The opcontrol command is used for configuring, starting, and stopping a profiling
session. An OProfile kernel driver, usually built as a kernel module, is used for collecting samples,
which are then recorded into sample files by oprofiled. You can use legacy mode only if you have
root privileges. In certain cases, such as when you need to sample areas with disabled interrupt
request (IRQ), this is a better alternative.
473
System Administrator's Guide
Before OProfile can be run in legacy mode, it must be configured as shown in Section 24.3,
“Configuring OProfile Using Legacy Mode”. These settings are then applied when starting OProfile
(Section 24.4, “Starting and Stopping OProfile Using Legacy Mode” ).
24.2. USING OPERF
operf is the recommended profiling mode that does not require initial setup before starting. All
settings are specified as command-line options and there is no separate command to start the profiling
process. To stop operf, press Ctrl+C. The typical operf command syntax looks as follows:
operf options range command args
Replace options with the desired command-line options to specify your profiling settings. Full set of
options is described in operf(1) manual page. Replace range with one of the following:
--system-wide - this setting allows for global profiling, see Note
--pid=PID - this is to profile a running application, where PID is the process ID of the process you
want to profile.
With command and args, you can define a specific command or application to be profiled, and also the
input arguments that this command or application requires. Either command, --pid or --systemwide is required, but these cannot be used simultaneously.
When you invoke operf on a command line without setting the range option, data will be collected for
the children processes.
NOTE
To run operf --system-wide, you need root authority. When finished profiling, you
can stop operf with Ctrl+C.
If you run operf --system-wide as a background process (with &), stop it in a
controlled manner in order to process the collected profile data. For this purpose, use:
kill -SIGINT operf-PID
When running operf --system-wide, it is recommended that your current working
directory is /root or a subdirectory of /root so that sample data files are not stored in
locations accessible by regular users.
24.2.1. Specifying the Kernel
To monitor the kernel, execute the following command:
operf --vmlinux=vmlinux_path
With this option, you can specify a path to a vmlinux file that matches the running kernel. Kernel
samples will be attributed to this binary, allowing post-processing tools to attribute samples to the
appropriate kernel symbols. If this option is not specified, all kernel samples will be attributed to a
pseudo binary named "no-vmlinux".
474
CHAPTER 24. OPROFILE
24.2.2. Setting Events to Monitor
Most processors contain counters, which are used by OProfile to monitor specific events. As shown in
Table 24.3, “OProfile Processors and Counters” , the number of counters available depends on the
processor.
The events for each counter can be configured via the command line or with a graphical interface. For
more information on the graphical interface, see Section 24.10, “Graphical Interface”. If the counter
cannot be set to a specific event, an error message is displayed.
NOTE
Some older processor models are not supported by the underlying Linux Performance
Events Subsystem kernel and therefore are not supported by operf. If you receive this
message:
Your kernel's Performance Events Subsystem does not support your
processor type
when attempting to use operf, try profiling with opcontrol to see if your processor
type may be supported by OProfile's legacy mode.
NOTE
Since hardware performance counters are not available on guest virtual machines, you
have to enable timer mode to use operf on virtual systems. To do so, type as root:
opcontrol --deinit
modprobe oprofile timer=1
To set the event for each configurable counter via the command line, use:
operf --events=event1,event2…
Here, pass a comma-separated list of event specifications for profiling. Each event specification is a
colon-separated list of attributes in the following form:
event-name:sample-rate:unit-mask:kernel:user
Table 24.2, “Event Specifications” summarizes these options. The last three values are optional, if you
omit them, they will be set to their default values. Note that certain events do require a unit mask.
Table 24.2. Event Specifications
Specification
Description
event-name
The exact symbolic event name taken from ophelp
475
System Administrator's Guide
Specification
Description
sample-rate
The number of events to wait before sampling again.
The smaller the count, the more frequent the
samples. For events that do not happen frequently,
a lower count may be needed to capture a
statistically significant number of event instances.
On the other hand, sampling too frequently can
overload the system. By default, OProfile uses a
time-based event set, which creates a sample every
100,000 clock cycles per processor.
unit-mask
Unit masks, which further define the event, are listed
in ophelp . You can insert either a hexadecimal
value, beginning with "0x", or a string that matches
the first word of the unit mask description in
ophelp . Definition by name is valid only for unit
masks having "extra:" parameters, as shown by the
output of ophelp . This type of unit mask cannot be
defined with a hexadecimal value. Note that on
certain architectures, there can be multiple unit
masks with the same hexadecimal value. In that case
they have to be specified by their names only.
kernel
Specifies whether to profile kernel code (insert0 or
1 (default))
user
Specifies whether to profile user-space code (insert
0 or 1 (default))
The events available vary depending on the processor type. When no event specification is given, the
default event for the running processor type will be used for profiling. See Table 24.4, “Default Events”
for a list of these default events. To determine the events available for profiling, use the ophelp
command.
ophelp
24.2.3. Categorization of Samples
The --separate-thread option categorizes samples by thread group ID (tgid) and thread ID (tid).
This is useful for seeing per-thread samples in multi-threaded applications. When used in conjunction
with the --system-wide option, --separate-thread is also useful for seeing per-process (perthread group) samples for the case where multiple processes are executing the same program during a
profiling run.
The --separate-cpu option categorizes samples by CPU.
24.3. CONFIGURING OPROFILE USING LEGACY MODE
Before OProfile can be run in legacy mode, it must be configured. At a minimum, selecting to monitor
the kernel (or selecting not to monitor the kernel) is required. The following sections describe how to
476
CHAPTER 24. OPROFILE
use the opcontrol utility to configure OProfile. As the opcontrol commands are executed, the
setup options are saved to the /root/.oprofile/daemonrc file.
24.3.1. Specifying the Kernel
First, configure whether OProfile should monitor the kernel. This is the only configuration option that
is required before starting OProfile. All others are optional.
To monitor the kernel, execute the following command as root:
opcontrol --setup --vmlinux=/usr/lib/debug/lib/modules/`uname -r`/vmlinux
IMPORTANT
In order to monitor the kernel, the kernel-debuginfo package which contains the
uncompressed kernel must be installed. For more information on how to install this
package, see the How to download debuginfo packages like kernel-debuginfo? article on
the Red Hat Customer Portal.
To configure OProfile not to monitor the kernel, execute the following command as root:
opcontrol --setup --no-vmlinux
This command also loads the oprofile kernel module, if it is not already loaded, and creates the
/dev/oprofile/ directory, if it does not already exist. See Section 24.7, “Understanding the
/dev/oprofile/ directory” for details about this directory.
Setting whether samples should be collected within the kernel only changes what data is collected, not
how or where the collected data is stored. To generate different sample files for the kernel and
application libraries, see Section 24.3.3, “Separating Kernel and User-space Profiles” .
24.3.2. Setting Events to Monitor
Most processors contain counters, which are used by OProfile to monitor specific events. As shown in
Table 24.3, “OProfile Processors and Counters” , the number of counters available depends on the
processor.
Table 24.3. OProfile Processors and Counters
Processor
cpu_type
Number of Counters
AMD64
x86-64/hammer
4
AMD Family 10h
x86-64/family10
4
AMD Family 11h
x86-64/family11
4
AMD Family 12h
x86-64/family12
4
AMD Family 14h
x86-64/family14
4
477
System Administrator's Guide
Processor
cpu_type
Number of Counters
AMD Family 15h
x86-64/family15
6
Applied Micro X-Gene
arm/armv8-xgene
4
ARM Cortex A53
arm/armv8-ca53
6
ARM Cortex A57
arm/armv8-ca57
6
IBM eServer System i and IBM eServer
System p
timer
1
IBM POWER4
ppc64/power4
8
IBM POWER5
ppc64/power5
6
IBM PowerPC 970
ppc64/970
8
IBM PowerPC 970MP
ppc64/970MP
8
IBM POWER5+
ppc64/power5+
6
IBM POWER5++
ppc64/power5++
6
IBM POWER56
ppc64/power6
6
IBM POWER7
ppc64/power7
6
IBM POWER8
ppc64/power7
8
IBM S/390 and IBM System z
timer
1
Intel Core i7
i386/core_i7
4
Intel Nehalem microarchitecture
i386/nehalem
4
Intel Westmere microarchitecture
i386/westmere
4
Intel Haswell microarchitecture (non-hyperthreaded)
i386/haswell
8
Intel Haswell microarchitecture (hyperthreaded)
i386/haswell-ht
4
Intel Ivy Bridge microarchitecture (nonhyper-threaded)
i386/ivybridge
8
478
CHAPTER 24. OPROFILE
Processor
cpu_type
Number of Counters
Intel Ivy Bridge microarchitecture (hyperthreaded)
i386/ivybridge-ht
4
Intel Sandy Bridge microarchitecture (nonhyper-threaded)
i386/sandybridge
8
Intel Sandy Bridge microarchitecture
i386/sandybridge-ht
4
Intel Broadwell microarchitecture (nonhyper-threaded)
i386/broadwell
8
Intel Broadwell microarchitecture (hyperthreaded)
i386/broadwell-ht
4
Intel Silvermont microarchitecture
i386/silvermont
2
TIMER_INT
timer
1
Use Table 24.3, “OProfile Processors and Counters” to determine the number of events that can be
monitored simultaneously for your CPU type. If the processor does not have supported performance
monitoring hardware, the timer is used as the processor type.
If timer is used, events cannot be set for any processor because the hardware does not have support
for hardware performance counters. Instead, the timer interrupt is used for profiling.
If timer is not used as the processor type, the events monitored can be changed, and counter 0 for
the processor is set to a time-based event by default. If more than one counter exists on the processor,
the counters other than 0 are not set to an event by default. The default events monitored are shown
in Table 24.4, “Default Events” .
Table 24.4. Default Events
Processor
Default Event for Counter
Description
AMD Athlon and AMD64
CPU_CLK_UNHALTED
The processor's clock is not halted
AMD Family 10h, AMD
Family 11h, AMD Family
12h
CPU_CLK_UNHALTED
The processor's clock is not halted
AMD Family 14h, AMD
Family 15h
CPU_CLK_UNHALTED
The processor's clock is not halted
Applied Micro X-Gene
CPU_CYCLES
Processor Cycles
ARM Cortex A53
CPU_CYCLES
Processor Cycles
479
System Administrator's Guide
Processor
Default Event for Counter
Description
ARM Cortex A57
CPU_CYCLES
Processor Cycles
IBM POWER4
CYCLES
Processor Cycles
IBM POWER5
CYCLES
Processor Cycles
IBM POWER8
CYCLES
Processor Cycles
IBM PowerPC 970
CYCLES
Processor Cycles
Intel Core i7
CPU_CLK_UNHALTED
The processor's clock is not halted
Intel Nehalem
microarchitecture
CPU_CLK_UNHALTED
The processor's clock is not halted
Intel Pentium 4 (hyperthreaded and nonhyper-threaded)
GLOBAL_POWER_EVENTS
The time during which the processor is not
stopped
Intel Westmere
microarchitecture
CPU_CLK_UNHALTED
The processor's clock is not halted
Intel Broadwell
microarchitecture
CPU_CLK_UNHALTED
The processor's clock is not halted
Intel Silvermont
microarchitecture
CPU_CLK_UNHALTED
The processor's clock is not halted
TIMER_INT
(none)
Sample for each timer interrupt
The number of events that can be monitored at one time is determined by the number of counters for
the processor. However, it is not a one-to-one correlation; on some processors, certain events must be
mapped to specific counters. To determine the number of counters available, execute the following
command:
ls -d /dev/oprofile/[0-9]*
The events available vary depending on the processor type. Use the ophelp command to determine
the events available for profiling. The list is specific to the system's processor type.
ophelp
480
CHAPTER 24. OPROFILE
NOTE
Unless OProfile is properly configured, ophelp fails with the following error message:
Unable to open cpu_type file for reading
Make sure you have done opcontrol --init
cpu_type 'unset' is not valid
you should upgrade oprofile or force the use of timer mode
To configure OProfile, follow the instructions in Section 24.3, “Configuring OProfile
Using Legacy Mode”.
The events for each counter can be configured via the command line or with a graphical interface. For
more information on the graphical interface, see Section 24.10, “Graphical Interface”. If the counter
cannot be set to a specific event, an error message is displayed.
To set the event for each configurable counter via the command line, use opcontrol:
opcontrol --event=event-name:sample-rate
Replace event-name with the exact name of the event from ophelp, and replace sample-rate with the
number of events between samples.
24.3.2.1. Sampling Rate
By default, a time-based event set is selected. It creates a sample every 100,000 clock cycles per
processor. If the timer interrupt is used, the timer is set to the respective rate and is not user-settable.
If the cpu_type is not timer, each event can have a sampling rate set for it. The sampling rate is the
number of events between each sample snapshot.
When setting the event for the counter, a sample rate can also be specified:
opcontrol --event=event-name:sample-rate
Replace sample-rate with the number of events to wait before sampling again. The smaller the count,
the more frequent the samples. For events that do not happen frequently, a lower count may be
needed to capture the event instances.
WARNING
Be extremely careful when setting sampling rates. Sampling too frequently can
overload the system, causing the system to appear frozen or causing the system
to actually freeze.
24.3.2.2. Unit Masks
Some user performance monitoring events may also require unit masks to further define the event.
481
System Administrator's Guide
Unit masks for each event are listed with the ophelp command. The values for each unit mask are
listed in hexadecimal format. To specify more than one unit mask, the hexadecimal values must be
combined using a bitwise or operation.
opcontrol --event=event-name:sample-rate:unit-mask
Note that on certain architectures, there can be multiple unit masks with the same hexadecimal value.
In that case they have to be specified by their names only.
24.3.3. Separating Kernel and User-space Profiles
By default, kernel mode and user mode information is gathered for each event. To configure OProfile to
ignore events in kernel mode for a specific counter, execute the following command:
opcontrol --event=event-name:sample-rate:unit-mask:0
Execute the following command to start profiling kernel mode for the counter again:
opcontrol --event=event-name:sample-rate:unit-mask:1
To configure OProfile to ignore events in user mode for a specific counter, execute the following
command:
opcontrol --event=event-name:sample-rate:unit-mask:1:0
Execute the following command to start profiling user mode for the counter again:
opcontrol --event=event-name:sample-rate:unit-mask:1:1
When the OProfile daemon writes the profile data to sample files, it can separate the kernel and library
profile data into separate sample files. To configure how the daemon writes to sample files, execute the
following command as root:
opcontrol --separate=choice
The choice argument can be one of the following:
none — Do not separate the profiles (default).
library — Generate per-application profiles for libraries.
kernel — Generate per-application profiles for the kernel and kernel modules.
all — Generate per-application profiles for libraries and per-application profiles for the kernel
and kernel modules.
If --separate=library is used, the sample file name includes the name of the executable as well as
the name of the library.
NOTE
These configuration changes will take effect when the OProfile profiler is restarted.
482
CHAPTER 24. OPROFILE
24.4. STARTING AND STOPPING OPROFILE USING LEGACY MODE
To start monitoring the system with OProfile, execute the following command as root:
opcontrol --start
Output similar to the following is displayed:
Using log file /var/lib/oprofile/oprofiled.log Daemon started. Profiler
running.
The settings in /root/.oprofile/daemonrc are used.
The OProfile daemon, oprofiled, is started; it periodically writes the sample data to the
/var/lib/oprofile/samples/ directory. The log file for the daemon is located at
/var/lib/oprofile/oprofiled.log.
IMPORTANT
On a Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 system, the nmi_watchdog registers with the perf
subsystem. Due to this, the perf subsystem grabs control of the performance counter
registers at boot time, blocking OProfile from working.
To resolve this, either boot with the nmi_watchdog=0 kernel parameter set, or run the
following command as root to disable nmi_watchdog at run time:
echo 0 > /proc/sys/kernel/nmi_watchdog
To re-enable nmi_watchdog, use the following command as root:
echo 1 > /proc/sys/kernel/nmi_watchdog
To stop the profiler, execute the following command as root:
opcontrol --shutdown
24.5. SAVING DATA IN LEGACY MODE
Sometimes it is useful to save samples at a specific time. For example, when profiling an executable, it
may be useful to gather different samples based on different input data sets. If the number of events to
be monitored exceeds the number of counters available for the processor, multiple runs of OProfile
can be used to collect data, saving the sample data to different files each time.
To save the current set of sample files, execute the following command, replacing name with a unique
descriptive name for the current session:
opcontrol --save=name
The command creates the directory /var/lib/oprofile/samples/name/ and the current sample
files are copied to it.
483
System Administrator's Guide
To specify the session directory to hold the sample data, use the --session-dir option. If not
specified, the data is saved in the oprofile_data/ directory on the current path.
24.6. ANALYZING THE DATA
The same OProfile post-processing tools are used whether you collect your profile with operf or
opcontrol in legacy mode.
By default, operf stores the profiling data in the current_dir/oprofile_data/ directory. You
can change to a different location with the --session-dir option. The usual post-profiling analysis
tools such as opreport and opannotate can be used to generate profile reports. These tools search
for samples in current_dir/oprofile_data/ first. If this directory does not exist, the analysis tools
use the standard session directory of /var/lib/oprofile/. Statistics, such as total samples
received and lost samples, are written to the session_dir/samples/operf.log file.
When using legacy mode, the OProfile daemon, oprofiled, periodically collects the samples and
writes them to the /var/lib/oprofile/samples/ directory. Before reading the data, make sure all
data has been written to this directory by executing the following command as root:
opcontrol --dump
Each sample file name is based on the name of the executable. For example, the samples for the default
event on a Pentium III processor for /bin/bash becomes:
\{root\}/bin/bash/\{dep\}/\{root\}/bin/bash/CPU_CLK_UNHALTED.100000
The following tools are available to profile the sample data once it has been collected:
opreport
opannotate
Use these tools, along with the binaries profiled, to generate reports that can be further analyzed.
WARNING
The executable being profiled must be used with these tools to analyze the data. If
it must change after the data is collected, back up the executable used to create
the samples as well as the sample files. Note that the names of the sample file and
the binary have to agree. You cannot make a backup if these names do not match.
As an alternative, oparchive can be used to address this problem.
Samples for each executable are written to a single sample file. Samples from each dynamically linked
library are also written to a single sample file. While OProfile is running, if the executable being
monitored changes and a sample file for the executable exists, the existing sample file is automatically
deleted. Thus, if the existing sample file is needed, it must be backed up, along with the executable
used to create it before replacing the executable with a new version. The OProfile analysis tools use
484
CHAPTER 24. OPROFILE
the executable file that created the samples during analysis. If the executable changes, the analysis
tools will be unable to analyze the associated samples. See Section 24.5, “Saving Data in Legacy
Mode” for details on how to back up the sample file.
24.6.1. Using opreport
The opreport tool provides an overview of all the executables being profiled. The following is part of a
sample output from the opreport command:
~]$ opreport
Profiling through timer interrupt
TIMER:0|
samples|
%|
-----------------25926 97.5212 no-vmlinux
359 1.3504 pi
65 0.2445 Xorg
62 0.2332 libvte.so.4.4.0
56 0.2106 libc-2.3.4.so
34 0.1279 libglib-2.0.so.0.400.7
19 0.0715 libXft.so.2.1.2
17 0.0639 bash
8 0.0301 ld-2.3.4.so
8 0.0301 libgdk-x11-2.0.so.0.400.13
6 0.0226 libgobject-2.0.so.0.400.7
5 0.0188 oprofiled
4 0.0150 libpthread-2.3.4.so
4 0.0150 libgtk-x11-2.0.so.0.400.13
3 0.0113 libXrender.so.1.2.2
3 0.0113 du
1 0.0038 libcrypto.so.0.9.7a
1 0.0038 libpam.so.0.77
1 0.0038 libtermcap.so.2.0.8
1 0.0038 libX11.so.6.2
1 0.0038 libgthread-2.0.so.0.400.7
1 0.0038 libwnck-1.so.4.9.0
Each executable is listed on its own line. The first column is the number of samples recorded for the
executable. The second column is the percentage of samples relative to the total number of samples.
The third column is the name of the executable.
See the opreport(1) manual page for a list of available command-line options, such as the -r option
used to sort the output from the executable with the smallest number of samples to the one with the
largest number of samples. You can also use the -t or --threshold option to trim the output of
opcontrol.
24.6.2. Using opreport on a Single Executable
To retrieve more detailed profiled information about a specific executable, use:
opreport mode executable
Replace executable with the full path to the executable to be analyzed. mode stands for one of the
following options:
485
System Administrator's Guide
-l
This option is used to list sample data by symbols. For example, running this command:
~]# opreport -l /usr/lib/tls/libc-version.so
produces the following output:
samples % symbol name
12 21.4286 __gconv_transform_utf8_internal
5 8.9286 _int_malloc 4 7.1429 malloc
3 5.3571 __i686.get_pc_thunk.bx
3 5.3571 _dl_mcount_wrapper_check
3 5.3571 mbrtowc
3 5.3571 memcpy
2 3.5714 _int_realloc
2 3.5714 _nl_intern_locale_data
2 3.5714 free
2 3.5714 strcmp
1 1.7857 __ctype_get_mb_cur_max
1 1.7857 __unregister_atfork
1 1.7857 __write_nocancel
1 1.7857 _dl_addr
1 1.7857 _int_free
1 1.7857 _itoa_word
1 1.7857 calc_eclosure_iter
1 1.7857 fopen@@GLIBC_2.1
1 1.7857 getpid
1 1.7857 memmove
1 1.7857 msort_with_tmp
1 1.7857 strcpy
1 1.7857 strlen
1 1.7857 vfprintf
1 1.7857 write
The first column is the number of samples for the symbol, the second column is the percentage of
samples for this symbol relative to the overall samples for the executable, and the third column is
the symbol name.
To sort the output from the largest number of samples to the smallest (reverse order), use -r in
conjunction with the -l option.
-i symbol-name
List sample data specific to a symbol name. For example, running:
~]# opreport -l -i __gconv_transform_utf8_internal
/usr/lib/tls/libc-version.so
returns the following output:
samples % symbol name
12 100.000 __gconv_transform_utf8_internal
The first line is a summary for the symbol/executable combination.
486
CHAPTER 24. OPROFILE
The first column is the number of samples for the memory symbol. The second column is the
percentage of samples for the memory address relative to the total number of samples for the
symbol. The third column is the symbol name.
-d
This option lists sample data by symbols with more detail than the -l option. For example, with the
following command:
~]# opreport -d -i __gconv_transform_utf8_internal
/usr/lib/tls/libc-version.so
this output is returned:
vma samples % symbol name
00a98640 12 100.000 __gconv_transform_utf8_internal
00a98640 1 8.3333
00a9868c 2 16.6667
00a9869a 1 8.3333
00a986c1 1 8.3333
00a98720 1 8.3333
00a98749 1 8.3333
00a98753 1 8.3333
00a98789 1 8.3333
00a98864 1 8.3333
00a98869 1 8.3333
00a98b08 1 8.3333
The data is the same as the -l option except that for each symbol, each virtual memory address
used is shown. For each virtual memory address, the number of samples and percentage of samples
relative to the number of samples for the symbol is displayed.
-e symbol-name…
With this option, you can exclude some symbols from the output. Replace symbol-name with the
comma-separated list of symbols you want to exclude.
session:name
Here, you can specify the full path to the session, a directory relative to the
/var/lib/oprofile/samples/ directory, or if you are using operf, a directory relative to
./oprofile_data/samples/.
24.6.3. Getting More Detailed Output on the Modules
OProfile collects data on a system-wide basis for kernel- and user-space code running on the machine.
However, once a module is loaded into the kernel, the information about the origin of the kernel
module is lost. The module could come from the initrd file on boot up, the directory with the various
kernel modules, or a locally created kernel module. As a result, when OProfile records samples for a
module, it just lists the samples for the modules for an executable in the root directory, but this is
unlikely to be the place with the actual code for the module. You will need to take some steps to make
sure that analysis tools get the proper executable.
487
System Administrator's Guide
To get a more detailed view of the actions of the module, you will need to either have the module
"unstripped" (that is installed from a custom build) or have the debuginfo package installed for the
kernel.
Find out which kernel is running with the uname -a command, obtain the appropriate debuginfo
package and install it on the machine.
Then proceed with clearing out the samples from previous runs with the following command:
opcontrol --reset
To start the monitoring process, for example, on a machine with Westmere processor, run the following
command:
~]# opcontrol --setup --vmlinux=/usr/lib/debug/lib/modules/`uname r`/vmlinux --event=CPU_CLK_UNHALTED:500000
Then the detailed information, for instance, for the ext4 module can be obtained with:
~]# opreport /ext4 -l --image-path /usr/lib/modules/`uname -r`/kernel
CPU: Intel Westmere microarchitecture, speed 2.667e+06 MHz (estimated)
Counted CPU_CLK_UNHALTED events (Clock cycles when not halted) with a unit
mask of 0x00 (No unit mask) count 500000
warning: could not check that the binary file /lib/modules/2.6.32191.el6.x86_64/kernel/fs/ext4/ext4.ko has not been modified since the
profile was taken. Results may be inaccurate.
samples %
symbol name
1622
9.8381 ext4_iget
1591
9.6500 ext4_find_entry
1231
7.4665 __ext4_get_inode_loc
783
4.7492 ext4_ext_get_blocks
752
4.5612 ext4_check_dir_entry
644
3.9061 ext4_mark_iloc_dirty
583
3.5361 ext4_get_blocks
583
3.5361 ext4_xattr_get
479
2.9053 ext4_htree_store_dirent
469
2.8447 ext4_get_group_desc
414
2.5111 ext4_dx_find_entry
24.6.4. Using opannotate
The opannotate tool tries to match the samples for particular instructions to the corresponding lines
in the source code. The resulting generated files should have the samples for the lines at the left. It
also puts in a comment at the beginning of each function listing the total samples for the function.
For this utility to work, the appropriate debuginfo package for the executable must be installed on the
system. On Red Hat Enterprise Linux, the debuginfo packages are not automatically installed with the
corresponding packages that contain the executable. You have to obtain and install them separately.
The general syntax for opannotate is as follows:
opannotate --search-dirs src-dir --source executable
488
CHAPTER 24. OPROFILE
These command-line options are mandatory. Replace src-dir with a path to the directory containing
the source code and specify the executable to be analyzed. See the opannotate(1) manual page for
a list of additional command line options.
24.7. UNDERSTANDING THE /DEV/OPROFILE/ DIRECTORY
When using OProfile in legacy mode, the /dev/oprofile/ directory is used to store the file system
for OProfile. On the other hand, operf does not require /dev/oprofile/. Use the cat command to
display the values of the virtual files in this file system. For example, the following command displays
the type of processor OProfile detected:
cat /dev/oprofile/cpu_type
A directory exists in /dev/oprofile/ for each counter. For example, if there are 2 counters, the
directories /dev/oprofile/0/ and /dev/oprofile/1/ exist.
Each directory for a counter contains the following files:
count — The interval between samples.
enabled — If 0, the counter is off and no samples are collected for it; if 1, the counter is on and
samples are being collected for it.
event — The event to monitor.
extra — Used on machines with Nehalem processors to further specify the event to monitor.
kernel — If 0, samples are not collected for this counter event when the processor is in
kernel-space; if 1, samples are collected even if the processor is in kernel-space.
unit_mask — Defines which unit masks are enabled for the counter.
user — If 0, samples are not collected for the counter event when the processor is in userspace; if 1, samples are collected even if the processor is in user-space.
The values of these files can be retrieved with the cat command. For example:
cat /dev/oprofile/0/count
24.8. EXAMPLE USAGE
While OProfile can be used by developers to analyze application performance, it can also be used by
system administrators to perform system analysis. For example:
Determine which applications and services are used the most on a system— opreport can be
used to determine how much processor time an application or service uses. If the system is
used for multiple services but is underperforming, the services consuming the most processor
time can be moved to dedicated systems.
Determine processor usage — The CPU_CLK_UNHALTED event can be monitored to determine
the processor load over a given period of time. This data can then be used to determine if
additional processors or a faster processor might improve system performance.
489
System Administrator's Guide
24.9. OPROFILE SUPPORT FOR JAVA
OProfile allows you to profile dynamically compiled code (also known as "just-in-time" or JIT code) of
the Java Virtual Machine (JVM). OProfile in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 includes built-in support for the
JVM Tools Interface (JVMTI) agent library, which supports Java 1.5 and higher.
24.9.1. Profiling Java Code
To profile JIT code from the Java Virtual Machine with the JVMTI agent, add the following to the JVM
startup parameters:
-agentlib:jvmti_oprofile
Where jvmti_oprofile is a path to the OProfile agent. For 64-bit JVM, the path looks as follows:
-agentlib:/usr/lib64/oprofile/libjvmti_oprofile.so
Currently, you can add one command-line option: --debug, which enables debugging mode.
NOTE
The oprofile-jit package must be installed on the system in order to profile JIT code with
OProfile. With this package, you gain the capability to show method-level information.
Depending on the JVM that you are using, you may have to install the debuginfo package for the JVM.
For OpenJDK, this package is required, there is no debuginfo package for Oracle JDK. To keep the
debug information packages synchronized with their respective non-debug packages, you also need to
install the yum-plugin-auto-update-debug-info plug-in. This plug-in searches the debug information
repository for corresponding updates.
After successful setup, you can apply the standard profiling and analyzing tools described in previous
sections
To learn more about Java support in OProfile, see the OProfile Manual, which is linked from
Section 24.12, “Additional Resources”.
24.10. GRAPHICAL INTERFACE
Some OProfile preferences can be set with a graphical interface. Make sure you have the oprofilegui package that provides the OProfile GUI installed on your system. To start the interface, execute
the oprof_start command as root at a shell prompt.
After changing any of the options, save them by clicking the Save and quit button. The preferences
are written to /root/.oprofile/daemonrc, and the application exits.
NOTE
Exiting the application does not stop OProfile from sampling.
On the Setup tab, to set events for the processor counters as discussed in Section 24.3.2, “Setting
Events to Monitor”, select the counter from the pulldown menu and select the event from the list. A
brief description of the event appears in the text box below the list. Only events available for the
490
CHAPTER 24. OPROFILE
specific counter and the specific architecture are displayed. The interface also displays whether the
profiler is running and some brief statistics about it.
Figure 24.1. OProfile Setup
On the right side of the tab, select the Profile kernel option to count events in kernel mode for the
currently selected event, as discussed in Section 24.3.3, “Separating Kernel and User-space Profiles” .
If this option is not selected, no samples are collected for the kernel.
Select the Profile user binaries option to count events in user mode for the currently selected
event, as discussed in Section 24.3.3, “Separating Kernel and User-space Profiles” . If this option is not
selected, no samples are collected for user applications.
491
System Administrator's Guide
Use the Count text field to set the sampling rate for the currently selected event as discussed in
Section 24.3.2.1, “Sampling Rate”.
If any unit masks are available for the currently selected event, as discussed in Section 24.3.2.2, “Unit
Masks”, they are displayed in the Unit Masks area on the right side of the Setup tab. Select the
check box beside the unit mask to enable it for the event.
On the Configuration tab, to profile the kernel, enter the name and location of the vmlinux file for
the kernel to monitor in the Kernel image file text field. To configure OProfile not to monitor the
kernel, select No kernel image.
Figure 24.2. OProfile Configuration
492
CHAPTER 24. OPROFILE
If the Verbose option is selected, the oprofiled daemon log includes more detailed information.
If Per-application profiles is selected, OProfile generates per-application profiles for libraries.
This is equivalent to the opcontrol --separate=library command. If Per-application
profiles, including kernel is selected, OProfile generates per-application profiles for the
kernel and kernel modules as discussed in Section 24.3.3, “Separating Kernel and User-space
Profiles”. This is equivalent to the opcontrol --separate=kernel command.
To force data to be written to samples files as discussed in Section 24.6, “Analyzing the Data”, click
the Flush button. This is equivalent to the opcontrol --dump command.
To start OProfile from the graphical interface, click Start. To stop the profiler, click Stop. Exiting the
application does not stop OProfile from sampling.
24.11. OPROFILE AND SYSTEMTAP
SystemTap is a tracing and probing tool that allows users to study and monitor the activities of the
operating system in fine detail. It provides information similar to the output of tools like netstat, ps,
top, and iostat; however, SystemTap is designed to provide more filtering and analysis options for
the collected information.
While using OProfile is suggested in cases of collecting data on where and why the processor spends
time in a particular area of code, it is less usable when finding out why the processor stays idle.
You might want to use SystemTap when instrumenting specific places in code. Because SystemTap
allows you to run the code instrumentation without having to stop and restart the instrumented code, it
is particularly useful for instrumenting the kernel and daemons.
For more information on SystemTap, see SystemTap Beginners Guide.
24.12. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
To learn more about OProfile and how to configure it, see the following resources.
Installed Documentation
/usr/share/doc/oprofile-version/oprofile.html — OProfile Manual
oprofile(1) manual page — Discusses opcontrol, opreport, opannotate, and ophelp
operf(1) manual page
Online Documentation
http://oprofile.sourceforge.net/ — upstream documentation that contains documentation,
mailing lists, IRC channels, and more about the OProfile project. In Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7,
OProfile version 0.9.9. is provided.
See Also
SystemTap Beginners Guide — Provides basic instructions on how to use SystemTap to monitor
different subsystems of Re Hat Enterprise Linux in finer detail.
493
System Administrator's Guide
PART VII. KERNEL, MODULE AND DRIVER CONFIGURATION
This part covers various tools that assist administrators with kernel customization.
494
CHAPTER 25. WORKING WITH GRUB 2
CHAPTER 25. WORKING WITH GRUB 2
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 is distributed with version 2 of the GNU GRand Unified Bootloader (GRUB
2), which allows the user to select an operating system or kernel to be loaded at system boot time.
GRUB 2 also allows the user to pass arguments to the kernel.
25.1. INTRODUCTION TO GRUB 2
GRUB 2 reads its configuration from the /boot/grub2/grub.cfg file on traditional BIOS-based
machines and from the /boot/efi/EFI/redhat/grub.cfg file on UEFI machines. This file contains
menu information.
The GRUB 2 configuration file, grub.cfg, is generated during installation, or by invoking the
/usr/sbin/grub2-mkconfig utility, and is automatically updated by grubby each time a new kernel is
installed. When regenerated manually using grub2-mkconfig, the file is generated according to the
template files located in /etc/grub.d/, and custom settings in the /etc/default/grub file. Edits
of grub.cfg will be lost any time grub2-mkconfig is used to regenerate the file, so care must be
taken to reflect any manual changes in /etc/default/grub as well.
Normal operations on grub.cfg, such as the removal and addition of new kernels, should be done
using the grubby tool and, for scripts, using new-kernel-pkg tool. If you use grubby to modify the
default kernel the changes will be inherited when new kernels are installed. For more information on
grubby, see Section 25.4, “Making Persistent Changes to a GRUB 2 Menu Using the grubby Tool” .
The /etc/default/grub file is used by the grub2-mkconfig tool, which is used by anaconda
when creating grub.cfg during the installation process, and can be used in the event of a system
failure, for example if the boot loader configurations need to be recreated. In general, it is not
recommended to replace the grub.cfg file by manually running grub2-mkconfig except as a last
resort. Note that any manual changes to /etc/default/grub require rebuilding the grub.cfg file.
Menu Entries in grub.cfg
Among various code snippets and directives, the grub.cfg configuration file contains one or more
menuentry blocks, each representing a single GRUB 2 boot menu entry. These blocks always start with
the menuentry keyword followed by a title, list of options, and an opening curly bracket, and end with
a closing curly bracket. Anything between the opening and closing bracket should be indented. For
example, the following is a sample menuentry block for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 with Linux kernel
3.8.0-0.40.el7.x86_64:
menuentry 'Red Hat Enterprise Linux Server' --class red --class gnu-linux
--class gnu --class os $menuentry_id_option 'gnulinux-simple-c60731dc9046-4000-9182-64bdcce08616' {
load_video
set gfxpayload=keep
insmod gzio
insmod part_msdos
insmod xfs
set root='hd0,msdos1'
if [ x$feature_platform_search_hint = xy ]; then
search --no-floppy --fs-uuid --set=root --hint-bios=hd0,msdos1 -hint-efi=hd0,msdos1 --hint-baremetal=ahci0,msdos1 --hint='hd0,msdos1'
19d9e294-65f8-4e37-8e73-d41d6daa6e58
else
search --no-floppy --fs-uuid --set=root 19d9e294-65f8-4e37-8e73d41d6daa6e58
495
System Administrator's Guide
fi
echo
'Loading Linux 3.8.0-0.40.el7.x86_64 ...'
linux16
/vmlinuz-3.8.0-0.40.el7.x86_64 root=/dev/mapper/rhelroot ro rd.md=0 rd.dm=0 rd.lvm.lv=rhel/swap crashkernel=auto rd.luks=0
vconsole.keymap=us rd.lvm.lv=rhel/root rhgb quiet
echo
'Loading initial ramdisk ...'
initrd /initramfs-3.8.0-0.40.el7.x86_64.img
}
Each menuentry block that represents an installed Linux kernel contains linux on 64-bit IBM
POWER Series, linux16 on x86_64 BIOS-based systems, and linuxefi on UEFI-based systems.
Then the initrd directives followed by the path to the kernel and the initramfs image
respectively. If a separate /boot partition was created, the paths to the kernel and the initramfs
image are relative to /boot. In the example above, the initrd /initramfs-3.8.00.40.el7.x86_64.img line means that the initramfs image is actually located at
/boot/initramfs-3.8.0-0.40.el7.x86_64.img when the root file system is mounted, and
likewise for the kernel path.
The kernel version number as given on the linux16 /vmlinuz-kernel_version line must match
the version number of the initramfs image given on the initrd /initramfskernel_version.img line of each menuentry block. For more information on how to verify the
initial RAM disk image, see Section 26.5, “Verifying the Initial RAM Disk Image” .
NOTE
In menuentry blocks, the initrd directive must point to the location (relative to the
/boot directory if it is on a separate partition) of the initramfs file corresponding to
the same kernel version. This directive is called initrd because the previous tool which
created initial RAM disk images, mkinitrd, created what were known as initrd files.
The grub.cfg directive remains initrd to maintain compatibility with other tools.
The file-naming convention of systems using the dracut utility to create the initial RAM
disk image is initramfs-kernel_version.img.
For information on using Dracut, see Section 26.5, “Verifying the Initial RAM Disk
Image”.
25.2. CONFIGURING GRUB 2
Changes to the GRUB 2 menu can be made temporarily at boot time, made persistent for a single
system while the system is running, or as part of making a new GRUB 2 configuration file.
To make non-persistent changes to the GRUB 2 menu, see Section 25.3, “Making Temporary
Changes to a GRUB 2 Menu”.
To make persistent changes to a running system, see Section 25.4, “Making Persistent
Changes to a GRUB 2 Menu Using the grubby Tool”.
For information on making and customizing a GRUB 2 configuration file, see Section 25.5,
“Customizing the GRUB 2 Configuration File”.
25.3. MAKING TEMPORARY CHANGES TO A GRUB 2 MENU
Procedure 25.1. Making Temporary Changes to a Kernel Menu Entry
496
CHAPTER 25. WORKING WITH GRUB 2
To change kernel parameters only during a single boot process, proceed as follows:
1. Start the system and, on the GRUB 2 boot screen, move the cursor to the menu entry you want
to edit, and press the e key for edit.
2. Move the cursor down to find the kernel command line. The kernel command line starts with
linux on 64-Bit IBM Power Series, linux16 on x86-64 BIOS-based systems, or linuxefi
on UEFI systems.
3. Move the cursor to the end of the line.
Press Ctrl+a and Ctrl+e to jump to the start and end of the line, respectively. On some
systems, Home and End might also work.
4. Edit the kernel parameters as required. For example, to run the system in emergency mode,
add the emergency parameter at the end of the linux16 line:
linux16
/vmlinuz-3.10.0-0.rc4.59.el7.x86_64
root=/dev/mapper/rhel-root ro rd.md=0 rd.dm=0 rd.lvm.lv=rhel/swap
crashkernel=auto rd.luks=0 vconsole.keymap=us rd.lvm.lv=rhel/root
rhgb quiet emergency
The rhgb and quiet parameters can be removed in order to enable system messages.
These settings are not persistent and apply only for a single boot. To make persistent changes
to a menu entry on a system, use the grubby tool. See the section called “Adding and
Removing Arguments from a GRUB Menu Entry” for more information on using grubby.
25.4. MAKING PERSISTENT CHANGES TO A GRUB 2 MENU USING THE
GRUBBY TOOL
The grubby tool can be used to read information from, and make persistent changes to, the
grub.cfg file. It enables, for example, changing GRUB menu entries to specify what arguments to pass
to a kernel on system start and changing the default kernel.
In Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7, if grubby is invoked manually without specifying a GRUB configuration
file, it defaults to searching for /etc/grub2.cfg, which is a symbolic link to the grub.cfg file, whose
location is architecture dependent. If that file cannot be found it will search for an architecture
dependent default.
Listing the Default Kernel
To find out the file name of the default kernel, enter a command as follows:
~]# grubby --default-kernel
/boot/vmlinuz-3.10.0-229.4.2.el7.x86_64
To find out the index number of the default kernel, enter a command as follows:
~]# grubby --default-index
0
Changing the Default Boot Entry
To make a persistent change in the kernel designated as the default kernel, use the grubby command
as follows:
497
System Administrator's Guide
~]# grubby --set-default /boot/vmlinuz-3.10.0-229.4.2.el7.x86_64
Viewing the GRUB Menu Entry for a Kernel
To list all the kernel menu entries, enter a command as follows:
~]$ grubby --info=ALL
On UEFI systems, all grubby commands must be entered as root.
To view the GRUB menu entry for a specific kernel, enter a command as follows:
~]$ grubby --info /boot/vmlinuz-3.10.0-229.4.2.el7.x86_64
index=0
kernel=/boot/vmlinuz-3.10.0-229.4.2.el7.x86_64
args="ro rd.lvm.lv=rhel/root crashkernel=auto rd.lvm.lv=rhel/swap
vconsole.font=latarcyrheb-sun16 vconsole.keymap=us rhgb quiet
LANG=en_US.UTF-8"
root=/dev/mapper/rhel-root
initrd=/boot/initramfs-3.10.0-229.4.2.el7.x86_64.img
title=Red Hat Enterprise Linux Server (3.10.0-229.4.2.el7.x86_64) 7.0
(Maipo)
Try tab completion to see the available kernels within the /boot directory.
Adding and Removing Arguments from a GRUB Menu Entry
The --update-kernel option can be used to update a menu entry when used in combination with -args to add new arguments and --remove-arguments to remove existing arguments. These options
accept a quoted space-separated list. The command to simultaneously add and remove arguments a
from GRUB menu entry has the follow format:
grubby --remove-args="argX argY" --args="argA argB" --update-kernel
/boot/kernel
To add and remove arguments from a kernel's GRUB menu entry, use a command as follows:
~]# grubby --remove-args="rhgb quiet" --args=console=ttyS0,115200 -update-kernel /boot/vmlinuz-3.10.0-229.4.2.el7.x86_64
This command removes the Red Hat graphical boot argument, enables boot message to be seen, and
adds a serial console. As the console arguments will be added at the end of the line, the new console
will take precedence over any other consoles configured.
To review the changes, use the --info command option as follows:
~]# grubby --info /boot/vmlinuz-3.10.0-229.4.2.el7.x86_64
index=0
kernel=/boot/vmlinuz-3.10.0-229.4.2.el7.x86_64
args="ro rd.lvm.lv=rhel/root crashkernel=auto rd.lvm.lv=rhel/swap
vconsole.font=latarcyrheb-sun16 vconsole.keymap=us LANG=en_US.UTF-8
ttyS0,115200"
root=/dev/mapper/rhel-root
initrd=/boot/initramfs-3.10.0-229.4.2.el7.x86_64.img
title=Red Hat Enterprise Linux Server (3.10.0-229.4.2.el7.x86_64) 7.0
(Maipo)
498
CHAPTER 25. WORKING WITH GRUB 2
Updating All Kernel Menus with the Same Arguments
To add the same kernel boot arguments to all the kernel menu entries, enter a command as follows:
~]# grubby --update-kernel=ALL --args=console=ttyS0,115200
The --update-kernel parameter also accepts DEFAULT or a comma separated list of kernel index
numbers.
Changing a Kernel Argument
To change a value in an existing kernel argument, specify the argument again, changing the value as
required. For example, to change the virtual console font size, use a command as follows:
~]# grubby --args=vconsole.font=latarcyrheb-sun32 --update-kernel
/boot/vmlinuz-3.10.0-229.4.2.el7.x86_64
index=0
kernel=/boot/vmlinuz-3.10.0-229.4.2.el7.x86_64
args="ro rd.lvm.lv=rhel/root crashkernel=auto rd.lvm.lv=rhel/swap
vconsole.font=latarcyrheb-sun32 vconsole.keymap=us LANG=en_US.UTF-8"
root=/dev/mapper/rhel-root
initrd=/boot/initramfs-3.10.0-229.4.2.el7.x86_64.img
title=Red Hat Enterprise Linux Server (3.10.0-229.4.2.el7.x86_64) 7.0
(Maipo)
See the grubby(8) manual page for more command options.
25.5. CUSTOMIZING THE GRUB 2 CONFIGURATION FILE
GRUB 2 scripts search the user's computer and build a boot menu based on what operating systems
the scripts find. To reflect the latest system boot options, the boot menu is rebuilt automatically when
the kernel is updated or a new kernel is added.
However, users may want to build a menu containing specific entries or to have the entries in a specific
order. GRUB 2 allows basic customization of the boot menu to give users control of what actually
appears on the screen.
GRUB 2 uses a series of scripts to build the menu; these are located in the /etc/grub.d/ directory.
The following files are included:
00_header, which loads GRUB 2 settings from the /etc/default/grub file.
01_users, which reads the superuser password from the user.cfg file. In Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 7.0 and 7.1, this file was only created when boot password was defined in the
kickstart file during installation, and it included the defined password in plain text.
10_linux, which locates kernels in the default partition of Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
30_os-prober, which builds entries for operating systems found on other partitions.
40_custom, a template, which can be used to create additional menu entries.
Scripts from the /etc/grub.d/ directory are read in alphabetical order and can be therefore
renamed to change the boot order of specific menu entries.
499
System Administrator's Guide
IMPORTANT
With the GRUB_TIMEOUT key set to 0 in the /etc/default/grub file, GRUB 2 does not
display the list of bootable kernels when the system starts up. In order to display this list
when booting, press and hold any alphanumeric key when the BIOS information is
displayed; GRUB 2 will present you with the GRUB menu.
25.5.1. Changing the Default Boot Entry
By default, the key for the GRUB_DEFAULT directive in the /etc/default/grub file is the word
saved. This instructs GRUB 2 to load the kernel specified by the saved_entry directive in the GRUB
2 environment file, located at /boot/grub2/grubenv. You can set another GRUB record to be the
default, using the grub2-set-default command, which will update the GRUB 2 environment file.
By default, the saved_entry value is set to the name of latest installed kernel of package type kernel.
This is defined in /etc/sysconfig/kernel by the UPDATEDEFAULT and DEFAULTKERNEL
directives. The file can be viewed by the root user as follows:
~]# cat /etc/sysconfig/kernel
# UPDATEDEFAULT specifies if new-kernel-pkg should make
# new kernels the default
UPDATEDEFAULT=yes
# DEFAULTKERNEL specifies the default kernel package type
DEFAULTKERNEL=kernel
The DEFAULTKERNEL directive specifies what package type will be used as the default. Installing a
package of type kernel-debug will not change the default kernel while the DEFAULTKERNEL is set to
package type kernel.
GRUB 2 supports using a numeric value as the key for the saved_entry directive to change the
default order in which the operating systems are loaded. To specify which operating system should be
loaded first, pass its number to the grub2-set-default command. For example:
~]# grub2-set-default 2
Note that the position of a menu entry in the list is denoted by a number starting with zero; therefore,
in the example above, the third entry will be loaded. This value will be overwritten by the name of the
next kernel to be installed.
To force a system to always use a particular menu entry, use the menu entry name as the key to the
GRUB_DEFAULT directive in the /etc/default/grub file. To list the available menu entries, run the
following command as root:
~]# awk -F\' '$1=="menuentry " {print $2}' /etc/grub2.cfg
The file name /etc/grub2.cfg is a symbolic link to the grub.cfg file, whose location is architecture
dependent. For reliability reasons, the symbolic link is not used in other examples in this chapter. It is
better to use absolute paths when writing to a file, especially when repairing a system.
Changes to /etc/default/grub require rebuilding the grub.cfg file as follows:
On BIOS-based machines, issue the following command as root:
500
CHAPTER 25. WORKING WITH GRUB 2
~]# grub2-mkconfig -o /boot/grub2/grub.cfg
On UEFI-based machines, issue the following command as root:
~]# grub2-mkconfig -o /boot/efi/EFI/redhat/grub.cfg
25.5.2. Editing a Menu Entry
If required to prepare a new GRUB 2 file with different parameters, edit the values of the
GRUB_CMDLINE_LINUX key in the /etc/default/grub file. Note that you can specify multiple
parameters for the GRUB_CMDLINE_LINUX key, similarly to adding the parameters in the GRUB 2 boot
menu. For example:
GRUB_CMDLINE_LINUX="console=tty0 console=ttyS0,9600n8"
Where console=tty0 is the first virtual terminal and console=ttyS0 is the serial terminal to be
used.
Changes to /etc/default/grub require rebuilding the grub.cfg file as follows:
On BIOS-based machines, issue the following command as root:
~]# grub2-mkconfig -o /boot/grub2/grub.cfg
On UEFI-based machines, issue the following command as root:
~]# grub2-mkconfig -o /boot/efi/EFI/redhat/grub.cfg
25.5.3. Adding a new Entry
When executing the grub2-mkconfig command, GRUB 2 searches for Linux kernels and other
operating systems based on the files located in the /etc/grub.d/ directory. The
/etc/grub.d/10_linux script searches for installed Linux kernels on the same partition. The
/etc/grub.d/30_os-prober script searches for other operating systems. Menu entries are also
automatically added to the boot menu when updating the kernel.
The 40_custom file located in the /etc/grub.d/ directory is a template for custom entries and looks
as follows:
#!/bin/sh
exec tail -n +3 $0
# This file provides an easy way to add custom menu entries. Simply type
the
# menu entries you want to add after this comment. Be careful not to
change
# the 'exec tail' line above.
This file can be edited or copied. Note that as a minimum, a valid menu entry must include at least the
following:
501
System Administrator's Guide
menuentry "<Title>"{
<Data>
}
25.5.4. Creating a Custom Menu
If you do not want menu entries to be updated automatically, you can create a custom menu.
IMPORTANT
Before proceeding, back up the contents of the /etc/grub.d/ directory in case you
need to revert the changes later.
NOTE
Note that modifying the /etc/default/grub file does not have any effect on creating
custom menus.
1. On BIOS-based machines, copy the contents of /boot/grub2/grub.cfg, or, on UEFI
machines, copy the contents of /boot/efi/EFI/redhat/grub.cfg. Put the content of the
grub.cfg into the /etc/grub.d/40_custom file below the existing header lines. The
executable part of the 40_custom script has to be preserved.
2. From the content put into the /etc/grub.d/40_custom file, only the menuentry blocks are
needed to create the custom menu. The /boot/grub2/grub.cfg and
/boot/efi/EFI/redhat/grub.cfg files might contain function specifications and other
content above and below the menuentry blocks. If you put these unnecessary lines into the
40_custom file in the previous step, erase them.
This is an example of a custom 40_custom script:
#!/bin/sh
exec tail -n +3 $0
# This file provides an easy way to add custom menu entries. Simply
type the
# menu entries you want to add after this comment. Be careful not
to change
# the 'exec tail' line above.
menuentry 'First custom entry' --class red --class gnu-linux --class
gnu --class os $menuentry_id_option 'gnulinux-3.10.0-67.el7.x86_64advanced-32782dd0-4b47-4d56-a740-2076ab5e5976' {
load_video
set gfxpayload=keep
insmod gzio
insmod part_msdos
insmod xfs
set root='hd0,msdos1'
if [ x$feature_platform_search_hint = xy ]; then
search --no-floppy --fs-uuid --set=root -hint='hd0,msdos1' 7885bba1-8aa7-4e5d-a7ad-821f4f52170a
else
search --no-floppy --fs-uuid --set=root 7885bba1-8aa7-
502
CHAPTER 25. WORKING WITH GRUB 2
4e5d-a7ad-821f4f52170a
fi
linux16 /vmlinuz-3.10.0-67.el7.x86_64 root=/dev/mapper/rhelroot ro rd.lvm.lv=rhel/root vconsole.font=latarcyrheb-sun16
rd.lvm.lv=rhel/swap vconsole.keymap=us crashkernel=auto rhgb quiet
LANG=en_US.UTF-8
initrd16 /initramfs-3.10.0-67.el7.x86_64.img
}
menuentry 'Second custom entry' --class red --class gnu-linux -class gnu --class os $menuentry_id_option 'gnulinux-0-rescue07f43f20a54c4ce8ada8b70d33fd001c-advanced-32782dd0-4b47-4d56-a7402076ab5e5976' {
load_video
insmod gzio
insmod part_msdos
insmod xfs
set root='hd0,msdos1'
if [ x$feature_platform_search_hint = xy ]; then
search --no-floppy --fs-uuid --set=root -hint='hd0,msdos1' 7885bba1-8aa7-4e5d-a7ad-821f4f52170a
else
search --no-floppy --fs-uuid --set=root 7885bba1-8aa74e5d-a7ad-821f4f52170a
fi
linux16 /vmlinuz-0-rescue-07f43f20a54c4ce8ada8b70d33fd001c
root=/dev/mapper/rhel-root ro rd.lvm.lv=rhel/root
vconsole.font=latarcyrheb-sun16 rd.lvm.lv=rhel/swap
vconsole.keymap=us crashkernel=auto rhgb quiet
initrd16 /initramfs-0-rescue07f43f20a54c4ce8ada8b70d33fd001c.img
}
3. Remove all files from the /etc/grub.d/ directory except the following:
00_header,
40_custom,
01_users (if it exists),
and README.
Alternatively, if you want to keep the files in the /etc/grub2.d/ directory, make them
unexecutable by running the chmod a-x <file_name> command.
4. Edit, add, or remove menu entries in the 40_custom file as desired.
5. Rebuild the grub.cfg file by running the grub2-mkconfig -o command as follows:
On BIOS-based machines, issue the following command as root:
~]# grub2-mkconfig -o /boot/grub2/grub.cfg
On UEFI-based machines, issue the following command as root:
503
System Administrator's Guide
~]# grub2-mkconfig -o /boot/efi/EFI/redhat/grub.cfg
25.6. PROTECTING GRUB 2 WITH A PASSWORD
GRUB 2 offers two types of password protection:
Password is required for modifying menu entries but not for booting existing menu entries;
Password is required for modifying menu entries and for booting one, several, or all menu
entries.
Configuring GRUB 2 to Require a Password only for Modifying Entries
To require password authentication for modifying GRUB 2 entries, follow these steps:
1. Run the grub2-setpassword command as root:
~]# grub2-setpassword
2. Enter and confirm the password:
Enter password:
Confirm password:
Following this procedure creates a /boot/grub2/user.cfg file that contains the hash of the
password. The user for this password, root, is defined in the /boot/grub2/grub.cfg file. With this
change, modifying a boot entry during booting requires you to specify the root user name and your
password.
Configuring GRUB 2 to Require a Password for Modifying and Booting Entries
Setting a password using the grub2-setpassword prevents menu entries from unauthorized
modification but not from unauthorized booting. To also require password for booting an entry, follow
these steps after setting the password with grub2-setpassword:
WARNING
If you forget your GRUB 2 password, you will not be able to boot the entries you
reconfigure in the following procedure.
1. Open the /boot/grub2/grub.cfg file.
2. Find the boot entry that you want to protect with password by searching for lines beginning
with menuentry.
3. Delete the --unrestricted parameter from the menu entry block, for example:
[file contents truncated]
menuentry 'Red Hat Enterprise Linux Server (3.10.0327.18.2.rt56.223.el7_2.x86_64) 7.2 (Maipo)' --class red --class
504
CHAPTER 25. WORKING WITH GRUB 2
gnu-linux --class gnu --class os --unrestricted $menuentry_id_option
'gnulinux-3.10.0-327.el7.x86_64-advanced-c109825c-de2f-4340-a0ef4f47d19fe4bf' {
load_video
set gfxpayload=keep
[file contents truncated]
4. Save and close the file.
Now even booting the entry requires entering the root user name and password.
NOTE
Manual changes to the /boot/grub2/grub.cfg persist when new kernel versions are
installed, but are lost when re-generating grub.cfg using the grub2-mkconfig
command. Therefore, to retain password protection, use the above procedure after
every use of grub2-mkconfig.
NOTE
If you delete the --unrestricted parameter from every menu entry in the
/boot/grub2/grub.cfg file, all newly installed kernels will have menu entry created
without --unrestricted and hence automatically inherit the password protection.
Passwords Set Before Updating to Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7.2
The grub2-setpassword tool was added in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7.2 and is now the standard
method of setting GRUB 2 passwords. This is in contrast to previous versions of Red Hat
Enterprise Linux, where boot entries needed to be manually specified in the
/etc/grub.d/40_custom file, and super users - in the /etc/grub.d/01_users file.
Additional GRUB 2 Users
Booting entries without the --unrestricted parameter requires the root password. However, GRUB
2 also enables creating additional non-root users that can boot such entries without providing a
password. Modifying the entries still requires the root password. For information on creating such
users, see the GRUB 2 Manual .
25.7. REINSTALLING GRUB 2
Reinstalling GRUB 2 is a convenient way to fix certain problems usually caused by an incorrect
installation of GRUB 2, missing files, or a broken system. Other reasons to reinstall GRUB 2 include the
following:
Upgrading from the previous version of GRUB.
The user requires the GRUB 2 boot loader to control installed operating systems. However,
some operating systems are installed with their own boot loaders. Reinstalling GRUB 2 returns
control to the desired operating system.
Adding the boot information to another drive.
25.7.1. Reinstalling GRUB 2 on BIOS-Based Machines
505
System Administrator's Guide
When using the grub2-install command, the boot information is updated and missing files are
restored. Note that the files are restored only if they are not corrupted.
Use the grub2-install device command to reinstall GRUB 2 if the system is operating normally.
For example, if sda is your device:
~]# grub2-install /dev/sda
25.7.2. Reinstalling GRUB 2 on UEFI-Based Machines
When using the yum reinstall grub2-efi shim command, the boot information is updated and
missing files are restored. Note that the files are restored only if they are not corrupted.
Use the yum reinstall grub2-efi shim command to reinstall GRUB 2 if the system is operating
normally. For example:
~]# yum reinstall grub2-efi shim
25.7.3. Resetting and Reinstalling GRUB 2
This method completely removes all GRUB 2 configuration files and system settings. Apply this method
to reset all configuration settings to their default values. Removing of the configuration files and
subsequent reinstalling of GRUB 2 fixes failures caused by corrupted files and incorrect configuration.
To do so, as root, follow these steps:
1. Run the rm /etc/grub.d/* command;
2. Run the rm /etc/sysconfig/grub command;
3. For EFI systems only, run the following command:
~]# yum reinstall grub2-efi shim grub2-tools
4. For BIOS and EFI systems, run this command:
~]# yum reinstall grub2-tools
5. Rebuild the grub.cfg file by running the grub2-mkconfig -o command as follows:
On BIOS-based machines, issue the following command as root:
~]# grub2-mkconfig -o /boot/grub2/grub.cfg
On UEFI-based machines, issue the following command as root:
~]# grub2-mkconfig -o /boot/efi/EFI/redhat/grub.cfg
6. Now follow the procedure in Section 25.7, “Reinstalling GRUB 2” to restore GRUB2 on the
/boot/ partition.
25.8. UPGRADING FROM GRUB LEGACY TO GRUB2
506
CHAPTER 25. WORKING WITH GRUB 2
When you do an in-place upgrade of Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) from version 6 to 7, the upgrade
from GRUB Legacy to GRUB2 does not happen automatically, but it can be done manually. Red Hat
recommends to perform the GRUB upgrade for these reasons:
On RHEL 7 and newer, GRUB Legacy is no longer maintained and does not receive updates.
GRUB Legacy is unable to boot on systems without /boot.
GRUB2 has more features and is more reliable.
GRUB2 supports more hardware configurations, file systems, and drive layouts.
Red Hat strongly recommends to do a manual backup of previous grub-legacy package prior to
upgrading your Red Hat Enterprise Linux system.
Prerequisites for upgrading
1. The grub-legacy package is manually backed up
You can manually back up the grub-legacy package by following these steps:
1. Download grub-legacy:
~]#
yum reinstall -y --downloadonly grub
2. Locate the downloaded package:
~]# find /var/cache/yum/ | grep "grub"
NOTE
If you did not change the default cache location of yum, then its cache is
located in the /var/cache/yum/ directory. If you changed the default
cache location of yum, consult its configuration to find it. For further
information, see Working with Yum Cache and Configuring Yum and Yum
Repositories .
3. Copy the package to a save location, for example in /root or your /home directory:
~]# cp /var/cache/yum/x86_64/6Server/rhel/packages/grub-0.9799.el6.x86_64.rpm /root/
or
~] sudo cp /var/cache/yum/x86_64/6Server/rhel/packages/grub-0.9799.el6.x86_64.rpm /home/$USER
$USER is a shell variable. Get the user name by listing the variable:
~]
echo $USER
Use this user name in the example above.
507
System Administrator's Guide
IMPORTANT
Do not copy grub-legacy into the /boot directory. This may cause the inplace upgrade from RHEL 6 to RHEL 7 to fail if /boot does not have enough
free space. For more information, see the pre-upgrade and upgrade
documentation:
Release Notes documentation
Knowledgebase Article
2. The grub-legacy package is installed from its backup
Red Hat strongly recommends to install grub-legacy from the manually created backup. This
step ensures that you have a recovery option in case that the upgrade from GRUB Legacy to
GRUB2 fails at some point.
Install grub-legacy from your backup location:
~]# rpm --install --force --nodeps grub-0.97-99.el6.x86_64.rpm
3. Your RHEL system that has been upgraded from version 6 to 7
After finishing the in-place upgrade from RHEL 6 to RHEL 7, the grub2 package should be installed
automatically. If the package is not on the system, you can install it by running:
~]# yum install grub2
Determining the real device name of the bootable device
1. Find out which drive is the bootable device. For that, view the GRUB Legacy configuration file
/boot/grub/grub.conf and search for the root line:
# grub.conf generated by anaconda
#
# Note that you do not have to rerun grub after making changes to
this file
# NOTICE: You have a /boot partition. This means that
#
all kernel and initrd paths are relative to /boot/, eg.
#
root (hd0,0)
#
kernel /vmlinuz-version ro root=/dev/mapper/vg_rhel68lv_root
#
initrd /initrd-[generic-]version.img
#boot=/dev/sda
default=0
timeout=5
splashimage=(hd0,0)/grub/splash.xpm.gz
hiddenmenu
title Red Hat Enterprise Linux Server (2.6.32-642.4.2.el6.x86_64)
root (hd0,0)
kernel /vmlinuz-2.6.32-642.4.2.el6.x86_64 ro
root=/dev/mapper/vg_rhel68-lv_root rd_NO_LUKS KEYBOARDTYPE=pc
KEYTABLE=us LANG=en_US.UTF-8 rd_NO_MD SYSFONT=latarcyrheb-sun16
crashkernel=auto rd_LVM_LV=vg_rhel68/lv_root
rd_LVM_LV=vg_rhel68/lv_swap rd_NO_DM rhgb quiet
508
CHAPTER 25. WORKING WITH GRUB 2
initrd /initramfs-2.6.32-642.4.2.el6.x86_64.img
title Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 (2.6.32-642.el6.x86_64)
root (hd0,0)
kernel /vmlinuz-2.6.32-642.el6.x86_64 ro root=/dev/mapper/vg_rhel68lv_root rd_NO_LUKS KEYBOARDTYPE=pc KEYTABLE=us LANG=en_US.UTF-8
rd_NO_MD SYSFONT=latarcyrheb-sun16 crashkernel=auto
rd_LVM_LV=vg_rhel68/lv_root rd_LVM_LV=vg_rhel68/lv_swap rd_NO_DM
rhgb quiet
initrd /initramfs-2.6.32-642.el6.x86_64.img
For each menu entry, the root line specifies the bootable device. In this example, hd0,0 is the
bootable device.
2. Only perform this step if your/boot/grub/device.map is not accurate. This might happen, for
example, after changing hardware configuration.
a. Recreate /boot/grub/device.map:
~]# grub-install --recheck /dev/sda
The old configuration is backed up automatically in /boot/grub/device.map.backup.
b. If the previous step broke your device mapping configuration, restore the backup:
~]# rm /boot/grub/device.map
~]# cp /boot/grub/device.map.backup /boot/grub/device.map
3. Determine the mapping of the bootable device to the real device. For that, take the device
found in step 1, and find the corresponding entry in the /boot/grub/device.map file:
# this device map was generated by anaconda
(hd0)
/dev/sda
(hd1)
/dev/sdb
In this example, the listing shows that for device hd0 the real device name is /dev/sda.
Make note of the real device name, it will be used in the next procedure.
Generating the GRUB2 configuration files
Now we will add GRUB2 configuration without removing the original GRUB Legacy configuration. We
will keep GRUB Legacy configuration in case GRUB2 does not work correctly.
1. Install the GRUB2 files to the /boot/grub directory of /dev/sdX disk:
~]# grub2-install --grub-setup=/bin/true /dev/sdX
Substitute /dev/sdX with the real name of the bootable device determined in the section called
“Determining the real device name of the bootable device”.
The --grub-setup=/bin/true option ensures that the old GRUB Legacy configuration is
not deleted.
509
System Administrator's Guide
WARNING
Note the difference in the configuration file extensions:
.conf is for GRUB
.cfg is for GRUB2
Do not overwrite the old GRUB configuration file by mistake in the next
step.
2. Generate the /boot/grub2/grub.cfg:
~]# grub2-mkconfig -o /boot/grub2/grub.cfg
NOTE
For customizing the generated GRUB2 configuration file, see Section 25.5,
“Customizing the GRUB 2 Configuration File”. You should make changes in
/etc/default/grub, not directly in /boot/grub2/grub.cfg. Otherwise,
changes in /boot/grub2/grub.cfg are lost every time the file is regenerated.
Testing GRUB2 with GRUB still installed
Now we will test GRUB2 without removing GRUB Legacy configuration. The GRUB Legacy
configuration needs to stay until GRUB2 configuration is verified; otherwise the system might become
unbootable. To safely test GRUB2 configuration, we will start GRUB2 from GRUB Legacy.
1. Add a new section into /boot/grub/grub.conf:
title GRUB2 Test
root (hd0,0)
kernel /grub2/i386-pc/core.img
boot
Substitute (hd0,0) with the boot drive.
2. Reboot the system.
3. When presented with a GRUB Legacy menu, select the GRUB2 Test entry.
4. When presented with a GRUB2 menu, select a kernel to boot.
5. If the above did not work, restart, and do not choose the GRUB2 Test entry on next boot.
Replacing and removing GRUB Legacy
If GRUB2 worked successfully, replace GRUB Legacy and remove it from the system:
1. Overwrite the GRUB Legacy boot sector with GRUB2 bootloader:
510
CHAPTER 25. WORKING WITH GRUB 2
~]# grub2-install /dev/sda
2. Uninstall the grub packages:
~]# yum remove grub
The upgrade to GRUB2 is now finished.
25.9. GRUB 2 OVER A SERIAL CONSOLE
If you use computers with no display or keyboard, it can be very useful to control the machines
through serial communications.
25.9.1. Configuring the GRUB 2 Menu
To set the system to use a serial terminal only during a single boot process, when the GRUB 2 boot
menu appears, move the cursor to the kernel you want to start, and press the e key to edit the kernel
parameters. Remove the rhgb and quiet parameters and add console parameters at the end of the
linux16 line as follows:
linux16
/vmlinuz-3.10.0-0.rc4.59.el7.x86_64 root=/dev/mapper/rhelroot ro rd.md=0 rd.dm=0 rd.lvm.lv=rhel/swap crashkernel=auto rd.luks=0
vconsole.keymap=us rd.lvm.lv=rhel/root console=ttyS0,115200
These settings are not persistent and apply only for a single boot.
To make persistent changes to a menu entry on a system, use the grubby tool. For example, to update
the entry for the default kernel, enter a command as follows:
~]# grubby --remove-args="rhgb quiet" --args=console=ttyS0,115200 -update-kernel=DEFAULT
The --update-kernel parameter also accepts the keyword ALL or a comma separated list of kernel
index numbers. See the section called “Adding and Removing Arguments from a GRUB Menu Entry” for
more information on using grubby.
If required to build a new GRUB 2 configuration file, add the following two lines in the
/etc/default/grub file:
GRUB_TERMINAL="serial"
GRUB_SERIAL_COMMAND="serial --speed=9600 --unit=0 --word=8 --parity=no -stop=1"
The first line disables the graphical terminal. Note that specifying the GRUB_TERMINAL key overrides
values of GRUB_TERMINAL_INPUT and GRUB_TERMINAL_OUTPUT. On the second line, adjust the baud
rate, parity, and other values to fit your environment and hardware. A much higher baud rate, for
example 115200, is preferable for tasks such as following log files. Once you have completed the
changes in the /etc/default/grub file, it is necessary to update the GRUB 2 configuration file.
Rebuild the grub.cfg file by running the grub2-mkconfig -o command as follows:
On BIOS-based machines, issue the following command as root:
511
System Administrator's Guide
~]# grub2-mkconfig -o /boot/grub2/grub.cfg
On UEFI-based machines, issue the following command as root:
~]# grub2-mkconfig -o /boot/efi/EFI/redhat/grub.cfg
NOTE
In order to access the GRUB terminal over a serial connection an additional option must
be added to a kernel definition to make that particular kernel monitor a serial
connection. For example:
console=ttyS0,9600n8
Where console=ttyS0 is the serial terminal to be used, 9600 is the baud rate, n is for
no parity, and 8 is the word length in bits. A much higher baud rate, for example 115200,
is preferable for tasks such as following log files.
For more information on serial console settings, see the section called “Installable and
External Documentation”
25.9.2. Using screen to Connect to the Serial Console
The screen tool serves as a capable serial terminal. To install it, run as root:
~]# yum install screen
To connect to your machine using the serial console, use a command in the follow format:
screen /dev/console_port baud_rate
By default, if no option is specified, screen uses the standard 9600 baud rate. To set a higher baud
rate, enter:
~]$ screen /dev/console_port 115200
Where console_port is ttyS0, or ttyUSB0, and so on.
To end the session in screen, press Ctrl+a, type :quit and press Enter.
See the screen(1) manual page for additional options and detailed information.
25.10. TERMINAL MENU EDITING DURING BOOT
Menu entries can be modified and arguments passed to the kernel on boot. This is done using the menu
entry editor interface, which is triggered when pressing the e key on a selected menu entry in the boot
loader menu. The Esc key discards any changes and reloads the standard menu interface. The c key
loads the command line interface.
The command line interface is the most basic GRUB interface, but it is also the one that grants the
most control. The command line makes it possible to type any relevant GRUB commands followed by
the Enter key to execute them. This interface features some advanced features similar to shell,
512
CHAPTER 25. WORKING WITH GRUB 2
including Tab key completion based on context, and Ctrl+a to move to the beginning of a line and
Ctrl+e to move to the end of a line. In addition, the arrow, Home, End, and Delete keys work as they
do in the bash shell.
25.10.1. Booting to Rescue Mode
Rescue mode provides a convenient single-user environment and allows you to repair your system in
situations when it is unable to complete a normal booting process. In rescue mode, the system
attempts to mount all local file systems and start some important system services, but it does not
activate network interfaces or allow more users to be logged into the system at the same time. In
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7, rescue mode is equivalent to single user mode and requires the root
password.
1. To enter rescue mode during boot, on the GRUB 2 boot screen, press the e key for edit.
2. Add the following parameter at the end of the linux line on 64-Bit IBM Power Series, the
linux16 line on x86-64 BIOS-based systems, or the linuxefi line on UEFI systems:
systemd.unit=rescue.target
Press Ctrl+a and Ctrl+e to jump to the start and end of the line, respectively. On some
systems, Home and End might also work.
Note that equivalent parameters, 1, s, and single, can be passed to the kernel as well.
3. Press Ctrl+x to boot the system with the parameter.
25.10.2. Booting to Emergency Mode
Emergency mode provides the most minimal environment possible and allows you to repair your
system even in situations when the system is unable to enter rescue mode. In emergency mode, the
system mounts the root file system only for reading, does not attempt to mount any other local file
systems, does not activate network interfaces, and only starts few essential services. In Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 7, emergency mode requires the root password.
1. To enter emergency mode, on the GRUB 2 boot screen, press the e key for edit.
2. Add the following parameter at the end of the linux line on 64-Bit IBM Power Series, the
linux16 line on x86-64 BIOS-based systems, or the linuxefi line on UEFI systems:
systemd.unit=emergency.target
Press Ctrl+a and Ctrl+e to jump to the start and end of the line, respectively. On some
systems, Home and End might also work.
Note that equivalent parameters, emergency and -b, can be passed to the kernel as well.
3. Press Ctrl+x to boot the system with the parameter.
25.10.3. Booting to the Debug Shell
The systemd debug shell provides a shell very early in the startup process that can be used to
diagnose systemd related boot-up problems. Once in the debug shell, systemctl commands such as
513
System Administrator's Guide
systemctl list-jobs, and systemctl list-units can be used to look for the cause of boot
problems. In addition, the debug option can be added to the kernel command line to increase the
number of log messages. For systemd, the kernel command-line option debug is now a shortcut for
systemd.log_level=debug.
Procedure 25.2. Adding the Debug Shell Command
To activate the debug shell only for this session, proceed as follows:
1. On the GRUB 2 boot screen, move the cursor to the menu entry you want to edit and press the
e key for edit.
2. Add the following parameter at the end of the linux line on 64-Bit IBM Power Series, the
linux16 line on x86-64 BIOS-based systems, or the linuxefi line on UEFI systems:
systemd.debug-shell
Optionally add the debug option.
Press Ctrl+a and Ctrl+e to jump to the start and end of the line, respectively. On some
systems, Home and End might also work.
3. Press Ctrl+x to boot the system with the parameter.
If required, the debug shell can be set to start on every boot by enabling it with the systemctl
enable debug-shell command. Alternatively, the grubby tool can be used to make persistent
changes to the kernel command line in the GRUB 2 menu. See Section 25.4, “Making Persistent
Changes to a GRUB 2 Menu Using the grubby Tool” for more information on using grubby.
WARNING
Permanently enabling the debug shell is a security risk because no authentication
is required to use it. Disable it when the debugging session has ended.
Procedure 25.3. Connecting to the Debug Shell
During the boot process, the systemd-debug-generator will configure the debug shell on TTY9.
1. Press Ctrl+Alt+F9 to connect to the debug shell. If working with a virtual machine, sending
this key combination requires support from the virtualization application. For example, if using
Virtual Machine Manager, select Send Key → Ctrl+Alt+F9 from the menu.
2. The debug shell does not require authentication, therefore a prompt similar to the following
should be seen on TTY9: [root@localhost /]#
3. If required, to verify you are in the debug shell, enter a command as follows:
/]# systemctl status $$
● debug-shell.service - Early root shell on /dev/tty9 FOR DEBUGGING
ONLY
514
CHAPTER 25. WORKING WITH GRUB 2
Loaded: loaded (/usr/lib/systemd/system/debug-shell.service;
disabled; vendor preset: disabled)
Active: active (running) since Wed 2015-08-05 11:01:48 EDT; 2min
ago
Docs: man:sushell(8)
Main PID: 450 (bash)
CGroup: /system.slice/debug-shell.service
├─ 450 /bin/bash
└─1791 systemctl status 450
4. To return to the default shell, if the boot succeeded, press Ctrl+Alt+F1.
To diagnose start up problems, certain systemd units can be masked by adding
systemd.mask=unit_name one or more times on the kernel command line. To start additional
processes during the boot process, add systemd.wants=unit_name to the kernel command line. The
systemd-debug-generator(8) manual page describes these options.
25.10.4. Changing and Resetting the Root Password
Setting up the root password is a mandatory part of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 installation. If you
forget or lose the root password it is possible to reset it, however users who are members of the
wheel group can change the root password as follows:
~]$ sudo passwd root
Note that in GRUB 2, resetting the password is no longer performed in single-user mode as it was in
GRUB included in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6. The root password is now required to operate in
single-user mode as well as in emergency mode.
Two procedures for resetting the root password are shown here:
Procedure 25.4, “Resetting the Root Password Using an Installation Disk” takes you to a shell
prompt, without having to edit the GRUB menu. It is the shorter of the two procedures and it is
also the recommended method. You can use a boot disk or a normal Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7
installation disk.
Procedure 25.5, “Resetting the Root Password Using rd.break” makes use of rd.break to
interrupt the boot process before control is passed from initramfs to systemd. The
disadvantage of this method is that it requires more steps, includes having to edit the GRUB
menu, and involves choosing between a possibly time consuming SELinux file relabel or
changing the SELinux enforcing mode and then restoring the SELinux security context for
/etc/shadow/ when the boot completes.
Procedure 25.4. Resetting the Root Password Using an Installation Disk
1. Start the system and when BIOS information is displayed, select the option for a boot menu
and select to boot from the installation disk.
2. Choose Troubleshooting.
3. Choose Rescue a Red Hat Enterprise Linux System .
4. Choose Continue which is the default option. At this point you will be promoted for a
passphrase if an encrypted file system is found.
515
System Administrator's Guide
5. Press OK to acknowledge the information displayed until the shell prompt appears.
6. Change the file system root as follows:
sh-4.2# chroot /mnt/sysimage
7. Enter the passwd command and follow the instructions displayed on the command line to
change the root password.
8. Remove the autorelable file to prevent a time consuming SELinux relabel of the disk:
sh-4.2# rm -f /.autorelabel
9. Enter the exit command to exit the chroot environment.
10. Enter the exit command again to resume the initialization and finish the system boot.
Procedure 25.5. Resetting the Root Password Using rd.break
1. Start the system and, on the GRUB 2 boot screen, press the e key for edit.
2. Remove the rhgb and quiet parameters from the end, or near the end, of the linux16 line,
or linuxefi on UEFI systems.
Press Ctrl+a and Ctrl+e to jump to the start and end of the line, respectively. On some
systems, Home and End might also work.
IMPORTANT
The rhgb and quiet parameters must be removed in order to enable system
messages.
3. Add the following parameters at the end of the linux line on 64-Bit IBM Power Series, the
linux16 line on x86-64 BIOS-based systems, or the linuxefi line on UEFI systems:
rd.break enforcing=0
Adding the enforcing=0 option enables omitting the time consuming SELinux relabeling
process.
The initramfs will stop before passing control to the Linux kernel, enabling you to work with
the root file system.
Note that the initramfs prompt will appear on the last console specified on the Linux line.
4. Press Ctrl+x to boot the system with the changed parameters.
With an encrypted file system, a password is required at this point. However the password
prompt might not appear as it is obscured by logging messages. You can press the Backspace
key to see the prompt. Release the key and enter the password for the encrypted file system,
while ignoring the logging messages.
The initramfs switch_root prompt appears.
516
CHAPTER 25. WORKING WITH GRUB 2
5. The file system is mounted read-only on /sysroot/. You will not be allowed to change the
password if the file system is not writable.
Remount the file system as writable:
switch_root:/# mount -o remount,rw /sysroot
6. The file system is remounted with write enabled.
Change the file system's root as follows:
switch_root:/# chroot /sysroot
The prompt changes to sh-4.2#.
7. Enter the passwd command and follow the instructions displayed on the command line to
change the root password.
Note that if the system is not writable, the passwd tool fails with the following error:
Authentication token manipulation error
8. Updating the password file results in a file with the incorrect SELinux security context. To
relabel all files on next system boot, enter the following command:
sh-4.2# touch /.autorelabel
Alternatively, to save the time it takes to relabel a large disk, you can omit this step provided
you included the enforcing=0 option in step 3.
9. Remount the file system as read only:
sh-4.2# mount -o remount,ro /
10. Enter the exit command to exit the chroot environment.
11. Enter the exit command again to resume the initialization and finish the system boot.
With an encrypted file system, a pass word or phrase is required at this point. However the
password prompt might not appear as it is obscured by logging messages. You can press and
hold the Backspace key to see the prompt. Release the key and enter the password for the
encrypted file system, while ignoring the logging messages.
NOTE
Note that the SELinux relabeling process can take a long time. A system reboot
will occur automatically when the process is complete.
12. If you added the enforcing=0 option in step 3 and omitted the touch /.autorelabel
command in step 8, enter the following command to restore the /etc/shadow file's SELinux
security context:
~]# restorecon /etc/shadow
517
System Administrator's Guide
Enter the following commands to turn SELinux policy enforcement back on and verify that it is
on:
~]# setenforce 1
~]# getenforce
Enforcing
25.11. UNIFIED EXTENSIBLE FIRMWARE INTERFACE (UEFI) SECURE
BOOT
The Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) Secure Boot technology ensures that the system
firmware checks whether the system boot loader is signed with a cryptographic key authorized by a
database of public keys contained in the firmware. With signature verification in the next-stage boot
loader and kernel, it is possible to prevent the execution of kernel space code which has not been
signed by a trusted key.
A chain of trust is established from the firmware to the signed drivers and kernel modules as follows.
The first-stage boot loader, shim.efi, is signed by a UEFI private key and authenticated by a public
key, signed by a certificate authority (CA), stored in the firmware database. The shim.efi contains
the Red Hat public key, “Red Hat Secure Boot (CA key 1) ”, which is used to authenticate both the GRUB
2 boot loader, grubx64.efi, and the Red Hat kernel. The kernel in turn contains public keys to
authenticate drivers and modules.
Secure Boot is the boot path validation component of the Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI)
specification. The specification defines:
a programming interface for cryptographically protected UEFI variables in non-volatile
storage,
how the trusted X.509 root certificates are stored in UEFI variables,
validation of UEFI applications like boot loaders and drivers,
procedures to revoke known-bad certificates and application hashes.
UEFI Secure Boot does not prevent the installation or removal of second-stage boot loaders, nor
require explicit user confirmation of such changes. Signatures are verified during booting, not when the
boot loader is installed or updated. Therefore, UEFI Secure Boot does not stop boot path
manipulations, it helps in the detection of unauthorized changes. A new boot loader or kernel will work
as long as it is signed by a key trusted by the system.
25.11.1. UEFI Secure Boot Support in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 includes support for the UEFI Secure Boot feature, which means that
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 can be installed and run on systems where UEFI Secure Boot is enabled. On
UEFI-based systems with the Secure Boot technology enabled, all drivers that are loaded must be
signed with a trusted key, otherwise the system will not accept them. All drivers provided by Red Hat
are signed by one of Red Hat's private keys and authenticated by the corresponding Red Hat public key
in the kernel.
If you want to load externally built drivers, drivers that are not provided on the Red Hat
Enterprise Linux DVD, you must make sure these drivers are signed as well.
518
CHAPTER 25. WORKING WITH GRUB 2
Information on signing custom drivers is available in Section 27.8, “Signing Kernel Modules for Secure
Boot”.
Restrictions Imposed by UEFI Secure Boot
As UEFI Secure Boot support in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 is designed to ensure that the system only
runs kernel mode code after its signature has been properly authenticated, certain restrictions exist.
GRUB 2 module loading is disabled as there is no infrastructure for signing and verification of GRUB 2
modules, which means allowing them to be loaded would constitute execution of untrusted code inside
the security perimeter that Secure Boot defines. Instead, Red Hat provides a signed GRUB 2 binary that
has all the modules supported on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 already included.
More detailed information is available in the Red Hat Knowledgebase article Restrictions Imposed by
UEFI Secure Boot.
25.12. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
Please see the following resources for more information on the GRUB 2 boot loader:
Installed Documentation
/usr/share/doc/grub2-tools-version-number/ — This directory contains information
about using and configuring GRUB 2. version-number corresponds to the version of the GRUB 2
package installed.
info grub2 — The GRUB 2 info page contains a tutorial, a user reference manual, a
programmer reference manual, and a FAQ document about GRUB 2 and its usage.
grubby(8) — The manual page for the command-line tool for configuring GRUB and GRUB 2.
new-kernel-pkg(8) — The manual page for the tool to script kernel installation.
Installable and External Documentation
/usr/share/doc/kernel-doc-kernel_version/Documentation/serialconsole.txt — This file, which is provided by the kernel-doc package, contains information
on the serial console. Before accessing the kernel documentation, you must run the following
command as root:
~]# yum install kernel-doc
Red Hat Installation Guide — The Installation Guide provides basic information on GRUB 2, for
example, installation, terminology, interfaces, and commands.
519
System Administrator's Guide
CHAPTER 26. MANUALLY UPGRADING THE KERNEL
The Red Hat Enterprise Linux kernel is custom-built by the Red Hat Enterprise Linux kernel team to
ensure its integrity and compatibility with supported hardware. Before Red Hat releases a kernel, it
must first pass a rigorous set of quality assurance tests.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux kernels are packaged in the RPM format so that they are easy to upgrade
and verify using the Yum or PackageKit package managers. PackageKit automatically queries the
Red Hat Content Delivery Network servers and informs you of packages with available updates,
including kernel packages.
This chapter is therefore only useful for users who need to manually update a kernel package using the
rpm command instead of yum.
WARNING
Whenever possible, use either the Yum or PackageKit package manager to install
a new kernel because they always install a new kernel instead of replacing the
current one, which could potentially leave your system unable to boot.
WARNING
Building a custom kernel is not supported by the Red Hat Global Services Support
team, and therefore is not explored in this manual.
For more information on installing kernel packages with yum, see Section 8.1.2, “Updating Packages” .
For information on Red Hat Content Delivery Network, see Chapter 6, Registering the System and
Managing Subscriptions.
26.1. OVERVIEW OF KERNEL PACKAGES
Red Hat Enterprise Linux contains the following kernel packages:
kernel — Contains the kernel for single-core, multi-core, and multi-processor systems.
kernel-debug — Contains a kernel with numerous debugging options enabled for kernel
diagnosis, at the expense of reduced performance.
kernel-devel — Contains the kernel headers and makefiles sufficient to build modules against
the kernel package.
kernel-debug-devel — Contains the development version of the kernel with numerous
debugging options enabled for kernel diagnosis, at the expense of reduced performance.
kernel-doc — Documentation files from the kernel source. Various portions of the Linux kernel
520
CHAPTER 26. MANUALLY UPGRADING THE KERNEL
and the device drivers shipped with it are documented in these files. Installation of this
package provides a reference to the options that can be passed to Linux kernel modules at
load time.
By default, these files are placed in the /usr/share/doc/kernel-doc-kernel_version/
directory.
kernel-headers — Includes the C header files that specify the interface between the Linux
kernel and user-space libraries and programs. The header files define structures and constants
that are needed for building most standard programs.
linux-firmware — Contains all of the firmware files that are required by various devices to
operate.
perf — This package contains the perf tool, which enables performance monitoring of the Linux
kernel.
kernel-abi-whitelists — Contains information pertaining to the Red Hat Enterprise Linux kernel
ABI, including a lists of kernel symbols that are needed by external Linux kernel modules and a
yum plug-in to aid enforcement.
kernel-tools — Contains tools for manipulating the Linux kernel and supporting documentation.
26.2. PREPARING TO UPGRADE
Before upgrading the kernel, it is recommended that you take some precautionary steps.
First, ensure that working boot media exists for the system in case a problem occurs. If the boot loader
is not configured properly to boot the new kernel, you can use this media to boot into Red Hat
Enterprise Linux.
USB media often comes in the form of flash devices sometimes called pen drives, thumb disks, or keys,
or as an externally-connected hard disk device. Almost all media of this type is formatted as a VFAT
file system. You can create bootable USB media on media formatted as ext2, ext3, ext4, or VFAT.
You can transfer a distribution image file or a minimal boot media image file to USB media. Make sure
that sufficient free space is available on the device. Around 4 GB is required for a distribution DVD
image, around 700 MB for a distribution CD image, or around 10 MB for a minimal boot media image.
You must have a copy of the boot.iso file from a Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation DVD, or
installation CD-ROM #1, and you need a USB storage device formatted with the VFAT file system and
around 16 MB of free space. The following procedure will not affect existing files on the USB storage
device unless they have the same path names as the files that you copy onto it. To create USB boot
media, perform the following commands as the root user:
1. Install the syslinux package if it is not installed on your system. To do so, as root, run the yum
install syslinux command.
2. Install the SYSLINUX bootloader on the USB storage device:
~]# syslinux /dev/sdX1
...where sdX is the device name.
3. Create mount points for boot.iso and the USB storage device:
521
System Administrator's Guide
~]# mkdir /mnt/isoboot /mnt/diskboot
4. Mount boot.iso:
~]# mount -o loop boot.iso /mnt/isoboot
5. Mount the USB storage device:
~]# mount /dev/sdX1 /mnt/diskboot
6. Copy the ISOLINUX files from the boot.iso to the USB storage device:
~]# cp /mnt/isoboot/isolinux/* /mnt/diskboot
7. Use the isolinux.cfg file from boot.iso as the syslinux.cfg file for the USB device:
~]# grep -v local /mnt/isoboot/isolinux/isolinux.cfg >
/mnt/diskboot/syslinux.cfg
8. Unmount boot.iso and the USB storage device:
~]# umount /mnt/isoboot /mnt/diskboot
9. You should reboot the machine with the boot media and verify that you are able to boot with it
before continuing.
Alternatively, on systems with a floppy drive, you can create a boot diskette by installing the
mkbootdisk package and running the mkbootdisk command as root. See man mkbootdisk man
page after installing the package for usage information.
To determine which kernel packages are installed, execute the command yum list installed
"kernel-*" at a shell prompt. The output will comprise some or all of the following packages,
depending on the system's architecture, and the version numbers might differ:
~]# yum list installed "kernel-*"
kernel.x86_64
3.10.0-54.0.1.el7
kernel-devel.x86_64
3.10.0-54.0.1.el7
kernel-headers.x86_64
3.10.0-54.0.1.el7
@rhel7/7.0
@rhel7
@rhel7/7.0
From the output, determine which packages need to be downloaded for the kernel upgrade. For a
single processor system, the only required package is the kernel package. See Section 26.1, “Overview
of Kernel Packages” for descriptions of the different packages.
26.3. DOWNLOADING THE UPGRADED KERNEL
There are several ways to determine if an updated kernel is available for the system.
Security Errata — See https://access.redhat.com/site/security/updates/active/ for
information on security errata, including kernel upgrades that fix security issues.
The Red Hat Content Delivery Network — For a system subscribed to the Red Hat Content
Delivery Network, the yum package manager can download the latest kernel and upgrade the
522
CHAPTER 26. MANUALLY UPGRADING THE KERNEL
kernel on the system. The Dracut utility will create an initial RAM disk image if needed, and
configure the boot loader to boot the new kernel. For more information on installing packages
from the Red Hat Content Delivery Network, see Chapter 8, Yum. For more information on
subscribing a system to the Red Hat Content Delivery Network, see Chapter 6, Registering the
System and Managing Subscriptions.
If yum was used to download and install the updated kernel from the Red Hat Network, follow the
instructions in Section 26.5, “Verifying the Initial RAM Disk Image” and Section 26.6, “Verifying the
Boot Loader” only, do not change the kernel to boot by default. Red Hat Network automatically
changes the default kernel to the latest version. To install the kernel manually, continue to
Section 26.4, “Performing the Upgrade”.
26.4. PERFORMING THE UPGRADE
After retrieving all of the necessary packages, it is time to upgrade the existing kernel.
IMPORTANT
It is strongly recommended that you keep the old kernel in case there are problems with
the new kernel.
At a shell prompt, change to the directory that contains the kernel RPM packages. Use -i argument
with the rpm command to keep the old kernel. Do not use the -U option, since it overwrites the
currently installed kernel, which creates boot loader problems. For example:
~]# rpm -ivh kernel-kernel_version.arch.rpm
The next step is to verify that the initial RAM disk image has been created. See Section 26.5, “Verifying
the Initial RAM Disk Image” for details.
26.5. VERIFYING THE INITIAL RAM DISK IMAGE
The job of the initial RAM disk image is to preload the block device modules, such as for IDE, SCSI or
RAID, so that the root file system, on which those modules normally reside, can then be accessed and
mounted. On Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 systems, whenever a new kernel is installed using either the
Yum, PackageKit, or RPM package manager, the Dracut utility is always called by the installation
scripts to create an initramfs (initial RAM disk image).
If you make changes to the kernel attributes by modifying the /etc/sysctl.conf file or another
sysctl configuration file, and if the changed settings are used early in the boot process, then
rebuilding the Initial RAM Disk Image by running the dracut -f command might be necessary. An
example is if you have made changes related to networking and are booting from network-attached
storage.
On all architectures other than IBM eServer System i (see the section called “Verifying the Initial RAM
Disk Image and Kernel on IBM eServer System i”), you can create an initramfs by running the
dracut command. However, you usually don't need to create an initramfs manually: this step is
automatically performed if the kernel and its associated packages are installed or upgraded from RPM
packages distributed by Red Hat.
You can verify that an initramfs corresponding to your current kernel version exists and is specified
correctly in the grub.cfg configuration file by following this procedure:
Procedure 26.1. Verifying the Initial RAM Disk Image
523
System Administrator's Guide
Procedure 26.1. Verifying the Initial RAM Disk Image
1. As root, list the contents in the /boot directory and find the kernel
(vmlinuz-kernel_version) and initramfs-kernel_version with the latest (most
recent) version number:
Example 26.1. Ensuring that the kernel and initramfs versions match
~]# ls /boot
config-3.10.0-67.el7.x86_64
config-3.10.0-78.el7.x86_64
efi
grub
grub2
initramfs-0-rescue-07f43f20a54c4ce8ada8b70d33fd001c.img
initramfs-3.10.0-67.el7.x86_64.img
initramfs-3.10.0-67.el7.x86_64kdump.img
initramfs-3.10.0-78.el7.x86_64.img
initramfs-3.10.0-78.el7.x86_64kdump.img
initrd-plymouth.img
symvers-3.10.0-67.el7.x86_64.gz
symvers-3.10.0-78.el7.x86_64.gz
System.map-3.10.0-67.el7.x86_64
System.map-3.10.0-78.el7.x86_64
vmlinuz-0-rescue-07f43f20a54c4ce8ada8b70d33fd001c
vmlinuz-3.10.0-67.el7.x86_64
vmlinuz-3.10.0-78.el7.x86_64
Example 26.1, “Ensuring that the kernel and initramfs versions match” shows that:
we have three kernels installed (or, more correctly, three kernel files are present in the
/boot directory),
the latest kernel is vmlinuz-3.10.0-78.el7.x86_64, and
an initramfs file matching our kernel version, initramfs-3.10.078.el7.x86_64kdump.img, also exists.
IMPORTANT
In the /boot directory you might find several
initramfs-kernel_versionkdump.img files. These are special files created
by the Kdump mechanism for kernel debugging purposes, are not used to boot
the system, and can safely be ignored. For more information on kdump, see the
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Kernel Crash Dump Guide .
2. If your initramfs-kernel_version file does not match the version of the latest kernel in
the /boot directory, or, in certain other situations, you might need to generate an initramfs
file with the Dracut utility. Simply invoking dracut as root without options causes it to
generate an initramfs file in /boot for the latest kernel present in that directory:
~]# dracut
524
CHAPTER 26. MANUALLY UPGRADING THE KERNEL
You must use the -f, --force option if you want dracut to overwrite an existing
initramfs (for example, if your initramfs has become corrupt). Otherwise dracut will
refuse to overwrite the existing initramfs file:
~]# dracut
Will not override existing initramfs (/boot/initramfs-3.10.078.el7.x86_64.img) without --force
You can create an initramfs in the current directory by calling dracut
initramfs_name kernel_version:
~]# dracut "initramfs-$(uname -r).img" $(uname -r)
If you need to specify specific kernel modules to be preloaded, add the names of those
modules (minus any file name suffixes such as .ko) inside the parentheses of the
add_dracutmodules+="module [more_modules]" directive of the /etc/dracut.conf
configuration file. You can list the file contents of an initramfs image file created by dracut
by using the lsinitrd initramfs_file command:
~]# lsinitrd /boot/initramfs-3.10.0-78.el7.x86_64.img
Image: /boot/initramfs-3.10.0-78.el7.x86_64.img: 11M
====================================================================
====
dracut-033-68.el7
====================================================================
====
drwxr-xr-x 12 root
root
drwxr-xr-x
2 root
root
lrwxrwxrwx
1 root
root
/usr/lib/systemd/systemd
drwxr-xr-x 10 root
root
drwxr-xr-x
2 root
root
usr/lib/modprobe.d
[output truncated]
0 Feb
0 Feb
24 Feb
0 Feb
0 Feb
5 06:35 .
5 06:35 proc
5 06:35 init ->
5 06:35 etc
5 06:35
See man dracut and man dracut.conf for more information on options and usage.
3. Examine the /boot/grub2/grub.cfg configuration file to ensure that an
initramfs-kernel_version.img file exists for the kernel version you are booting. For
example:
~]# grep initramfs /boot/grub2/grub.cfg
initrd16 /initramfs-3.10.0-123.el7.x86_64.img
initrd16 /initramfs-0-rescue-6d547dbfd01c46f6a4c1baa8c4743f57.img
See Section 26.6, “Verifying the Boot Loader” for more information.
Verifying the Initial RAM Disk Image and Kernel on IBM eServer System i
On IBM eServer System i machines, the initial RAM disk and kernel files are combined into a single file,
which is created with the addRamDisk command. This step is performed automatically if the kernel
and its associated packages are installed or upgraded from the RPM packages distributed by Red Hat;
thus, it does not need to be executed manually. To verify that it was created, run the following
command as root to make sure the /boot/vmlinitrd-kernel_version file already exists:
525
System Administrator's Guide
ls -l /boot/
The kernel_version should match the version of the kernel just installed.
Reversing the Changes Made to the Initial RAM Disk Image
In some cases, for example, if you misconfigure the system and it no longer boots, you may need to
reverse the changes made to the Initial RAM Disk Image by following this procedure:
Procedure 26.2. Reversing Changes Made to the Initial RAM Disk Image
1. Reboot the system choosing the rescue kernel in the GRUB menu.
2. Change the incorrect setting that caused the initramfs to malfunction.
3. Recreate the initramfs with the correct settings by running the following command as root:
~]# dracut --kver kernel_version --force
The above procedure might be useful if, for example, you incorrectly set the vm.nr_hugepages in the
sysctl.conf file. Because the sysctl.conf file is included in initramfs, the new
vm.nr_hugepages setting gets applied in initramfs and causes rebuilding of the initramfs.
However, because the setting is incorrect, the new initramfs is broken and the newly built kernel
does not boot, which necessitates correcting the setting using the above procedure.
Listing the Contents of the Initial RAM Disk Image
To list the files that are included in the initramfs, run the following command as root:
~]# lsinitrd
To only list files in the /etc directory, use the following command:
~]# lsinitrd | grep etc/
To output the contents of a specific file stored in the initramfs for the current kernel, use the -f
option:
~]# lsinitrd -f filename
For example, to output the contents of sysctl.conf, use the following command:
~]# lsinitrd -f /etc/sysctl.conf
To specify a kernel version, use the --kver option:
~]# lsinitrd --kver kernel_version -f /etc/sysctl.conf
For example, to list the information about kernel version 3.10.0-327.10.1.el7.x86_64, use the following
command:
~]# lsinitrd --kver 3.10.0-327.10.1.el7.x86_64 -f /etc/sysctl.conf
526
CHAPTER 26. MANUALLY UPGRADING THE KERNEL
26.6. VERIFYING THE BOOT LOADER
When you install a kernel using rpm, the kernel package creates an entry in the boot loader
configuration file for that new kernel. However, rpm does not configure the new kernel to boot as the
default kernel. You must do this manually when installing a new kernel with rpm.
It is always recommended to double-check the boot loader configuration file after installing a new
kernel with rpm to ensure that the configuration is correct. Otherwise, the system might not be able to
boot into Red Hat Enterprise Linux properly. If this happens, boot the system with the boot media
created earlier and re-configure the boot loader.
527
System Administrator's Guide
CHAPTER 27. WORKING WITH KERNEL MODULES
The Linux kernel is modular, which means it can extend its capabilities through the use of dynamicallyloaded kernel modules. A kernel module can provide:
a device driver which adds support for new hardware; or,
support for a file system such as btrfs or NFS.
Like the kernel itself, modules can take parameters that customize their behavior, though the default
parameters work well in most cases. User-space tools can list the modules currently loaded into a
running kernel; query all available modules for available parameters and module-specific information;
and load or unload (remove) modules dynamically into or from a running kernel. Many of these utilities,
which are provided by the kmod package, take module dependencies into account when performing
operations so that manual dependency-tracking is rarely necessary.
On modern systems, kernel modules are automatically loaded by various mechanisms when the
conditions call for it. However, there are occasions when it is necessary to load or unload modules
manually, such as when one module is preferred over another although either could provide basic
functionality, or when a module is misbehaving.
This chapter explains how to:
use the user-space kmod utilities to display, query, load and unload kernel modules and their
dependencies;
set module parameters both dynamically on the command line and permanently so that you
can customize the behavior of your kernel modules; and,
load modules at boot time.
NOTE
In order to use the kernel module utilities described in this chapter, first ensure the
kmod package is installed on your system by running, as root:
~]# yum install kmod
For more information on installing packages with Yum, see Section 8.2.4, “Installing
Packages”.
27.1. LISTING CURRENTLY-LOADED MODULES
You can list all kernel modules that are currently loaded into the kernel by running the lsmod
command, for example:
~]$ lsmod
Module
tcp_lp
bnep
bluetooth
rfkill
fuse
ip6t_rpfilter
ip6t_REJECT
528
Size
12663
19704
372662
26536
87661
12546
12939
Used by
0
2
7 bnep
3 bluetooth
3
1
2
CHAPTER 27. WORKING WITH KERNEL MODULES
ipt_REJECT
12541 2
xt_conntrack
12760 7
ebtable_nat
12807 0
ebtable_broute
12731 0
bridge
110196 1 ebtable_broute
stp
12976 1 bridge
llc
14552 2 stp,bridge
ebtable_filter
12827 0
ebtables
30913 3 ebtable_broute,ebtable_nat,ebtable_filter
ip6table_nat
13015 1
nf_conntrack_ipv6
18738 5
nf_defrag_ipv6
34651 1 nf_conntrack_ipv6
nf_nat_ipv6
13279 1 ip6table_nat
ip6table_mangle
12700 1
ip6table_security
12710 1
ip6table_raw
12683 1
ip6table_filter
12815 1
ip6_tables
27025 5
ip6table_filter,ip6table_mangle,ip6table_security,ip6table_nat,ip6table_ra
w
iptable_nat
13011 1
nf_conntrack_ipv4
14862 4
nf_defrag_ipv4
12729 1 nf_conntrack_ipv4
nf_nat_ipv4
13263 1 iptable_nat
nf_nat
21798 4
nf_nat_ipv4,nf_nat_ipv6,ip6table_nat,iptable_nat
[output truncated]
Each row of lsmod output specifies:
the name of a kernel module currently loaded in memory;
the amount of memory it uses; and,
the sum total of processes that are using the module and other modules which depend on it,
followed by a list of the names of those modules, if there are any. Using this list, you can first
unload all the modules depending the module you want to unload. For more information, see
Section 27.4, “Unloading a Module” .
Finally, note that lsmod output is less verbose and considerably easier to read than the content of the
/proc/modules pseudo-file.
27.2. DISPLAYING INFORMATION ABOUT A MODULE
You can display detailed information about a kernel module using the modinfo module_name
command.
NOTE
When entering the name of a kernel module as an argument to one of the kmod utilities,
do not append a .ko extension to the end of the name. Kernel module names do not
have extensions; their corresponding files do.
Example 27.1. Listing information about a kernel module with lsmod
529
System Administrator's Guide
To display information about the e1000e module, which is the Intel PRO/1000 network driver,
enter the following command as root:
~]# modinfo e1000e
filename:
/lib/modules/3.10.0121.el7.x86_64/kernel/drivers/net/ethernet/intel/e1000e/e1000e.ko
version:
2.3.2-k
license:
GPL
description:
Intel(R) PRO/1000 Network Driver
author:
Intel Corporation, <linux.nics@intel.com>
srcversion:
E9F7E754F6F3A1AD906634C
alias:
pci:v00008086d000015A3sv*sd*bc*sc*i*
alias:
pci:v00008086d000015A2sv*sd*bc*sc*i*
[some alias lines omitted]
alias:
pci:v00008086d0000105Esv*sd*bc*sc*i*
depends:
ptp
intree:
Y
vermagic:
3.10.0-121.el7.x86_64 SMP mod_unload modversions
signer:
Red Hat Enterprise Linux kernel signing key
sig_key:
42:49:68:9E:EF:C7:7E:95:88:0B:13:DF:E4:67:EB:1B:7A:91:D1:08
sig_hashalgo:
sha256
parm:
debug:Debug level (0=none,...,16=all) (int)
parm:
copybreak:Maximum size of packet that is copied to a
new buffer on receive (uint)
parm:
TxIntDelay:Transmit Interrupt Delay (array of int)
parm:
TxAbsIntDelay:Transmit Absolute Interrupt Delay (array
of int)
parm:
RxIntDelay:Receive Interrupt Delay (array of int)
parm:
RxAbsIntDelay:Receive Absolute Interrupt Delay (array
of int)
parm:
InterruptThrottleRate:Interrupt Throttling Rate (array
of int)
parm:
IntMode:Interrupt Mode (array of int)
parm:
SmartPowerDownEnable:Enable PHY smart power down (array
of int)
parm:
KumeranLockLoss:Enable Kumeran lock loss workaround
(array of int)
parm:
WriteProtectNVM:Write-protect NVM [WARNING: disabling
this can lead to corrupted NVM] (array of int)
parm:
CrcStripping:Enable CRC Stripping, disable if your BMC
needs the CRC (array of int)
Here are descriptions of a few of the fields in modinfo output:
filename
The absolute path to the .ko kernel object file. You can use modinfo -n as a shortcut command
for printing only the filename field.
description
A short description of the module. You can use modinfo -d as a shortcut command for printing
only the description field.
530
CHAPTER 27. WORKING WITH KERNEL MODULES
alias
The alias field appears as many times as there are aliases for a module, or is omitted entirely if
there are none.
depends
This field contains a comma-separated list of all the modules this module depends on.
NOTE
If a module has no dependencies, the depends field may be omitted from the output.
parm
Each parm field presents one module parameter in the form parameter_name:description,
where:
parameter_name is the exact syntax you should use when using it as a module parameter on
the command line, or in an option line in a .conf file in the /etc/modprobe.d/ directory;
and,
description is a brief explanation of what the parameter does, along with an expectation for
the type of value the parameter accepts (such as int, unit or array of int) in parentheses.
Example 27.2. Listing module parameters
You can list all parameters that the module supports by using the -p option. However, because
useful value type information is omitted from modinfo -p output, it is more useful to run:
~]# modinfo e1000e | grep "^parm" | sort
parm:
copybreak:Maximum size of packet that is copied to a
new buffer on receive (uint)
parm:
CrcStripping:Enable CRC Stripping, disable if your
BMC needs the CRC (array of int)
parm:
debug:Debug level (0=none,...,16=all) (int)
parm:
InterruptThrottleRate:Interrupt Throttling Rate
(array of int)
parm:
IntMode:Interrupt Mode (array of int)
parm:
KumeranLockLoss:Enable Kumeran lock loss workaround
(array of int)
parm:
RxAbsIntDelay:Receive Absolute Interrupt Delay (array
of int)
parm:
RxIntDelay:Receive Interrupt Delay (array of int)
parm:
SmartPowerDownEnable:Enable PHY smart power down
(array of int)
parm:
TxAbsIntDelay:Transmit Absolute Interrupt Delay
(array of int)
parm:
TxIntDelay:Transmit Interrupt Delay (array of int)
parm:
WriteProtectNVM:Write-protect NVM [WARNING: disabling
this can lead to corrupted NVM] (array of int)
531
System Administrator's Guide
27.3. LOADING A MODULE
To load a kernel module, run modprobe module_name as root. For example, to load the wacom
module, run:
~]# modprobe wacom
By default, modprobe attempts to load the module from
/lib/modules/kernel_version/kernel/drivers/. In this directory, each type of module has its
own subdirectory, such as net/ and scsi/, for network and SCSI interface drivers respectively.
Some modules have dependencies, which are other kernel modules that must be loaded before the
module in question can be loaded. The modprobe command always takes dependencies into account
when performing operations. When you ask modprobe to load a specific kernel module, it first
examines the dependencies of that module, if there are any, and loads them if they are not already
loaded into the kernel. modprobe resolves dependencies recursively: it will load all dependencies of
dependencies, and so on, if necessary, thus ensuring that all dependencies are always met.
You can use the -v (or --verbose) option to cause modprobe to display detailed information about
what it is doing, which can include loading module dependencies.
Example 27.3. modprobe -v shows module dependencies as they are loaded
You can load the Fibre Channel over Ethernet module verbosely by typing the following at a
shell prompt:
~]# modprobe -v fcoe
insmod /lib/modules/3.10.0121.el7.x86_64/kernel/drivers/scsi/scsi_tgt.ko
insmod /lib/modules/3.10.0121.el7.x86_64/kernel/drivers/scsi/scsi_transport_fc.ko
insmod /lib/modules/3.10.0121.el7.x86_64/kernel/drivers/scsi/libfc/libfc.ko
insmod /lib/modules/3.10.0121.el7.x86_64/kernel/drivers/scsi/fcoe/libfcoe.ko
insmod /lib/modules/3.10.0121.el7.x86_64/kernel/drivers/scsi/fcoe/fcoe.ko
In this example, you can see that modprobe loaded the scsi_tgt, scsi_transport_fc, libfc
and libfcoe modules as dependencies before finally loading fcoe. Also note that modprobe used
the more primitive insmod command to insert the modules into the running kernel.
IMPORTANT
Although the insmod command can also be used to load kernel modules, it does not
resolve dependencies. Because of this, you should always load modules using modprobe
instead.
27.4. UNLOADING A MODULE
You can unload a kernel module by running modprobe -r module_name as root. For example,
assuming that the wacom module is already loaded into the kernel, you can unload it by running:
532
CHAPTER 27. WORKING WITH KERNEL MODULES
~]# modprobe -r wacom
However, this command will fail if a process is using:
the wacom module;
a module that wacom directly depends on, or;
any module that wacom, through the dependency tree, depends on indirectly.
See Section 27.1, “Listing Currently-Loaded Modules” for more information about using lsmod to
obtain the names of the modules which are preventing you from unloading a certain module.
Example 27.4. Unloading a kernel module
For example, if you want to unload the firewire_ohci module, your terminal session might look
similar to this:
~]# modinfo -F depends firewire_ohci
firewire-core
~]# modinfo -F depends firewire_core
crc-itu-t
~]# modinfo -F depends crc-itu-t
You have figured out the dependency tree (which does not branch in this example) for the loaded
Firewire modules: firewire_ohci depends on firewire_core, which itself depends on crcitu-t.
You can unload firewire_ohci using the modprobe -v -r module_name command, where r is short for --remove and -v for --verbose:
~]# modprobe -r -v firewire_ohci
rmmod firewire_ohci
rmmod firewire_core
rmmod crc_itu_t
The output shows that modules are unloaded in the reverse order that they are loaded, given that
no processes depend on any of the modules being unloaded.
IMPORTANT
Although the rmmod command can be used to unload kernel modules, it is recommended
to use modprobe -r instead.
27.5. SETTING MODULE PARAMETERS
Like the kernel itself, modules can also take parameters that change their behavior. Most of the time,
the default ones work well, but occasionally it is necessary or desirable to set custom parameters for a
module. Because parameters cannot be dynamically set for a module that is already loaded into a
running kernel, there are two different methods for setting them.
533
System Administrator's Guide
1. You can unload all dependencies of the module you want to set parameters for, unload the
module using modprobe -r, and then load it with modprobe along with a list of customized
parameters. This method is often used when the module does not have many dependencies, or
to test different combinations of parameters without making them persistent, and is the
method covered in this section.
2. Alternatively, you can list the new parameters in an existing or newly created file in the
/etc/modprobe.d/ directory. This method makes the module parameters persistent by
ensuring that they are set each time the module is loaded, such as after every reboot or
modprobe command. This method is covered in Section 27.6, “Persistent Module Loading”,
though the following information is a prerequisite.
Example 27.5. Supplying optional parameters when loading a kernel module
You can use modprobe to load a kernel module with custom parameters using the following
command line format:
~]# modprobe module_name [parameter=value]
When loading a module with custom parameters on the command line, be aware of the following:
You can enter multiple parameters and values by separating them with spaces.
Some module parameters expect a list of comma-separated values as their argument. When
entering the list of values, do not insert a space after each comma, or modprobe will
incorrectly interpret the values following spaces as additional parameters.
The modprobe command silently succeeds with an exit status of 0 if:
it successfully loads the module, or
the module is already loaded into the kernel.
Thus, you must ensure that the module is not already loaded before attempting to load it with
custom parameters. The modprobe command does not automatically reload the module, or
alert you that it is already loaded.
Here are the recommended steps for setting custom parameters and then loading a kernel module.
This procedure illustrates the steps using the e1000e module, which is the network driver for Intel
PRO/1000 network adapters, as an example:
Procedure 27.1. Loading a Kernel Module with Custom Parameters
1. First, ensure the module is not already loaded into the kernel:
~]# lsmod |grep e1000e
~]#
Output would indicate that the module is already loaded into the kernel, in which case you
must first unload it before proceeding. See Section 27.4, “Unloading a Module” for instructions
on safely unloading it.
2. Load the module and list all custom parameters after the module name. For example, if you
wanted to load the Intel PRO/1000 network driver with the interrupt throttle rate set to 3000
534
CHAPTER 27. WORKING WITH KERNEL MODULES
interrupts per second for the first, second, and third instances of the driver, and turn on debug,
you would run, as root:
~]# modprobe e1000e InterruptThrottleRate=3000,3000,3000 debug=1
This example illustrates passing multiple values to a single parameter by separating them with
commas and omitting any spaces between them.
27.6. PERSISTENT MODULE LOADING
As shown in Example 27.1, “Listing information about a kernel module with lsmod” , many kernel
modules are loaded automatically at boot time. You can specify additional modules to be loaded by the
systemd-modules-load.service daemon by creating a program.conf file in the
/etc/modules-load.d/ directory, where program is any descriptive name of your choice. The files in
/etc/modules-load.d/ are text files that list the modules to be loaded, one per line.
Example 27.6. A Text File to Load a Module
To create a file to load the virtio-net.ko module, create a file /etc/modulesload.d/virtio-net.conf with the following content:
# Load virtio-net.ko at boot
virtio-net
See the modules-load.d(5) and systemd-modules-load.service(8) man pages for more
information.
27.7. INSTALLING MODULES FROM A DRIVER UPDATE DISK
Driver modules for hardware can be provided in the form of a driver update disk (DUD). The driver
update disk, or an ISO image, is normally used at installation time to load and install any modules
required for the hardware in use, and this process is described in the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7
Installation Guide. However, if new driver modules are required after installation, use the following
procedure. If you already have RPM files, go directly to step 5.
Procedure 27.2. Installing New Modules from a Driver Update Disk
Follow this post-installation procedure to install new driver modules from a driver update disk (DUD).
1. Install the driver update disk.
2. Create a mount point and mount the DUD. For example, as root:
~]# mkdir /run/OEMDRV
~]# mount -r -t iso9660 /dev/sr0 /run/OEMDRV
3. View the contents of the DUD. For example:
~]# ls /run/OEMDRV/
rhdd3 rpms src
535
System Administrator's Guide
4. Change into the directory relevant to the architecture of your system, contained within the
rpms/ directory, and list the contents. For example:
~]# cd /run/OEMDRV/rpms/x86_64/
~]# ls
kmod-bnx2x-1.710.51-3.el7_0.x86_64.rpm
1.710.51-3.el7_0.x86_64.rpm repodata
kmod-bnx2x-firmware-
In the above output the package version is 1.710.51 and the release is 3.el7_0.
5. Install the RPM files simultaneously. For example:
~]# yum install kmod-bnx2x-1.710.51-3.el7_0.x86_64.rpm kmod-bnx2xfirmware-1.710.51-3.el7_0.x86_64.rpm
Loaded plugins: product-id, subscription-manager
This system is not registered to Red Hat Subscription Management.
You can use subscription-manager to register.
Examining kmod-bnx2x-1.710.51-3.el7_0.x86_64.rpm: kmod-bnx2x1.710.51-3.el7_0.x86_64
Marking kmod-bnx2x-1.710.51-3.el7_0.x86_64.rpm to be installed
Examining kmod-bnx2x-firmware-1.710.51-3.el7_0.x86_64.rpm: kmodbnx2x-firmware-1.710.51-3.el7_0.x86_64
Marking kmod-bnx2x-firmware-1.710.51-3.el7_0.x86_64.rpm to be
installed
Resolving Dependencies
--> Running transaction check
---> Package kmod-bnx2x.x86_64 0:1.710.51-3.el7_0 will be installed
---> Package kmod-bnx2x-firmware.x86_64 0:1.710.51-3.el7_0 will be
installed
--> Finished Dependency Resolution
Dependencies Resolved
====================================================================
===========
Package
Arch
Version
Repository
====================================================================
===========
Installing:
kmod-bnx2x
x86_64 1.710.51-3.el7_0 /kmod-bnx2x1.710.51-3.el7_0.x8
kmod-bnx2x-firmware x86_64 1.710.51-3.el7_0 /kmod-bnx2xfirmware-1.710.51-3
Transaction Summary
====================================================================
===========
Install 2 Packages
Total size: 1.6 M
Installed size: 1.6 M
Is this ok [y/d/N]:
6. Enter the following command to make depmod probe all modules and update the list of
dependencies:
536
CHAPTER 27. WORKING WITH KERNEL MODULES
~]# depmod -a
7. Make a backup copy of the initial RAM file system, by entering the following command:
~]# cp /boot/initramfs-$(uname -r).img /boot/initramfs-$(uname r).img.$(date +%m-%d-%H%M%S).bak
8. Rebuild the initial RAM file system:
~]# dracut -f -v
9. To list the file contents of an initial RAM file system image created by dracut, enter a command
as follows:
~]# lsinitrd /boot/initramfs-3.10.0-229.el7.x86_64.img
The output is very long, pipe the output through less or grep to find the module you are
updating. For example:
~# lsinitrd /boot/initramfs-3.10.0-229.el7.x86_64.img | grep bnx
drwxr-xr-x 2 root root
0 Jun 9 11:25 usr/lib/firmware/bnx2x
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root
164392 Nov 25 2014
usr/lib/firmware/bnx2x/bnx2x-e1-7.10.51.0.fw
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root
173016 Nov 25 2014
usr/lib/firmware/bnx2x/bnx2x-e1h-7.10.51.0.fw
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root
321456 Nov 25 2014
usr/lib/firmware/bnx2x/bnx2x-e2-7.10.51.0.fw
drwxr-xr-x 2 root root
0 Jun 9 11:25
usr/lib/modules/3.10.0229.el7.x86_64/kernel/drivers/net/ethernet/broadcom/bnx2x
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 1034553 Jan 29 19:11
usr/lib/modules/3.10.0229.el7.x86_64/kernel/drivers/net/ethernet/broadcom/bnx2x/bnx2x.ko
10. Reboot the system for the changes to take effect.
If required, to view the current in-kernel driver, use the modinfo driver_name command as follows:
~]# modinfo bnx2x
filename:
/lib/modules/3.10.0229.el7.x86_64/kernel/drivers/net/ethernet/broadcom/bnx2x/bnx2x.ko
firmware:
bnx2x/bnx2x-e2-7.10.51.0.fw
firmware:
bnx2x/bnx2x-e1h-7.10.51.0.fw
firmware:
bnx2x/bnx2x-e1-7.10.51.0.fw
version:
1.710.51-0
license:
GPL
description:
Broadcom NetXtreme II
BCM57710/57711/57711E/57712/57712_MF/57800/57800_MF/57810/57810_MF/57840/5
7840_MF Driver
author:
Eliezer Tamir
rhelversion:
7.1
27.8. SIGNING KERNEL MODULES FOR SECURE BOOT
537
System Administrator's Guide
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 includes support for the UEFI Secure Boot feature, which means that
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 can be installed and run on systems where UEFI Secure Boot is enabled.
Note that Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 does not require the use of Secure Boot on UEFI systems.
When Secure Boot is enabled, the EFI operating system boot loaders, the Red Hat Enterprise Linux
kernel, and all kernel modules must be signed with a private key and authenticated with the
corresponding public key. The Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 distribution includes signed boot loaders,
signed kernels, and signed kernel modules. In addition, the signed first-stage boot loader and the
signed kernel include embedded Red Hat public keys. These signed executable binaries and embedded
keys enable Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 to install, boot, and run with the Microsoft UEFI Secure Boot
CA keys that are provided by the UEFI firmware on systems that support UEFI Secure Boot. Note that
not all UEFI-based systems include support for Secure Boot.
The information provided in the following sections describes steps necessary to enable you to self-sign
privately built kernel modules for use with Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 on UEFI-based systems where
Secure Boot is enabled. These sections also provide an overview of available options for getting your
public key onto the target system where you want to deploy your kernel module.
27.8.1. Prerequisites
In order to enable signing of externally built modules, the tools listed in the following table are
required to be installed on the system.
Table 27.1. Required Tools
Tool
Provided by Package
Used on
Purpose
openssl
openssl
Build system
Generates public and
private X.509 key pair
sign-file
kernel-devel
Build system
Perl script used to sign
kernel modules
perl
perl
Build system
Perl interpreter used to
run the signing script
mokutil
mokutil
Target system
Optional tool used to
manually enroll the
public key
keyctl
keyutils
Target system
Optional tool used to
display public keys in
the system key ring
NOTE
Note that the build system, where you build and sign your kernel module, does not need
to have UEFI Secure Boot enabled and does not even need to be a UEFI-based system.
538
CHAPTER 27. WORKING WITH KERNEL MODULES
NOTE
Note that perl is a prerequisity only for kernel versions up to 4.3. After kernel 4.3, signfile is no longer a Perl script.
27.8.2. Kernel Module Authentication
In Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7, when a kernel module is loaded, the module's signature is checked using
the public X.509 keys on the kernel's system key ring, excluding those keys that are on the kernel's
system black-list key ring.
27.8.2.1. Sources For Public Keys Used To Authenticate Kernel Modules
During boot, the kernel loads X.509 keys into the system key ring or the system black-list key ring
from a set of persistent key stores as shown in Table 27.2, “Sources For System Key Rings”
Table 27.2. Sources For System Key Rings
Source of X.509 Keys
User Ability to Add
Keys
UEFI Secure Boot State
Keys Loaded During
Boot
Embedded in kernel
No
-
.system_keyring
UEFI Secure Boot "db"
Limited
Not enabled
No
Enabled
.system_keyring
Not enabled
No
Enabled
.system_keyring
Not enabled
No
Enabled
.system_keyring
Not enabled
No
Enabled
.system_keyring
UEFI Secure Boot "dbx"
Embedded in
shim.efi boot loader
Machine Owner Key
(MOK) list
Limited
No
Yes
Note that if the system is not UEFI-based or if UEFI Secure Boot is not enabled, then only the keys that
are embedded in the kernel are loaded onto the system key ring and you have no ability to augment
that set of keys without rebuilding the kernel. The system black list key ring is a list of X.509 keys
which have been revoked. If your module is signed by a key on the black list then it will fail
authentication even if your public key is in the system key ring.
You can display information about the keys on the system key rings using the keyctl utility. The
following is abbreviated example output from a Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 system where UEFI Secure
Boot is not enabled.
~]# keyctl list %:.system_keyring
3 keys in keyring:
539
System Administrator's Guide
...asymmetric: Red Hat Enterprise Linux Driver Update Program (key 3):
bf57f3e87...
...asymmetric: Red Hat Enterprise Linux kernel signing key:
4249689eefc77e95880b...
...asymmetric: Red Hat Enterprise Linux kpatch signing key:
4d38fd864ebe18c5f0b7...
The following is abbreviated example output from a Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 system where UEFI
Secure Boot is enabled.
~]# keyctl list %:.system_keyring
6 keys in keyring:
...asymmetric: Red Hat Enterprise Linux Driver Update Program (key 3):
bf57f3e87...
...asymmetric: Red Hat Secure Boot (CA key 1):
4016841644ce3a810408050766e8f8a29...
...asymmetric: Microsoft Corporation UEFI CA 2011:
13adbf4309bd82709c8cd54f316ed...
...asymmetric: Microsoft Windows Production PCA 2011:
a92902398e16c49778cd90f99e...
...asymmetric: Red Hat Enterprise Linux kernel signing key:
4249689eefc77e95880b...
...asymmetric: Red Hat Enterprise Linux kpatch signing key:
4d38fd864ebe18c5f0b7...
The above output shows the addition of two keys from the UEFI Secure Boot "db" keys plus the
Red Hat Secure Boot (CA key 1) which is embedded in the shim.efi boot loader. You can also
look for the kernel console messages that identify the keys with an UEFI Secure Boot related source,
that is UEFI Secure Boot db, embedded shim, and MOK list.
~]# dmesg | grep 'EFI:
[5.160660] EFI: Loaded
a9290239...
[5.160674] EFI: Loaded
13adbf4309b...
[5.165794] EFI: Loaded
4016841644ce3a8...
Loaded cert'
cert 'Microsoft Windows Production PCA 2011:
cert 'Microsoft Corporation UEFI CA 2011:
cert 'Red Hat Secure Boot (CA key 1):
27.8.2.2. Kernel Module Authentication Requirements
If UEFI Secure Boot is enabled or if the module.sig_enforce kernel parameter has been specified,
then only signed kernel modules that are authenticated using a key on the system key ring can be
successfully loaded, provided that the public key is not on the system black list key ring. If UEFI Secure
Boot is disabled and if the module.sig_enforce kernel parameter has not been specified, then
unsigned kernel modules and signed kernel modules without a public key can be successfully loaded.
This is summarized in Table 27.3, “Kernel Module Authentication Requirements for Loading” .
Table 27.3. Kernel Module Authentication Requirements for Loading
540
CHAPTER 27. WORKING WITH KERNEL MODULES
Module
Signed
Public Key
Found and
Signature
Valid
UEFI Secure
Boot State
module.sig_en
force
Module Load
Kernel
Tainted
Unsigned
-
Not enabled
Not enabled
Succeeds
Yes
Not enabled
Enabled
Fails
Enabled
-
Fails
-
Not enabled
Not enabled
Succeeds
Yes
Not enabled
Enabled
Fails
-
Enabled
-
Fails
-
Not enabled
Not enabled
Succeeds
No
Not enabled
Enabled
Succeeds
No
Enabled
-
Succeeds
No
Signed
Signed
No
Yes
Subsequent sections will describe how to generate a public and private X.509 key pair, how to use the
private key to sign a kernel module, and how to enroll the public key into a source for the system key
ring.
27.8.3. Generating a Public and Private X.509 Key Pair
You need to generate a public and private X.509 key pair that will be used to sign a kernel module after
it has been built. The corresponding public key will be used to authenticate the kernel module when it is
loaded.
1. The openssl tool can be used to generate a key pair that satisfies the requirements for kernel
module signing in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7. Some of the parameters for this key generation
request are best specified with a configuration file; follow the example below to create your
own configuration file.
~]# cat << EOF > configuration_file.config
[ req ]
default_bits = 4096
distinguished_name = req_distinguished_name
prompt = no
string_mask = utf8only
x509_extensions = myexts
[ req_distinguished_name ]
O = Organization
CN = Organization signing key
emailAddress = E-mail address
541
System Administrator's Guide
[ myexts ]
basicConstraints=critical,CA:FALSE
keyUsage=digitalSignature
subjectKeyIdentifier=hash
authorityKeyIdentifier=keyid
EOF
2. After you have created the configuration file, you can create an X.509 public and private key
pair. The public key will be written to the public_key.der file and the private key will be
written to the private_key.priv file.
~]# openssl req -x509 -new -nodes -utf8 -sha256 -days 36500 \
-batch -config configuration_file.config -outform DER \
-out public_key.der \
-keyout private_key.priv
3. Enroll your public key on all systems where you want to authenticate and load your kernel
module.
WARNING
Take proper care to guard the contents of your private key. In the wrong hands,
the key could be used to compromise any system which has your public key.
27.8.4. Enrolling Public Key on Target System
When Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 boots on a UEFI-based system with Secure Boot enabled, all keys that
are in the Secure Boot db key database, but not in the dbx database of revoked keys, are loaded onto
the system keyring by the kernel. The system keyring is used to authenticate kernel modules.
27.8.4.1. Factory Firmware Image Including Public Key
To facilitate authentication of your kernel module on your systems, consider requesting your system
vendor to incorporate your public key into the UEFI Secure Boot key database in their factory firmware
image.
27.8.4.2. Executable Key Enrollment Image Adding Public Key
It is possible to add a key to an existing populated and active Secure Boot key database. This can be
done by writing and providing an EFI executable enrollment image. Such an enrollment image contains
a properly formed request to append a key to the Secure Boot key database. This request must include
data that is properly signed by the private key that corresponds to a public key that is already in the
system's Secure Boot Key Exchange Key (KEK) database. Additionally, this EFI image must be signed
by a private key that corresponds to a public key that is already in the key database.
It is also possible to write an enrollment image that runs under Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7. However,
the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 image must be properly signed by a private key that corresponds to a
public key that is already in the KEK database.
542
CHAPTER 27. WORKING WITH KERNEL MODULES
The construction of either type of key enrollment images requires assistance from the platform
vendor.
27.8.4.3. System Administrator Manually Adding Public Key to the MOK List
The Machine Owner Key (MOK) facility is a feature that is supported by Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 and
can be used to augment the UEFI Secure Boot key database. When Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 boots on
a UEFI-enabled system with Secure Boot enabled, the keys on the MOK list are also added to the
system keyring in addition to the keys from the key database. The MOK list keys are also stored
persistently and securely in the same fashion as the Secure Boot key database keys, but these are two
separate facilities. The MOK facility is supported by shim.efi, MokManager.efi, grubx64.efi, and the
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 mokutil utility.
The major capability provided by the MOK facility is the ability to add public keys to the MOK list
without needing to have the key chain back to another key that is already in the KEK database.
However, enrolling a MOK key requires manual interaction by a physically present user at the UEFI
system console on each target system. Nevertheless, the MOK facility provides an excellent method
for testing newly generated key pairs and testing kernel modules signed with them.
Follow these steps to add your public key to the MOK list:
1. Request addition of your public key to the MOK list using a Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 user
space utility:
~]# mokutil --import my_signing_key_pub.der
You will be asked to enter and confirm a password for this MOK enrollment request.
2. Reboot the machine.
3. The pending MOK key enrollment request will be noticed by shim.efi and it will launch
MokManager.efi to allow you to complete the enrollment from the UEFI console. You will
need to enter the password you previously associated with this request and confirm the
enrollment. Your public key is added to the MOK list, which is persistent.
Once a key is on the MOK list, it will be automatically propagated to the system key ring on this and
subsequent boots when UEFI Secure Boot is enabled.
27.8.5. Signing Kernel Module with the Private Key
There are no extra steps required to prepare your kernel module for signing. You build your kernel
module normally. Assuming an appropriate Makefile and corresponding sources, follow these steps to
build your module and sign it:
1. Build your my_module.ko module the standard way:
~]# make -C /usr/src/kernels/$(uname -r) M=$PWD modules
2. Sign your kernel module with your private key. For kernel versions up to kernel 4.3, this is done
with a Perl script. Note that the script requires that you provide both the files that contain your
private and the public key as well as the kernel module file that you want to sign.
~]# perl /usr/src/kernels/$(uname -r)/scripts/sign-file \
sha256 \
my_signing_key.priv\
543
System Administrator's Guide
my_signing_key_pub.der\
my_module.ko
With kernel 4.3 and newer, sign-file is no longer a Perl script. For such kernels use:
~]# /usr/src/kernels/$(uname -r)/scripts/sign-file \
sha256 \
my_signing_key.priv\
my_signing_key_pub.der\
my_module.ko
Note that this command is universal and works for kernel 4.3 and previous versions as well.
Your kernel module is in ELF image format and this script computes and appends the signature
directly to the ELF image in your my_module.ko file. The modinfo utility can be used to display
information about the kernel module's signature, if it is present. For information on using the utility, see
Section 27.2, “Displaying Information About a Module” .
Note that this appended signature is not contained in an ELF image section and is not a formal part of
the ELF image. Therefore, tools such as readelf will not be able to display the signature on your
kernel module.
Your kernel module is now ready for loading. Note that your signed kernel module is also loadable on
systems where UEFI Secure Boot is disabled or on a non-UEFI system. That means you do not need to
provide both a signed and unsigned version of your kernel module.
27.8.6. Loading Signed Kernel Module
Once your public key is enrolled and is in the system keyring, the normal kernel module loading
mechanisms will work transparently. In the following example, you will use mokutil to add your public
key to the MOK list and you will manually load your kernel module with modprobe.
1. Optionally, you can verify that your kernel module will not load before you have enrolled your
public key. First, verify what keys have been added to the system key ring on the current boot
by running the keyctl list %:.system_keyring as root. Since your public key has not
been enrolled yet, it should not be displayed in the output of the command.
2. Request enrollment of your public key.
~]# mokutil --import my_signing_key_pub.der
3. Reboot, and complete the enrollment at the UEFI console.
~]# reboot
4. After the system reboots, verify the keys on the system key ring again.
~]# keyctl list %:.system_keyring
5. You should now be able to load your kernel module successfully.
~]# modprobe -v my_module
insmod /lib/modules/3.10.0-123.el7.x86_64/extra/my_module.ko
544
CHAPTER 27. WORKING WITH KERNEL MODULES
~]# lsmod | grep my_module
my_module 12425 0
27.9. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
For more information on kernel modules and their utilities, see the following resources.
Manual Page Documentation
lsmod(8) — The manual page for the lsmod command.
modinfo(8) — The manual page for the modinfo command.
modprobe(8) — The manual page for the modprobe command.
rmmod(8) — The manual page for the rmmod command.
ethtool(8) — The manual page for the ethtool command.
mii-tool(8) — The manual page for the mii-tool command.
Installable and External Documentation
/usr/share/doc/kernel-doc-kernel_version/Documentation/ — This directory,
which is provided by the kernel-doc package, contains information on the kernel, kernel
modules, and their respective parameters. Before accessing the kernel documentation, you
must run the following command as root:
~]# yum install kernel-doc
Linux Loadable Kernel Module HOWTO — The Linux Loadable Kernel Module HOWTO from the
Linux Documentation Project contains further information on working with kernel modules.
545
System Administrator's Guide
PART VIII. SYSTEM BACKUP AND RECOVERY
This part describes how to use the Relax-and-Recover (ReaR) disaster recovery and system migration
utility.
546
CHAPTER 28. RELAX-AND-RECOVER (REAR)
CHAPTER 28. RELAX-AND-RECOVER (REAR)
When a software or hardware failure breaks the system, the system administrator faces three tasks to
restore it to the fully functioning state on a new hardware environment:
1. booting a rescue system on the new hardware
2. replicating the original storage layout
3. restoring user and system files
Most backup software solves only the third problem. To solve the first and second problems, use Relaxand-Recover (ReaR), a disaster recovery and system migration utility.
Backup software creates backups. ReaR complements backup software by creating a rescue system.
Booting the rescue system on a new hardware allows you to issue the rear recover command, which
starts the recovery process. During this process, ReaR replicates the partition layout and filesystems,
prompts for restoring user and system files from the backup created by backup software, and finally
installs the boot loader. By default, the rescue system created by ReaR only restores the storage
layout and the boot loader, but not the actual user and system files.
This chapter describes how to use ReaR.
28.1. BASIC REAR USAGE
28.1.1. Installing ReaR
Install the rear package and its dependencies by running the following command as root:
~]# yum install rear genisoimage syslinux
28.1.2. Configuring ReaR
ReaR is configured in the /etc/rear/local.conf file. Specify the rescue system configuration by
adding these lines:
OUTPUT=output format
OUTPUT_URL=output location
Substitute output format with rescue system format, for example, ISO for an ISO disk image or USB for
a bootable USB.
Substitute output location with where it will be put, for example, file:///mnt/rescue_system/ for
a local filesystem directory or sftp://backup:password@192.168.0.0/ for an SFTP directory.
Example 28.1. Configuring Rescue System Format and Location
To configure ReaR to output the rescue system as an ISO image into the /mnt/rescue_system/
directory, add these lines to the /etc/rear/local.conf file:
OUTPUT=ISO
OUTPUT_URL=file:///mnt/rescue_system/
547
System Administrator's Guide
See section "Rescue Image Configuration" of the rear(8) man page for a list of all options.
ISO-specific Configuration
Using the configuration in Example 28.1, “Configuring Rescue System Format and Location” results
into two equivalent output files in two locations:
/var/lib/rear/output/ - rear's default output location
/mnt/rescue_system/HOSTNAME/rear-localhost.iso - output location specified in
OUTPUT_URL
However, usually you need only one ISO image. To make ReaR create an ISO image only in the
directory specified by a user, add these lines to /etc/rear/local.conf:
OUTPUT=ISO
BACKUP=NETFS
OUTPUT_URL=null
BACKUP_URL="iso:///backup"
ISO_DIR="output location"
Substitute output location with the desired location for the output.
28.1.3. Creating a Rescue System
The following example shows how to create a rescue system with verbose output:
~]# rear -v mkrescue
Relax-and-Recover 1.17.2 / Git
Using log file: /var/log/rear/rear-rhel7.log
mkdir: created directory '/var/lib/rear/output'
Creating disk layout
Creating root filesystem layout
TIP: To login as root via ssh you need to set up
/root/.ssh/authorized_keys or SSH_ROOT_PASSWORD in your configuration file
Copying files and directories
Copying binaries and libraries
Copying kernel modules
Creating initramfs
Making ISO image
Wrote ISO image: /var/lib/rear/output/rear-rhel7.iso (124M)
Copying resulting files to file location
With the configuration from Example 28.1, “Configuring Rescue System Format and Location” , ReaR
prints the above output. The last two lines confirm that the rescue system has been successfully
created and copied to the configured backup location /mnt/rescue_system/. Because the system's
host name is rhel7, the backup location now contains directory rhel7/ with the rescue system and
auxiliary files:
~]# ls -lh /mnt/rescue_system/rhel7/
total 124M
-rw-------. 1 root root 202 Jun 10 15:27 README
548
CHAPTER 28. RELAX-AND-RECOVER (REAR)
-rw-------. 1 root root 166K Jun 10 15:27 rear.log
-rw-------. 1 root root 124M Jun 10 15:27 rear-rhel7.iso
-rw-------. 1 root root 274 Jun 10 15:27 VERSION
Transfer the rescue system to an external medium to not lose it in case of a disaster.
28.1.4. Scheduling ReaR
To schedule ReaR to regularly create a rescue system using the cron job scheduler, add the following
line to the /etc/crontab file:
minute hour day_of_month month day_of_week root /usr/sbin/rear mkrescue
Substitute the above command with the cron time specification (described in detail in Section 22.1.2,
“Scheduling a Cron Job”).
Example 28.2. Scheduling ReaR
To make ReaR create a rescue system at 22:00 every weekday, add this line to the /etc/crontab
file:
0 22 * * 1-5 root /usr/sbin/rear mkrescue
28.1.5. Performing a System Rescue
To perform a restore or migration:
1. Boot the rescue system on the new hardware. For example, burn the ISO image to a DVD and
boot from the DVD.
2. In the console interface, select the "Recover" option:
Figure 28.1. Rescue system: menu
549
System Administrator's Guide
3. You are taken to the prompt:
Figure 28.2. Rescue system: prompt
WARNING
Once you have started recovery in the next step, it probably cannot be
undone and you may lose anything stored on the physical disks of the
system.
4. Run the rear recover command to perform the restore or migration. The rescue system
then recreates the partition layout and filesystems:
550
CHAPTER 28. RELAX-AND-RECOVER (REAR)
Figure 28.3. Rescue system: running "rear recover"
5. Restore user and system files from the backup into the /mnt/local/ directory.
Example 28.3. Restoring User and System Files
In this example, the backup file is a tar archive created per instructions in Section 28.2.1.1,
“Configuring the Internal Backup Method”. First, copy the archive from its storage, then
unpack the files into /mnt/local/, then delete the archive:
~]# scp root@192.168.122.7:/srv/backup/rhel7/backup.tar.gz
/mnt/local/
~]# tar xf /mnt/local/backup.tar.gz -C /mnt/local/
~]# rm -f /mnt/local/backup.tar.gz
551
System Administrator's Guide
The new storage has to have enough space both for the archive and the extracted files.
6. Verify that the files have been restored:
~]# ls /mnt/local/
Figure 28.4. Rescue system: restoring user and system files from the backup
7. Ensure that SELinux relabels the files on the next boot:
~]# touch /mnt/local/.autorelabel
Otherwise you may be unable to log in the system, because the /etc/passwd file may have
the incorrect SELinux context.
8. Finish the recovery by entering exit. ReaR will then reinstall the boot loader. After that,
reboot the system:
552
CHAPTER 28. RELAX-AND-RECOVER (REAR)
Figure 28.5. Rescue system: finishing recovery
Upon reboot, SELinux will relabel the whole filesystem. Then you will be able to log in to the
recovered system.
28.2. INTEGRATING REAR WITH BACKUP SOFTWARE
The main purpose of ReaR is to produce a rescue system, but it can also be integrated with backup
software. What integration means is different for the built-in, supported, and unsupported backup
methods.
28.2.1. The Built-in Backup Method
ReaR ships with a built-in, or internal, backup method. This method is fully integrated with ReaR, which
has these advantages:
a rescue system and a full-system backup can be created using a single rear mkbackup
command
the rescue system restores files from the backup automatically
As a result, ReaR can cover the whole process of creating both the rescue system and the full-system
backup.
28.2.1.1. Configuring the Internal Backup Method
To make ReaR use its internal backup method, add these lines to /etc/rear/local.conf:
BACKUP=NETFS
BACKUP_URL=backup location
553
System Administrator's Guide
These lines configure ReaR to create an archive with a full-system backup using the tar command.
Substitute backup location with one of the options from the "Backup Software Integration" section of
the rear(8) man page. Make sure that the backup location has enough space.
Example 28.4. Adding tar Backups
To expand the example in Section 28.1, “Basic ReaR Usage” , configure ReaR to also output a tar
full-system backup into the /srv/backup/ directory:
OUTPUT=ISO
OUTPUT_URL=file:///mnt/rescue_system/
BACKUP=NETFS
BACKUP_URL=file:///srv/backup/
The internal backup method allows further configuration.
To keep old backup archives when new ones are created, add this line:
NETFS_KEEP_OLD_BACKUP_COPY=y
By default, ReaR creates a full backup on each run. To make the backups incremental, meaning
that only the changed files are backed up on each run, add this line:
BACKUP_TYPE=incremental
This automatically sets NETFS_KEEP_OLD_BACKUP_COPY to y.
To ensure that a full backup is done regularly in addition to incremental backups, add this line:
FULLBACKUPDAY="Day"
Substitute "Day" with one of the "Mon", "Tue", "Wed", "Thu". "Fri", "Sat", "Sun".
ReaR can also include both the rescue system and the backup in the ISO image. To achieve
this, set the BACKUP_URL directive to iso:///backup/:
BACKUP_URL=iso:///backup/
This is the simplest method of full-system backup, because the rescue system does not need
the user to fetch the backup during recovery. However, it needs more storage. Also, single-ISO
backups cannot be incremental.
Example 28.5. Configuring Single-ISO Rescue System and Backups
This configuration creates a rescue system and a backup file as a single ISO image and puts
it into the /srv/backup/ directory:
OUTPUT=ISO
OUTPUT_URL=file:///srv/backup/
BACKUP=NETFS
BACKUP_URL=iso:///backup/
554
CHAPTER 28. RELAX-AND-RECOVER (REAR)
NOTE
The ISO image might be large in this scenario. Therefore, Red Hat recommends
creating only one ISO image, not two. For details, see the section called “ISOspecific Configuration”.
To use rsync instead of tar, add this line:
BACKUP_PROG=rsync
Note that incremental backups are only supported when using tar.
28.2.1.2. Creating a Backup Using the Internal Backup Method
With BACKUP=NETFS set, ReaR can create either a rescue system, a backup file, or both.
To create a rescue system only, run:
rear mkrescue
To create a backup only, run:
rear mkbackuponly
To create a rescue system and a backup, run:
rear mkbackup
Note that triggering backup with ReaR is only possible if using the NETFS method. ReaR cannot trigger
other backup methods.
NOTE
When restoring, the rescue system created with the BACKUP=NETFS setting expects the
backup to be present before executing rear recover. Hence, once the rescue system
boots, copy the backup file into the directory specified in BACKUP_URL, unless using a
single ISO image. Only then run rear recover.
To avoid recreating the rescue system unnecessarily, you can check whether storage layout has
changed since the last rescue system was created using these commands:
~]# rear checklayout
~]# echo $?
Non-zero status indicates a change in disk layout. Non-zero status is also returned if ReaR
configuration has changed.
555
System Administrator's Guide
IMPORTANT
The rear checklayout command does not check whether a rescue system is
currently present in the output location, and can return 0 even if it is not there. So it
does not guarantee that a rescue system is available, only that the layout has not
changed since the last rescue system has been created.
Example 28.6. Using rear checklayout
To create a rescue system, but only if the layout has changed, use this command:
~]# rear checklayout || rear mkrescue
28.2.2. Supported Backup Methods
In addition to the NETFS internal backup method, ReaR supports several external backup methods.
This means that the rescue system restores files from the backup automatically, but the backup
creation cannot be triggered using ReaR.
For a list and configuration options of the supported external backup methods, see the "Backup
Software Integration" section of the rear(8) man page.
28.2.3. Unsupported Backup Methods
With unsupported backup methods, there are two options:
1. The rescue system prompts the user to manually restore the files. This scenario is the one
described in "Basic ReaR Usage", except for the backup file format, which may take a different
form than a tar archive.
2. ReaR executes the custom commands provided by the user. To configure this, set the BACKUP
directive to EXTERNAL. Then specify the commands to be run during backing up and
restoration using the EXTERNAL_BACKUP and EXTERNAL_RESTORE directives. Optionally, also
specify the EXTERNAL_IGNORE_ERRORS and EXTERNAL_CHECK directives. See
/usr/share/rear/conf/default.conf for an example configuration.
28.2.4. Creating Multiple Backups
With the version 2.00, ReaR supports creation of multiple backups. Backup methods that support this
feature are:
BACKUP=NETFS (internal method)
BACKUP=BORG (external method)
You can specify individual backups with the -C option of the rear command. The argument is a
basename of the additional backup configuration file in the /etc/rear/ directory. The method,
destination, and the options for each specific backup are defined in the specific configuration file, not
in the main configuration file.
To perform the basic recovery of the system:
Procedure 28.1. Basic recovery of the system
556
CHAPTER 28. RELAX-AND-RECOVER (REAR)
Procedure 28.1. Basic recovery of the system
1. Create the ReaR recovery system ISO image together with a backup of the files of the basic
system:
~]# rear -C basic_system mkbackup
2. Back the files up in the /home directories:
~]# rear -C home_backup mkbackuponly
Note that the specified configuration file should contain the directories needed for a basic recovery of
the system, such as /boot, /root, and /usr.
Procedure 28.2. Recovery of the system in the rear recovery shell
To recover the system in the rear recovery shell, use the following sequence of commands:
1.
~]# rear -C basic_system recover
2.
~]# rear -C home_backup restoreonly
557
System Administrator's Guide
APPENDIX A. RPM
The RPM Package Manager (RPM) is an open packaging system that runs on Red Hat Enterprise Linux
as well as other Linux and UNIX systems. Red Hat and the Fedora Project encourage other vendors to
use RPM for their own products. RPM is distributed under the terms of the GPL (GNU General Public
License).
The RPM Package Manager only works with packages built in the RPM format. RPM itself is provided
as the pre-installed rpm package. For the end user, RPM makes system updates easy. Installing,
uninstalling, and upgrading RPM packages can be accomplished with short commands. RPM maintains
a database of installed packages and their files, so you can invoke powerful queries and verifications
on your system. There are several applications, such as Yum or PackageKit, that can make working
with packages in the RPM format even easier.
WARNING
For most package-management tasks, the Yum package manager offers equal and
often greater capabilities and utility than RPM. Yum also performs and tracks
complicated system-dependency resolutions. Yum maintains the system integrity
and forces a system integrity check if packages are installed or removed using
another application, such as RPM, instead of Yum. For these reasons, it is highly
recommended that you use Yum instead of RPM whenever possible to perform
package-management tasks. See Chapter 8, Yum.
If you prefer a graphical interface, you can use the PackageKit GUI application,
which uses Yum as its back end, to manage your system's packages.
During upgrades, RPM handles configuration files carefully, so that you never lose your customizations
— something that you cannot accomplish with regular .tar.gz files.
For the developer, RPM enables software source code to be packaged into source and binary packages
for end users. This process is quite simple and is driven from a single file and optional patches that you
create. This clear delineation between pristine sources and your patches along with build instructions
eases the maintenance of the package as new versions of the software are released.
NOTE
Because RPM can make changes to the system itself, performing operations like
installing, upgrading, downgrading, and uninstalling binary packages system-wide
requires root privileges in most cases.
A.1. RPM DESIGN GOALS
To understand how to use RPM, it is helpful to understand the design goals of RPM:
Upgradability
With RPM, you can upgrade individual components of your system without a complete
reinstallation. When you get a new release of an operating system based on RPM, such as Red Hat
Enterprise Linux, you do not need to reinstall a fresh copy of the operating system on your machine
558
APPENDIX A. RPM
(as you might need to with operating systems based on other packaging systems). RPM allows for
intelligent, fully-automated, in-place upgrades of your system. In addition, configuration files in
packages are preserved across upgrades, so you do not lose your customizations. There are no
special upgrade files needed to upgrade a package because the same RPM file is used to both
install and upgrade the package on the system.
Powerful Querying
RPM is designed to provide powerful querying options. You can perform searches on your copy of
the database for packages or even just certain files. You can also easily find out what package a file
belongs to and where the package came from. The files an RPM package contains are in a
compressed archive, with a custom binary header containing useful information about the package
and its contents, allowing you to query individual packages quickly and easily.
System Verification
Another powerful RPM feature is the ability to verify packages. It allows you to verify that the files
installed on the system are the same as the ones supplied by a given package. If an inconsistency is
detected, RPM notifies you, and you can reinstall the package if necessary. Any configuration files
that you modified are preserved during reinstallation.
Pristine Sources
A crucial design goal was to allow the use of pristine software sources, as distributed by the original
authors of the software. With RPM, you have the pristine sources along with any patches that were
used, plus complete build instructions. This is an important advantage for several reasons. For
example, if a new version of a program is released, you do not necessarily have to start from scratch
to get it to compile. You can look at the patch to see what you might need to do. All the compiled-in
defaults, and all of the changes that were made to get the software to build properly, are easily
visible using this technique.
The goal of keeping sources pristine may seem important only for developers, but it results in
higher quality software for end users.
A.2. USING RPM
RPM has five basic modes of operation (excluding package building): installing, uninstalling, upgrading,
querying, and verifying. This section contains an overview of each mode. For complete details and
options, try rpm --help or see rpm(8). Also, see Section A.5, “Additional Resources” for more
information on RPM.
A.2.1. Installing and Upgrading Packages
RPM packages typically have file names in the following form:
package_name-version-release-operating_system-CPU_architecture.rpm
For example the tree-1.6.0-10.el7.x86_64.rpm file name includes the package name ( tree),
version (1.6.0), release (10), operating system major version ( el7) and CPU architecture ( x86_64).
559
System Administrator's Guide
IMPORTANT
When installing a package, ensure it is compatible with your operating system and
processor architecture. This can usually be determined by checking the package name.
For example, the file name of an RPM package compiled for the AMD64/Intel 64
computer architectures ends with x86_64.rpm.
The -U (or --upgrade) option has two functions, it can be used to:
upgrade an existing package on the system to a newer version, or
install a package if an older version is not already installed.
The rpm -U package.rpm command is therefore able to either upgrade or install, depending on the
presence of an older version of package.rpm on the system.
Assuming the tree-1.6.0-10.el7.x86_64.rpm package is in the current directory, log in as root
and type the following command at a shell prompt to either upgrade or install the tree package:
~]# rpm -Uvh tree-1.6.0-10.el7.x86_64.rpm
The -v and -h options (which are combined with -U) cause rpm to print a more verbose output and
display a progress meter using hash signs. If the upgrade or installation is successful, the following
output is displayed:
Preparing...
Updating / installing...
1:tree-1.6.0-10.el7
################################# [100%]
################################# [100%]
WARNING
rpm provides two different options for installing packages: the aforementioned -U
option (which historically stands for upgrade), and the -i option (which historically
stands for install). Because the -U option includes both install and upgrade
functions, the use of rpm -Uvh with all packages, except kernel packages, is
recommended.
You should always use the -i option to install a new kernel package instead of
upgrading it. This is because using the -U option to upgrade a kernel package
removes the previous (older) kernel package, which could render the system
unable to boot if there is a problem with the new kernel. Therefore, use the rpm i kernel_package command to install a new kernel without replacing any older
kernel packages. For more information on installing kernel packages, see
Chapter 26, Manually Upgrading the Kernel.
The signature of a package is checked automatically when installing or upgrading a package. The
signature confirms that the package was signed by an authorized party. If the verification of the
signature fails, an error message is displayed.
560
APPENDIX A. RPM
If you do not have the appropriate key installed to verify the signature, the message contains the word
NOKEY:
warning: tree-1.6.0-10.el7.x86_64.rpm: Header V3 RSA/SHA256 Signature, key
ID 431d51: NOKEY
See Section A.3.2, “Checking Package Signatures” for more information on checking package
signatures.
A.2.1.1. Replacing Already Installed Packages
If a package of the same name and version is already installed, the following output is displayed:
Preparing...
###########################################
[100%]
package tree-1.6.0-10.el7.x86_64 is already installed
To install the package anyway, use the --replacepkgs option, which tells RPM to ignore the error:
~]# rpm -Uvh --replacepkgs tree-1.6.0-10.el7.x86_64.rpm
This option is helpful if files installed from the package were deleted or if you want the original
configuration files to be installed.
If you attempt an upgrade to an older version of a package (that is, if a newer version of the package is
already installed), RPM informs you that a newer version is already installed. To force RPM to perform
the downgrade, use the --oldpackage option:
rpm -Uvh --oldpackage older_package.rpm
A.2.1.2. Resolving File Conflicts
If you attempt to install a package that contains a file that has already been installed by another
package, a conflict message is displayed. To make RPM ignore this error, use the --replacefiles
option:
rpm -Uvh --replacefiles package.rpm
A.2.1.3. Satisfying Unresolved Dependencies
RPM packages sometimes depend on other packages, which means that they require other packages
to be installed to run properly. If you try to install a package that has an unresolved dependency, a
message about a failed dependency is displayed.
Find the suggested package(s) on the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation media or on one of the
active Red Hat Enterprise Linux mirrors and add it to the installation command. To determine which
package contains the required file, use the --whatprovides option:
rpm -q --whatprovides "required_file"
If the package that contains required_file is in the RPM database, the name of the package is displayed.
561
System Administrator's Guide
WARNING
Although you can force rpm to install a package that has an unresolved
dependency (using the --nodeps option), this is not recommended and will
usually result in the installed software failing to run. Installing packages with -nodeps can cause applications to misbehave or terminate unexpectedly. It can
also cause serious package-management problems or system failure. For these
reasons, heed the warnings about missing dependencies. The Yum package
manager performs automatic dependency resolution and fetches dependencies
from on-line repositories.
A.2.1.4. Preserving Changes in Configuration Files
Because RPM performs intelligent upgrading of packages with configuration files, you may see the
following message:
saving /etc/configuration_file.conf as
/etc/configuration_file.conf.rpmsave
This message means that the changes you made to the configuration file may not be forwardcompatible with the new configuration file in the package, so RPM saved your original file and installed
a new one. You should investigate the differences between the two configuration files and resolve them
as soon as possible to ensure that your system continues to function properly.
Alternatively, RPM may save the package's new configuration file as, for example,
configuration_file.conf.rpmnew and leave the configuration file you modified untouched. You
should still resolve any conflicts between your modified configuration file and the new one, usually by
merging changes from the old one to the new one, for example using the diff program.
A.2.2. Uninstalling Packages
Uninstalling a package is just as simple as installing one. Type the following command at a shell prompt
as root:
rpm -e package
NOTE
Note that the command expects only the package name, not the name of the original
package file. If you attempt to uninstall a package using the rpm -e command and
provide the original full file name, you receive a package name error.
You can encounter dependency errors when uninstalling a package if another installed package
depends on the one you are trying to remove. For example:
~]# rpm -e ghostscript
error: Failed dependencies:
ghostscript is needed by (installed) ghostscript-cups-9.07-
562
APPENDIX A. RPM
16.el7.x86_64
ghostscript is needed by (installed) foomatic-4.0.9-6.el7.x86_64
libgs.so.9()(64bit) is needed by (installed) libspectre-0.2.74.el7.x86_64
libijs-0.35.so()(64bit) is needed by (installed) gutenprint-5.2.915.el7.x86_64
libijs-0.35.so()(64bit) is needed by (installed) cups-filters1.0.35-15.el7.x86_64
WARNING
Although you can force rpm to uninstall a package that has unresolved
dependencies (using the --nodeps option), this is not recommended. Removing
packages with --nodeps can cause applications from the packages whose
dependencies are removed to misbehave or terminate unexpectedly. It can also
cause serious package-management problems or system failure. For these
reasons, heed the warnings about failed dependencies.
A.2.3. Freshening Packages
Freshening is similar to upgrading, except that only installed packages are upgraded. Type the
following command at a shell prompt as root:
rpm -Fvh package.rpm
The -F (or --freshen) option compares the versions of the packages specified on the command line
with the versions of packages that are already installed on the system. When a newer version of an
already installed package is processed by the --freshen option, it is upgraded to the newer version.
However, the --freshen option does not install a package if no previously installed package of the
same name exists. This differs from regular upgrading, as an upgrade installs all specified packages
regardless of whether or not older versions of the packages are already installed.
Freshening works for single packages or package groups. For example, freshening can help if you
download a large number of different packages, and you only want to upgrade those packages that are
already installed on the system. In this case, issue the following command with the *.rpm global
expression:
~]# rpm -Fvh *.rpm
RPM then automatically upgrades only those packages that are already installed.
A.2.4. Querying Packages
The RPM database stores information about all RPM packages installed on the system. It is stored in
the /var/lib/rpm/ directory and is used for many things, including querying what packages are
installed, what version each package is, and for calculating changes to files in packages since their
installation. To query this database, use the rpm command with the -q (or --query) option:
563
System Administrator's Guide
rpm -q package_name
This command displays the package name, version, and release number of the installed package
package_name. For example:
~]$ rpm -q tree
tree-1.6.0-10.el7.x86_64
See the Package Selection Options subheading in the rpm(8) manual page for a list of options
that can be used to further refine or qualify your query. Use options listed below the Package Query
Options subheading to specify what information to display about the queried packages.
A.2.5. Verifying Packages
Verifying a package is comparing information about files on the system installed from a package with
the same information from the original package. Among other parameters, verifying compares the file
size, MD5 sum, permissions, type, owner, and the group of each file.
Use the rpm command with the -V (or --verify) option to verify packages. For example:
~]$ rpm -V tree
See the Package Selection Options subheading in the rpm(8) manual page for a list of options
that can be used to further refine or qualify your query. Use options listed below the Verify
Options subheading to specify what characteristics to verify in the queried packages.
If everything verifies properly, there is no output. If there are any discrepancies, they are displayed. The
output consists of lines similar to these:
~]# rpm -V abrt
S.5....T. c /etc/abrt/abrt.conf
.M.......
/var/spool/abrt-upload
The format of the output is a string of nine characters followed by an optional attribute marker and the
name of the processed file.
The first nine characters are the results of tests performed on the file. Each test is the comparison of
one attribute of the file to the value of that attribute as recorded in the RPM database. A single period
(.) means the test passed, and the question-mark character ( ?) signifies that the test could not be
performed. The following table lists symbols that denote specific discrepancies:
Table A.1. RPM Verification Symbols
Symbol
Description
S
file size differs
M
mode differs (includes permissions and file type)
5
digest (formerly MD5 sum) differs
D
device major/minor number mismatch
564
APPENDIX A. RPM
Symbol
Description
L
readLink(2) path mismatch
U
user ownership differs
G
group ownership differs
T
mtime differs
P
capabilities differ
The attribute marker, if present, describes the purpose of the given file. The following table lists the
available attribute markers:
Table A.2. RPM Verification Symbols
Marker
Description
c
configuration file
d
documentation file
l
license file
r
readme file
If you see any output, use your best judgment to determine if you should remove the package, reinstall
it, or fix the problem in another way.
A.3. FINDING AND VERIFYING RPM PACKAGES
Before using any RPM packages, you must know where to find them and be able to verify if you can
trust them.
A.3.1. Finding RPM Packages
Although there are many RPM repositories on the Internet, for security and compatibility reasons, you
should consider installing only official Red Hat-provided RPM packages. The following is a list of
sources for RPM packages:
Official Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation media.
Official RPM repositories provided with the Yum package manager. See Chapter 8, Yum for
details on how to use the official Red Hat Enterprise Linux package repositories.
565
System Administrator's Guide
The Red Hat Errata Page, available on the Customer Portal at
https://rhn.redhat.com/rhn/errata/RelevantErrata.do.
Extra Packages for Enterprise Linux (EPEL) is a community effort to provide a repository with
high-quality add-on packages for Red Hat Enterprise Linux. See
http://fedoraproject.org/wiki/EPEL for details on EPEL RPM packages.
Unofficial, third-party repositories not affiliated with Red Hat also provide RPM packages.
IMPORTANT
When considering third-party repositories for use with your Red Hat
Enterprise Linux system, pay close attention to the repository's web site with
regard to package compatibility before adding the repository as a package
source. Alternate package repositories may offer different, incompatible
versions of the same software, including packages already included in the
Red Hat Enterprise Linux repositories.
A.3.2. Checking Package Signatures
RPM packages can be signed using GNU Privacy Guard (or GPG), which helps you make certain that
downloaded packages are trustworthy. GPG is a tool for secure communication. With GPG, you can
authenticate the validity of documents and encrypt or decrypt data.
To verify that a package has not been corrupted or tampered with, check its GPG signature by using
the rpmkeys command with the -K (or --checksig) option:
rpmkeys -K package.rpm
Note that the Yum package manager performs automatic checking of GPG signatures during
installations and upgrades.
GPG is installed by default, as well as a set of Red Hat keys for verifying packages. To import additional
keys for use with RPM, see Section A.3.2.1, “Importing GPG Keys” .
A.3.2.1. Importing GPG Keys
To verify Red Hat packages, a Red Hat GPG key needs to be installed. A set of basic keys is installed by
default. To view a list of installed keys, execute the following command at a shell prompt:
~]$ rpm -qa gpg-pubkey*
To display details about a specific key, use rpm -qi followed by the output from the previous
command. For example:
~]$ rpm -qi gpg-pubkey-fd431d51-4ae0493b
Use the rpmkeys command with the --import option to install a new key for use with RPM. The
default location for storing RPM GPG keys is the /etc/pki/rpm-gpg/ directory. To import new keys,
use a command like the following as root:
~]# rpmkeys --import /etc/pki/rpm-gpg/RPM-GPG-KEY-redhat-release
566
APPENDIX A. RPM
See the Product Signing (GPG) Keys article on the Red Hat Customer Portal for additional information
about Red Hat package-signing practices.
A.4. COMMON EXAMPLES OF RPM USAGE
RPM is a useful tool for both managing your system and diagnosing and fixing problems. See the
following examples for an overview of some of the most-used options.
To verify your entire system and see what files are missing, issue the following command as
root:
rpm -Va
If some files are missing or appear corrupted, consider reinstalling relevant packages.
To determine which package owns a file, enter:
rpm -qf file
To verify the package that owns a particular file, enter as root:
rpm -Vf file
To locate documentation files that are a part of a package to which a file belongs, enter:
rpm -qdf file
To find information about a (non-installed) package file, use the following command:
rpm -qip package.rpm
To list files contained in a package, use:
rpm -qlp package.rpm
See the rpm(8) manual page for more options.
A.5. ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
RPM is a complex utility with many options and methods for querying, installing, upgrading, and
removing packages. See the following resources to learn more about RPM.
Installed Documentation
rpm --help — This command displays a quick reference of RPM parameters.
rpm(8) — The RPM manual page offers an overview of all available RPM parameters.
Online Documentation
567
System Administrator's Guide
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 Security Guide — The Security Guide for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7
documents how to keep your system up-to-date using the Yum package manager and how to
verify and install downloaded packages.
The RPM website — http://www.rpm.org/
The RPM mailing list — http://lists.rpm.org/mailman/listinfo/rpm-list
See Also
Chapter 8, Yum describes how to use the Yum package manager to search, install, update, and
uninstall packages on the command line.
568
APPENDIX B. CHOOSING SUITABLE RED HAT PRODUCT
APPENDIX B. CHOOSING SUITABLE RED HAT PRODUCT
A Red Hat Cloud Infrastructure or Red Hat Cloud Suite subscription provides access to multiple
Red Hat products with complementary feature sets.
To determine products appropriate for your organization and use case, you can use Cloud Deployment
Planner (CDP). CDP is an interactive tool which summarizes specific interoperability and feature
compatibility considerations across various product releases.
To compare supportability of specific features and compatibility of various products depending on
Red Hat Enterprise Linux version, see comprehensive compatibility matrix.
569
System Administrator's Guide
APPENDIX C. RED HAT CUSTOMER PORTAL LABS RELEVANT
TO SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION
Red Hat Customer Portal Labs are tools designed to help you improve performance, troubleshoot
issues, identify security problems, and optimize configuration. This appendix provides an overview of
Red Hat Customer Portal relevant to system administration. All Red Hat Customer Portal Labs are
available at Customer Portal Labs .
ISCSI HELPER
The iSCSI Helper provides a block-level storage over Internet Protocol (IP) networks, and enables the
use of storage pools within server virtualization.
Use the iSCSI Helper to generate a script that prepares the system for its role of an iSCSI target
(server) or an iSCSI initiator (client) configured according to the settings that you provide.
NTP CONFIGURATION
Use the NTP (Network Time Protocol) Configuration to set up:
servers running the NTP service
clients synchronized with NTP servers
SAMBA CONFIGURATION HELPER
The Samba Configuration Helper creates a configuration that provides basic file and printer sharing
through Samba:
Click Server to specify basic server settings.
Click Shares to add the directories that you want to share
Click Server to add attached printers individually.
VNC CONFIGURATOR
The VNC Configurator is designed to install and configure VNC (Virtual Network Computing) server on
a Red Hat Enterprise Linux server.
Use the VNC Configurator to generate all-in-one script optimized to install and configure the VNC
service on your Red Hat Enterprise Linux server.
BRIDGE CONFIGURATION
The Bridge Configuration is designed to configure a bridged network interface for applications such as
KVM using Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.4 or later.
NETWORK BONDING HELPER
The Network Bonding Helper allows administrators to bind multiple Network Interface Controllers
together into a single channel using the bonding kernel module and the bonding network interface.
Use the Network Bonding Helper to enable two or more network interfaces to act as one bonding
interface.
LVM RAID CALCULATOR
The LVM RAID Calculator determines the optimal parameters for creating logical volumes (LVMs) on a
given RAID storage after you specify storage options.
570
APPENDIX C. RED HAT CUSTOMER PORTAL LABS RELEVANT TO SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION
Use the LVM RAID Calculator to generate a sequence of commands that create LVMs on a given RAID
storage.
NFS HELPER
The NFS Helper simplifies configuring a new NFS server or client. Follow the steps to specify the export
and mount options. Then, generate a downloadable NFS configuration script.
LOAD BALANCER CONFIGURATION TOOL
The Load Balancer Configuration Tool creates an optimal balance between apache-based load
balancers and JBoss/Tomcat application servers.
Use the Load Balancer Configuration Tool to generate a configuration file and advice about how you
can increase the performance of your environment.
YUM REPOSITORY CONFIGURATION HELPER
The Yum Repository Configuration Helper is designed to set up a simple Yum repository.
Use the Yum Repository Configuration Helper to set up:
a local Yum repository
a HTTP/FTP-based Yum repository
FILE SYSTEM LAYOUT CALCULATOR
The File System Layout Calculator determines the optimal parameters for creating ext3, ext4, and xfs
file systems, after you provide storage options that describe your current or planned storage.
Use the File System Layout Calculator to generate a command that creates a file system with
provided parameters on the specified RAID storage.
RHEL BACKUP AND RESTORE ASSISTANT
The RHEL Backup and Restore Assistant provides information on back-up and restore tools, and
common scenarios of Linux usage.
Described tools:
dump and restore: for backing up the ext2, ext3, and ext4 file systems.
tar and cpio: for archiving or restoring files and folders, especially when backing up the
tape drives.
rsync: for performing back-up operations and synchronizing files and directories between
locations.
dd: for copying files from a source to a destination block by block independently of the file
systems or operating systems involved.
Described scenarios:
Disaster recovery
Hardware migration
Partition table backup
Important folder backup
571
System Administrator's Guide
Incremental backup
Differential backup
DNS HELPER
The DNS Helper provides assistance with configuring different types of DNS servers.
Use the DNS Helper to generate a bash script to automatically create and configure the DNS server.
AD INTEGRATION HELPER (SAMBA FS - WINBIND)
The AD Integration Helperr is used for connecting Samba File System server to an Active Directory
(AD) server.
Use AD Integration Helper to generate a script based on basic AD server information supplied by the
user. The generated script configures Samba, Name Service Switch (NSS) and Pluggable
Authentication Module (PAM).
RED HAT ENTERPRISE LINUX UPGRADE HELPER
The Red Hat Enterprise Linux Upgrade Helper is designed to help you with upgrading Red Hat
Enterprise Linux from version 6.5/6.6/6.7/6.8 to version 7.x.
REGISTRATION ASSISTANT
The Registration Assistant is designed to help you choose the most suitable registration option for
your Red Hat Enterprise Linux environment.
RESCUE MODE ASSISTANT
The Rescue Mode Assistant is designed to help you solve the following problems in the rescue mode of
Red Hat Enterprise Linux:
Reset root password
Generate a SOS report
Perform a Filesystem Check(fsck)
Reinstall GRUB
Rebuild the Initial Ramdisk Image
Reduce the size of the root file system
KERNEL OOPS ANALYZER
The Kernel Oops Analyzer is designed to help you with solving a kernel crash.
Use the Kernel Oops Analyzer to input a text or a file including one or more kernel oops messages
and find a solution suitable for your case.
KDUMP HELPER
The Kdump Helper is designed to to set up the Kdump mechanism.
Use the Kdump Helper to generate a script to set up Kdump to dump data in memory into a dump file
called a vmcore.
SCSI DECODER
572
APPENDIX C. RED HAT CUSTOMER PORTAL LABS RELEVANT TO SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION
The SCSI decoder is designed to decode SCSI error messages in the /log/* files or log file snippets,
as these error messages can be hard to understand for the user.
Use the SCSI decoder to individually diagnose each SCSI error message and get solutions to resolve
problems efficiently.
RED HAT MEMORY ANALYZER
The Red Hat Memory Analyzer visualizes memory usage on your system based on information
captured by the SAR utility.
MULTIPATH HELPER
The Multipath Helper creates an optimal configuration for multipath devices on Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 5, 6, and 7.
Use the Multipath Helper to create advanced multipath configurations, such as custom aliases or
device blacklists.
The Multipath Helper also provides the multipath.conf file for a review. When you achieve the
required configuration, download the installation script to run on your server.
MULTIPATH CONFIGURATION VISUALIZER
The Multipath Configuration Visualizer analyzes the files in a SOS report and provides a diagram that
visualizes the multipath configuration. Use the Multipath Configuration Visualizer to display:
Hosts components including Host Bus Adapters (HBAs), local devices, and iSCSI devices on
the server side
Storage components on the storage side
Fabric or Ethernet components between the server and the storage
Paths to all mentioned components
You can either upload a SOS report compressed in the .xz, .gz, or .bz2 format, or extract a SOS report
in a directory that you then select as the source for a client-side analysis.
RED HAT I/O USAGE VISUALIZER
The Red Hat I/O Usage Visualizer displays a visualization of the I/O device usage statistics captured by
the SAR utility.
STORAGE / LVM CONFIGURATION VIEWER
The Storage / LVM configuration viewer analyzes the files included in a SOS report and creates a
diagram to visualize the Storage/LVM configuration.
573
System Administrator's Guide
APPENDIX D. REVISION HISTORY
Revision 0.14-16
Mon Aug 8 2017
Marie Doleželová
Minor fixes throughout the guide, added links to articles dealing with choosing a target for ordering and dependencies of the
custom unit files to the chapter "Creating Custom Unit Files".
Revision 0.14-14
Thu Jul 27 2017
Marie Doleželová
Document version for 7.4 GA publication.
Revision 0.14-13
Thu Jul 27 2017
Marie Doleželová
Document version for 7.4 GA publication.
Revision 0.14-12
Tue Jul 25 2017
Marie Doleželová
Document version for 7.4 GA publication.
Revision 0.14-11
Tue Jul 25 2017
Marie Doleželová
Document version for 7.4 GA publication.
Revision 0.14-8
Mon Nov 3 2016
Maxim Svistunov
Mon Jun 20 2016
Maxim Svistunov
Version for 7.3 GA publication.
Revision 0.14-7
Added Relax-and-Recover (ReaR) ; made minor improvements.
Revision 0.14-6
Thu Mar 10 2016
Maxim Svistunov
Thu Jan 21 2016
Lenka Špačková
Wed Nov 11 2015
Jana Heves
Mon Nov 9 2015
Jana Heves
Minor fixes and updates.
Revision 0.14-5
Minor factual updates.
Revision 0.14-3
Version for 7.2 GA release.
Revision 0.14-1
Minor fixes, added links to RH training courses.
Revision 0.14-0.3
Fri Apr 3 2015
Stephen Wadeley
Added Registering the System and Managing Subscriptions, Accessing Support Using the Red Hat Support Tool , updated Viewing
and Managing Log Files.
Revision 0.13-2
Tue Feb 24 2015
Stephen Wadeley
Tue Nov 18 2014
Stephen Wadeley
Mon Nov 10 2014
Stephen Wadeley
Version for 7.1 GA release.
Revision 0.12-0.6
Improved TigerVNC.
Revision 0.12-0.4
Improved Yum, Managing Services with systemd, OpenLDAP, Viewing and Managing Log Files, OProfile, and Working with the GRUB
2 Boot Loader.
Revision 0.12-0
Tue 19 Aug 2014
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7.0 GA release of the System Administrator's Guide.
D.1. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
574
Stephen Wadeley
APPENDIX D. REVISION HISTORY
Certain portions of this text first appeared in the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Deployment Guide,
copyright © 2010–2017 Red Hat, Inc., available at https://access.redhat.com/documentation/enUS/Red_Hat_Enterprise_Linux/6/html/Deployment_Guide/index.html.
Section 19.7, “Monitoring Performance with Net-SNMP” is based on an article written by Michael
Solberg.
575
System Administrator's Guide
INDEX
Symbols
.fetchmailrc, Fetchmail Configuration Options
server options, Server Options
user options, User Options
.procmailrc, Procmail Configuration
/dev/oprofile/, Understanding the /dev/oprofile/ directory
(see OProfile)
A
ABRT, Introduction to ABRT
(see also abrtd)
(see also Bugzilla)
(see also Red Hat Technical Support)
additional resources, Additional Resources
autoreporting, Setting Up Automatic Reporting
CLI, Using the Command Line Tool
configuring, Configuring ABRT
configuring events, Configuring Events
crash detection, Introduction to ABRT
creating events, Creating Custom Events
GUI, Using the GUI
installing, Installing ABRT and Starting its Services
introducing, Introduction to ABRT
problems
detecting, Detecting Software Problems
handling of, Handling Detected Problems
supported, Detecting Software Problems
standard events, Configuring Events
starting, Installing ABRT and Starting its Services , Starting the ABRT Services
testing, Testing ABRT Crash Detection
ABRT CLI
installing, Installing ABRT for the Command Line
ABRT GUI
installing, Installing the ABRT GUI
ABRT Tools
installing, Installing Supplementary ABRT Tools
576
INDEX
abrtd
additional resources, Additional Resources
restarting, Starting the ABRT Services
starting, Installing ABRT and Starting its Services , Starting the ABRT Services
status, Starting the ABRT Services
testing, Testing ABRT Crash Detection
Access Control Lists (see ACLs)
ACLs
access ACLs, Setting Access ACLs
additional resources, ACL References
archiving with, Archiving File Systems With ACLs
default ACLs, Setting Default ACLs
getfacl , Retrieving ACLs
mounting file systems with, Mounting File Systems
mounting NFS shares with, NFS
on ext3 file systems, Access Control Lists
retrieving, Retrieving ACLs
setfacl , Setting Access ACLs
setting
access ACLs, Setting Access ACLs
with Samba, Access Control Lists
adding
group, Adding a New Group
user, Adding a New User
Apache HTTP Server
additional resources
installable documentation, Additional Resources
installed documentation, Additional Resources
useful websites, Additional Resources
checking configuration, Editing the Configuration Files
checking status, Verifying the Service Status
directories
/etc/httpd/conf.d/ , Editing the Configuration Files
/usr/lib64/httpd/modules/ , Working with Modules
files
/etc/httpd/conf.d/nss.conf , Enabling the mod_nss Module
/etc/httpd/conf.d/ssl.conf , Enabling the mod_ssl Module
/etc/httpd/conf/httpd.conf , Editing the Configuration Files
577
System Administrator's Guide
modules
developing, Writing a Module
loading, Loading a Module
mod_ssl , Setting Up an SSL Server
mod_userdir, Updating the Configuration
restarting, Restarting the Service
SSL server
certificate, An Overview of Certificates and Security , Using an Existing Key and Certificate ,
Generating a New Key and Certificate
certificate authority, An Overview of Certificates and Security
private key, An Overview of Certificates and Security , Using an Existing Key and Certificate ,
Generating a New Key and Certificate
public key, An Overview of Certificates and Security
starting, Starting the Service
stopping, Stopping the Service
version 2.4
changes, Notable Changes
updating from version 2.2, Updating the Configuration
virtual host, Setting Up Virtual Hosts
Automated Tasks, Automating System Tasks
B
blkid, Using the blkid Command
boot loader
GRUB 2 boot loader, Working with GRUB 2
verifying, Verifying the Boot Loader
boot media, Preparing to Upgrade
C
ch-email .fetchmailrc
global options, Global Options
Configuration File Changes, Preserving Configuration File Changes
Configuring a System for Accessibility, Configuring a System for Accessibility
CPU usage, Viewing CPU Usage
createrepo, Creating a Yum Repository
cron, Scheduling a Recurring Job Using Cron
CUPS (see Print Settings)
D
578
INDEX
df, Using the df Command
documentation
finding installed, Common Examples of RPM Usage
drivers (see kernel module)
du, Using the du Command
E
ECDSA keys
generating, Generating Key Pairs
email
additional resources, Additional Resources
installed documentation, Installed Documentation
online documentation, Online Documentation
related books, Related Books
Fetchmail, Fetchmail
mail server
Dovecot, Dovecot
Postfix, Postfix
Procmail, Mail Delivery Agents
program classifications, Email Program Classifications
protocols, Email Protocols
IMAP, IMAP
POP, POP
SMTP, SMTP
security, Securing Communication
clients, Secure Email Clients
servers, Securing Email Client Communications
Sendmail, Sendmail
spam
filtering out, Spam Filters
types
Mail Delivery Agent, Mail Delivery Agent
Mail Transport Agent, Mail Transport Agent
Mail User Agent, Mail User Agent
extra packages for Enterprise Linux (EPEL)
installable packages, Finding RPM Packages
579
System Administrator's Guide
F
Fetchmail, Fetchmail
additional resources, Additional Resources
command options, Fetchmail Command Options
informational, Informational or Debugging Options
special, Special Options
configuration options, Fetchmail Configuration Options
global options, Global Options
server options, Server Options
user options, User Options
file systems, Viewing Block Devices and File Systems
findmnt, Using the findmnt Command
free, Using the free Command
FTP, FTP
(see also vsftpd)
active mode, The File Transfer Protocol
command port, The File Transfer Protocol
data port, The File Transfer Protocol
definition of, FTP
introducing, The File Transfer Protocol
passive mode, The File Transfer Protocol
G
getfacl , Retrieving ACLs
gnome-system-log (see System Log)
gnome-system-monitor, Using the System Monitor Tool , Using the System Monitor Tool , Using the
System Monitor Tool, Using the System Monitor Tool
GnuPG
checking RPM package signatures, Checking Package Signatures
group configuration
groupadd, Adding a New Group
viewing list of groups, Managing Users in a Graphical Environment
groups (see group configuration)
additional resources, Additional Resources
installed documentation, Additional Resources
GID, Managing Users and Groups
introducing, Managing Users and Groups
shared directories, Creating Group Directories
580
INDEX
tools for management of
groupadd, User Private Groups, Using Command-Line Tools
user private, User Private Groups
GRUB 2
configuring GRUB 2, Working with GRUB 2
customizing GRUB 2, Working with GRUB 2
reinstalling GRUB 2, Working with GRUB 2
H
hardware
viewing, Viewing Hardware Information
HTTP server (see Apache HTTP Server)
httpd (see Apache HTTP Server )
I
information
about your system, System Monitoring Tools
initial RAM disk image
recreating, Verifying the Initial RAM Disk Image
verifying, Verifying the Initial RAM Disk Image
IBM eServer System i, Verifying the Initial RAM Disk Image
initial RPM repositories
installable packages, Finding RPM Packages
insmod, Loading a Module
(see also kernel module)
installing the kernel, Manually Upgrading the Kernel
K
kernel
downloading, Downloading the Upgraded Kernel
installing kernel packages, Manually Upgrading the Kernel
kernel packages, Overview of Kernel Packages
package, Manually Upgrading the Kernel
performing kernel upgrade, Performing the Upgrade
RPM package, Manually Upgrading the Kernel
upgrade kernel available, Downloading the Upgraded Kernel
Red Hat Content Delivery Network, Downloading the Upgraded Kernel
581
System Administrator's Guide
Security Errata, Downloading the Upgraded Kernel
upgrading
preparing, Preparing to Upgrade
working boot media, Preparing to Upgrade
upgrading the kernel, Manually Upgrading the Kernel
kernel module
definition, Working with Kernel Modules
directories
/etc/modules-load.d/, Persistent Module Loading
/usr/lib/modules/kernel_version/kernel/drivers/, Loading a Module
files
/proc/modules, Listing Currently-Loaded Modules
listing
currently loaded modules, Listing Currently-Loaded Modules
module information, Displaying Information About a Module
loading
at the boot time, Persistent Module Loading
for the current session, Loading a Module
module parameters
supplying, Setting Module Parameters
unloading, Unloading a Module
utilities
insmod, Loading a Module
lsmod, Listing Currently-Loaded Modules
modinfo, Displaying Information About a Module
modprobe, Loading a Module , Unloading a Module
rmmod, Unloading a Module
kernel package
kernel
for single, multicore and multiprocessor systems, Overview of Kernel Packages
kernel-devel
kernel headers and makefiles, Overview of Kernel Packages
kernel-doc
documentation files, Overview of Kernel Packages
582
INDEX
kernel-headers
C header files files, Overview of Kernel Packages
linux-firmware
firmware files, Overview of Kernel Packages
perf
firmware files, Overview of Kernel Packages
kernel upgrading
preparing, Preparing to Upgrade
keyboard configuration, System Locale and Keyboard Configuration
layout, Changing the Keyboard Layout
L
localectl (see keyboard configuration)
log files, Viewing and Managing Log Files
(see also System Log)
description, Viewing and Managing Log Files
locating, Locating Log Files
monitoring, Monitoring Log Files
rotating, Locating Log Files
rsyslogd daemon, Viewing and Managing Log Files
viewing, Viewing Log Files
logrotate, Locating Log Files
lsblk, Using the lsblk Command
lscpu, Using the lscpu Command
lsmod, Listing Currently-Loaded Modules
(see also kernel module)
lspci, Using the lspci Command
lsusb, Using the lsusb Command
M
Mail Delivery Agent (see email)
Mail Transport Agent (see email) (see MTA)
Mail Transport Agent Switcher, Mail Transport Agent (MTA) Configuration
Mail User Agent, Mail Transport Agent (MTA) Configuration (see email)
MDA (see Mail Delivery Agent)
memory usage, Viewing Memory Usage
modinfo, Displaying Information About a Module
583
System Administrator's Guide
(see also kernel module)
modprobe, Loading a Module , Unloading a Module
(see also kernel module)
module (see kernel module)
module parameters (see kernel module)
MTA (see Mail Transport Agent)
setting default, Mail Transport Agent (MTA) Configuration
switching with Mail Transport Agent Switcher, Mail Transport Agent (MTA) Configuration
MUA, Mail Transport Agent (MTA) Configuration (see Mail User Agent)
N
net program, Samba Distribution Programs
nmblookup program, Samba Distribution Programs
O
opannotate (see OProfile)
opcontrol (see OProfile)
OpenSSH, OpenSSH, Main Features
(see also SSH)
additional resources, Additional Resources
client, OpenSSH Clients
scp, Using the scp Utility
sftp, Using the sftp Utility
ssh, Using the ssh Utility
ECDSA keys
generating, Generating Key Pairs
RSA keys
generating, Generating Key Pairs
server, Starting an OpenSSH Server
starting, Starting an OpenSSH Server
stopping, Starting an OpenSSH Server
ssh-add, Configuring ssh-agent
ssh-agent, Configuring ssh-agent
ssh-keygen
ECDSA, Generating Key Pairs
RSA, Generating Key Pairs
using key-based authentication, Using Key-based Authentication
584
INDEX
OpenSSL
additional resources, Additional Resources
SSL (see SSL )
TLS (see TLS )
ophelp, Setting Events to Monitor
opreport (see OProfile)
OProfile, OProfile
/dev/oprofile/, Understanding the /dev/oprofile/ directory
additional resources, Additional Resources
configuring, Configuring OProfile Using Legacy Mode
separating profiles, Separating Kernel and User-space Profiles
events
sampling rate, Sampling Rate
setting, Setting Events to Monitor
Java, OProfile Support for Java
monitoring the kernel, Specifying the Kernel
opannotate, Using opannotate
opcontrol, Configuring OProfile Using Legacy Mode
--no-vmlinux, Specifying the Kernel
--start, Starting and Stopping OProfile Using Legacy Mode
--vmlinux=, Specifying the Kernel
ophelp, Setting Events to Monitor
opreport, Using opreport, Getting More Detailed Output on the Modules
on a single executable, Using opreport on a Single Executable
oprofiled, Starting and Stopping OProfile Using Legacy Mode
log file, Starting and Stopping OProfile Using Legacy Mode
overview of tools, Overview of Tools
reading data, Analyzing the Data
saving data, Saving Data in Legacy Mode
starting, Starting and Stopping OProfile Using Legacy Mode
SystemTap, OProfile and SystemTap
unit mask, Unit Masks
oprofiled (see OProfile)
oprof_start, Graphical Interface
P
package
kernel RPM, Manually Upgrading the Kernel
585
System Administrator's Guide
package groups
listing package groups with yum
yum groups, Listing Package Groups
packages, Working with Packages
dependencies, Satisfying Unresolved Dependencies
determining file ownership with, Common Examples of RPM Usage
displaying packages
yum info, Displaying Package Information
displaying packages with yum
yum info, Displaying Package Information
downloading packages with yum, Downloading Packages
extra packages for Enterprise Linux (EPEL), Finding RPM Packages
finding deleted files from, Common Examples of RPM Usage
finding Red Hat RPM packages, Finding RPM Packages
initial RPM repositories, Finding RPM Packages
installing a package group with yum, Installing a Package Group
installing RPM, Installing and Upgrading Packages
installing with yum, Installing Packages
kernel
for single, multicore and multiprocessor systems, Overview of Kernel Packages
kernel-devel
kernel headers and makefiles, Overview of Kernel Packages
kernel-doc
documentation files, Overview of Kernel Packages
kernel-headers
C header files files, Overview of Kernel Packages
linux-firmware
firmware files, Overview of Kernel Packages
listing packages with yum
Glob expressions, Searching Packages
yum list available, Listing Packages
yum list installed, Listing Packages
yum repolist, Listing Packages
yum search, Listing Packages
locating documentation for, Common Examples of RPM Usage
obtaining list of files, Common Examples of RPM Usage
586
INDEX
perf
firmware files, Overview of Kernel Packages
querying uninstalled, Common Examples of RPM Usage
Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation media, Finding RPM Packages
removing, Uninstalling Packages
RPM, RPM
already installed, Replacing Already Installed Packages
configuration file changes, Preserving Changes in Configuration Files
conflict, Resolving File Conflicts
failed dependencies, Satisfying Unresolved Dependencies
freshening, Freshening Packages
pristine sources, RPM Design Goals
querying, Querying Packages
removing, Uninstalling Packages
source and binary packages, RPM
tips, Common Examples of RPM Usage
uninstalling, Uninstalling Packages
verifying, Verifying Packages
searching packages with yum
yum search, Searching Packages
uninstalling packages with yum, Removing Packages
upgrading RPM, Installing and Upgrading Packages
Yum instead of RPM, RPM
passwords
shadow, Shadow Passwords
pdbedit program, Samba Distribution Programs
Postfix, Postfix
default installation, The Default Postfix Installation
postfix, Mail Transport Agent (MTA) Configuration
Print Settings
CUPS, Print Settings
IPP Printers, Adding an IPP Printer
LDP/LPR Printers, Adding an LPD/LPR Host or Printer
Local Printers, Adding a Local Printer
New Printer, Starting Printer Setup
Print Jobs, Managing Print Jobs
Samba Printers, Adding a Samba (SMB) printer
Settings, The Settings Page
587
System Administrator's Guide
Sharing Printers, Sharing Printers
printers (see Print Settings)
processes, Viewing System Processes
Procmail, Mail Delivery Agents
additional resources, Additional Resources
configuration, Procmail Configuration
recipes, Procmail Recipes
delivering, Delivering vs. Non-Delivering Recipes
examples, Recipe Examples
flags, Flags
local lockfiles, Specifying a Local Lockfile
non-delivering, Delivering vs. Non-Delivering Recipes
SpamAssassin, Spam Filters
special actions, Special Conditions and Actions
special conditions, Special Conditions and Actions
ps, Using the ps Command
R
RAM, Viewing Memory Usage
rcp, Using the scp Utility
ReaR
basic usage, Basic ReaR Usage
Red Hat Support Tool
getting support on the command line, Accessing Support Using the Red Hat Support Tool
Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation media
installable packages, Finding RPM Packages
Red Hat Subscription Management
subscription, Registering the System and Attaching Subscriptions
rmmod, Unloading a Module
(see also kernel module)
rpcclient program, Samba Distribution Programs
RPM, RPM
additional resources, Additional Resources
already installed, Replacing Already Installed Packages
basic modes, Using RPM
checking package signatures, Checking Package Signatures
configuration file changes, Preserving Changes in Configuration Files
588
INDEX
conf.rpmsave, Preserving Changes in Configuration Files
conflicts, Resolving File Conflicts
dependencies, Satisfying Unresolved Dependencies
design goals, RPM Design Goals
powerful querying, RPM Design Goals
system verification, RPM Design Goals
upgradability, RPM Design Goals
determining file ownership with, Common Examples of RPM Usage
documentation with, Common Examples of RPM Usage
failed dependencies, Satisfying Unresolved Dependencies
file conflicts
resolving, Resolving File Conflicts
file name, Installing and Upgrading Packages
finding and verifying RPM packages, Finding and Verifying RPM Packages
finding deleted files with, Common Examples of RPM Usage
finding Red Hat RPM packages, Finding RPM Packages
freshening, Freshening Packages
GnuPG, Checking Package Signatures
installing, Installing and Upgrading Packages
online documentation, Additional Resources
querying, Querying Packages
querying for file list, Common Examples of RPM Usage
querying uninstalled packages, Common Examples of RPM Usage
see also, Additional Resources
tips, Common Examples of RPM Usage
uninstalling, Uninstalling Packages
upgrading, Installing and Upgrading Packages
verification, Verifying Packages
verifying, Verifying Packages
website, Additional Resources
RPM Package Manager (see RPM)
RSA keys
generating, Generating Key Pairs
rsyslog, Viewing and Managing Log Files
actions, Actions
configuration, Basic Configuration of Rsyslog
debugging, Debugging Rsyslog
filters, Filters
global directives, Global Directives
589
System Administrator's Guide
log rotation, Log Rotation
modules, Using Rsyslog Modules
new configuration format, Using the New Configuration Format
queues, Working with Queues in Rsyslog
rulesets, Rulesets
templates, Templates
S
Samba (see Samba)
Abilities, Introduction to Samba
Additional Resources, Additional Resources
installed documentation, Additional Resources
useful websites, Additional Resources
Browsing, Samba Network Browsing
configuration, Configuring a Samba Server , Command-Line Configuration
default, Configuring a Samba Server
daemon
nmbd, Samba Daemons and Related Services
overview, Samba Daemons and Related Services
smbd, Samba Daemons and Related Services
winbindd, Samba Daemons and Related Services
encrypted passwords, Encrypted Passwords
graphical configuration, Graphical Configuration
Introduction, Introduction to Samba
Network Browsing, Samba Network Browsing
Domain Browsing, Domain Browsing
WINS, WINS (Windows Internet Name Server)
Programs, Samba Distribution Programs
net, Samba Distribution Programs
nmblookup, Samba Distribution Programs
pdbedit, Samba Distribution Programs
rpcclient, Samba Distribution Programs
smbcacls, Samba Distribution Programs
smbclient, Samba Distribution Programs
smbcontrol, Samba Distribution Programs
smbpasswd, Samba Distribution Programs
smbspool, Samba Distribution Programs
smbstatus, Samba Distribution Programs
smbtar, Samba Distribution Programs
590
INDEX
testparm, Samba Distribution Programs
wbinfo, Samba Distribution Programs
Reference, Samba
Samba Printers, Adding a Samba (SMB) printer
Security Modes, Samba Security Modes, User-Level Security
Active Directory Security Mode, User-Level Security
Domain Security Mode, User-Level Security
Share-Level Security, Share-Level Security
User Level Security, User-Level Security
service
conditional restarting, Starting and Stopping Samba
reloading, Starting and Stopping Samba
restarting, Starting and Stopping Samba
starting, Starting and Stopping Samba
stopping, Starting and Stopping Samba
share
connecting to via the command line, Connecting to an SMB Share Using smbclient
connecting to with Nautilus, Connecting to an SMB Share Using the Nautilus File Manager
mounting, Mounting the Share
smbclient, Connecting to an SMB Share Using smbclient
WINS, WINS (Windows Internet Name Server)
with Windows NT 4.0, 2000, ME, and XP, Encrypted Passwords
scp (see OpenSSH)
security plug-in (see Security)
Security-Related Packages
updating security-related packages, Updating Packages
Sendmail, Sendmail
additional resources, Additional Resources
aliases, Masquerading
common configuration changes, Common Sendmail Configuration Changes
default installation, The Default Sendmail Installation
LDAP and, Using Sendmail with LDAP
limitations, Purpose and Limitations
masquerading, Masquerading
purpose, Purpose and Limitations
spam, Stopping Spam
with UUCP, Common Sendmail Configuration Changes
sendmail, Mail Transport Agent (MTA) Configuration
591
System Administrator's Guide
setfacl , Setting Access ACLs
sftp (see OpenSSH)
shadow passwords
overview of, Shadow Passwords
smbcacls program, Samba Distribution Programs
smbclient, Connecting to an SMB Share Using smbclient
smbclient program, Samba Distribution Programs
smbcontrol program, Samba Distribution Programs
smbpasswd program, Samba Distribution Programs
smbspool program, Samba Distribution Programs
smbstatus program, Samba Distribution Programs
smbtar program, Samba Distribution Programs
SpamAssassin
using with Procmail, Spam Filters
ssh (see OpenSSH)
SSH protocol
authentication, Authentication
configuration files, Configuration Files
system-wide configuration files, Configuration Files
user-specific configuration files, Configuration Files
connection sequence, Event Sequence of an SSH Connection
features, Main Features
insecure protocols, Requiring SSH for Remote Connections
layers
channels, Channels
transport layer, Transport Layer
port forwarding, Port Forwarding
requiring for remote login, Requiring SSH for Remote Connections
security risks, Why Use SSH?
version 1, Protocol Versions
version 2, Protocol Versions
X11 forwarding, X11 Forwarding
ssh-add, Configuring ssh-agent
ssh-agent, Configuring ssh-agent
SSL , Setting Up an SSL Server
(see also Apache HTTP Server )
SSL server (see Apache HTTP Server )
star , Archiving File Systems With ACLs
592
INDEX
stunnel, Securing Email Client Communications
subscriptions, Registering the System and Managing Subscriptions
system analysis
OProfile (see OProfile)
system information
cpu usage, Viewing CPU Usage
file systems, Viewing Block Devices and File Systems
gathering, System Monitoring Tools
hardware, Viewing Hardware Information
memory usage, Viewing Memory Usage
processes, Viewing System Processes
currently running, Using the top Command
System Log
filtering, Viewing Log Files
monitoring, Monitoring Log Files
refresh rate, Viewing Log Files
searching, Viewing Log Files
System Monitor, Using the System Monitor Tool , Using the System Monitor Tool , Using the System
Monitor Tool, Using the System Monitor Tool
systems
registration, Registering the System and Managing Subscriptions
subscription management, Registering the System and Managing Subscriptions
T
testparm program, Samba Distribution Programs
the Users settings tool (see user configuration)
TLS , Setting Up an SSL Server
(see also Apache HTTP Server )
top, Using the top Command
U
user configuration
command line configuration
passwd, Adding a New User
useradd, Adding a New User
viewing list of users, Managing Users in a Graphical Environment
user private groups (see groups)
and shared directories, Creating Group Directories
593
System Administrator's Guide
useradd command
user account creation using, Adding a New User
users (see user configuration)
additional resources, Additional Resources
installed documentation, Additional Resources
introducing, Managing Users and Groups
tools for management of
the Users setting tool, Using Command-Line Tools
useradd, Using Command-Line Tools
UID, Managing Users and Groups
V
virtual host (see Apache HTTP Server )
vsftpd
additional resources, Additional Resources
installed documentation, Installed Documentation
online documentation, Online Documentation
encrypting, Encrypting vsftpd Connections Using TLS
multihome configuration, Starting Multiple Copies of vsftpd
restarting, Starting and Stopping vsftpd
securing, Encrypting vsftpd Connections Using TLS , SELinux Policy for vsftpd
SELinux, SELinux Policy for vsftpd
starting, Starting and Stopping vsftpd
starting multiple copies of, Starting Multiple Copies of vsftpd
status, Starting and Stopping vsftpd
stopping, Starting and Stopping vsftpd
TLS, Encrypting vsftpd Connections Using TLS
W
wbinfo program, Samba Distribution Programs
web server (see Apache HTTP Server)
Windows 2000
connecting to shares using Samba, Encrypted Passwords
Windows 98
connecting to shares using Samba, Encrypted Passwords
Windows ME
connecting to shares using Samba, Encrypted Passwords
594
INDEX
Windows NT 4.0
connecting to shares using Samba, Encrypted Passwords
Windows XP
connecting to shares using Samba, Encrypted Passwords
Y
Yum
configuring plug-ins, Enabling, Configuring, and Disabling Yum Plug-ins
configuring yum and yum repositories, Configuring Yum and Yum Repositories
disabling plug-ins, Enabling, Configuring, and Disabling Yum Plug-ins
displaying packages
yum info, Displaying Package Information
displaying packages with yum
yum info, Displaying Package Information
downloading packages with yum, Downloading Packages
enabling plug-ins, Enabling, Configuring, and Disabling Yum Plug-ins
installing a package group with yum, Installing a Package Group
installing with yum, Installing Packages
listing package groups with yum
yum groups list, Listing Package Groups
listing packages with yum
Glob expressions, Searching Packages
yum list, Listing Packages
yum list available, Listing Packages
yum list installed, Listing Packages
yum repolist, Listing Packages
packages, Working with Packages
plug-ins
aliases, Working with Yum Plug-ins
kabi, Working with Yum Plug-ins
langpacks, Working with Yum Plug-ins
product-id, Working with Yum Plug-ins
search-disabled-repos, Working with Yum Plug-ins
yum-changelog, Working with Yum Plug-ins
yum-tmprepo, Working with Yum Plug-ins
yum-verify, Working with Yum Plug-ins
yum-versionlock, Working with Yum Plug-ins
repository, Adding, Enabling, and Disabling a Yum Repository , Creating a Yum Repository
595
System Administrator's Guide
searching packages with yum
yum search, Searching Packages
setting [main] options, Setting [main] Options
setting [repository] options, Setting [repository] Options
uninstalling packages with yum, Removing Packages
variables, Using Yum Variables
Yum plug-ins, Yum Plug-ins
Yum repositories
configuring yum and yum repositories, Configuring Yum and Yum Repositories
yum update, Upgrading the System Off-line with ISO and Yum
Yum Updates
checking for updates, Checking For Updates
updating a single package, Updating Packages
updating all packages and dependencies, Updating Packages
updating packages, Updating Packages
updating security-related packages, Updating Packages
596
</pre><hr>Source Exif Data: <br /><pre>File Type : PDF
File Type Extension : pdf
MIME Type : application/pdf
PDF Version : 1.4
Linearized : No
Title : System Administrator's Guide
Creator : wkhtmltopdf 0.12.2.1
Producer : Qt 4.8.6
Create Date : 2017:09:25 12:16:18-04:00
Page Count : 601
Page Mode : UseOutlines
</pre>
<small>EXIF Metadata provided by <a href="https://exif.tools/">EXIF.tools</a></small>
<div id="ezoic-pub-ad-placeholder-110">
<script async src="//pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/js/adsbygoogle.js"></script>
<!-- usermanual link ad -->
<ins class="adsbygoogle"
style="display:block"
data-ad-client="ca-pub-0545639743190253"
data-ad-slot="6172135303"
data-ad-format="link"></ins>
<script>
(adsbygoogle = window.adsbygoogle || []).push({});
</script>
</div>
</div>
<div id="catlinks" class="catlinks catlinks-allhidden" data-mw="interface"></div> <div class="visualClear"></div>
</div>
</div>
<div id="mw-navigation">
<h2>Navigation menu</h2>
<div id="mw-head">
<div id="p-personal" role="navigation" class="" aria-labelledby="p-personal-label">
<!-- <div id="p-search" role="search">
<form action="https://usermanual.wiki/search.php" id="searchform">
<div id="simpleSearch">
<input type="search" name="search" placeholder="Search UserManual.wiki" title="Search UserManual.wiki [ctrl-option-f]" accesskey="f" id="searchInput" tabindex="1" autocomplete="off"><input type="hidden" value="Special:Search" name="title"><input type="submit" name="go" value="Go" title="Find a User Manual" id="searchButton" class="searchButton"> </div>
</form>
</div>-->
<ul>
<li id="pt-mycontris"><a href="https://usermanual.wiki/upload" title="Upload User Manual" accesskey="y">Upload a User Manual</a></li>
</ul>
</div>
<div id="left-navigation">
<div id="p-namespaces" role="navigation" class="vectorTabs" aria-labelledby="p-namespaces-label">
<h3 id="p-namespaces-label">Versions of this User Manual:</h3>
<ul>
<li id="ca-nstab-main"><span><a href="https://usermanual.wiki/Pdf/RedHatEnterpriseLinux7SystemAdministratorsGuideenUS.291851052" title="User Manual Wiki" accesskey="c">Wiki Guide</a></span></li> <li id="ca-nstab-main"><span><a href="https://usermanual.wiki/Pdf/RedHatEnterpriseLinux7SystemAdministratorsGuideenUS.291851052/html" title="HTML" accesskey="c">HTML</a></span></li> <li id="ca-nstab-main"><span><a href="https://usermanual.wiki/Pdf/RedHatEnterpriseLinux7SystemAdministratorsGuideenUS.291851052/amp" title="Mobile AMP" accesskey="c">Mobile</a></span></li> <li id="ca-nstab-main" class="selected" ><span><a href="https://usermanual.wiki/Pdf/RedHatEnterpriseLinux7SystemAdministratorsGuideenUS.291851052/help" title="Discussion / FAQ / Help" accesskey="c">Download & Help</a></span></li>
</ul>
</div>
</div>
<div id="right-navigation">
<div id="p-views" role="navigation" class="vectorTabs" aria-labelledby="p-views-label">
<h3 id="p-views-label">Views</h3>
<ul>
<li id="ca-view"><span><a href="#">User Manual</a></span></li>
<li class="selected" id="ca-edit"><span><a href="https://usermanual.wiki/Pdf/RedHatEnterpriseLinux7SystemAdministratorsGuideenUS.291851052/help" title="Ask a question" accesskey="e">Discussion / Help</a></span></li>
</ul>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div id="mw-panel">
<div id="p-logo" role="banner"><a class="mw-wiki-logo" href="https://usermanual.wiki/Main_Page" title="Visit the main page"></a></div>
<div class="portal" role="navigation" id="p-navigation" aria-labelledby="p-navigation-label">
<h3 id="p-navigation-label">Navigation</h3>
</div>
<div class="portal" role="navigation" id="p-tb" aria-labelledby="p-tb-label">
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div id="footer" role="contentinfo">
<ul id="footer-info">
<li id="footer-info-lastmod">© 2024 UserManual.wiki</li>
</ul>
<ul id="footer-places">
<li id="footer-places-privacy"><a href="https://usermanual.wiki/ContactUs" title="UserManual.wiki:Contact Us">Contact Us</a></li>
<li id="footer-places-about"><a href="https://usermanual.wiki/DMCA" title="UserManual.wiki:DMCA">DMCA</a></li>
</ul>
<ul id="footer-icons" class="noprint">
<li id="footer-poweredbyico">
</li>
</ul>
</div>
</div></body></html>
<script src="/cdn-cgi/scripts/7d0fa10a/cloudflare-static/rocket-loader.min.js" data-cf-settings="a97ef9a33d828221bf6856e5-|49" defer></script>